Document:

Third Amendment Deed, dated May 27, 2011

 Exhibit 4.7 
 THIRD AMENDMENT DEED 
  

	To:	Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited 

 (“VMIH”) 
 Virgin Media Limited 

Virgin Media Wholesale Limited 
 VMIH Sub Limited 
 Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited 

(together, the “Borrowers”) 
 Virgin Media Finance PLC 
 Media House, Bartley Wood Business Park 

Hook, Hampshire 

RG27 9UP 

27 May 2011 
 Dear Sirs,

 Third Amendment Deed 
 This
Deed is made on the date above and is supplemental to the senior facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 as amended on 26 March 2010 by a First Amendment Letter and on 15 February 2011 by a Second Amendment Letter between, among
others, Virgin Media Inc., as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC, as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited, Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited, as Original
Borrowers, the Original Lenders and the other parties thereto (the “Senior Facilities Agreement”). 
 Save as defined in this
Deed, words and expressions defined in the Senior Facilities Agreement (in the form of Schedule 2 to this Deed) shall have the same meanings when used in this Deed. 
 In this Deed “Third Amendment Effective Date” means the date upon which the Facility Agent notifies VMIH that it has received all the documents and other evidence listed in Schedule 1
(Conditions Precedent) to this Deed in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably. Each of the parties hereto confirms that this Deed constitutes a Relevant Finance Document for the purposes of the Senior
Facilities Agreement. 
  

	1.	 On and with effect from the Third Amendment Effective Date each of the Ultimate Parent, the Borrowers and Virgin Media Finance PLC represent and
warrant that it is a company duly organised and validly existing under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation with power to enter into this Deed and to exercise its rights and perform its

	 	
obligations hereunder and all corporate and other action required to authorise its execution of this Deed and its performance of its obligations have been duly taken. 

 

	2.	VMIH agrees, pursuant to Clause 39.4 (Amendments, Consents and Waivers) of the Senior Facilities Agreement, to reimburse the Facility Agent on demand for all
reasonable third-party out-of-pocket costs and expenses (together with VAT or any similar tax), including, without limitation, the reasonable fees and expenses of the Facility Agent’s legal advisers, incurred in connection with the negotiation,
preparation and execution of this Deed (including its Schedules). 

  

	3.	On and with effect from the Third Amendment Effective Date, the parties agree that the Senior Facilities Agreement shall be amended and restated in the form attached in
Schedule 2 to this Deed. 

  

	4.	On and with effect from the Third Amendment Effective Date, the parties agree that the Group Intercreditor Agreement shall be amended by deleting the definition of
“Hedging Arrangements” in clause 1.2 (Definitions) thereof and replacing it with the following: 

““Hedging Arrangements” means any hedging arrangement entered into under a “Hedging Agreement” as defined
in and permitted under the Senior Facilities Agreement or, upon its repayment in full and cancellation of all undrawn commitments thereunder, the Designated Refinancing Facilities Agreement and which are entered into by any Obligor and are
documented by one or more Hedging Agreements.” 
  

	5.	The Obligors’ Agent confirms, on behalf of itself and the other Guarantors, that on and after the Third Amendment Effective Date, the provisions of the guarantees
contained in Clause 29 (Guarantee and Indemnity) of the Senior Facilities Agreement shall remain in full force and effect and shall apply equally to the obligations of each of the Borrowers in this Deed as if set out in full in this Deed,
save that references in the Senior Facilities Agreement to “this Agreement” shall be construed as references to the Senior Facilities Agreement as amended by this Deed. 

 

	6.	The Facility Agent confirms that it is authorised to make the amendment and restatement of the Senior Facilities Agreement in the form attached as Schedule 2 to this
Deed under Clauses 44.1 (Amendments Generally), 44.2 (Consents) and/or 44.3 (Technical Amendments) of the Senior Facilities Agreement, as applicable. 

 

	7.	The Facility Agent and VMIH each confirm that it is authorised to make the amendment to the Group Intercreditor Agreement effected by paragraph 4 above under clause
21.2 (Amendments) and/or 21.3 (Technical Amendments) to the Group Intercreditor Agreement, as applicable. 

  

	8.	Save as expressly amended by this Deed, the provisions of the Relevant Finance Documents shall continue in full force and effect. 

 

	9.	The Senior Facilities Agreement and this Deed shall be read and construed as one instrument. 

	10.	On and with effect from the Third Amendment Effective Date: 

  

	 	(a)	references in the Senior Facilities Agreement to “this Agreement” shall, unless the context otherwise requires, be construed as references to the Senior
Facilities Agreement as amended by this Deed; and 

  

	 	(b)	references in the Group Intercreditor Agreement to “this Deed” shall, unless the context otherwise requires, be construed as references to the Group
Intercreditor Agreement as amended by this Deed. 

  

	11.	This Deed may be executed in counterparts each of which, when taken together, shall constitute one and the same agreement. 

 

	12.	Save as expressly provided otherwise in this Deed, a person who is not a party to this Deed may not rely on it and the terms of the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties)
Act 1999 are excluded. The parties to this Deed may amend this Deed in writing without the consent of any third party. 

  

	13.	This Deed and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by and shall be construed in accordance with English law and the
provisions of Clause 48 (Jurisdiction) of the Senior Facilities Agreement shall be deemed to be incorporated in this Deed in full, mutatis mutandis, save that references to “this Agreement” shall be construed as references to
the Senior Facilities Agreement as amended pursuant to this Deed. 

 IN WITNESS whereof this Deed has been duly executed and
delivered as a Deed on the date first written above. 

									
	 Yours faithfully
  

EXECUTED as a DEED
 for and on behalf of

 DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH
  

as Facility Agent for and on behalf of itself and the other Finance Parties
	 		 	
					
	By:	 	/s/ Roisin McKenna        	 		 	By:	 	/s/ R. Thakeria        
		 	authorised signatory	 		 		 	authorised signatory
	Name:	 	Roisin McKenna	 		 	Name:	 	R. Thankeria
	Title:	 	AVP	 		 	Title:	 	AVP

			
	 THE ULTIMATE PARENT
  

EXECUTED as a DEED
 for and on behalf
of
 VIRGIN MEDIA INC.
 as
Ultimate Parent

		
	By:	 	/s/ SCOTT DRESSER
	Name:	 	Scott Dresser
	Title:	 	Secretary

									
	 THE PARENT
  

EXECUTED as a DEED
 for and on behalf
of
 VIRGIN MEDIA FINANCE PLC
	  	)
)
)
)
	  	/s/ ROBERT MACKENZIE                    	  	 

  

					
			
	 In the presence of:
	  		  	
			
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA LEE	  	
			
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE	  	
			
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE	  	
			
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK	  	
			
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP	  	

 THE ORIGINAL BORROWERS 

 

					
	EXECUTED as a DEED	  	)	  	
	for and on behalf of	  	)	  	
	VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT	  	)	  	/S/ ROBERT
MACKENZIE                                        
        
	HOLDINGS LIMITED	  	)	  	

  

			
	 In the presence of:
	  	
		
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA
LEE                                         
               
		
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE
		
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE
		
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK
		
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP

  

					
	EXECUTED as a DEED	  	)	  	
	for and on behalf of	  	)	  	
	 VIRGIN MEDIA LIMITED
	  	)	  	/S/ ROBERT
MACKENZIE                                        
        
		  	)	  	

  

			
	 In the presence of:
	  	
		
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA
LEE                                         
               
		
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE
		
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE
		
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK
		
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP

					
	EXECUTED as a DEED	  	)	  	
	for and on behalf of	  	)	  	
	VIRGIN MEDIA WHOLESALE	  	)	  	/S/ ROBERT
MACKENZIE                                        
        
	LIMITED	  	)	  	

  

			
	 In the presence of:
	  	
		
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA
LEE                                         
               
		
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE
		
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE
		
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK
		
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP

  

					
	EXECUTED as a DEED	  	)	  	
	for and on behalf of	  	)	  	
	 VMIH SUB LIMITED
	  	)	  	/S/ ROBERT
MACKENZIE                                        
        
		  	)	  	

  

			
	 In the presence of:
	  	
		
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA
LEE                                         
               
		
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE
		
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE
		
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK
		
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP

					
	EXECUTED as a DEED	  	)	  	
	for and on behalf of	  	)	  	
	VIRGIN MEDIA SFA FINANCE	  	)	  	/S/ ROBERT
MACKENZIE                                        
        
	LIMITED	  	)	  	

  

			
	 In the presence of:
	  	
		
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA
LEE                                         
               
		
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE
		
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE
		
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK
		
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP

 THE OBLIGORS’ AGENT 

 

					
	EXECUTED as a DEED	  	)	  	
	for and on behalf of	  	)	  	
	 VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT
	  	)	  	/S/ ROBERT
MACKENZIE                                        
        
	HOLDINGS LIMITED	  	)	  	

  

			
	 In the presence of:
	  	
		
	 Witness’s signature:
	  	/s/ LINDA
LEE                                         
               
		
	 Name:
	  	LINDA LEE
		
	 Address:
	  	MEDIA HOUSE
		
		  	BARTLEY WOOD BUSINESS PARK
		
		  	HOOK HAMPSHIRE RG27 9UP

 SCHEDULE 1 
 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT 
  

	1.	In relation to VMIH a duly completed certificate of a duly authorised officer of VMIH certifying that each Officer’s certificate delivered on 19 May 2011
pursuant to: 

  

	 	(a)	the Additional Facility Accession Deed dated 20 May 2011 entered into pursuant to Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility) of the Senior Facilities Agreement
pursuant to which the Additional Facility Lenders have agreed to make available to the Original Borrowers an Additional Term Facility; and 

  

	 	(b)	the Additional Facility Accession Deed dated 20 May 2011 entered into pursuant to Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility) of the Senior Facilities Agreement
pursuant to which the Additional Facility Lenders have agreed to make available an Additional Revolving Facility, 

remains accurate on the date hereof and, in particular, each of (i) the statements in those Officer’s Certificates, and
(ii) the exhibits to those Officer’s Certificates, remain true, correct and complete and have not been amended, superseded or rescinded. 
  

	2.	Additional Facility 

Evidence that the Additional Facility made available to the Company pursuant to the Additional Facility Accession Deed (Term Loan) dated
20 May 2011 has been used to prepay in full all Lenders except for those Lenders participating in the Additional Facility. 
  

	3.	Waivers and consents 

Evidence that all required waivers and/or consents to the amendments contemplated by this Third Amendment Deed have been obtained.

  

	4.	Legal Opinions 

 An
opinion of: 
  

	 	(a)	Latham & Watkins (London) LLP, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of English law, addressed to the Finance Parties
and in substantially the form agreed prior to the Third Amendment Effective Date; and 

  

	 	(b)	Milbank, Tweed, Hadley & McCloy LLP, New York legal advisers to the Obligors on matters of New York law, addressed to the Finance Parties and in substantially
the form agreed prior to the Third Amendment Effective Date. 

  

	5.	Expenses 

 Evidence that
all expenses due and payable in connection with this Deed have been paid. 

 SCHEDULE 2 
 AMENDED SENIOR FACILITIES AGREEMENT 

 Senior Facilities Agreement 

Virgin Media Inc. 
 as Ultimate Parent 
 Virgin Media Finance PLC 

as Parent 

Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited 
 Virgin Media Limited 
 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited 

VMIH Sub Limited 
 Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited 
 as Original Borrowers 

The Original Guarantors 
 Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch 
 BNP Paribas London Branch

 as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners 
 Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch 
 BNP Paribas London Branch

 Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank 

GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS 
 Goldman Sachs International 
 J.P. Morgan PLC 

Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets 
 Merrill Lynch International 
 The Royal Bank of Scotland plc

 UBS Limited 
 as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers 
 Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch

 as Facility Agent and Security Trustee 
 The Lenders 
 and 

Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch 
 as Original L/C Bank 
 Dated 16 March 2010 as amended and restated on
26 March 2010, 
 15 February 2011 and 27 May 2011 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 

							
			
	1.	  	DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION	  	 	2	  
			
	2.	  	THE FACILITIES	  	 	61	  
			
	3.	  	CONDITIONS	  	 	67	  
			
	4.	  	UTILISATION	  	 	68	  
			
	5.	  	DOCUMENTARY CREDITS	  	 	70	  
			
	6.	  	ANCILLARY FACILITIES	  	 	76	  
			
	7.	  	OPTIONAL CURRENCIES	  	 	81	  
			
	8.	  	REPAYMENT OF REVOLVING FACILITY OUTSTANDINGS	  	 	82	  
			
	9.	  	REPAYMENT OF TERM FACILITY OUTSTANDINGS	  	 	83	  
			
	10.	  	CANCELLATION	  	 	84	  
			
	11.	  	VOLUNTARY PREPAYMENT	  	 	86	  
			
	12.	  	MANDATORY PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION	  	 	88	  
			
	13.	  	INTEREST ON REVOLVING FACILITY ADVANCES	  	 	89	  
			
	14.	  	INTEREST ON TERM FACILITY ADVANCES	  	 	91	  
			
	15.	  	MARKET DISRUPTION AND ALTERNATIVE INTEREST RATES	  	 	94	  
			
	16.	  	COMMISSIONS AND FEES	  	 	96	  
			
	17.	  	TAXES	  	 	97	  
			
	18.	  	INCREASED COSTS	  	 	102	  
			
	19.	  	ILLEGALITY	  	 	104	  
			
	20.	  	MITIGATION	  	 	105	  
			
	21.	  	REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES	  	 	105	  
			
	22.	  	FINANCIAL INFORMATION	  	 	113	  
			
	23.	  	FINANCIAL CONDITION	  	 	119	  
			
	24.	  	POSITIVE UNDERTAKINGS	  	 	128	  
			
	25.	  	NEGATIVE UNDERTAKINGS	  	 	136	  
			
	26.	  	ACCEDING GROUP COMPANIES	  	 	159	  
			
	27.	  	EVENTS OF DEFAULT	  	 	161	  

  
 (i)

							
			
	28.	  	DEFAULT INTEREST	  	 	165	  
			
	29.	  	GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY	  	 	166	  
			
	30.	  	ROLE OF THE FACILITY AGENT, THE ARRANGERS, THE L/C BANKS AND OTHERS	  	 	170	  
			
	31.	  	BORROWERS’ INDEMNITIES	  	 	177	  
			
	32.	  	CURRENCY OF ACCOUNT	  	 	178	  
			
	33.	  	PAYMENTS	  	 	179	  
			
	34.	  	SET-OFF	  	 	181	  
			
	35.	  	SHARING AMONG THE RELEVANT FINANCE PARTIES	  	 	182	  
			
	36.	  	CALCULATIONS AND ACCOUNTS	  	 	183	  
			
	37.	  	ASSIGNMENTS AND TRANSFERS	  	 	185	  
			
	38.	  	DEBT PURCHASE TRANSACTIONS	  	 	191	  
			
	39.	  	COSTS AND EXPENSES	  	 	193	  
			
	40.	  	REMEDIES AND WAIVERS	  	 	195	  
			
	41.	  	NOTICES AND DELIVERY OF INFORMATION	  	 	195	  
			
	42.	  	ENGLISH LANGUAGE	  	 	198	  
			
	43.	  	PARTIAL INVALIDITY	  	 	198	  
			
	44.	  	AMENDMENTS	  	 	198	  
			
	45.	  	THIRD PARTY RIGHTS	  	 	202	  
			
	46.	  	COUNTERPARTS	  	 	202	  
			
	47.	  	GOVERNING LAW	  	 	202	  
			
	48.	  	JURISDICTION	  	 	202	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 1
	  	 	204	  
			
		  	PART 1 - LENDERS AND COMMITMENTS	  	 	204	  
			
		  	PART 2 - LENDERS TAX STATUS	  	 	205	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 2
	  	 	206	  
			
		  	PART 1 - THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS	  	 	206	  
			
		  	PART 2 - THE RESTRICTED GUARANTORS	  	 	217	  
			
		  	PART 3 - MEMBERS OF THE BANK GROUP	  	 	220	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 3
	  	 	234	  

  
 (ii)

							
			
		  	PART 1 - CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO FIRST UTILISATION	  	 	234	  
			
		  	PART 2 - CONDITIONS SUBSEQUENT DOCUMENTS	  	 	238	  
			
		  	PART 3 - FORM OF OFFICER’S CERTIFICATE	  	 	239	  
		
	SCHEDULE 4	  	 	241	  
			
		  	PART 1 - FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST (ADVANCES)	  	 	241	  
			
		  	PART 2 - FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST (DOCUMENTARY CREDITS)	  	 	243	  
		
	SCHEDULE 5	  	 	245	  
			
		  	 PART 1 - FORM OF DEED OF TRANSFER AND ACCESSION
	  	 	245	  
			
		  	 PART 2 - FORM OF B FACILITY ACCESSION DEED
	  	 	251	  
			
		  	 PART 3 - FORM OF ACCESSION NOTICE
	  	 	256	  
			
		  	 PART 4 - ACCESSION DOCUMENTS
	  	 	260	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 6
	  	 	262	  
			
		  	 PART 1 - FORM OF ADDITIONAL FACILITY ACCESSION DEED
	  	 	262	  
			
		  	 PART 2 - CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO ADDITIONAL FACILITY UTILISATION
	  	 	267	  
			
		  	 PART 3 - FORM OF ADDITIONAL FACILITY OFFICER’S CERTIFICATE
	  	 	268	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 7 MANDATORY COST FORMULA
	  	 	269	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 8 FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
	  	 	272	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 9 ORIGINAL SECURITY DOCUMENTS
	  	 	274	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 10
	  	 	278	  
			
		  	 PART 1 - EXISTING ENCUMBRANCES
	  	 	278	  
			
		  	 PART 2 - EXISTING LOANS
	  	 	286	  
			
		  	 PART 3 - EXISTING FINANCIAL INDEBTEDNESS
	  	 	288	  
			
		  	 PART 4 - EXISTING PERFORMANCE BONDS
	  	 	290	  
			
		  	 PART 5 - EXISTING UKTV GROUP LOAN STOCK
	  	 	292	  
			
		  	 PART 6 - EXISTING HEDGE COUNTERPARTIES
	  	 	293	  
			
		  	 PART 7 - EXISTING VENDOR FINANCING ARRANGEMENTS
	  	 	294	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 11 FORM OF L/C BANK ACCESSION CERTIFICATE
	  	 	295	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 12 FORM OF DOCUMENTARY CREDIT
	  	 	297	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 13 FORM OF INCREASE CONFIRMATION
	  	 	300	  

  
 (iii)

							
		
	 SCHEDULE 14 FORM OF NOTIFIABLE DEBT PURCHASE TRANSACTION NOTICE
	  	 	303	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 15 FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER
	  	 	304	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 16 PRO FORMA BANK GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
	  	 	305	  
		
	 SCHEDULE 17 PRO FORMA BUDGET INFORMATION
	  	 	308	  

  
 (iv)

 THIS AGREEMENT is dated 16 March 2010 as amended and restated on 26 March 2010 and
15 February 2011. 
 BETWEEN: 
  

	(1)	VIRGIN MEDIA INC., a company incorporated in the State of Delaware, United States of America, whose principal executive offices are located at 909 Third Avenue,
Suite 2863, New York, NY 10022, United States of America (the “Ultimate Parent”); 

  

	(2)	VIRGIN MEDIA FINANCE PLC, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5061787 and having its registered office at 160 Great Portland
Street, London W1W 5QA (the “Parent”); 

  

	(3)	VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT HOLDINGS LIMITED, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 3173552 and having its registered office at 160
Great Portland Street, London W1W 5QA (“VMIH”); 

  

	(4)	VIRGIN MEDIA LIMITED, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 2591237 and having its registered office at 160 Great Portland Street,
London W1W 5QA; 

  

	(5)	VIRGIN MEDIA WHOLESALE LIMITED (formerly Telewest Communications Group Limited), a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 2514287 and
having its registered office at 160 Great Portland Street, London W1W 5QA (“VM Wholesale”); 

  

	(6)	VMIH SUB LIMITED, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 5316140 and having its registered office at 160 Great Portland Street,
London W1W 5QA (“VMIH Sub”); 

  

	(7)	VIRGIN MEDIA SFA FINANCE LIMITED, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 7176280 and having its registered office at 160 Great
Portland Street, London W1W 5QA (“UK Newco”); 

  

	(8)	THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS (as defined below); 

  

	(9)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH and BNP PARIBAS LONDON BRANCH (each a “Physical Bookrunner” and together, the “Physical
Bookrunners”); 

  

	(10)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH and BNP PARIBAS LONDON BRANCH (each a “Global Coordinator” and together, the “Global
Coordinators”); 

  

	(11)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH BNP PARIBAS LONDON BRANCH, CRÉDIT AGRICOLE CORPORATE AND INVESTMENT BANK, GE CORPORATE FINANCE BANK SAS, GOLDMAN
SACHS INTERNATIONAL, J.P. MORGAN PLC, LLOYDS TSB CORPORATE MARKETS, MERRILL LYNCH INTERNATIONAL, THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC and UBS LIMITED (each a “Bookrunner” and together, the
“Bookrunners”); 

  

	(12)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH BNP PARIBAS LONDON BRANCH, CRÉDIT AGRICOLE CORPORATE AND INVESTMENT BANK, GE CORPORATE FINANCE BANK SAS, GOLDMAN
SACHS INTERNATIONAL, J.P. MORGAN PLC, LLOYDS TSB CORPORATE MARKETS, MERRILL LYNCH INTERNATIONAL, THE ROYAL BANK OF SCOTLAND PLC and UBS LIMITED (each a “Mandated Lead Arranger” and together,
the “Mandated Lead Arrangers”); 

  
 1 

	(13)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH (as agent for and on behalf of the Relevant Finance Parties, the “Facility Agent”); 

 

	(14)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH (as security trustee for and on behalf of the Relevant Finance Parties, the “Security Trustee”);

  

	(15)	THE LENDERS (as defined below); and 

  

	(16)	DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH as L/C Bank (the “Original L/C Bank”). 

 

	1.	DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION 

  

	1.1	Definitions 

 In this
Agreement the following terms have the meanings set out below. 
 “2014 High Yield Notes” means the Sterling
denominated 9.75% senior notes due 2014, the dollar denominated 8.75% senior notes due 2014 and the euro denominated 8.75% senior notes due 2014, in each case, issued by the Parent. 

“2016 High Yield Notes” means the 9.125% dollar denominated senior notes due 2016, the 9.50% dollar denominated senior
notes due 2016 and the 9.50% euro denominated senior notes due 2016, in each case, issued by the Parent. 
 “80% Security
Test” means, subject to Clause 24.12 (Further Assurance), the requirement that, save as otherwise provided in Clause 24.12 (Further Assurance), members of the Bank Group generating not less than 80% of Consolidated
Operating Cashflow (excluding for the purposes of this calculation, any Consolidated Net Income attributable to any Joint Venture) have acceded as Guarantors to this Agreement and, in each case, granted Security pursuant to the Security Documents
over all or substantially all of its assets, as tested by reference to each set of annual financial information relating to the Bank Group delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements). 

“A Facility” means the term loan facility granted to the Original Borrowers pursuant to Clause 2.1(a) (The
Facilities). 
 “A Facility Fee Letter” means the letter dated on or about the Original Execution Date from
the Original Lenders to the Company in relation to the fees payable for providing the A Facility. 
 “A Facility
Margin” means, in relation to A Facility Advances, and subject to Clause 14.6 (Margin Ratchet for A Facility Advances, A1 Facility Advances and A2 Facility Advances), 3.50% per annum. 

“A Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate principal amount of the A Facility Advances outstanding under
this Agreement. 
 “A Facility Repayment Instalment” shall have the meaning given to such term in
Clause 9.1 (Repayment of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings) hereof. 

“A1 Facility” means the term loan facility granted to the Original Borrowers pursuant to Clause 2.1(a) (The
Facilities). 
 “A1 Facility Margin” means, in relation to A1 Facility Advances, and subject to Clause 14.6
(Margin Ratchet for A Facility Advances and A1 Facility Advances), 3.50% per annum. 

  
 2 

 “A1 Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate principal
amount of the A1 Facility Advances outstanding under this Agreement. 
 “A1 Facility Repayment Instalment” shall
have the meaning given to such term in Clause 9.1 (Repayment of A Facility Outstandings and A1 Facility Outstandings). 

“A2 Facility” means the term loan facility granted to the Original Borrowers pursuant to Clause 2.1(a) (The
Facilities). 
 “A2 Facility Margin” means, in relation to A2 Facility Advances, and subject to Clause 14.6
(Margin Ratchet for A Facility Advances, A1 Facility Advances and A2 Facility Advances), 3.50% per annum. 

“A2 Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate principal amount of the A2 Facility Advances outstanding
under this Agreement. 
 “A2 Facility Repayment Instalment” shall have the meaning given to such term in Clause
9.1 (Repayment of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings). 
 “Acceding
Borrower” means a member of the Bank Group which has complied with the requirements of Clause 26.1 (Acceding Borrowers). 
 “Acceding Group Company” means an Acceding Borrower, an Acceding Guarantor or an Acceding Holding Company, as the context may require. 

“Acceding Guarantor” means any member of the Bank Group which has complied with the requirements of Clause 26.2
(Acceding Guarantors). 
 “Acceding Holding Company” means any person which becomes the Holding Company
of the Ultimate Parent and which has complied with the requirements of Clause 26.3 (Acceding Holding Company). 

“Acceding Obligors” means the Acceding Borrowers and the Acceding Guarantors. 

“Acceleration Date” means the date on which a written notice has been served under Clause 27.17
(Acceleration). 
 “Acceptable Bank” means: 

 

	 	(a)	a bank or financial institution which has a rating for its long-term unsecured and non credit-enhanced debt obligations of A- or higher by Standard &
Poor’s Rating Services or Fitch Ratings Ltd or A3 or higher by Moody’s Investor Services Limited or a comparable rating from an internationally recognised credit rating agency; or 

 

	 	(b)	any other bank or financial institution approved by the Facility Agent (in consultation with the Company). 

“Acceptable Hedging Agreement” means a Hedging Agreement entered into on the terms of the 1992 ISDA Master Agreement
(Multicurrency-Cross Border) or the 2002 ISDA Master Agreement, each as published by ISDA, under which: 
  

	 	(a)	if the 1992 Master Agreement is used, “Second Method” and either “Loss” or “Market Quotation” are specified as the payment method
applicable; 

  

	 	(b)	if the 2002 Master Agreement is used, the relevant agreement provides for two way payments; 

  
 3 

	 	(c)	the governing Law is English or New York Law; and 

  

	 	(d)	no credit support annex or credit support deed, each as published by ISDA, or other collateral posting provisions are incorporated. 

“Accession Notice” means a duly completed notice of accession in the form of Part 3 of Schedule 5 (Form of Accession
Notice) with such changes as may be agreed between the Company and the Agent from time to time. 
 “Accrued
Amounts” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 37.14 (Pro Rata Interest Settlement). 

“Acquiree” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.13(m) (Acquisitions and Investments). 

“Act” means the Companies Act 2006 (as amended). 
 “Additional Assets” means any property, stock or other assets to be used by any member of the Bank Group in the Group Business or any business whose primary operations are directly
related to the Group Business. 
 “Additional Facility” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 2.6
(Additional Facility). 
 “Additional Facility Accession Deed” means an agreement in the form of Part 1
of Schedule 6. 
 “Additional Facility Availability Period” means, in relation to an Additional Facility, the
period specified in the Additional Facility Accession Deed for that Additional Facility. 
 “Additional Facility
Borrower” means any Borrower which becomes a borrower under any Additional Facility. 
 “Additional Facility
Commencement Date” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility). 
 “Additional
Facility Lender” means a person which becomes a Lender under any Additional Facility in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 
 “Additional Facility Margin” means, in relation to any Additional Facility, the margin specified in and, if applicable, adjusted in accordance with the relevant Additional Facility
Accession Deed. 
 “Additional Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate principal amount of any
Additional Facility Advances outstanding under this Agreement. 
 “Additional High Yield Notes” means any notes
where the incurrence of any Financial Indebtedness under such notes would not result in the pro forma Leverage Ratio (after giving effect to such incurrence and the use of proceeds thereof) on the Quarter Date prior to such incurrence (giving pro
forma effect to any movement of cash out of the Bank Group since such date pursuant to Clause 25.5 (Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital) and any Permitted Payments) exceeding the ratio set out in Clause 25.4(p) (Financial
Indebtedness) for the Quarter Date following such incurrence and: 
  

	 	(a)	that are issued by the Parent or the Ultimate Parent after the Original Execution Date pursuant to an Additional High Yield Offering; 

  
 4 

	 	(b)	having a final maturity (with no sinking fund payments) of no earlier than 31 December 2015; 

 

	 	(c)	in respect of which the “cross-default” event of default with respect to a default under other indebtedness shall be limited to cross-default to any payment
default or cross-acceleration; 

  

	 	(d)	that are unsecured, except that where such Additional High Yield Notes are issued by the Ultimate Parent, they may be secured by a pledge of the shares in the Parent or
one of its parent companies if such Additional High Yield Notes are unable to receive the benefit of the subordinated guarantees of the Company and/or Intermediate Holdco contemplated by paragraph (e) below, for tax or other reasons as
reasonably determined by the Company; 

  

	 	(e)	that, if guaranteed, are not guaranteed by any member of the Bank Group other than the Company and/or Intermediate Holdco, provided that any such guarantee or
guarantees so provided are (i) granted on subordination and release terms substantially the same as the existing guarantees of the Company and Intermediate Holdco in favour of the Existing High Yield Notes and (ii) subject to the terms of
the HYD Intercreditor Agreement or a Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement; and 

  

	 	(f)	that are designated as “Additional High Yield Notes” and “Parent Debt” by written notice from the Company to the Facility Agent and the Security
Trustee by the date when the consolidated financial statements are due to be provided pursuant to clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statements) for the first full Financial Quarter after the issuance of the relevant notes. 

“Additional High Yield Offering” means one or more offerings of the Additional High Yield Notes on a registration
statement filed with the SEC or pursuant to an exemption from registration under the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended, including pursuant to Rule 144A and/or Regulation S under the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

 “Additional Senior Secured Notes” means any notes where the incurrence of any Financial Indebtedness under
such notes would not result in (i) the pro forma Leverage Ratio (giving effect to such incurrence and the use of proceeds thereof) on the Quarter Date prior to such incurrence (giving pro forma effect to any movement of cash out of the Bank
Group since such date pursuant to Clause 25.5 (Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital) and any Permitted Payments) exceeding the ratio set out in Clause 25.4(p) (Financial Indebtedness) for the Quarter Date following such
incurrence and (ii) the pro forma ratio of Consolidated Senior Net Debt (giving effect to such incurrence and the use of proceeds thereof and giving pro forma effect to any movement of cash out of the Bank Group since such date pursuant to
Clause 25.5 (Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital) and any Permitted Payments) to Consolidated Operating Cashflow for the Quarter Date prior to such incurrence exceeding the ratio set out in Clause 25.2(o) (Negative Pledge)
for the Quarter Date following such incurrence and: 
  

	 	(a)	that are issued by the Parent, VMIH or any SSN Finance Subsidiary after the Original Execution Date; 

 

	 	(b)	having a final maturity (with no sinking fund payments) of no earlier than 31 December 2015; 

 

	 	(c)	in respect of which the “cross-default” event of default with respect to a default under other indebtedness shall be limited to cross-default to any payment
default or cross-acceleration; 

  
 5 

	 	(d)	in respect of which some or all of the Obligors have granted security and guarantees on the terms specified in the Group Intercreditor Agreement and substantially the
same as to the Existing Senior Secured Notes; and 

  

	 	(e)	that are designated as (i) “Senior Secured Notes” by written notice from the Company to the Facility Agent, (ii) “New Senior Liabilities”
under the Group Intercreditor Agreement by written notice from the Company to the Facility Agent and the Security Trustee, and (iii) “Designated Senior Liabilities” under the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, in each case, by the date when
the consolidated financial statements are due to be provided pursuant to clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statements) for the first full Financial Quarter after the issuance of the relevant notes. 

“Adjusted Excess Cashflow” means Excess Cashflow multiplied by the Relevant Proportion. 

“Advance” means: 
  

	 	(a)	when designated “A Facility”, the principal amount of each advance made or to be made under the A Facility or arising in respect of the A Facility
under Clause 14.3 (Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances); 

  

	 	(b)	when designated “A1 Facility”, the principal amount of each advance arising in respect of the A1 Facility under Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date)
or under Clause 14.3 (Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances); 

  

	 	(c)	when designated “A2 Facility”, the principal amount of each advance arising in respect of the A2 Facility under Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date)
or under Clause 14.3 (Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances); 

  

	 	(d)	when designated “B Facility”, the principal amount of each advance made or to be made under a B Facility or arising in respect of a B Facility under
Clause 14.3 (Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances); 

  

	 	(e)	when designated “B1 Facility”, the principal amount of each advance arising in respect of the B1 Facility under Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date)
or under Clause 14.3 (Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances); 

  

	 	(f)	when designated “Revolving Facility”, the principal amount of each advance made or to be made under the Revolving Facility (but excluding for the
purposes of this definition, any utilisation of the Revolving Facility by way of Ancillary Facility or Documentary Credit); 

  

	 	(g)	when designated “Additional Facility”, the principal amount of each advance made or to be made under an Additional Facility or arising in respect of an
Additional Facility under Clause 14.3 (Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances); or 

  

	 	(h)	without any such designation, the “A Facility Advance”, the “A1 Facility Advance”, the “A2 Facility Advance”, the
“Additional Facility Advance”, the “B Facility Advance”, the “B1 Facility Advance” and/or the “Revolving Facility Advance”, as the context requires, 

in each case as from time to time reduced by repayment or prepayment. 

“Affected Documentary Credit” has the meaning given to such terms in Clause 19.2 (Illegality in Relation to an L/C
Bank). 

  
 6 

 “Affiliate” means, in relation to a person, any other person directly or
indirectly controlling, controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with that person, and for these purposes “control” shall be construed so as to mean the ownership, either directly or indirectly and legally or beneficially,
of more than 50% of the issued share capital of a company or the ability to control, either directly or indirectly, the affairs or the composition of the board of directors (or equivalent of it) of a company and “controlling”,
“controlled by” and “under common control with” shall be construed accordingly. 
 “Agreed Business
Plan” means the business plan, financial model and analysis of the future funding requirements of the Company and the Bank Group prepared by the Company and delivered to the Global Coordinators, in the agreed form, prior to the initial
Utilisation Date. 
 “Alternative Market Disruption Event” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 15.2(c)
(Market Disruption). 
 “Alternative Reference Bank Rate” has the meaning given to such term in Clause
15.3(b) (Alternative Reference Bank Rate). 
 “Alternative Reference Banks” means, in relation to an
Advance in a currency other than euro, the principal London offices of JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. and The Royal Bank of Scotland and, in relation to an Advance in euro, the principal offices in London of Crédit Agricole or such other banks as
may be appointed by the Facility Agent with the consent of the Company. 
 “Amendment Execution Date” means
15 February 2011. 
 “Amortisation Repayment Date” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 9.1
(Repayment of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings). 
 “Ancillary
Facility” means any: 
  

	 	(a)	overdraft, automated payment, cheque drawing or other current account facility; 

 

	 	(b)	forward foreign exchange facility; 

  

	 	(c)	derivatives facility; 

  

	 	(d)	guarantee, bond issuance, documentary or stand-by letter of credit facility; 

 

	 	(e)	performance bond facility; and/or 

  

	 	(f)	such other facility or financial accommodation as may be required in connection with the Group Business and which is agreed in writing between the relevant Borrowers
and the relevant Ancillary Facility Lender. 

 “Ancillary Facility Commitment” means, in relation
to an Ancillary Facility Lender at any time, and save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, the maximum Sterling Amount to be made available under an Ancillary Facility granted by it, to the extent not cancelled or reduced or transferred pursuant
to the terms of such Ancillary Facility or under this Agreement. 
 “Ancillary Facility Documents” means the
documents and other instruments pursuant to which an Ancillary Facility is made available and the Ancillary Facility Outstandings under it are evidenced. 

  
 7 

 “Ancillary Facility Lender” means any Lender which has notified the
Facility Agent that it has agreed to its nomination in a Conversion Notice to be an Ancillary Facility Lender in respect of an Ancillary Facility granted pursuant to the terms of this Agreement. 

“Ancillary Facility Outstandings” means (without double counting), at any time with respect to an Ancillary Facility
Lender and each Ancillary Facility provided by it, the aggregate of: 
  

	 	(a)	all amounts of principal then outstanding under any overdraft, automated payment, cheque drawing or other current account facility (determined in accordance with the
applicable terms) as at such time; and 

  

	 	(b)	in respect of any other facility or financial accommodation, such other amount as fairly represents the aggregate potential exposure of that Ancillary Facility Lender
with respect to it under its Ancillary Facility, as reasonably determined by that Ancillary Facility Lender from time to time in accordance with its usual banking practices for facilities or accommodation of the relevant type (including without
limitation, the calculation of exposure under any derivatives facility by reference to the mark-to-market valuation of such transaction at the relevant time). 

 “Ancillary Facility Termination Date” has the meaning given to such term in paragraph (g) of Clause 6.1 (Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities). 

“Anti-Terrorism Laws” mean: 
  

	 	(a)	Executive Order No. 13224 of September 23, 2001 - Blocking Property and Prohibiting Transactions With Persons Who Commit, Threaten To Commit, or Support
Terrorism (the “Executive Order”); 

  

	 	(b)	the Uniting and Strengthening of America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001, Public Law 107-56 (commonly known as
the USA Patriot Act); and 

  

	 	(c)	the Money Laundering Control Act of 1986, Public Law 99-570. 

 “Applicable Margin” means, at any time, the prevailing A Facility Margin, A1 Facility Margin, A2 Facility Margin, Additional Facility Margin, B Facility Margin, B1 Facility Margin or
Revolving Facility Margin, as the context may require at the relevant time. 
 “Arrangers” means the Global
Coordinators, the Physical Bookrunners and the Mandated Lead Arrangers and “Arranger” means any of them. 

“Asset Passthrough” means a series of transactions between a Bank Holdco, one or more members of the Bank Group and an
Asset Transferring Party where: 
  

	 	(a)	in the case of an asset being transferred by a Bank Holdco to the Asset Transferring Party that asset: 

 

	 	(i)	is first transferred by such Bank Holdco to a member of the Bank Group; and 

 

	 	(ii)	may then be transferred between various members of the Bank Group, and is finally transferred (insofar as such transaction relates to the Bank Group) to an Asset
Transferring Party; or 

  

	 	(b)	in the case of an asset being transferred by an Asset Transferring Party to a Bank Holdco, that asset: 

  
 8 

	 	(i)	is first transferred by that Asset Transferring Party to a member of the Bank Group; and 

 

	 	(ii)	may then be transferred between various members of the Bank Group, and is finally transferred (insofar as such transaction relates to the Bank Group) to such Bank
Holdco, 

 and where the purpose of each such asset transfer is, in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type
described in paragraph (a) above, to enable a Bank Holdco to indirectly transfer assets (other than cash) to that Asset Transferring Party and, in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (b) above, is to enable
an Asset Transferring Party to indirectly transfer assets (other than cash) to a Bank Holdco, in either case, by way of transfers of those assets to and from (and, if necessary, between) one or more members of the Bank Group in such a manner as to
be neutral to the Bank Group taken as a whole provided that: 
  

	 	(w)	the consideration payable (if any) by the first member of the Bank Group to acquire such assets comprises either (i) cash funded or to be funded directly or
indirectly by a payment from (in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (a) above) the Asset Transferring Party and (in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (b) above) a Bank
Holdco, in either case, in connection with that series of transactions or (ii) Subordinated Funding or (iii) the issue of one or more securities; 

 

	 	(x)	the consideration payable by (in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (a) above) the Asset Transferring Party is equal to the
consideration received or receivable by a Bank Holdco and (in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (b) above) by a Bank Holdco is equal to the consideration received or receivable by the Asset Transferring Party
(and for this purpose, a security issued by one company shall constitute equal consideration to a security issued by another company where such securities have been issued on substantially the same terms and subject to the same conditions);

  

	 	(y)	all of the transactions comprising such a series of transactions (from and including the transfer of the assets by a Bank Holdco to and including the acquisition of
those assets by the Asset Transferring Party or vice versa) are completed within two Business Days; and 

  

	 	(z)	upon completion of all of the transactions comprising such a series of transactions, no person (other than another member of the Bank Group) has any recourse to any
member of the Bank Group and no member of the Bank Group which is not an Obligor may have any recourse to an Obligor, in each case in relation to such a series of transactions (other than in respect of (i) the Subordinated Funding or any rights
and obligations under the securities, in each case, mentioned in paragraph (w) above and (ii) covenants as to title provided, in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (a) above, in favour of the Asset
Transferring Party on the same terms as such covenants were provided by the Bank Holdco in respect of the relevant assets and, in the case of an Asset Passthrough of the type described in paragraph (b) above, in favour of the Bank Holdco on the
same terms as such covenants were provided by the Asset Transferring Party in respect of the relevant assets). 

“Asset Securitisation Subsidiary” means any Subsidiary engaged solely in the business of effecting or facilitating any
asset securitisation programme or programmes or one or more receivables factoring transactions. 

  
 9 

 “Asset Transferring Party” means the member of the Group (or any person in
which a member of the Bank Group owns an interest but which is not a member of the Group), other than a member of the Bank Group (except where the asset being transferred is a security where such member of the Group may be a member of the Bank
Group), who is the initial transferor or final transferee in respect of a transfer to or from a Bank Holdco, as the case may be, through one or more members of the Bank Group. 
 “Attached Working Paper” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 22.5(a) (Compliance Certificates). 

“Authorisation” means an authorisation, consent, approval, resolution, licence, exemption, filing, notarisation or
registration. 
 “Available A Facility Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender, at any time and save as
otherwise provided in this Agreement, its A Facility Commitment at such time less the Sterling Amount of its share of the A Facility Advances made under this Agreement, adjusted to take account of: 

 

	 	(a)	any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer by such Lender or any transfer to it of, any A Facility Commitment, in each case, pursuant to the terms of this
Agreement; and 

  

	 	(b)	in the case of any proposed Advance, the Sterling Amount of its share of such A Facility Advance which, pursuant to any other Utilisation Request is to be made on or
before the proposed Utilisation Date, 

 provided always that such amount shall not be less than zero. 

“Available A1 Facility Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender, at any time and save as otherwise provided in this
Agreement, its A1 Facility Commitment at such time less the Sterling Amount of its share of the A1 Facility Advances made under this Agreement, adjusted to take account of any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer by such Lender or any
transfer to it of, any A1 Facility Commitment, in each case, pursuant to the terms of this Agreement provided always that such amount shall not be less than zero. 
 “Available A2 Facility Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender, at any time and save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, its A2 Facility Commitment at such time less the Sterling
Amount of its share of the A2 Facility Advances made under this Agreement, adjusted to take account of any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer by such Lender or any transfer to it of, any A2 Facility Commitment, in each case, pursuant to
the terms of this Agreement provided always that such amount shall not be less than zero. 
 “Available Additional
Facility Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender and an Additional Facility, at any time and save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, its Additional Facility Commitment in relation to that Additional Facility at such time less the
Sterling Amount of its share of the Additional Facility Advances made under that Additional Facility, adjusted to take account of: 
  

	 	(a)	any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer by such Lender or any transfer to it of, any Additional Facility Commitment in relation to that Additional Facility,
in each case, pursuant to the terms of this Agreement; and 

  

	 	(b)	 in the case of any proposed Advance under that Additional Facility, the Sterling Amount of its share of such Additional Facility Advance which,
pursuant to any other Utilisation Request is to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date, 

  
 10 

	 	
provided always that such amount shall not be less than zero. 

 “Available Ancillary Facility Commitment” means, in relation to an Ancillary Facility Lender and an Ancillary Facility granted by it at any time, and save as otherwise provided in this
Agreement or in the applicable Ancillary Facility Documents, its Ancillary Facility Commitment at such time, less the Sterling Amount of the relevant Ancillary Facility Outstandings at such time, provided always that such amount shall not be less
than zero. 
 “Available B Facility Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender and a B Facility, at any time and
save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, its B Facility Commitment in relation to that B Facility at such time less the Sterling Amount of its share of the B Facility Advances made under that B Facility, adjusted to take account of: 

 

	 	(a)	any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer by such Lender or any transfer to it of, any B Facility Commitment in relation to that B Facility, in each case,
pursuant to the terms of this Agreement; and 

  

	 	(b)	in the case of any proposed Advance under that B Facility, the Sterling Amount of its share of such B Facility Advance which, pursuant to any other Utilisation Request
is to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date, 

 provided always that such amount shall not be less
than zero. 
 “Available B1 Facility Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender, at any time and save as
otherwise provided in this Agreement, its B1 Facility Commitment at such time less the Sterling Amount of its share of the B1 Facility Advances made under this Agreement, adjusted to take account of any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer
by such Lender or any transfer to it of, any B1 Facility Commitment, in each case, pursuant to the terms of this Agreement provided always that such amount shall not be less than zero. 

“Available Commitment” means, in relation to a Lender, the aggregate amount of its Available A Facility Commitments, its
Available A1 Facility Commitments, its Available A2 Facility Commitments, its Available Additional Facility Commitments, its Available B Facility Commitments, its Available B1 Facility Commitments, its Available Revolving Facility Commitments and
its Available Ancillary Facility Commitments, or, in the context of a particular Facility, its Available A Facility Commitments, its Available A1 Facility Commitments, its Available A2 Facility Commitments, its Available Additional Facility
Commitments, its Available B Facility Commitments, its Available B1 Facility Commitments, its Available Revolving Facility Commitments or its Available Ancillary Facility Commitments, as the context may require. 

“Available Facility” means, in relation to a Facility, at any time, the aggregate amount of the Available Commitments in
respect of that Facility at that time. 
 “Available Revolving Facility” means, at any time, the aggregate
amount of the Available Revolving Facility Commitments. 
 “Available Revolving Facility Commitment” means, in
relation to a Lender, at any time and save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, its Revolving Facility Commitment at such time, less the Sterling Amount of its share of the Revolving Facility Outstandings, adjusted to take account of:

  

	 	(a)	any cancellation or reduction of, or any transfer by such Lender or any transfer to it of, any Revolving Facility Commitment, in each case, pursuant to the terms of
this Agreement; and 

  
 11 

	 	(b)	in the case of any proposed Utilisation, the Sterling Amount of its share of (i) such Revolving Facility Advance and/or Documentary Credit which pursuant to any
other Utilisation Request is to be made, or as the case may be, issued, and (ii) any Revolving Facility Advance and/or Documentary Credit which is due to be repaid or expire (as the case may be), in each case, on or before the proposed
Utilisation Date, 

 provided always that such amount shall not be less than zero. 

“B Facility” means a term loan facility granted to the Company pursuant to the B Facility Accession Deed. 

“B Facility Accession Deed” means an accession agreement dated 12 April 2010 between the Company and the Facility
Agent. 
 “B Facility Fee Letter” means any fee letter entered into between the Company and any B Facility
Lenders in relation to the fees payable for providing a B Facility. 
 “B Facility Lender” means any person who
has become a Lender in respect of any B Facility in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 
 “B Facility
Margin” means, in relation to any B Facility, the margin specified and, if applicable, adjusted in accordance with the B Facility Accession Deed. 
 “B Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate principal amount of the B Facility Advances outstanding under this Agreement. 

“B Facility Syndication Letter” means the letter dated on or about the Original Execution Date from the Global
Coordinators, Physical Bookrunners, Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers to the Company in relation to the syndication of the B Facilities. 
 “B1 Facility” means a term loan facility granted to the Company pursuant to Clause 2.1(b) (The Facilities). 
 “B1 Facility Lender” means any person who has become a Lender in respect of any B1 Facility in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 

“B1 Facility Margin” means, in relation to the B1 Facility, the margin applicable to the B Facility specified and, if
applicable, adjusted in accordance with the B Facility Accession Deed. 
 “B1 Facility Outstandings” means, at
any time, the aggregate principal amount of the B1 Facility Advances outstanding under this Agreement. 
 “Bank
Group” means: 
  

	 	(a)	for the purposes of the definition of “Bank Group Consolidated Revenues”, Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements), Clause 22.3 (Budget) and
Clause 23 (Financial Condition) and any other provisions of this Agreement using the terms defined in Clause 23 (Financial Condition): 

 

	 	(i)	the Company; 

  

	 	(ii)	NTL South Herts, for so long as a member of the Bank Group is the general partner of South Hertfordshire United Kingdom Fund, Ltd or if it becomes a wholly-owned
Subsidiary of the Company; 

  

	 	(iii)	NTL Fawnspring Limited, for so long as it is a Subsidiary of the Company; 

  
 12 

	 	(iv)	each of the Company’s other direct and indirect Subsidiaries from time to time, excluding the Bank Group Excluded Subsidiaries; and 

 

	 	(v)	without prejudice to sub-paragraph (iv) above, each of the direct and indirect Subsidiaries from time to time of Virgin Media Communications, excluding any
Subsidiary thereof which has a direct or indirect interest in the Company; 

  

	 	(b)	for all other purposes: 

  

	 	(i)	the Company and each of its direct and indirect Subsidiaries from time to time, other than the Bank Group Excluded Subsidiaries; and 

 

	 	(ii)	each of the direct and indirect Subsidiaries from time to time of Virgin Media Communications to the extent not already included by virtue of sub-paragraph
(i) above, excluding any Subsidiary thereof which has a direct or indirect interest in the Company, 

 but
excluding for all purposes under paragraphs (a) and (b) above any Permitted Joint Ventures. 
 For information purposes
only, the members of the Bank Group as at the Original Execution Date for the purposes of paragraph (b) above are listed in Part 3 of Schedule 2 (Members of the Bank Group). 

“Bank Group Cash Flow” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 

“Bank Group Consolidated Revenues” means, in respect of any period, the consolidated revenues for the Bank Group for that
period as evidenced by the financial information provided in respect of that period pursuant to Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements). 
 “Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary” means: 
  

	 	(a)	any Subsidiary of the Company or Virgin Media Communications which is a Dormant Subsidiary and which is not a Guarantor; 

 

	 	(b)	NTL Fawnspring Limited; 

  

	 	(c)	NTL South Herts and its Subsidiaries, until such time as NTL South Herts becomes a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Company; 

 

	 	(d)	any Subsidiary of the Company or Virgin Media Communications which is a Project Company; 

 

	 	(e)	any Asset Securitisation Subsidiary; and 

  

	 	(f)	any company which becomes a Subsidiary of the Parent or Virgin Media Communications in each case, after the Original Execution Date pursuant to an Asset Passthrough,

 provided that any Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary may, at the election of the Parent and upon not less than 10
Business Days prior written notice to the Facility Agent, cease to be a Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary and become a member of the Bank Group. 
 “Bank Holdco” means a direct Holding Company of a member of the Bank Group which is not a member of the Bank Group. 

  
 13 

 “Barclays Intercreditor Agreement” has the meaning given to such term in
the Group Intercreditor Agreement. 
 “Basel II” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 18.3(f)
(Exceptions). 
 “Basel III” means the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision’s (the
“Committee”) revised rules relating to capital requirements set out in “Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems”, “Guidance for national authorities operating the
countercyclical capital buffer” and “Basel III: International framework for liquidity risk measurement, standards and monitoring” published by the Committee in December 2010 and any other documents published by the Committee in
connection with these rules, or any other law or regulation which implements any of those rules or documents (whether such implementation, application or compliance is by a government, regulator, Relevant Finance Party or any of its Affiliates).

 “BBA LIBOR” means in relation to LIBOR, the British Bankers Association Interest Settlement Rate for the
relevant currency and Interest Period displayed on the appropriate page of the Reuters screen. If the agreed page is replaced or service ceases to be available, the Facility Agent may specify another page or service displaying the appropriate rate
after consultation with the Company and the Lenders. 
 “BBC Guarantees” means the guarantees required to be
given by the Borrowers in favour of BBC Worldwide Limited pursuant to the shareholder agreements relating to the UKTV Joint Ventures. 
 “Beneficiary” means a beneficiary in respect of a Documentary Credit. 
 “Borrowers” means the Original Borrowers and any Acceding Borrower. 
 “Break Costs” means the amount (if any) by which: 
  

	 	(a)	the interest (excluding the Applicable Margin and Mandatory Cost) which a Lender should have received for the period from the date of receipt of all or any part of its
participation in an Advance or Unpaid Sum to the last day of the current Interest Period or Term in respect of that Advance or Unpaid Sum, had the amount so received been paid on the last day of that Interest Period or Term;

 exceeds: 
  

	 	(b)	the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the principal amount of such Advance or Unpaid Sum received or recovered by it on
deposit with a leading bank in the Relevant Interbank Market for a period starting on the Business Day following such receipt or recovery and ending on the last day of the current Interest Period or Term. 

“Budget” means in respect of any financial year commencing after 31 December 2010, the budget for such financial
year, in the form and including the information required to be delivered by the Company to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 22.3 (Budget). 
 “Business Day” means a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) on which (a) banks generally are open for business in London and (b) if such reference relates to a date for the
payment or purchase of any sum denominated in: 
  

	 	(a)	euro (A) is a TARGET Day and (B) is a day on which banks generally are open for business in the financial centre selected by the Facility Agent for receipt of
payments in euro; or 

  
 14 

	 	(b)	in a currency other than euro, banks generally are open for business in the principal financial centre of the country of such currency. 

“Business Division Transaction” means any sale, transfer, demerger, contribution, spin off or distribution of, any
creation or participation in any joint venture and/or entering into any other transaction or taking any action with respect to, in each case, any assets, undertakings and/or businesses of the Group which comprise all or part of the Virgin Media
business division (or its predecessors or successors), to or with any other entity or person, whether or not within the Group or the Bank Group, in each case, where such transaction has the prior approval of an Instructing Group. 

“Captive Insurance Company” means any captive insurance company for the Group (or any part thereof, which includes the
Bank Group). 
 “Cash” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions).

 “Cash Equivalent Investment” means: 

 

	 	(a)	debt securities which are freely negotiable and marketable: 

  

	 	(i)	which mature not more than 12 months from the relevant date of calculation; and 

 

	 	(ii)	which are rated at least A-1 by Standard & Poor’s or Fitch or P-1 by Moody’s; 

 

	 	(b)	certificates of deposit of, or time deposits or overnight bank deposits with, any commercial bank whose short-term securities are rated at least A-2 by Standard and
Poor’s or Fitch or P-2 by Moody’s and having maturities of 12 months or less from the date of acquisition; 

  

	 	(c)	commercial paper of, or money market accounts or funds with or issued by, an issuer rated at least A-2 by Standard & Poor’s or Fitch or P-2 by
Moody’s and having an original tenor of 12 months or less; 

  

	 	(d)	medium term fixed or floating rate notes of an issuer rated at least A-1 by Standard & Poor’s or Fitch or P-1 by Moody’s at the time of acquisition
and having a remaining term of 12 months or less from the date of acquisition; 

  

	 	(e)	any investment in a money market fund or enhanced yield fund (i) whose aggregate assets exceed £250 million and (ii) at least 90% of whose assets
constitute Cash Equivalent Investments of the type described in paragraphs (a) to (d) of this definition; 

  

	 	(f)	sterling bills of exchange eligible for rediscount at the Bank of England and accepted by an Acceptable Bank; or 

 

	 	(g)	any other debt security approved by the Instructing Group, 

 in each case, denominated in Sterling (or any other currency freely convertible into Sterling) and to which any member of the Bank Group is alone (or together with other members of the Bank Group)
beneficially entitled at that time and which is not issued or guaranteed by any member of the Bank Group or subject to any security (other than Security arising under the Security Documents). 

“Centre of Main Interests” has the meaning given to such term in Article 3(1) of Council Regulation (EC) NO 1346/2000 of
29 May 2000 on Insolvency Proceedings. 

  
 15 

 “Change in Tax Law” means the introduction, implementation, repeal,
withdrawal or change in, or in the interpretation, administration or application of any Law relating to taxation (a) in the case of a participation in an Advance by a Lender named in Part 1 of Schedule 1 (Lenders and Commitments) after
the Original Execution Date, or (b) in the case of a participation in an Advance by any other Lender, after the date upon which such Lender becomes a party to this Agreement in accordance with the provisions of Clause 37 (Assignments
and Transfers). 
 “Change of Control” means the occurrence of any of the following events: 

 

	 	(a)	any “person” or “group” of related persons (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes the
“beneficial owner” (as defined in Rules 13d-3 and 13d-5 under the Exchange Act, except that for purposes of this paragraph (a) such person or group shall be deemed to have “beneficial ownership” of all shares that such
person or group has the right to acquire, whether such right is exercisable immediately or only after the passage of time), directly or indirectly, of more than 50% of the total voting power of the Voting Stock of the Ultimate Parent (for the
purposes of this paragraph (a), such person shall be deemed to beneficially own any Voting Stock of an entity held by any other entity (the “parent entity”), if such other person is the beneficial owner (as defined in this paragraph (a)),
directly or indirectly, of more than 50% of the voting power of the Voting Stock of such parent entity); 

  

	 	(b)	during any period of two consecutive years, individuals who at the beginning of such period constituted the board of directors of the Ultimate Parent (together with any
new directors whose election to such board of directors or whose nomination for election by the stockholders of the Ultimate Parent was approved by a vote of a majority of the directors of the Ultimate Parent then still in office who were either
directors at the beginning of such period or whose election or nomination for election was previously so approved) cease for any reason to constitute a majority of the board of directors of the Ultimate Parent then in office;

  

	 	(c)	the adoption of a plan relating to the liquidation or dissolution of the Ultimate Parent or the Company; 

 

	 	(d)	the merger or consolidation of the Ultimate Parent or any other Virgin Media Holding Company with or into another person (other than the Ultimate Parent, any other
Virgin Media Holding Company, the Company or any other wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Ultimate Parent) or the merger of another person (other than the Ultimate Parent, any Virgin Media Holding Company, the Company or any other wholly-owned
Subsidiary of the Ultimate Parent) with or into the Ultimate Parent any other Virgin Media Holding Company or the sale of all or substantially all the assets of the Ultimate Parent, any other Virgin Media Holding Company, the Company or Intermediate
Holdco to another person (other than the Ultimate Parent, any other Virgin Media Holding Company, the Company or any other wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Ultimate Parent), and, in the case of any such merger or consolidation, the securities of the
Ultimate Parent or any other Virgin Media Holding Company that are outstanding immediately prior to such transaction are changed into or exchanged for cash, securities or other assets, unless pursuant to such transaction such securities are changed
into or exchanged for, in addition to any other consideration, securities of the surviving person or transferee that represent immediately after such transaction, at least a majority of the aggregate voting power of the Voting Stock of the surviving
person or transferee; 

  

	 	(e)	any change of control (howsoever defined) occurs under the indenture governing any High Yield Notes or any Senior Secured Notes and the holders of any notes thereunder
have a right to cause the issuer to repurchase their notes as a result of such event; 

  
 16 

	 	(f)	any of the Borrowers, the Parent, Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC or Intermediate Holdco, and in each case their successor, ceases to be a direct or indirect
wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Ultimate Parent (other than as a result of a Solvent Liquidation of such person pursuant to Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations)); 

 

	 	(g)	Intermediate Holdco ceases to be a direct wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Company; or 

 

	 	(h)	any Material Subsidiary (other than Intermediate Holdco and the Company) ceases to be a wholly-owned Subsidiary (directly or indirectly) of Intermediate Holdco.

 Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change of Control shall not be deemed to have occurred if a Virgin Media
Holding Company that is not then a Subsidiary of the Ultimate Parent becomes the ultimate parent of the Company and, if such Virgin Media Holding Company had been the Ultimate Parent, no Change of Control would have otherwise occurred; provided,
however, that such Virgin Media Holding Company is or becomes an Obligor. 
 “Code” means the Internal Revenue
Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, and the regulations promulgated thereunder. Section references to the Code are to the Code, as in effect at the Original Execution Date and any subsequent provisions of the Code, amendatory of it,
supplemental to it or substituted therefor. 
 “Commitment” means: 

 

	 	(a)	when designated “A Facility” save as otherwise provided in this Agreement: 

 

	 	(i)	in relation to an Original Lender, the amount set opposite its name in the relevant column of Part 1 of Schedule 1 (Lenders and Commitments) and any amount of
any other A Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase); and 

  

	 	(ii)	in relation to any other Lender, as specified in the Transfer Deed pursuant to which such Lender becomes a party to this Agreement and any amount of any other A
Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase); 

  

	 	(b)	when designated “A1 Facility” in relation to a Lender at any time, and save as otherwise set out in this Agreement, the amount of its A1 Facility
Commitment as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date) and any amount of any other A1 Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase);

  

	 	(c)	when designated “A2 Facility” in relation to a Lender at any time, and save as otherwise set out in this Agreement, the amount of its A2 Facility
Commitment as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date) and any amount of any other A2 Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase);

  

	 	(d)	when designated “Additional Facility” in relation to a Lender and an Additional Facility at any time and save as otherwise provided in this Agreement,

  

	 	(i)	the amount set opposite its name in the Additional Facility Accession Deed in relation to that Additional Facility and the amount of any other Additional Facility
Commitment in relation to that Additional Facility transferred to it under this Agreement; 

  
 17 

	 	(ii)	as specified in the Transfer Deed pursuant to which such Lender becomes a party to this Agreement; or 

 

	 	(iii)	the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase); 

 

	 	(e)	when designated “B Facility” in relation to a Lender and a B Facility at any time and save as otherwise provided in this Agreement:

  

	 	(i)	the amount set opposite its name in the B Facility Accession Deed in relation to that B Facility and the amount of any other B Facility Commitment in relation to that B
Facility transferred to it under this Agreement; 

  

	 	(ii)	as specified in the Transfer Deed pursuant to which such Lender becomes a party to this Agreement; or 

 

	 	(iii)	the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase); 

 

	 	(f)	when designated “B1 Facility” in relation to a Lender at any time, and save as otherwise set out in this Agreement, the amount of its B1 Facility
Commitment as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date) and any amount of any other B1 Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase);

  

	 	(g)	when designated “Revolving Facility” save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, 

 

	 	(i)	in relation to an Original Lender, the amount set opposite its name in the relevant column of Part 1 of Schedule 1 (Lenders and Commitments) and any amount of
any other Revolving Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or the amount assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase); and 

 

	 	(ii)	in relation to any other Lender, as specified in the Transfer Deed pursuant to which such Lender becomes a party to this Agreement and any amount of any other Revolving
Facility Commitment transferred to it under this Agreement or assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase), 

 in each case to the extent: 
  

	 	(i)	not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement; 

  

	 	(ii)	not deemed to be zero pursuant to Clause 38 (Debt Purchase Transactions); and 

 

	 	(iii)	without any such designation, means “A Facility Commitment”, “A1 Facility Commitment”, “A2 Facility Commitment”,
“Additional Facility Commitment”, “B Facility Commitment”, “B1 Facility Commitment” and “Revolving Facility Commitment”, as the context requires, and any “Commitment”
means either each or any of the foregoing, as the context requires. 

 “Company” means:

  

	 	(a)	VMIH; or 

  

	 	(b)	following a solvent liquidation of VMIH, pursuant to the provisions of Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations), NTL Finance Limited.

  
 18 

 “Company Materials” has the meaning given to such term in
Clause 41.4(b) (Public Information). 
 “Compliance Certificate” means a certificate substantially
in the form set out in Schedule 8 (Form of Compliance Certificate) or such other similar form as the Facility Agent shall agree with the Company. 
 “Confirmation Date” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 17.2(d) (Lender Tax Status). 
 “Consolidated Debt Service” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 
 “Consolidated Net Debt” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 
 “Consolidated Net Income” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 
 “Consolidated Operating Cashflow” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 

“Consolidated Senior Debt” means, at any time (without double counting) the aggregate principal or capital amounts
(including any Interest capitalised as principal) of Financial Indebtedness (as would be set forth on the balance sheet of the Group in accordance with GAAP) (i) of any member of the Bank Group which is secured on a pari passu basis with
the Facilities pursuant to the terms of the Group Intercreditor Agreement or has second or other ranking security to the Security granted for the benefit of the Facilities (including, without limitation, Financial Indebtedness arising under or
pursuant to the Relevant Finance Documents), (ii) of any member of the Bank Group arising under any finance or capital leases incurred in reliance on the basket provided for under Clause 25.4(j) (Financial Indebtedness) and (iii) of
any member of the Bank Group excluding the Company and Intermediate Holdco (regardless of whether any such Financial Indebtedness is secured or not but excluding any Financial Indebtedness owed to any member of the Group under Clause 25.4(i)
(Financial Indebtedness)), but excluding any Hedging Agreements that cover risks relating to Financial Indebtedness not included in this definition. 
 “Consolidated Senior Net Debt” means, at any time, the Consolidated Senior Debt at such time less Cash. 
 “Consolidated Total Debt” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 
 “Consolidated Total Net Cash Interest Payable” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 

“Content” means any rights to broadcast, transmit, distribute or otherwise make available for viewing, exhibition or
reception (whether in analogue or digital format and whether as a channel or an Internet service, a teletext-type service, an interactive service, or an enhanced television service or any part of any of the foregoing, or on a pay-per-view basis, or
near video-on-demand, or video-on-demand basis or otherwise) any one or more of audio and/or visual images, audio content, or interactive content (including hyperlinks, re-purposed web-site content, database content plus associated templates,
formatting information and other data including any interactive applications or functionality), text, data, graphics, or other content, by means of any means of distribution, transmission or delivery system or technology (whether now known or herein
after invented). 

  
 19 

 “Content Transaction” means any sale, transfer, demerger, contribution,
spin-off or distribution of, any creation or participation in any joint venture and/or entering into any other transaction or taking any action with respect to, in each case, any assets, undertakings and/or businesses of the Group which comprise all
or part of the Content business of the Group, to or with any other entity or person whether or not within the Group or Bank Group. 
 “Contribution Notice” means a contribution notice issued by the Pensions Regulator under section 38 or section 47 of the Pensions Act 2004. 

“Conversion Notice” has the meaning given to such term in paragraph (a) of Clause 6.1 (Utilisation of
Ancillary Facilities). 
 “Convertible Senior Notes” means the 6.50% convertible senior notes due 2016
issued by the Ultimate Parent. 
 “Cost” means the cost estimated in good faith by the relevant member of the
Bank Group to have been incurred or to be received by that member of the Bank Group in the provision or receipt of the relevant service, facility or arrangement, including, without limitation, a proportion of any material employment, property,
information technology, administration, utilities, transport and materials or other costs incurred or received in the provision or receipt of such service, facility or arrangement, but excluding costs which are either not material or not directly
attributable to the provision or receipt of the relevant service, facility or arrangement. 
 “CTA” means the
Corporation Tax Act 2009. 
 “Current Assets” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1
(Financial Definitions). 
 “Current Liabilities” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1
(Financial Definitions). 
 “Debt Purchase Transaction” means, in relation to a Person, a transaction
where such Person: 
  

	 	(a)	purchases by way of assignment or transfer; 

  

	 	(b)	enters into any sub-participation in respect of; or 

  

	 	(c)	enters into any other agreement or arrangement having an economic effect substantially similar to a sub-participation in respect of, 

any Commitment or amount outstanding under this Agreement. 
 “Default” means an Event of Default or any event or circumstance which (with the expiry of a grace period, the giving of notice, the making of any determination under any of the Relevant
Finance Documents or any combination of any of the foregoing) would be an Event of Default provided that in relation to any event which is subject to a materiality threshold or condition before such event would constitute an Event of Default, such
default shall not constitute a Default until such materiality threshold or condition has been satisfied. 
 “Defaulting
Lender” means any Lender (other than a Lender which is or becomes a member of the Group): 
  

	 	(a)	 which has failed to make its participation in an Advance available or has notified the Facility Agent that it will not make its participation in an
Advance available by the Utilisation Date of that Advance in accordance with Clause 4.2 (Lenders’ Participation) or has failed to provide cash collateral (or has notified an L/C Bank that it will not

  
 20 

	 	
provide cash collateral) in accordance with Clause 5.8 (Cash Collateral by Non-Acceptable L/C Lender); 

 

	 	(b)	which has otherwise rescinded or repudiated a Relevant Finance Document; or 

 

	 	(c)	with respect to which an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing, 

 unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above: 
  

	 	(i)	its failure to pay is caused by: 

  

	 	(A)	administrative or technical error; or 

  

	 	(B)	a Disruption Event; and 

payment is made within two Business Days of its due date; or 

 

	 	(ii)	the Lender is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question. 

“Designated Gross Amount” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 6.1(b) (Utilisation of Ancillary
Facilities). 
 “Designated Net Amount” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 6.1(b)
(Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities). 
 “Designated Website” has the meaning given to such term in
Clause 41.3(a) (Use of Websites/E-mail). 
 “Disposal” means any sale, transfer, lease, surrender or
other disposal by any member of the Bank Group of any shares in any of its Subsidiaries or all or any part of its revenues, assets, other shares, business or undertakings other than in the ordinary course of business or trade. 

“Disputes” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 48.1 (Courts). 

“Disruption Event” means either or both of: 

 

	 	(a)	a material disruption to those payment or communications systems or to those financial markets which are, in each case, required to operate in order for payments to be
made in connection with the Facilities (or otherwise in order for the transactions contemplated by the Relevant Finance Documents to be carried out) which disruption is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, any of the parties to this
Agreement; or 

  

	 	(b)	the occurrence of any other event which results in a disruption (of a technical or systems-related nature) to the treasury or payments operations of a Relevant Finance
Party to this Agreement preventing that, or any other Relevant Finance Party: 

  

	 	(i)	from performing its payment obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents; or 

 

	 	(ii)	from communicating with other parties in accordance with the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents, 

and which (in either such case) is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, the party whose operations are disrupted. 

  
 21 

 “Documentary Credit” means a letter of credit, bank guarantee, indemnity,
performance bond or other documentary credit issued or to be issued by an L/C Bank pursuant to Clause 4.1 (Conditions to Utilisation). 
 “Dormant Subsidiary” means a member of the Group which does not trade (for itself or as agent for any person) and does not own, legally or beneficially, assets (including, without
limitation, indebtedness owed to it) which in aggregate have a value of more than £10,000 (excluding loans existing on the Original Execution Date owed to it by members of the Bank Group) or its equivalent in other currencies. 

“Double Taxation Treaty” means in relation to a payment of interest on an Advance made to any Borrower, any convention or
agreement between the government of such Borrower’s Relevant Tax Jurisdiction and any other government for the avoidance of double taxation with respect to taxes on income and capital gains which makes provision for exemption from tax imposed
by such Borrower’s Relevant Tax Jurisdiction on interest. 
 “Effective Date” has the meaning given to such
term in paragraph (a) of Clause 6.1 (Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities). 
 “Encumbrance”
means: 
  

	 	(a)	a mortgage, charge, pledge, lien, assignation in security, standard security, encumbrance or other security interest securing any obligation of any person;

  

	 	(b)	any arrangement under which money or claims to, or the benefit of, a bank or other account may be applied, set off or made subject to a combination of accounts so as to
effect payment of sums owed or payable to any person; or 

  

	 	(c)	any other type of agreement or preferential arrangement (including title transfer and retention arrangements) having a similar effect. 

“Environment” means living organisms including the ecological systems of which they form part and the following media:

  

	 	(a)	air (including air within natural or man-made structures, whether above or below ground); 

 

	 	(b)	water (including territorial, coastal and inland waters, water under or within land and water in drains and sewers); and 

 

	 	(c)	land (including land under water). 

 “Environmental Claim” means any administrative, regulatory or judicial action, suit, demand, demand letter, claim, notice of non-compliance or violation, investigation, proceeding,
consent order or consent agreement relating to any Environmental Law or Environmental Licence. 
 “Environmental
Law” means all laws and regulations of any relevant jurisdiction which: 
  

	 	(a)	have as a purpose or effect the protection of, and/or prevention of harm or damage to, the Environment; 

 

	 	(b)	provide remedies or compensation for harm or damage to the Environment; or 

 

	 	(c)	relate to Hazardous Substances or health or safety matters. 

  
 22 

 “Environmental Licence” means any Authorisations required at any time under
Environmental Law. 
 “Equity Cure Right” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.3(a) (Equity
Cure Right). 
 “Equity Equivalent Funding” means a loan made to, or any Financial Indebtedness owed by, any
person where the Financial Indebtedness incurred thereby: 
  

	 	(a)	may not be repaid at any time prior to the repayment in full of all Outstandings and cancellation of all Available Commitments; 

 

	 	(b)	carries no interest or carries interest which is payable only on non-cash pay terms or following repayment in full of all Outstandings and cancellation of all Available
Commitments; 

  

	 	(c)	is either (i) structurally and contractually subordinated to the Facilities or (ii) contractually subordinated to the Facilities, in each case, pursuant to
the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and/or the Group Intercreditor Agreement; and 

  

	 	(d)	if not already subject to Security created under the Original Security Documents, Security in favour of the Security Trustee on terms satisfactory to the Security
Trustee is promptly granted by the relevant creditor over its rights with respect to any such Financial Indebtedness. 

 “Equity Proceeds” means the cash proceeds raised by any member of the Group by way of equity securities offerings in the international or domestic public equity capital markets (after
deducting all reasonable fees, commissions, costs and expenses incurred by any member of the Group in connection with such raising) but shall not include the cash proceeds of any offering of convertible notes or other equity-like or equity-linked
instruments (including upon conversion or exchange thereunder). 
 “ERISA” means the U.S. Employee Retirement
Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time, and the regulations promulgated and the rulings issued under it. Section references to ERISA are to ERISA as in effect on the Original Execution Date. 

“ERISA Affiliate” means, in relation to a member of the Bank Group, each person (as defined in section 3(9) of ERISA)
which together with that member of the Bank Group would be deemed to be a “single employer” within the meaning of section 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code. 

“EURIBOR” means, in relation to any amount to be advanced to or owed by an Obligor under this Agreement in euro on which
interest for a given period is to accrue: 
  

	 	(a)	the rate per annum for deposits in euro which appears on the Relevant Page for such period at or about 11.00 am (Brussels time) on the Quotation Date for such period;
or 

  

	 	(b)	if no such rate is displayed and the Facility Agent shall not have selected an alternative service on which such rate is displayed as contemplated by the definition of
“Relevant Page”, the arithmetic mean (rounded upwards, if not already such a multiple, to 4 decimal places) of the rates (as notified to the Facility Agent) at which each of the Reference Banks was offering to prime banks in the European
Interbank Market deposits in euro for such period at or about 11.00 am (Brussels time) on the Quotation Date for such period. 

 “European Interbank Market” means the interbank market for euro operating in Participating Member States. 

  
 23 

 “Event of Default” means any of the events or circumstances described as
such in Clause 27 (Events of Default). 
 “Excess Capacity Network Service” means the provision of
network services, or agreement to provide network services, by a member of the Bank Group in favour of one or more other members of the Group where such network services are only provided in respect of the capacity available to such member of the
Bank Group in excess of that network capacity it requires to continue to provide current services to its existing and projected future customers and to allow it to provide further services to both its existing and projected future customers.

 “Excess Cash Flow” means in relation to any financial year of the Company, Bank Group Cash Flow less
(a) Consolidated Debt Service for such financial year, (b) the aggregate amount of all payments or prepayments of principal, whether voluntary or mandatory, of Consolidated Total Debt made in such financial year, (c) proceeds from
disposals permitted by Clause 25.6(j) (Disposals) received during such financial year and (d) proceeds from any Content Transaction or any Business Division Transaction received during such financial year, provided that no such
amounts prepaid and used in the calculation under paragraph (b) shall be available for reborrowing and, provided further that for the purposes of such calculation, no amount shall be included or excluded more than once. 

“Exchange Act” means the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. 

“Excluded Group” means each member of the Group which is not a member of the Bank Group. 

“Excluded Group Operating Cashflow” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial
Definitions). 
 “Existing Encumbrance” means any Encumbrance existing as at the Original Execution Date,
details of which are set out in Part 1 of Schedule 10 (Existing Encumbrances). 
 “Existing Financial
Indebtedness” means the Financial Indebtedness existing as at the Original Execution Date, details of which are set out in Part 3 of Schedule 10 (Existing Financial Indebtedness). 

“Existing Hedging Agreements” means the hedging agreements with the Hedge Counterparties existing as at the Original
Execution Date, details of which are set out in Part 6 of Schedule 10 (Existing Hedge Counterparties). 

“Existing High Yield Notes” means the 2014 High Yield Notes, the 2016 High Yield Notes, the 8.375% dollar denominated
senior notes due 2019 and the 8.875% sterling denominated senior notes due 2019, in each case, issued by the Parent. 

“Existing Loans” means the loans granted by members of the Bank Group existing as at the Original Execution Date, details
of which are set out in Part 2 of Schedule 10 (Existing Loans). 
 “Existing Performance Bonds” means
each of the performance bonds or similar obligations issued by members of the Bank Group existing as at the Original Execution Date, details of which are set out in Part 4 of Schedule 10 (Existing Performance Bonds). 

“Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement” means that certain senior credit facilities agreement dated 3 March
2006 and made between, inter alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Telewest Communications Networks Limited and VMIH Sub Limited as UK Borrowers, Virgin Media Dover
LLC as US Borrower, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, J.P. Morgan Plc, 

  
 24 

 The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc and Goldman Sachs International as Bookrunners and Mandated
Lead Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee, GE Corporate Banking Europe SAS as Administrative Agent and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders.

 “Existing Senior Secured Notes” means the 6.50% dollar denominated senior secured notes due 2018 and the
7.00% sterling denominated senior secured notes due 2018, in each case, issued by Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC. 

“Existing UKTV Group Loan Stock” means the loan stock and redeemable preference shares issued by members of the UKTV
Group, details of which are set out in Part 5 of Schedule 10 (Existing UKTV Group Loan Stock). 
 “Existing Vendor
Financing Arrangements” means each of the existing finance leases and vendor financing arrangements existing as at the date of the Agreement, details of which are set out in Part 7 of Schedule 10 (Existing Vendor Financing
Arrangements). 
 “Expiry Date” means, in relation to any Documentary Credit granted under this Agreement,
the date stated in it to be its expiry date or the latest date on which demand may be made under it being a date falling on or prior to the Final Maturity Date in respect of the Revolving Facility. 

“Facilities” means the A Facility, the A1 Facility, the A2 Facility, any Additional Facility, the B Facility, the B1
Facility, the Revolving Facility, any Ancillary Facility and any Documentary Credit granted to the Borrowers under this Agreement, and “Facility” means any of them, as the context may require. 

“Facility Agent’s Spot Rate of Exchange” means, in relation to two currencies, the Facility Agent’s spot rate
of exchange for the purchase of the first-mentioned currency with the second-mentioned currency in the London foreign exchange market at or about 11 a.m. on a particular day. 
 “Facility Office” means the office notified by a Lender to the Facility Agent in writing on or before the date it becomes a Lender or, following that date, (i) by not less than 5
Business Days written notice as the office through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement where the office is situated in Financial Action Task Force countries, or (ii) with the prior written consent of the Facility Agent,
an office through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement situated in non-Financial Action Task Force countries. 
 “Fee Letters” means the A Facility Fee Letter, any B Facility Fee Letter and the other fee letters referred to in Clauses 16.2 (Arrangement and Underwriting Fee), 16.3
(Agency Fee) and 16.5 (L/C Bank Fee). 
 “Final Maturity Date” means: 

 

	 	(a)	in respect of the Revolving Facility, 30 June 2015; 

  

	 	(b)	in respect of an Additional Facility, as agreed by the Company and the relevant Additional Facility Lenders in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed, but
subject to Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility); 

  

	 	(c)	in respect of the A Facility, the A1 Facility or the A2 Facility, 30 June 2015; and 

 

	 	(d)	in respect of the B Facility or the B1 Facility, 31 December 2015. 

  
 25 

 “Finance Documents” means: 

 

	 	(a)	any Relevant Finance Document; 

  

	 	(b)	any Senior Secured Notes Documents; and 

  

	 	(c)	any other agreement or document designated a “Finance Document” in writing by the Facility Agent and the Company. 

“Finance Lease” means a lease treated as a capital or finance lease pursuant to GAAP provided that, upon a change in GAAP
eliminating the difference in treatment of operating leases and capital leases, “Finance Lease” shall be deemed to be a leasing arrangement where the net present value of the payments (using an interest rate determined with reference to
yield to maturity in the trading markets for the issue at the date of the lease of the Parent’s unsecured senior notes with the longest maturity date at the date of the lease) exceeds 90% of the fair value of the asset. 

“Finance Parties” means the Facility Agent, the Arrangers, the Bookrunners, the Security Trustee, the Lenders and each
Hedge Counterparty, the holders of any Senior Secured Notes and the trustees and/or other agents in respect of any Senior Secured Notes and “Finance Party” means any of them. 

“Financial Action Task Force” means the Financial Action Task Force on Money Laundering, an inter-governmental body, the
purpose of which is the development and promotion of policies, at both national and international levels, to combat money laundering. 
 “Financial Indebtedness” means, without double counting, any Indebtedness for or in respect of: 
  

	 	(a)	moneys borrowed; 

  

	 	(b)	any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility; 

  

	 	(c)	any amount raised pursuant to any note purchase facility or the issue of bonds, notes, debentures, loan stock or any similar instrument (but not, in any case, Trade
Instruments) (for the avoidance of doubt excluding any loan notes or similar instruments issued solely by way of consideration for the acquisition of assets in order to defer capital gains or equivalent taxes where such loan notes or similar
instruments are not issued for the purpose of raising finance); 

  

	 	(d)	the principal portion of any liability in respect of any Finance Lease; 

  

	 	(e)	receivables sold or discounted (other than any receivables to the extent they are sold on a non-recourse basis); 

 

	 	(f)	the amount of any liability in respect of any purchase price for assets or services the payment of which is deferred for a period in excess of 150 days in order to
raise finance or to finance the acquisition of those assets or services; 

  

	 	(g)	any amount raised under any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) required to be accounted for as indebtedness in accordance with GAAP;

  

	 	(h)	 any derivative transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price (and, when calculating
the value of any derivative transaction, only the marked to market value shall be taken into account, provided that 

  
 26 

	 	
for the purposes of Clause 27.5 (Cross Default), only the net amount not paid or which is payable by the relevant member of the Group shall be included); 

 

	 	(i)	any amount raised pursuant to any issue of shares which are expressed to be redeemable (other than at the option of the issuer) in cash (other than redeemable shares in
respect of which the redemption is prohibited until after repayment in full of all Outstandings under the Facilities); 

  

	 	(j)	any counter-indemnity obligation in respect of a guarantee, indemnity, bond, standby or documentary letter of credit or any other instrument (but not, in any case,
Trade Instruments) issued by a bank or financial or other institution; or 

  

	 	(k)	the amount of any liability in respect of any guarantee or indemnity for the Financial Indebtedness of another person referred to in paragraphs (a) to
(j) above. 

 “Financial Officer” means the Chief Financial Officer, the Deputy Chief
Financial Officer, the Assistant Treasurer, the Controller or the Group Treasurer, in each case, of the Company or of the Group, or any similar officer of the Company or of the Group. 

“Financial Quarter” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 

“Financial Support Direction” means a financial support direction issued by the Pensions Regulator under Section 43
of the Pensions Act 2004. 
 “Fitch” means Fitch Ratings or any successor thereof. 

“Foreign Pension Plan” means any plan, fund (including, without limitation, any superannuation fund) or other similar
program established or maintained outside the United States by any member of the Group for the benefit of employees of any member of the Group residing outside the United States, which plan, fund or other similar program provides, or results in,
retirement income, a deferral of income in contemplation of retirement or payments to be made upon termination of employment, and which plan is not subject to ERISA or the Code. 

“Funded Excluded Subsidiary” means, in respect of a Funding Passthrough, a Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary or any person
in which a member of the Bank Group owns an interest but which is not a member of the Bank Group which: 
  

	 	(a)	indirectly receives funding from a Bank Holdco; and/or 

  

	 	(b)	by way of dividend or other distribution, loan or payment of interest on or the repayment of the principal amount of any indebtedness owed by it, directly or
indirectly, makes a payment to a Bank Holdco. 

 “Funding Passthrough” means a series of
transactions between a Bank Holdco, one or more members of the Bank Group and a Funded Excluded Subsidiary where: 
  

	 	(a)	in the case of funding being provided by a Bank Holdco to the Funded Excluded Subsidiary, that funding is: 

 

	 	(i)	first made available by the Bank Holdco to (in the case of the Parent) the Company or, one of its Subsidiaries (other than in the case of Virgin Media Communications,
the Parent or any of its Subsidiaries) by way of the subscription for new securities, capital contribution or Subordinated Funding; 

  
 27 

	 	(ii)	secondly (if relevant) made available by the recipient of the Funding Passthrough under (i) above, to a member of the Bank Group (other than the Company) which may
be followed by one or more transactions between members of the Bank Group (other than the Company) and finally made available by a member of the Bank Group (other than the Company) to the Funded Excluded Subsidiary in all such cases by way of either
the subscription for new securities, the advancing of loans or capital contribution; or 

  

	 	(b)	in the case of a payment to be made by the Funded Excluded Subsidiary to a Bank Holdco that payment is: 

 

	 	(i)	first made by the Funded Excluded Subsidiary to a member of the Bank Group, and thereafter is made between members of the Bank Group (as relevant), by way of dividend
or other distribution, loan or payment of interest on or the repayment of the principal amount of any indebtedness owed by such Funded Excluded Subsidiary or relevant member of the Bank Group; and 

 

	 	(ii)	finally made by the Company to the Parent or by one of the Subsidiaries of Virgin Media Communications (other than the Parent or any of its Subsidiaries) to Virgin
Media Communications by way of dividend or other distribution, loan or the payment of interest on or the repayment of the principal amount of any loan made by way of Subordinated Funding. 

“GAAP” means accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. 

“Group” means: 
  

	 	(a)	for the purposes of Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements), Clause 22.3 (Budget) and Clause 23 (Financial Condition) and any other
provisions in this Agreement using the terms defined in Clause 23 (Financial Condition): 

  

	 	(i)	the Ultimate Parent and its Subsidiaries from time to time; and 

  

	 	(ii)	NTL South Herts, for so long as a member of the Group is the general partner of South Hertfordshire United Kingdom Fund, Ltd. or if it becomes a wholly-owned Subsidiary
of the Group; and 

  

	 	(b)	for all other purposes, the Ultimate Parent and its Subsidiaries from time to time. 

“Group Business” means the provision of broadband and communications services, including: 

 

	 	(a)	residential telephone, mobile telephone, cable television and Internet services, including wholesale Internet access solutions to Internet service providers;

  

	 	(b)	data, voice and Internet services to large businesses, public sector organisations and small and medium sized enterprises; 

 

	 	(c)	national and international communications transport services to communications companies; and 

 

	 	(d)	the provision of Content, 

 and
any related ancillary or complementary business to any of the services described above. 

  
 28 

 “Group Intercreditor Agreement” means the intercreditor agreement dated
3 March 2006 between, among others, certain of the Obligors, other members of the Group and the Relevant Finance Parties. 

“Group Structure Chart” means the structure chart relating to the Group, which has been delivered to the Facility Agent
on or prior to the Original Execution Date or any updated group structure chart which is delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 24.14 (Group Structure Chart) from time to time. 

“Guarantors” means: 
  

	 	(a)	for the purposes of Clause 29 (Guarantee and Indemnity), the Parent, the Original Guarantors and any Acceding Guarantors; and 

 

	 	(b)	for the purposes of any other provision of the Relevant Finance Documents, the Original Guarantors and any Acceding Guarantors, 

and “Guarantor” means any one of them as the context requires, provided that in either case, such person has not been
released from its rights and obligations as a Guarantor hereunder pursuant to Clause 44.5 (Release of Guarantees and Security). 
 “Hazardous Substance” means any waste, pollutant, contaminant or other substance (including any liquid, solid, gas, ion, living organism or noise) that may be harmful to human health or
other life or the Environment. 
 “Hedge Counterparty” means any counterparty which is a party to a Hedging
Agreement entered into for the purposes of Clause 24.9 (Hedging) and has acceded to the Group Intercreditor Agreement and the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and “Hedge Counterparties” means all such counterparties.

 “Hedging Agreement” means any agreement in respect of an interest rate swap, currency swap, forward foreign
exchange transaction, cap, floor, collar or option transaction or any other treasury transaction or any combination of it or any other transaction entered into in connection with protection against or benefit from fluctuation in any rate or price.

 “Hedging Letter” means the hedging letter from the Company to the Facility Agent dated on or about
27 May 2011 which sets out the Group’s hedging policy. 
 “High Yield Notes” means the Existing High
Yield Notes, any Additional High Yield Notes and any High Yield Refinancing. 
 “High Yield Refinancing” means
any Financial Indebtedness incurred by the Parent or the Ultimate Parent for the purposes of refinancing all or a portion of the Existing High Yield Notes and/or any Additional High Yield Notes and/or any High Yield Refinancing and/or any Senior
Secured Notes and/or the Convertible Senior Notes and/or any Financial Indebtedness permitted to be incurred or outstanding pursuant to Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness), in each case, including any Financial Indebtedness incurred for the
purpose of the payment of all principal, interest, fees, expenses, commissions, make-whole and any other contractual premium payable under such Financial Indebtedness being refinanced and any reasonable fees, costs and expenses incurred in
connection with such refinancing, in respect of which the following terms apply: 
  

	 	(a)	the final maturity date or redemption date of such refinancing occurs no earlier than 31 December 2015; 

 

	 	(b)	 the principal amount of any such Financial Indebtedness shall not exceed the principal amount of, and any outstanding interest on, the Financial
Indebtedness being 

  
 29 

	 	
refinanced (plus all fees, expenses, commissions, make-whole or other contractual premium payable in connection with such refinancing); 

 

	 	(c)	it is unsecured, except that where such Financial Indebtedness is issued by the Ultimate Parent, it may be secured by a pledge of the shares in the Parent or one of its
parent companies if such Financial Indebtedness is unable to receive the benefit of the subordinated guarantees of the Company and/or Intermediate Holdco contemplated by paragraph (d) below, for tax or other reasons as reasonably determined by
the Company; and 

  

	 	(d)	if such Financial Indebtedness is guaranteed, it is not guaranteed by any member of the Bank Group other than the Company and/or Intermediate Holdco, provided that any
such guarantee or guarantees so provided are (i) granted on subordination and release terms substantially the same as the existing guarantees of the Company and Intermediate Holdco in favour of the Existing High Yield Notes and
(ii) subject to the terms of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement or a Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement. 

“Holding Company” of a company means a company of which the first-mentioned company is a Subsidiary. 

“HYD Intercreditor Agreement” means the intercreditor agreement dated 13 April 2004 between certain of the Obligors,
the Relevant Finance Parties and the indenture trustee in respect of the Existing High Yield Notes. 
 “IFRS”
means international accounting standards within the meaning of IAS Regulation 1606/2002 to the extent applicable to the relevant financial statements. 
 “Impaired Agent” means the Facility Agent at any time when: 
  

	 	(a)	it has failed to make (or has notified a Relevant Finance Party that it will not make) a payment required to be made by it under the Relevant Finance Documents by the
due date for payment; 

  

	 	(b)	the Facility Agent otherwise rescinds or repudiates a Relevant Finance Document; 

 

	 	(c)	(if the Facility Agent is also a Lender) it is a Defaulting Lender under paragraph (a) or (b) of the definition of “Defaulting Lender”; or

  

	 	(d)	an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing with respect to the Facility Agent, 

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above: 
  

	 	(i)	its failure to pay is caused by: 

  

	 	(A)	administrative or technical error; or 

  

	 	(B)	a Disruption Event; and 

payment is made within 3 Business Days of its due date; or 

 

	 	(ii)	the Facility Agent is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question. 

“Increase Confirmation” means a confirmation substantially in the form set out in Schedule 13 (Form of Increase
Confirmation). 

  
 30 

 “Increased Cost” means: 

 

	 	(a)	any reduction in the rate of return from a Facility or on a Relevant Finance Party’s (or an Affiliate’s) overall capital; 

 

	 	(b)	any additional or increased cost; or 

  

	 	(c)	any reduction of any amount due and payable under any Relevant Finance Document, 

 which is incurred or suffered by a Relevant Finance Party or any of its Affiliates to the extent that it is attributable to that Relevant Finance Party having agreed to make available its Commitment or
having funded or performed its obligations under any Relevant Finance Document. 
 “Increase Lender” has the
meaning set out in Clause 2.2(a)(ii) (Increase). 
 “Indebtedness” means any obligation (whether incurred
as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent (including interest and other charges relating to it). 
 “Information Memorandum” means the information memorandum to be dated on or around the Original Execution Date and approved by the Company concerning the Obligors which, at the request of
the Company and on its behalf, has been or will be prepared in relation to the Facilities and the business, assets, financial condition and prospects of the Group and which will be made available by the Mandated Lead Arrangers pursuant to the terms
of the B Facility Syndication Letter to selected banks and other institutions for the purpose of syndicating the B Facilities, as supplemented by the reports of the Ultimate Parent publicly filed with the SEC, including without limitation the Annual
Report on Form 10-K dated 26 February 2010. 
 “Insolvency Event” in relation to a Relevant Finance Party
means that the Relevant Finance Party: 
  

	 	(a)	is dissolved (other than pursuant to a consolidation, amalgamation or merger); 

 

	 	(b)	becomes insolvent or is unable to pay its debts or fails or admits in writing its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due; 

 

	 	(c)	makes a general assignment, arrangement or composition with or for the benefit of its creditors; 

 

	 	(d)	institutes or has instituted against it, by a regulator, supervisor or any similar official with primary insolvency, rehabilitative or regulatory jurisdiction over it
in the jurisdiction of its incorporation or organisation or the jurisdiction of its head or home office, a proceeding seeking a judgment of insolvency or bankruptcy or any other relief under any bankruptcy or insolvency law or other similar law
affecting creditors’ rights, or a petition is presented for its winding-up or liquidation by it or such regulator, supervisor or similar official; 

  

	 	(e)	has instituted against it a proceeding seeking a judgment of insolvency or bankruptcy or any other relief under any bankruptcy or insolvency law or other similar law
affecting creditors’ rights, or a petition is presented for its winding-up or liquidation, and, in the case of any such proceeding or petition instituted or presented against it, such proceeding or petition is instituted or presented by a
person or entity not described in paragraph (d) above and: 

  
 31 

	 	(i)	results in a judgment of insolvency or bankruptcy or the entry of an order for relief or the making of an order for its winding-up or liquidation; or

  

	 	(ii)	is not dismissed, discharged, stayed or restrained in each case within 30 days of the institution or presentation thereof; 

 

	 	(f)	has a resolution passed for its winding-up, official management or liquidation (other than pursuant to a consolidation, amalgamation or merger);

  

	 	(g)	seeks or becomes subject to the appointment of an administrator, provisional liquidator, conservator, receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official for it or
for all or substantially all its assets; 

  

	 	(h)	has a secured party take possession of all or substantially all its assets or has a distress, execution, attachment, sequestration or other legal process levied,
enforced or sued on or against all or substantially all its assets and such secured party maintains possession, or any such process is not dismissed, discharged, stayed or restrained, in each case within 30 days thereafter; 

 

	 	(i)	causes or is subject to any event with respect to it which, under the applicable laws of any jurisdiction, has an analogous effect to any of the events specified in
paragraphs (a) to (h) above; or 

  

	 	(j)	takes any action in furtherance of, or indicating its consent to, approval of, or acquiescence in, any of the foregoing acts. 

“Inspecting Party” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 22.6 (Access). 

“Instructing Group” means: 
  

	 	(a)	for the purposes of Clause 27.17 (Acceleration): 

  

	 	(i)	 before any Utilisation of the Facilities under this Agreement, a Lender or group of Lenders whose Available Commitments amount in aggregate to more
than 66 2/3% of the Available Facilities; and

  

	 	(ii)	 thereafter, a Lender or group of Lenders to whom in aggregate more than 66 2/3% of the aggregate amount of the Outstandings are (or if there are
no Outstandings at such time, immediately prior to their repayment, were then) owed, 

 in each case,
calculated in accordance with the provisions of Clause 44.7 (Calculation of Consent); and 
  

	 	(b)	for all other purposes under this Agreement: 

  

	 	(i)	 before any Utilisation of the Facilities under this Agreement, a Lender or group of Lenders whose Available Commitments amount in aggregate to more
than 66 2/3% of the Available Facilities; and

  

	 	(ii)	 thereafter, a Lender or group of Lenders to whom in aggregate more than 66 2/3% of the aggregate amount of the Outstandings are (or if there are
no Outstandings at such time, immediately prior to their repayment, were then) owed, 

  
 32 

	 	
in each case, calculated in accordance with the provisions of Clause 44.7 (Calculation of Consent), provided that to the extent the terms of an Additional Facility vary from the terms of
this Agreement: 

  

	 	(A)	the relevant Lenders under the applicable Additional Facility shall not be entitled to vote on any matters (including on any consent and/or waiver) with respect to any
provisions of this Agreement that do not equally apply to such Additional Facility in which case the relevant Additional Facility Commitments and any related Additional Facility Outstandings shall be excluded from the calculation of the requisite
percentage under paragraphs (b)(i) and (ii) above; 

  

	 	(B)	the relevant Lenders under the applicable Additional Facility shall be entitled to vote on any matters (including on any consent and/or waiver) with respect to any
provisions of this Agreement that equally apply to such Additional Facility in which case the relevant Additional Facility Commitments and any related Additional Facility Outstandings shall be included in the calculation of the requisite percentage
under paragraphs (b)(i) and (ii) above; and 

  

	 	(C)	only the relevant Lenders under the applicable Additional Facility shall be entitled to vote on any matters (including any consent and/or waiver) with respect to any
provisions that solely apply to such Additional Facility or Additional Facilities in which case only the relevant Commitments and any related Outstandings under such Additional Facility or Additional Facilities shall be included in the calculation
of the requisite percentage under paragraphs (b)(i) and (ii) above, 

 and provided further that, in each case
of paragraphs (a) and (b) above, for the purposes of any references in the HYD Intercreditor Agreement to the definition of “Instructing Group” in this Agreement, “Instructing Group” means Instructing Party as defined
in the Group Intercreditor Agreement. 
 “Intellectual Property Rights” means any patent, trade mark, service
mark, registered design, trade name or copyright or any license to use any of the same. 
 “Interest” has the
meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 
 “Interest Coverage Ratio” has
the meaning given to such term in paragraph (b) of Clause 23.2 (Ratio). 
 “Interest Period”
means, save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, any of those periods mentioned in Clause 14.1 (Interest Periods for Term Facility Advances). 
 “Intermediate Holdco” means Virgin Media Investments Limited, a company incorporated in England and Wales under registered number 7108297 and having its registered office at 160 Great
Portland Street, London W1W 5QA. 
 “Intra-Group Services” means: 

 

	 	(a)	the sale of programming or other Content by any member(s) of the Group to one or more members of the Bank Group on arms’ length terms; 

 

	 	(b)	 the lease or sublease of office space, other premises or equipment on arms’ length terms by one or more members of the Bank Group to one or more
members of the 

  
 33 

	 	
Group or by one or more members of the Group to one or more members of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(c)	the provision or receipt of other services, facilities or other arrangements (in each case not constituting Financial Indebtedness) in the ordinary course of business,
by or from one or more members of the Bank Group to or from one or more members of the Group including, without limitation, (i) the employment of personnel, (ii) provision of employee healthcare or other benefits, (iii) acting as
agent to buy equipment, other assets or services or to trade with residential or business customers, and (iv) the provision of audit, accounting, banking, IT, telephony, office, administrative, compliance, payroll or other similar services
provided that the consideration for the provision thereof is, in the reasonable opinion of the Company, no less than Cost; and 

  

	 	(d)	the extension, in the ordinary course of business and on terms no less favourable to the relevant member of the Bank Group than arms’ length terms, by or to any
member of the Bank Group to or by any such member of the Group of trade credit not constituting Financial Indebtedness in relation to the provision or receipt of Intra-Group Services referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above.

 “ISDA” means the International Swaps & Derivatives Association, Inc. 

“ITA” means the Income Tax Act 2007. 
 “Joint Venture” means any joint venture, partnership or similar arrangement between any member of the Bank Group and any other person that is not a member of the Bank Group. 

“Joint Venture Group” means any Joint Venture and its subsidiaries from time to time, including the UKTV Group.

 “Law” means: 
  

	 	(a)	common or customary law; 

  

	 	(b)	any constitution, decree, judgment, legislation, order, ordinance, regulation, statute, treaty or other legislative measure in any jurisdiction; and

  

	 	(c)	any directive, regulation, practice, requirement which has the force of law and which is issued by any governmental body, agency or department or any central bank or
other fiscal, monetary, regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or agency. 

 “L/C Bank”
means the Original L/C Bank and any other Lender which has been appointed as an L/C Bank in accordance with Clause 5.11 (Appointment and Change of L/C Bank) and which has not resigned in accordance with paragraph (c) of
Clause 5.11 (Appointment and Change of L/C Bank). 
 “L/C Bank Accession Certificate” means a duly
completed accession certificate in the form set out in Schedule 11 (Form of L/C Bank Accession Certificate). 

“L/C Lender” has the meaning set out in Clause 5.1(b) (Issue of Documentary Credits). 

“L/C Proportion” means, in relation to a Lender in respect of any Documentary Credit and save as otherwise provided in
this Agreement, the proportion (expressed as a percentage) borne by such Lender’s Available Revolving Facility Commitment to the Available Revolving Facility immediately prior to the issue of such Documentary Credit. 

“Legal Opinions” means any of the legal opinions referred to in paragraph 9 of Part 1 of Schedule 3 (Conditions
Precedent to First Utilisation) and paragraph 2 of Part 4 of Schedule 

  
 34 

 
5 (Accession Documents) delivered pursuant to Clause 3.1 (Conditions Precedent) and Clause 26 (Acceding Group Companies), respectively. 

“Lender” means: 
  

	 	(a)	an Original Lender; 

  

	 	(b)	a person (including each L/C Bank and each Ancillary Facility Lender) which has become a party to this Agreement as a Lender in accordance with the provisions of
Clause 37 (Assignments and Transfers); 

  

	 	(c)	a person which has become a party to this Agreement as a Lender by executing a B Facility Accession Deed; or 

 

	 	(d)	a person which has become a party to this Agreement as a Lender by executing an Additional Facility Accession Deed, 

which in each case has not ceased to be a Lender in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 

“Leverage Ratio” has the meaning given to such term in paragraph (a) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios).

 “LIBOR” means, in relation to any amount to be advanced to or owed by an Obligor under this Agreement in a
currency (other than euro) on which interest for a given period is to accrue: 
  

	 	(a)	the rate per annum which appears on the Relevant Page for such period at or about 11.00 a.m. on the Quotation Date for such period; or 

 

	 	(b)	if no such rate is displayed and the Facility Agent shall not have selected an alternative service on which such rate is displayed as contemplated by the definition of
“Relevant Page”, the arithmetic mean (rounded upwards, if not already such a multiple, to the nearest 4 decimal places) of the rates (as notified to the Facility Agent) at which each of the Reference Banks was offering to prime banks in
the London interbank market deposits in the relevant currency for such period at or about 11.00 am on the Quotation Date for such period. 

 “Liquidation Transfer” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.18(a) (Internal Reorganisations). 

“Major Event of Default” means an Event of Default arising under any of the following provisions: 

 

	 	(a)	Clause 27.1 (Non-Payment); 

  

	 	(b)	Clause 27.2 (Covenants); 

  

	 	(c)	Clause 27.5 (Cross Default); 

  

	 	(d)	Clause 27.6 (Insolvency); 

  

	 	(e)	Clause 27.7 (Winding-up); 

  

	 	(f)	Clause 27.8 (Execution or Distress); 

  

	 	(g)	Clause 27.9 (Similar Events); 

  
 35 

	 	(h)	Clause 27.10 (Repudiation); 

  

	 	(i)	Clause 27.11 (Illegality); 

  

	 	(j)	Clause 27.12 (Intercreditor Default); and 

  

	 	(k)	Clause 27.14 (Material Adverse Effect). 

 “Mandatory Cost” means the percentage rate per annum calculated by the Facility Agent in accordance with Schedule 7 (Mandatory Cost Formula). 

“Margin Stock” shall have the meaning provided in Regulation U. 

“Marketable Securities” means any security which is listed on any publicly recognised stock exchange and which has, or is
issued by a company which has, a capitalisation of not less than £1 billion (or its equivalent in other currencies) as at the time such Marketable Securities are acquired by any member of the Bank Group by way of consideration for any disposal
permitted under Clause 25.6 (Disposals). 
 “Market Disruption Event” has the meaning given to such
term in clause 15.2(c) (Market Disruption). 
 “Material Adverse Effect” means: 

 

	 	(a)	other than with respect to clause 27.13 (Revocation of Necessary Authorisations), clause 27.14 (Material Adverse Effect) and clause 27.15 (Material
Proceedings), a material adverse change in: 

  

	 	(i)	the financial condition, assets or business of the Obligors (taken as a whole); or 

 

	 	(ii)	the ability of any Obligor to perform and comply with its payment or other material obligations under any Relevant Finance Document (taking into account the resources
available to such Obligor from any other member of the Bank Group); and 

  

	 	(b)	with respect to clause 27.13 (Revocation of Necessary Authorisations), clause 27.14 (Material Adverse Effect) and clause 27.15 (Material
Proceedings), a material adverse change in: 

  

	 	(i)	the financial condition, assets or business of the Obligors (taken as a whole); and 

 

	 	(ii)	the ability of the Obligors (taken together) to perform and comply with its payment or other material obligations under any Relevant Finance Document (taking into
account the resources available to the Obligors from any other member of the Bank Group). 

 “Material
Subsidiary” means, at any time, a member of the Bank Group whose contribution to Consolidated Operating Cashflow (on a consolidated basis if it has Subsidiaries) represents at least 5% of the Consolidated Operating Cashflow calculated by
reference to the most recent financial statements of the Bank Group delivered pursuant to paragraph (b)(ii) of Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements). 
 “Maturing Advance” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 8.2 (Rollover Advances). 
 “Merged Entity” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.8(d) (Mergers). 

  
 36 

 “Moody’s” means Moody’s Investor Services, Inc. or any successor
thereof. 
 “Multiemployer Plan” shall mean any multiemployer plan as defined in Section 4001(a)(3) of
ERISA, which is maintained or contributed to by (or to which there is an obligation to contribute of) any member of the Group or an ERISA Affiliate, and each such plan for the five year period immediately following the latest date on which any
member of the Group or an ERISA Affiliate maintained, contributed to or had an obligation to contribute to such plan. 

“Necessary Authorisations” means all Authorisations (including Environmental Licences and any Authorisations issued
pursuant to or any deemed Authorisations under any Statutory Requirements) of any person including any government or other regulatory authority required by applicable Law to enable it to: 

 

	 	(a)	lawfully enter into and perform its obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party; 

 

	 	(b)	ensure the legality, validity, enforceability or admissibility in evidence in England and, if different, its jurisdiction of incorporation or establishment, of such
Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party; and 

  

	 	(c)	carry on its business from time to time. 

 “Net Proceeds” means: 
  

	 	(a)	any cash proceeds received by any member of the Bank Group (including, when received, any cash proceeds received by way of deferred instalment of purchase price or from
the sale of Cash Equivalent Investments or Marketable Securities acquired by any member of the Bank Group in consideration for any Disposal as contemplated under Clause 25.6 (Disposals) but excluding any repayment of any loan or
Financial Indebtedness in connection therewith) from any Disposal after deducting: 

  

	 	(i)	all taxes paid or reasonably estimated by such member of the Bank Group to be payable by any member of the Bank Group as a result of that Disposal;

  

	 	(ii)	all reasonable fees, commissions, costs and expenses incurred by such member of the Bank Group in arranging or effecting that Disposal, including, without limitation,
any amount required to be paid by any member of the Bank Group to any proprietor of any intellectual property rights (not being a member of the Bank Group) (including intellectual property licences) related to the assets disposed of where such
payment is on arms’ length terms and is required to enable such intellectual property rights to be transferred with such assets to the extent necessary to facilitate the applicable Disposal and any related redundancy, relocation and
restructuring costs (as evidenced in reasonable detail to the Facility Agent on request); 

  

	 	(iii)	in the case of a Disposal effected by a member of the Bank Group other than a Borrower, such provision as is reasonable for all costs and taxes (after taking into
account all available credits, deductions and allowances) incurred by the Bank Group to a person other than a member of the Bank Group and fairly attributable to up streaming the cash proceeds to a Borrower or making any distribution in connection
with such proceeds to enable them to reach a Borrower; 

  

	 	(iv)	any cash proceeds which are to be applied towards discharging any Encumbrance over such asset; 

  
 37 

	 	(v)	in the case of a Disposal of a non-wholly-owned Subsidiary or Joint Venture, to the extent received by any member of the Bank Group, any cash proceeds attributable to
any interest in such Subsidiary or Joint Venture owned by any person other than a member of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(vi)	any amounts reserved for any possible warranty or indemnity claim in relation to any Disposal provided that such amounts shall be added back to Net Proceeds once any
such reserve is reversed; and 

  

	 	(b)	the cash proceeds received by any member of the Bank Group of any claim for loss or destruction of or damage to the property of a member of the Bank Group under any
insurance policy after deducting any such proceeds relating to the third party or public liability claims which are applied towards meeting such claims (and, for the avoidance of doubt, excluding any proceeds received for any claim under any
business interruption or similar insurance) and any reasonable costs incurred in recovering the same. 

“New Equity” means a subscription for capital stock of the Ultimate Parent or any other form of equity contribution to
the Ultimate Parent, in each case, where such subscription or contribution does not result in a Change of Control. 

“New Lender” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 37.5 (Assignments or Transfers by Lenders).

 “Non-Acceptable L/C Lender” means a Lender under the Revolving Facility which the Facility Agent has
determined: 
  

	 	(a)	is not an Acceptable Bank within the meaning of paragraph (a) of the definition of “Acceptable Bank” (other than a Lender which each L/C Bank has agreed
is acceptable to it notwithstanding that fact or an Original Lender); or 

  

	 	(b)	is a Defaulting Lender; or 

  

	 	(c)	has failed to make (or has notified the Facility Agent that it will not make) a payment to be made by it under Clause 29.2 (Indemnity) or Clause 30.10
(Lender’s Indemnity) or any other payment to be made by it under the Relevant Finance Documents to or for the account of any other Relevant Finance Party in its capacity as Lender by the due date for payment unless the failure to pay
falls within the description of any of those items set out at (i) – (ii) of the definition of Defaulting Lender. 

 “Non-Consenting Lender” is a Lender which does not agree to a consent to an amendment to, or a waiver of, any provision of the Relevant Finance Documents where: 

 

	 	(a)	the Company or the Facility Agent has requested the Lenders to consent to an amendment to, or waiver, of any provision of the Relevant Finance Documents;

  

	 	(b)	the consent or amendment in question requires the agreement of the Lenders affected thereby pursuant to Clause 44.2 (Consents) (and such Lender is one of the
Lenders affected thereby); 

  

	 	(c)	Lenders representing not less than 80% of the Commitments or Outstandings, as the case may be, of the Lenders affected thereby have agreed to such consent or amendment;
and 

  

	 	(d)	the Company has notified the Lender it will treat it as a Non-Consenting Lender. 

  
 38 

 “Non-Funding Lender” is either: 

 

	 	(a)	a Lender which fails to comply with its obligation to participate in any Advance where: 

 

	 	(i)	all conditions to the relevant Utilisation (including without limitation, delivery of a Utilisation Request) have been satisfied or waived by an Instructing Group in
accordance with the terms of this Agreement; 

  

	 	(ii)	Lenders representing not less than 80% of the relevant Commitments have agreed to comply with their obligations to participate in such Advance; and

  

	 	(iii)	the Company has notified the Lender that it will treat it as a Non-Funding Lender; 

 

	 	(b)	a Lender which has given notice to a Borrower or the Facility Agent that it will not make, or it has disaffirmed or repudiated any obligation to participate in, an
Advance; or 

  

	 	(c)	a Defaulting Lender. 

“Non-Bank Group Member” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 24.12(f) (Further Assurance).

 “Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 38 (Debt Purchase
Transactions). 
 “NTL South Herts” means NTL (South Hertfordshire) Limited, a company incorporated in
England and Wales with registered number 2401044. 
 “Obligors” means the Borrowers and the Guarantors and
“Obligor” means any of them. 
 “Obligors’ Agent” means the Company in its capacity as
agent for the Parent and the Obligors pursuant to Clause 30.17 (Obligors’ Agent). 
 “Optional
Currency” means, in relation to any Advance, any currency other than euro, Dollars and Sterling which: 
  

	 	(a)	is readily available to banks in the London interbank market, and is freely convertible into Sterling on the Quotation Date and the Utilisation Date for the relevant
Advance; and 

  

	 	(b)	has been approved by the Facility Agent (acting on the instructions of all the Lenders) on or prior to receipt by the Facility Agent of the relevant Utilisation
Request. 

 “Original Borrower” means each of the Company, Virgin Media Limited, VM Wholesale, UK
Newco and VMIH Sub 
 “Original Company” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.13(k)
(Acquisitions and Investments). 
 “Original Entity” has the meaning given to such term in
Clause 25.8(d) (Mergers). 
 “Original Execution Date” means 16 March 2010. 

“Original Financial Statements” means the audited consolidated financial statements of the Ultimate Parent for the
financial year ended 31 December 2009. 

  
 39 

 “Original Guarantor” means each of the companies and partnerships listed in
Part 1 of Schedule 2 (The Original Guarantors) which are signatories to this Agreement on the Original Execution Date or which will accede to this Agreement on or prior to the first Utilisation Date and which, in each case, has not ceased to
be a party to this Agreement in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 
 “Original Lender” means a person
(including each L/C Bank and each Ancillary Facility Lender) which is named in Part 1 of Schedule 1 (Lenders and Commitments). 
 “Original Obligors” means the Original Borrowers and the Original Guarantors. 
 “Original Security Documents” means the security documents listed in Schedule 9 (Original Security Documents). 

“Outstanding L/C Amount” means: 
  

	 	(a)	each sum paid or payable by an L/C Bank to a Beneficiary pursuant to the terms of a Documentary Credit; and 

 

	 	(b)	all liabilities, costs (including, without limitation, any costs incurred in funding any amount which falls due from an L/C Bank under a Documentary Credit), claims,
losses and expenses which an L/C Bank (or any of the L/C Lenders) incurs or sustains in connection with a Documentary Credit, 

 in each case which has not been reimbursed or in respect of which cash cover has not been provided by or on behalf of a relevant Borrower. 

“Outstandings” means, at any time, the Term Facility Outstandings, the Revolving Facility Outstandings and any Ancillary
Facility Outstandings. 
 “Paper Form Lender” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 41.3(b) (Use
of Websites/E-mail). 
 “Parent Debt” means any Financial Indebtedness of the Ultimate Parent or one or more
of its Subsidiaries (other than a member of the Bank Group) in the form of: 
  

	 	(a)	Convertible Senior Notes and/or any Financial Indebtedness incurred after the Original Execution Date that refinances such notes in whole or in part;

  

	 	(b)	High Yield Notes; and/or 

  

	 	(c)	any Financial Indebtedness incurred after the Original Execution Date that could have been incurred by any member of the Bank Group pursuant to Clause 25.4
(Financial Indebtedness) at the time of the incurrence of such Financial Indebtedness, 

 provided that, in
respect of any such Financial Indebtedness incurred after the Original Execution Date, such Financial Indebtedness is designated as “Parent Debt” by written notice from the Company to the Facility Agent and the Security Trustee by the date
when the consolidated financial statements are due to be provided pursuant to clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statements) for the first full Financial Quarter after such incurrence. 

“Parent Intercompany Debt” means any Financial Indebtedness owed by any member of the Bank Group to the Ultimate Parent
or to its Subsidiaries (other than another member of the Bank Group) from time to time and: 
  

	 	(a)	which is subordinated to the Facilities pursuant to the terms of the Group Intercreditor Agreement and the HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  
 40 

	 	(b)	if not already subject to Security created under the Original Security Documents, Security in favour of the Security Trustee on terms satisfactory to the Security
Trustee is promptly granted by the relevant creditor over its rights; and 

  

	 	(c)	if such Financial Indebtedness is in form of a guarantee, then such guarantee is not given by any member of the Bank Group other than the Company and/or Intermediate
Holdco provided that any such guarantee so provided is (i) on subordination and release terms substantially the same as the existing guarantees of Company and Holdco in favour of the Existing High Yield Notes and (ii) subject to the terms
of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement or Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement. 

 “Participating
Employers” means the Company and any members of the Group which participate or have at any time participated in a UK Pension Scheme. 
 “Participating Member State” means any member of the European Community that at the relevant time has adopted the euro as its lawful currency in accordance with legislation of the
European Community relating to Economic and Monetary Union. 
 “Patriot Act” has the meaning given to such term
in Clause 41.7 (Patriot Act). 
 “PAYE” means The Pay As You Earn System provided for at Part 11
Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 and related regulations, as also extended to the collection of National Insurance Contributions. 
 “Paying Lender” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 6.3(g) (Ancillary Facility Default). 
 “PBGC” means the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation established pursuant to section 4002 of ERISA, or any successor to it. 

“Pensions Regulator” means the body corporate established under Part 1 of the Pensions Act 2004. 

“Permitted Acquisition” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.13(m) (Acquisitions and Investments).

 “Permitted Auditors” means any of Pricewaterhouse Coopers, Ernst & Young, Deloitte & Touche
or KPMG or any of their respective successors or any other internationally recognised firm of accountants. 
 “Permitted
Joint Venture Net Operating Cash Flow” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 
 “Permitted Joint Venture Proceeds” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 

“Permitted Joint Ventures” means any Joint Venture permitted under Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures) that the
Company designates as such by giving notice in writing to the Facility Agent. 
 “Permitted Payments” means:

  

	 	(a)	 the payment of any dividend, payment, loan or other distribution, or the repayment of a loan or the redemption of loan stock or redeemable equity made,
at any time, to fund the payment of expenses (including taxes and the buy back of stock from employees) by any member of the Group the aggregate amount of such payments being no greater than £35 million (or its equivalent) in each
financial year; provided 

  
 41 

	 	
that any amount of such basket amount that remains unused at the end of any financial year may be carried forward and used to fund such payment in the following financial year at the
Obligors’ discretion (and any such amount carried forward will be treated as having been utilised before the original basket amount available in such following financial year); 

 

	 	(b)	the payment of any dividend, payment, loan or other distribution, or the repayment of a loan, or the redemption of loan stock or redeemable equity, in each case, which
is required in order to facilitate the making of payments by any member of the Group and to the extent required: 

  

	 	(i)	by the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(ii)	by the terms of the Senior Secured Notes Documents; 

  

	 	(iii)	by the terms of any Parent Debt (or, in each case, any guarantee of the obligations thereunder); 

 

	 	(iv)	by the terms of any Hedging Agreement that is permitted to be entered into and/or maintained pursuant to Clause 25.12 (Limitations on Hedging) or required
to be entered into and/or maintained pursuant to Clause 24.9 (Hedging) to the extent such payment is not prohibited by the Group Intercreditor Agreement; 

 

	 	(v)	by the purposes of implementing any Content Transaction or Business Division Transaction; or 

 

	 	(vi)	by the terms of any Subordinated Funding to the extent required to facilitate any Permitted Payments, 

where, in the case of sub-paragraphs (i) to (vi) above, the payment under the relevant indebtedness or obligation referred to
therein has fallen due or will fall due within five Business Days of such Permitted Payment being made; 
  

	 	(c)	the payment of any dividend, payment, loan or other distribution, or the repayment of a loan, or the redemption of loan stock or redeemable equity, in each case, which
is required in order to fund the making of payments by any member of the Group in order to redeem, repay, prepay, repurchase, retire, defease or otherwise acquire for value any of the 2014 High Yield Notes and to pay any related costs and expenses;

  

	 	(d)	any payment of any dividend, payment, loan or other distribution, or the repayment of a loan, or the redemption of loan stock or redeemable equity made to any member of
the Group (other than a member of the Bank Group), provided that: 

  

	 	(i)	an amount equal to such payment is reinvested by such member of the Group (other than the Bank Group) into a member of the Bank Group within 3 days of receipt thereof;

  

	 	(ii)	the aggregate principal amount of such payments and reinvested amounts at any one time does not exceed an amount equal to £300 million; and

  

	 	(iii)	to the extent any such payments are made in cash, any re-invested amounts are also made in cash provided that any such re-invested amounts shall be in the form of
Subordinated Funding, equity or the repayment of an intercompany loan or advance; 

  
 42 

	 	(e)	any payment of any dividend, payment, loan or other distribution, or the repayment of a loan, or the redemption of loan stock or redeemable equity:

  

	 	(i)	in an amount of up to £10 million per annum plus an additional amount per annum, up to the maximum amount specified below determined by reference to the
Leverage Ratio (rounded to the second decimal number) immediately prior to the declaration of such dividend or the making of such payment, loan or other distribution (calculated on a pro forma basis after giving effect to such payment) in accordance
with the following table: 

  

			
	 Leverage Ratio
	  	Maximum Amount Per
Annum
	 Greater than 3.75x
	  	£100 million
	 Less than or equal to 3.75x
	  	No Limit

  

	 	(ii)	in an amount of up to £200 million from the cash proceeds of a Content Transaction; and 

 

	 	(iii)	in an amount of up to £200 million from the cash proceeds of a Business Division Transaction provided that the Leverage Ratio immediately prior to the
declaration of such dividend or the making of such payment, loan or other distribution is less than 4.0:1, 

 in
each case, provided always that no Event of Default has occurred or is continuing or would result following such payment; 
  

	 	(f)	any payments made pursuant to and in accordance with the Tax Cooperation Agreement, provided that: 

 

	 	(i)	a copy of the certification or filings referred to in clause 5 of the Tax Cooperation Agreement, as the case may be, shall have been provided to the Facility Agent not
less than five Business Days before such payment is to be made; and 

  

	 	(ii)	any payments made to any Holding Company of VMIH for the purposes of settling any liabilities owed to the United States Internal Revenue Service which have arisen
following implementation of the relevant steps set out in the Steps Paper may be made in an amount not exceeding £185 million from cash reserves of the Bank Group and in respect of any amount in excess of £185 million from:

  

	 	(A)	any Net Proceeds; 

  

	 	(B)	any Excess Cash Flow; 

  

	 	(C)	any Equity Proceeds; 

  

	 	(D)	the proceeds of any Financial Indebtedness permitted to be incurred pursuant to Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness); or 

 

	 	(E)	the proceeds of any Parent Intercompany Debt or the proceeds of any Equity Equivalent Funding, 

and provided always that immediately prior to and immediately after such payment, the Bank Group remains in compliance with the financial
covenants set out in Clause 23.2 (Ratios) as applicable for the Quarter Date falling 

  
 43 

 
immediately prior to such payment and calculated on a pro forma basis after giving effect to such payment; or 
  

	 	(g)	any payment of any dividend, payment, loan or other distribution, or the repayment of a loan, or the redemption of loan stock or redeemable equity made pursuant to an
Asset Passthrough or a Funding Passthrough, in each case, funded solely from cash generated by entities outside of the Bank Group. 

 “Plan” means any pension plan as defined in section 3(2) of ERISA, which (i) is maintained or contributed to by (or to which there is an obligation to contribute by) any member of
the Group or an ERISA Affiliate, and each such plan for the 5 year period immediately following the latest date on which any member of the Group or an ERISA Affiliate maintained, contributed to or had an obligation to contribute to such plan and
(ii) is subject to ERISA, but excluding any Multiemployer Plan. 
 “Predecessor Obligor” has the meaning
given to such term in Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations). 
 “Proceedings” has the meaning
given to such term in Clause 48.1 (Courts). 
 “Project Company” means a Subsidiary of a company (or
a person in which such company has an interest) which has a special purpose and whose creditors have no recourse to any member of the Bank Group in respect of Financial Indebtedness of that Subsidiary or person, as the case may be, or any of such
Subsidiary’s or person’s Subsidiaries (other than recourse to such member of the Bank Group who had granted an Encumbrance over its shares or other interests in such Project Company beneficially owned by it provided that such recourse is
limited to an enforcement of such an Encumbrance). 
 “Proportion” in relation to a Lender, means: 

 

	 	(a)	in relation to an Advance to be made under this Agreement, the proportion borne by such Lender’s Available Commitment in respect of the relevant Facility, the
relevant Borrower and the relevant currency to the relevant Available Facility; 

  

	 	(b)	in relation to an Advance or Advances outstanding under this Agreement, the proportion borne by such Lender’s share of the Sterling Amount of such Advance or
Advances to the total Sterling Amount thereof; 

  

	 	(c)	if paragraph (a) above does not apply and there are no Outstandings, the proportion borne by the aggregate of such Lender’s Available Commitment to the
Available Facilities (or if the Available Facilities are then zero, by its Available Commitment to the Available Facilities immediately prior to their reduction to zero); and 

 

	 	(d)	if paragraph (b) above does not apply and there are any Outstandings, the proportion borne by such Lender’s share of the Sterling Amount of the Outstandings
to the Sterling Amount of all the Outstandings for the time being. 

 “Protected Party” means a
Relevant Finance Party or any Affiliate of a Relevant Finance Party which is or will be, subject to any Tax Liability in relation to any amount payable under or in relation to a Relevant Finance Document. 

“Public Lender” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 41.4 (Public Information). 

“Qualifying UK Lender” means in relation to a payment of interest on a participation in an Advance to a UK Borrower, a
Lender which is: 
  

	 	(a)	a UK Bank Lender; 

  
 44 

	 	(b)	a UK Non-Bank Lender; or 

  

	 	(c)	a UK Treaty Lender. 

“Quarter Date” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions). 

“Quotation Date” means, in relation to any currency and any period for which an interest rate is to be determined:

  

	 	(a)	if the relevant currency is Sterling, the first day of that period; 

  

	 	(b)	if the relevant currency is euro, 2 TARGET Days before the first day of that period; or 

 

	 	(c)	in relation to any other currency, 2 Business Days before the first day of that period, 

provided that if market practice differs in the Relevant Interbank Market for a currency, the Quotation Date for that currency will be
determined by the Facility Agent in accordance with market practice in the Relevant Interbank Market (and if quotations would normally be given by leading banks in the Relevant Interbank Market on more than one day, the Quotation Date will be the
last of those days). 
 “Recipient” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 39.6(d) (Value Added
Tax). 
 “Recovering Relevant Finance Party” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 35.1
(Payments to Relevant Finance Parties). 
 “Reference Banks” means the principal London offices of
Deutsche Bank, BNP Paribas and Lloyds TSB Bank plc or such other bank or banks as may be appointed as such by the Facility Agent after consultation with the Company. 
 “Regulation T” means Regulation T of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System as from to time in effect and any successor to all or any portion thereof. 

“Regulation U” means Regulation U of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System as from time to time in effect
and any successor to all or a portion thereof. 
 “Regulation X” means Regulation X of the Board of Governors of
the Federal Reserve System as from time to time in effect and any successor to all or any portion thereof. 
 “Relevant
Finance Documents” means: 
  

	 	(a)	this Agreement, any Documentary Credit, any Accession Notices and any Transfer Deed; 

 

	 	(b)	the Fee Letters; 

  

	 	(c)	the B Facility Syndication Letter; 

  

	 	(d)	any Ancillary Facility Documents; 

  

	 	(e)	the Security Documents; 

  

	 	(f)	the Security Trust Agreement; 

  

	 	(g)	the Group Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(h)	the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and any Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  
 45 

	 	(i)	the Barclays Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(j)	the Hedging Agreements either entered into pursuant to Clause 24.9 (Hedging) or permitted to be entered into pursuant to Clause 25.12 (Limitation on
Hedging); 

  

	 	(k)	each Additional Facility Accession Deed; 

  

	 	(l)	each B Facility Accession Deed; 

  

	 	(m)	each Utilisation Request; 

  

	 	(n)	each Compliance Certificate; and 

  

	 	(o)	any other agreement or document designated a “Relevant Finance Document” in writing by the Facility Agent and the Company. 

“Relevant Finance Parties” means the Facility Agent, the Arrangers, the Bookrunners, the Security Trustee, the Lenders
and each Hedge Counterparty and “Relevant Finance Party” means any of them. 
 “Relevant Interbank
Market” means, in relation to euro, the European Interbank Market and in relation to any other currency, the London interbank market therefor. 
 “Relevant Page” means the page of the Reuters screen on which is displayed in relation to LIBOR, BBA LIBOR for the relevant currency, or, in relation to EURIBOR, the European offered
rates for euro, or, if such page or service shall cease to be available, such other page or service which displays the London interbank offered rates for the relevant currency as the Facility Agent, after consultation with the Lenders and the
Company, shall select. 
 “Relevant Proportion” means the proportion (expressed as a percentage) of: 

 

	 	(a)	the aggregate of the A Facility Commitments and B Facility Commitments; to 

 

	 	(b)	the aggregate of all Commitments under this Agreement. 

 “Relevant Tax Jurisdiction” means: 
  

	 	(a)	the United Kingdom, in relation to a UK Borrower; and 

  

	 	(b)	any jurisdiction in which any person is liable to tax by reason of its domicile, residence, place of management or other similar criteria (but not any jurisdiction in
respect of which that person is liable to tax by reason only of its having a source of income in that jurisdiction). 

 “Renewal Request” means, in relation to a Documentary Credit, a Utilisation Request therefor, in respect of which the proposed Utilisation Date stated in it is the Expiry Date of an
existing Documentary Credit and the proposed Sterling Amount is the same or less than the Sterling Amount of that existing Documentary Credit. 
 “Repayment Date” means: 
  

	 	(a)	in relation to any Revolving Facility Advance, the last day of its Term; 

  

	 	(b)	in respect of the A Facility Outstandings, the A1 Facility Outstandings and the A2 Facility Outstandings, each of the dates specified in Clause 9.1 (Repayment
of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings) as an Amortisation Repayment Date for it and the relevant Final Maturity Date; and 

  
 46 

	 	(c)	in respect of the Additional Facility Outstandings, the B Facility Outstandings and the B1 Facility Outstandings, the relevant Final Maturity Date,

 provided that if any such day is not a Business Day in the relevant jurisdiction for payment, the Repayment Date
will be the next succeeding Business Day in the then current calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not). 
 “Repayment Instalment” means, in respect of the A Facility Outstandings, the A1 Facility Outstandings and the A2 Facility Outstandings, the amounts required to be paid by way of repayment
on each Repayment Date for it. 
 “Repeating Representations” means the representations and warranties set out
in Clauses 21.2 (Due Organisation), 21.5 (No Immunity), 21.6 (Governing Law and Judgments), 21.9 (Binding Obligations), 21.11 (No Event of Default), 21.18 (Execution of Relevant Finance Documents),
21.27 (Investment Company Act), 21.28 (Margin Stock), 21.33 (US Patriot Act) and 21.34 (Compliance with ERISA). 
 “Resignation Letter” means a letter substantially in the form set out in Schedule 15 (Form of Resignation Letter). 

“Reservations” means: 
  

	 	(a)	the principle that equitable remedies are remedies which may be granted or refused at the discretion of the court, the limitation of enforcement by laws relating to
bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation, reorganisation, court schemes, moratoria, administration and other laws generally affecting the rights of creditors, the time barring of claims under any applicable law, the possibility that an undertaking to
assume liability for or to indemnify against non-payment of any stamp duty or other tax may be void, defences of set-off or counterclaim and similar principles; 

 

	 	(b)	any general principles, reservations or qualifications, in each case as to matters of law as set out in any Legal Opinion delivered to the Facility Agent (provided that
where any such Legal Opinion has been delivered in relation to a particular Obligor and/or a particular document, the said general principles, reservations or qualifications shall only be deemed to apply to such Obligor and/or document (other than
in the case where the definition is used in respect of a person and/or a document in respect of which a Legal Opinion has not been rendered under this Agreement where the said general principles, reservations or qualifications shall, to the extent
applicable, be deemed to apply to such person and/or document)); 

  

	 	(c)	any circumstance arising through a failure to obtain any consent from any lessor, licensor or other counterparty whose consent is required to the grant of any Security
over any lease, licence or other agreement or contract on or before the execution of a Security Document; 

  

	 	(d)	the principle that any additional interest imposed under any relevant agreement may be held to be unenforceable on the grounds that it is a penalty and thus void;

  

	 	(e)	the principle that in certain circumstances security granted by way of fixed charge may be characterised as a floating charge or that security purported to be
constituted by way of an assignment may be recharacterised as a charge; 

  

	 	(f)	the principle that an English court may not give effect to an indemnity for legal costs incurred by an unsuccessful litigant; and 

  
 47 

	 	(g)	similar principles, rights and defences under the laws of any relevant jurisdiction to the extent that they are relevant and applicable. 

“Restricted Guarantors” means: 
  

	 	(a)	each of the Original Guarantors listed in Part 2 of Schedule 2 (The Restricted Guarantors); and 

 

	 	(b)	any other Guarantor that accedes to this Agreement pursuant to Clause 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors), which is (i) incorporated, created or organised under
the laws of the United States or any State of the United States (including the District of Columbia) and is a “United States person” (as defined in Section 7701(a)(30) of the Code); or (ii) treated for US federal income tax
purposes as a disregarded entity that is a branch of a Guarantor described in sub-paragraph (b)(i) hereof. 

“Restricted Party” means any person listed in the Annex to the Executive Order referred to in the definition of
“Anti-Terrorism Laws” or on the “Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons” list maintained by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the United States Department of the Treasury. 

“Revised Definitions” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 22.7 (Change in Accounting Practices).

 “Revised Ratios” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 22.7 (Change in Accounting Practices).

 “Revolving Facility” means the revolving loan facility (including any Ancillary Facility and the Documentary
Credit facility) granted to the relevant Borrower pursuant to Clause 2.1(c) (The Facilities). 
 “Revolving
Facility Instructing Group” means: 
  

	 	(a)	 before any Utilisation of the Revolving Facility under this Agreement, a Lender or group of Lenders whose Available Revolving Facility Commitments
amount in aggregate to more than 66 2/3% of the
Available Revolving Facility; and 

  

	 	(b)	 thereafter, a Lender or group of Lenders to whom in aggregate more than 66 2/3% of the aggregate amount of the Revolving Facility Outstandings are
(or if there are no Revolving Facility Outstandings at such time, immediately prior to their repayment, were then) owed, 

 in each case calculated in accordance with the provisions of Clause 44.7 (Calculation of Consent). 
 “Revolving Facility Margin” means, in relation to Revolving Facility Advances and subject to Clause 13.3 (Margin Ratchet for Revolving Facility Advances), 3.50% per
annum. 
 “Revolving Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate outstanding amount of each
Revolving Facility Advance and of each Revolving Lenders Participation in an Outstanding L/C Amount. 
 “Roll
Consent” means, with respect to a Lender, that such Lender has consented, pursuant to Clause 44.2 (Consents), in a form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent, with respect to such Lender’s A Facility Commitments and A
Facility Outstandings and B Facility Commitments and B Facility Outstandings, becoming A1 Facility Commitments and A1 Facility Outstandings, A2 Facility Commitments and A2 Facility Outstandings and B1 Facility Commitments and B1 Facility
Outstandings, as applicable. 

  
 48 

 “Roll Effective Date” means 15 February 2010. 

“Rollover Advance” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 8.2 (Rollover Advances). 

“Screenshop” means Screenshop Limited, a company incorporated under the laws of England and Wales with registered number
3529106. 
 “Screenshop Intra-Group Loan Agreement” means the loan agreement dated 10 May 2005 between
Screenshop and Flextech Broadband Limited. 
 “SEC” means the United States Securities and Exchange Commission.

 “Second Amendment Record Date” means 2 February 2011. 

“Security” means the Encumbrances created or purported to be created pursuant to the Security Documents. 

“Security Documents” means: 
  

	 	(a)	each of the Original Security Documents; 

  

	 	(b)	any security documents required to be delivered by an Acceding Obligor pursuant to Clauses 26.1 (Acceding Borrowers) and 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors);

  

	 	(c)	any other document executed at any time by any member of the Group conferring or evidencing any Encumbrance for or in respect of any of the obligations of the Obligors
under this Agreement whether or not specifically required by this Agreement; and 

  

	 	(d)	any other document executed at any time pursuant to Clause 24.12 (Further Assurance) or any similar covenant in any of the Security Documents referred to in
paragraphs (a) to (c) above. 

 “Security Trust Agreement” means that certain security
trust agreement dated on 3 March 2006 made between the Security Trustee, the Company and certain other parties thereto relating to the appointment of the Security Trustee as trustee of the Security. 

“Senior Secured Notes” means the Existing Senior Secured Notes, any Additional Senior Secured Notes and any Senior
Secured Notes Refinancing. 
 “Senior Secured Notes Documents” means any Senior Secured Notes, the SSN 2010
Indenture and any other indenture for any Senior Secured Notes, the Group Intercreditor Agreement, the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, any guarantee given by any member of the Group in respect of any Senior Secured Notes, any security documents
granting security in favour of the holders of any Senior Secured Notes (or any trustee for such holders or security agent or trustee for such holders or trustee), any note depository agreement, any fee letter and any indemnity letter in relation
thereto. 
 “Senior Secured Notes Refinancing” means any notes issued by the Parent, VMIH or any SSN Finance
Subsidiary for the purposes of refinancing all or a portion of (i) the Senior Secured Notes or (ii) the Facilities or (iii) any other Financial Indebtedness of the Bank Group which is secured and ranks pari passu as to right of
payment with the Facilities pursuant to and in compliance with the terms of the Group Intercreditor Agreement (provided, in each case of (i) to (iii) above that such Financial Indebtedness being refinanced would have been permitted to be
incurred at the time of issuance of any such notes), in each case, outstanding from time to time (including all fees, expenses, commissions, make-whole and any other contractual premium payable under such Financial Indebtedness being refinanced and
any reasonable fees, costs and expenses incurred in connection with such refinancing) and 

  
 49 

 
designated as “Senior Secured Notes Refinancing” by written notice from the Company to the Facility Agent and the Security Trustee by the date when the consolidated financial statements
are due to be provided pursuant to clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statements) for the first full Financial Quarter after the issuance of the relevant notes, in respect of which the following terms apply: 

 

	 	(a)	the principal amount of any such notes shall not exceed the principal amount of, and any outstanding interest on, the Financial Indebtedness being refinanced (plus all
fees, expenses, commissions, make-whole or other contractual premium payable in connection with such refinancing); and 

  

	 	(b)	such notes satisfy the requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) and (f) of the definition of Additional Senior Secured Notes. 

“Sharing Payment” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 35.1(c) (Payments to Relevant Finance
Parties). 
 “Solvent” and “Solvency” mean, with respect to any US Obligor on a particular
date, that on such date (a) the value of the property of such US Obligor (both at present and present fair and present fair sales value) is greater than the total amount of liabilities, including, without limitation, contingent and unliquidated
liabilities, of such US Obligor as such liabilities mature, (b) such person does not intend to, and does not believe that it will, incur debts or liabilities beyond such person’s ability to pay such debts and liabilities as they mature and
(c) such US Obligor is not engaged in business or a transaction, and is not about to engage in business or a transaction, for which such person’s property would constitute an unreasonably small capital. The amount of contingent and
unliquidated liabilities at any time shall be computed as the amount that, in the light of all the facts and circumstances existing at such time, represents the amount that can reasonably be expected to become an actual or matured liability.

 “Solvent Liquidation” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.18 (Internal
Reorganisations). 
 “SSN 2010 Indenture” means the indenture dated as of January 19, 2010 among Virgin
Media Secured Finance PLC as issuer, The Bank of New York Mellon as trustee and paying agent and the other parties thereto. 

“SSN Finance Subsidiary” means (i) Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC and (ii) any other Subsidiary directly and
wholly-owned by either: 
  

	 	(a)	VMIH engaged in the business of effecting or facilitating the issuance of Senior Secured Notes and on-lending the proceeds to VMIH; or 

 

	 	(b)	the Parent engaged in the business of effecting or facilitating the issuance of Senior Secured Notes and on-lending the proceeds to the Parent and/or VMIH,

 and in either case having no Subsidiaries. 

“Standard & Poor’s” means Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group or any successor thereof.

 “Statutory Requirements” means any applicable provision or requirement of any Act of Parliament (including
without limitation, the Communications Act 2003 and the Broadcasting Acts 1990 and 1996) or any instrument, rule or order made under any Act of Parliament or any regulation or by-law of any local or other competent authority or any statutory
undertaking or statutory company which has jurisdiction in relation to the carrying out, use, 

  
 50 

 
occupation, operation of the properties or the businesses of any member of the Bank Group carried out thereon. 
 “Steps Paper” means the alternative papers entitled “Steps Plan: Version 1 – Combination of NTL, Telewest and Virgin Mobile before Structures 1 and 2” and
“Steps Plan: Version 2 – Combination of NTL, Telewest and Virgin Mobile after Structures 1 and 2”, provided to the Facility Agent prior to the first Utilisation Date. 

“Sterling Amount” means at any time: 
  

	 	(a)	in relation to an Advance denominated in Sterling, the amount thereof, and in relation to any other Advance, the Sterling equivalent of the amount specified in the
Utilisation Request (as at the date thereof) for that Advance, in each case, as adjusted, if necessary, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement and to reflect any repayment, consolidation or division of that Advance; 

 

	 	(b)	in relation to a Documentary Credit, (i) if such Documentary Credit is denominated in Sterling, the Outstanding L/C Amount in relation to it at such time or
(ii) if such Documentary Credit is not denominated in Sterling, the equivalent in Sterling of the Outstanding L/C Amount at such time, calculated as at the later of (1) the date which falls 2 Business Days before its issue date or any
renewal date or (2) the date of any revaluation pursuant to Clause 5.4 (Revaluation of Documentary Credits); 

  

	 	(c)	in relation to any Ancillary Facility granted by a Lender, the amount of its Revolving Facility Commitment converted to provide its Ancillary Facility Commitment as at
the time of such conversion; and 

  

	 	(d)	in relation to any Outstandings, the aggregate of the Sterling Amounts (calculated in accordance with paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above) of each outstanding
Advance and/or Outstanding L/C Amount, made under the relevant Facility or Facilities (as the case may be) and/or in relation to Ancillary Facility Outstandings, (i) if such Outstandings are denominated in Sterling, the aggregate amount of it
at such time and (ii) if such Outstandings are not denominated in Sterling, the Sterling equivalent of the aggregate amount of it at such time. 

 “Subject Party” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 39.6(d) (Value Added Tax). 
 “Subordinated Funding” means any loan made to any Obligor by any member of the Group that is not an Obligor which: 

 

	 	(a)	constitutes Parent Intercompany Debt; 

  

	 	(b)	is an intercompany loan arising under the arrangements referred to in paragraph (d) of the definition of “Permitted Payments”; 

 

	 	(c)	is an intercompany loan existing as at the Original Execution Date (including any inter-company loan the benefit of which has, at any time after the Original Execution
Date, been assigned to any other member of the Group, where such assignment is not otherwise prohibited by this Agreement); or 

  

	 	(d)	constitutes Equity Equivalent Funding, 

 provided that (i) Security is promptly granted by the relevant creditor over its rights and (ii) the relevant debtor and creditor are party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement as an Intergroup
Debtor or Intergroup Creditor (as such terms are defined in the Group Intercreditor Agreement), respectively, or where the relevant debtor and creditor are party to such other subordination arrangements as may be satisfactory to the Facility Agent,
acting reasonably. 

  
 51 

 “Subscriber” means any person who has entered into an agreement (which has
not expired or been terminated) with an Obligor to be provided with services by an Obligor through the operation of telecommunications and/or television systems operated by the Bank Group in accordance with applicable Telecommunications, Cable and
Broadcasting Laws (including any part of such system and all modifications, substitutions, replacements, renewals and extensions made to such systems). 
 “Subsidiary” of a company shall be construed as a reference to: 
  

	 	(a)	any company: 

  

	 	(i)	more than 50% of the issued share capital or membership interests of which is beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by the first-mentioned company; or

  

	 	(ii)	where the first-mentioned company has the right or ability to control directly or indirectly the affairs or the composition of the board of directors (or equivalent of
it) of such company; or 

  

	 	(iii)	which is a Subsidiary of another Subsidiary of the first-mentioned company; or 

 

	 	(b)	for the purposes of Clause 22 (Financial Information) and Clause 23 (Financial Condition) and any provision of this Agreement where the
financial terms defined in Clause 23 (Financial Condition) are used, any legal entity which is accounted for under applicable GAAP as a Subsidiary of the first-mentioned company. 

“Substitute Financing” means any proceeds raised from Additional Senior Secured Notes, Additional High Yield Notes,
Subordinated Funding or other Financial Indebtedness permitted under Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness). 

“Successor Entity” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations). 

“Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement” means an intercreditor agreement that subordinates any guarantees granted by
any member of the Bank Group in respect of any Additional High Yield Notes and/or any High Yield Refinancing on terms satisfactory to the Facility Agent or on terms substantially the same as the HYD Intercreditor Agreement. 

“Supplier” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 39.6(d) (Value Added Tax). 

“TARGET Day” means any day on which the Trans-European Automated Real-time Gross Settlement Express Transfer payment
system is open for the settlement of payments in euro. 
 “Tax Cooperation Agreement” means the agreement dated
3 March 2006 between the Ultimate Parent, the Company and Telewest Communications Networks Limited relating to arrangements in connection with, amongst other things, the payment of US taxes. 

“Tax Credit” means a credit against, relief or remission for, or repayment of any tax. 

“Tax Deduction” means a deduction or withholding for or on account of tax from a payment made or to be made under a
Relevant Finance Document. 
 “Taxes Act” means the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. 

“Tax Liability” has the meaning set out in paragraph (e) of Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity). 

“Tax on Overall Net Income” has the meaning set out in paragraph (e) of Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity).

  
 52 

 “Tax Payment” means the increase in any payment made by an Obligor to a
Relevant Finance Party under paragraph (c) of Clause 17.1 (Tax Gross-up) or any amount payable under paragraph (d) of Clause 17.1 (Tax Gross-up) or under Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity). 

“Telecommunications, Cable and Broadcasting Laws” means the Telecommunications Act 1984, the Broadcasting Act 1990
(together with the Broadcasting Act 1996), the Communications Act 2003 and all other laws, statutes, regulations and judgments relating to broadcasting or telecommunications or cable television or broadcasting applicable to any member of the Bank
Group, and/or the business carried on by, any member of the Bank Group (for the avoidance of doubt, not including laws, statutes, regulations or judgments relating solely to consumer credit, data protection or intellectual property). 

“Term” means: 
  

	 	(a)	in relation to a Revolving Facility Advance, the period for which such Advance is borrowed as specified in the relevant Utilisation Request; and

  

	 	(b)	in relation to any Documentary Credit, the period from the date of its issue until its Expiry Date. 

“Term Facilities” means the A Facility, the A1 Facility, the A2 Facility, each Additional Facility (other than any
Additional Facility which by its terms is a revolving loan facility) the B Facility and the B1 Facility, and “Term Facility” means any of them, as the context requires. 

“Term Facility Advance” means any A Facility Advance, any A1 Facility Advance, any A2 Facility Advance, any Additional
Facility Advance (other than any Additional Facility Advance under any Additional Facility which by its terms is a revolving loan facility), any B Facility Advance and any B1 Facility Advance and “Term Facility Advances” shall be
construed accordingly. 
 “Term Facility Outstandings” means, at any time, the aggregate of the A Facility
Outstandings, the A1 Facility Outstandings, the A2 Facility Outstandings, the Additional Facility Outstandings (other than any Additional Facility Outstandings under any Additional Facility which by its terms is a revolving loan facility), the B
Facility Outstandings and the B1 Facility Outstandings, at such time. 
 “Termination Date” means: 

 

	 	(a)	in relation to the Revolving Facility, the date which is 30 days prior to the Final Maturity Date in respect of the Revolving Facility; 

 

	 	(b)	in relation to the A Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility, the date falling three months after the Original Execution Date; 

 

	 	(c)	in relation to the B Facility and the B1 Facility, the termination date specified in the B Facility Accession Deed; 

 

	 	(d)	in relation to each Ancillary Facility, the relevant Ancillary Facility Termination Date; and 

 

	 	(e)	in relation to each Additional Facility, the Additional Facility Termination Date specified in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed.

 “Testing Time” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 24.12(f) (Further
Assurance). 

  
 53 

 “Total Assets” means, as of any date of determination, the fixed assets and
current assets shown on the most recent consolidated balance sheet of the Bank Group delivered pursuant to Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements). 
 “Total Purchase Price” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 25.13(m) (Acquisitions and Investments). 

“Trade Instruments” means any performance bonds, advance payment bonds or documentary letters of credit issued in respect
of the obligations (not including Financial Indebtedness) of any member of the Group arising in the ordinary course of trading of that member of the Group. 
 “Transfer Date” means, in relation to any Transfer Deed, the effective date of such transfer as specified in such Transfer Deed. 

“Transfer Deed” means a duly completed deed of transfer and accession in the form set out in Part 1 of Schedule 5
(Form of Deed of Transfer and Accession) whereby an existing Lender seeks to transfer to a New Lender all or a part of such existing Lender’s rights, benefits and obligations under this Agreement as contemplated in Clause 37
(Assignments and Transfers) and such New Lender agrees to accept such transfer and to be bound by this Agreement and to accede to the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, the Group Intercreditor Agreement and the Security Trust Agreement. 

“Transferor” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 37.8(a) (Limitation of Responsibility of Transferor).

 “UK Bank Lender” means, in relation to a payment of interest on a participation in an Advance to a Borrower,
a Lender which is beneficially entitled to and within the charge to United Kingdom corporation tax as regards that payment and (a) if the participation in that Advance was made by it, is a Lender which is a “bank” (as defined for the
purposes of section 879 of the ITA in section 991 of the ITA) or (b) if the participation in that Advance was made by a different person, such person was a “bank” (as defined for the purposes of section 879 of the ITA in section 991
of the ITA) at the time that Advance was made. 
 “UK Borrowers” means: 

 

	 	(a)	as at the Original Execution Date, each of the Original Borrowers; and 

  

	 	(b)	thereafter, each of the Original Borrowers and any Acceding Borrower that is liable to corporation tax in the United Kingdom, 

excluding any UK Borrower which has been liquidated in accordance with the provisions of Clause 25.18 (Internal
Reorganisations) but including the relevant Successor Entity (provided it is also liable to corporation tax in the United Kingdom) thereafter, and “UK Borrower” means any of them. 

“UK Channel Management” means UK Channel Management Limited, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered
number 3322468, whose registered office is at 160 Great Portland Street, London W1W 5QA. 
 “UK Channel Management
Group” means the UK Channel Management and its Subsidiaries from time to time. 
 “UK DB Schemes” has
the meaning given to such term in Clause 24.10(b) (Pension Plans). 

  
 54 

 “UK Gold” means UK Gold Holdings Limited, a company incorporated in England
and Wales with registered number 3298738, whose registered office is at 160 Great Portland Street, London W1W 5QA. 
 “UK
Gold Group” means UK Gold and its Subsidiaries from time to time. 
 “UK Non-Bank Lender” means, in
relation to a payment of interest on an Advance to a Borrower: 
  

	 	(a)	a Lender which is beneficially entitled to the income in respect of which that payment is made and is a UK Resident company (such that the payment is within the
category of expected payments described at section 933 ITA); or 

  

	 	(b)	a Lender to which such payment would fall within one of the categories of expected payments described at sections 934 to 937 ITA inclusive, 

where H.M. Revenue & Customs has not given a direction under section 931 ITA which relates to that payment of interest on an
Advance to such Borrower. 
 “UK Pension Scheme” means a pension scheme in which any member of the Group
participates or has at any time participated, and which has its main administration in the United Kingdom or is primarily for the benefit of employees in the United Kingdom. 
 “UK Resident” means a person who is resident in the United Kingdom for the purposes of the Taxes Act, ITA or CTA, and “non-UK Resident” shall be construed accordingly.

 “UK Treaty Lender” means in relation to a payment of interest on an Advance to a UK Borrower, a Lender which
is entitled to claim full relief from liability to taxation otherwise imposed by such UK Borrower’s Relevant Tax Jurisdiction (in relation to that Lender’s participation in Advances made to such UK Borrower) on interest under a Double
Taxation Treaty and which does not carry on business in that UK Borrower’s Relevant Tax Jurisdiction through a permanent establishment with which that Lender’s participation in that Advance is effectively connected and, in relation to any
payment of interest on any Advance made by that Lender, such UK Borrower has, unless provided otherwise in a B Facility Accession Deed, received notification (or will have received notification prior to the end of the first Interest Period
hereunder) in writing from H.M. Revenue & Customs authorising such UK Borrower to pay interest on such Advances without any Tax Deduction. 
 “UKTV Group” means each of the UK Channel Management Group, UK Gold Group and UKTV New Ventures Group. 
 “UKTV Joint Ventures” means each of UK Channel Management, UK Gold and UKTV New Ventures. 
 “UKTV New Ventures” means UKTV New Ventures Limited, a company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 04266373, whose registered office is at 160 Great Portland Street,
London W1W 5QA. 
 “UKTV New Ventures Group” means the UKTV New Ventures and its Subsidiaries from time to time.

 “Ultimate Parent” means, as at the Original Execution Date, Virgin Media Inc. or, at any time thereafter, the
person (if any) that accedes to this Agreement as the Ultimate Parent pursuant to Clause 26.3 (Acceding Holding Company). 
 “United States” or “US” means the United States of America, its territories, possessions and other areas subject to the jurisdiction of the United States of America;

  
 55 

 “Unpaid Sum” means any sum due and payable by an Obligor under any Relevant
Finance Document (other than any Ancillary Facility Document) but unpaid. 
 “US Bankruptcy Code” means the
Bankruptcy Reform Act of 1978, 11 USC. §§ 101 et seq., as amended, or any successor thereto; 
 “US
Dollars”, “Dollars” or “$” means the lawful currency for the time being of the United States; 
 “US Obligor” means any Restricted Guarantor incorporated, created or organised under the laws of the United States or any State of the United States (including the District of Columbia).

 “Utilisation” means the utilisation of a Facility under this Agreement, whether by way of an Advance, the
issue of a Documentary Credit or the utilisation of any Ancillary Facility. 
 “Utilisation Date” means:

  

	 	(a)	in relation to an Advance, the date on which such Advance is (or is requested) to be made; 

 

	 	(b)	in relation to a utilisation by way of Ancillary Facility, the date on which such Ancillary Facility is established; and 

 

	 	(c)	in relation to a utilisation by way of Documentary Credit, the date on which such Documentary Credit is to be issued, in each case, 

in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 
 “Utilisation Request” means: 
  

	 	(a)	in relation to an Advance a duly completed notice in the form set out in Part 1 to Schedule 4 (Form of Utilisation Request (Advances)); or

  

	 	(b)	in relation to a Documentary Credit, a duly completed notice in the form set out in Part 2 to Schedule 4 (Form of Utilisation Request (Documentary Credits)).

 “Vendor Financing Arrangements” means any arrangement, contractual or otherwise, pursuant to
which credit or other financing is provided or arranged by a supplier (or any of its Affiliates) of assets (including equipment) and/or related services to a member of the Bank Group in connection with such supply of assets and/or services.

 “Virgin Media Communications” means Virgin Media Communications Limited, a company incorporated in England
and Wales with registered number 3521915, whose registered office is at 160 Great Portland Street, London W1W 5QA. 

“Virgin Media Holding Company” means any person of which the Company is a direct or indirect wholly-owned Subsidiary.

 “Voting Stock” of a person means all classes of capital stock, share capital or other interests (including
partnership interests) of such person then outstanding and normally entitled (without regard to the occurrence of any contingency, other than resulting from any default under any instrument until such default occurs) to vote in the election of
directors, managers or trustees thereof. 
 “Website Lenders” has the meaning given to such term in
Clause 41.3(a) (Use of Websites/E-mail). 

  
 56 

 “Working Capital” has the meaning given to such term in Clause 23.1
(Financial Definitions). 
  

	1.2	Accounting Expressions 

All accounting expressions which are not otherwise defined in this Agreement shall be construed in accordance with GAAP. 

 

	1.3	Construction 

  

	 	Unless	a contrary indication appears, any reference in this Agreement to: 

  

	 	(a)	the “Facility Agent”, a “Global Coordinator”, a “Physical Bookrunner”, a “Mandated Lead Arranger”, a
“Bookrunner”, the “Security Trustee”, a “Hedge Counterparty”, an “L/C Bank”, an “Ancillary Facility Lender” or a “Lender” shall be construed so as
to include their respective and any subsequent successors, transferees and permitted assigns in accordance with their respective interests; 

  

	 	(b)	“agreed form” means, in relation to any document, in the form agreed by or on behalf of the Bookrunners and the Company prior to the Original Execution
Date; 

  

	 	(c)	“assets” includes present and future properties, revenues and rights of every description; 

 

	 	(d)	“company” includes any body corporate; 

  

	 	(e)	“continuing” in relation to an Event of Default or a Default shall be construed as meaning that (a) the circumstances constituting such Event of
Default or Default continue or (b) neither the Facility Agent (being duly authorised to do so) nor the Lenders have waived, in accordance with this Agreement, such of its or their rights under this Agreement as arise as a result of that event;

  

	 	(f)	“determines” or “determined” means, save as otherwise provided herein, a determination made in the absolute discretion of the person
making the determination; 

  

	 	(g)	the “equivalent” on any given date in one currency (the “first currency”) of an amount denominated in another currency (the
“second currency”) is a reference to the amount of the first currency which could be purchased with the second currency at the Facility Agent’s Spot Rate of Exchange at or about 11:00 a.m. on the relevant date for the purchase
of the first currency with the second currency or for the purposes of determining any amounts testing any covenant or determining whether an Event of Default has occurred under this Agreement: 

 

	 	(i)	in the case of any basket or threshold amount qualifying a covenant: 

  

	 	(A)	in order to determine how much of such basket or threshold has been used at any time, for each transaction entered into in reliance upon the utilisation of such basket
or in reliance upon such threshold not being reached prior to such time, the date upon which such transaction was entered into; and 

  

	 	(B)	in order to determine the permissibility of a proposed transaction, on the date upon which the permissibility of that transaction is being tested for the purposes of
determining compliance with that covenant; and 

  
 57 

	 	(ii)	in the case of any basket or threshold amount relating to an Event of Default, the date on which the relevant event is being assessed for the purposes of determining
whether such Event of Default has occurred, 

 provided that in the case of Financial Indebtedness proposed to be
incurred to refinance other Financial Indebtedness denominated in a currency other than Sterling or other than the currency in which such refinanced Financial Indebtedness is denominated, if such refinancing would cause any applicable
Sterling-denominated restriction to be exceeded if calculated at the relevant currency exchange rate in effect on the date of such refinancing, such Sterling denominated restriction shall be deemed not to be exceeded so long as the principal amount
of such refinancing Financial Indebtedness does not exceed the principal amount of such Financial Indebtedness being refinanced in the applicable currency at the then current exchange rate; 

 

	 	(h)	“guarantee” means (other than in Clause 29 (Guarantee and Indemnity)) any guarantee, letter of credit, bond, indemnity or similar assurance
against loss, or any obligation, direct or indirect, actual or contingent, to purchase or assume any indebtedness of any person or to make an investment in or loan to any person or to purchase assets of any person where, in each case, such
obligation is assumed in order to maintain or assist the ability of such person to meet its indebtedness; 

  

	 	(i)	“month” is a reference to a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the next succeeding
calendar month save that, where any such period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, it shall end on the next succeeding Business Day, unless that day falls in the calendar month succeeding that in which it would otherwise have
ended, in which case it shall end on the immediately preceding Business Day provided that, if a period starts on the last Business Day in a calendar month or if there is no numerically corresponding day in the month in which that period ends, that
period shall end on the last Business Day in that later month (provided that in any reference to “months” only the last month in a period shall be construed in the aforementioned manner); 

 

	 	(j)	a Lender’s “participation” in relation to a Documentary Credit, shall be construed as a reference to the relevant amount that is or may be payable
by that Lender in relation to that Documentary Credit; 

  

	 	(k)	a “person” includes any individual, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any association, trust, joint venture,
consortium or partnership (whether or not having separate legal personality); 

  

	 	(l)	a “regulation” includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law) of any governmental,
intergovernmental or supranational body, agency, department or of any regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation; 

  

	 	(m)	a “repayment” shall include a “prepayment” and references to “repay” or “prepay” shall be construed
accordingly; 

  

	 	(n)	“tax” shall be construed so as to include all present and future taxes, charges, imposts, duties, levies, deductions or withholdings of any kind
whatsoever, or any amount payable on account of or as security for any of the foregoing, by whomsoever on whomsoever and wherever imposed, levied, collected, withheld or assessed together with any penalties, additions, fines, surcharges or interest
relating to it; and “taxes” and “taxation” shall be construed accordingly; 

  
 58 

	 	(o)	“VAT” shall be construed as value added tax as provided for in the Value Added Tax Act 1994 and legislation (or purported legislation and whether
delegated or otherwise) supplemental to that Act or in any primary or secondary legislation promulgated by the European Community or European Union or any official body or agency of the European Community or European Union, and any tax similar or
equivalent to value added tax imposed by any country other than the United Kingdom and any similar or turnover tax replacing or introduced in addition to any of the same; 

 

	 	(p)	“wholly-owned Subsidiary” of a company shall be construed as a reference to any company which has no other members except that other company and that
other company’s wholly-owned Subsidiaries or nominees for that other company or its wholly-owned Subsidiaries; 

  

	 	(q)	the “winding-up”, “dissolution” or “administration” of a company shall be construed so as to include any equivalent
or analogous proceedings under the Law of the jurisdiction in which such company is incorporated, established or organised or any jurisdiction in which such company carries on business, including the seeking of liquidation, winding up,
reorganisation, dissolution, administration, arrangement, adjustment, protection from creditors or relief of debtors; 

  

	 	(r)	a Borrower providing “cash cover” for a Documentary Credit or an Ancillary Facility means a Borrower paying an amount in the currency of the
Documentary Credit (or, as the case may be, Ancillary Facility) to an interest-bearing account in the name of the Borrower and the following conditions being met: 

 

	 	(i)	the account is with the Security Trustee or with the L/C Bank or Ancillary Facility Lender for which that cash cover is to be provided; 

 

	 	(ii)	subject to paragraph (b) of Clause 5.9 (Cash Cover by Borrower), until no amount is or may be outstanding under that Documentary Credit or Ancillary
Facility, withdrawals from the account may only be made to pay a Relevant Finance Party amounts due and payable to it under this Agreement in respect of that Documentary Credit or Ancillary Facility; and 

 

	 	(iii)	the Borrower has executed a security document over that account, in form and substance satisfactory to the Security Trustee or the L/C Bank or Ancillary Facility Lender
with which that account is held, creating a first ranking security interest over that account; 

  

	 	(s)	a Default (other than an Event of Default) is “continuing” if it has not been remedied or waived and an Event of Default is
“continuing” if it has not been remedied or waived; 

  

	 	(t)	a Borrower “repaying” or “prepaying” a Documentary Credit or Ancillary Facility Outstandings means: 

 

	 	(i)	that Borrower providing cash cover for that Documentary Credit or in respect of the Ancillary Facility Outstandings; 

 

	 	(ii)	the maximum amount payable under the Documentary Credit or Ancillary Facility being reduced or cancelled in accordance with its terms; or 

 

	 	(iii)	 the relevant L/C Bank or Ancillary Facility Lender being satisfied that it has no further liability under that Documentary Credit or Ancillary
Facility, and the amount by which a Documentary Credit is, or Ancillary Outstandings are, 

  
 59 

	 	
repaid or prepaid under paragraphs (i) and (ii) above is the amount of the relevant cash cover or reduction; 

 

	 	(u)	an amount “borrowed” includes any amount utilised by way of Documentary Credit or under an Ancillary Facility; 

 

	 	(v)	a Lender funding its participation in a Utilisation includes a Lender participating in a Documentary Credit; and 

 

	 	(w)	an “outstanding amount” of a Documentary Credit at any time is the maximum amount that is or may be payable by the relevant Borrower in respect of that
Documentary Credit at that time. 

  

	1.4	Currency 

“€” and “euro” denote the lawful currency of each Participating Member State,
“£” and “Sterling” denote the lawful currency of the United Kingdom and “$” and “Dollars” denote the lawful currency of the United States. 

 

	1.5	Statutes 

 Any reference
in this Agreement to a statute or a statutory provision shall, save where a contrary intention is specified, be construed as a reference to such statute or statutory provision as the same shall have been, or may be, amended or re enacted.

  

	1.6	Time 

 Any reference in
this Agreement to a time shall, unless otherwise specified, be construed as a reference to London time. 
  

	1.7	References to Agreements 

Unless otherwise stated, any reference in this Agreement to any agreement, indenture or any other document (including any reference to
this Agreement) shall be construed as a reference to: 
  

	 	(a)	such agreement, indenture or any other document as amended, varied, novated or supplemented from time to time; 

 

	 	(b)	any other agreement, indenture or any other document whereby such agreement or document is so amended, varied, supplemented or novated; and 

 

	 	(c)	any other agreement, indenture or any other document entered into pursuant to or in accordance with any such agreement or document. 

 

	1.8	No Personal Liability 

 No
personal liability shall attach to any director, officer or employee of any member of the Group for any representation or statement made by that member of the Group in a certificate signed by such director, officer or employee. 

  
 60 

	2.	THE FACILITIES 

  

	2.1	The Facilities 

 The
Lenders grant upon the terms and subject to the conditions of this Agreement: 
  

	 	(a)	to the Original Borrowers, 

  

	 	(i)	a term loan facility in a maximum aggregate principal amount of £1,000,000,000 (the “A Facility”) which shall be available in Sterling in a
single drawing; provided that the amount of the A Facility on the Roll Effective Date shall be reduced by the aggregate amount of the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility on such date as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date);

  

	 	(ii)	on and from the Roll Effective Date, a term loan facility in a maximum amount of the aggregate A1 Facility Commitments (“A1 Facility”) which shall be
available in Sterling and shall be fully drawn on the Roll Effective Date by transfer of Outstandings from the A Facility as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date); and 

 

	 	(iii)	on and from the Roll Effective Date, a term loan facility in a maximum amount of the aggregate A2 Facility Commitments (“A2 Facility”) which shall be
available in Sterling and shall be fully drawn on the Roll Effective Date by transfer of Outstandings from the A Facility as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date); 

 

	 	(b)	to the Company, VMIH Sub and/or UK Newco, 

  

	 	(i)	the B Facility which shall be available in Sterling, Dollar or euro (as provided in the B Facility Accession Deed) provided that the B Facility shall be drawn in a
single drawing and in a single currency, in an aggregate principal amount for the B Facility of not more than £750,000,000; provided further that the amount of the B Facility on the Roll Effective Date shall be reduced by the amount of the B1
Facility on such date as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date); and 

  

	 	(ii)	on and from the Roll Effective Date, a term loan facility in a maximum amount of the aggregate B1 Facility Commitments (“B1 Facility”) which shall be
in available in Sterling and shall be fully drawn on the Roll Effective Date by transfer of Outstandings from the B Facility as provided in Clause 2.3 (Roll Effective Date);and 

 

	 	(c)	to the UK Borrowers, a revolving loan facility in a maximum aggregate principal amount of £250,000,000 (the “Revolving Facility”) which shall be
available for drawing in euro, Dollars, Sterling or any Optional Currency subject to the utilisation in full of the A Facility. 

  

	2.2	Increase 

  

	 	(a)	The Company may by giving prior notice to the Facility Agent by no later than the date falling 20 Business Days after the effective date of a cancellation of:

  

	 	(i)	the Available Commitments of a Defaulting Lender in accordance with Clause 10.5 (Right of Cancellation in Relation to a Defaulting Lender); or

  

	 	(ii)	 the Commitments of a Lender in accordance with Clause 19 (Illegality),

  
 61 

	 	
request that the Commitments be increased (and the Commitments under that Facility shall be so increased) in an aggregate amount in the relevant currency of up to the amount of the Available
Commitments or Commitments so cancelled as follows: 

  

	 	(A)	the increased Commitments will be assumed by one or more Lenders or other banks, financial institutions, trusts, funds or other entities other than any member of the
Group (each an “Increase Lender”) selected by the Company (each of which shall be acceptable to the Facility Agent (acting reasonably)) and each of which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations of a
Lender corresponding to that part of the increased Commitments which it is to assume as if it had been an Original Lender; 

  

	 	(B)	each of the Obligors and any Increase Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another as the Obligors and the Increase
Lender would have assumed and/or acquired had the Increase Lender been an Original Lender; 

  

	 	(C)	each Increase Lender shall become a party to this Agreement as a “Lender” and any Increase Lender and each of the other Relevant Finance Parties shall assume
obligations towards one another and acquire rights against one another as that Increase Lender and those Relevant Finance Parties would have assumed and/or acquired had the Increase Lender been an Original Lender; 

 

	 	(D)	the Commitments of the other Lenders shall continue in full force and effect; and 

 

	 	(E)	any increase in the Commitments shall take effect on the date specified by the Company in the notice referred to above or any later date on which the conditions set out
in paragraph (b) below are satisfied. 

  

	 	(b)	An increase in the Commitments will only be effective on: 

  

	 	(i)	the execution by the Facility Agent of an Increase Confirmation from the relevant Increase Lender; 

 

	 	(ii)	in relation to an Increase Lender which is not a Lender immediately prior to the relevant increase: 

 

	 	(A)	the Increase Lender entering into the documentation required for it to accede as a party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement, HYD Intercreditor Agreement and Security
Trust Agreement; and 

  

	 	(B)	the performance by the Facility Agent of all necessary “know your client” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the
assumption of the increased Commitments by that Increase Lender, the completion of which the Facility Agent shall promptly notify to the Company, the Increase Lender and each L/C Bank; and 

 

	 	(iii)	in the case of an increase in the Revolving Facility Commitments, each L/C Bank consenting to their increase. 

 

	 	(c)	 Each Increase Lender, by executing the Increase Confirmation, confirms (for the avoidance of doubt) that the Facility Agent has authority to execute on
its behalf any 

  
 62 

	 	
amendment or waiver that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the increase becomes effective.

  

	 	(d)	Clause 37.7 (Transfer Deed) shall apply mutatis mutandis in this Clause 2.2 in relation to an Increase Lender as if references in that Clause
to: 

  

	 	(i)	a “Transferor” were references to all the Lenders immediately prior to the relevant increase; 

 

	 	(ii)	the “New Lender” were references to that “Increase Lender”; and 

 

	 	(iii)	a “re-transfer” and “re-assignment” were references to respectively a “transfer” and “assignment”.

  

	2.3	Roll Effective Date 

  

	 	(a)	With effect on the Roll Effective Date, each Lender that has given a Roll Consent (each a “Rolling Lender”) and has, as of the Second Amendment Record
Date: 

  

	 	(i)	an A Facility Commitment shall acquire an A1 Facility Commitment or an A2 Facility Commitment, as applicable, in the amount of such A Facility Commitment and
concurrently therewith: 

  

	 	(A)	such Lender’s participation in any Outstandings under the A Facility shall be treated as being outstanding under the A1 Facility or the A2 Facility, as applicable,
and no longer outstanding under the A Facility; 

  

	 	(B)	such Lender’s A Facility Commitment shall be reduced to zero; and 

  

	 	(C)	no further Utilisations of the A1 Facility or the A2 Facility may be made under this Agreement; 

 

	 	(ii)	a B Facility Commitment shall acquire a B1 Facility Commitment in the amount of such B Facility Commitment and concurrently therewith: 

 

	 	(A)	such Lender’s participation in any Outstandings under the B Facility shall be treated as being outstanding under the B1 Facility and no longer outstanding under
the B Facility; 

  

	 	(B)	such Lender’s B Facility Commitment shall be reduced to zero; and 

  

	 	(C)	no further Utilisations of the B1 Facility may be made under this Agreement. 

 

	 	(b)	If by operation of paragraph (a) above any participation of a Rolling Lender in Outstandings or any part of such Outstandings (in either case, the “Rolling
Outstanding Amount”) under one Facility (the “First Facility”) becomes a participation of such Rolling Lender in Outstandings under another Facility (the “Second Facility”) on a day other than the last day
of the Interest Period in relation to the Rolling Outstanding Amount under the First Facility (the “Current Interest Period”), notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement: 

 

	 	(i)	the first Interest Period for such Rolling Outstanding Amount under the Second Facility shall have a duration equal to the unexpired portion of the Current Interest
Period; 

  
 63 

	 	(ii)	EURIBOR or LIBOR (as applicable to such Rolling Outstanding Amount) for purposes of determining the rate of interest payable under this Agreement on such Rolling
Outstanding Amount for such first Interest Period shall be the rate thereof which would have applied if the Rolling Outstanding Amount had remained outstanding under the First Facility for the remainder of the Current Interest Period; and

  

	 	(iii)	all interest and any other amounts accrued but unpaid under the Relevant Finance Documents on the Rolling Outstanding Amount on or before the Roll Effective Date under
the First Facility, shall be due and payable on the last day of the Current Interest Period. 

  

	 	(c)	Notwithstanding any other term of this Agreement or the Relevant Finance Documents, no transfer of Outstandings from one Facility to another Facility under this Clause
2.3 shall be deemed a prepayment of any of the Facilities for purposes of Clause 11 (Voluntary Prepayment) or Clause 12 (Mandatory Prepayment). 

 

	2.4	Purpose 

  

	 	(a)	The A Facility, the A1 Facility, the A2 Facility, the B Facility and the B1 Facility shall be applied: 

 

	 	(i)	towards financing the repayment in full of all amounts due and payable under the Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement (including in each case without limitation,
by way of principal, interest, break costs, fees and expenses, legal fees, commission and any other premiums); 

  

	 	(ii)	towards financing any fees, costs and expenses (including, without limitation, legal fees) due and payable under the Relevant Finance Documents and any other fees,
costs and expenses (including, without limitation, legal fees) incurred by the Obligors in connection with the negotiation and preparation of the Relevant Finance Documents; and 

 

	 	(iii)	to the extent any amounts remain after application in accordance with paragraphs (i) and (ii) above, for the general corporate purposes of the Bank Group,
including without limitation repurchase or repayment of any High Yield Notes. 

  

	 	(b)	The Revolving Facility shall be applied for the purposes of financing the ongoing working capital requirements and the general corporate purposes of the Bank Group and
may be utilised by way of Revolving Facility Advances, Documentary Credits or, subject to the provisions of Clause 6 (Ancillary Facilities), Ancillary Facilities. 

 

	 	(c)	Each Borrower shall apply all amounts borrowed under this Agreement in or towards satisfaction of the purposes referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) above (as
applicable) and none of the Relevant Finance Parties shall be obliged to concern themselves with such application. 

  

	2.5	Relevant Finance Parties’ Rights and Obligations 

  

	 	(a)	The obligations of each Relevant Finance Party under the Relevant Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Relevant Finance Party to perform its obligations under
the Relevant Finance Documents does not affect the obligations of any other party under the Relevant Finance Documents. No Relevant Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Relevant Finance Party under the Relevant Finance
Documents. 

  
 64 

	 	(b)	The rights of each Relevant Finance Party under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents are separate and independent rights and any debt arising under the
Relevant Finance Documents to a Relevant Finance Party from an Obligor shall be a separate and independent debt. 

  

	 	(c)	A Relevant Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Relevant Finance Documents, separately enforce its rights under the Relevant Finance Documents.

  

	2.6	Additional Facility 

  

	 	(a)	The Company may notify the Facility Agent by no less than 5 Business Days notice that it wishes to establish one or more additional facilities (each an
“Additional Facility”) by delivery to the Facility Agent of a duly completed Additional Facility Accession Deed, duly executed by the Company, each Additional Facility Lender for the Additional Facility and each Additional Facility
Borrower for the relevant Additional Facility, provided, in respect of each Additional Facility, that: 

  

	 	(i)	no Event of Default is continuing; 

  

	 	(ii)	the terms of that Additional Facility provide that no Utilisation may be made if, at the time of such Utilisation, an Event of Default is continuing or would result
from such Utilisation; 

  

	 	(iii)	the Final Maturity Date applicable to that Additional Facility shall be no earlier than 30 June 2015 and, in the event that such Additional Facility provides for
any scheduled repayments prior to 30 June 2015, the weighted average life to maturity of such Additional Facility shall not be shorter than the weighted average life to maturity of any A Facility, A1 Facility or A2 Facility outstanding under
this Agreement at the time of establishment of such Additional Facility; 

  

	 	(iv)	each Additional Facility Borrower for that Additional Facility is an existing Obligor; 

 

	 	(v)	the principal amount, interest rate, Final Maturity Date, use of proceeds, repayment schedule, availability, fees and related provisions and the currency of that
Additional Facility shall be agreed by the relevant Additional Facility Borrowers and the relevant Additional Facility Lenders (and, in the case of currency, the Facility Agent) and set out in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed;

  

	 	(vi)	 with respect to any Additional Facility the proceeds of which are not applied in repayment or prepayment of any of the Facilities or Existing Financial
Indebtedness (in each case, in whole or in part), the Company can demonstrate that (A) the pro forma Leverage Ratio (giving effect to such incurrence and the use of proceeds thereof) on the Quarter Date prior to such incurrence (giving pro
forma effect to any movement of cash out of the Bank Group since such date pursuant to Clause 25.5 (Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital) and any Permitted Payments) would not exceed the Leverage Ratio required in order to incur any
Financial Indebtedness pursuant to Clause 25.4(p) (Financial Indebtedness) and (B) the pro forma ratio of Consolidated Senior Net Debt (giving effect to such incurrence and the use of proceeds thereof and giving pro forma effect to any
movement of cash out of the Bank Group since such date pursuant to Clause 25.5 (Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital) and any Permitted Payments) to Consolidated Operating Cashflow for the Quarter Date prior to such incurrence would not
exceed the 

  
 65 

	 	
ratio set out in Clause 25.2(o) (Negative Pledge) for the Quarter Date following such incurrence; 

 

	 	(vii)	the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed shall specify whether that Additional Facility is in form of a term loan or a revolving loan, provided that an
Additional Facility shall only be permitted to be established in the form of a revolving facility if the Revolving Facility Commitments at such time are equal to zero; 

 

	 	(viii)	unless otherwise set out in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed, the general terms of that Additional Facility shall be consistent in all material respects
with the terms of this Agreement including, without limitation, with respect to, interest period, conditions precedent, tax gross-up provisions and indemnity provisions, representations and warranties, utilisation mechanics, cancellation and
prepayment (including the treatment of that Additional Facility under the prepayment waterfall), fees, costs and expenses, transfers, voting, amendments and waivers, financial and non-financial covenants and events of default; and

  

	 	(ix)	if any terms relating to prepayment, financial and non-financial covenants and events of default are proposed in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed to be
substantially different from the terms of this Agreement, the terms (other than relating to dividends and restricted payments) shall give no independent rights to the relevant Additional Facility Lenders (as a separate class) to accelerate (but
without prejudice to their rights as part of the Instructing Group under Clauses 27.17 (Acceleration) or 27.18 (Repayment on Demand)) provided that, unless otherwise indicated in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed, any
covenants or events of default in addition to those contained in Clause 23 (Financial Condition), Clause 24 (Positive Undertakings), Clause 25 (Negative Undertakings) and Clause 27 (Events of Default) shall also then
apply, mutatis mutandis, to the other Facilities). 

  

	 	(b)	Each Additional Facility Accession Deed shall confirm that the requirements in paragraph (a) above are fulfilled and shall also specify the date upon which the
Additional Facility is anticipated to be made available to the relevant Additional Facility Borrowers (the “Additional Facility Commencement Date”). 

 

	 	(c)	Subject to the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) above being met, from the relevant Additional Facility Commencement Date for an Additional Facility, the
Additional Facility Lenders for that Additional Facility shall make available the Additional Facility in a maximum aggregate amount not exceeding the aggregate Additional Facility Commitments in respect of that Additional Facility as set out in the
relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed. 

  

	 	(d)	Each Additional Facility Lender shall become a party to this Agreement and be entitled to share in the Security in accordance with the terms of the Group Intercreditor
Agreement and the Security Documents pari passu with the other Facilities provided that the Additional Facility Borrowers and the relevant Additional Facility Lender may agree that an Additional Facility shares in the Security on a junior
basis to the other Facilities which, if so agreed, shall be set out in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed. 

  

	 	(e)	 Each party to this Agreement (other than each proposed Additional Facility Lender and the Company) irrevocably authorises and instructs the Facility
Agent to execute on its behalf any Additional Facility Accession Deed which has been duly completed and signed on behalf of each proposed Additional Facility Lender, the Company and

  
 66 

	 	
each proposed Additional Facility Borrower, and the Parent and each Obligor agrees to be bound by such accession. 

 

	 	(f)	The Facility Agent shall only be obliged to execute an Additional Facility Accession Deed delivered to it if: 

 

	 	(i)	the terms of its and the Security Trustee’s compensation and indemnities for any additional administrative or other requirements and costs under the Relevant
Finance Documents arising in relation to the relevant Additional Facility are satisfactory to it; and 

  

	 	(ii)	it is satisfied that it has complied with all necessary “know your client” or other similar checks under all applicable law and regulations in relation to the
accession of the relevant Additional Facility Lenders. 

 For the avoidance of doubt, if any terms of an Additional
Facility that affect the Facility Agent or L/C Bank in such capacity are different in any material respect from those applying under this Agreement on the Original Execution Date, such differences must be satisfactory to the Facility Agent and L/C
Bank if it affects the Facility Agent or L/C Bank in any material and adverse respect. 
  

	 	(g)	On the date that the Facility Agent executes an Additional Facility Accession Deed: 

 

	 	(i)	each Additional Facility Lender party to that Additional Facility Accession Deed, each other Relevant Finance Party, the Parent and the Obligors shall acquire the same
rights and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have acquired and assumed had each Additional Facility Lender been an Original Lender, with the rights and/or obligations assumed by it as a result of that accession and with
the Commitment specified by it as its Additional Facility Commitment; and 

  

	 	(ii)	each Additional Facility Lender shall become a party to this Agreement as an “Additional Facility Lender”. 

 

	 	(h)	The execution by the Company of an Additional Facility Accession Deed constitutes confirmation by the Parent and each Guarantor that its obligations under Clause 29
(Guarantee and Indemnity) shall continue unaffected, except that those obligations shall extend to the Commitments as increased by the addition of each relevant Additional Facility Lender’s Commitment and shall be owed to each Relevant
Finance Party including such Additional Facility Lender. 

  

	 	(i)	The Facility Agent is authorised and instructed to enter into such documentation as is reasonably required to amend this Agreement and any other Relevant Finance
Document (in accordance with the terms of this Clause 2.6) to reflect the terms of each Additional Facility without the consent of any Lender other than the applicable Additional Facility Lender. 

 

	3.	CONDITIONS 

  

	3.1	Conditions Precedent 

 The
obligations of the Lenders to make the A Facility, the A1 Facility, the A2 Facility, the B Facility, the B1 Facility and the Revolving Facility available shall be conditional upon: 

 

	 	(a)	 the Facility Agent having confirmed to the Company that it has received (or has waived in accordance with this Agreement, the requirement to receive)
the documents listed in paragraphs 1 to 15 of Part 1 of Schedule 3 (Conditions Precedent to First 

  
 67 

	 	
Utilisation) and that each is satisfactory, in form and substance, to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably. The Facility Agent shall notify the Company and the Lenders promptly upon being
so satisfied; and 

  

	 	(b)	the Borrowers having obtained B Facility Commitments (or other Substitute Financing) in an aggregate principal amount of not less than £600,000,000.

 Furthermore, the obligations of the Lenders to make the Revolving Facility available shall be conditional upon
utilisation of the A Facility. 
  

	3.2	Further Conditions Precedent 

 Subject to Clause 3.1 (Conditions Precedent), the Lenders will only be obliged to comply with Clause 4.2 (Lenders’ Participations) in relation to any Utilisation if, on the
date of the Utilisation Request and on the proposed Utilisation Date: 
  

	 	(a)	other than in the case of a Rollover Advance, no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Utilisation; and 

 

	 	(b)	in relation to any Utilisation on the first Utilisation Date, all the representations and warranties in Clause 21 (Representations and Warranties) or, in
relation to any other Utilisation, the Repeating Representations to be made by each Obligor are true in all material respects in each case by reference to the facts and circumstances then subsisting. 

 

	3.3	Conditions Subsequent 

The Company shall procure (and each relevant Obligor shall ensure) that within 60 days after the Original Execution Date, there shall have
been delivered to the Facility Agent each of the documents listed in Part 2 of Schedule 3 (Conditions Subsequent Documents) each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably. The Facility Agent shall notify the
Company and the Lenders promptly upon being so satisfied. 
  

	4.	UTILISATION 

  

	4.1	Conditions to Utilisation 

Save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, an Advance will be made by the Lenders to a Borrower or a Documentary Credit will be issued
by an L/C Bank at a Borrower’s request if: 
  

	 	(a)	in the case of an Advance, the Facility Agent has received from such Borrower a duly completed Utilisation Request in the relevant form, and in the case of a
Documentary Credit, both the Facility Agent and the relevant L/C Bank have received from a Borrower a duly completed Utilisation Request in the relevant form, in each case, no earlier than the day which is 10 Business Days and no later than 2:00
p.m. on the day which is 3 Business Days (or in the case of any Documentary Credit which is not or will not be in the form of Schedule 12 (Form of Documentary Credit), no later than 2:00 p.m. on the day which is 3 Business Days) prior to the
proposed Utilisation Date for such Advance or Documentary Credit, receipt of which shall oblige such Borrower to utilise the amount requested on the Utilisation Date stated therein upon the terms and subject to the conditions contained in this
Agreement; 

  

	 	(b)	the proposed Utilisation Date is a Business Day for the proposed currency of the Advance or Documentary Credit, as the case may be, which is or precedes the relevant
Termination Date; 

  
 68 

	 	(c)	the proposed Utilisation Date for the A Facility Advance and all B Facilities Advances falls on the same Business Day; 

 

	 	(d)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of Term Facility Advance, such Utilisation would result in the maximum principal amount of the Term Facility Advance being utilised,
or in the case of a Utilisation by way of a Revolving Facility Advance, such Utilisation occurs on or after the maximum principal amount of the A Facility being utilised and, the proposed Sterling Amount (or its equivalent) of such Revolving
Facility Advance is (i) equal to the amount of the Available Revolving Facility Commitment at such time, or (ii) less than such amount but equal to a minimum of £5 million, or an integral multiple of £1 million;

  

	 	(e)	the Utilisation Date for a Revolving Facility Advance is on a date not earlier than the Utilisation Date for the A Facility Advance and the B Facility Advances;

  

	 	(f)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of Documentary Credit, the proposed Sterling Amount (or its equivalent) of such Documentary Credit is equal to or more than
£1 million or such lesser amount as the relevant L/C Bank may agree (acting reasonably); 

  

	 	(g)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of a Revolving Facility Advance, immediately after the making of such Advance there will be no more than 25 Revolving Facility
Advances then outstanding; 

  

	 	(h)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of a Documentary Credit, the proposed Term of the Documentary Credit ends on or before the Final Maturity Date in respect of the
Revolving Facility and immediately after the making of such Utilisation there will be no more than 25 Documentary Credits then outstanding; 

  

	 	(i)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of a Revolving Facility Advance, the proposed Term of such Advance is a period of 1, 2, 3 or 6 months or such other period of up to
12 months as all the Lenders having a Revolving Facility Commitment may agree prior to submission of the relevant Utilisation Request, and ends on or before the Final Maturity Date in respect of the Revolving Facility; 

 

	 	(j)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of an Advance (other than a Rollover Advance), the interest rate applicable to such Advance’s first Interest Period or Term (as
the case may be) will not have to be determined under Clause 15 (Market Disruption and Alternative Interest Rates); 

  

	 	(k)	in the case of a Utilisation by way of a Documentary Credit which is not substantially in the form set out in Schedule 12 (Form of Documentary Credit), the
relevant L/C Bank shall have approved the terms of such Documentary Credit (acting reasonably); and 

  

	 	(l)	in the case of any Utilisation, on the date of the Utilisation Request, the date of any Conversion Notice and the proposed Utilisation Date: 

 

	 	(i)	in the case of a Rollover Advance or a Documentary Credit which is being renewed pursuant to Clause 5.2 (Renewal of Documentary Credits), the Facility Agent
shall not have received instructions from a Revolving Facility Instructing Group requiring the Facility Agent to refuse such rollover or renewal of a Documentary Credit by reason of the Acceleration Date having occurred; or 

  
 69 

	 	(ii)	in the case of any Utilisation other than that referred to in sub-paragraph (i) above, the Repeating Representations made by the persons identified as making those
representations are true in all material respects by reference to the circumstances then existing and no Default is continuing or would result from the proposed Utilisation. 

 

	4.2	Lenders’ Participations 

 Each Lender will participate through its Facility Office in each Advance made pursuant to Clause 4.1 (Conditions to Utilisation) in its respective Proportion. 

 

	5.	DOCUMENTARY CREDITS 

  

	5.1	Issue of Documentary Credits 

  

	 	(a)	Each L/C Bank shall issue Documentary Credits pursuant to Clause 4.1 (Conditions to Utilisation) by: 

 

	 	(i)	completing the issue date and the proposed Expiry Date of any Documentary Credit to be issued by it; and 

 

	 	(ii)	executing and delivering such Documentary Credit to the relevant Beneficiary on the relevant Utilisation Date. 

 

	 	(b)	Each Lender having a Revolving Facility Commitment (an “L/C Lender”) will participate by way of indemnity in each Documentary Credit in an amount equal
to its L/C Proportion. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent shall notify each L/C Lender and the relevant L/C Bank of the details of any requested Documentary Credit (including the Sterling Amount of it, and,
if such Documentary Credit is not to be denominated in Sterling, the relevant currency in which it will be denominated and the amount of it) and its participation in that Documentary Credit. 

 

	5.2	Renewal of Documentary Credits 

  

	 	(a)	Each Borrower may request that a Documentary Credit issued on its behalf be renewed by delivering to the Facility Agent and the relevant L/C Bank a Renewal Request
which complies with Clause 4.1 (Conditions to Utilisation). 

  

	 	(b)	The terms of each renewed Documentary Credit shall be the same as those of the relevant Documentary Credit immediately prior to its renewal, except that (as stated in
the Renewal Request therefor): 

  

	 	(i)	its amount may be less than the amount of such Documentary Credit immediately prior to its renewal; and 

 

	 	(ii)	its Term shall start on the date which was the Expiry Date of that Documentary Credit immediately prior to its renewal, and shall end on the proposed Expiry Date
specified in the Renewal Request. 

  

	 	(c)	If the conditions set out in this Clause 5.2 have been met, the relevant L/C Bank shall amend and re-issue the relevant Documentary Credit pursuant to a Renewal
Request. 

  
 70 

	5.3	Reduction of a Documentary Credit 

  

	 	(a)	If, on the proposed Utilisation Date of a Documentary Credit, any of the Lenders under the Revolving Facility is a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender and:

  

	 	(i)	that Lender has failed to provide cash collateral to the relevant L/C Bank in accordance with Clause 5.8 (Cash Collateral by Non-Acceptable L/C Lender); and

  

	 	(ii)	either: 

  

	 	(A)	the relevant L/C Bank has not required the Borrower which requested the Documentary Credit to provide cash cover pursuant to Clause 5.9 (Cash Cover by
Borrower); or 

  

	 	(B)	the Borrower which requested the Documentary Credit has failed to provide cash cover to the relevant L/C Bank in accordance with Clause 5.9 (Cash Cover by
Borrower), 

 the relevant L/C Bank may reduce the amount of that Documentary Credit by an amount equal to the
amount of the participation of that Non-Acceptable L/C Lender in respect of that Documentary Credit and that Non-Acceptable L/C Lender shall be deemed not to have any participation (or obligation to indemnify the relevant L/C Bank) in respect of
that Documentary Credit for the purposes of the Relevant Finance Documents. 
  

	 	(b)	The Borrower shall notify the Facility Agent (with a copy to the relevant L/C Bank) of each reduction made pursuant to this Clause 5.3. 

 

	 	(c)	This Clause 5.3 shall not affect the participation of each other Lender in that Documentary Credit. 

 

	5.4	Revaluation of Documentary Credits 

  

	 	(a)	If any Documentary Credit is denominated in a currency other than Sterling, the Facility Agent shall at six monthly intervals after the date of the Documentary Credit
recalculate the Sterling Amount of that Documentary Credit by notionally converting into Sterling, the outstanding amount of that Documentary Credit on the basis of the Facility Agent’s Spot Rate of Exchange on the date of calculation.

  

	 	(b)	The relevant Borrower shall, if requested by the Facility Agent within 2 days of any calculation under paragraph (a) above, ensure that within 3 Business Days
sufficient Revolving Facility Outstandings are repaid (subject to Break Costs, if applicable, but otherwise without penalty or premium which might otherwise be payable), to prevent the Sterling Amount of the Revolving Facility Outstandings exceeding
the aggregate amount of all of the Revolving Facility Commitments adjusted to reflect any cancellations or reductions, following any adjustment under paragraph (a) above. 

 

	5.5	Immediately Payable 

  

	 	(a)	If a Documentary Credit or any amount outstanding under a Documentary Credit becomes immediately payable under this Agreement, the Borrower that requested (or on behalf
of which the Company requested) the issue of that Documentary Credit shall repay or prepay that Documentary Credit or that amount within 3 Business Days of demand. 

  
 71 

	 	(b)	Each L/C Bank shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of any demand received by it under and in accordance with any Documentary Credit (including details of the
Documentary Credit under which such demand has been received and the amount demanded). The Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Company, the Borrower for whose account the Documentary Credit was issued and each of the Lenders under the Revolving
Facility. 

  

	5.6	Claims Under a Documentary Credit 

  

	 	(a)	Each Borrower irrevocably and unconditionally authorises each L/C Bank to pay any claim made or purported to be made under a Documentary Credit requested by it (or by
the Company on its behalf) and which appears on its face to be in order (a “claim”). 

  

	 	(b)	Each Borrower shall within 3 Business Days of demand pay to the Facility Agent for the account of the relevant L/C Bank an amount equal to the amount of any claim under
that Documentary Credit. 

  

	 	(c)	On receipt of any demand or notification under Clause 5.5 (Immediately Payable), the relevant Borrower shall (unless the Company notifies the Facility Agent
otherwise) be deemed to have delivered to the Facility Agent a duly completed Utilisation Request requesting a Revolving Facility Advance: 

  

	 	(i)	in an amount and currency equal to the amount and currency of the relevant claim (if applicable, net of any available cash cover); 

 

	 	(ii)	for an Interest Period of three months or such other period of up to six months as notified by the relevant Borrower to the relevant L/C Bank prior to the Utilisation
Date applicable to such currency; and 

  

	 	(iii)	with a Utilisation Date on the date receipt of the relevant demand or notification. 

The proceeds of any such Revolving Facility Advance shall be used to pay the relevant claim. 

 

	 	(d)	Each Borrower acknowledges that each L/C Bank: 

  

	 	(i)	is not obliged to carry out any investigation or seek any confirmation from any other person before paying a claim; and 

 

	 	(ii)	deals in documents only and will not be concerned with the legality of a claim or any underlying transaction or any available set-off, counterclaim or other defence of
any person. 

  

	 	(e)	The obligations of each Borrower under this Clause 5.6 will not be affected by: 

 

	 	(i)	the sufficiency, accuracy or genuineness of any claim or any other document; or 

 

	 	(ii)	any incapacity of, or limitation on the powers of, any person signing a claim or other document. 

 

	 	(f)	Without prejudice to any other matter contained in this Clause 5.6, the relevant L/C Bank shall notify the relevant Borrowers as soon as reasonably practicable
after receiving a claim. 

  
 72 

	5.7	Documentary Credit Indemnities 

  

	 	(a)	A Borrower shall within 3 Business Days of demand indemnify an L/C Bank against any cost, loss or liability incurred by such L/C Bank (otherwise than by reason of such
L/C Bank’s gross negligence, wilful misconduct or wilful breach of the terms of this Agreement) in acting as an L/C Bank under any Documentary Credit requested by such Borrower. 

 

	 	(b)	Each L/C Lender shall (according to its L/C Proportion) promptly on demand indemnify an L/C Bank against any cost, loss or liability incurred by such L/C Bank
(otherwise than by reason of such L/C Bank’s gross negligence, wilful misconduct or wilful breach of the terms of this Agreement) in acting as an L/C Bank under any Documentary Credit (except to the extent that such L/C Bank has been reimbursed
by an Obligor pursuant to a Relevant Finance Document). 

  

	 	(c)	If any L/C Lender is not permitted (by its constitutional documents or any applicable Law) to comply with paragraph (b) above, then that L/C Lender will not be
obliged to comply with paragraph (b) above and shall instead be deemed to have taken, on the date the relevant Documentary Credit is issued (or if later, on the date that L/C Lender’s participation in the Documentary Credit is transferred
or assigned to that L/C Lender in accordance with the terms of this Agreement), an undivided interest and participation in the Documentary Credit in an amount equal to its L/C Proportion of that Documentary Credit. On receipt of demand from the
Facility Agent, that L/C Lender shall pay to the Facility Agent (for the account of the relevant L/C Bank) an amount equal to its L/C Proportion of the amount demanded under paragraph (b) above. 

 

	 	(d)	The Borrower which requested the Documentary Credit shall within 3 Business Days of demand reimburse any L/C Lender for any payment it makes to an L/C Bank under this
Clause 5.7 in respect of that Documentary Credit unless such Lender or an Obligor has already reimbursed such L/C Bank in respect of that payment. 

  

	 	(e)	The obligations of each L/C Lender and Borrower under this Clause 5.7 are continuing obligations and will extend to the ultimate balance of sums payable by that
L/C Lender in respect of any Documentary Credit, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part. 

  

	 	(f)	The obligations of any L/C Lender or Borrower under this Clause 5.7 will not be affected by any act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this Clause 5.7
would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Clause 5.7 (without limitation and whether or not known to it or any other person) including: 

 

	 	(i)	any time, waiver or consent granted to, or composition with, any Obligor, any beneficiary under a Documentary Credit or any other person; 

 

	 	(ii)	the release of any Obligor or any other person under the terms of any composition or arrangement with any creditor of any member of the Group; 

 

	 	(iii)	the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets
of, any Obligor, any beneficiary under a Documentary Credit or any other person or any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

  
 73 

	 	(iv)	any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Obligor, any beneficiary under a Documentary
Credit or any other person; 

  

	 	(v)	any amendment or restatement (however fundamental) or replacement of a Relevant Finance Document, any Documentary Credit or any other document or security;

  

	 	(vi)	any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under any Relevant Finance Document, any Documentary Credit or any other document or
security; or 

  

	 	(vii)	any insolvency or similar proceedings. 

  

	5.8	Cash Collateral by Non-Acceptable L/C Lender 

  

	 	(a)	If, at any time, a Lender under the Revolving Facility is a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender, the relevant L/C Bank may, by notice to that Lender, request that Lender to pay
and that Lender shall pay, on or prior to the date falling 3 Business Days after the request by such L/C Bank, an amount equal to that Lender’s L/C Proportion of the outstanding amount of a Documentary Credit issued by such L/C Bank and in
the currency of that Documentary Credit to an interest-bearing account held in the name of that Lender with such L/C Bank. 

  

	 	(b)	The Non-Acceptable L/C Lender to whom a request has been made in accordance with paragraph (a) above shall enter into a security document or other form of
collateral arrangement over the account, in form and substance satisfactory to the relevant L/C Bank, as collateral for any amounts due and payable under the Relevant Finance Documents by that Lender to the L/C Bank in respect of that Documentary
Credit. 

  

	 	(c)	Until no amount is or may be outstanding under that Documentary Credit, withdrawals from the account may only be made to pay to the relevant L/C Bank amounts due and
payable to the relevant L/C Bank by the Non-Acceptable L/C Lender under the Relevant Finance Documents in respect of that Documentary Credit. 

  

	 	(d)	Each Lender under the Revolving Facility shall notify the Facility Agent and the Company: 

 

	 	(i)	on the Original Execution Date or on any later date on which it becomes such a Lender in accordance with Clause 2.2 (Increase) or Clause 37
(Assignments and Transfers) whether it is a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender; and 

  

	 	(ii)	as soon as practicable upon becoming aware of the same, that it has become a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender, 

and an indication in a Transfer Deed or in an Increase Confirmation to that effect will constitute a notice under paragraph (d)(i) to
the Facility Agent and, upon delivery in accordance with Clause 37.12 (Copy of Transfer Deed or Increase Confirmation to Company), to the Company. 
  

	 	(e)	Any notice received by the Facility Agent pursuant to paragraph (d) above shall constitute notice to each L/C Bank of that Lender’s status and the Facility
Agent shall, upon receiving each such notice, promptly notify each L/C Bank of that Lender’s status as specified in that notice. 

  

	 	(f)	If a Lender who has provided cash collateral in accordance with this Clause 5.8: 

  
 74 

	 	(i)	ceases to be a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender; and 

  

	 	(ii)	no amount is due and payable by that Lender in respect of a Documentary Credit, 

 that Lender may, at any time it is not a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender, by notice to the relevant L/C Bank request that an amount equal to the amount of the cash provided by it as collateral in respect of
that Documentary Credit (together with any accrued interest) standing to the credit of the relevant account held with that L/C Bank be returned to it and that L/C Bank shall pay that amount to the Lender within 3 Business Days after the request
from the Lender (and shall cooperate with the Lender in order to procure that the relevant security or collateral arrangement is released and discharged). 
  

	5.9	Cash Cover by Borrower 

  

	 	(a)	If a Lender which is a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender fails to provide cash collateral (or notifies the relevant L/C Bank that it will not provide cash collateral) in
accordance with Clause 5.8 (Cash Collateral by Non-Acceptable L/C Lender) and that L/C Bank notifies the Obligors’ Agent (with a copy to the Facility Agent) that it requires the Borrower of the relevant Documentary Credit or
proposed Documentary Credit to provide cash cover to an account with that L/C Bank in an amount equal to that Lender’s L/C Proportion of the outstanding amount of that Documentary Credit and in the currency of that Documentary Credit then that
Borrower shall do so within 5 Business Days after the notice is given. 

  

	 	(b)	Notwithstanding paragraph 1.3(r) of Clause 1.3 (Construction), the Borrower shall be entitled to withdraw amounts up to the level of that cash cover
from the account if: 

  

	 	(i)	the relevant L/C Bank is satisfied that the relevant Lender is no longer a Non-Acceptable L/C Lender; or 

 

	 	(ii)	the relevant Lender’s obligations in respect of the relevant Documentary Credit are transferred to a New Lender in accordance with the terms of this Agreement; or

  

	 	(iii)	an Increase Lender has agreed to undertake the obligations in respect of the relevant Lender’s L/C Proportion of the Documentary Credit. 

 

	 	(c)	To the extent that a Borrower has complied with its obligations to provide cash cover in accordance with this Clause 5.9, the relevant Lender’s L/C Proportion
in respect of that Documentary Credit will remain (but that Lender’s obligations in relation to that Documentary Credit may be satisfied in accordance with paragraph (r)(ii) of Clause 1.3 (Construction)). However, the relevant
Borrower’s obligation to pay any Documentary Credit fee in relation to the relevant Documentary Credit to the Facility Agent (for the account of that Lender) in accordance with Clause 16 (Commissions and Fees) will be reduced
proportionately as from the date on which it complies with that obligation to provide cash cover (and for so long as the relevant amount of cash cover continues to stand as collateral). 

 

	 	(d)	The relevant L/C Bank shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of the extent to which a Borrower provides cash cover pursuant to this Clause 5.9 and of any change
in the amount of cash cover so provided. 

  
 75 

	5.10	Rights of Contribution 

No Obligor will be entitled to any right of contribution or indemnity from any Relevant Finance Party in respect of any payment it may
make under this Clause 5. 
  

	5.11	Appointment and Change of L/C Bank 

  

	 	(a)	The Company, with the prior written consent of the relevant Lender, may designate any Lender with a Revolving Facility Commitment as an L/C Bank or as a replacement
therefor, but not with respect to Documentary Credits already issued by any other L/C Bank. 

  

	 	(b)	Any Lender so designated shall become an L/C Bank under this Agreement by delivering to the Facility Agent an executed L/C Bank Accession Certificate.

  

	 	(c)	An L/C Bank may resign as issuer of further Documentary Credits at any time if (i) the Company and an Instructing Group consent to such resignation or so require;
(ii) there is, in the reasonable opinion of each L/C Bank, an actual or potential conflict of interest in it continuing to act as L/C Bank; or (iii) its Revolving Facility Commitment is reduced to zero, provided that an L/C Bank shall not
resign until a replacement L/C Bank is appointed. 

  

	6.	ANCILLARY FACILITIES 

  

	6.1	Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities 

  

	 	(a)	Each Borrower may, subject to paragraph (b) below, at any time at least 35 days prior to the Termination Date in respect of the Revolving Facility by delivery of a
notice (a “Conversion Notice”) to the Facility Agent, request an Ancillary Facility to be established by the conversion of any Lender’s Available Revolving Facility Commitment (or any part of it) into an Ancillary Facility
Commitment with effect from the date (in this Clause 6, the “Effective Date”) specified in the Conversion Notice (being a date not less than 5 Business Days after the date such Conversion Notice is received by the Facility
Agent). 

  

	 	(b)	Each Conversion Notice shall specify: 

  

	 	(i)	the proposed Borrower(s) (or any Affiliate of a Borrower that is a member of the Bank Group) which may use the Ancillary Facility; 

 

	 	(ii)	the nominated Ancillary Facility Lender; 

  

	 	(iii)	the type of Ancillary Facility and the currency or currencies in which the relevant Borrower wishes such Ancillary Facility to be available; 

 

	 	(iv)	the proposed Sterling Amount of the original Ancillary Facility Commitment, being an amount (i) equal to the Available Revolving Facility Commitment of the
nominated Ancillary Facility Lender or, if less, (ii) equal to or more than £1 million; 

  

	 	(v)	the Effective Date and expiry date for the Ancillary Facility (such expiry date not to extend beyond the Final Maturity Date in respect of the Revolving Facility);

  

	 	(vi)	 if the Ancillary Facility is an overdraft facility comprising more than one account, its maximum gross amount (that amount being the
“Designated 

  
 76 

	 	
Gross Amount” and its maximum net amount (that amount being the “Designated Net Amount”); and 

 

	 	(vii)	such other details as to the nature, amount, fees for and operation of the proposed Ancillary Facility as the Facility Agent and the nominated Ancillary Facility Lender
may reasonably require. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Company, the nominated Ancillary Facility Lender and the Lenders of each Conversion Notice received pursuant to
paragraph (a) above. 

  

	 	(d)	Any Lender nominated as an Ancillary Facility Lender which has notified the Facility Agent of its consent to such nomination shall be authorised to make the proposed
Ancillary Facility available in accordance with the Conversion Notice (as approved by the Facility Agent) with effect on and from the Effective Date. No other Lender shall be obliged to consent to the nomination of the Ancillary Facility Lender.

  

	 	(e)	Any material variation from the terms of the Ancillary Facility or any proposed increase or reduction or extension of the Ancillary Facility Commitment shall be
effected on and subject to the provisions of this Clause 6 mutatis mutandis as if such Ancillary Facility were newly requested (including, for the avoidance of doubt, that such newly requested Ancillary Facility shall only take effect
from a date not less than 5 Business Days after the date the Facility Agent has received notice of the modification or variation or extension), provided that the Sterling Amount of the Ancillary Facility Outstandings under each Ancillary Facility
provided by an Ancillary Facility Lender shall at no time exceed the Available Revolving Facility Commitment of that Ancillary Facility Lender. 

  

	 	(f)	Each relevant Borrower may (subject to compliance with the applicable terms of the relevant Ancillary Facility) at any time by giving written notice to the Facility
Agent and the relevant Ancillary Facility Lender cancel any Ancillary Facility Commitment pursuant to and in accordance with Clause 10.1 (Voluntary Cancellation), provided that on the date of such cancellation, that part of such
Ancillary Facility Commitment as shall have been so cancelled shall be converted back into the Revolving Facility Commitment of the relevant Lender unless the Revolving Facility Commitments are also cancelled on such date. 

 

	 	(g)	The Ancillary Facility Commitment of any Ancillary Facility Lender shall terminate and be cancelled on the date agreed therefor between the relevant Ancillary Facility
Lender and the relevant Borrower, provided such date shall be no later than the Termination Date in respect of the Revolving Facility (the “Ancillary Facility Termination Date”). Any Ancillary Facility Outstandings on the applicable
Ancillary Facility Termination Date shall be repaid in full by the relevant Borrower on such date. 

  

	 	(h)	The Revolving Facility Commitment of each Lender at any time shall be reduced by the amount of any Ancillary Facility Commitment of such Lender at such time but such
reduced Commitment shall, subject to any other provisions of this Agreement, automatically be increased by the amount of any portion of its Ancillary Facility Commitment which ceases to be made available to the relevant Borrowers for any reason
(other than as a result of Utilisation of it) in accordance with the terms of such Ancillary Facility or is cancelled pursuant to paragraphs (f) or (g) above. 

 

	6.2	Operation of Ancillary Facilities 

  

	 	(a)	 Subject to paragraph (b) below, the terms governing the operation of any Ancillary Facility (including the rate of interest (including default
interest), fees, commission and 

  
 77 

	 	
other remuneration in respect of such Ancillary Facility) shall be those determined by agreement between the Ancillary Facility Lender and the relevant Borrower, provided that such terms shall be
based upon the normal commercial terms and market rates of the relevant Ancillary Facility Lender. 

  

	 	(b)	In the case of any inconsistency or conflict between the terms of any Ancillary Facility, the applicable Ancillary Facility Documents and this Agreement, the terms and
provisions of the applicable Ancillary Facility Document shall prevail unless the contrary intention is expressly provided for in this Agreement. 

  

	 	(c)	Each relevant Borrower and Ancillary Facility Lender will promptly upon request by the Facility Agent, supply the Facility Agent with such information relating to the
operation of each Ancillary Facility (including without limitation details of the Ancillary Facility Outstandings and the Sterling Amount thereof) as the Facility Agent may from time to time reasonably request (and each relevant Borrower consents to
such documents and information being provided to the Facility Agent and the other Lenders). 

  

	6.3	Ancillary Facility Default 

  

	 	(a)	If a default occurs under any Ancillary Facility, no Ancillary Facility Lender may demand repayment of any monies or demand cash cover for any Ancillary Facility
Outstandings, or take any analogous action in respect of any Ancillary Facility, until the Acceleration Date. 

  

	 	(b)	If an Acceleration Date occurs, the claims of each Lender with a Revolving Facility Commitment and each Ancillary Facility Lender in respect of amounts outstanding to
them under the Revolving Facility and Ancillary Facilities respectively shall be adjusted in accordance with this Clause 6.3 by making all necessary transfers of such portions of such claims such that following such transfers the Revolving
Facility Outstandings and Ancillary Facility Outstandings (together with the rights to receive interest, fees and charges in relation thereto) of (i) each Lender with a Revolving Facility Commitment and (ii) each Ancillary Facility Lender,
in each case as at the Acceleration Date shall be an amount corresponding pro rata to the proportion that the sum of such Lender’s Revolving Facility Commitment and/or (as the case may be) Ancillary Facility Commitment bears to the sum
of all of the Revolving Facility Commitments and the Ancillary Commitments, each as at the Acceleration Date. 

  

	 	(c)	No later than the third Business Day following the Acceleration Date each of the Ancillary Facility Lenders shall notify the Facility Agent in writing of the Sterling
Amount of its Ancillary Facility Outstandings as at the close of business on the Acceleration Date, such amount to take account of any clearing of debits which were entered into the clearing system of such Ancillary Facility Lenders prior to the
Acceleration Date and any amounts credited to the relevant accounts prior to close of business on the Acceleration Date. 

  

	 	(d)	On receipt of the information referred to in paragraph (c) above, the Facility Agent will promptly determine what adjustment payments (if any) are necessary as
between the Lenders participating in the Revolving Facility and each Ancillary Facility Lender in order to ensure that, following such adjustment payments, the requirements of paragraph (b) above are complied with. 

 

	 	(e)	 The Facility Agent will notify all the Lenders as soon as practicable of its determinations pursuant to paragraph (d) above, giving details of the
adjustment payments required to be made. Such adjustment payments shall be payable by the relevant Lenders and shall be made to the Facility Agent within 5 Business Days following receipt of such notification from the Facility Agent. The Facility
Agent shall 

  
 78 

	 	
distribute the adjustment payments received, among the Ancillary Facility Lenders and the Lenders participating in the Revolving Facility in order to satisfy the requirements of
paragraph (b) above. 

  

	 	(f)	If at any time following the Acceleration Date, the amount of Revolving Facility Outstandings of any Lender or Ancillary Facility Outstandings of any Ancillary Facility
Lender used in the Facility Agent’s calculation of the adjustments required under paragraph (d) above should vary for any reason (other than as a result of currency exchange fluctuation or other reason which affects all relevant Lenders
equally), further adjustment payments shall be made on the same basis (mutatis mutandis) provided for in this Clause 6.3. 

  

	 	(g)	In respect of any amount paid by any Lender (a “Paying Lender”) pursuant to either of paragraphs (e) or (f) above, as between a relevant
Borrower and the Paying Lender, the amount so paid shall be immediately due and payable by such relevant Borrower to the Paying Lender and the payment obligations of such relevant Borrower to the Lender(s) which received such payment shall be
treated as correspondingly reduced by the amount of such payment. 

  

	 	(h)	Each Lender shall promptly supply to the Facility Agent such information as the Facility Agent may from time to time request for the purpose of giving effect to this
Clause 6.3. 

  

	 	(i)	If an Ancillary Facility Lender has the benefit of any Encumbrance securing any of its Ancillary Facilities, the realisations from such security when enforced will be
treated as an amount recovered by such Ancillary Facility Lender in its capacity as a Lender which is subject to the sharing arrangements in Clause 35 (Sharing Among the Relevant Finance Parties) to the intent that such realisation
should benefit all Lenders pro rata. 

  

	6.4	Repayment of Ancillary Facilities 

  

	 	(a)	No Ancillary Facility Lender may demand repayment or prepayment of any amounts under its Ancillary Facility unless: 

 

	 	(i)	the Revolving Facility Commitments have been cancelled in full, or the Facility Agent has declared all Outstandings under the Revolving Facility immediately due and
payable; or 

  

	 	(ii)	the Ancillary Facility Outstandings under that Ancillary Facility can be repaid by a Revolving Facility Advance (and not less than 7 Business Days notice is given to
the relevant Borrower before payment becomes due). 

  

	 	(b)	For the purposes of repaying Ancillary Facility Outstandings (so long as paragraph (a)(i) above does not apply) a Revolving Facility Advance may be borrowed
irrespective of whether a Default is outstanding or any other applicable condition precedent not satisfied. 

  

	 	(c)	The share of the Ancillary Facility Lender in a Revolving Facility Advance being used to refinance that Ancillary Facility Lender’s Ancillary Facility will be that
amount which will result (so far as possible) in: 

  

	 	(i)	 the proportion which its share of all Outstandings under the Revolving Facility bears to the aggregate amount of the Outstandings under the Revolving
Facility, 

  
 79 

	 	
being equal to: 

  

	 	(ii)	the proportion which its Available Commitment with respect to the Revolving Facility bears to the aggregate of the Available Commitments with respect to the Revolving
Facility, 

 in each case, assuming the repayment of the relevant Ancillary Facility has taken place. The share of
the other Lenders in any such Revolving Facility Advance will be adjusted accordingly. 
  

	6.5	Continuation of Ancillary Facilities 

  

	 	(a)	A Borrower and an Ancillary Facility Lender may, as between themselves only, agree to continue to provide the same banking facilities following the Termination Date
applicable to the Revolving Facility or, as the case may be, the Revolving Commitments are cancelled under this Agreement. 

  

	 	(b)	If any arrangement contemplated in paragraph (a) above is to occur, the relevant Borrower and the Ancillary Facility Lender shall each confirm that to be the case
in writing to the Facility Agent. Upon such Termination Date or, as the case may be, date of cancellation, any such facility shall continue as between the said entities on a bilateral basis and not as part of, or under, the Relevant Finance
Documents. Save for any rights and obligations against any Relevant Finance Party under the Relevant Finance Documents prior to such Termination Date or, as the case may be, date of cancellation, no such rights or obligations in respect of such
Ancillary Facility shall, as between the Relevant Finance Parties, continue and the Security shall not support any such facility in respect of any matters that arise after such Termination Date or, as the case may be, date of cancellation.

  

	6.6	Affiliates of Lenders as Ancillary Facility Lenders 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to the terms of this Agreement, an Affiliate of a Lender may become an Ancillary Facility Lender. In such case, the Lender and its Affiliate shall be treated as
a single Lender whose Revolving Facility Commitment is the amount set out opposite the relevant Lender’s name in Part 1 of Schedule 1 (Lenders and Commitments) and/or the amount of any Revolving Facility Commitment transferred to or
assumed by that Lender under this Agreement, to the extent (in each case) not cancelled, reduced or transferred by it under this Agreement. For the purposes of calculating the Lender’s Available Commitment with respect to the Revolving
Facility, the Lender’s Commitment shall be reduced to the extent of the aggregate of the Ancillary Commitments of its Affiliates. 

  

	 	(b)	The Company shall specify any relevant Affiliate of a Lender in any Conversion Notice delivered by the Company to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 6.1
(Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities). 

  

	 	(c)	An Affiliate of a Lender which becomes an Ancillary Facility Lender shall accede to this Agreement as an Ancillary Facility Lender, and the Group Intercreditor
Agreement and the HYD Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Lender. 

  

	 	(d)	If a Lender assigns all of its rights and benefits or transfers all of its rights and obligations to a New Lender (in accordance with Clause 37 (Assignments and
Transfers), its Affiliate shall cease to have any obligations under this Agreement or any Ancillary Facility Document. 

  
 80 

	 	(e)	Where this Agreement or any other Relevant Finance Document imposes an obligation on an Ancillary Facility Lender and the relevant Ancillary Facility Lender is an
Affiliate of a Lender which is not a party to that document, the relevant Lender shall ensure that the obligation is performed by its Affiliate. 

  

	6.7	Affiliates of Borrowers 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to the terms of this Agreement, an Affiliate of a Borrower that is a member of the Bank Group may with the approval of the relevant Ancillary Facility Lender
become a borrower with respect to an Ancillary Facility. 

  

	 	(b)	The Company shall specify any relevant Affiliate of a Borrower in any Conversion Notice delivered by the Company to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 6.1
(Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities). 

  

	 	(c)	If a Borrower ceases to be a Borrower under this Agreement in accordance with Clause 37.3 (Resignation of a Borrower), its Affiliate shall cease to have any
rights under this Agreement or any Ancillary Facility Document. 

  

	 	(d)	Where this Agreement or any other Relevant Finance Document imposes an obligation on a Borrower under an Ancillary Facility and the relevant Borrower is an Affiliate of
a Borrower which is not a party to that document, the relevant Borrower shall ensure that the obligation is performed by its Affiliate. 

  

	 	(e)	Any reference in this Agreement or any other Relevant Finance Document to a Borrower being under no obligations (whether actual or contingent) as a Borrower under such
Relevant Finance Document shall be construed to include a reference to any Affiliate of a Borrower being under no obligations under any Relevant Finance Document or Ancillary Facility Document. 

 

	7.	OPTIONAL CURRENCIES 

  

	7.1	Selection of Currency 

Each Borrower under the Revolving Facility shall select the currency of a Revolving Facility Advance made to it (which shall be Sterling,
Dollars, euro or an Optional Currency) in the Utilisation Request relating to the relevant Revolving Facility Advance. 
  

	7.2	Unavailability of Optional Currency 

  

	 	(a)	If before 10.00 a.m. on the Quotation Date for the relevant Revolving Facility Advance: 

 

	 	(i)	a Lender notifies the Facility Agent that the relevant Optional Currency is not readily available to it in the amount required; or 

 

	 	(ii)	a Lender notifies the Facility Agent that compliance with its obligation to participate in the Revolving Facility Advance in the proposed Optional Currency would
contravene a Law or regulation applicable to it, 

 the Facility Agent will promptly give notice to the relevant
Borrower to that effect. In this event, any Lender that gives notice pursuant to this Clause 7.2 will be required to participate in the relevant Revolving Facility Advance in Sterling (in an amount equal to that Lender’s Proportion of the
Sterling Amount of the relevant Revolving Facility Advance or, in respect of a Rollover Advance, an amount equal to that Lender’s Proportion of the Sterling Amount of any amount that the Lenders are actually required to advance in accordance
with Clause 8.2 (Rollover Advances)), and its 

  
 81 

 
participation will be treated as a separate Advance denominated in Sterling during that Term. 
  

	 	(b)	Any part of a Revolving Facility Advance treated as a separate Advance under this Clause 7 will not be taken into account for the purposes of any limit on the
number of Advances or currencies outstanding at any one time. 

  

	8.	REPAYMENT OF REVOLVING FACILITY OUTSTANDINGS 

  

	8.1	Repayment of Revolving Facility Advances 

 Each Borrower shall (subject to Clause 8.2 (Rollover Advances)) repay the full amount of each Revolving Facility Advance drawn by it on its Repayment Date. 

 

	8.2	Rollover Advances 

Without prejudice to each Borrower’s obligation to repay the full amount of each Revolving Facility Advance made to it on the
applicable Repayment Date, where, on the same day on which such Borrower is due to repay a Revolving Facility Advance (a “Maturing Advance”) such Borrower has also requested that one or more Revolving Facility Advances in the same
currency as and in an amount which is equal to or less than the Maturing Advance be made to it (a “Rollover Advance”), subject to the Lenders being obliged to make such Rollover Advance under Clause 4.1 (Conditions to
Utilisation), the aggregate amount of the Rollover Advance shall be treated as if applied in or towards repayment of the Maturing Advance so that: 
  

	 	(a)	if the amount of the Maturing Advance exceeds the aggregate amount of the Rollover Advance: 

 

	 	(i)	the relevant Borrower will only be required to pay an amount in cash in the relevant currency equal to that excess; and 

 

	 	(ii)	each Lender’s participation (if any) in the Rollover Advance shall be treated as having been made available and applied by the Borrower in or towards repayment of
that Lender’s participation (if any) in the Maturing Advance and that Lender will not be required to make its participation in the Rollover Advance available in cash; and 

 

	 	(b)	if the amount of the Maturing Advance is equal to or less than the aggregate amount of the Rollover Advance: 

 

	 	(i)	the relevant Borrower will not be required to make any payment in cash; and 

 

	 	(ii)	each Lender will be required to make its participation in the Rollover Advance available in cash only to the extent that its participation (if any) in the Rollover
Advance exceeds that Lender’s participation (if any) in the Maturing Advance and the remainder of that Lender’s participation in the Rollover Advance shall be treated as having been made available and applied by the Borrower in or towards
repayment of that Lender’s participation in the Maturing Advance. 

  

	8.3	Cash Collateralisation of Documentary Credits 

  

	 	(a)	If not previously repaid in accordance with paragraph (b) below, each Borrower must repay each Documentary Credit issued on its behalf in full on the date stated
in that Documentary Credit to be its Expiry Date. 

  
 82 

	 	(b)	A Borrower may give the Facility Agent not less than 5 Business Days prior written notice of its intention to repay all or any portion of a Documentary Credit requested
by it prior to its stated Expiry Date and, having given such notice, shall procure that the relevant Outstanding L/C Amount in respect of such Documentary Credit is reduced in accordance with such notice by providing cash cover therefor in
accordance with Clause 1.3(r) (Construction) (in each case) or by reducing the Outstanding L/C Amount of such Documentary Credit or by cancelling such Documentary Credit and returning the original to the relevant L/C Bank or the Facility
Agent on behalf of the Lenders. 

  

	8.4	Final Repayment 

 The
Company shall procure that all amounts outstanding under the Revolving Facility shall be repaid in full on its Final Maturity Date. 
  

	9.	REPAYMENT OF TERM FACILITY OUTSTANDINGS 

  

	9.1	Repayment of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings 

Subject to any prepayments of A Facility Repayment Instalments, A1 Facility Repayment Instalments and A2 Facility Repayment Instalments
made in accordance with Clause 11.2 (Application of Repayments), the Borrowers under the A Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility shall make (or procure) such repayments as may be necessary to ensure that on each of the dates set out
in the table below (each, an “Amortisation Repayment Date”) the aggregate Sterling Amount of the A Facility Outstandings, the A1 Facility Outstandings and the A2 Facility Outstandings are reduced (on a pro rata basis) by an
aggregate amount equal to the amount set out in the table below (each such amount to be applied in repayment under this Clause 9.1 (Repayment of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings), an “A
Facility Repayment Instalment”, an “A1 Facility Repayment Instalment” or an “A2 Facility Repayment Instalment”, respectively): 

 

					
	 Amortisation Repayment Date
	  	Amount Repayable	 
	 30 June 2011
	  	£	150 million	  
	 30 June 2012
	  	£	175 million	  
	 30 June 2013
	  	£	200 million	  

 and provided that: 
  

	 	(a)	on 30 June 2014, the Borrowers under the A Facility and the A2 Facility shall make (or procure) such repayments as may be necessary to ensure that the aggregate
Sterling Amount of the A Facility Outstandings and the A2 Facility Outstandings are reduced (on a pro rata basis) by an aggregate amount equal to £200 million multiplied by the proportion (expressed as a percentage) which
(i) the aggregate of A Facility Outstandings and the A2 Facility Outstandings bears to (ii) the aggregate of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings; and 

 

	 	(b)	on 30 June 2015, the Borrowers under the A Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility shall make (or procure) such repayments as may be necessary to ensure that
the aggregate Sterling Amount of all of the A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings are reduced to zero. 

  
 83 

	9.2	No Reborrowing of A Facility Advances, A1 Facility Advances or A2 Facility Advances 

No Borrower may reborrow any part of any A Facility Advance, any A1 Facility Advance or any A2 Facility Advance which is repaid.

  

	9.3	Repayment of B Facility Outstandings and B1 Facility Outstandings 

 The Borrowers under the B Facility and the B1 Facility shall repay (or procure the repayment of) the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the B Facility Advance and the B1 Facility Advance,
respectively, in full in one instalment on the applicable Final Maturity Date. 
  

	9.4	Repayment of Additional Facility Outstandings 

 The Borrowers under each Additional Facility shall repay (or procure the repayment of) the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the Additional Facility Advances under that Additional Facility on the
Final Maturity Date applicable to such Additional Facility. 
  

	10.	CANCELLATION 

  

	10.1	Voluntary Cancellation 

The Company may, by giving to the Facility Agent not less than 3 Business Days prior written notice to that effect (unless an Instructing
Group has given its prior consent to a shorter period) cancel any Available Facility in whole or any part (but if in part, in an amount that reduces the Sterling Amount of such Facility by a minimum amount of £5,000,000 and an integral
multiple of £1,000,000) and any such cancellation shall (subject to the provisions of Clause 6.1(g) (Utilisation of Ancillary Facilities)), reduce the relevant Available Commitments of the Lenders rateably. 

 

	10.2	Notice of Cancellation 

Any notice of cancellation given by the Company pursuant to Clause 10.1 (Voluntary Cancellation) shall be irrevocable and
shall specify the date upon which such cancellation is to be made and the amount of such cancellation. 
  

	10.3	Cancellation of Available Commitments 

  

	 	(a)	On each Termination Date any Available Commitments in respect of the Facility to which such Termination Date relates shall automatically be cancelled and the Commitment
of each Lender in relation to such Facility shall automatically be reduced to zero. 

  

	 	(b)	No Available Commitments which have been cancelled hereunder may thereafter be reinstated. 

 

	10.4	Right of Repayment and Cancellation in Relation to a Single Lender 

  

	 	(a)	If: 

  

	 	(i)	any sum payable to any Lender, Ancillary Facility Lender or L/C Bank by an Obligor is required to be increased under Clause 17.1 (Tax Gross-up);

  

	 	(ii)	any Lender, Ancillary Facility Lender or L/C Bank claims indemnification from the Company under Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) or Clause 18 (Increased
Costs); or 

  
 84 

	 	(iii)	any Lender, Ancillary Facility Lender or L/C Bank invokes Clause 15.2 (Market Disruption), 

then, subject to paragraph (c) below: 
  

	 	(A)	if the circumstance relates to a Lender, the Company may: 

  

	 	(1)	arrange for the transfer or assignment in accordance with this Agreement of the whole (but at par only) of that Lender’s Commitment and participation in the
Utilisations to a new or existing Lender willing to accept that transfer or assignment; or 

  

	 	(2)	give the Facility Agent notice of cancellation of that Lender’s Commitment and the Company’s intention to procure the repayment of that Lender’s
participation in the Utilisation, whereupon the Commitment of that Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero; 

  

	 	(B)	if the circumstance relates to an Ancillary Facility Lender, the Company may give the Facility Agent notice of cancellation of that Ancillary Facility Lender’s
Ancillary Commitment and the Company’s intention to procure the repayment of the utilisations of any Ancillary Facility granted by that Ancillary Facility Lender, whereupon the Ancillary Commitment of that Ancillary Facility Lender shall
immediately be reduced to zero; and 

  

	 	(C)	if the circumstance relates to an L/C Bank, the Company may give the Facility Agent notice of repayment of any outstanding Documentary Credit issued by such L/C Bank
and cancellation of the appointment of such L/C Bank as an L/C Bank under this Agreement in relation to any Documentary Credit to be issued in the future or the provision of full cash cover in respect of such L/C Bank’s maximum contingent
liability under each outstanding Documentary Credit. 

  

	 	(b)	On the last day of each Interest Period which ends after the Company has given notice under paragraph (a)(A)(2), (a)(B) or (a)(C) above (or, if earlier, the date
specified by the Company in that notice), each Borrower to which a Utilisation or utilisation of an Ancillary Facility is outstanding shall repay that Lender’s participation in that Utilisation or the utilisation of the Ancillary Facility
granted by that Ancillary Facility Lender (together with all interest and other amounts accrued under the Relevant Finance Documents) or, as the case may be, provide full cash cover in respect of any Documentary Credit issued by that L/C Bank or any
contingent liability under an Ancillary Facility. 

  

	 	(c)	The Company may only exercise its rights under paragraph (b) above if: 

 

	 	(i)	in the case of paragraphs (a)(i) and (a)(ii) above, the circumstance giving rise to the requirement or indemnification continues or, in the case of (a)(iii) no
more than 90 days have elapsed since the relevant invoking of Clause 15.2 (Market Disruption); and 

  

	 	(ii)	it gives the Facility Agent and the relevant Lender not less than 5 Business Days prior notice. 

 

	 	(d)	The replacement of a Lender pursuant to paragraph (a)(A)(1) above shall be subject to the following conditions: 

  
 85 

	 	(i)	no Relevant Finance Party shall have any obligation to find a replacement Lender; 

 

	 	(ii)	any replaced Lender shall not be required to refund, or to pay or surrender to any other Lender, any of the fees or other amounts received by that replaced Lender under
any Finance Document; and 

  

	 	(iii)	any replacement of a Lender which is the Facility Agent shall not affect its role as the Facility Agent. 

 

	10.5	Right of Cancellation in Relation to a Defaulting Lender 

 Without prejudice to the Company’s rights under Clause 2.2 (Increase): 
  

	 	(a)	If any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, the Company may, at any time whilst the Lender continues to be a Defaulting Lender, give the Facility Agent 3 Business Days
notice of cancellation of each Available Commitment of that Lender. 

  

	 	(b)	On the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above becoming effective, each Available Commitment of the Defaulting Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero.

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent shall as soon as practicable after receipt of a notice referred to in paragraph (a) above, notify all the Lenders. 

 

	11.	VOLUNTARY PREPAYMENT 

  

	11.1	Voluntary Prepayment 

  

	 	(a)	Any Borrower may, by giving to the Facility Agent not less than 5 Business Days prior written notice to that effect (unless an Instructing Group has given its prior
consent to a shorter period): 

  

	 	(i)	repay the A Facility Advance, the A1 Facility Advance or the A2 Facility Advance (as applicable) drawn by it in whole or in part (but if in part, in an amount that
reduces the Sterling Amount of the A Facility Advance, the A1 Facility Advance or the A2 Facility Advance (as applicable) by a minimum amount of £5,000,000 and an integral multiple of £1,000,000) together with accrued interest on the
amount repaid without premium or penalty but subject to the payment of any Break Costs (if applicable); and 

  

	 	(ii)	subject to Clause 12.8 (Prepayment Fee), repay the B Facility Advance or the B1 Facility Advance drawn by it under the B Facility or B1 Facility respectively in
whole or in part (but if in part, in an amount that reduces the Sterling Amount of the relevant B Facility Advance or B1 Facility Advance respectively by a minimum amount of £5,000,000 and an integral multiple of £1,000,000), together
with accrued interest on the amount repaid without premium or penalty but subject to the payment of any Break Costs (if applicable). 

  

	 	(b)	Any Additional Facility Borrower may, by giving to the Facility Agent not less than 5 Business Days prior written notice to that effect (unless an Instructing Group has
given its prior consent to a shorter period), repay any Additional Facility Advance by such minimum amount as is agreed by the Company and the relevant Additional Facility Lender. 

  
 86 

	11.2	Application of Repayments 

  

	 	(a)	For as long as no Event of Default is outstanding, any repayment made pursuant to Clause 11.1 (Voluntary Prepayment) shall be applied in repayment of any of
the Term Facility Outstandings, in whole or in part, as selected by the Company at its discretion. 

  

	 	(b)	For as long as an Event of Default is outstanding, any repayment made pursuant to Clause 11.1 (Voluntary Prepayment) shall be applied at the end of the
Interest Period or Term current at the time of receipt of such proceeds, subject to paragraphs (d) and (f) below, firstly, in repayment of the Term Facility Outstandings pro rata to the aggregate amount of A Facility Outstandings,
A1 Facility Outstandings, A2 Facility Outstandings, B Facility Outstandings, B1 Facility Outstandings and, unless otherwise specified with respect to any Additional Facility in the applicable Additional Facility Accession Deed, Additional Facility
Outstandings on the date of such repayment until all A Facility Outstandings, all A1 Facility Outstandings, all A2 Facility Outstandings, all B Facility Outstandings, all B1 Facility Outstandings and, if applicable, any Additional Facility
Outstandings have been repaid in full; and, secondly, in repayment of Revolving Facility Outstandings on the date of such repayment. 

  

	 	(c)	[Not Used]. 

  

	 	(d)	Any Additional Facility Borrower may agree with any Additional Facility Lender that it shall be repaid after any of the other Term Facilities in which case the
application of repayment provisions as set out in paragraphs (b) and (c) above shall be amended to reflect any such agreement without the consent of any Lender. 

 

	 	(e)	Any repayment of A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings and A2 Facility Outstandings made pursuant to paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above shall
either: 

  

	 	(i)	reduce each of the remaining Repayment Instalments for the A Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility on a pro rata basis; or 

 

	 	(ii)	at the election of the Company made on or prior to the date upon which such repayment of the A Facility Outstandings, A1 Facility Outstandings or A2 Facility
Outstandings is made pursuant to paragraph (a) above, repay the immediately succeeding four (or less, if there are fewer than four) Repayment Instalments (other than the Repayment Instalment on the relevant Final Maturity Date) for the A
Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility, in chronological order of maturity, and thereafter in respect of any excess, reduce each of the remaining Repayment Instalments for the A Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility on a pro
rata basis. 

  

	 	(f)	Without prejudice to the provisions of paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above, any B Facility Lender or B1 Facility Lender may at its sole discretion during the
first 12 months from the Original Execution Date (other than in the case of a prepayment in full of the B Facility or B1 Facility (as applicable)), following such Lender’s receipt of notice of prepayment, notify the Facility Agent within 2
Business Days after receipt of such notice that it elects not to receive its share of the prepayment of the Outstandings under the B Facility or B1 Facility (as applicable) to be made pursuant to paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above, as
applicable, at the time such prepayment is to be made. In the event such notification is made, the amount which would have been applied in prepaying such B Facility Lender or B1 Facility Lender shall instead be applied in prepayment to the Lenders
of the A Facility, the A1 Facility and the A2 Facility, any accepting B Facility Lenders, any accepting B1 Facility Lenders and (unless otherwise specified with respect to any Additional Facility in the applicable Additional Facility Accession Deed)
any Additional Facility Lenders, as applicable, on a pro rata basis. 

  
 87 

	 	(g)	Any repayment of any Revolving Facility Outstandings under this Agreement shall be applied first against Revolving Facility Advances and when all Revolving Facility
Advances have been repaid in full, to provide cash collateral in respect of any Outstanding L/C Amounts. 

  

	11.3	Release from Obligation to Make Advances 

 A Lender for whose account a repayment is to be made under Clause 10.4 (Right of Repayment and Cancellation in Relation to a Single Lender) shall not be obliged to participate in the making of
Advances (including Revolving Facility Advances) or in the issue or counter-guarantee in respect of Documentary Credits or in the provision of Ancillary Facilities on or after the date upon which the Facility Agent receives the relevant notice of
intention to repay such Lender’s share of the Outstandings, on which date all of such Lender’s Available Commitments shall be cancelled and all of its Commitments shall be reduced to zero. 

 

	11.4	Notice of Prepayment 

 Any
notice of prepayment given by a Borrower pursuant to Clause 11.1 (Voluntary Prepayment) or Clause 10.4 (Right of Repayment and Cancellation in Relation to a Single Lender) shall be irrevocable, shall specify the date upon which such prepayment
is to be made and the amount of such prepayment and shall oblige that Borrower to make such prepayment on such date. 
  

	11.5	Restrictions on Repayment 

No Borrower may repay all or any part of any Advance (including, at any time, a Revolving Facility Advance) except at the times and in the
manner expressly provided for in this Agreement. 
  

	11.6	Cancellation upon Repayment 

 No amount repaid under this Agreement may subsequently be reborrowed other than any amount of a Revolving Facility Advance repaid in accordance with Clause 8.1 (Repayment of Revolving Facility
Advances) or any Documentary Credit repaid in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the Final Maturity Date in respect of the Revolving Facility and upon any repayment (other than in respect of a Revolving Facility Advance, as aforesaid)
the availability of the relevant Facility shall be reduced by an amount corresponding to the amount of such repayment and the Available Commitment of each Lender in relation to that Facility shall be cancelled in an amount equal to such
Lender’s Proportion of the amount repaid. For the avoidance of doubt, unless expressly agreed to the contrary in the relevant Ancillary Facility Documents, this Clause 11.6 shall not apply to any Ancillary Facility. 

 

	12.	MANDATORY PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION 

  

	12.1	Change of Control 

 If a
Change of Control occurs, all of the Available Commitments shall immediately be cancelled, the Commitments of each Lender in respect of each Facility shall be reduced to zero and the Company shall procure that the Outstandings are immediately repaid
in full together with unpaid interest accrued thereon and all other amounts payable pursuant to Clause 31 (Borrowers’ Indemnities) and any other provision of this Agreement. 

  
 88 

	12.2	[Not Used]  

  

	12.3	[Not Used]  

  

	12.4	[Not Used] 

  

	12.5	[Not Used] 

  

	12.6	[Not Used] 

  

	12.7	[Not Used] 

  

	12.8	Prepayment Fee 

 The
repayment of the B Facility Advance and the B1 Facility Advance in full pursuant to Clause 11.1(a)(ii) (Voluntary Prepayment) or Clause 12.1 (Change of Control) shall be subject to the payment of a prepayment premium. The
amount of such premium as well as the period for which it applies with respect to each of the B Facility and the B1 Facility shall be the amount and period as set out in the B Facility Accession Deed with each reference in such Deed to the B
Facility being deemed a reference to each of the B Facility and the B1 Facility. 
  

	12.9	[Not Used] 

  

	13.	INTEREST ON REVOLVING FACILITY ADVANCES 

  

	13.1	Interest Payment Date for Revolving Facility Advances 

 On (a) each Repayment Date (and, if the Term of any Revolving Facility Advance exceeds 6 months, on the expiry of each period of 6 months during such Term) or (b) if Clause 17.2(d)
(Lender Tax Status) applies, the relevant Confirmation Date, the relevant Borrowers shall pay accrued interest on each Revolving Facility Advance made to it. 
  

	13.2	Interest Rate for Revolving Facility Advances 

 The rate of interest applicable to each Revolving Facility Advance during its Term shall be the rate per annum which is the sum of the Revolving Facility Margin, the Mandatory Cost for such Advance at
such time (if applicable) and, in relation to any Revolving Facility Advance denominated in euro, EURIBOR, or in relation to any Revolving Facility Advance denominated in any other currency, LIBOR, for the relevant Term. 

 

	13.3	Margin Ratchet for Revolving Facility Advances 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (c) below, if in respect of any Quarter Date falling not less than 6 months after the Original Execution Date, the ratio of Consolidated Net
Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow computed on the same basis as the ratio set out in paragraph (a) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios) is within the range of ratios set out in column 1 of the table set out below (rounded to the second
decimal number), then the Revolving Facility Margin shall be reduced or increased to the percentage rate per annum set out opposite the relevant range in column 2. 

  
 89 

							
	 Leverage Ratio
	  	 	  	Margin	 
	 Greater than
	  	3.75:1.00	  	 	3.50	% 
	 Equal to or less than
	  	3.75:1.00 but greater than 3.25:1.00	  	 	3.25	% 
	 Equal to or less than
	  	3.25:1.00 but greater than 2.75:1.00	  	 	3.00	% 
	 Equal to or less than
	  	2.75:1.00	  	 	2.75	% 

  

	 	(b)	Any reduction or increase to the Revolving Facility Margin in accordance with paragraph (a) above shall take effect in relation to Revolving Facility Advances with
effect from the date of receipt by the Facility Agent in respect of the relevant Quarter Date of: 

  

	 	(i)	the quarterly financial information required to be delivered in accordance with Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements); and 

 

	 	(ii)	a Compliance Certificate required to be delivered in accordance with Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) evidencing the relevant ratio of Consolidated Net
Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow, 

 and shall apply until the date of receipt by the Facility Agent of the
quarterly financial information and Compliance Certificate in respect of the next succeeding Quarter Date on which the financial covenants are required to be tested pursuant to Clause 23.2 (Ratios) having regard to the provisions of
paragraph (d) thereof (or if such financial information and Compliance Certificate are not so delivered, the last day upon which such financial information and Compliance Certificate should have been so delivered in accordance with
Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements) and Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) in respect of such Quarter Date) whereupon the Revolving Facility Margin shall be recalculated on the basis of such financial information and
Compliance Certificate. 
  

	 	(c)	Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default, the Revolving Facility Margin shall revert to 3.50% and shall remain at such rate for so long as such Event of Default is
continuing and when such Event of Default ceases to be continuing it shall revert: 

  

	 	(i)	in the case of an Event of Default set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 27.2 (Covenants), upon the date on which the Facility Agent has received a
Compliance Certificate confirming compliance with the financial covenants set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition); or 

  

	 	(ii)	in the case of any other Event of Default either (A) upon the date on which the Facility Agent has received a certificate of a duly authorised officer of the
Company certifying that such Event of Default has been remedied, in which case, immediately upon receipt of such certificate or (B) where the Lenders have waived such Event of Default in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, immediately
upon the Facility Agent having confirmed to the Company that such Event of Default has been waived, 

 in each
case, to the applicable rate provided in paragraph (a) above by reference to: 
  

	 	(x)	in the case of an Event of Default of the type referred to in paragraph (c)(i) above, the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow set out in
the Compliance Certificate referred to therein; or 

  

	 	(y)	 in the case of any other Event of Default, the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow set out in the Compliance Certificate
most 

  
 90 

	 	
recently delivered to the Facility Agent prior to the remedy or waiver of such Event of Default. 

  

	14.	INTEREST ON TERM FACILITY ADVANCES 

  

	14.1	Interest Periods for Term Facility Advances 

 The period for which a Term Facility Advance is outstanding shall be divided into successive periods (each an “Interest Period”) each of which (other than the first) shall start on the
last day of the preceding such period. 
  

	14.2	Duration 

 The duration of
each Interest Period shall, save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, be 1, 2, 3 or 6 months in respect of each Term Facility other than the B Facility and B1 Facility and, in respect of the B Facility and B1 Facility, 2, 3 or 6 months, or, in
each case, such other period of up to 12 months as all the Lenders holding Commitments (in the case of the first Interest Period for a Term Facility Advance, and thereafter, Outstandings) under the relevant Facility may agree, in each case, as the
relevant Borrower may select by no later than 2:00 p.m. on the date falling 3 Business Days before the first day of the relevant Interest Period, provided that: 
  

	 	(a)	if such Borrower fails to give such notice of selection in relation to an Interest Period, the duration of that Interest Period shall, subject to the other provisions
of this Clause 14, be 3 months; and 

  

	 	(b)	any Interest Period that would otherwise end during the month preceding or extend beyond a Repayment Date relating to the Term Facility Outstandings shall be of such
duration that it shall end on that Repayment Date if necessary to ensure that there are Advances under the relevant Term Facility with Interest Periods ending on the relevant Repayment Date in a sufficient aggregate amount to make the repayment due
on that Repayment Date. 

  

	14.3	Consolidation and Division of Term Facility Advances 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (b) below, if two or more Interest Periods: 

  

	 	(i)	relate to Term Facility Advances under the same Term Facility made to the same Borrower in the same currency; and 

 

	 	(ii)	end on the same date, 

 those
Term Facility Advances will, unless that Borrower (or the Company on its behalf) specifies to the contrary for the next Interest Period, be consolidated into, and treated as, a single Term Facility Advance on the last day of the Interest Period.

  

	 	(b)	Subject to the requirements of Clause 14.2 (Duration), a Borrower (or the Company on its behalf) may, by no later than 2:00 p.m. on the date falling 3
Business Days before the first day of the relevant Interest Period, direct that any Term Facility Advance borrowed by it shall, at the beginning of the next Interest Period relating to it, be divided into (and thereafter, save as otherwise provided
in this Agreement, be treated in all respects as) 2 or more Advances in such amounts (equal in aggregate to the Sterling Amount of the Term Facility Advance being so divided) as shall be specified by that Borrower or the Company in such notice
provided that no such direction may be made if: 

  
 91 

	 	(i)	as a result of so doing, there would be more than 10 Advances outstanding under the relevant Term Facility; or 

 

	 	(ii)	any Term Facility Advance thereby coming into existence would have a Sterling Amount of less than £25 million. 

 

	14.4	Payment of Interest for Term Facility Advances 

 On (a) the last day of each Interest Period (or if such day is not a Business Day, on the immediately succeeding Business Day in the then current month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day
(if there is not)), and if the relevant Interest Period exceeds 6 months, on the expiry of each 6 month period during that Interest Period, or (b) if Clause 17.2(d) (Lender Tax Status) applies, the relevant Confirmation Date, the
relevant Borrower shall pay accrued interest on the Term Facility Advance to which such Interest Period relates. 
  

	14.5	Interest Rate for Term Facility Advances 

 The rate of interest applicable to a Term Facility Advance at any time during an Interest Period relating to it shall be the rate per annum which is the sum of the Applicable Margin, the Mandatory Cost
for such Advance at such time (if applicable) and, LIBOR, for such Interest Period. 
  

	14.6	Margin Ratchet for A Facility Advances, A1 Facility Advances and A2 Facility Advances 

 

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (c) below, if in respect of any Quarter Date falling not less than 6 months after the Original Execution Date the ratio of Consolidated Net
Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow computed on the same basis as the ratio set out in paragraph (a) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios) is within the range of ratios set out in column 1 of the table set out below (rounded to the second
decimal number), then the A Facility Margin, the A1 Facility Margin and the A2 Facility Margin shall be reduced or increased to the percentage rate per annum set out opposite the relevant range in column 2. 

 

							
	 Leverage Ratio
	  	 	  	Margin	 
	 Greater than
	  	3.75:1.00	  	 	3.50	% 
	 Equal to or less than
	  	3.75:1.00 but greater than 3.25:1.00	  	 	3.25	% 
	 Equal to or less than
	  	3.25:1.00 but greater than 2.75:1.00	  	 	3.00	% 
	 Equal to or less than
	  	2.75:1.00	  	 	2.75	% 

  

	 	(b)	Any reduction or increase to the A Facility Margin, the A1 Facility Margin and the A2 Facility Margin in accordance with paragraph (a) above shall take effect in
relation to A Facility Advances, A1 Facility Advances and A2 Facility Advances with effect from the date of receipt by the Facility Agent in respect of the relevant Quarter Date of: 

 

	 	(i)	the quarterly financial information required to be delivered in accordance with Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements); and 

 

	 	(ii)	 a Compliance Certificate required to be delivered in accordance with Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) evidencing the relevant ratio of
Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow, 

  
 92 

	 	
and shall apply until the date of receipt by the Facility Agent of the quarterly financial information and Compliance Certificate in respect of the next succeeding Quarter Date on which the
financial covenants are required to be tested pursuant to Clause 23.2 (Ratios) having regard to the provisions of paragraph (d) thereof (or if such financial information and Compliance Certificate are not so delivered, the last day
upon which such financial information and Compliance Certificate should have been so delivered in accordance with Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements) and Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) in respect of such Quarter Date)
whereupon the A Facility Margin, the A1 Facility Margin and the A2 Facility Margin shall be recalculated on the basis of such financial information and Compliance Certificate. 

 

	 	(c)	Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default, the A Facility Margin, the A1 Facility Margin and the A2 Facility Margin shall revert to 3.50% and shall remain at such
rate for so long as the Event of Default is continuing and when such Event of Default ceases to be continuing it shall revert: 

  

	 	(i)	in the case of an Event of Default set out in paragraph (c) of Clause 27.2 (Covenants), upon the date on which the Facility Agent has received a
Compliance Certificate confirming compliance with the financial covenants set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition); or 

  

	 	(ii)	in the case of any other Event of Default either (A) upon the date on which the Facility Agent has received a certificate of a duly authorised officer of the
Company certifying that such Event of Default has been remedied, immediately upon receipt of such certificate or (B) where the Lenders have waived such Event of Default in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, immediately upon the
Facility Agent having confirmed to the Company that such Event of Default has been waived, 

 in each case, to the
applicable rate provided in paragraph (a) above by reference to: 
  

	 	(A)	in the case of an Event of Default of the type referred to in paragraph (c)(i) above, the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow set out in
the Compliance Certificate referred to therein; or 

  

	 	(B)	in the case of any other Event of Default, the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow set out in the Compliance Certificate most recently
delivered to the Facility Agent prior to the remedy or waiver of such Event of Default. 

  

	14.7	Margin Ratchet for the B Facility Advance and the B1 Facility Advance 

 The B Facility Margin in respect of a B Facility and the B1 Facility Margin in respect of a B1 Facility shall be subject to any reduction or increase as may be set forth in the B Facility Accession Deed.

  

	14.8	Interest on Additional Facilities 

 The rate of interest on any Additional Facility and the timing of payment of such interest shall be regulated by the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed. 

 

	14.9	Notification 

 The
Facility Agent shall promptly notify the relevant Borrowers and the Lenders of each determination of LIBOR, EURIBOR, the Mandatory Cost, and any change to the proposed 

  
 93 

 
length of a Term or Interest Period or any interest rate occasioned by the operation of Clause 15 (Market Disruption and Alternative Interest Rates). 

 

	15.	MARKET DISRUPTION AND ALTERNATIVE INTEREST RATES 

  

	15.1	Absence of Quotations 

Subject to Clause 15.2 (Market Disruption): 
  

	 	(a)	if LIBOR or, if applicable, EURIBOR is to be determined by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a quotation on the Quotation Date in
accordance with Clause 15.2 (Market Disruption), the applicable LIBOR or EURIBOR shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Reference Banks; or 

 

	 	(b)	if Clause 15.3 (Alternative Reference Bank Rate) applies but an Alternative Reference Bank does not supply a quotation in accordance with Clause 15.3
(Alternative Reference Bank Rate), the applicable Alternative Reference Bank Rate shall be determined on the basis of the quotations of the remaining Alternative Reference Banks. 

 

	15.2	Market Disruption 

  

	 	(a)	If a Market Disruption Event occurs in relation to an Advance for any Interest Period, then the rate of interest applicable to each Lender’s portion of such
Advance during the relevant Interest Period or Term shall (subject to any agreement reached pursuant to Clause 15.4 (Alternative Rate)) be the rate per annum which is the sum of: 

 

	 	(i)	the Applicable Margin; 

  

	 	(ii)	the Alternative Reference Bank Rate or (if an Alternative Market Disruption Event has occurred with respect to an Advance for the relevant Interest Period of that
Advance) the rate per annum notified to the Facility Agent by such Lender before the last day of such Interest Period or Term to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to such Lender of funding from whatever sources it may
reasonably select its portion of such Advance during such Interest Period or Term provided that if more than one such rate is notified to the Facility Agent pursuant to this Clause 15.2(a)(ii), the rate shall be the average of those rates so
notified; and 

  

	 	(iii)	the Mandatory Cost, if any, applicable to such Lender’s participation in the relevant Advance. 

 

	 	(b)	If: 

  

	 	(i)	the percentage rate per annum notified by a Lender pursuant to paragraph (a)(ii) above is less than the Alternative Reference Bank Rate; or

  

	 	(ii)	a Lender has not notified the Facility Agent of a percentage rate per annum pursuant to paragraph (a)(ii) above, 

the cost to that Lender of funding its participation in that Advance for that Interest Period shall be deemed, for the purposes of
paragraph (a) above, to be the Alternative Reference Bank Rate. 

  
 94 

	 	(c)	In this Agreement: 

“Alternative Market Disruption Event” means: 

 

	 	(i)	before close of business in London on the date falling one Business Day after the Quotation Date for the relevant Interest Period or Term, none or only one of the
Alternative Reference Banks supply a rate to the Facility Agent to determine the Alternative Reference Bank Rate for the relevant Interest Period or Term; or 

 

	 	(ii)	before close of business in London on the Quotation Day for the relevant Interest Period or Term, the Facility Agent receives notifications from a Lender or Lenders to
whom in aggregate 40% or more of the relevant Advance is owed (or, in the case of an undrawn Advance, if made would be owed) that the cost to it of funding its participation from whatever source it may reasonably select would be in excess of the
Alternative Reference Bank Rate; and 

 “Market Disruption Event” means: 

 

	 	(i)	at or about noon on the Quotation Date for the relevant Interest Period or Term none or only one of the Reference Banks supplies a rate to the Facility Agent to
determine LIBOR or, if applicable, EURIBOR for the relevant currency and Interest Period; or 

  

	 	(ii)	before close of business in London on the Quotation Date for the relevant Interest Period or Term, the Facility Agent receives notifications from a Lender or Lenders to
whom in aggregate 40% or more of the relevant Advance is owed (or, in the case of an undrawn Advance, if made would be owed) that the cost to it of funding its participation from whatever source it may reasonably select would be in excess of LIBOR
or, if applicable, EURIBOR. 

  

	15.3	Alternative Reference Bank Rate 

  

	 	(a)	If a Market Disruption Event occurs, the Facility Agent shall as soon as is practicable request each of the Alternative Reference Banks to supply to it the rate at
which that Alternative Reference Bank could have borrowed funds in the relevant currency and for the relevant period in the London interbank market or, in relation to an Advance in euro, the European interbank market at or about 11:00 a.m. or, in
relation to an Advance in euro, at or about 11:00 a.m. (Brussels time) on the Quotation Date for the Interest Period of that Advance, were it to have done so by asking for and then accepting interbank offers for deposits in reasonable market size in
the currency of that Advance and for a period comparable to the Interest Period of that Advance. 

  

	 	(b)	As soon as is practicable after receipt of the rates supplied by the Alternative Reference Banks, the Facility Agent will notify the Company and the Lenders of the
arithmetic mean of the rates supplied to it in accordance with paragraph (a) above (the “Alternative Reference Bank Rate”). 

  

	15.4	Alternative Rate 

 If
Clause 15.2 (Market Disruption) applies and the Facility Agent or the Company so requires, the Facility Agent and the Company shall enter into negotiations with a view to agreeing an alternative basis: 

 

	 	(a)	for determining the rate of interest from time to time applicable to such Advances; and/or 

  
 95 

	 	(b)	upon which such Advances may be maintained (whether in Sterling or some other currency) thereafter, 

and any such alternative basis that is agreed shall take effect in accordance with its terms and be binding on each party to this
Agreement, provided that the Facility Agent may not agree any such alternative basis without the prior consent of each Lender holding Outstandings under each applicable Facility, acting reasonably. 

 

	16.	COMMISSIONS AND FEES 

  

	16.1	Commitment Fees 

  

	 	(a)	The Borrowers shall pay to the Facility Agent for the account of each relevant Lender (other than an Ancillary Facility Lender) a commitment commission on the aggregate
amount of such Lender’s Available Revolving Facility Commitment made available by it (other than any Ancillary Facility) from day to day during the period beginning on the earlier of (i) the first Utilisation Date and (ii) 30 days
after the Original Execution Date and ending on the Termination Date for the Revolving Facility, such commitment commission to be calculated at a rate of 40% of the applicable Revolving Facility Margin, payable in arrears on the last day of each
successive period of 3 months which ends during such period and on the Termination Date for the Revolving Facility. 

  

	 	(b)	No commitment fee is payable to the Facility Agent (for the account of a Lender) on any Available Revolving Facility Commitment of that Lender for any day on which that
Lender is a Defaulting Lender. 

  

	16.2	Arrangement and Underwriting Fee 

  

	 	(a)	The Company shall pay to the Bookrunners the fees specified in the Senior Fee Letter at the times and in the amounts specified in such letter. 

 

	 	(b)	The Company shall pay to any Additional Facility Lenders the fees specified in the relevant Additional Facility Accession Deed at the times and in the amounts specified
in such Additional Facility Accession Deed. 

  

	16.3	Agency Fee 

 The Company
shall pay to the Facility Agent and the Security Trustee for their own account the fees specified in the letter dated on or about the Original Execution Date from the Facility Agent to the Company at the times and in the amounts specified in such
letter. 
  

	16.4	Documentary Credit Fee 

Each Borrower shall, in respect of each Documentary Credit issued on its behalf pay to the Facility Agent for the account of each L/C
Lender (for distribution in proportion to each L/C Lender’s L/C Proportion of such Documentary Credit) a documentary credit fee in the currency in which the relevant Documentary Credit is denominated at a rate equal to the applicable Revolving
Facility Margin applied on the Outstanding L/C Amount in relation to such Documentary Credit (less any amount which has been repaid or prepaid). Such documentary credit fee shall be paid in arrears on each Quarter Date during the Term of the
relevant Documentary Credit and on the relevant Expiry Date (or the date of its repayment, prepayment or cancellation, if earlier) for that Documentary Credit. 

  
 96 

	16.5	L/C Bank Fee 

 Each
relevant Borrower shall pay: 
  

	 	(a)	to the Original L/C Bank a fronting fee in respect of each Documentary Credit requested by it and issued by the Original L/C Bank in the amount and at the times agreed
in the letter dated on or about the Original Execution Date between the Original L/C Bank and the Company; and 

  

	 	(b)	to any other L/C Bank a fronting fee in respect of each Documentary Credit requested by it and issued by that L/C Bank, in the amount and at the times agreed in any
letter entered into between such L/C Bank and such Borrower. 

  

	17.	TAXES 

  

	17.1	Tax Gross-up 

  

	 	(a)	Each payment made by the Parent or an Obligor under a Relevant Finance Document shall be made by it without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by
Law. Any Tax Deduction in relation to any payment due in any currency other than Sterling shall be calculated using the Facility Agent’s Spot Rate of Exchange on the date such payment is made and the Parent and the Obligors shall have no
liability if any subsequent credit or refund received by any Lender from any tax authority in relation thereto is in a different amount (when converted to the non-Sterling currency on any date). 

 

	 	(b)	As soon as it becomes aware that the Parent or an Obligor is or will be required by Law to make a Tax Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate at which or the
basis on which such Tax Deduction is to be made) the Parent or the relevant Obligor shall notify the Facility Agent accordingly. Similarly, a Lender shall notify the Facility Agent and the Parent upon becoming so aware in respect of a payment
payable to that Lender. 

  

	 	(c)	If a Tax Deduction is required by Law to be made by the Parent or an Obligor, the amount of the payment due shall, unless paragraph (f) below applies, be increased
to an amount so that, after the required Tax Deduction is made, the payee receives an amount equal to the amount it would have received had no Tax Deduction been required. 

 

	 	(d)	If a Tax Deduction is required by Law to be made by the Facility Agent or the Security Trustee (other than by reason of the Facility Agent or the Security Trustee
performing its obligations as such under this Agreement through an office located outside the United Kingdom) from any payment to any Relevant Finance Party which represents an amount or amounts received from the Parent or an Obligor, either the
Parent or that Obligor, as the case may be, shall, unless paragraph (f) below applies, pay directly to that Relevant Finance Party an amount which, after making the required Tax Deduction enables the payee of that amount to receive an amount
equal to the payment which it would have received if no Tax Deduction had been required. 

  

	 	(e)	 If a Tax Deduction is required by Law to be made by the Facility Agent or the Security Trustee from any payment to any Relevant Finance Party under
paragraph (d) above, the Facility Agent or the Security Trustee as appropriate shall unless paragraph (g) below applies, make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction to the relevant taxing
authority within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by Law and within 30 days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment in connection with that Tax Deduction, the Facility Agent or

  
 97 

	 	
the Security Trustee, as appropriate, making that Tax Deduction or other payment shall deliver to the relevant Borrower evidence that the Tax Deduction or other payment has been made or accounted
for to the relevant tax authority. 

  

	 	(f)	Neither the Parent nor any Obligor is required to make a Tax Payment to a Lender under paragraphs (c) or (d) above for a Tax Deduction in respect of tax
imposed by the United Kingdom on a payment of interest in respect of a participation in an Advance by that Lender to any UK Borrower where that Lender is not a Qualifying UK Lender on the date on which the relevant payment of interest is due
(otherwise than as a consequence of a Change in Tax Law) to the extent that payment could have been made without a Tax Deduction if that Lender had been a Qualifying UK Lender on that date. 

 

	 	(g)	Either the Parent or the relevant Obligor which is required to make a Tax Deduction shall make that Tax Deduction and any payment required in connection with that Tax
Deduction to the relevant taxing authority within the time allowed and in the minimum amount required by Law. 

  

	 	(h)	Within 30 days of making either a Tax Deduction or any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction, either the Parent or the relevant Obligor making that Tax
Deduction or other payment shall deliver to the Facility Agent for the Relevant Finance Party entitled to the interest to which such Tax Deduction or payment relates, evidence that the Tax Deduction or other payment has been made or accounted for to
the relevant tax authority. 

  

	17.2	Lender Tax Status 

  

	 	(a)	Each Lender represents and warrants to the Facility Agent and to each Borrower: 

 

	 	(i)	in the case of an Original Lender, that as at the Original Execution Date, it has the tax status set out opposite its name in Part 2 of Schedule 1 (Lender Tax
Status); or 

  

	 	(ii)	in the case of any other Lender, that as at the relevant Transfer Date or Increase Date, it is: 

 

	 	(A)	a UK Bank Lender; 

  

	 	(B)	a UK Non-Bank Lender and falls within paragraph (a) or (b) of the definition thereof; or 

 

	 	(C)	a UK Treaty Lender, 

 as the
same shall be expressly indicated in the relevant Transfer Deed or Increase Confirmation. 
  

	 	(b)	Each Lender expressed to be a “UK Non-Bank Lender” in Part 2 of Schedule 1 (Lender Tax Status) or in the Transfer Deed or Increase Confirmation
pursuant to which it becomes a Lender represents and warrants to: 

  

	 	(i)	 the Facility Agent and to each UK Borrower, on the Original Execution Date, or on the relevant Transfer Date or Increase Date (as the case may be) that
it is within paragraph (a) of the definition of UK Non-Bank Lender on that date (unless, if it is not within such paragraph (a), it is within paragraph (b) of such definition on that date, and has notified the Facility Agent of the
circumstances by virtue of which it falls within such paragraph (b) and has provided evidence 

  
 98 

	 	
of the same to the Company if and to the extent requested to do so, by the Facility Agent; and 

  

	 	(ii)	the Facility Agent and to each UK Borrower, that unless it notifies the Facility Agent and the Company to the contrary in writing prior to any such date, its
representation and warranty in paragraph (i) above is true in relation to that Lender’s participation in each Advance made to such Borrower, on each date that such UK Borrower makes a payment of interest in relation to such Advance.

  

	 	(c)	A Lender that intends to qualify as a UK Treaty Lender and either the Parent or the relevant Obligor that makes a payment to which that Lender is entitled shall
cooperate in completing any procedural formalities as may be necessary for either the Parent or the relevant Obligor to obtain authorisation to make that payment without a Tax Deduction; provided, however, that nothing in this paragraph (c)
shall require a Lender to disclose any confidential information or information regarding its business, tax affairs or tax computations (including, without limitation, its tax returns or its calculations). 

 

	 	(d)	(i) If, in relation to any interest payment to a Lender on an Advance made to a UK Borrower: 

 

	 	(A)	that Lender has confirmed to the relevant UK Borrower and to the Facility Agent before that interest payment would otherwise fall due that: 

 

	 	(1)	it has completed the necessary procedural formalities referred to in paragraph (c) above; and 

 

	 	(2)	H.M. Revenue & Customs has not declined to issue the authorisation referred to in the definition of “UK Treaty Lender” (the
“Authorisation”) to that Lender in relation to that Advance, or if H.M. Revenue & Customs has declined, the Lender is disputing that decision in good faith; and 

 

	 	(B)	the relevant UK Borrower has not received the Authorisation, 

 then, such Lender may elect, by not less than 5 Business Days prior confirmation in writing to the Facility Agent, that such interest payment (the “relevant Interest Payment”) shall not
be due and payable under Clause 13.1 (Interest Payment Date for Revolving Facility Advances) or Clause 14.4 (Payment of Interest for Term Facility Advances) (as applicable) until the date (the “Confirmation
Date”) which is 5 Business Days after the earlier of: 
  

	 	(X)	the date on which the Authorisation is received by the relevant UK Borrower; 

 

	 	(Y)	the date that Lender confirms to the relevant UK Borrower and the Facility Agent that it is not entitled to claim full relief from liability to taxation otherwise
imposed by the United Kingdom (in relation to that Lender’s participation in Advances made to that UK Borrower) on interest under a Double Taxation Treaty in relation to the relevant Interest Payment; and 

 

	 	(Z)	 the earlier of (I) the date which is 6 months after the date on which the relevant Interest Payment had otherwise been due and payable and

  
 99 

	 	
(II) the date of final repayment (whether scheduled, voluntary or mandatory) of principal in respect of the relevant Interest Payment. 

 

	 	(ii)	For the avoidance of doubt, in the event that sub-paragraph (i) above applies, the Interest Period or Term to which the relevant Interest Payment relates shall not
be extended and the start of the immediately succeeding Interest Period or Term shall not be delayed. 

  

	 	(e)	Any Lender which was a Qualifying UK Lender when it became party to this Agreement but subsequently ceases to be a Qualifying UK Lender (other than by reason of a
Change in Tax Law in the United Kingdom) shall promptly notify the UK Borrowers of that event, provided that if there is a Change in Tax Law in the United Kingdom which in the reasonable opinion of such UK Borrowers may result in any Lender which
was a Qualifying UK Lender when it became a party to this Agreement ceasing to be a Qualifying UK Lender, such Qualifying UK Lender shall co-operate with such UK Borrowers and provide reasonable evidence requested by such UK Borrowers in order for
such UK Borrowers to determine whether such Lender has ceased to be a Qualifying UK Lender provided, however, that nothing in this paragraph (e) shall require a Lender to disclose any confidential information or information regarding its
business, tax affairs or tax computations (including without limitation, its tax returns or its calculations). 

  

	 	(f)	For the purposes of paragraphs (a) to (e) above, each Lender shall promptly deliver such documents evidencing its corporate and tax status as the Facility
Agent or the Company may reasonably request, provided that in the event that any Lender fails to comply with the foregoing requirement, any Borrower shall be permitted: 

 

	 	(i)	to withhold and retain an amount in respect of the applicable withholding tax estimated in good faith by such Borrower to be required to be withheld in respect of
interest payable to such Lender; or 

  

	 	(ii)	subject to the provisions of paragraph (a) of Clause 37.5 (Assignments or Transfers by Lenders), to refuse to grant its consent to such transfer.

  

	 	(g)	In the event that either the Facility Agent or the Company has reason to believe that any representation given by a Lender in accordance with this Clause 17.2 is
incorrect or inaccurate, the Facility Agent or the Company (as the case may be) shall promptly inform the other party and the relevant Lender, and may thereafter request such documents relating to the corporate and tax status of such Lender as the
Facility Agent or the Company may reasonably require for the purposes of determining whether or not such representation was indeed incorrect. 

  

	 	(h)	If, following delivery of such documentation and following consultation between the Facility Agent, the Company and the relevant Lender, the Company concludes (acting
reasonably and in good faith) that there is insufficient evidence to determine the relevant tax status of such Lender, the relevant Borrower shall be permitted in respect of such Lender, to withhold and retain an amount in respect of the applicable
withholding tax estimated in good faith by such Borrower to be required to be withheld in respect of interest payable to such Lender until such time as that Lender has delivered sufficient evidence of its tax status to the Facility Agent and the
Company. 

  

	17.3	Tax Indemnity 

  

	 	(a)	 Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Company shall (within 5 Business Days of demand by the Facility Agent) pay (or procure that either the Parent
or the relevant Obligor pays) for the account of a Protected Party an amount equal to any Tax 

  
 100

	 	
Liability which that Protected Party reasonably determines has been or will be suffered by that Protected Party (directly or indirectly) in connection with any Relevant Finance Document.

  

	 	(b)	Paragraph (a) above shall not apply: 

  

	 	(i)	with respect to any Tax Liability of a Protected Party in respect of Tax on Overall Net Income of that Protected Party; or 

 

	 	(ii)	to the extent that any Tax Liability has been compensated for by an increased payment or other payment under paragraphs (c) or (d) of Clause 17.1 (Tax
Gross-up) or would have been compensated for by such an increased payment or other payment, but for the application of paragraph (f) of Clause 17.1 (Tax Gross-up). 

 

	 	(c)	A Protected Party making, or intending to make, a claim pursuant to paragraph (a) above shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of the event which will give, or
has given, rise to the claim together with supporting evidence, following which the Facility Agent shall notify the Company and provide such evidence to it. 

 

	 	(d)	A Protected Party shall, on receiving a payment from either the Parent or an Obligor under this Clause 17.3, notify the Facility Agent. 

 

	 	(e)	In this Clause 17.3: 

“Tax Liability” means, in respect of any Protected Party: 

 

	 	(i)	any liability or any increase in the liability of that person to make any payment of or in respect of tax; 

 

	 	(ii)	any loss of any relief, allowance, deduction or credit in respect of tax which would otherwise have been available to that person; 

 

	 	(iii)	any setting off against income, profits or gains or against any tax liability of any relief, allowance, deduction or credit in respect of tax which would otherwise have
been available to that person; and 

  

	 	(iv)	any loss or setting off against any tax liability of a right to repayment of tax which would otherwise have been available to that person. 

For this purpose, any question of whether or not any relief, allowance, deduction, credit or right to repayment of tax has been lost or
set off in relation to any person, and if so, the date on which that loss or set off took place, shall be conclusively determined by that person, acting reasonably and in good faith and such determination shall be binding on the relevant parties to
this Agreement. 
 “Tax on Overall Net Income” means, in relation to a Protected Party, tax (other than tax
deducted or withheld from any payment) imposed on the net income received or receivable (but not any sum deemed to be received or receivable) by that Protected Party by the jurisdiction in which the relevant Relevant Finance Party is incorporated
or, if different, the jurisdiction (or jurisdictions) in which the Relevant Finance Party is treated as residing for tax purposes or in which the relevant Relevant Finance Party’s Facility Office or head office is situated. 

  
 101

	17.4	Tax Credit 

  

	 	(a)	If either the Parent or an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Relevant Finance Party determines, in its sole opinion, that: 

 

	 	(i)	a Tax Credit is attributable to that Tax Payment; and 

  

	 	(ii)	that Relevant Finance Party has obtained, utilised and retained that Tax Credit, 

 the Relevant Finance Party shall (subject to paragraph (b) below and to the extent that such Relevant Finance Party can do so without prejudicing the availability and/or the amount of the Tax Credit
and the right of that Relevant Finance Party to obtain any other benefit, relief or allowance which may be available to it) pay to either the Parent or the relevant Obligor such amount which that Relevant Finance Party determines, in its sole
opinion, will leave it (after that payment) in the same after-tax position as it would have been in had the Tax Payment not been required to be made by the Parent or the relevant Obligor. 

 

	 	(b)	(i) Each Relevant Finance Party shall have an absolute discretion as to the time at which and the order and manner in which it realises or utilises any Tax Credits and
shall not be obliged to arrange its business or its tax affairs in any particular way in order to be eligible for any credit or refund or similar benefit. 

  

	 	(ii)	No Relevant Finance Party shall be obliged to disclose to any other person any information regarding its business, tax affairs or tax computations (including, without
limitation, its tax returns or its calculations). 

  

	 	(iii)	If a Relevant Finance Party has made a payment to the Parent or an Obligor pursuant to this Clause 17.4 on account of a Tax Credit and it subsequently transpires
that that Relevant Finance Party did not receive that Tax Credit, or received a reduced Tax Credit, either the Parent or such Obligor, as the case may be, shall, on demand, pay to that Relevant Finance Party the amount which that Relevant Finance
Party determines, acting reasonably and in good faith, will put it (after that payment is received) in the same after-tax position as it would have been in had no such payment or a reduced payment been made to the Parent or such Obligor.

  

	 	(c)	No Relevant Finance Party shall be obliged to make any payment under this Clause 17.4 if, by doing so, it would contravene the terms of any applicable Law or any
notice, direction or requirement of any governmental or regulatory authority (whether or not having the force of law). 

  

	18.	INCREASED COSTS 

  

	18.1	Increased Costs 

 Subject
to Clause 18.3 (Exceptions), each Borrower shall, within 3 Business Days of a demand by the Facility Agent, pay for the account of a Relevant Finance Party the amount of any Increased Cost incurred by that Relevant Finance Party or any
of its Affiliates as a result (direct or indirect) of: 
  

	 	(a)	 the introduction or implementation of or any change in (or any change in the interpretation, administration or application of) any Law, regulation,
practice or concession or any directive, requirement, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but where such law, regulation, practice, concession, directive, requirement, request or guideline does not have the force of law, it
is one with which 

  
 102

	 	
banks or financial institutions subject to the same are generally accustomed to comply) of any central bank, including the European Central Bank, the Financial Services Authority or any other
fiscal, monetary, regulatory or other authority after the Original Execution Date; or 

  

	 	(b)	compliance with any Law, regulation, practice, concession or any such directive, requirement, request or guideline made after the Original Execution Date.

  

	18.2	Increased Costs Claims 

  

	 	(a)	A Relevant Finance Party intending to make a claim pursuant to Clause 18.1 (Increased Costs) shall notify the Facility Agent of the event giving rise to the
claim, following which the Facility Agent shall promptly notify the relevant Borrower. 

  

	 	(b)	Each Relevant Finance Party shall, as soon as practicable after a demand by the Facility Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its, or if applicable,
its Affiliate’s Increased Costs and setting out in reasonable detail the circumstances giving rise to such claim and its calculations in relation to such Increased Costs. 

 

	18.3	Exceptions 

Clause 18.1 (Increased Costs) does not apply to the extent any Increased Cost: 

 

	 	(a)	is attributable to a Tax Deduction required by Law to be made by the Parent or an Obligor, as the case may be; 

 

	 	(b)	is compensated for by Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) (or would have been compensated for by Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) but was not so compensated
solely because paragraph (b) of Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) applied) or because of any failure to complete necessary procedural formalities under paragraph (c) of Clause 17.2 (Lender Tax Status);

  

	 	(c)	is compensated for by the payment of the Mandatory Cost; 

  

	 	(d)	is attributable to the gross negligence of or wilful breach by, the Relevant Finance Party or, if applicable, any of its Affiliates of any law, regulation, practice,
concession, directive, requirement, request or guideline, to which the imposition of such Increased Cost relates; 

  

	 	(e)	suffered by a Relevant Finance Party and in respect of which that Relevant Finance Party intends to make a claim pursuant to paragraph (a) of Clause 18.2
(Increased Costs Claims), is not (and its claim under paragraph (a) of Clause 18.2 (Increased Costs Claims) is not) notified by that Relevant Finance Party to the Facility Agent within 30 days of that Relevant Finance Party
becoming aware that it had suffered the relevant Increased Cost; or 

  

	 	(f)	is attributable to the implementation of or compliance with the “International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, a Revised Framework”
published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in June 2004 in the form existing on the Original Execution Date (“Basel II”) or any other law or regulation which implements Basel II (whether such implementation, application
or compliance is by a government, regulator, Relevant Finance Party or any of its Affiliates). 

  

	18.4	Basel III 

 In respect of
Clauses 18.1 and 18.2 and the payment of any Increased Costs attributable to the implementation of or compliance with Basel III, the Borrowers’ obligation to pay such 

  
 103

 
costs to a Relevant Finance Party shall be subject to that Relevant Finance Party confirming to the Borrowers, at the relevant time that any such costs are due, that the payment of such costs is
consistent with the general approach that that Relevant Finance Party is taking with respect to other similarly rated borrowers. For the avoidance of doubt, any failure by a particular Relevant Finance Party to provide such confirmation shall not in
any way affect the obligation of the Borrowers to pay any other Relevant Finance Party. 
  

	19.	ILLEGALITY 

  

	19.1	Illegality of a Lender 

If at any time after a Lender becomes a party to this Agreement it becomes unlawful in any applicable jurisdiction for such Lender to
perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or any Ancillary Facility Document respectively or to make, fund, issue or maintain its participation in any Utilisation or, in the case of an Ancillary Facility Lender, any
utilisation under any Ancillary Facility: 
  

	 	(a)	that Lender shall promptly notify the Facility Agent upon becoming aware of that event; 

 

	 	(b)	upon the Facility Agent notifying the Company, the Commitments of that Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero and cancelled or, if required by the Company, on such
date transferred to another bank or institution willing to accept that transfer; and 

  

	 	(c)	upon the Facility Agent notifying the Company, the Company shall procure that each Borrower will, on such date as the Facility Agent shall have specified (being no
earlier than the last day permitted by law): 

  

	 	(i)	repay that Lender’s participation in the Utilisations utilised by that Borrower (together with accrued interest on and all other amounts owing to that Lender under
the Relevant Finance Documents) or, if required by the Company, that Lender’s participations shall on such date be transferred at par to another bank or institution willing to accept that transfer (to the extent it is lawful for such Lender to
undertake such transfer); and/or 

  

	 	(ii)	repay each amount payable or, as the case may be, provide full cash cover in respect of each contingent liability under each Ancillary Facility of that Ancillary
Facility Lender. 

  

	19.2	Illegality in Relation to an L/C Bank 

 If it becomes unlawful in any relevant jurisdiction for an L/C Bank to perform any of its obligations as contemplated by this Agreement or to fund or maintain its participation in any Documentary Credit
(an “Affected Documentary Credit”): 
  

	 	(a)	that L/C Bank shall promptly notify the Facility Agent upon becoming aware of that event: 

 

	 	(b)	upon the Facility Agent notifying the Company, that L/C Bank shall not be obliged to issue any future Documentary Credit that would give rise to such unlawfulness; and

  

	 	(c)	upon the Facility Agent notifying the Company, each relevant Borrower shall use its best endeavours to procure the release of any Affected Documentary Credit.

  
 104

	20.	MITIGATION 

  

	20.1	Mitigation 

  

	 	(a)	Each Relevant Finance Party shall in consultation with the relevant Borrower, take all reasonable steps to mitigate any circumstances which arise and which would result
in any amount becoming payable under, or pursuant to, or cancelled pursuant to, any of Clause 17 (Taxes), Clause 18 (Increased Costs), Schedule 7 (Mandatory Cost Formula) or Clause 19 (Illegality) including
(but not limited to) transferring its rights and obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents to another Affiliate or Facility Office or financial institution acceptable to such Borrower which is willing to participate in any Facility in which
such Lender has participated. 

  

	 	(b)	Paragraph (a) above does not in any way limit the obligations of the Parent or any Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents. 

 

	20.2	Limitation of Liability 

  

	 	(a)	With effect from the Original Execution Date, each of the Borrowers agrees to indemnify each Relevant Finance Party for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by
that Relevant Finance Party as a result of steps taken by it under Clause 20.1 (Mitigation). 

  

	 	(b)	A Relevant Finance Party is not obliged to take any steps under Clause 20.1 (Mitigation) if, in the opinion of that Relevant Finance Party (acting
reasonably), to do so might in any way be prejudicial to it. 

  

	21.	REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES 

  

	21.1	Time for making Representations and Warranties 

  

	 	(a)	Each Obligor in relation to itself and, to the extent expressed to be applicable to them, its Subsidiaries, makes each of the following representations and warranties
to each Relevant Finance Party on the Original Execution Date other than in the case of the representations given under Clause 21.16 (Accuracy of Information) which shall be given as of the applicable dates specified in that Clause.

  

	 	(b)	The Ultimate Parent in relation to itself makes each of the representations and warranties set out in Clauses 21.2 (Due Organisation), 21.5 (No
Immunity), 21.6 (Governing Law and Judgments), 21.7 (All Actions Taken), 21.8 (No Filing or Stamp Taxes), 21.9 (Binding Obligations), 21.10 (No Winding-up), 21.13 (Original Financial Statements) (as to
the Original Financial Statements provided by it), 21.14 (No Material Adverse Change), 21.15 (No Undisclosed Liabilities), 21.18 (Execution of Relevant Finance Documents), 21.21 (Necessary Authorisations), 21.27
(Investment Company Act), 21.28 (Margin Stock), 21.33 (US Patriot Act) and 21.34 (Compliance with ERISA) to each Relevant Finance Party on the Original Execution Date. Any Holding Company of the Ultimate Parent who
accedes to this Agreement pursuant to Clause 26.3 (Acceding Holding Company) makes each of the Repeating Representations, to the extent they are listed in the foregoing sentence, with respect to itself on the date on which it accedes to
this Agreement. 

  

	 	(c)	 The Parent in relation to itself makes each of the representations and warranties set out in Clauses 21.2 (Due Organisation), 21.3 (No
Deduction), 21.4 (Claims Pari Passu), 21.5 (No Immunity), 21.6 (Governing Law and Judgments), 21.7 (All Actions Taken), 21.8 (No Filing or Stamp Taxes), 21.9 (Binding Obligations), 21.10 (No
Winding-up), paragraph (c) of Clause 21.17 (Indebtedness and Encumbrances), 21.18 

  
 105

	 	
(Execution of Relevant Finance Documents), paragraph (c) of Clause 21.19 (Structure), 21.21 (Necessary Authorisations), 21.26 (Security) and 21.30 (Centre
of Main Interests), to each Relevant Finance Party on the Original Execution Date. 

  

	21.2	Due Organisation 

 It is a
company duly organised or a partnership duly formed, in either case, validly existing under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation or establishment with power to enter into those of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party and to
exercise its rights and perform its obligations thereunder and all corporate and (subject to paragraph (c) of the definition of Reservations) other action required to authorise its execution of those of the Relevant Finance Documents to which
it is party and its performance of its obligations have been duly taken. 
  

	21.3	No Deduction 

 Under the
laws of its Relevant Tax Jurisdiction in force as at the Original Execution Date, it will not be required to make any deduction for or withholding on account of tax from any payment it may make under any of the Relevant Finance Documents to any
Lender which is a Qualifying UK Lender. 
  

	21.4	Claims Pari Passu 

Subject to the Reservations, the claims of the Relevant Finance Parties against it under the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is
party rank and will rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its unsecured and unsubordinated creditors save those whose claims are preferred by any bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation or similar laws of general application.

  

	21.5	No Immunity 

 In any legal
proceedings taken in its jurisdiction of incorporation or establishment and, if different, England in relation to any of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party it will not be entitled to claim for itself or any of its assets immunity
from suit, execution, attachment or other legal process. 
  

	21.6	Governing Law and Judgments 

 Subject to the Reservations, in any legal proceedings taken in its jurisdiction of incorporation or establishment in relation to any of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party, the choice of
law expressed in such documents to be the governing law of it and any judgment obtained in such jurisdiction will be recognised and enforced. 
  

	21.7	All Actions Taken 

 All
acts, conditions and things required to be done, fulfilled and performed in order: 
  

	 	(a)	to enable it lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights under and perform and comply with all material obligations expressed to be assumed by it in the Relevant
Finance Documents to which it is party; 

  

	 	(b)	subject to the Reservations, to ensure that all material obligations expressed to be assumed by it in the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party are legal,
valid and binding; and 

  

	 	(c)	 subject to the Reservations, to make the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party admissible in evidence in its jurisdiction of incorporation or
establishment and, if different, the United Kingdom, 

  
 106

	 	
have been done, fulfilled and performed. 

  

	21.8	No Filing or Stamp Taxes 

Under the laws of its Relevant Tax Jurisdiction and, if different, the United Kingdom, in force as at the Original Execution Date, it is
not necessary that any of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party be filed, recorded or enrolled with any court or other authority in such jurisdiction or that any stamp, registration or similar tax be paid on or in relation to any of
them other than those filings which are necessary to perfect the Security and save as stated in the Reservations. 
  

	21.9	Binding Obligations 

Subject to the Reservations, the obligations expressed to be assumed by it in the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party, are
legal, valid and binding and enforceable against it in accordance with the terms thereof and no limit on its powers will be exceeded as a result of the borrowings, grant of security or giving of guarantees contemplated by such Relevant Finance
Documents or the performance by it of any of its obligations thereunder. 
  

	21.10 	No Winding-up 

  

	 	(a)	None of the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, the Company or any other Obligor that is a Material Subsidiary is taking any corporate action nor are any other steps being
taken (including the commencement of any legal proceedings) against the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, the Company or any other Obligor that is a Material Subsidiary, for its winding-up, dissolution or administration or for the appointment of a
receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of any or all of its assets or revenues save as permitted under paragraphs (b), (c) or (d) of Clause 25.8
(Mergers), Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations) or as otherwise disclosed to the Facility Agent prior to the Original Execution Date. 

 

	 	(b)	Each US Obligor is Solvent. 

  

	21.11 	No Event of Default 

 No
Event of Default is continuing or might reasonably be expected to result from the making of any Advance. 
  

	21.12 	No Material Proceedings 

No litigation, arbitration or administrative proceeding of or before any court, arbitral body, or agency which is reasonably likely to be
determined adversely to it and which, if so adversely determined, has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect has been started or, to the best of its knowledge, is threatened in writing or, is pending against it or any member of
the Bank Group other than litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings commenced prior to the Original Execution Date, details of which have been disclosed to the Lenders prior to the Original Execution Date. 

 

	21.13 	Original Financial Statements 

 Its Original Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP which has been consistently applied (unless and to the extent expressly disclosed to the Facility Agent in writing to the contrary
before the Original Execution Date) and fairly present in all material respects the consolidated financial position of the group of companies to which they relate at the date as of which they were prepared and/or (as appropriate) the results of
operations and changes in financial position during the period for which they were prepared. 

  
 107

	21.14 	No Material Adverse Change 

Since publication of its Original Financial Statements, no event or series of events has occurred, in each case, which has or is
reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	21.15 	No Undisclosed Liabilities 

As at 31 December 2009, neither the Ultimate Parent nor any of its Subsidiaries had any material liabilities (contingent or
otherwise) which were not disclosed in the Original Financial Statements (including the notes thereto) or reserved against therein and the Group had no material unrealised or anticipated losses arising from commitments entered into by it which were
not so disclosed or reserved against, in each case, to the extent required to be disclosed by GAAP. 
  

	21.16 	Accuracy of Information 

In the case of the Company only: 
  

	 	(a)	to the best of its knowledge and belief having made all reasonable and proper enquiries, all statements of fact relating to the business, assets, financial condition
and operations of the Group contained in the Information Memorandum are true, complete and accurate in all material respects as at the date it is issued; 

  

	 	(b)	the opinions and views expressed in the Information Memorandum and the Agreed Business Plan represent the honestly held opinions and views of the Company and were
arrived at after careful consideration and were based on reasonable grounds as at the dates on which they were prepared; 

  

	 	(c)	all financial projections and forecasts made by any member of the Bank Group in the Information Memorandum or the Agreed Business Plan have been prepared in good faith
and are based upon reasonable assumptions (it being understood that such financial projections are subject to significant uncertainties, many of which are beyond the control of the Company and that no assurance can be given that such projections
will be realised); and 

  

	 	(d)	(other than in respect of the financial projections and forecasts referred to in paragraph (c) above), the Information Memorandum does not omit to disclose or take
into account any matter known to the Company after due and careful enquiry where failure to disclose or take into account such matter would result in the Information Memorandum being misleading in any material respect as at the date it is issued.

  

	21.17 	Indebtedness and Encumbrances 

  

	 	(a)	Save as permitted under this Agreement, neither it nor any member of the Bank Group has incurred any Financial Indebtedness which is outstanding.

  

	 	(b)	Save as permitted under this Agreement, no Encumbrance exists over all or any of the present or future revenues or assets of any member of the Bank Group.

  

	 	(c)	In relation to the Parent only, save as provided in the Security Documents no Encumbrance exists over any of its rights, title or interest in the shares of the Company
or the Parent Intercompany Debt owed to it by the Company. 

  
 108

	21.18 	Execution of Relevant Finance Documents 

 Its execution of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party and the exercise of its rights and performance of its obligations thereunder do not and will not: 

 

	 	(a)	conflict with any agreement, mortgage, bond or other instrument or treaty to which it is a party or which is binding upon it or any of its assets (save as contemplated
by paragraph (c) of the definition of Reservations) in a manner that has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; 

  

	 	(b)	conflict with any matter contained in its constitutional documents; or 

  

	 	(c)	conflict with any applicable law. 

  

	21.19 	Structure 

  

	 	(a)	The Group Structure Chart is a complete and accurate representation of the structure of the Group in all material respects prior to the Original Execution Date.

  

	 	(b)	The Company is a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent. 

  

	 	(c)	In the case of the Parent, it does not carry on any business or conduct any activities (other than in respect of the Existing High Yield Notes, and any on-lending of
the proceeds thereof). 

  

	21.20 	Environmental Matters 

  

	 	(a)	It has to the best of its knowledge and belief: 

  

	 	(i)	complied with all Environmental Laws to which it is subject; 

  

	 	(ii)	obtained all Environmental Licences required in connection with its business; and 

 

	 	(iii)	complied with the terms of all such Environmental Licences, 

 in each case where failure to do so has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	 	(b)	To the best of its knowledge and belief, there is no Environmental Claim pending or threatened against it, which has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse
Effect. 

  

	 	(c)	No: 

  

	 	(i)	property currently or previously owned, leased, occupied or controlled by it is contaminated with any Hazardous Substance; and 

 

	 	(ii)	discharge, release, leaking, migration or escape of any Hazardous Substance into the Environment has occurred or is occurring on, under or from that property,

 in each case in circumstances where the same has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

  
 109

	21.21 	Necessary Authorisations 

  

	 	(a)	The Necessary Authorisations required by it are in full force and effect; 

  

	 	(b)	it is in compliance with the material provisions of each Necessary Authorisation relating to it; and 

 

	 	(c)	to the best of its knowledge, none of the Necessary Authorisations relating to it are the subject of any pending or threatened proceedings or revocation,

 in each case, except where any failure to maintain such Necessary Authorisations in full force and effect, any
non-compliance or any proceedings or revocation has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect and subject to the Reservations. 
  

	21.22 	Intellectual Property 

The Intellectual Property Rights owned by or licensed to it are all the material Intellectual Property Rights required by it in order to
carry out, maintain and operate its business, properties and assets, and so far as it is aware, it does not infringe, in any way any Intellectual Property Rights of any third party save, in each case, where the failure to own or license the relevant
Intellectual Property Rights or any infringement thereof has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	21.23 	Ownership of Assets 

 Save
to the extent disposed of in a manner permitted by the terms of any of the Relevant Finance Documents with effect from and after the Original Execution Date, it has good title to or valid leases or licences of or is otherwise entitled to use all
material assets necessary to conduct its business taken as a whole in a manner consistent with the Agreed Business Plan except to the extent that the failure to have such title, leases or licences or to be so entitled has or is reasonably likely to
have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	21.24 	Payment of Taxes 

 It has
no claims or liabilities which are being, or are reasonably likely to be, asserted against it with respect to taxes which, if adversely determined, has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect save to the extent it (or any member of
the Group) having set aside proper reserves for such claims or liabilities, can demonstrate that the same are being contested in good faith on the basis of appropriate professional advice. All reports and returns on which taxes are required to be
shown have been filed within any applicable time limits and all material taxes required to be paid have been paid within any applicable time period other than to the extent that a failure to do so has or is reasonably likely to have a Material
Adverse Effect. 
  

	21.25 	Pension Plans 

  

	 	(a)	Each UK DB Scheme has been valued by an actuary appointed by the trustees of such plan in all material respects in accordance with all laws applicable to it and using
actuarial assumptions and recommendations complying with statutory requirements or approved by the actuary and since the most recent valuation the relevant employers have paid contributions to the plan in accordance with the schedule of
contributions in force from time to time in relation to the plan, in the case of each of the foregoing, save to the extent that any failure to do so would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

  
 110

	 	(b)	Neither it nor any ERISA Affiliate has, at any time, maintained or contributed to, and is not obliged to maintain or contribute to, any Plan that is subject to Title IV
or Section 302 of ERISA and/or Section 412 of the Code or any Multiemployer Plan. 

  

	21.26 	Security 

 Subject to the
Reservations, it is the legal or beneficial owner of all assets and other property which it purports to charge, mortgage, pledge, assign or otherwise secure pursuant to each Security Document and (subject to their registration or filing at
appropriate registries for the purposes of perfecting the Security created thereunder and the Reservations) those Security Documents to which it is a party create and give rise to valid and effective Security having the ranking expressed in those
Security Documents. 
  

	21.27 	Investment Company Act 

Neither it nor any of its Subsidiaries is required to register as an “investment company,” or a company “controlled”
by an “investment company,” as such terms are defined in the US Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended. Neither the making of any Drawing, nor the application of the proceeds or repayment thereof by any Obligor, nor the consummation of
the other transactions contemplated hereby, will violate any provision of such Act or any rule, regulation or order of the SEC promulgated thereunder. 
  

	21.28 	Margin Stock 

 In the case
of the Ultimate Parent only, no Advance (or the proceeds thereof) will be used to purchase or carry any Margin Stock or to extend credit for the purpose of purchasing or carrying any Margin Stock. Neither the making of any Advance nor the use of the
proceeds thereof nor the occurrence of any other Utilisation will violate or be inconsistent with the provisions of Regulation T, Regulation U or Regulation X. 
  

	21.29 	Insurance 

 Each member of
the Bank Group is adequately insured for the purposes of its business with reputable underwriters or insurance companies against such risks and to such extent as is necessary or usual for prudent companies carrying on such a business (other than
insurance in respect of the underground portion of the cable network and various pavement-based electronics associated with the cable network as disclosed in the Group’s public disclosure documents) and except to the extent that the failure to
so insure has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	21.30 	Centre of Main Interests 

Its Centre of Main Interests is the place in which its registered office is situated or, if different, another place in the country in
which its registered office is situated, or England. 
  

	21.31 	Broadcasting Act 1990 

Neither it nor any member of any Joint Venture Group is a “disqualified person” for the purposes of schedule 2 to such Act.

  

	21.32 	Telecommunications, Cable and Broadcasting Laws 

  

	 	(a)	 To the best of its knowledge and belief, it and each member of each Joint Venture Group is in compliance in all material respects with all
Telecommunications, Cable and Broadcasting Laws (but excluding, for these purposes only, breaches of Telecommunications, Cable and Broadcasting Laws which have been expressly

  
 111

	 	
waived by the relevant regulatory authority), in each case, where failure to do so would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

 

	 	(b)	To the best of its knowledge and belief, it and each member of each Joint Venture Group is in compliance in all material respects with any conditions set by the
Director General of Telecommunications or by OFCOM under section 45 of the Communications Act 2003 as are applicable to it or such member of the Joint Venture Group (as the case may be), in each case, where failure to do so would reasonably be
expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	21.33 	US Patriot Act 

  

	 	(a)	It has no reason to believe that it or any of its Affiliates: 

  

	 	(i)	is a Restricted Party or controlled by a Restricted Party or has received funds or property from a Restricted Party; or 

 

	 	(ii)	has violated any Anti-Terrorism Law or is the subject of any action or investigation (including any relating to asset seizure, forfeiture or confiscation) under any
Anti-Terrorism Law. 

  

	 	(b)	It and its Affiliates have taken reasonable measures to ensure compliance with the Anti-Terrorism Laws. 

 

	21.34 	Compliance with ERISA 

  

	 	(a)	Each Plan (and each related trust, insurance contract or fund) is in compliance with its terms and with all applicable laws, including without limitation ERISA and the
Code, save where the failure to be so compliant would not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	 	(b)	Each Plan (and each related trust, if any) which is intended to be qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code has received a determination letter from the Internal
Revenue Service to the effect that it meets the requirements of Sections 401(a) and 501(a) of the Code. 

  

	 	(c)	All contributions required to be made with respect to a Plan have been made within the time limit therefor, save where the failure to do so would not result in a
material liability. 

  

	 	(d)	Neither it nor any other member of the Group nor any ERISA Affiliate has incurred any material liability (including any indirect, contingent or secondary liability) to
or on account of a Plan pursuant to sections 409, 502(i) or 502(l) of ERISA or section 4975 of the Code or expects to incur any such material liability under any of the foregoing sections with respect to any Plan, in each case, that would reasonably
be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	 	(e)	No action, suit, proceeding, hearing, audit or investigation with respect to the administration, operation or the investment of assets of any Plan (other than routine
claims for benefits) that could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, is pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, expected or threatened. 

 

	 	(f)	 Each group health plan (as defined in section 607(1) of ERISA or section 4980B(g)(2) of the Code) which covers or has covered employees or former
employees of any member of the Group or any ERISA Affiliate has at all times been operated in compliance with the provisions of Part 6 of subtitle B of Title I of ERISA and section

  
 112

	 	
4980B of the Code, save where the failure to do so would not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. 

 

	 	(g)	It and each other member of the Group do not maintain or contribute to any employee welfare benefit plan (as defined in Section 3(1) of ERISA) which provides
benefits to retired employees or other former employees (other than as required by Section 601 of ERISA) the obligations with respect to which would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

 

	 	(h)	Each Foreign Pension Plan has been maintained in substantial compliance with its terms and with the requirements of any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules,
regulations and orders and has been maintained, where required, in good standing with applicable regulatory authorities, in the case of each of the foregoing, save where the failure to do so would not reasonably be expected to result in a Material
Adverse Effect. 

  

	 	(i)	All contributions required to be made with respect to a Foreign Pension Plan maintained by it have been made within the time limit therefor, save where the failure to
do so would not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	21.35 	Repetition 

 Each
Repeating Representation is deemed to be made by the party identified as making such Repeating Representation above in relation to itself, or in the case of the Company in relation to itself and each Obligor or the Bank Group as a whole (as
applicable), by reference to the facts and circumstances then existing on each Utilisation Date (save for a Utilisation Date in respect of a Rollover Advance or a Documentary Credit which is being renewed pursuant to Clause 5.2 (Renewal of
Documentary Credits)) and on the first day of each Interest Period. 
  

	22.	FINANCIAL INFORMATION 

  

	22.1	Financial Statements 

  

	 	(a)	Group Financial Information: The Company shall provide to the Facility Agent in sufficient copies for all the Lenders, the following financial information
relating to the Group: 

  

	 	(i)	as soon as the same become available, but in any event within 120 days after the end of each of the Ultimate Parent’s financial years, the consolidated financial
statements for such financial year in respect of the Group, audited by a firm of auditors meeting the requirements of Clause 24.17 (Change in Auditors), and accompanied by the related auditor’s report; and 

 

	 	(ii)	as soon as they become available but in any event within 45 days after the end of each Financial Quarter, the unaudited consolidated quarterly financial statements of
the Group commencing with the first complete Financial Quarter arising after the Original Execution Date (other than, for so long as the Ultimate Parent remains a reporting company under the rules of the SEC, the last Financial Quarter in each of
the Ultimate Parent’s financial years) together with a commentary consistent with disclosure in the nature of a “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations”, in relation to the financial
condition and results of operations of the Group. 

 The requirements in this paragraph (a) may be satisfied
by the provision, within the specified time periods, of copies of the Form 10-K and 10-Qs, in each case, of the 

  
 113

 
Ultimate Parent that are filed with the SEC for the relevant period (it being acknowledged that the SEC does not as at the Original Execution Date require the filing of quarterly financial
statements for the fourth Financial Quarter of any financial year). 
  

	 	(b)	Company and Bank Group Financial Information: Subject to Clause 22.2 (Provisions relating to the Bank Group Financial Information), the
Company shall provide to the Facility Agent in sufficient copies for all the Lenders, the following financial information relating to the Company or the Bank Group, as the case may be: 

 

	 	(i)	as soon as they become available but in any event within 120 days after the end of each of the Company’s financial years, the audited consolidated financial
statements for such financial year for the Company; 

  

	 	(ii)	as soon as they become available but in any event within 120 days after the end of each of the Company’s financial years, the unaudited pro forma balance sheet,
statement of cash flows and statement of operations for such financial year in respect of the Bank Group substantially in the form set out in Schedule 16 (Pro Forma Bank Group Financial Statements) or with such amendments as may be necessary
to reflect changes made to the Group’s public financial information as agreed by the Facility Agent (acting reasonably), together with a commentary from the management in relation to the key drivers for the financial performance of the Bank
Group for such financial year; and 

  

	 	(iii)	as soon as they become available but in any event within 50 days after the end of each of the first three Financial Quarters of each financial year (and within 120 days
after the end of the last Financial Quarter), the unaudited pro forma balance sheet, statement of cash flows and statement of operations for such Financial Quarter in respect of the Bank Group substantially in the form set out in Schedule 16 (Pro
Forma Bank Group Financial Statements) or with such amendments as may be necessary to reflect changes made to the Group’s public financial information as agreed by the Facility Agent (acting reasonably). 

 

	 	(c)	Borrower Financial Information: Each Borrower shall provide, to the extent such information is required by any Lender to enable it to comply with any law,
regulation or other requirement of any central bank or other fiscal, monetary or other authority, promptly following request by such Lender, such Borrower’s most recent annual audited financial statements to the extent the same are in final
form. 

  

	22.2	Provisions relating to Bank Group Financial Information 

  

	 	(a)	The financial information of the Bank Group delivered pursuant to paragraphs (b)(ii) and (b)(iii) of Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements) shall be prepared in
good faith using the same methodologies applied in preparing the audited consolidated financial statements of the Ultimate Parent delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to paragraph (a)(i) of Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements).

  

	 	(b)	To the extent possible, all financial data used in preparing the financial information of the Bank Group will be derived from: 

 

	 	(i)	in the case of financial information in respect of a full financial year of the Bank Group, the balance sheet, statement of cash flows, statement of operations and
notes to the audited consolidated financial statements of the Ultimate Parent in respect of that financial year, including without limitation, revenue (broken down by the operating segments of the Ultimate Parent from time to time); and

  
 114

	 	(ii)	in respect of financial information in respect of any Financial Quarter of any financial year of the Bank Group, from the balance sheet, statement of cash flows,
statement of operations and notes to the unaudited consolidated quarterly financial statements of the Ultimate Parent for the corresponding Financial Quarter, including without limitation, revenue (broken down by the operating segments of the
Ultimate Parent from time to time), 

 provided that in the event that it shall not be possible to apply the
financial data used in the financial statements or management accounts of the Ultimate Parent, as the case may be, such financial information will be determined in good faith based on allocation methodologies approved by the Board of Directors of
the Company. 
  

	22.3	Budget 

 In respect of
each financial year, as soon as the same becomes available and in any event by no later than 45 days after the beginning of each financial year of the Bank Group (other than in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2010), the Company
shall deliver to the Facility Agent, in sufficient copies for the Lenders, the annual operating budget, which as regards paragraphs (a) and (b) below shall be in the format set out in Schedule 17 (Pro Forma Budget Information) or
with such amendments as may be necessary to reflect changes made to the Group’s public financial information and prepared by reference to each Financial Quarter in respect of such financial year of the Bank Group. The annual operating budget
shall be prepared in a form consistent with past practice of the Company and shall include: 
  

	 	(a)	projected annual statements of operations (including projected revenue and operating costs) on a consolidated basis for the Bank Group in the format set out in Schedule
17 (Pro Forma Budget Information) or with such amendments as may be necessary to reflect changes made to the Group’s public financial information; 

 

	 	(b)	projected estimated pro forma balance sheets and estimated pro forma statements of cash flows on a consolidated basis for the Bank Group in the format set out in
Schedule 17 (Pro Forma Budget Information) or with such amendments as may be necessary to reflect changes made to the Group’s public financial information; 

 

	 	(c)	projected capital expenditure to be included for each Financial Quarter of such financial year on a consolidated basis for the Bank Group; and 

 

	 	(d)	projected ratios in respect of each of the financial covenants set out in Clause 23.2 (Ratios) for each Financial Quarter in such financial year.

 At the same time as the Company delivers its annual operating budget, it shall notify the Facility Agent to the
extent any member of the Bank Group has in the preceding financial year of the Company disposed of any material assets with a value in excess of £25 million in exchange for assets of a similar comparable value which are not located in the
United Kingdom, Luxembourg, Isle of Man, Republic of Ireland or the Channel Islands. 
  

	22.4	Other Information 

 The
Company shall and shall procure that each of the Obligors shall from time to time on the request of the Facility Agent: 
  

	 	(a)	 provide the Facility Agent with such information about the business and financial condition of the Bank Group or any member of the Bank Group
(including such member’s business) as the Facility Agent may reasonably require, provided that the Company shall not be under any obligation to provide, or procure the providing of, any

  
 115

	 	
information the supply of which would be contrary to any confidentiality obligation binding on any member of the Bank Group or where the supply of such information could prejudice the retention
of legal privilege in such information and provided further that no Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall) be able to deny the Facility Agent any such information by reason of it having entered into a
confidentiality undertaking which would prevent it from disclosing, or be able to claim any legal privilege in respect of, any financial information relating to itself or the Group; and 

 

	 	(b)	provide all then existing information about the business and financial condition of the Bank Group or any member of the Bank Group (including such member’s
business) as Standard & Poor’s or Moody’s may reasonably require and extend all reasonable co-operation for the purpose of determining or assessing the credit ratings (if any) assigned to the Facilities, any High Yield Notes or
any Senior Secured Notes, and the Company shall use all reasonable efforts to meet with representatives of Standard & Poor’s and Moody’s no less frequently than once in each calendar year. 

 

	22.5	Compliance Certificates 

The Company shall ensure that each set of financial information delivered by it pursuant to paragraphs (a), (b)(ii) and (b)(iii) of
Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements) is accompanied by a Compliance Certificate signed by two of its authorised signatories (at least one of whom shall be a Financial Officer) which: 

 

	 	(a)	where the relevant financial statements being delivered relate to a period ending on a Quarter Date in respect of which the financial covenants are required to be
tested in accordance with paragraph (d) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios) or, prior to commencement of testing of the financial covenants, in respect of which a change to any Applicable Margin is required under Clause 13.3 (Margin
Ratchet for Revolving Facility Advances), Clause 14.6 (Margin Ratchet for A Facility Advances, A1 Facility Advances and A2 Facility Advances) or Clause 14.7 (Margin Ratchet for B Facility Advances and B1 Facility
Advances): 

  

	 	(i)	confirms compliance (or detailing any non-compliance) with the relevant financial covenants set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition) (if applicable) and
showing figures representing the actual financial ratios then in effect; 

  

	 	(ii)	attaches a working paper (the “Attached Working Paper”) setting out the calculations showing compliance with the financial covenants set out in
Clause 23 (Financial Condition) (if applicable) and the information from which such calculations are derived (including the calculations for the components of such covenants defined in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions) on a
line by line basis); 

  

	 	(iii)	confirms that the information contained in the Attached Working Paper has been prepared on the basis of the same information and methodology used to prepare the
appropriate financial information; and 

  

	 	(iv)	confirms the absence of any Default; 

  

	 	(b)	in relation to a Compliance Certificate delivered with the Bank Group’s annual financial information only: 

 

	 	(i)	confirms the Bank Group Consolidated Revenues for the financial year ended on that Quarter Date; 

  
 116

	 	(ii)	confirms compliance (or detailing any non-compliance) with the 80% Security Test ; and 

 

	 	(iii)	confirms the absence of any Default; 

 in each case, as at the end of such financial year or Financial Quarter to which such financial information relates. 
  

	22.6	Access 

 If an Event of
Default under Clause 27.1 (Non-Payment), paragraph (c) of Clause 27.2 (Covenants) relating to a breach of any covenant in Clause 23 (Financial Condition), Clause 27.6 (Insolvency), Clause 27.7
(Winding-up) or Clause 27.9 (Similar Events) has occurred, but only while such Event of Default is continuing (provided that with respect to the Event of Default in paragraph (c) of Clause 27.2 (Covenants) relating to a
breach of any covenant in Clause 23 (Financial Condition), such Event of Default shall be deemed to be continuing until such time that the Company has delivered a Compliance Certificate pursuant to Clause 22.5 (Compliance
Certificates) demonstrating that the Company is in compliance with each of the covenants set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition)), in each such circumstance, at the Obligors’ expense but without causing any undue interruption
to the normal business operations of such Obligor or any member of the Bank Group, the Facility Agent, any Relevant Finance Party, or representative of the Facility Agent or such Relevant Finance Party (an “Inspecting Party”) shall
be entitled to have access, together with its accountants or other professional advisers, during normal business hours, to inspect or observe such part of the Group Business as is owned or operated by any Obligor or any member of the Bank Group, and
to have access to books, records, accounts, documents, computer programmes, data or other information in the possession of or available to such Obligor or member of the Bank Group and to take such copies as may be considered appropriate by such
Inspecting Party (acting reasonably) in order to investigate and plan any action in connection with the Event of Default referred to above, provided that no Obligor shall (and the Company shall not be obliged to procure that any member of the Bank
Group shall) be under any obligation to allow any person to have access to any books, records, accounts, documents, computer programmes, data or other information or to take copies thereof where to do so would breach any confidentiality obligation
binding on any member of the Group or would prejudice the retention of legal privilege to which such Obligor or member of the Group is then entitled in respect of such books, records, accounts, documents, computer programmes, data or other
information and provided further that no Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall) be able to deny the Facility Agent any such information by reason of it having entered into a confidentiality undertaking
which would prevent it from disclosing, or be able to claim any legal privilege in respect of, any financial information relating to itself or the Group. 
  

	22.7	Change in Accounting Practices 

 The Company shall ensure that each set of financial information delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements) is prepared
using accounting policies, practices and procedures consistent with that applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements, unless in relation to any such set of financial information, the Company elects to notify the Facility Agent
that there have been one or more changes in any such accounting policies, practices or procedures (including, without limitation, any change in the basis upon which costs are capitalised or any changes resulting from the Company’s decision to
adopt IFRS) and: 
  

	 	(a)	in respect of any change in the basis upon which the information required to be delivered pursuant to paragraphs (a)(i) or (a)(ii) of Clause 22.1
(Financial Statements) is prepared, the Ultimate Parent provides: 

  
 117

	 	(i)	a description of the changes and the adjustments which would be required to be made to that financial information in order to cause them to reflect the accounting
policies, practices or procedures upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; and 

  

	 	(ii)	sufficient information, in such detail and format as may be reasonably required by the Facility Agent, to enable the Lenders to make an accurate comparison between the
financial positions indicated by that financial information and by the Original Financial Statements, 

 and any
reference in this Agreement to that financial information shall be construed as a reference to that financial information as adjusted to reflect the basis upon which the Original Financial Statements were prepared; 

 

	 	(b)	in the event of any changes to such accounting policies, practices or procedures other than resulting from the Company’s decision to adopt IFRS, if the Company
notifies the Facility Agent that it is not longer practicable to test compliance with the financial covenants set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition) against the financial information required to be delivered pursuant to this
Clause 22 or that it wishes to cease preparing the additional information required by paragraph (a) above, in which case: 

  

	 	(i)	the Facility Agent and the Company shall enter into negotiations with a view to agreeing alternative financial covenants to replace those contained in Clause 23
(Financial Condition) in order to maintain a consistent basis for such financial covenants (and for approval by an Instructing Group); and 

  

	 	(ii)	if the Facility Agent and the Company agree alternative financial covenants to replace those contained in Clause 23 (Financial Condition) which are
acceptable to an Instructing Group, such alternative financial covenants shall be binding on all parties hereto; and 

  

	 	(iii)	if, after three months following the date of the notice given to the Facility Agent pursuant to this paragraph (b), the Facility Agent and the Company cannot agree
alternative financial covenants which are acceptable to an Instructing Group, the Facility Agent shall refer the matter to any of the Permitted Auditors as may be agreed between the Company and the Facility Agent for determination of the adjustments
required to be made to such financial information or the calculation of such ratios to take account of such change, such determination to be binding on the parties hereto, provided that pending such determination (but not thereafter) the Company
shall continue to prepare financial information and calculate such covenants in accordance with paragraph (a) above; or 

  

	 	(c)	in the event of any changes to such accounting policies, practices or procedures resulting from the Company’s decision to adopt IFRS, if the Company notifies the
Facility Agent that it is not longer practicable to test compliance with the financial covenants set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition) against the financial information required to be delivered pursuant to this Clause 22 or
that it wishes to cease preparing the additional information required by paragraph (a) above, in which case: 

  

	 	(i)	 the Company shall provide the Facility Agent with a revised set of (i) financial covenant ratio levels to replace those contained in
Clause 23.2 (Ratios) (the “Revised Ratios”) and (ii) financial covenant definitions to replace those contained in Clause 23.1 (Financial Definitions) (the “Revised Definitions”), in each
case resulting from the adoption of IFRS by the Company and that are substantially equivalent to the financial covenant ratio levels and definitions in 

  
 118

	 	
existence at such time on the basis of GAAP, as confirmed by a report of a reputable accounting firm; and 

 

	 	(ii)	the Revised Ratios and Revised Definitions shall become effective, and this Agreement be amended accordingly to reflect such amendments without any further consents by
any Lender, if the Facility Agent (acting on the instructions of an Instructing Group) has not objected (acting reasonably) to the implementation of the Revised Ratios and Revised Definitions within 60 days after receipt thereof.

  

	22.8	Notifications 

 The
Company shall furnish or procure that there shall be furnished to the Facility Agent in sufficient copies for each of the Lenders: 
  

	 	(a)	as soon as reasonably practicable, documents required to be despatched by the Ultimate Parent to its shareholders generally (or any class of them) in their capacity as
such and all documents relating to the financial obligations of any Obligor despatched by or on behalf of any Obligor to its creditors generally (in their capacity as creditors) it being agreed that to the extent such information is filed with the
SEC, such filing will satisfy the Company’s obligations with regard to the provision of such information; 

  

	 	(b)	as soon as reasonably practicable after the same are instituted or, to its knowledge, threatened, details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings
involving any member of the Bank Group which, is reasonably likely to be adversely determined and if adversely determined, has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and 

 

	 	(c)	written details of any Default promptly upon becoming aware of the same, and of all remedial steps being taken and proposed to be taken in respect of that Default.

  

	23.	FINANCIAL CONDITION 

  

	23.1	Financial Definitions 

 In this
Agreement the following terms have the following meanings: 
 “Bank Group Cash Flow” means, in respect of any
period, Consolidated Operating Cashflow for that period (excluding for this purpose all Permitted Joint Venture Proceeds for such period and/or Permitted Joint Venture Net Operating Cash Flow for such period included in Consolidated Operating
Cashflow pursuant to paragraph (d) of the definition thereof) after: 
  

	 	(a)	adding back: 

  

	 	(i)	any decrease in the amount of Working Capital at the end of such period compared against the Working Capital at the start of such period; 

 

	 	(ii)	all cash extraordinary or non-recurring gains during that period to the extent not included in Consolidated Operating Cashflow; 

 

	 	(iii)	any amount received in cash in that period by members of the Bank Group in respect of income and related taxes; 

 

	 	(iv)	all Permitted Joint Venture Proceeds received for such period; and 

  
 119

	 	(v)	all proceeds from disposals of assets purchased up to 90 days previously pursuant to sale and leaseback transactions otherwise permitted under this Agreement;

  

	 	(b)	deducting: 

  

	 	(i)	the actual capital expenditure of members of the Bank Group during such period; 

 

	 	(ii)	any increase in the amount of Working Capital at the end of such period compared against the Working Capital at the start of that period; 

 

	 	(iii)	any amount paid in cash in that period by any member of the Bank Group in respect of income and related taxes; 

 

	 	(iv)	all cash extraordinary or non-recurring losses during that period to the extent not included in Consolidated Operating Cashflow; 

 

	 	(v)	any amount paid in cash in that period in respect of the items included in the calculation of net income or loss in the definition of Consolidated Operating Cashflow
and any amounts paid in cash in respect of payments made or paid during such period by any member of the Bank Group to any person who is not a member of the Bank Group including without limitation, the payment of all costs and expenses in connection
with transactions contemplated by the Relevant Finance Documents; and 

  

	 	(vi)	any amount paid in cash in that period in respect of dividends, distributions, loans, investments or other similar payments made or paid during such period by any
member of the Bank Group to any person who is not a member of the Bank Group and any cash charges falling under paragraph (a)(ix) of the definition of “Consolidated Operating Cashflow” which have been added back for the purposes of
calculating such definition, 

 provided that in no event shall amounts constituting Consolidated Debt Service be
deducted from Bank Group Cash Flow, and no amount shall be included or excluded more than once. 
 “Cash” means
at any time: 
  

	 	(a)	all Cash Equivalent Investments; and 

  

	 	(b)	cash (in cleared balances) denominated in Sterling (or any other currency freely convertible into Sterling) and credited to an account in the name of a member of the
Bank Group with an Acceptable Bank and to which such a member of the Bank Group is alone beneficially entitled and for so long as: 

  

	 	(i)	such cash is repayable on demand (including any cash held on time deposit which is capable of being broken and the balance received on same day notice provided that any
such cash shall only be taken into account net of any penalties or costs which would be incurred in breaking the relevant time deposit) and repayment of such cash is not contingent on the prior discharge of any other indebtedness of any member of
the Bank Group or of any other person whatsoever or on the satisfaction of any other condition; or 

  

	 	(ii)	 such cash has been deposited with an Acceptable Bank as security for any performance bond, guarantee, standby letter of credit or similar facility the

  
 120

	 	
contingent liabilities relating to such having been included in the calculation of Consolidated Total Debt, 

 and, in any such case, 
  

	 	(A)	repayment of that cash is not contingent on the prior discharge of any other indebtedness of any member of the Bank Group or of any other person whatsoever or on the
satisfaction of any other condition; 

  

	 	(B)	there is no encumbrance over that cash except for the Security or any encumbrance constituted by a netting or set-off arrangement entered into by members of the Bank
Group in the ordinary course of their banking arrangements; and 

  

	 	(C)	the cash is freely and (except as mentioned in paragraph (ii) above) immediately available to be applied in repayment or prepayment of the Facilities.

 “Consolidated Debt Service” means, in respect of any period, the aggregate of: 

 

	 	(a)	the Consolidated Total Net Cash Interest Payable in respect of such period; and 

 

	 	(b)	save to the extent immediately reborrowed, the aggregate of all scheduled payments (excluding any voluntary and mandatory prepayments) made in such period of principal,
capital or nominal amounts in respect of Consolidated Total Debt. 

 “Consolidated Net Debt”
means, at any time, the Consolidated Total Debt at such time less Cash. 
 “Consolidated Net Income” means for
any period, with respect to any person, net income (or loss) after taxes for such period of such person (calculated on a consolidated basis, if it has Subsidiaries) determined in accordance with GAAP. 

“Consolidated Operating Cashflow” means, in respect of any period: 

 

	 	(a)	Consolidated Net Income of the Bank Group for such period, in accordance with GAAP as then in effect adding back (or deducting as the case may be) (only to the extent
used in arriving at net income or loss of the Bank Group): 

  

	 	(i)	non-cash gains or losses, whether extraordinary, recurring or otherwise (excluding however any non-cash charge to the extent that it represents amortisation of a
prepaid expense that was paid in a prior period or an accrual of, or a reserve for, cash charges or expenses in any future period), and including without limitation non-cash expenses for compensation relating to the granting of options and
restricted stock, sale of stock and similar arrangements; 

  

	 	(ii)	income tax expense or benefit; 

  

	 	(iii)	foreign currency transaction gains and losses and foreign currency translation differences; 

 

	 	(iv)	other non-operating gains and losses, including the costs of, and accounting for, financial instruments and gains and losses on disposals of fixed assets;

  

	 	(v)	share of income or losses from equity investments and minority interests; 

  
 121

	 	(vi)	interest expense and interest income, including, without limitation, the amortisation of debt issuance cost, amendment cost, debt discount, repayment premium and
consent payments; 

  

	 	(vii)	depreciation and amortisation; 

  

	 	(viii)	extraordinary items; 

  

	 	(ix)	at the election of the Company, cash charges resulting from any third party professional, advisory, legal and accounting fees and out-of-pocket expenses reasonably
incurred in connection with (i) any acquisition, investment, financing or disposal (in any such case, whether completed or not) provided that the aggregate amount added back in respect of such fees and expenses shall not exceed
£15 million in any financial year of the Company and/or (ii) any Content Transaction (whether completed or not) provided that the aggregate amount added back in respect of such fees and expenses shall not exceed
£10 million in any financial year of the Company; 

  

	 	(x)	cumulative changes in GAAP from and including the accounting principles applied in the preparation of the Original Financial Statements; 

 

	 	(xi)	restructuring charges and related costs during any financial year of an amount up to 5% of the Consolidated Operating Cashflow for the prior financial year; and

  

	 	(xii)	any costs in relation to customer premises equipment resulting from any such equipment being expensed as operating costs in the income statement in connection with a
switch to a customer ownership model, 

 minus 

 

	 	(b)	the Excluded Group Operating Cashflow for that period (to the extent included in the calculation of paragraph (a) above); 

 

	 	(c)	to the extent included in Consolidated Net Income for such period and not otherwise deducted pursuant to paragraph (a) above: 

 

	 	(i)	that portion of the share of profit or loss from Permitted Joint Ventures; and 

 

	 	(ii)	the aggregate amount of all interest income and/or dividends received during such period from one or more of the Permitted Joint Ventures, 

plus 
  

	 	(d)	the lower of (i) the aggregate Permitted Joint Venture Proceeds actually received by the Bank Group during such period and (ii) the aggregate of the
proportionate interests of each member of the Bank Group in any Permitted Joint Venture Net Operating Cash Flow for such period. 

 “Consolidated Total Debt” means, at any time (without double counting and as would be set forth on the balance sheet of the Group in accordance with GAAP) the aggregate principal, capital
or nominal amounts (including any Interest capitalised as principal) of Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Bank Group (including, without limitation, Financial Indebtedness arising under or pursuant to the Relevant Finance Documents) plus
any Parent Debt outstanding from time to time (provided that the principal amount outstanding under the Convertible Senior Notes shall be calculated using a fixed Sterling principal amount of £504.6 million, subject to any pro rata
reduction to reflect any prepayment, repayment, purchase, 

  
 122

 
repurchase, redemption, retirement, defeasance or other acquisition for value of any of the Convertible Senior Notes), excluding any Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Group to
another member of the Group or under any Subordinated Funding, to the extent not prohibited under this Agreement and excluding any Financial Indebtedness arising by reason only of mark to market fluctuations in respect of interest rate hedging
arrangements since the original date on which such interest rate hedging arrangements were consummated. 
 “Consolidated
Total Net Cash Interest Payable” means, in respect of any period, the aggregate amount of the Interest which has accrued on the Consolidated Total Debt during such period (but excluding for the avoidance of doubt any fees and consent
payments payable in or amortised during such period) but deducting any Interest actually received in cash by any member of the Bank Group. 
 “Current Assets” means the aggregate of trade and other receivables (net of allowances for doubtful debts), prepayments and all other current assets of the Bank Group (which until such
time as balance sheets are prepared for the Bank Group shall be allocated from the relevant consolidated financial statements of the Group to the Bank Group by the board of directors of the Company acting in good faith) maturing within twelve months
from the date of computation, as required to be accounted for as current assets under GAAP but excluding cash and Cash Equivalent Investments and excluding the impact of Hedging Agreements. 

“Current Liabilities” means the aggregate of all liabilities (including accounts payable, accruals and provisions) of the
Bank Group (which until such time as balance sheets are prepared for the Bank Group shall be allocated to the Bank Group from the relevant consolidated financial statements of the Group by the board of directors of the Company acting in good faith)
falling due within twelve months from the date of computation and required to be accounted for as current liabilities under GAAP but excluding Financial Indebtedness of the Bank Group falling due within such period and any interest on such Financial
Indebtedness due in such period and excluding the impact of Hedging Agreements. 
 “Excluded Group Operating
Cashflow” means, in respect of any period, that proportion of Consolidated Net Income which is attributable to the Excluded Group for that period adding back (or deducting as the case may be) (to the extent used in arriving at net profit or
loss of the Excluded Group): 
  

	 	(a)	non-cash gains or losses, whether extraordinary, recurring or otherwise (excluding however any non-cash charge to the extent that it represents amortisation of a
prepaid expense that was paid in a prior period or an accrual of, or a reserve for, cash charges or expenses in any future period), and including without limitation non-cash expenses for compensation relating to the granting of options and
restricted stock, sale of stock and similar arrangements; 

  

	 	(b)	income tax expense or benefit; 

  

	 	(c)	foreign currency transaction gains and losses and foreign currency translation differences; 

 

	 	(d)	other non-operating gains and losses, including the costs of, and accounting for, financial instruments and gains and losses on disposals of fixed assets;

  

	 	(e)	share of income or losses from equity investments and minority interests; 

  

	 	(f)	interest expense and interest income, including, without limitation, the amortisation of debt issuance cost, amendment cost, debt discount and consent payments;

  

	 	(g)	depreciation and amortisation; 

  
 123

	 	(h)	extraordinary items; 

  

	 	(i)	restructuring charges determined in accordance with FAS 146; and 

  

	 	(j)	cumulative changes in GAAP from the Original Execution Date. 

 “Financial Quarter” means the period commencing on the day immediately following any Quarter Date in each year, and ending on the next succeeding Quarter Date. 

“Interest” means: 
  

	 	(a)	interest and amounts in the nature of interest accrued in respect of any Financial Indebtedness (including without limitation, in respect of obligations under finance
or capital leases or hire purchase payments); 

  

	 	(b)	discounts suffered and repayment premiums payable in respect of Financial Indebtedness (other than repayment premiums in respect of the High Yield Notes and Senior
Secured Notes), in each case to the extent applicable GAAP requires that such discounts and premiums be treated as or in like manner to interest; 

  

	 	(c)	discount fees and acceptance fees payable or deducted in respect of any Financial Indebtedness (including all fees payable in connection with any Documentary Credit,
any other letters of credit or guarantees and any Ancillary Facility); 

  

	 	(d)	any other costs, expenses and deductions of the like effect and any net payment (or, if appropriate in the context, receipt) under any Hedging Agreement or like
instrument, taking into account any premiums payable for the same, and the interest element of any net payment under any Hedging Agreement; and 

  

	 	(e)	commitment and non-utilisation fees (including, without limitation, those payable under this Agreement) but excluding consent payments, agent’s and advisory fees,
front-end, management, arrangement and participation fees and repayment premiums with respect to any Financial Indebtedness (including, without limitation, all those payable under the Relevant Finance Documents). 

“Permitted Joint Venture Net Operating Cash Flow” means the aggregate of the proportionate interests of each member of
the Group in any Permitted Joint Venture of such Joint Venture’s Consolidated Net Income for such period adding back (or deducting as the case may be) (only to the extent used in arriving at consolidated net income or loss of such Joint
Venture): 
  

	 	(a)	non-cash gains or losses, whether extraordinary, recurring or otherwise (excluding however any non-cash charge to the extent that it represents amortisation of a
prepaid expense that was paid in a prior period or an accrual of, or a reserve for, cash charges or expenses in any future period), and including without limitation non-cash expenses for compensation relating to the granting of options and
restricted stock, sale of stock and similar arrangements; 

  

	 	(b)	income tax expense or benefit; 

  

	 	(c)	foreign currency transaction gains and losses and foreign currency translation differences; 

 

	 	(d)	other non-operating gains and losses, including the costs of, and accounting for, financial instruments and gains and losses on disposals of fixed assets;

  

	 	(e)	share of income or losses from equity investments and minority interests; 

  
 124

	 	(f)	interest expense and interest income including, without limitation, amortisation of debt issuance cost and debt discount; 

 

	 	(g)	depreciation and amortisation; 

  

	 	(h)	extraordinary items; 

  

	 	(i)	restructuring charges determined in accordance with FAS 146; and 

  

	 	(j)	cumulative changes in GAAP from the Original Execution Date. 

 “Permitted Joint Venture Proceeds” means the cash proceeds of all payments of interest and principal received under Financial Indebtedness and of all dividends, distributions or other
payments (including management fees) made by any Permitted Joint Venture to any member of the Bank Group. 
 “Quarter
Date” means each of 31 March, 30 June, 30 September and 31 December in each financial year of the Company. 
 “Working Capital” means on any date Current Assets less Current Liabilities. 
  

	23.2	Ratios 

 With effect from
(and including) the Financial Quarter ending on 30 June 2010, the financial condition of the Group or the Bank Group, as the case may be, as evidenced by the financial information provided pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of
Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements) and the Attached Working Paper referred to in Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) shall be such that: 
  

	 	(a)	Leverage Ratio: Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow 

 Subject to paragraph (d) below, Consolidated Net Debt as at any Quarter Date specified in the table in paragraph (c) below shall not be more than X times Consolidated Operating Cashflow
calculated on a rolling twelve month basis ending on such Quarter Date, where X has the value indicated for such Quarter Date in such table (rounded to the second decimal number). 

 

	 	(b)	Interest Coverage Ratio: Consolidated Operating Cashflow to Consolidated Total Net Cash Interest Payable 

Subject to paragraph (d) below, Consolidated Operating Cashflow calculated on a rolling twelve month basis ending on any Quarter Date
specified in the table in paragraph (c) below shall not be less than Y times Consolidated Total Net Cash Interest Payable calculated on a rolling twelve month basis, where Y has the value indicated for such period in such table (rounded to the
second decimal number). 
  

	 	(c)	Ratio Table 

 This is the
table referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) above. 

  
 125

									
	  	  	Total Net
Leverage Ratio	 	  	Interest
Coverage Ratio	 
	Quarter Date	  	X	 	  	Y	 
	 30 June 2010
	  	 	4.85:1.00	  	  	 	2.50:1.00	  
	 30 September 2010
	  	 	4.80:1.00	  	  	 	2.55:1.00	  
	 31 December 2010
	  	 	4.70:1.00	  	  	 	2.65:1.00	  
	 31 March 2011
	  	 	4.60:1.00	  	  	 	2.75:1.00	  
	 30 June 2011
	  	 	4.40:1.00	  	  	 	2.80:1.00	  
	 30 September 2011
	  	 	4.35:1.00	  	  	 	2.85:1.00	  
	 31 December 2011
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	2.95:1.00	  
	 31 March 2012
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.00:1.00	  
	 30 June 2012
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.05:1.00	  
	 30 September 2012
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.10:1.00	  
	 31 December 2012
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.10:1.00	  
	 31 March 2013
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.15:1.00	  
	 30 June 2013
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.20:1.00	  
	 30 September 2013
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.25:1.00	  
	 31 December 2013
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.35:1.00	  
	 31 March 2014
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.45:1.00	  
	 30 June 2014
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.55:1.00	  
	 30 September 2014
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.70:1.00	  
	 31 December 2014
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.80:1.00	  
	 31 March 2015
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	3.95:1.00	  
	 30 June 2015
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	4.00:1.00	  
	 30 September 2015
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	4.00:1.00	  
	 31 December 2015
	  	 	3.75:1.00	  	  	 	4.00:1.00	  

  

	 	(d)	 If any Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) demonstrates that the ratio of Consolidated Net
Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow in respect of the relevant Quarter Date for which such Compliance Certificate was delivered was 3.50:1.00 or lower (rounded to the second decimal number): (i) the covenants which are required to be tested
pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) above shall thereafter, and for so long as the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow as at each subsequent Quarter Date remains at 3.50:1.00 or lower, be tested on each
alternative Quarter Date shown on the table in paragraph (c) above and (ii) any such Compliance Certificate be delivered thereafter on each alternative Quarter Date shown on the table in paragraph (c) above. In the event that any
Compliance Certificate delivered pursuant to Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) demonstrates that the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow in respect of any Quarter Date for which such Compliance
Certificate was delivered exceeds 3.50:1.00, the 

  
 126

	 	
covenants which are required to be tested pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) above shall thereafter, and for so long as the ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating
Cashflow as at each subsequent Quarter Date exceeds 3.50:1.00 be tested, in accordance with paragraphs (a) and (b) above, on each subsequent Quarter Date. 

 

	23.3	Equity Cure Right 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (b) below, if any Compliance Certificate delivered by the Company demonstrated that the Bank Group is in breach of any of the financial
covenants set out in paragraphs (a) or (b) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios) as at the relevant Quarter Date to which such Compliance Certificate relates, then the Company may, at its option, within 15 Business Days of delivery of such
Compliance Certificate and without prejudice to the rights of the Lenders under Clause 27 (Events of Default) cure such breach (an “Equity Cure Right”) by procuring that the proceeds of any New Equity be contributed into
the Bank Group and either: 

  

	 	(i)	applied towards the prepayment of the Term Facilities; or 

  

	 	(ii)	added back to the calculation of Consolidated Operating Cashflow, 

 and, for the purpose of ascertaining compliance with paragraphs (a) or (b) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios), will be tested or, as applicable, retested giving effect to such application or
add-back. 
  

	 	(b)	If, after giving effect to the adjustment or add-back (as applicable) referred to in paragraph (a) above, the requirements of paragraphs (a) and/or
(b) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios) are met, then the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of Clause 23.2 (Ratios) shall be deemed to have been satisfied as at the relevant original date of determination.

  

	 	(c)	The Equity Cure Right shall be subject to the following conditions: 

  

	 	(i)	such Equity Cure Right may not be used on more than three occasions over the life of the Facilities; 

 

	 	(ii)	in the case of an add-back to the calculation of Consolidated Operating Cashflow, such Equity Cure Right may only be used on one occasion over the life of the
Facilities, and in an amount not exceeding £100 million; 

  

	 	(iii)	in the case of an add-back to the calculation of Consolidated Operating Cashflow, such add-back may not be rolled forward or otherwise taken into account on any
subsequent Quarter Date on which such financial covenants are to be tested; and 

  

	 	(iv)	such Equity Cure Right may not be used for any two consecutive Quarter Dates. 

 

	 	(d)	Any proceeds of New Equity which are contributed into the Bank Group for the purposes specified above, shall thereafter be retained within the Bank Group.

  

	23.4	Currency Calculations 

Where any financial information with reference to which any of the covenants in Clause 23.2 (Ratios) are tested states amounts
in a currency other than Sterling such amounts shall, for the purposes of testing such covenants be converted from such currency into Sterling at the rate used in such financial information for the purpose of converting such amounts from

  
 127

 
Sterling into the currency in which they are stated in such financial information or where no such rate is stated in such financial information at an appropriate rate selected by the Company,
acting reasonably. 
  

	23.5	Pro Forma Calculations 

For the purposes of testing compliance with the financial covenants set out in Clause 23.2 (Ratios), the calculation of such
ratios shall be made on a pro forma basis giving effect to all material acquisitions and disposals made by the Bank Group during the relevant period of calculation based on historical financial results of the items being acquired or disposed of and
including also reasonably identifiable and supportable net cost savings or additional net costs, as the case may be, realisable during such period as a result of such acquisitions and/or disposals, as projected by the Company in good faith and
confirmed in writing by the principal financial officer of the Ultimate Parent (such savings for any such acquisition shall not exceed 5% of Consolidated Operating Cashflow of the relevant target for the 12 month period ending on the Quarter Date
immediately preceding such acquisition or disposal). 
  

	24.	POSITIVE UNDERTAKINGS 

  

	24.1	Application of Advances 

The Parent shall ensure that the proceeds of each Advance made under this Agreement are applied exclusively for the applicable purposes
specified in Clause 2.4 (Purpose). 
  

	24.2	Financial Assistance and Fraudulent Conveyance 

 The Parent and each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall) ensure that its execution of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is a party and the
performance of its obligations thereunder does not contravene any applicable local laws and regulations concerning fraudulent conveyance, financial assistance by a company for the acquisition of or subscription for its own shares or the shares of
its parent or any other company or concerning the protection of shareholders’ capital. 
  

	24.3	Necessary Authorisations 

The Parent and each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall): 

 

	 	(a)	obtain, comply with and do all that is necessary to maintain in full force and effect all Necessary Authorisations, except where a failure to do so does not have or is
reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and 

  

	 	(b)	promptly upon request of the Facility Agent, supply certified copies to the Facility Agent of any such Necessary Authorisations so requested. 

 

	24.4	Compliance with Applicable Laws 

 The Parent and each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall) comply with all applicable laws to which it is subject in respect of the conduct of its business
and the ownership of its assets (including, without limitation, all Statutory Requirements), in each case, where a failure so to comply has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

 

	24.5	Insurance 

  

	 	(a)	 Each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall) effect and maintain insurances on and in relation to its
business and 

  
 128

	 	
assets against such risks and to such extent as is necessary or usual for prudent companies carrying on a business such as that carried on by such Obligor or member of the Bank Group with either
a Captive Insurance Company or a reputable underwriter or insurance company except to the extent disclosed in the Group’s public disclosure documents or to the extent that the failure to so insure has or is reasonably likely to have a Material
Adverse Effect. 

  

	 	(b)	The Company shall (upon the reasonable request of the Facility Agent) supply the Facility Agent with copies of all material insurance policies or certificates of
insurance in respect thereof or (in the absence of the same) such other reasonable evidence of the existence of such policies. 

  

	24.6	Intellectual Property 

Each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall): 

 

	 	(a)	take all necessary action to safeguard and maintain its rights, present and future, in or relating to all Intellectual Property Rights owned, used or exploited by it
and which are material to the Group Business (including, without limitation, paying all applicable renewal fees, licence fees and other outgoings) save where a failure to do so has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect; and

  

	 	(b)	notify the Facility Agent promptly of any infringement or suspected infringement or any challenge to the validity of any of the present or future Intellectual Property
Rights owned, used or exploited by it and which are material to the Group Business which may come to its notice and it will supply the Facility Agent with all information in its possession relating thereto, in each case, only if the same would
reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, and take all necessary steps (including, without limitation, the institution of legal proceedings) to prevent third parties infringing such Intellectual Property Rights to the extent that
failure to do so has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	24.7	Ranking of Claims 

Subject to the Reservations, the Parent and each Obligor shall ensure that at all times the claims of the Relevant Finance Parties against
it under the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is a party rank at least pari passu with the claims of all its unsecured, unsubordinated creditors save those whose claims are preferred by any bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation or similar
laws of general application. 
  

	24.8	Pay Taxes 

 Each Obligor
shall procure and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall ensure that, at all times, there are no material claims or liabilities which are asserted against it in respect of tax, save to the extent the relevant Obligor or
in the case of any other member of the Bank Group, the Company (as the case may be) can demonstrate that the same are being contested in good faith on the basis of appropriate professional advice and that proper reserves have been established
therefor to the extent required by applicable generally accepted accounting principles. 

  
 129

	24.9	Hedging 

 The Company has
provided the Facility Agent with the Hedging Letter, setting out the Group’s policy on hedging. The Company shall (or shall procure that the Parent shall): 
  

	 	(a)	ensure that any Hedging Agreements entered into are Existing Hedging Agreements or are entered into in the form of Acceptable Hedging Agreements; and

  

	 	(b)	as soon as reasonably practicable following request by the Facility Agent provide the Facility Agent with certified true copies of each such Hedging Agreement entered
into. 

  

	24.10 	Pension Plans 

  

	 	(a)	The Company shall use reasonable endeavours to ensure that all pension plans maintained and operated by it or any member of the Bank Group, generally for the benefit of
employees of any member of the Bank Group are maintained and operated and have been valued by an actuary appointed by the Company in accordance with all applicable laws from time to time and that the employer contributions are assessed and paid in
all material respects in accordance with the governing provisions of such schemes and all laws applicable thereto, in each case, save to the extent that any failure to do so does not have or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 Without prejudice to the generality of Clause 24.10(a): 

 

	 	(b)	The Company shall ensure that, except for the NTL Pension Plan and the NTL 1999 Pension Scheme (the “UK DB Schemes”), each UK Pension Scheme is, or has
at any time been, a money purchase scheme as defined in s181 of the Pension Schemes Act 1993) and no member of the Group is, for the purposes of either s38 or s43 of the Pensions Act 2004, connected with or an associate of any employer of an
occupational pension scheme which is not a money purchase scheme. 

  

	 	(c)	Each Participating Employer shall ensure that, in relation to each UK Pension Scheme, no action or omission is taken or omitted to be taken by it and no circumstances
or event within its control is permitted to occur which has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect (including, without limitation, any Participating Employer ceasing to employ any member of such a pension scheme or, in the case of
any UK DB Scheme, the issue of a Financial Support Direction or Contribution Notice to any member of the Group). 

  

	 	(d)	The Company shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of any change in the rate of contributions to any UK DB Schemes, paid or recommended to be paid (whether by the
scheme actuary or otherwise) or required by law or otherwise which would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	 	(e)	Each Obligor shall immediately notify the Facility Agent of any investigation or proposed investigation by the Pensions Regulator which it has been informed may lead to
the issue of a Financial Support Direction or a Contribution Notice to it or any member of the Bank Group. 

  

	 	(f)	Each Obligor shall immediately notify the Facility Agent if it receives a Financial Support Direction or a Contribution Notice from the Pensions Regulator.

  

	 	(g)	 The Ultimate Parent shall procure that each member of the Group shall ensure that all Foreign Pension Plans administered by them or into which they
make payments, obtain or retain (as applicable) registered status under and as required by applicable 

  
 130

	 	
law and are administered in a timely manner in all respects in compliance with all applicable laws, in the case of each of the foregoing, except where the failure to do any of the foregoing will
not have a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	24.11 	Environmental Matters 

  

	 	(a)	Each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall): 

 

	 	(i)	comply with all Environmental Laws to which it is subject; 

  

	 	(ii)	obtain all Environmental Licences required or desirable in connection with the business it carries on; and 

 

	 	(iii)	comply with the terms of all such Environmental Licences, 

 in each case where failure to do so has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	 	(b)	Each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall) promptly notify the Facility Agent of any Environmental Claim (to the best
of such Obligor’s or member of the Bank Group’s knowledge and belief) pending or threatened against it which, if substantiated, has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 

 

	 	(c)	No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall) permit or allow to occur any discharge, release, leak, migration or other escape
of any Hazardous Substance into the Environment on, under or from any property owned, leased, occupied or controlled by it, where such discharge, release, leak, migration or escape has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

  

	24.12	Further Assurance 

  

	 	(a)	The Parent and each Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall) at its own expense, promptly take all such reasonable action
as the Facility Agent or the Security Trustee may require for the purpose of complying with the provisions of paragraph (b) below and for the registration or filing of any Security Documents delivered pursuant thereto with all appropriate
authorities to the extent necessary for the purposes of perfecting the Security created thereunder. 

  

	 	(b)	The Company shall: 

  

	 	(i)	subject to the proviso below and except as otherwise provided in this Clause 24.12, procure that the 80% Security Test is satisfied at the end of each financial
year starting with the financial year ending 31 December 2010 where such test is calculated by reference to the annual financial information relating to the Bank Group most recently delivered pursuant to Clause 22.1 (Financial
Statements) and certified in the relevant Compliance Certificate accompanying the same; 

  

	 	(ii)	procure that in relation to any member of the Bank Group which becomes a Borrower for the purposes of this Agreement, the immediate Holding Company of such Borrower
shall also become a Guarantor hereunder; and 

  

	 	(iii)	 subject to any Encumbrances permitted under Clause 25.2 (Negative Pledge) and Clause 44.5 (Release of Guarantees and Security)
procure that each member of the Bank Group which, after the Original Execution Date, becomes 

  
 131

	 	
a party to this Agreement as an Obligor if required to satisfy the 80% Security Test shall have delivered to the Security Trustee on or prior to the date of its accession to this Agreement as an
Obligor, one or more Security Documents granting security over all or substantially all of its assets such security, for the avoidance of doubt, to be on substantially the same terms and conditions as apply in respect of (and to secure substantially
the same types of assets, and to the same extent, as secured under) the Original Security Documents (with respect to any security in any jurisdiction not included in the Original Security Documents, such security as reasonably required by the
Security Trustee as being mutatis mutandis the same security as under the Original Security Documents under the laws of the applicable jurisdiction subject to any limitations under applicable local law), other than any shares in, receivables
owed by or any other interest in any Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary, Project Company or Joint Venture or any other asset which is of a type excluded from existing corresponding Security Documents, or which the Security Trustee agrees may be excluded
from the Security granted under the Security Documents (provided that the Security Trustee shall not agree to exclude any asset of an Obligor from the Security where the net book value of such asset exceeds £10 million (or its equivalent
in other currencies) without the prior consent of an Instructing Group (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed)). 

  

	 	(c)	A breach of paragraph (b) above shall not constitute a Default if: 

  

	 	(i)	one or more members of the Bank Group become Obligors in accordance with Clause 26.1 (Acceding Borrowers) or Clause 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors),
as applicable, within 10 Business Days of the delivery of a Compliance Certificate by the Borrower demonstrating that the 80% Security Test is not satisfied; and 

 

	 	(ii)	the Facility Agent (acting reasonably) is satisfied that the 80% Security Test would have been satisfied at the end of the relevant financial year if such Compliance
Certificate had been prepared on the basis that such members of the Bank Group had been Obligors as at that date. 

  

	 	(d)	In relation to any provision of this Agreement which requires the Obligors or any member of the Bank Group to deliver a Security Document for the purposes of granting
any guarantee or Security for the benefit of the Relevant Finance Parties, the Security Trustee agrees to execute, as soon as reasonably practicable, any such guarantee or Security Document which is presented to it for execution.

  

	 	(e)	At any time after an Event of Default has occurred and whilst such Event of Default is continuing, each Obligor shall, at its own expense, take any and all action as
the Security Trustee may deem necessary for the purposes of perfecting or otherwise protecting the Lenders’ interests in the Security constituted by the Security Documents. 

 

	 	(f)	Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement: 

  

	 	(i)	All of the Equity Interests issued by the Company and by the Intermediate Holdco shall at all times be subject to the Security of the Security Documents;

  

	 	(ii)	 Without limiting the generality of paragraph (i) above, if any Equity Interests (as defined below) of any member of the Bank Group are at any time
legally or beneficially owned by a member of the Group which is not a member of the Bank Group (the “Non-Bank Group Member”), the Ultimate Parent and the Company shall procure that, to the extent such Equity Interests are not
already subject to the Security of the Security Documents, such Non-Bank Group 

  
 132

	 	
Member must grant Security promptly (and in any event within 20 Business Days) over such Equity Interest in favour of the Security Trustee on terms acceptable to the Security Trustee;

  

	 	(iii)	If any Financial Indebtedness (other than Financial Indebtedness under paragraph (b), (e), (h), (i), (j) or (k) of the definition thereof) of any member of
the Bank Group is owed to any Non-Bank Group Member (other than any Utilisation under this Agreement and for the avoidance of doubt not including any guarantee by a member of the Bank Group permitted by this Agreement), (i) the Ultimate Parent
and the Company shall procure that, to the extent such Financial Indebtedness is not already subject to the Security of the Security Documents, such Non-Bank Group Member must grant Security promptly (and in any event within 20 Business Days) over
such Financial Indebtedness in favour of the Security Trustee on terms acceptable to the Security Trustee; and (ii) the relevant debtor and creditor must be party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement as an Intergroup Debtor or Intergroup
Creditor (as such terms are defined in the Group Intercreditor Agreement), respectively, or the relevant debtor and creditor must be party to such other subordination arrangements as may be satisfactory to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably; and

  

	 	(iv)	For purposes of this Clause 24.12, “Equity Interest” means, with respect to any person, any and all shares, interests, participations, capital
contributions, membership interests (howsoever designated), preferred equity certificates or other equivalents, howsoever designated, of equity shares or other equity participations (whether voting or non-voting), including partnership interests,
whether general or limited, in such person. 

  

	 	(g)	For the purposes of determining whether the 80% Security Test is satisfied at any time under this Agreement other than at the end of a financial year pursuant to
Clause 24.12(b) (Further Assurances) or for purposes of determining whether the 80% Security Test would be satisfied after a disposal or other transaction is consummated or to determine whether assets are required to remain or become
subject to Security in order to comply with the 80% Security Test pursuant to Clause 24.12(b)(i) (Further Assurances) or otherwise (in any such case, the “Testing Time”), 

 

	 	(i)	the 80% Security Test shall be applied using the financial statements in respect of the Financial Quarter immediately preceding the Testing Date, adjusted pro
forma for the transaction for which the 80% Security Test is being tested and any other transactions that took place after the end of such Financial Quarter that also required the satisfaction of the 80% Security Test ; and

  

	 	(ii)	any member of the Bank Group which (A) is not an Obligor or (B) has not granted Security over all or substantially all of its assets, each in favour of the
Security Trustee in accordance with this Clause, shall be excluded from the numerator (but not the denominator) in the determination of whether members of the Bank Group generating not less than 80% of Consolidated Operating Cashflow (excluding for
the purpose of this calculation, any Consolidated Net Income attributable to any Joint Venture) have acceded as Guarantors for purposes of the 80% Security Test (but, for the avoidance of doubt, the operating cashflow of such company shall continue
to be taken into account when calculating Consolidated Operating Cashflow). 

  
 133

	24.13 	Centre of Main Interests 

No Obligor incorporated or otherwise existing under the laws of England and Wales shall (and the Company shall procure that no other
member of the Bank Group incorporated or otherwise existing under the laws of England and Wales shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, cause or allow its Centre of Main Interests to change to a country other than England.

  

	24.14 	Group Structure Chart 

The Company shall, following a written request from the Facility Agent, deliver or procure that there is delivered to the Facility Agent,
as soon as practicable, an updated Group Structure Chart containing information sufficient to evidence the matters set out in paragraphs (a) to (c) of Clause 21.19 (Structure). 

 

	24.15 	Contributions to the Bank Group 

 The Company shall procure that any monies which are at any time contributed by any member of the Group to any member of the Bank Group shall be contributed by way of Subordinated Funding, by way of an
investment through capital contribution or a subscription or issuance of securities or convertible unsecured loan stock in the relevant member of the Bank Group. 
  

	24.16 	“Know your client” checks 

  

	 	(a)	If: 

  

	 	(i)	the introduction of or any change in (or in the interpretation, administration or application of) any law or regulation made after the date of this Agreement;

  

	 	(ii)	any change in the status of an Obligor or the composition of the shareholders of an Obligor after the date of this Agreement; or 

 

	 	(iii)	a proposed assignment or transfer by a Lender of any of its rights and/or obligations under this Agreement to a party that is not a Lender prior to such assignment or
transfer, 

 obliges the Facility Agent or any Lender (or, in the case of paragraph (iii) above, any
prospective New Lender) to comply with “know your client” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, each Obligor shall promptly upon the request of the Facility
Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Facility Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or, in the case of the event described in
paragraph (iii) above, on behalf of any prospective New Lender) in order for the Facility Agent, such Lender or, in the case of the event described in paragraph (iii) above, any prospective New Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has
complied with all necessary “know your client” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Relevant Finance Documents. 

 

	 	(b)	Each Lender shall promptly upon the request of the Facility Agent supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by
the Facility Agent (for itself) in order for the Facility Agent to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your client” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the
transactions contemplated in the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  
 134

	 	(c)	The Company shall, by not less than 3 Business Days prior written notice to the Facility Agent, notify the Facility Agent (which shall promptly notify the Lenders) of
its intention to request that one of its Subsidiaries becomes an Acceding Obligor pursuant to Clause 26 (Acceding Group Companies). 

  

	 	(d)	Following the giving of any notice pursuant to paragraph (c) above, if the accession of such Acceding Obligor obliges the Facility Agent or any Lender to comply
with “know your client” or similar identification procedures in circumstances where the necessary information is not already available to it, the Company shall promptly upon the request of the Facility Agent or any Lender supply, or
procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Facility Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or on behalf of any prospective New Lender) in order for the Facility
Agent or such Lender or any prospective New Lender to carry out and be satisfied it has complied with all necessary “know your client” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations pursuant to the accession of such
Subsidiary to this Agreement as an Acceding Obligor. 

  

	24.17 	Change in Auditors 

 The
Obligors shall ensure that its auditors are (and in the case of the Company, the Bank Group’s auditors are) any one of the Permitted Auditors provided that in the event of any change in such auditors, the relevant Obligor (or the Company, in
the case of any change to the Bank Group’s auditors) shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of such change. 
  

	24.18 	Assets 

 Each Obligor
shall (and the Company shall procure that each member of the Bank Group shall) maintain and preserve all of its assets that are necessary in the conduct of its business as it is conducted from time to time, in good working order and condition
subject to ordinary wear and tear where any failure to do so has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	24.19 	ERISA 

  

	 	(a)	As soon as possible and, in any event, within 20 days after a Borrower or any Obligor knows or has reason to know of the occurrence of any of the events specified in
paragraph (b) below, such Borrower or such Obligor will deliver to the Facility Agent in sufficient copies for each Lender a certificate of the chief financial officer of such Borrower or such Obligor setting out full details as to such
occurrence and the action, if any, that the relevant member of the Group or ERISA Affiliate is required or proposes to take, together with any notices required or proposed to be given or filed by such member of the Group, the Plan administrator or
such ERISA Affiliate to or with any government agency, or a Plan participant and any notices received by such member of the Group or ERISA Affiliate from any government agency, or a Plan participant with respect to it. 

 

	 	(b)	The events referred to in paragraph (a) above are: 

  

	 	(i)	any contribution required to be made with respect to a Plan or Foreign Pension Plan is not made before or within 30 days following the time limit therefor when such
failure is reasonably likely to result in a Material Adverse Effect; 

  

	 	(ii)	any member of the Group or any ERISA Affiliate incurs or is reasonably expected to incur any material liability with respect to a Plan under section 4975 or 4980 of the
Code or section 409, 502(i) or 502(l) of ERISA; 

  
 135

	 	(iii)	any member of the Group incurs or reasonably expects to incur any material liability pursuant to any employee welfare benefit plan (as defined in section 3(1) of ERISA)
that provides benefits to retired employees or other former employees (other than as required by section 601 of ERISA) the obligations with respect to which would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect; and

  

	 	(iv)	any of the events set forth in section 4043(c) of ERISA occurs with respect to a Plan, unless the 30 day notice requirement with respect to such event has been waived
by the PBGC, when such occurrence is reasonably likely to result in a Material Adverse Effect. 

  

	 	(c)	Subject to all applicable data protection laws, the Ultimate Parent shall procure that each member of the Group will deliver to the Facility Agent in sufficient copies
for each of the Lenders upon request a complete copy of the annual report (on Internal Revenue Service Form 5500-series (including, to the extent required, the related financial and actuarial statements and opinions and other supporting statements,
certifications, schedules and information)) of each Plan required to be filed with the Internal Revenue Service and/or the Department of Labor. 

  

	24.20 	Minimum Outstandings and Commitments 

 The Company shall procure that the aggregate amount of all Outstandings and Available Commitments at all times exceeds £1 billion in principal amount. This Clause 24.20 shall not modify any
payment obligations by any Obligor otherwise required, even if such payment results in a breach of the undertaking provided in this Clause 24.20. 
  

	24.21 	Parent Covenant 

 Any
shares held by the Parent in the Company and any intergroup credit balances owed to the Parent by an Obligor shall be: 
  

	 	(a)	subject to Security; and 

  

	 	(b)	subject to the provisions of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement or the Group Intercreditor Agreement. 

 

	25.	NEGATIVE UNDERTAKINGS 

  

	25.1	Content Transaction 

  

	 	(a)	Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Agreement, no Content Transaction shall be restricted by (nor deemed to constitute a utilisation of any of the permitted
exceptions to) any provision of this Agreement, neither shall the implementation of any Content Transaction constitute a breach of any provision of any Relevant Finance Document, provided that: 

 

	 	(i)	the cash proceeds of any Content Transaction are applied in accordance with Clause 12 (Mandatory Prepayment and Cancellation); 

 

	 	(ii)	after giving pro forma effect for such Content Transaction, the Group and the Bank Group continue to be in compliance with Clause 23.2 (Ratios); and

  

	 	(iii)	at the time of completion of such Content Transaction, no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing and no Event of Default would occur as a result of such
Content Transaction. 

  
 136

	 	(b)	Any Joint Venture established pursuant to a Content Transaction shall thereafter not be subject to any restrictions under this Agreement. 

 

	25.2	Negative Pledge 

 No
Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, create or permit to subsist any Encumbrance over all or any of its present or future revenues or assets
other than an Encumbrance: 
  

	 	(a)	which is an Existing Encumbrance set out in: 

  

	 	(i)	Part 1A of Schedule 10 (Existing Encumbrances) provided that such Encumbrance is released within 10 Business Days of the first Utilisation Date; or

  

	 	(ii)	Part 1B of Schedule 10 (Existing Encumbrances) provided that the principal amount secured thereby may not be increased unless any Encumbrance in respect of such
increased amount would be permitted under another paragraph of this Clause 25.2; 

  

	 	(b)	which arises by operation of Law or by a contract having a similar effect or under an escrow arrangement required by a trading counterparty of any member of the Bank
Group and in each case arising or entered into the ordinary course of business of the relevant member of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(c)	which is created pursuant to any of the Relevant Finance Documents (including any Additional Facilities) and any Senior Secured Notes Documents;

  

	 	(d)	arising from any Finance Leases, sale and leaseback arrangements or Vendor Financing Arrangements permitted to be incurred pursuant to Clause 25.4 (Financial
Indebtedness); 

  

	 	(e)	which arises in respect of any right of set-off, netting arrangement, title transfer or title retention arrangements which: 

 

	 	(i)	arises in the ordinary course of trading and/or by operation of Law; 

  

	 	(ii)	is entered into by any member of the Bank Group in the normal course of its banking arrangements for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances on bank accounts
of members of the Bank Group operated on a net balance basis; 

  

	 	(iii)	arises in respect of netting or set off arrangements contained in any Hedging Agreement or other contract permitted under Clause 25.12 (Limitations on
Hedging); 

  

	 	(iv)	is entered into by any member of the Bank Group on terms which are generally no worse than the counterparty’s standard or usual terms and entered into in the
ordinary course of business of the relevant member of the Bank Group; or 

  

	 	(v)	which is a retention of title arrangement with respect to customer premises equipment in favour of a supplier (or its Affiliate); provided that the title is only
retained to individual items of customer premises equipment in respect of which the purchase price has not been paid in full; 

  
 137

	 	(f)	which arises in respect of any judgment, award or order or any tax liability for which an appeal or proceedings for review are being diligently pursued in good faith,
provided that the affected member of the Bank Group shall have or will establish such reserves as may be required under applicable generally accepted accounting principles in respect of such judgment, award, order or tax liability;

  

	 	(g)	over or affecting any asset acquired by a member of the Bank Group after the Original Execution Date and subject to which such asset is acquired, if:

  

	 	(i)	such Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of such asset by a member of the Bank Group; and 

 

	 	(ii)	the Financial Indebtedness secured thereby is Financial Indebtedness of, or is assumed by, the relevant acquiring member of the Bank Group, is Financial Indebtedness
which at all times falls within paragraph (g) or (j) of Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness) and the amount of Financial Indebtedness so secured is not increased at any time; 

 

	 	(h)	over any property or other assets to satisfy any pension plan contribution liabilities provided that the aggregate value of any such property or other assets, when
taken together with the aggregate amount utilised under the basket in paragraph (e) of Clause 25.6 (Disposals), shall not exceed £100 million at any time; 

 

	 	(i)	over or affecting any asset of any company which becomes a member of the Bank Group after the Original Execution Date, where such Encumbrance is created prior to the
date on which such company becomes a member of the Bank Group, if: 

  

	 	(i)	such Encumbrance was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of such company; and 

 

	 	(ii)	to the extent not repaid by close of business on the date upon which such company became a member of the Bank Group, the Financial Indebtedness secured by such
Encumbrance at all times falls within paragraph (g) or (j) of Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness); 

  

	 	(j)	constituted by a rent deposit deed entered into on arm’s length commercial terms and in the ordinary course of business securing the obligations of a member of the
Bank Group in relation to property leased to a member of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(k)	constituted by an arrangement referred to in paragraph (d) of the definition of Financial Indebtedness; 

 

	 	(l)	which is granted over the shares of, Indebtedness owed by or other interests held in, or over the assets (including, without limitation, present or future revenues),
attributable to a Project Company, a Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary or a Permitted Joint Venture; 

  

	 	(m)	over cash deposited as security for the obligations of a member of the Bank Group in respect of a performance bond, guarantee, standby letter of credit or similar
facility entered into in the ordinary course of business of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(n)	which is created by any member of the Bank Group in substitution for any Existing Encumbrance referred to in paragraph (a)(ii) above, provided that the principal
amount secured thereby may not be increased unless any Encumbrance in respect of such increased amount would be permitted under another paragraph of this Clause 25.2; 

  
 138

	 	(o)	securing any Financial Indebtedness on a pari passu or junior ranking basis with respect to any part of the Facilities, provided that: 

 

	 	(i)	the ratio of Consolidated Senior Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow (giving pro forma effect to any such Financial Indebtedness and the use of proceeds
thereof) would be equal to, or less than, 3.00:1.00 (rounded to the second decimal number), provided that this limitation shall not apply to any Financial Indebtedness the proceeds of which are used to refinance (A) the Facilities (including
any Additional Facility), (B) any Senior Secured Notes or (C) any other Financial Indebtedness which is secured by assets that are subject to the Security; 

 

	 	(ii)	the proceeds of any such Financial Indebtedness shall not be used in payment of any dividends or distributions to the Ultimate Parent’s shareholders or any
repurchase of capital stock of the Ultimate Parent; and 

  

	 	(iii)	(A) any such Financial Indebtedness ranking pari passu with the Facilities outstanding on the Original Execution Date or any Financial Indebtedness that would
have ranked pari passu with the Facilities outstanding on the Original Execution Date is subject to the Group Intercreditor Agreement and the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and (B) any such Financial Indebtedness which is secured on a
junior ranking basis over assets subject to the Security, such junior ranking security shall be granted on terms where the rights of the relevant mortgagee, chargee or other beneficiary of such security in respect of any payment will be subordinated
to the rights of the Relevant Finance Parties under an intercreditor agreement (providing for contractual subordination on terms comparable to the Loan Market Association’s form of intercreditor agreement at such time for mezzanine debt) and,
in each case, the Relevant Finance Parties agree to execute such intercreditor agreement as soon as practicable following request from the Company; or 

  

	 	(p)	securing Financial Indebtedness the principal amount of which (when aggregated with the principal amount of any other Financial Indebtedness which has the benefit of an
Encumbrance other than as permitted pursuant to paragraphs (a) to (o) above) does not exceed £330 million (or its equivalent in other currencies), including Financial Indebtedness: 

 

	 	(i)	which may be secured on assets not subject to the Security; or 

  

	 	(ii)	which may be secured on a junior ranking basis over assets subject to the Security provided that such junior ranking security shall be granted on terms where the rights
of the relevant mortgagee, chargee or other beneficiary of such security in respect of any payment will be subordinated to the rights of the Relevant Finance Parties under an intercreditor arrangement (providing for contractual subordination on
terms comparable to the Loan Market Association’s form of intercreditor agreement at such time for mezzanine debt) and provided further that each of the Relevant Finance Parties agrees to execute such intercreditor agreement as soon as
practicable following request from the Company. 

  

	25.3	Loans and Guarantees 

 No
Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, grant any loan or credit or give any guarantee in any such case in respect of Financial Indebtedness,
other than: 

  
 139

	 	(a)	any extension of trade credit or guarantees, bonds or indemnities granted in the ordinary course of business on usual and customary terms; 

 

	 	(b)	any credit given by a member of the Bank Group to another member of the Bank Group which arises by reason of cash-pooling, set-off or other cash management arrangement
of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(c)	the Existing Loans provided that the aggregate principal amount outstanding thereunder may not be increased from that existing at the Original Execution Date in
reliance on this paragraph (c) (except with respect to accrual or capitalisation of interest); 

  

	 	(d)	any loans or credit granted: 

  

	 	(i)	by a member of the Bank Group to another member of the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(ii)	by a member of the Bank Group to the relevant member of the Group for the purposes of funding drawings available under the undrawn portion of any Existing UKTV Group
Loan Stock of up to £50 million in aggregate; 

  

	 	(iii)	in accordance with Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures); or 

  

	 	(iv)	by a SSN Finance Subsidiary as contemplated in the definition of “SSN Finance Subsidiary” or the on-lending by the Parent to VMIH of the proceeds of an
issuance of Senior Secured Notes; 

  

	 	(e)	any loans made by any member of the Bank Group to its employees either: 

  

	 	(i)	in the ordinary course of its employees’ employment; or 

  

	 	(ii)	to fund the exercise of share options or the purchase of capital stock by its employees, directors, officers or consultants of the Group, 

provided that the aggregate principal amount of all such loans shall not at any time exceed £10 million (or its equivalent in
other currencies); 
  

	 	(f)	any loan made by a member of the Bank Group pursuant to either an Asset Passthrough or a Funding Passthrough; 

 

	 	(g)	any loan made by a member of the Bank Group to a member of the Group, where the proceeds of such loan are, or are to be (whether directly or indirectly) used:

  

	 	(i)	to make payments to the High Yield Trustee in respect of High Yield Trustee Amounts (as such terms are defined in the HYD Intercreditor Agreement) in respect of the
Existing High Yield Notes; 

  

	 	(ii)	to make equivalent payments to those specified in paragraph (i) above in respect of any High Yield Refinancings or in respect of any Additional High Yield Notes;

  

	 	(iii)	to make payments under the Senior Secured Notes Documents; 

  

	 	(iv)	provided that no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing or is likely to occur as a result thereof, to fund Permitted Payments; or 

 

	 	(v)	 at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default, to fund Permitted Payments to the extent not prohibited by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement,
the 

  
 140

	 	
Group Intercreditor Agreement or a Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(h)	credit granted by any member of the Bank Group to a member of the Group, where the Indebtedness outstanding thereunder relates to Intra-Group Services in the ordinary
course of business; 

  

	 	(i)	any guarantee given in respect of membership interests in any company limited by guarantee where the acquisition of such membership interest is permitted under
Clause 25.13 (Acquisitions and Investments); 

  

	 	(j)	any guarantee given by a member of the Bank Group in respect of or constituted by any Financial Indebtedness permitted under Clause 25.4 (Financial
Indebtedness) or Clause 25.10 (Transactions with Affiliates) or other obligation not restricted by the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents, of another member of the Bank Group; 

 

	 	(k)	any guarantees arising under the Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(l)	any customary title guarantee given in connection with the assignment of leases where such assignment is permitted under Clause 25.6 (Disposals);

  

	 	(m)	any guarantees or similar undertakings granted by any member of the Bank Group in favour of H.M. Revenue & Customs in respect of any obligations of Virgin
Media (UK) Group, Inc. in respect of UK tax in order to facilitate the winding up of Virgin Media (UK) Group, Inc. provided that the Facility Agent shall have first received confirmation from the Company that based on discussions with H.M.
Revenue & Customs and the Company’s reasonable assumptions, the Company does not believe that the liability under such guarantee will exceed £15 million (such confirmation to be supported by a letter from the Company’s
auditors for the time being, confirming that based on the Company’s calculations of such tax liability the Company’s confirmation is a reasonable assessment of such tax liability); 

 

	 	(n)	any loan granted as a result of a Subscriber being allowed terms, in the ordinary course of trade, whereby it does not have to pay for the services provided to it for a
period after the provision of such services; 

  

	 	(o)	a loan made or a credit granted to a Joint Venture to the extent permitted under paragraph (d) of Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures);

  

	 	(p)	any loans made under the terms of the Screenshop Intra-Group Loan Agreement; 

 

	 	(q)	the BBC Guarantees; 

  

	 	(r)	liquidity loans of a type which is customary for asset securitisation programmes or other receivables factoring transactions, provided in connection with any asset
securitisation programme or receivables factoring transaction otherwise permitted by Clause 25.6(j) (Disposals); and 

  

	 	(s)	loans made, credit granted or guarantees given by any member of the Bank Group not falling within paragraphs (a) to (r) above, in an aggregate amount not
exceeding £100 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) outstanding at any time. 

  

	25.4 	Financial Indebtedness 

No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an
Instructing Group, incur, create or permit to subsist or have outstanding any Financial Indebtedness other than: 

  
 141

	 	(a)	Financial Indebtedness arising under or pursuant to the Relevant Finance Documents including under any Additional Facility (provided that the incurrence of any
Financial Indebtedness under any such Additional Facility is not prohibited by this Agreement at the time of such incurrence and complies with the requirements of Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility)); 

 

	 	(b)	Existing Financial Indebtedness provided that the Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement shall be repaid in full immediately upon the making of the first Advance
under this Agreement; 

  

	 	(c)	Financial Indebtedness arising in respect of: 

  

	 	(i)	the Existing High Yield Notes, including the existing subordinated unsecured guarantees given by the Company and Intermediate Holdco in respect thereof;

  

	 	(ii)	any Additional High Yield Notes, including any subordinated unsecured guarantee granted by the Company and/or Intermediate Holdco in respect thereof in accordance with
paragraph (e) of the definition of Additional High Yield Notes, provided that no Default or Event of Default is outstanding or occurs as a result of the issuance of such Additional High Yield Notes; 

 

	 	(iii)	any High Yield Refinancing, including any subordinated unsecured guarantee granted by the Company and/or Intermediate Holdco in respect thereof in accordance with
paragraph (e) of the definition of High Yield Refinancing, provided that no Default or Event of Default is outstanding or occurs as a result of such High Yield Refinancing; and 

 

	 	(iv)	any Senior Secured Notes and any guarantee in respect thereof given by any member of the Bank Group that is an Obligor; 

 

	 	(d)	Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Bank Group falling within, and permitted by Clause 25.3 (Loans and Guarantees); 

 

	 	(e)	Financial Indebtedness arising under any Hedging Agreements permitted under Clause 25.12 (Limitations on Hedging); 

 

	 	(f)	Financial Indebtedness arising in relation to either an Asset Passthrough or a Funding Passthrough; 

 

	 	(g)	Financial Indebtedness of any company which became or becomes a member of the Bank Group after the Original Execution Date, where such Financial Indebtedness arose
prior to the date on which such company became or becomes a member of the Bank Group; if: 

  

	 	(i)	such Financial Indebtedness was not created in contemplation of the acquisition of such company; 

 

	 	(ii)	the aggregate principal amount of all of the Financial Indebtedness assumed in reliance on this paragraph (g) either (A) does not exceed
£85 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) outstanding at any time or (B) to the extent such Financial Indebtedness does exceed £85 million, an amount equal to such excess is repaid promptly thereafter;

  

	 	(h)	 Financial Indebtedness arising in respect of any guarantee given by the Company or Intermediate Holdco in respect of the relevant borrower’s
obligations under any Parent Debt, provided that any such guarantee is given on a subordinated unsecured basis and is subject to the terms of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, the Group

  
 142

	 	
Intercreditor Agreement or any other applicable intercreditor agreement in form satisfactory to the Facility Agent; 

 

	 	(i)	Financial Indebtedness which constitutes Subordinated Funding provided that each Obligor that is a debtor in respect of Subordinated Funding shall (and the Company
shall procure that each member of the Bank Group that is a debtor in respect of Subordinated Funding shall) procure that the relevant creditor of such Subordinated Funding, to the extent not already a party at the relevant time, accedes to the Group
Intercreditor Agreement and the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, as appropriate, in such capacity, upon the granting of such Subordinated Funding; 

  

	 	(j)	Financial Indebtedness arising under (i) Finance Leases (ii) sale and leaseback arrangements or (iii) Vendor Financing Arrangements, to the extent that
such Finance Leases, arrangements and/or Vendor Financing Arrangements (x) comprise Existing Vendor Financing Arrangements or any refinancing or rollover thereof, or (y) comprise Finance Leases, arrangements and/or Vendor Financing
Arrangements entered into after the Original Execution Date, provided that in the case of clauses (x) and (y) the aggregate principal amount thereof does not at any time exceed the greater of (I) £250 million plus the
principal amount of such Finance Leases, sale and leaseback arrangements and Vendor Financing Arrangements outstanding on the Original Execution Date and (II) the amount that could be incurred so that the ratio of Consolidated Senior Net Debt to
Consolidated Operating Cashflow (giving pro forma effect to any such Financial Indebtedness and the use of proceeds thereof) is equal to, or less than, 3.00:1.00 (rounded to the second decimal number); and provided further that, in each case, the
relevant lessor or provider of Vendor Financing Arrangements does not have the benefit of any Encumbrance other than over the assets the subject of such Vendor Financing Arrangements and/or Finance Leases; 

 

	 	(k)	Financial Indebtedness relating to deferral of PAYE taxes with the agreement of H.M. Revenue & Customs by any member of the Bank Group;

  

	 	(l)	Financial Indebtedness arising in respect of Existing Performance Bonds or any performance bond, guarantee, standby letter of credit or similar facility entered into by
any member of the Bank Group to the extent that cash is deposited as security for the obligations of such member of the Bank Group thereunder; 

  

	 	(m)	Financial Indebtedness not falling within paragraphs (a) to (l) above of any members of the Bank Group provided that the aggregate amount of such Financial
Indebtedness outstanding at any time, does not exceed £330 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) and further provided that in the case of any Financial Indebtedness constituted by an overdraft facility which operates on a
gross/net basis, only the net amount of such facility shall count towards such aggregate amount; 

  

	 	(n)	Financial Indebtedness of any Asset Securitisation Subsidiary incurred solely to finance any asset securitisation programme or programmes or one or more receivables
factoring transactions otherwise permitted by Clause 25.6(j) (Disposals); 

  

	 	(o)	Financial Indebtedness arising under tax-related financings designated in good faith as such by prior written notice from the Company to the Facility Agent, provided
that the aggregate principal amount of such Financial Indebtedness outstanding at any time does not exceed £500 million; and 

  

	 	(p)	 Financial Indebtedness of any Obligor, provided that the pro forma Leverage Ratio (after giving effect to the incurrence of any such Financial
Indebtedness pursuant to this paragraph (p) and the use of proceeds thereof and giving pro forma effect to any movement of cash out of the Bank Group since such date pursuant to Clause 25.5

  
 143

	 	
(Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital) and any Permitted Payments) on the Quarter Date prior to any such incurrence would not exceed a ratio equal to the Leverage Ratio set out in
column X of the Ratio Table in Clause 23.2(c) (Ratios) for the Quarter Date following the date of any such incurrence and, provided further that such Financial Indebtedness is subject to the terms of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and
the Group Intercreditor Agreement, or a Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement as applicable. 

  

	25.5	Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital 

 No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group: 

 

	 	(a)	declare, make or pay any dividend (or interest on any unpaid dividend), charge, fee or other distribution (whether in cash or in kind) on or in respect of any of its
shares; 

  

	 	(b)	redeem, repurchase, defease, retire or repay any of its share capital, or resolve to do so; 

 

	 	(c)	repay or distribute any share premium account; or 

  

	 	(d)	repay or otherwise discharge or purchase any amount of principal of (or capitalised interest on) or pay any amount of interest in respect of Subordinated Funding,

 other than: 
  

	 	(i)	where the share capital of such member of the Bank Group is held by one or more other members of the Bank Group; 

 

	 	(ii)	to the extent discharged in consideration of a transfer of any non-cash asset the disposal of which is not otherwise prohibited by this Agreement, by the waiver of any
payment where no cash consideration is given in respect of such waiver or by way of conversion into any securities (including convertible unsecured loan stock), (or vice versa), which do not involve any cash payments or by way of capital
contribution to the debtor in respect of such Subordinated Funding; 

  

	 	(iii)	to the extent required for the purpose of making payments to: 

  

	 	(A)	the indenture trustee for the Existing High Yield Notes in respect of High Yield Trustee Amounts (as such term is defined in the HYD Intercreditor Agreement);

  

	 	(B)	for the purpose of making payments in respect of any similar amounts to the indenture trustee in respect of any High Yield Refinancing or any Additional High Yield
Notes; or 

  

	 	(C)	for the purpose of making payments in respect of any similar amounts to the indenture trustee in respect of any Senior Secured Notes issued by the Parent or a SSN
Finance Subsidiary of the Parent; 

  

	 	(iv)	provided that no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing or is likely to occur as a result thereof, to the extent required to fund Permitted Payments;

  

	 	(v)	 at any time after the occurrence of an Event of Default, to the extent required to fund Permitted Payments not otherwise prohibited by the HYD
Intercreditor Agreement (including clause 4.2 (Suspension of Permitted Payments prior to 

  
 144

	 	
the Senior Discharge Date) thereof), the Group Intercreditor Agreement or a Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

 

	 	(vi)	to the extent such redemption, repurchase, defeasance, retirement or repayment is in respect of a nominal amount; or 

 

	 	(vii)	payments or distributions made directly or by means of discounts with respect to any participation interest issued or sold in connection with, and other fees paid to a
person or entity that is not a member of the Bank Group in connection with, an asset securitisation programme or receivables factoring transaction otherwise permitted by Clause 25.6(j) (Disposals). 

The Lenders hereby consent to any transaction or matter to the extent expressly permitted under paragraphs (i) to
(vii) above (including, without limitation, for purposes of clauses 3.1 (Subordinated Liabilities) and 3.2 (Obligations of the Subordinated Creditors) of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement) except that no consent is provided
hereunder for purpose of clause 4.2 (Suspension of Permitted Payments prior to the Senior Discharge Date) of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement. 
  

	25.6	Disposals 

 No Obligor
shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, either in a single transaction or in a series of related transactions, sell, transfer, lease or otherwise
dispose of any shares in any of its Subsidiaries or all or any part of its revenues, assets, other shares, business or undertakings other than in the ordinary course of business or trading (which, for the avoidance of doubt, includes mast sharing
arrangements) and other than: 
  

	 	(a)	any payment required to be made under the Relevant Finance Documents or the Senior Secured Notes Documents; 

 

	 	(b)	the disposal of obsolete or surplus assets no longer required for the efficient operation of the Group Business, on arms’ length commercial terms;

  

	 	(c)	disposals of cash, the lending or repayment of cash or the disposal of Cash Equivalent Investments or Marketable Securities, on arms’ length commercial terms where
the same is not otherwise restricted by the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(d)	by one member of the Bank Group to another member of the Bank Group provided that, if such assets subject to the disposal are subject to existing Security, the Company
within 15 Business Days of such disposal is in compliance with the 80% Security Test as of the most recent prior Quarter Date after giving effect to the disposal; 

 

	 	(e)	disposals of any property or other assets to satisfy any pension plan contribution liabilities provided that the aggregate value of any such property or other assets,
when taken together with the aggregate amount utilised under the basket in paragraph (h) of Clause 25.2 (Negative Pledge), shall not exceed £100 million at any time; 

 

	 	(f)	disposals by a member of the Bank Group which is not an Obligor to another member of the Group; 

 

	 	(g)	 disposals of assets on arms’ length commercial terms where the cash proceeds of such disposal are reinvested within 12 months of the date of the
relevant disposal in the purchase of replacement assets by a member of the Bank Group (or within 

  
 145

	 	
18 months of the date of the relevant disposal if the proceeds are, within 12 months of the date of the relevant disposal, contractually committed to be so applied) provided that where
the relevant member of the Bank Group that has made the disposal is an Obligor, such replacement assets are either subject to existing Security Documents granted by the relevant member of the Bank Group that has acquired the replacement assets, or
will be made subject to Security by such member of the Bank Group (in form and substance substantially similar to the existing Security or otherwise in such form and substance as may reasonably be required by the Facility Agent) within
10 Business Days of the acquisition of such replacement assets; 

  

	 	(h)	disposals of any interest in real or heritable property by way of a lease or licence granted by a member of the Bank Group to another member of the Bank Group;

  

	 	(i)	disposals of any assets pursuant to the implementation of an Asset Passthrough or of any funds received pursuant to the implementation of a Funding Passthrough;

  

	 	(j)	disposals of any accounts receivable on arms’ length commercial terms pursuant to an asset securitisation programme or one or more receivables factoring
transactions provided that: 

  

	 	(i)	such disposal is conducted on a non-recourse basis, except for recourse to: 

 

	 	(A)	the receivables which are the subject of such asset securitisation programme or receivables factoring transaction; 

 

	 	(B)	the debtor in respect of the Financial Indebtedness for the purpose of enforcing a security interest against it, so long as: 

 

	 	(1)	the recourse is limited to recoveries in respect of the receivables; and 

  

	 	(2)	the providers of the Financial Indebtedness do not have the right to take any steps towards its winding up or dissolution or the appointment of a liquidator,
administrator, administrative receiver or similar officer (other than in respect of the receivables); 

  

	 	(C)	a member of the Group to the extent of its shareholding or other interest in any Asset Securitisation Subsidiary; or 

 

	 	(D)	a member of the Group under any form of assurance, undertaking or support, where recourse is limited to: 

 

	 	(1)	a claim for damages (not being liquidated damages or damages required to be calculated in a specified way) for breach of a warranty or undertaking;

  

	 	(2)	a claim for breach of warranty relating to the receivables; 

  

	 	(3)	a claim for breach of undertaking relating to the management and/or collection of the receivables; or 

 

	 	(4)	 a claim for breach of representations, warranties, undertakings, guarantees of performance (excluding any recourse with respect to the collectability
of any receivables or assets related to such receivables) and indemnities entered into by such member of 

  
 146

	 	
the Group or any seller which are reasonably customary in an accounts receivable transaction, 

 and, in each case, the obligation is not in any way a guarantee, indemnity or other assurance against financial loss or an obligation to ensure compliance by another with a financial ratio or other test
of financial condition; and 
  

	 	(ii)	the aggregate principal amount of all such securitisations or factoring transactions conducted in reliance on this paragraph (j) does not exceed
£330 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) at any time; 

  

	 	(k)	disposals of any shares or other interests in any Project Company, Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary or Joint Venture or the assignment of any Financial Indebtedness owed
to a member of the Bank Group by a Project Company, Bank Group Excluded Subsidiary or Joint Venture; 

  

	 	(l)	disposals of assets, revenues or rights of any member of the Bank Group arising from an amalgamation, consolidation or merger of a member of the Bank Group with any
other person which is permitted by Clause 25.8 (Mergers); 

  

	 	(m)	disposals of accounts receivable which have remained due and owing from a third party for a period of more than 90 days and in respect of which the relevant member of
the Bank Group has diligently pursued payment in the normal course of its business and where such disposal is on non-recourse terms to such member of the Bank Group; 

 

	 	(n)	disposals of assets subject to finance or capital leases pursuant to the exercise of an option by the lessee under such finance or capital leases;

  

	 	(o)	disposals of assets in exchange for the receipt of assets of a similar or comparable value provided that: 

 

	 	(i)	to the extent that the assets being disposed of are subject to existing Security, the assets received following such exchange will be subject to the existing Security
Documents, or will be made subject to Security (in form and substance substantially similar to the existing Security or otherwise in such form and substance as may reasonably be required by the Facility Agent) within 10 Business Days of such
disposal; and 

  

	 	(ii)	where the aggregate net book value of all assets being exchanged in reliance on this paragraph (o) exceeds £10 million (or its equivalent in other
currencies) in any Financial Quarter, there is delivered to the Facility Agent, within 30 days from the end of such Financial Quarter of the Bank Group, a certificate signed by two authorised officers of the Company (given without personal
liability) certifying that the assets received by such member of the Bank Group in reliance on this paragraph (o) during such Financial Quarter are of a similar or comparable value to the assets disposed of by such member of the Bank Group;

  

	 	(p)	disposals constituting the surrender of tax losses by any member of the Bank Group: 

 

	 	(i)	to any other member of the Group, where the surrendering company receives fair market value for such tax losses from the relevant recipient; and

  
 147

	 	(ii)	in order to eliminate, satisfy or discharge any tax liability of a former member of the Group which has been disposed of pursuant to a disposal permitted by the terms
of this Agreement, to the extent that a member of the Bank Group would have a liability (in the form of an indemnification obligation or otherwise) to one or more persons in relation to such tax liability if not so eliminated, satisfied or
discharged; 

  

	 	(q)	disposals of assets to and sharing assets with any person who is providing services the provision of which have been or are to be outsourced to that person by any
member of the Bank Group provided that: 

  

	 	(i)	the assets being disposed of in reliance on this paragraph (q) shall be assets which relate to the services which are the subject of such outsourcing;

  

	 	(ii)	the projected cash cost to the Bank Group of such outsourcing shall be less than the projected cash cost to the Bank Group of carrying out such outsourced activities at
the levels of service to be provided by the service provider within the Bank Group; 

  

	 	(iii)	the economic benefits derived from any such outsourcing contract shall be received by the Bank Group during the term of such contract; 

 

	 	(iv)	the aggregate fair market value of the assets disposed of shall not exceed 3.75% of Bank Group Consolidated Revenues in any financial year; provided that any unused
portion of such basket amount may be carried forward and used by any member of the Bank Group in the following financial year (and any such amount carried forward will be treated as having been utilised before the original basket amount available in
such following financial year); and 

  

	 	(v)	no later than 30 days after the date of such outsourcing where the consideration payable in respect of the assets subject to such disposal exceeds
£10 million (or its equivalent in other currencies), a duly authorised officer of the Company shall have provided to the Facility Agent, a certificate (without personal liability) verifying each of the matters set out in
sub-paragraphs (i) to (iii) above and certifying that as at the date of such certificate, the aggregate fair market value of all assets disposed in reliance on this paragraph (q) during such financial year, does not exceed the
threshold specified in sub-paragraph (iv) above; 

  

	 	(r)	disposals of assets pursuant to sale and leaseback transactions (regardless of whether any such lease resulting from such a transaction constitutes an operating or a
finance lease) where the aggregate fair market value of any assets disposed of in reliance on this paragraph (r) does not exceed £150 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) in any financial year of the Company and any
disposals of assets pursuant to sale and leaseback transactions constituting Financial Indebtedness to the extent such Financial Indebtedness is permitted under this Agreement; 

 

	 	(s)	subject to the requirements of Clause 24.9 (Hedging), disposals of any Hedging Agreements; 

 

	 	(t)	disposals of non-core assets acquired in connection with a transaction permitted under Clause 25.13 (Acquisitions and Investments);

  

	 	(u)	any disposal of all or part of the Virgin Media business division pursuant to a Business Division Transaction; 

  
 148

	 	(v)	any disposals constituted by licences of intellectual property rights permitted by Clause 24.6 (Intellectual Property); 

 

	 	(w)	any disposal of assets made pursuant to the establishment of a Permitted Joint Venture or any disposal of assets to a Permitted Joint Venture which is permitted within
the scope of the provisions contained in Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures); 

  

	 	(x)	any disposal made in relation to a compulsory purchase order or any other order of any agency of state, authority or other regulatory body or any applicable law or
regulation not exceeding £25 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) in any financial year; 

  

	 	(y)	any disposal by any member of the Bank Group of customer premises equipment to a customer; and 

 

	 	(z)	disposals of assets not otherwise permitted under this Clause 25.6 provided that the aggregate fair market value of the assets disposed of during any given
financial year in reliance on paragraphs (q) and (r) above and on this paragraph (z) does not exceed in respect of any financial year of the Bank Group, 12.5% of Bank Group Consolidated Revenues for the preceding financial year of the
Bank Group, calculated by reference to the annual financial information for the Bank Group delivered in respect of the preceding financial year of the Bank Group pursuant to paragraph (b)(ii) of Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements);

 provided that in respect of any Disposal permitted under paragraphs (j), (n), (p)(i), (r) and
(z) above: 
  

	 	(i)	such disposal shall be on arm’s length commercial terms (or in the case of paragraph (p)(i) such disposals are for fair market value from the perspective of
the surrendering company); 

  

	 	(ii)	at least 75% of the consideration for such disposal shall be comprised of cash, Cash Equivalent Investments, Marketable Securities or Additional Assets, provided that
the aggregate amount of consideration received by way of Marketable Securities shall not (valued as at the relevant time of receipt of any Marketable Securities) at any time exceed £50 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) and
provided further that any Cash Equivalent Investments, Marketable Securities and/or Additional Assets acquired pursuant to any such disposal are monetized within 3 months of the expiry of any lock-up arrangement entered into by the relevant member
of the Bank Group making such disposal with any third party (where such lock-up arrangement has a term not exceeding 12 months); and 

  

	 	(iii)	in respect of any disposal the fair market value of which exceeds £35 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) no later than 30 days after the date of
such disposal, there shall have been delivered to the Facility Agent, a certificate signed by two authorised officers of the Company providing brief details of the transaction and certifying (in each case, to the extent applicable) (other than in
respect of disposals under paragraph (p)(i) above) that such disposal shall comply with the requirements set out in paragraphs (i) and (ii) above. 

 

	25.7	Change of Business 

 No
Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group or save as otherwise permitted by 

  
 149

 
the terms of this Agreement, make any change in the nature of its business as carried on immediately prior to the Original Execution Date, which would give rise to a substantial change in the
business of the Bank Group taken as a whole from that set forth in the definition of Group Business, provided that this Clause 25.7 shall not be breached by an Obligor or any member of the Bank Group making a disposal permitted by
Clause 25.6 (Disposals), an acquisition or investment permitted by Clause 25.13 (Acquisitions and Investments) or entering into any joint venture permitted by Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures), provided that in
connection with any formation or acquisition of a business outside of the United Kingdom, the Isle of Man, the Republic of Ireland and the Channel Islands (other than any subsequent investment in any such business which previously satisfied the
test), the Consolidated Operating Cashflow generated by any operations outside the United Kingdom, the Isle of Man, the Republic of Ireland and the Channel Islands for the twelve months from the most recent Quarter Date preceding any such formation
or acquisition of any business in any such jurisdiction shall not exceed 40% of the pro forma Consolidated Operating Cashflow for the same period for the Bank Group (giving effect to such formation or acquisition). 

 

	25.8	Mergers 

 No Obligor shall
(and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, amalgamate, consolidate or merge with any other person unless: 

 

	 	(a)	such amalgamation, consolidation or merger is between two members of the Bank Group; 

 

	 	(b)	such amalgamation, consolidation, or merger constitutes an acquisition permitted under Clause 25.13 (Acquisitions and Investments);

  

	 	(c)	any member of the Bank Group liquidates or dissolves in accordance with the provisions of Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations); or

  

	 	(d)	such amalgamation, consolidation or merger is by an Obligor (the “Original Entity”) into one or more entities (each a “Merged
Entity”), provided that: 

  

	 	(i)	such Merged Entity is an Obligor and is liable for the obligations of the relevant Original Entity under this Agreement and the Security which remain unaffected thereby
and entitled to the benefit of all the rights of such Original Entity; 

  

	 	(ii)	if required by the Facility Agent, such Merged Entity has entered into one or more Security Documents which provide security over the same assets of at least an
equivalent nature and ranking to the security provided by the relevant Original Entity pursuant to any Security entered into by them and any possibility of the Security referred to in this paragraph (ii) or paragraph (iii) below being
challenged or set aside is not greater than any such possibility in relation to the Security entered into by or in respect of the share capital of any relevant Original Entity; 

 

	 	(iii)	(if all or any part of the share capital of the relevant Original Entity was charged pursuant to one or more Security Documents) the equivalent part of the issued share
capital of such Merged Entity is charged pursuant to Security on terms of at least an equivalent nature and ranking as the Security relating to the shares in the relevant Original Entity; and 

 

	 	(iv)	 the Facility Agent is satisfied (acting reasonably) that all the property and other assets of the relevant Original Entity are vested in the Merged
Entity and that 

  
 150

	 	
the Merged Entity has assumed all the rights and obligations of the relevant Original Entity under all material Necessary Authorisations, 

provided that in the case of paragraphs (a), (b) and (d) above only, no later than 10 Business Days prior to the proposed
amalgamation, consolidation or merger a duly authorised officer of the Company shall have delivered to the Facility Agent (in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably) a certificate verifying compliance with the
relevant matters set out in such paragraph and to the extent deemed necessary, the Facility Agent shall have received appropriate advice from counsel in any relevant jurisdiction that such amalgamation, consolidation or merger (A) will not
result in the breach of any applicable law or regulation in any material respect and (B) in the case of an amalgamation, consolidation or merger involving an Obligor, will not have a materially adverse impact upon any of the obligations owed by
such Obligor to the Relevant Finance Parties or upon the Security granted by such Obligor under any Security Document. 
  

	25.9	Joint Ventures 

 No
Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, enter into, make any loans, distributions or other payments to, give any guarantees for the Financial
Indebtedness of, or acquire any interest or otherwise invest in, any Joint Venture, other than: 
  

	 	(a)	an acquisition of any interest in or any investment in any member of the UKTV Group; 

 

	 	(b)	pursuant to any loan or other funding arrangement in accordance with any Existing UKTV Group Loan Stock (including the funding of any undrawn amount thereunder as at
the Original Execution Date); 

  

	 	(c)	the acquisition of any interest in or any investment in, any Joint Venture constituting a Business Division Transaction, provided that: 

 

	 	(i)	the Net Proceeds of any such transaction shall be distributed in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (iv) of Clause 25.5 (Dividends, Distributions
and Share Capital); and 

  

	 	(ii)	any Net Proceeds which are not distributed in accordance with (i) above shall be retained within the Bank Group; or 

 

	 	(d)	any other Joint Venture not contemplated by paragraphs (a) to (d) above, which is engaged in a business substantially the same as or reasonably related or
complementary to, that carried on by the Bank Group and in any financial year, the aggregate of: 

  

	 	(i)	all amounts invested or any interests acquired in any Joint Venture by members of the Group; and 

 

	 	(ii)	any loans made or any guarantees given for Financial Indebtedness of any Joint Venture, 

does not exceed 3.25% of Bank Group Consolidated Revenues for the preceding financial year, calculated by reference to the annual
financial information for the Bank Group delivered in respect of that preceding financial year of the Bank Group pursuant to Clause 22.1 (Financial Statements), provided that any loans or investments made by way of Asset Passthrough and
any payments made in respect 

  
 151

 
of transactions conducted on an arm’s length basis or in the ordinary course of trading with any Joint Venture, shall not be included in the calculation of such amount. 

 

	25.10	  Transactions with Affiliates 

 No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, enter into any arrangement, contract or transaction with
any other member of the Group which is not an Obligor, other than: 
  

	 	(a)	transactions expressly permitted by the Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(b)	transactions between a member of the Bank Group that is not an Obligor with any other member of the Bank Group which is not an Obligor and transactions between a member
of the Bank Group that is an Obligor with any other member of the Bank Group which is an Obligor; 

  

	 	(c)	transactions in the ordinary course of business and either on no worse than arm’s length terms or, where there is no available market by which to assess whether
such a transaction is on no worse than arm’s length terms, on terms such that the transaction is financially fair to the relevant Obligor or, as the case may be, other member of the Bank Group; 

 

	 	(d)	transactions with any member of the Group in relation to management services conducted at not less than Cost on behalf of such member of the Group;

  

	 	(e)	tax sharing agreements or arrangements to surrender tax losses and payments made pursuant thereto, to the extent such transactions are not prohibited by this Agreement;

  

	 	(f)	transactions relating to the provision of Intra-Group Services; 

  

	 	(g)	transactions to effect either an Asset Passthrough or a Funding Passthrough; 

 

	 	(h)	transactions either on terms and conditions (including, without limitation, as to any reasonable fees payable in connection with such transactions) not substantially
less favourable to the relevant Obligor or, as the case may be, other member of the Bank Group than would be obtainable at such time in comparable arm’s length transactions with an entity which is not an Affiliate or, where there is no
comparable arm’s length transaction by which to assess whether such a transaction is on terms and conditions not substantially less favourable to the relevant Obligor or, as the case may be, other member of the Bank Group, on such terms and
conditions (including, without limitation, as to any fees payable in connection with such transaction) that the transaction is financially fair to the relevant Obligor or, as the case may be, other member of the Bank Group, with any such
transactions between one member of the Bank Group and another member of the Bank Group entered into prior to the Amendment Execution Date being deemed to be an arm’s length transaction; 

 

	 	(i)	any transaction to which one or more Obligors and one or more members of the Group who are not Obligors are party where the sole purpose of such transaction is for such
Obligors and members of the Group to effect a transaction with a person who is not a member of the Group; 

  

	 	(j)	insurance arrangements entered into in the ordinary course of business with a Captive Insurance Company; 

 

	 	(k)	 transactions relating to capital contributions between members of the Group or the amendment of the terms of any loans made by or any convertible
unsecured loan stock or other securities issued by any member of the Group to any other member of 

  
 152

	 	
the Group (whether by way of conversion of loans to convertible unsecured loan stock or vice versa or otherwise) or the capitalisation of, or the waiver of or the repayment of, loans made by or
any convertible unsecured loan stock issued by any member of the Group to any other member of the Group; 

  

	 	(l)	transactions relating to Excess Capacity Network Services provided that the price payable by any member of the Group in relation to such Excess Capacity Network
Services is no less than the Cost incurred by the relevant member of the Bank Group in providing such Excess Capacity Network Services; 

  

	 	(m)	transactions constituting Subordinated Funding; 

  

	 	(n)	transactions constituting Permitted Payments; or 

  

	 	(o)	any other transaction or arrangement permitted under Clause 25.3 (Loans and Guarantees), Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness), Clause 25.5
(Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital), Clause 25.6 (Disposals), Clause 25.8 (Mergers), Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures), or Clause 25.13 (Acquisitions and Investments).

  

	25.11 	Change in Financial Year 

Neither the Parent nor any Obligor shall, without the prior consent of the Facility Agent, change the end of its financial year from 31
December. 
  

	25.12 	Limitations on Hedging 

No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall) enter into any Hedging Agreement for speculative
purposes, it being acknowledged by the parties to this Agreement that hedging of actual or reasonably anticipated interest rate and/or foreign exchange rate exposure shall not constitute speculative purposes. 

 

	25.13 	Acquisitions and Investments 

 No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, purchase, subscribe for or otherwise acquire or invest
in any shares (or other securities or any interest in it) in, or incorporate, any company or acquire (by subscription or otherwise) or invest in any business or (save in the ordinary course of business) purchase or otherwise acquire any other assets
other than: 
  

	 	(a)	the purchase of or investment in Cash Equivalent Investments or Marketable Securities (including without limitation by way of consideration in respect of any disposal
as contemplated in the proviso to Clause 25.6 (Disposals) and subject to the conditions set out therein); 

  

	 	(b)	the incorporation of a company or the acquisition of an “off-the-shelf” company which is or becomes a member of the Bank Group; 

 

	 	(c)	 any acquisition by any member of the Bank Group in connection with a disposal permitted by the provisions of Clause 25.6 (Disposals) and
any acquisition or subscription by a member of the Bank Group of shares issued by a Subsidiary of the Company or a Subsidiary of Virgin Media Communications which in any such case, is a member of the Bank Group which will, after the acquisition of
such shares become a wholly-owned direct or indirect Subsidiary of the Company or Virgin Media Communications as the case may be, provided that if the other shares of such Subsidiary are subject to existing Security and if such shares are required
to remain subject to Security in order to comply with the 80% Security Test pursuant to Clause 24.12(b)(i) (Further Assurances), either (i) such newly issued shares shall also

  
 153

	 	
be subject to Security (in form and substance substantially similar to any existing Security or otherwise in such form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Facility Agent) upon
their issue or (ii) such shares shall be made subject to Security (in form and substance substantially similar to any existing Security or otherwise in such form and substance as may be reasonably required by the Facility Agent) within 10
Business Days of their issue; 

  

	 	(d)	the acquisition of any shares in NTL South Herts or the acquisition of any limited partnership interests in South Hertfordshire United Kingdom Fund, Ltd.;

  

	 	(e)	any acquisition made by a member of the Bank Group pursuant to the implementation of an Asset Passthrough or a Funding Passthrough; 

 

	 	(f)	any acquisition by any member of the Bank Group of any loan receivable, security or other asset by way of capital contribution or in consideration of the issue of any
securities or of Subordinated Funding; 

  

	 	(g)	any acquisition of shares, assets, revenues or rights arising from an amalgamation, consolidation or merger of a member of the Bank Group with any other person which is
permitted by Clause 25.8 (Mergers); 

  

	 	(h)	the acquisition of any leasehold interest in any assets which are the subject of a sale and leaseback permitted by the provisions of paragraph (r) of
Clause 25.6 (Disposals); 

  

	 	(i)	any acquisition of or investment in any Joint Venture permitted by Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures); 

 

	 	(j)	any purchase or acquisition of assets or revenues by a member of the Bank Group from a member of the Bank Group, provided that the disposal of such assets or revenues
by the relevant member of the Bank Group is permitted under Clause 25.6 (Disposals); 

  

	 	(k)	arising from the conversion of any company (the “Original Company”) from one form of organisation into another form of organisation provided that
(i) if, prior to the time of such conversion, the Security Trustee has the benefit of Security over the shares of such Original Company or such Original Company is an Obligor, then the Company shall ensure that the Security Trustee is provided
with Security over the equivalent ownership interests in, and substantially all of the assets of, the converted organisation, of at least an equivalent nature and ranking to the Security previously provided by the Original Company and (ii) the
Security Trustee is satisfied that any possibility of the additional Security referred to in this paragraph (k) being challenged or set aside is not greater than any such possibility in relation to the Security entered into by or in respect of
the share capital of the Original Company; 

  

	 	(l)	any acquisition by any member of the Bank Group of any High Yield Notes provided that an amount equal to the purchase price paid for the acquisition of any such High
Yield Notes could have been used by such member of the Bank Group to fund a Permitted Payment and provided further that to the extent any such acquisition is made in reliance on any basket amount provided for under the definition of “Permitted
Payments”, such amount shall be reduced by an amount equal to the consideration paid for any such acquisition; 

  
 154

	 	(m)	any acquisition (a “Permitted Acquisition”) of a person carrying on any business similar and/or complementary to the Group (the
“Acquiree”) in each case: 

  

	 	(i)	no Default is continuing on the closing date for the Permitted Acquisition or would occur as a result of the Permitted Acquisition; 

 

	 	(ii)	the aggregate consideration for the Permitted Acquisition (including any assumed indebtedness, or other assumed actual or contingent liability and any associated fees
and expenses) (the “Total Purchase Price”) is funded entirely from (A) the proceeds of New Equity, (B) available cash within the Group and (C) any Financial Indebtedness permitted to be incurred by this Agreement;

  

	 	(iii)	the Acquiree has positive earnings before tax, depreciation and amortisation calculated on the same basis as Consolidated Operating Cashflow for the previous one
financial year ending on the last day of the last financial quarter of the then current financial year of such company or business for which financial statements are available; 

 

	 	(iv)	in the case of the acquisition of all of the issued share capital of the Acquiree, as soon as reasonably practicable, but in any case within 90 days from the completion
of the Permitted Acquisition, the Acquiree (and the acquirer, as applicable) must to the extent required by Clause 24.12 (Further Assurance) accede as a Guarantor in accordance with the provisions of Clause 26.2 (Acceding
Guarantors); 

  

	 	(v)	in the case of the acquisition of a business or undertaking carried on as a going concern of the Acquiree, as soon as reasonably practicable, but in any case within 90
days from the completion of the Permitted Acquisition, the acquirer, to the extent required in order to comply with the 80% Security Test pursuant to Clause 24.12(b)(i) (Further Assurance), must give Security over the assets acquired by
executing Security Documents, in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent and/or accede as a Guarantor in accordance with the provision of Clause 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors); 

 

	 	(vi)	for any Permitted Acquisition the Total Purchase Price of which is in excess of £100 million, the Company must provide to the Facility Agent (to the extent
practicable not later than 5 Business Days prior to the proposed acquisition): 

  

	 	(A)	copies of all due diligence reports (if any) commissioned by the Company or any relevant member of the Bank Group in respect of the proposed Permitted Acquisition;

  

	 	(B)	copies of all sale and purchase documents relating to the proposed Permitted Acquisition, in each case duly executed and delivered by all parties thereto, together with
confirmation that all material Authorisations for such acquisition have been made, obtained and are in full force and effect; and 

  

	 	(C)	an updated Budget amended to reflect the proposed Permitted Acquisition; and 

 

	 	(vii)	the Company will provide to the Facility Agent, a certificate signed by the chief financial officer of the Company showing in reasonable detail that:

  

	 	(A)	 it would have remained in compliance with its obligations under Clause 23 (Financial Condition) if the covenants tested therein were

  
 155

	 	
recalculated for the most recent Quarter Date for which quarterly financial information is available, such recalculation to be made by reference to the financial statements of the Acquiree
consolidated with the financial statements of the Bank Group for such period on a pro forma basis and as if the consideration for the proposed acquisition had been paid at the start of that relevant testing period ending on that Quarter Date and any
borrowings incurred in connection with the acquisition or since the last day of the relevant testing period had been incurred on the first day of the relevant testing period and (to the extent agreed by the Facility Agent, acting reasonably) to any
reasonably identifiable cost savings and other synergies which are reasonably expected to result from the Permitted Acquisition; and 

  

	 	(B)	it will be in compliance with its obligations under Clause 23 (Financial Condition) as at the end of the next Financial Quarter, such compliance to be demonstrated
on a pro forma basis by reference to the financial statements of the Acquiree, consolidated with the financial statements of the Bank Group for such period and (to the extent agreed by the Facility Agent, acting reasonably) to any reasonably
identifiable cost savings and other synergies which are reasonably expected to result from the Permitted Acquisition; 

  

	 	(n)	acquisitions not falling within paragraphs (a) to (m) above provided that the aggregate consideration for the acquisitions permitted by this paragraph
(n) shall not exceed £300 million; and 

  

	 	(o)	investments in any Asset Securitisation Subsidiary in connection with any asset securitisation programme or receivables factoring transaction otherwise permitted by
Clause 25.6(j) (Disposals) that is reasonably necessary or advisable to effect such asset securitisation programme or receivables factoring transaction. 

 

	25.14 	High Yield Notes 

 Save to
the extent expressly permitted under the terms of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and, if applicable, any Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement, without the consent of an Instructing Group, the Parent will not agree any amendment to the Existing
High Yield Notes which brings forward the final maturity earlier that 31 December 2015. 
  

	25.15 	No Restrictions on Payments 

 No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall), without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, enter into any agreement, transaction or other
arrangement which restricts or attempts to restrict such Obligor or other member of the Bank Group from making any payments or other distributions in cash to any other member of the Bank Group, if any such restriction affects the ability of the
Obligors as a whole to comply with the payment obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents or is reasonably likely to result in the incurrence of significant costs, or any significant increase in, any costs and expenses payable by or any taxes
owing by the Bank Group as a whole or is reasonably likely to result in a significant increase in any taxes in any material amount owing by the Bank Group as a whole, other than pursuant to or as contemplated by the Relevant Finance Documents.

  

	25.16 	SSN Finance Subsidiary Covenants 

 No SSN Finance Subsidiary shall trade, carry on any business, own any material assets or incur any material liabilities except for: 

  
 156

	 	(a)	effecting or facilitating the issuance of Senior Secured Notes and on-lending the proceeds thereof as contemplated in the definition of “SSN Finance
Subsidiary”; 

  

	 	(b)	intergroup debit balances, intergroup credit balances and other credit balances in bank accounts and cash, provided that any intergroup credit balances owed to any SSN
Finance Subsidiary by an Obligor shall be: 

  

	 	(i)	subject to Security; 

  

	 	(ii)	to the extent applicable, subject to the provisions of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement or the Group Intercreditor Agreement; 

 

	 	(c)	any rights and liabilities arising under the Relevant Finance Documents, any Senior Secured Notes Documents or any High Yield Notes; 

 

	 	(d)	having rights and liabilities under any Hedging Agreements entered into other than for speculative purposes, it being acknowledged by the parties to this Agreement that
hedging of actual or reasonably anticipated interest rate and/or foreign exchange rate exposure shall not constitute speculative purposes; 

  

	 	(e)	incurring liabilities for or in connection with Taxes or arising by operation of law; and 

 

	 	(f)	in respect of any service contracts for any directors or employees. 

  

	25.17 	No Amendments 

  

	 	(a)	No Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall) amend the Tax Cooperation Agreement (to the extent it is a party thereto) or its
constitutional documents, in each case, in a manner which could reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect other than with the prior written consent of an Instructing Group or where required by law (provided that, in the case of the
latter, such amendment could not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect). 

  

	 	(b)	The Parent shall procure that, except as permitted by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and the Group Intercreditor Agreement, no amendment is made to the Existing High
Yield Notes or, any Additional High Yield Notes, the Convertible Senior Notes or any Senior Secured Notes (including, in each case as applicable, the terms of the guarantees given in respect thereof), in each case in a manner which could reasonably
be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, other than with the prior written consent of the Instructing Group or where required by law. 

  

	25.18 	Internal Reorganisations 

  

	 	(a)	No Obligor (for these purposes, a “Predecessor Obligor”) shall, without the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, liquidate on a solvent basis
any Borrower, any Obligor that is a Material Subsidiary, the Company, Intermediate Holdco or Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC (a “Solvent Liquidation”) unless: 

 

	 	(i)	on or prior to the Solvent Liquidation, an entity (the “Successor Entity”) acquires substantially all of the assets and assumes substantially all of
the liabilities of the Predecessor Obligor (a “Liquidation Transfer”), excluding any rights under contracts that cannot be assigned or liabilities that will be satisfied or released upon the Solvent Liquidation, on an arms’
length basis and for full consideration; 

  
 157

	 	(ii)	the Successor Entity is organised in the same jurisdiction as that in which the Predecessor Obligor is organised and is either: 

 

	 	(A)	an existing Obligor; or 

  

	 	(B)	a Subsidiary of the Company that is entitled to become (and subsequently does become) an Obligor in accordance with the provisions of Clause 26.1 (Acceding
Borrowers) or Clause 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors); 

  

	 	(iii)	the Successor Entity does not incur any additional material liabilities in connection with the Solvent Liquidation other than those which are to be transferred to it by
the Predecessor Obligor but which did not arise directly as a result of the Solvent Liquidation; 

  

	 	(iv)	to the extent previously provided in respect of the shares or the assets of the Predecessor Obligor, the Relevant Finance Parties are granted a first ranking security
interest over the shares and/or assets of the Successor Entity to the extent required in order to comply with the 80% Security Test ; 

  

	 	(v)	no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing or would arise from the Solvent Liquidation Transfer or the Solvent Liquidation; and 

 

	 	(vi)	immediately after the Solvent Liquidation, the following documents are delivered to the Facility Agent each in a form previously approved by the Facility Agent (acting
on the instructions of an Instructing Group): 

  

	 	(A)	copies of solvency declarations of the directors of the Successor Entity confirming to the best of their knowledge and belief, that the Successor Entity was balance
sheet solvent immediately prior to and after the Solvent Liquidation, accompanied by any report by the auditors or other advisers of the relevant Successor Entity on which such directors have relied for the purposes of giving such declaration;

  

	 	(B)	copies of the resolutions of the Predecessor Obligor and the Successor Entity (to the extent required by law) approving the Liquidation Transfer and/or the Liquidation
(as applicable); 

  

	 	(C)	copies of the statutory declarations of the directors of the Predecessor Obligor (to the extent required by law) given in connection with Solvent Liquidation;

  

	 	(D)	a copy of the executed transfer agreement relating to the Liquidation Transfer; and 

 

	 	(E)	the legal opinion from the Successor Entity’s counsel confirming (i) the due capacity and incorporation of each of the Successor Entity and the Predecessor
Obligor, (ii) the power and authority of the Successor Entity to enter into and perform its obligations under this Agreement and any other Relevant Finance Document to which it is a party and (iii) that the transfer agreement giving effect
to the Liquidation Transfer is legally binding and enforceable in accordance with its terms. 

  

	 	(b)	 The solvent liquidation, dissolution or other reorganisation of any member of the Bank Group (other than any Borrower, the Company, Intermediate Holdco
and Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC) shall be permitted provided that any payments or assets 

  
 158

	 	
distributed as a result of such solvent liquidation, dissolution or other reorganisation are distributed to other members of the Bank Group. 

 

	25.19 	ERISA 

 Neither any
Obligor nor any ERISA Affiliate shall maintain or contribute to (or have an obligation to contribute to) a Plan subject to Title IV or Section 302 of ERISA and/or Section 412 of the Code or to a Multiemployer Plan which could reasonably be
expected to give rise to a Material Adverse Effect with respect to any Obligor or any Relevant Finance Party. 
  

	25.20	  Undertakings in Respect of the Group Intercreditor Agreement 

 The Company shall not, without the consent of the Facility Agent (acting on the instructions of an Instructing Group), (i) designate any liabilities, other than any Senior Secured Notes or any other
Financial Indebtedness permitted to be (A) incurred under Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness) and (B) secured pursuant to Clause 25.2 (Negative Pledge), as “New Senior Liabilities” under the Group
Intercreditor Agreement, (ii) designate any agreement as a “Designated Refinancing Facilities Agreement” under the Group Intercreditor Agreement other than this Agreement, or (iii) designate any person other than Intermediate
Holdco as an “Additional High Yield Guarantor” under the HYD Intercreditor Agreement. To the extent permitted by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, the Company shall designate any Financial Indebtedness of the Bank Group that represents
“Senior Liabilities” under the HYD Intercreditor Agreement, as “Designated Senior Liabilities” under the HYD Intercreditor Agreement. 
  

	26.	ACCEDING GROUP COMPANIES 

  

	26.1 	Acceding Borrowers 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Company may, upon not less than 5 Business Days prior written notice to the Facility Agent, request that any member of the Bank
Group becomes an Acceding Borrower under this Agreement. 

  

	 	(b)	Such member of the Bank Group may become an Acceding Borrower to a Facility if: 

 

	 	(i)	it is incorporated in the United Kingdom or in the same jurisdiction as an existing Borrower for that Facility or (if it is not incorporated in the United Kingdom) an
Instructing Group has approved the addition of that member of the Bank Group as an Acceding Borrower; 

  

	 	(ii)	the Company delivers to the Facility Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Notice pursuant to which it agrees to become a party to this Agreement as an Acceding
Borrower and (subject to any provision of law prohibiting the same) an Acceding Guarantor; 

  

	 	(iii)	the Company confirms that no Event of Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that member of the Bank Group becoming an Acceding Borrower and (if
applicable) an Acceding Guarantor; and 

  

	 	(iv)	the Facility Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part 4 of Schedule 5 (Accession Documents) in relation to that member of the
Bank Group, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent shall notify the Company and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that the conditions specified in paragraph (b) above have been satisfied.

  
 159

	26.2 	Acceding Guarantors 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Company may, upon not less than 5 Business Days prior written notice to the Facility Agent, request that any member of the Bank
Group becomes an Acceding Guarantor under this Agreement. 

  

	 	(b)	Such member of the Bank Group may become an Acceding Guarantor if: 

  

	 	(i)	the Company delivers to the Facility Agent a duly completed and executed Accession Notice; 

 

	 	(ii)	the Company confirms that no Event of Default is continuing or would occur as a result of that member of the Bank Group becoming an Acceding Guarantor; and

  

	 	(iii)	the Facility Agent has received all of the documents and other evidence listed in Part 4 of Schedule 5 (Accession Documents) in relation to that member of the
Bank Group, each in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent, acting reasonably. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent shall notify the Company and the Lenders promptly upon being satisfied that the conditions specified in paragraph (b) above have been satisfied.

  

	26.3 	Acceding Holding Company 

If at any time the Ultimate Parent becomes a Subsidiary of a Holding Company, the Ultimate Parent shall ensure that such Holding Company
shall, upon becoming the Holding Company of the Ultimate Parent deliver an Accession Notice duly executed by the Company and the Holding Company together with the documents set out in Part 4 of Schedule 5 (Accession Documents). 

 

	26.4 	Assumption of Rights and Obligations 

  

	 	(a)	Upon satisfactory delivery of a duly executed Accession Notice to the Facility Agent, together with the other documents required to be delivered under Clauses 26.1
(Acceding Borrowers) and 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors), the relevant member of the Bank Group, the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, the Obligors and the Relevant Finance Parties, will assume such obligations towards one another and/or acquire
such rights against each other as they would each have assumed or acquired had such member of the Bank Group been an original party to this Agreement as a Borrower or a Guarantor as the case may be and such member of the Bank Group shall become a
party to this Agreement as an Acceding Borrower and/or an Acceding Guarantor as the case may be. 

  

	 	(b)	Upon satisfactory delivery of a duly executed Accession Notice to the Facility Agent, together with the other documents required to be delivered under Clause 26.3
(Acceding Holding Company), the relevant Holding Company, the Parent, the Obligors and the Relevant Finance Parties, will assume such obligations towards one another and/or acquire such rights against each other as they would each have
assumed or acquired had such Holding Company been an original party to this Agreement as the Ultimate Parent, and such Holding Company shall become a party to this Agreement in such capacity. Simultaneously with such Holding Company becoming a party
to this Agreement as aforesaid, the Facility Agent shall release the Ultimate Parent for the time being from its obligations as an Ultimate Parent under this Agreement and such Ultimate Parent shall cease to be a party to this Agreement in such
capacity. 

  
 160

	27.	EVENTS OF DEFAULT 

 Each
of Clauses 27.1 (Non-Payment) to 27.16 (Change of Ownership) describes the circumstances which constitute an Event of Default for the purposes of this Agreement. 

 

	27.1 	Non-Payment 

 The Parent
or any Obligor fails to pay any sum due from it under any Relevant Finance Document at the time, in the currency and in the manner specified in such Relevant Finance Document within (a) 3 Business Days of the due date, in the case of payments
of principal where failure to pay was due solely to technical or administrative error in the transmission of funds or a Disruption Event, (b) 5 Business Days of the due date, in the case of payments of interest, or (c) 5 Business Days of
the due date, in respect of payments of any other amounts. 
  

	27.2	 Covenants 

  

	 	(a)	The Ultimate Parent, the Parent or an Obligor fails duly to perform or comply with any obligation expressed to be assumed by it in Clause 24.1 (Application of
Advances), Clause 24.20 (Minimum Outstandings and Commitments), Clause 25.2 (Negative Pledge), Clause 25.3 (Loans and Guarantees), Clause 25.4 (Financial Indebtedness), Clause 25.5
(Dividends, Distributions and Share Capital), Clause 25.8 (Mergers), Clause 25.9 (Joint Ventures), Clause 25.13 (Acquisitions and Investments) or Clause 25.20 (Undertakings in Respect of the Group
Intercreditor Agreement). 

  

	 	(b)	The Parent or any Obligor fails duly to perform or comply with any obligation expressed to be assumed by it in Clause 22 (Financial Information),
paragraph (a) of Clause 24.9 (Hedging) or paragraph (b)(i) of Clause 24.12 (Further Assurance), and such failure, if capable of remedy, is not so remedied within 15 Business Days of the earlier of
(i) the Parent or such Obligor becoming aware of such failure to perform or comply (ii) the Facility Agent having given notice of such failure to the Company. 

 

	 	(c)	Subject to the expiry of the cure period in Clause 23.3 (Equity Cure Right), there is any breach of Clause 23.2 (Ratios).

  

	 	(d)	There is any breach of Clause 25.6 (Disposals), provided that where the failure to comply with any obligation under Clause 25.6 (Disposals)
relates to the obligation to deliver a certificate within a specified time period, no Event of Default shall be deemed to have occurred unless the Company shall have failed to deliver (or procure delivery of) the required certificate within such
time period and upon request by the Facility Agent for a description of the transactions relating to such certificate which was not delivered, the Company fails to provide (or procure the delivery of) such details within 15 Business Days after such
request. 

  

	27.3	Other Obligations 

 The
Ultimate Parent, the Parent or any Obligor fails duly to perform or comply with any of the obligations expressed to be assumed by it in any of the Relevant Finance Documents (other than any of those referred to in Clauses 27.1
(Non-Payment) and 27.2 (Covenants)) and such failure, if capable of remedy, is not so remedied within 30 days of the earlier of (i) the Ultimate Parent, the Parent or such Obligor becoming aware of such failure to perform or
comply and (ii) the Facility Agent having given notice of such failure to the Company. 

  
 161

	27.4	Misrepresentation 

 Any
representation or statement made or repeated by the Ultimate Parent, the Parent or an Obligor in any Relevant Finance Document or in any notice or other document or certificate delivered by it pursuant to a Relevant Finance Document is or proves to
have been incorrect or misleading in any material respect when made or repeated where the circumstances giving rise to such inaccuracy, if capable of remedy or change are not remedied or do not change within 30 days of the earlier of (i) the
Ultimate Parent, the Parent or the relevant Obligor becoming aware of such circumstances and (ii) the Facility Agent having notified the Company of such misrepresentation having occurred. 

 

	27.5	Cross Default 

  

	 	(a)	Any Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Group is not paid when due and payable, after taking into account any applicable grace period; 

 

	 	(b)	any Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Group is declared (or is capable of being declared) to be or otherwise becomes due and payable prior to its specified
maturity as a result of an event of default (however described), after taking into account any applicable grace period; or 

  

	 	(c)	any commitment for any Financial Indebtedness of any member of the Group is cancelled or suspended by a creditor of any member of the Group as a result of an event of
default (however described), 

 provided that no Event of Default will occur under this Clause 27.5:

  

	 	(i)	if the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness and/or commitment for Financial Indebtedness falling within paragraphs (a) to (c) above is less than
£50 million (or its equivalent in other currencies); 

  

	 	(ii)	if the circumstance which would otherwise have caused an Event of Default under this Clause 27.5 is being contested in good faith by appropriate action;

  

	 	(iii)	if the relevant Financial Indebtedness is cash-collateralised and such cash is available for application in satisfaction of such Financial Indebtedness;

  

	 	(iv)	if such Financial Indebtedness is owed by one member of the Group to another member of the Group; or 

 

	 	(v)	if such Event of Default arises solely by reason of the failure of any member of the Group to obtain the consent of the lenders under the Existing Senior Credit
Facilities Agreement to (i) the execution of the Relevant Finance Documents, (ii) the exercise of any of its rights or the performance of any of its obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents or (iii) any other matter
contemplated by the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  

	27.6	Insolvency 

 The Ultimate
Parent, the Parent, any Borrower or any Obligor that is a Material Subsidiary is unable to pay its debts as they fall due, ceases or suspends generally the payment of its debts or announces an intention to do so, or makes a general assignment for
the benefit of or a composition with its creditors generally or a general moratorium is declared in respect of the Financial Indebtedness of the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, such Borrower or such Obligor (as applicable). 

  
 162

	27.7	Winding-up 

 After the
Original Execution Date, the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, any Borrower or any Obligor that is a Material Subsidiary takes any corporate action or formal legal proceedings are started and served (not being actions or proceedings which can be
demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Facility Agent by providing an opinion of a leading firm of London solicitors (within 30 days of any such action or proceedings having commenced) to that effect as a frivolous, vexatious or an abuse of the
process of the court or related to a claim to which such Person has a good defence and which is being vigorously contested by such body) for its winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation or for the appointment of a liquidator,
receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, conservator, custodian, trustee or similar officer of it or of any or all of its revenues and assets other than where any such legal proceedings in respect of the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, such
Borrower or such Material Subsidiary either (a)(i) do not relate to the appointment of an administrator and (ii) are stayed or discharged within 30 days from their commencement, (b) relate to a solvent liquidation or dissolution set forth
under paragraph (c) of Clause 25.8 (Mergers) or (c) are permitted under Clause 25.18 (Internal Reorganisations). 
  

	27.8	Execution or Distress 

Any execution, distress or attachment is levied against, or an encumbrancer takes possession of, the whole or any part of, the property,
undertaking or assets of the Parent, any Borrower or any Obligor which is a Material Subsidiary, having an aggregate value of more than £50 million (or its equivalent in other currencies) and the same is not discharged within 30 days.

  

	27.9	Similar Events 

 Any event
occurs which, under the laws of any jurisdiction, has a similar or analogous effect to any of those events mentioned in Clause 27.6 (Insolvency), Clause 27.7 (Winding-up) or Clause 27.8 (Execution or Distress).

  

	27.10 	Repudiation 

 The Ultimate
Parent, the Parent or any Obligor repudiates any of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party. 
  

	27.11 	Illegality 

 Save as
provided in the Reservations, at any time it is or becomes unlawful for the Ultimate Parent, the Parent or any Obligor to perform or comply with any or all of its material obligations under any of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party
or any of the material obligations of the Ultimate Parent, the Parent or any Obligor under any of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party are not or cease to be legal, valid and binding except as contemplated by the Reservations and, if
capable of remedy, is not remedied within 10 Business Days of the earlier of the Ultimate Parent, the Parent or such Obligor becoming aware of the relevant illegality and the Facility Agent having given notice of the same to the Company. 

 

	27.12 	Intercreditor Default 

Any member of the Group which is party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement or the HYD Intercreditor Agreement fails to comply with any of
its material obligations under it and such failure, if capable of remedy, is not remedied within 30 days of the earlier of such member of the Group becoming aware of the relevant failure to comply and the Facility Agent having given notice of the
same to the Parent. 

  
 163

	27.13 	Revocation of Necessary Authorisations 

 Any Necessary Authorisation is revoked and where such revocation has or would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, is not replaced within 10 Business Days. 

 

	27.14 	Material Adverse Effect 

Any event or circumstance occurs which has a Material Adverse Effect. 

 

	27.15 	Material Proceedings 

 Any
litigation, arbitration or administrative proceeding of or before any court, arbitral body, or agency is commenced against any member of the Group, which is reasonably likely to be adversely determined and which, if adversely determined, has or
would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. 
  

	27.16 	Change of Ownership 

 If
any of the following occurs: 
  

	 	(a)	the Parent ceases to be a direct or indirect wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Ultimate Parent; or 

 

	 	(b)	the Company ceases to be a direct wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Parent. 

  

	27.17 	Acceleration 

 Upon the
occurrence of an Event of Default and while the same is continuing at any time thereafter, the Facility Agent may (and, if so instructed by an Instructing Group, shall) by written notice to the Company: 

 

	 	(a)	declare all or any part of the Outstandings to be immediately due and payable (whereupon the same shall become so payable together with accrued interest thereon and any
other sums then owed by any Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents) or declare all or any part of the Outstandings to be due and payable on demand of the Facility Agent; and/or 

 

	 	(b)	require the Borrowers to procure that the Outstanding L/C Amount under each Documentary Credit is and all Ancillary Facility Outstandings are promptly reduced to zero
and/or provide cash collateral therefor by deposit in such interest bearing account as the Facility Agent may specify for each Documentary Credit/Ancillary Facility in an amount specified by the Facility Agent and in the currency of such Documentary
Credit/Ancillary Facility (whereupon the Borrower shall do so) but no greater than the amount outstanding under such Documentary Credit/Ancillary Facility; and/or 

 

	 	(c)	declare that any unutilised portion of the Facilities shall be cancelled, whereupon the same shall be cancelled and the corresponding Commitments of each Lender shall
be reduced to zero; and/or 

  

	 	(d)	exercise or direct the Security Trustee to exercise any rights and remedies (including any right to demand cash collateral by deposit in such interest-bearing account
as the Facility Agent may specify) to which the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee or the Lenders may be entitled, 

 provided that, notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained above in this Clause 27.17, upon the occurrence of any Event of Default listed in Clause 27.9 (Similar Events) or Clause

  
 164

 
27.19 (US Obligors) in relation to any US Obligor, all or any part of the Outstandings shall be immediately due and payable (whereupon the same shall become so payable together with
accrued interest thereon and any other sums then owed by any Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents), any unutilised portion of the Facilities shall be immediately cancelled and the corresponding Commitments of each Lender shall be reduced to
zero and the Facility Agent may exercise or direct the Security Trustee to exercise any rights and remedies (including any right to demand cash collateral by deposit in such interest-bearing account as the Facility Agent may specify) to which the
Facility Agent, the Security Trustee or the Lenders may be entitled. 
  

	27.18 	Repayment on Demand 

 If,
pursuant to paragraph (a) of Clause 27.17 (Acceleration), the Facility Agent declares all or any part of the Outstandings to be due and payable on demand of the Facility Agent, then, and at any time thereafter, the Facility Agent
may (and, if so instructed by an Instructing Group, shall) by written notice to the Company: 
  

	 	(a)	require repayment of all or the relevant part of the Outstandings on such date as it may specify in such notice (whereupon the same shall become due and payable on such
date together with accrued interest thereon and any other sums then owed by the Parent or any Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents) or withdraw its declaration with effect from such date as it may specify in such notice; and/or

  

	 	(b)	select as the duration of any Interest Period or Term which begins whilst such declaration remains in effect a period of 6 months or less. 

 

	27.19 	US Obligors 

Notwithstanding Clause 27.17 (Acceleration), if any US Obligor that is a Material Subsidiary shall commence a voluntary case
concerning itself under the US Bankruptcy Code, or an involuntary case is commenced against any US Obligor and the petition is not controverted within 10 days, or is not dismissed within 60 days, after commencement of the case, or a custodian (as
defined in the US Bankruptcy Code) is appointed for, or takes charge of, all or substantially all of the property of any US Obligor, or any order of relief or other order approving any such case or proceeding is entered, the Facilities shall cease
to be available to such US Obligor, all Advances outstanding to such US Obligor shall become immediately due and payable and such US Obligor shall be required to provide cash cover in respect of all Documentary Credits issued for its account in each
case automatically and without any further action by any party hereto. 
  

	28.	DEFAULT INTEREST 

  

	28.1	Consequences of Non-Payment 

 If any sum due and payable by the Parent or any Obligor under this Agreement is not paid on the due date therefor in accordance with the provisions of Clause 33 (Payments) or if any sum due
and payable by an Obligor pursuant to a judgment of any court in connection with this Agreement is not paid on the date of such judgment, the period beginning on such due date or, as the case may be, the date of such judgment and ending on the
Business Day on which the obligation of such Obligor to pay the Unpaid Sum is discharged shall be divided into successive periods, each of which (other than the first) shall start on the last day of the preceding such period (which shall be a
Business Day) and the duration of each of which shall (except as otherwise provided in this Clause 28) be selected by the Facility Agent. 

  
 165

	28.2	Default Rate 

 During each
such period relating thereto as is mentioned in Clause 28.1 (Consequences of Non-Payment) an Unpaid Sum shall bear interest at the rate per annum which is the sum from time to time of 1%, the Applicable Margin (provided that if any
Unpaid Sum is not directly referable to a particular Facility the Applicable Margin shall be the Revolving Facility Margin, the Mandatory Cost at such time and EURIBOR or LIBOR, as the case may be, on the Quotation Date therefor, provided that:

  

	 	(a)	if, for any such period, EURIBOR or LIBOR, as the case may be, cannot be determined, the rate of interest applicable to each Lender’s portion of such Unpaid Sum
shall be the rate per annum which is the sum of 1%, the Applicable Margin, (as aforesaid), and the Mandatory Cost at such time and the rate per annum that shall be notified to the Facility Agent by such Lender as soon as practicable after the
beginning of such period as being that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to such Lender of funding from whatever sources it may reasonably select its portion of such Unpaid Sum during such period; and 

 

	 	(b)	if such Unpaid Sum is all or part of an Advance which became due and payable on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period or Term relating thereto, the first
Interest Period applicable to it shall be of a duration equal to the unexpired portion of that Interest Period or Term and the rate of interest applicable thereto from time to time during such Interest Period shall be that which exceeds by 1% the
rate which would have been applicable to it had it not so fallen due. 

  

	28.3	Maturity of Default Interest 

 Any interest which shall have accrued under Clause 28.2 (Default Rate) in respect of an Unpaid Sum shall be due and payable and shall be paid by the Obligor owing such sum at the end of the
period by reference to which it is calculated or on such other dates as the Facility Agent may specify by written notice to such Obligor. 
  

	28.4	Construction of Unpaid Sum 

Any Unpaid Sum shall (for the purposes of this Clause 28, Clause 18 (Increased Costs), Clause 31 (Borrowers’
Indemnities) and Schedule 7 (Mandatory Cost Formula)) be treated as an advance and accordingly in those provisions the term “Advance” includes any Unpaid Sum and the term “Interest Period” and “Term”, in
relation to an Unpaid Sum, includes each such period relating thereto as is mentioned in Clause 28.1 (Consequences of Non-Payment). 
  

	29.	GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY 

  

	29.1	Guarantee 

 With effect
from the Original Execution Date or if later, the date on which it accedes to this Agreement in such capacity, each Guarantor irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees, jointly and severally, to each of the Relevant Finance Parties the due and
punctual payment by each of the Borrowers of all sums payable by it under each of the Relevant Finance Documents and agrees that promptly on demand it will pay to the Facility Agent each and every sum of money which any of the Borrowers is at any
time liable to pay to any Relevant Finance Party under or pursuant to any Relevant Finance Document and which has become due and payable but has not been paid at the time such demand is made and provided that before any such demand is made on a
Restricted Guarantor, demand for payment of the relevant sum shall first have been made on the relevant Borrower. 

  
 166

	29.2	Indemnity 

 With effect
from the Original Execution Date, or if later, the date upon which it accedes to this Agreement in such capacity, each Guarantor (other than a Restricted Guarantor) irrevocably and unconditionally agrees, jointly and severally, as primary obligor
and not only as surety, to indemnify and hold harmless each Relevant Finance Party on demand by the Facility Agent from and against any loss incurred by such Relevant Finance Party as a result of any of the obligations of the Borrowers under or
pursuant to any Relevant Finance Document being or becoming void, voidable, unenforceable or ineffective as against any Borrower for any reason whatsoever (whether or not known to that Relevant Finance Party or any other person) the amount of such
loss being the amount which the Relevant Finance Party suffering it would otherwise have been entitled to recover from such Borrower and provided that the amount payable by a Guarantor under this Clause 29.2 shall not exceed the amount such
Guarantor would have had to pay under Clause 29.1 (Guarantee) if the amount claimed had been recoverable on the basis of a guarantee. 
  

	29.3	Continuing and Independent Obligations 

 The obligations of each Guarantor under this Agreement shall constitute and be continuing obligations which shall not be released or discharged by any intermediate payment or settlement of all or any of
the obligations of each of the Borrowers under the Relevant Finance Documents, shall continue in full force and effect until the unconditional and irrevocable payment and discharge in full of all amounts owing by each of the Borrowers under each of
the Relevant Finance Documents and are in addition to and independent of, and shall not prejudice or merge with, any other security (or right of set off) which any Relevant Finance Party may at any time hold in respect of such obligations or any of
them. 
  

	29.4	Avoidance of Payments 

Where any release, discharge or other arrangement in respect of any obligation of any Borrower, or any Security held by any Relevant
Finance Party therefor, is given or made in reliance on any payment or other disposition which is avoided or must be repaid (whether in whole or in part) in an insolvency, liquidation or otherwise and whether or not any Relevant Finance Party has
conceded or compromised any claim that any such payment or other disposition will or should be avoided or repaid (in whole or in part), the provisions of this Clause 29 shall continue as if such release, discharge or other arrangement had not
been given or made. 
  

	29.5	Immediate Recourse 

 None
of the Relevant Finance Parties shall be obliged, before exercising or enforcing any of the rights conferred upon them in respect of the Guarantors by this Agreement or by Law, to seek to recover amounts due from any Borrower or to exercise or
enforce any other rights or Security any of them may have or hold in respect of any of the obligations of any Borrower under any of the Relevant Finance Documents save that no demand for any payment may be made on any Restricted Guarantor unless
such demand has first been made on the relevant Borrower. 
  

	29.6	Waiver of Defences 

Neither the obligations of the Guarantors contained in this Agreement nor the rights, powers and remedies conferred on the Relevant
Finance Parties in respect of the Guarantors by this Agreement or by Law shall be discharged, impaired or otherwise affected by: 

  
 167

	 	(a)	the winding-up, dissolution, administration or reorganisation of any Borrower or any other person or any change in the status, function, control or ownership of any
Borrower or any such person; 

  

	 	(b)	any of the obligations of any Borrower or any other person under any Relevant Finance Document or any Security held by any Relevant Finance Party therefor being or
becoming illegal, invalid, unenforceable or ineffective in any respect; 

  

	 	(c)	any time or other indulgence being granted to or agreed (i) to or with any Borrower or any other person in respect of its obligations or (ii) in respect of
any security granted under any Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(d)	unless otherwise agreed, any amendment to, or any variation, waiver or release of, any obligation of, or any Security granted by, any Borrower or any other person under
any Relevant Finance Document; 

  

	 	(e)	any total or partial failure to take, or perfect, any Security proposed to be taken in respect of the obligations of any Borrower or any other person under the Relevant
Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(f)	any total or partial failure to realise the value of, or any release, discharge, exchange or substitution of, any security held by any Relevant Finance Party in respect
of any Borrower’s obligations under any Relevant Finance Document; 

  

	 	(g)	any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of an Obligor or any other person;

  

	 	(h)	any amendment, novation, supplement, extension restatement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) or replacement of a Relevant Finance Document or any
other document or security including, without limitation, any change in the purpose of, any extension of or increase in any facility or the addition of any new facility under any Relevant Finance Document or other document or security; or

  

	 	(i)	any other act, event or omission which might operate to discharge, impair or otherwise affect any of the obligations of any of the Guarantors under this Agreement or
any of the rights, powers or remedies conferred upon the Relevant Finance Parties or any of them by this Agreement or by Law. 

  

	29.7	No Competition 

 Until all
amounts which may become payable by the Borrowers under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents have been paid in full, no Guarantor will exercise any rights: 

 

	 	(a)	to claim by way of contribution or indemnity in relation to any of the obligations of the Borrowers under any of the Relevant Finance Documents;

  

	 	(b)	to claim or prove as a creditor of any Borrower or any other person or its estate in competition with the Relevant Finance Parties or any of them;

  

	 	(c)	to take the benefit (in whole or in part and whether by way of subrogation or otherwise) of any rights of the Relevant Finance Parties under the Relevant Finance
Documents or of any other guarantee or security taken pursuant to, or in connection with, the Relevant Finance Documents by any Relevant Finance Party; 

  
 168

	 	(d)	to bring legal or other proceedings for an order requiring any Obligor to make any payment, or perform any obligation, in respect of which any Guarantor has given a
guarantee, undertaking or indemnity under Clause 29.1 (Guarantee); or 

  

	 	(e)	to exercise any right of set-off against any Obligor, 

 except to the extent that the Facility Agent so requires and in such manner and upon such terms as the Facility Agent may specify and each Guarantor shall hold any moneys, rights or security held or
received by it as a result of the exercise of any such rights on trust for the Facility Agent for application in or towards payment of any sums at any time owed by the Borrowers under any of the Relevant Finance Documents as if such moneys, rights
or security were held or received by the Facility Agent under this Agreement. 
  

	29.8	Appropriation 

 To the
extent any Relevant Finance Party receives any sum from any Guarantor in respect of the obligations of any of the other Obligors under any of the Relevant Finance Documents which is insufficient to discharge all sums which are then due and payable
in respect of such obligations of such other Obligors, such Relevant Finance Party shall not be obliged to apply any such sum in or towards payment of amounts owing by such other Obligor under any of the Relevant Finance Documents, and any such sum
may, in the relevant Relevant Finance Party’s discretion, be credited to a suspense or impersonal account and held in such account pending the application from time to time (as the relevant Relevant Finance Party may think fit) of such sums in
or towards the discharge of such liabilities owed to it by such other Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents as such Relevant Finance Party may select provided that such Relevant Finance Party shall promptly make such application upon
receiving sums sufficient to discharge all sums then due and payable to it by such other Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents. 
  

	29.9	Limitation of Liabilities of United States Guarantors 

 Each Restricted Guarantor and each of the Relevant Finance Parties (by its acceptance of the benefits of the guarantee under this Clause 29) hereby confirms its intention that this guarantee should
not constitute a fraudulent transfer or conveyance for the purposes of any bankruptcy, insolvency or similar law, the United States Uniform Fraudulent Conveyance Act or any similar Federal, state or foreign law. To effectuate the foregoing
intention, each Restricted Guarantor and each of the Relevant Finance Parties (by its acceptance of the benefits of the guarantee under this Clause 29) hereby irrevocably agrees that its obligations under this Clause 29 shall be limited to
the maximum amount as will, after giving effect to such maximum amount and all other (contingent or otherwise) liabilities of such Restricted Guarantor that are relevant under such laws, and after giving effect to any rights to contribution pursuant
to any agreement providing for an equitable contribution among such Restricted Guarantor and the other Guarantors, result in the obligations of such Restricted Guarantor in respect of such maximum amount not constituting a fraudulent transfer or
conveyance. 
  

	29.10 	Droit de Discussion and Droit de Division 

  

	 	(a)	Any right which at any time any Guarantor may have under the existing or future laws of Jersey whether by virtue of the droit de discussion or otherwise to require that
recourse be had to the assets of any other person before any claim is enforced against such Guarantor in respect of the obligations assumed by such Guarantor under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document is hereby waived.

  

	 	(b)	 Any right which at any time any Guarantor may have under the existing or future laws of Jersey whether by virtue of the droit de division or otherwise
to require that any 

  
 169

	 	
liability under any guarantee or indemnity given in or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document be divided or apportioned with any other person or reduced in any manner whatsoever is
hereby waived. 

  

	29.11 	Guarantee Limitations 

This guarantee does not apply to any liability to the extent that it would result in this guarantee constituting unlawful financial
assistance within the meaning of sections 678 or 679 of the Act or any equivalent and applicable provisions under the laws of the jurisdiction of incorporation of the relevant Guarantor and, with respect to any Acceding Guarantor, is subject to any
limitations set out in the Accession Notice applicable to such Acceding Guarantor. 
  

	30.	ROLE OF THE FACILITY AGENT, THE ARRANGERS, THE L/C BANKS AND OTHERS 

 

	30.1 	Appointment of the Facility Agent 

 Each of the other Relevant Finance Parties appoints the Facility Agent to act as its agent under and in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents and authorises the Facility Agent to exercise the
rights, powers, authorities and discretions specifically delegated to it under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents together with any other incidental rights, powers, authorities and discretions. 

 

	30.2	Duties of the Facility Agent 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Facility Agent shall promptly forward to a party to this Agreement the original or a copy of any document which is delivered to
the Facility Agent for that party by any other party. 

  

	 	(b)	Without prejudice to Clause 37.12 (Copy of Transfer Deed or Increase Confirmation to Company), paragraph (a) above shall not apply to any Transfer Deed
or any Increase Confirmation. 

  

	 	(c)	Except where a Relevant Finance Document specifically provides otherwise, the Facility Agent is not obliged to review or check the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of
any document it forwards to any party to this Agreement. 

  

	 	(d)	If the Facility Agent is aware of the non-payment of any principal, interest, commitment fee or other fee payable to a Relevant Finance Party (other than the Facility
Agent, the Arranger or the Security Trustee) under this Agreement it shall promptly notify the other Relevant Finance Parties. 

  

	 	(e)	The Facility Agent shall promptly inform each Lender of the contents of any notice or document received by it in its capacity as Facility Agent from the Parent or any
of the Obligors under the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  

	 	(f)	The Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Lenders of the occurrence of any Event of Default or any default by an Obligor in the due performance of or compliance with
its obligations under any Relevant Finance Document upon becoming aware of the same. 

  

	 	(g)	If so instructed by an Instructing Group, the Facility Agent shall refrain from exercising any power or discretion vested in it as agent under any Relevant Finance
Document. 

  

	 	(h)	The duties of the Facility Agent under the Relevant Finance Documents are, save to the extent otherwise expressly provided, solely mechanical and administrative in
nature. 

  
 170

	 	(i)	The Facility Agent shall provide to the Company within 5 Business Days of request (but no more frequently than once per calendar month), a list (which may be in
electronic form) setting out the names of the Lenders as at the date of that request, their respective Commitments, the address and fax number (and the department or officer, if any, for whose attention any communication is to be made) of each
Lender for any communication to be made or document to be delivered under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents, the electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by
electronic mail or other electronic means to and by each Lender to whom any communication under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents may be made by that means and the account details of each Lender for any payment to be distributed
by the Facility Agent to that Lender under the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  

	30.3	Role of the Bookrunners and the Arrangers  

 Except as specifically provided in the Relevant Finance Documents, none of the Bookrunners or the Arrangers shall have any obligations of any kind to any other party under or in connection with any
Relevant Finance Document. 
  

	30.4	No Fiduciary Duties 

  

	 	(a)	Nothing in the Relevant Finance Documents constitutes the Facility Agent, any of the Arrangers or any L/C Bank as a trustee or fiduciary of any other person.

  

	 	(b)	None of the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee, the Arrangers, any L/C Bank or any Ancillary Facility Lender shall be bound to account to any Lender for any sum or
the profit element of any sum received by it for its own account. 

  

	30.5	Business with the Group 

Any of the Facility Agent, the Arrangers, the Security Trustee, each L/C Bank and each Ancillary Facility Lender may accept deposits from,
lend money to and generally engage in any kind of banking or other business with any member of the Group. 
  

	30.6	Discretion of the Facility Agent and L/C Banks 

  

	 	(a)	The Facility Agent and each L/C Bank may rely on: 

  

	 	(i)	any representation, notice or document (including, without limitation, any notice given by a Lender pursuant to paragraph (d) of Clause 38 (Debt Purchase
Transactions) believed by it to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised; and 

  

	 	(ii)	any statement made by a director, authorised signatory or employee of any person regarding any matters which may reasonably be assumed to be within his knowledge or
within his power to verify. 

  

	 	(b)	The Facility Agent may assume, unless it has received notice to the contrary in its capacity as agent for the Lenders, that: 

 

	 	(i)	no Default has occurred (unless the Facility Agent has actual knowledge of a Default arising under Clause 27.1 (Non-Payment); 

 

	 	(ii)	any right, power, authority or discretion vested in this Agreement upon any party, the Lenders or an Instructing Group has not been exercised; 

  
 171

	 	(iii)	any notice or request made by the Obligors’ Agent is made on behalf of and with the consent and knowledge of the Parent and all the Obligors; and

  

	 	(iv)	no Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction: 

  

	 	(A)	has been entered into; 

  

	 	(B)	has been terminated; or 

  

	 	(C)	has ceased to be with a member of the Group. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent and each L/C Bank may engage, pay for and rely on the advice or services of any lawyers, accountants, surveyors or other experts.

  

	 	(d)	The Facility Agent and each L/C Bank may act in relation to the Relevant Finance Documents through its personnel and agents. 

 

	 	(e)	The Facility Agent may execute on behalf of any L/C Bank any Documentary Credit issued under this Agreement. 

 

	 	(f)	The Facility Agent may disclose to any other party to this Agreement any information it reasonably believes it has received as agent under this Agreement.

  

	 	(g)	Without prejudice to the generality of paragraph (f) above, the Facility Agent may disclose the identity of a Defaulting Lender to the other Relevant Finance
Parties and the Company and shall disclose the same upon the written request of the Company or the Instructing Group. 

  

	 	(h)	Notwithstanding any other provision of any Relevant Finance Document to the contrary, none of the Facility Agent, the Arranger or the bank is obliged to do or omit to
do anything if it would or might in its reasonable opinion constitute a breach of any law or regulation or a breach of a fiduciary duty or duty of confidentiality. 

 

	30.7	Instructing Group’s Instructions 

  

	 	(a)	Unless a contrary indication appears in a Relevant Finance Document, the Facility Agent shall (i) act in accordance with any instructions given to it by an
Instructing Group or Revolving Facility Instructing Group, as applicable (or, if so instructed by an Instructing Group or Revolving Facility Instructing Group, as applicable, refrain from acting or exercising any right, power, authority or
discretion vested in it as Facility Agent) and (ii) shall not be liable to any Relevant Finance Party for any act (or omission) if it acts (or refrains from taking any action) in accordance with such an instruction of an Instructing Group.

  

	 	(b)	Unless a contrary indication appears in a Relevant Finance Document, any instructions given by (i) an Instructing Group will be binding on all the Relevant Finance
Parties or (ii) a Revolving Facility Instructing Group will be binding on all the Lenders under the Revolving Facility. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent may refrain from acting in accordance with the instructions of an Instructing Group, a Revolving Facility Instructing Group, or, if appropriate, the
Lenders until it has received such security or collateral as it may require for any cost, loss or liability (together with any associated VAT) which it may incur in complying with such instructions. 

  
 172

	 	(d)	In the absence of instructions from an Instructing Group, a Revolving Facility Instructing Group, or, if appropriate, the Lenders, the Facility Agent may act (or
refrain from taking action) as it considers to be in the best interests of the Lenders. 

  

	 	(e)	The Facility Agent shall not be authorised to act on behalf of a Lender in any legal or arbitration proceedings relating to any Relevant Finance Document without first
obtaining the Lender’s consent to do so. This paragraph (e) shall not apply to any legal or arbitration proceeding relating to the perfection, presentation or protection of rights under the Security Documents or enforcement of the Security
or Security Documents. 

  

	30.8	No Responsibility  

 None
of the Facility Agent, the Arrangers or any L/C Bank shall be: 
  

	 	(a)	responsible for the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of any information (whether oral or written) supplied by any Relevant Finance Party or an Obligor or any
other person in or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document, including the Information Memorandum, the Agreed Business Plan and any Budget; 

  

	 	(b)	responsible for the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Relevant Finance Document or any other agreement, arrangement or document
entered into, made or executed in anticipation of or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document; or 

  

	 	(c)	responsible for any determination as to whether any information provided or to be provided to any Relevant Finance Party is non-public information the use of which may
be regulated or prohibited by applicable law or regulation relating to insider dealing or otherwise. 

  

	30.9	Exclusion of Liability 

  

	 	(a)	Without limiting paragraph (b) below (and without prejudice to the provisions of paragraph (e) of Clause 33.8 (Disruption to Payment Systems), the
Facility Agent, any L/C Bank or any Ancillary Facility Lender will not be liable to any Relevant Finance Party for any action taken by it under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document, unless directly caused by its negligence or wilful
misconduct. 

  

	 	(b)	No party to this Agreement (other than any Agent, L/C Bank or Ancillary Facility Lender (as applicable)) may take any proceedings, or assert or seek to assert any
claim, against any officer, employee or agent of any Agent, L/C Bank or Ancillary Facility Lender in respect of any claim it might have against such Agent, L/C Bank or Ancillary Facility Lender or in respect of any act or omission of any kind by
that officer, employee or agent in relation to any Relevant Finance Document and agrees that any such officer, employee or agent may enforce this provision. 

 

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent will not be liable for any failure to notify any person of any matter referred to in Clause 14.9 (Notification) or any delay (or any
related consequences) in crediting an account with an amount required under the Relevant Finance Documents to be paid by it if it has taken all reasonable steps to comply with Clause 14.9 (Notification) and taken all necessary steps as
soon as reasonably practicable to comply with the regulations or operating procedures of any recognised clearing or settlement system used by it for that purpose. 

  
 173

	30.10 	Lender’s Indemnity 

Each Lender shall in its relevant Proportion (as determined at all times for these purposes in accordance with paragraph (c) of the
definition of “Proportion”) indemnify the Facility Agent from time to time within three Business Days of demand by any Agent against any cost, loss or liability incurred by such Agent (otherwise than by reason of its negligence or wilful
misconduct or, in the case of any cost, loss or liability pursuant to Clause 33.8 (Disruption to Payment Systems) notwithstanding the Facility Agent’s negligence, gross negligence or any other category of liability whatsoever but not
including any claim based on the fraud of the Facility Agent) in acting as a Facility Agent under the Relevant Finance Documents (unless it has been reimbursed therefor by an Obligor pursuant to the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents).

  

	30.11 	Resignation 

  

	 	(a)	The Facility Agent may resign and appoint one of its Affiliates acting through an office in the United Kingdom as successor Facility Agent by giving notice to the
Lenders and the Company. 

  

	 	(b)	The Facility Agent may resign without having designated a successor as agent under paragraph (a) above (and shall do so if so required by an Instructing Group) by
giving 30 days notice to the Lenders and the Company, in which case an Instructing Group may appoint a successor Facility Agent (acting through an office in the United Kingdom), approved by the Company, acting reasonably. If an Instructing Group has
not appointed a successor Facility Agent in accordance with this paragraph (b) within 30 days after notice of resignation was given, the Facility Agent may appoint a successor Facility Agent (acting through an office in the United Kingdom),
approved by the Company, acting reasonably. 

  

	 	(c)	The retiring Facility Agent shall, at the Borrowers’ cost, make available to its successor such documents and records and provide such assistance as its successor
may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as Facility Agent under the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  

	 	(d)	The resignation notice of the Facility Agent shall only take effect upon the appointment of a successor Facility Agent. 

 

	 	(e)	Upon the appointment of a successor, the retiring Facility Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Relevant Finance Documents but shall
remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause 30. The Facility Agent’s successor and each of the other parties to this Agreement shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor
Facility Agent had been an original party as Facility Agent. 

  

	 	(f)	If the Facility Agent wishes to resign because it has concluded that it is no longer appropriate for it to remain as agent and the Facility Agent is entitled to appoint
a successor Facility Agent under paragraph (b) above, the Facility Agent may (if it concludes (acting reasonably) that it is necessary or advisable to do so in order to persuade the proposed successor Facility Agent to become a party to this
Agreement (as Facility Agent) agree with the proposed successor Facility Agent amendments to this Clause 30 and any other term of this Agreement dealing with the rights or obligations of the Facility Agent consistent with then current market
practice for the appointment and protection of corporate trustees together with any reasonable amendments to the agency fee payable under this Agreement which are consistent with the successor Facility Agent’s normal fee rates and those
amendments will bind the parties to this Agreement. 

  
 174

	30.12 	Confidentiality 

  

	 	(a)	The Facility Agent (in acting as agent for the Relevant Finance Parties) shall be regarded as acting through its agency division which shall be treated as a separate
entity from any other of its divisions or departments. 

  

	 	(b)	If information is received by another division or department of the Facility Agent it may be treated as confidential to that division or department and the Facility
Agent shall not be deemed to have notice of it. 

  

	 	(c)	Notwithstanding any other provision of any Relevant Finance Document to the contrary, the Relevant Finance Parties are not obliged to disclose to any other person
(i) any confidential information or (ii) any other information if the disclosure would, or might in its reasonable opinion, constitute a breach of any Law. 

 

	 	(d)	Notwithstanding any other provision of any Relevant Finance Document, the parties (and each employee, representative or other agent of the parties) may disclose to any
and all persons, without limitation of any kind, the tax treatment and any facts that may be relevant to the tax structure of the transaction, provided, however, that no party (and no employee, representative, or other agent thereof) shall disclose
any other information that is not relevant to understanding the tax treatment and tax structure of the transaction (including the identity of any party and any information that could lead another to determine the identity of any party), or any other
information to the extent that such disclosure could reasonably result in a violation of any applicable securities law. 

  

	30.13 	Facility Office 

 The
Facility Agent may treat each Lender as a Lender, entitled to payments under this Agreement and acting through its Facility Office unless it has received not less than 5 Business Days prior notice from that Lender to the contrary in accordance with
the terms of this Agreement. 
  

	30.14 	Lenders’ Mandatory Cost Details 

 To the extent applicable, each Lender shall supply the Facility Agent with any information required by the Facility Agent in order to calculate the Mandatory Cost in accordance with Schedule 7
(Mandatory Cost Formula). 
  

	30.15 	Credit Appraisal by the Lenders 

 Without affecting the responsibility of the Parent or any Obligor for information supplied by it or on its behalf in connection with any Relevant Finance Document, each Lender, L/C Bank and Ancillary
Facility Lender confirms to each of the Facility Agent, the Bookrunners, the Arrangers, each L/C Bank and each Ancillary Facility Lender that it has been, and will continue to be, solely responsible for making its own independent appraisal and
investigation of all risks arising under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document including but not limited to: 
  

	 	(a)	the financial condition, status and nature of each member of the Group; 

  

	 	(b)	the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of any Relevant Finance Document and any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made
or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document; 

  
 175

	 	(c)	whether that Lender has recourse, and the nature and extent of that recourse, against any party or any of its respective assets under or in connection with any Relevant
Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Relevant Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into, made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document;

  

	 	(d)	the adequacy, accuracy and/or completeness of the Information Memorandum, the Agreed Business Plan and each Budget and any other information provided by the Facility
Agent, the Bookrunners, the Arrangers or by any other person under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document, the transactions contemplated by the Relevant Finance Documents or any other agreement, arrangement or document entered into,
made or executed in anticipation of, under or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document; and 

  

	 	(e)	the right or title of any person in or to, or the value or sufficiency of any part of the Security, the priority of any of the Security or the existence of any
Encumbrances affecting the Security. 

  

	30.16 	Deduction from Amounts Payable by the Facility Agent 

 If any amount is due and payable by any party to the Facility Agent under any Relevant Finance Document the Facility Agent may, after giving notice to that party, deduct an amount not exceeding that
amount from any payment to that party which the Facility Agent would otherwise be obliged to make under the Relevant Finance Documents and apply the amount deducted in or towards satisfaction of the amount owed. For the purposes of the Relevant
Finance Documents that party shall be regarded as having received such payment without any such deduction. 
  

	30.17 	Obligors’ Agent 

  

	 	(a)	The Parent and each Obligor (other than the Company) irrevocably authorises the Company to act on its behalf as its agent in relation to the Relevant Finance Documents
and irrevocably authorises: 

  

	 	(i)	the Company on its behalf to supply all information concerning itself, its financial condition and otherwise to the relevant persons contemplated under this Agreement
and to give all notices and instructions, (including, in the case of a Borrower, Utilisation Requests) to execute on its behalf any Relevant Finance Document and to enter into any agreement in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents
notwithstanding that the same may affect the Parent or such Obligor, without further reference to or the consent of the Parent or such Obligor; and 

  

	 	(ii)	each Relevant Finance Party to give any notice, demand or other communication to be given to or served on the Parent or such Obligor pursuant to the Relevant Finance
Documents to the Company on its behalf, 

 and in each such case the Parent or such Obligor will be bound thereby
as though the Parent or such Obligor itself had supplied such information, given such notice and instructions, executed such Relevant Finance Document and agreement or received any such notice, demand or other communication and each Relevant Finance
Party may rely on any action purported to be taken by the Company on behalf of that Obligor. 

  
 176

	 	(b)	Every act, omission, agreement, undertaking, settlement, waiver, notice or other communication given or made by the Obligors’ Agent under any Relevant Finance
Document, or in connection with this Agreement (whether or not known to the Parent or any other Obligor, as the case may be, and whether occurring before or after such person became party to this Agreement), shall be binding for all purposes on the
Parent and all other Obligors as if the Parent or the other Obligors had expressly made, given or concurred with the same. In the event of any conflict between any notices or other communications of the Obligors’ Agent and the Parent or any
other Obligor, those of the Obligors’ Agent shall prevail. 

  

	30.18 	Co-operation with the Facility Agent 

  

	 	(a)	Each Lender and each Obligor will co-operate with each of the Facility Agent to complete any legal requirements imposed on the Facility Agent in connection with the
performance of its duties under this Agreement and shall supply any information requested by the Facility Agent in connection with the proper performance of those duties provided that neither the Parent nor any Obligor shall be under any obligation
to provide any information the supply of which would be contrary to any confidentiality obligation binding on any member of the Group or prejudice the retention of legal privilege in such information and provided further that neither the Parent nor
any Obligor shall (and the Company shall procure that no member of the Bank Group shall) be able to deny the Facility Agent any such information by reason of it having entered into a confidentiality undertaking which would prevent it from
disclosing, or be able to claim any legal privilege in respect of, any financial information relating to itself or the Group. 

  

	 	(b)	Any Lender may by notice to the Facility Agent appoint a person to receive on its behalf all notices, communications, information and documents to be made or despatched
to that Lender under the Relevant Finance Documents. Such notice shall contain the address, fax number and (where communication by electronic mail or other electronic means is permitted under Clause 41.5 (Electronic Communication))
electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means (and, in each case, the department or officer, if any, for whose attention communication is to be made) and be treated as a
notification of a substitute address, fax number, electronic mail address, department and officer by that Lender for the purposes of Clause 41.2 (Giving of Notice) and paragraph (a)(iii) of Clause 41.5 (Electronic
Communication) and the Facility Agent shall be entitled to treat such person as the person entitled to receive all such notices, communications, information and documents as though that person were that Lender. 

 

	30.19 	“Know your client” checks 

 Nothing in this Agreement shall oblige any of the Facility Agent, the Bookrunners or the Arrangers to carry out any “know your client” or other applicable anti-money laundering checks in
relation to the identity of any person on behalf of any Lender and each Lender confirms to each of the Facility Agent, the Bookrunners and the Arrangers that it is solely responsible for any such checks it is required to carry out and that it may
not rely on any statement in relation to such checks made by any other person. 
  

	31.	BORROWERS’ INDEMNITIES 

  

	31.1 	General Indemnities 

 Each
of the Borrowers undertake, on a joint and several basis, to indemnify: 

  
 177

	 	(a)	each of the Relevant Finance Parties against any out-of-pocket cost, claim, loss, expense (including legal fees) or liability, which any of them may sustain or incur as
a consequence of the occurrence of any Default; and 

  

	 	(b)	each Lender against any out-of-pocket loss it may suffer or incur as a result of (i) its funding or making arrangements to fund its portion of an Advance or
(ii) its issuing or making arrangements to issue a Documentary Credit or (iii) its funding or making arrangements to fund any Ancillary Facility made available by it, in each case requested by any Borrower under this Agreement but not made
by reason of the operation of any one or more of the provisions of this Agreement (save as a result of such Lender’s own gross negligence or wilful default). 

 31.2 Break Costs 
  

	 	(a)	Each Borrower shall, within 3 Business Days of demand by a Relevant Finance Party, pay to that Relevant Finance Party its Break Costs attributable to all or any part of
any Advance or Unpaid Sum being paid by that Borrower on a day other than the last day of an Interest Period or Term for that Advance or Unpaid Sum. 

 (b) Each Lender shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after a demand by the Facility Agent, provide a certificate confirming the amount of its Break Costs for any Interest Period or Term in which they
accrue. 
  

	32.	CURRENCY OF ACCOUNT 

  

	32.1	Currency 

 Sterling is the
currency of account and payment for each and every sum at any time due from any Obligor under this Agreement provided that: 
  

	 	(a)	each repayment of any Outstandings or Unpaid Sum (or part of it) shall be made in the currency in which those Outstandings or Unpaid Sum are denominated on their due
date; 

  

	 	(b)	interest shall be payable in the currency in which the sum in respect of which such interest is payable was denominated when that interest accrued;

  

	 	(c)	each payment in respect of costs and expenses shall be made in the currency in which the same were incurred; and 

 

	 	(d)	each payment pursuant to Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) or Clause 18.1 (Increased Costs) shall be made in the currency specified by the Relevant
Finance Party claiming under it, acting reasonably. 

  

	32.2	Currency Indemnity 

 If
any sum due from the Parent or any Obligor under this Agreement or any order or judgment given or made in relation to this Agreement has to be converted from the currency (the “first currency”) in which the same is payable under
this Agreement or under such order or judgment into another currency (the “second currency”) for the purpose of (a) making or filing a claim or proof against the Parent or such Obligor, (b) obtaining an order or judgment
in any court or other tribunal or (c) enforcing any order or judgment given or made in relation to this Agreement, each Borrower agrees to indemnify and hold harmless each of the persons to whom such sum is due from and against any loss
suffered or incurred as a result of any discrepancy between (x) the rate of exchange used for such purpose to convert the sum in question from the first currency into the second currency and (y) the rate or rates of exchange at which such
person may in the ordinary course of business purchase 

  
 178

 
the first currency with the second currency at the time of receipt of the sum paid to it in satisfaction, in whole or in part, of any such order, judgment, claim or proof. 

 

	33.	PAYMENTS 

  

	33.1	Payment to the Facility Agent 

 On each date on which this Agreement requires an amount to be paid by the Parent or any Obligor or any of the Lenders under this Agreement, the Parent or such Obligor or, as the case may be, such Lender
shall make the same available to the Facility Agent by payment in same day funds (or such other funds as may for the time being be customary for the settlement of transactions in the relevant currency) to such account or bank as the Facility Agent
(acting reasonably) may have specified for this purpose and any such payment which is made for the account of another person shall be made in time to enable the Facility Agent to make available such person’s portion of it to such other person
in accordance with Clause 33.2 (Distributions by the Facility Agent). 
  

	33.2	Distributions by the Facility Agent 

 Save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, each payment received by the Facility Agent for the account of another person shall be made available by the Facility Agent to such other person (in the case
of a Lender, for the account of its Facility Office) for value the same day by transfer to such account of such person with such bank in a Participating Member State or London (or for payments in Dollars or any Optional Currency, in the applicable
financial centre) as such person shall have previously notified to the Facility Agent by not less than 5 Business Days notice for this purpose. 
  

	33.3	Clear Payments 

 Save to
the extent contemplated in Clause 8 (Repayment of Revolving Facility Outstandings), any payment required to be made by the Parent or any Obligor under this Agreement shall be calculated without reference to any set-off or counterclaim
and shall be made free and clear of, and without any deduction for or on account of, any set-off or counterclaim. 
  

	33.4	Impaired Agent 

  

	 	(a)	If, at any time, the Facility Agent becomes an Impaired Agent, an Obligor or a Lender which is required to make a payment under the Relevant Finance Documents to the
Facility Agent in accordance with Clause 33.1 (Payment to the Facility Agent) may instead either pay that amount direct to the required recipient or pay that amount to an interest-bearing account (the “trust account”)
held with an Acceptable Bank within the meaning of paragraph (a) of the definition of “Acceptable Bank” and in relation to which no Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing, in the name of the Obligor or the Lender making the
payment and designated as a trust account for the benefit of the Relevant Finance Party beneficially entitled to that payment under the Relevant Finance Documents. In each case such payments must be made within 5 Business Days of the due date for
payment under the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  

	 	(b)	All interest accrued on the amount standing to the credit of the trust account shall be for the benefit of the beneficiaries of that trust account pro rata to
their respective entitlements. 

  

	 	(c)	 A party which has made a payment in accordance with this Clause 33.4 shall be discharged of the relevant payment obligation under the Relevant Finance
Documents 

  
 179

	 	
and shall not take any credit risk with respect to the amounts standing to the credit of the trust account. 

 

	 	(d)	Promptly upon the appointment of a successor Facility Agent in accordance with Clause 30.11 (Resignation), each Party which has made a payment to a trust account
in accordance with this Clause 33.4 shall give all requisite instructions to the bank with whom the trust account is held to transfer the amount (together with any accrued interest) to the successor Facility Agent for distribution in accordance with
this Agreement. 

  

	33.5	Partial Payments  

 If the
Facility Agent receives a payment that is insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by the Parent or any Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents, the Facility Agent shall, unless otherwise instructed by an Instructing
Group, apply that payment towards the obligations of that Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents in the following order: 
  

	 	(a)	first, in payment in or towards payment pro rata of any unpaid fees, costs and expenses incurred by the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee and each L/C Bank
under the Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(b)	secondly, in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest or commission due but unpaid under any Relevant Finance Document; 

 

	 	(c)	thirdly, in or towards payment pro rata of any principal due but unpaid under any Relevant Finance Document; and 

 

	 	(d)	fourthly, in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Relevant Finance Documents, 

and such application shall override any appropriation made by an Obligor. 

 

	33.6	Indemnity 

 Where a sum is
to be paid under the Relevant Finance Documents to the Facility Agent for the account of another person, the Facility Agent shall not be obliged to make the same available to that other person (or to enter into or perform any exchange contract in
connection therewith) until it has been able to establish to its satisfaction that it has actually received such sum, but if it does so and it proves to be the case that it had not actually received such sum, then the person to whom such sum (or the
proceeds of such exchange contract) was (or were) so made available shall on request refund the same to the Facility Agent together with an amount sufficient to indemnify and hold harmless the Facility Agent from and against any cost or loss it may
have suffered or incurred by reason of its having paid out such sum (or the proceeds of such exchange contract) prior to its having received such sum. This indemnity shall only apply to the Obligors with effect from the Original Execution Date.

  

	33.7	Notification of Payment 

Without prejudice to the liability of each party to this Agreement to pay each amount owing by it under this Agreement on the due date
therefor, whenever a payment is expected to be made by any of the Relevant Finance Parties, the Facility Agent shall give notice prior to the expected date for such payment, notify all such Relevant Finance Parties of the amount, currency and timing
of such payment. 

  
 180

	33.8	Disruption to Payment Systems 

 If either the Facility Agent determines (in its discretion) that a Disruption Event has occurred or the Facility Agent is notified by the Company that a Disruption Event has occurred: 

 

	 	(a)	the Facility Agent may, and shall if requested to do so by the Company, consult with the Company with a view to agreeing with the Company such changes to the operation
or administration of the Facilities as the Facility Agent may deem reasonably necessary in the circumstances; 

  

	 	(b)	the Facility Agent shall not be obliged to consult with the Company in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) above if, in its opinion, it is not
practicable to do so in the circumstances and, in any event, shall have no obligation to agree to such changes; 

  

	 	(c)	the Facility Agent may consult with the Relevant Finance Parties in relation to any changes mentioned in paragraph (a) above but shall not be obliged to do so if,
in its opinion, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances; 

  

	 	(d)	any such changes agreed upon by the Facility Agent and the Company shall (whether or not it is finally determined that a Disruption Event has occurred) be binding upon
the Relevant Finance Parties as an amendment to (or, as the case may be, waiver of) the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents notwithstanding the provisions of Clause 44 (Amendments); 

 

	 	(e)	the Facility Agent shall not be liable for any damages, costs or losses whatsoever (including, without limitation for negligence, gross negligence or any other category
of liability whatsoever but not including any claim based on the fraud of the Facility Agent) arising as a result of its taking, or failing to take, any actions pursuant to or in connection with this Clause 33.8; and 

 

	 	(f)	the Facility Agent shall notify the Relevant Finance Parties of all changes agreed pursuant to paragraph (d) above. 

 

	33.9	Business Days 

  

	 	(a)	Any payment which is due to be made on a day that is not a Business Day shall be made on the immediately succeeding Business Day in the same calendar month (if there is
one) or the immediately preceding Business Day (if there is not). 

  

	 	(b)	During any extension of the due date for payment of any principal or an Unpaid Sum under this Agreement, interest is payable on such amount at the rate payable on the
original due date. 

  

	34.	SET-OFF 

  

	34.1	Right to Set-off 

  

	 	(a)	A Relevant Finance Party may set off any matured obligation due from an Obligor under the Relevant Finance Documents (to the extent beneficially owned by that Relevant
Finance Party) against any matured obligation owed by that Relevant Finance Party to that Obligor, regardless of the place of payment, booking branch or currency of either obligation. If the obligations are in different currencies, the Relevant
Finance Party may convert either obligation at a market rate of exchange in its usual course of business for the purpose of the set-off. 

  
 181

	 	(b)	Any credit balances taken into account by an Ancillary Facility Lender when operating a net limit in respect of any overdraft under an Ancillary Facility shall on
enforcement of the Relevant Finance Documents be applied first in the reduction of the overdraft provided under that Ancillary Facility in accordance with its terms. 

 

	34.2	No Obligation 

 No Lender
shall be obliged to exercise any right given to it by Clause 34.1 (Right to Set-off). 
  

	35.	SHARING AMONG THE RELEVANT FINANCE PARTIES 

  

	35.1	Payments to Relevant Finance Parties 

 If a Relevant Finance Party (a “Recovering Relevant Finance Party”) receives or recovers any amount from the Parent or any Obligor other than in accordance with Clause 33
(Payments) and applies that amount to a payment due under the Relevant Finance Documents then: 
  

	 	(a)	the Recovering Relevant Finance Party shall, within 3 Business Days, notify details of the receipt or recovery to the Facility Agent; 

 

	 	(b)	the Facility Agent shall determine whether the receipt or recovery is in excess of the amount the Recovering Relevant Finance Party would have been paid had the receipt
or recovery been received or made by the Facility Agent and distributed in accordance with Clause 33.5 (Partial Payments), without taking account of any tax which would be imposed on the Facility Agent in relation to the receipt,
recovery or distribution; and 

  

	 	(c)	the Recovering Relevant Finance Party shall, within 3 Business Days of demand by the Facility Agent, pay to the Facility Agent an amount (the “Sharing
Payment”) equal to such receipt or recovery less any amount which the Facility Agent determines may be retained by the Recovering Relevant Finance Party as its share of any payment to be made, in accordance with Clause 33.5 (Partial
Payments). 

  

	35.2	Redistribution of Payments 

The Facility Agent shall treat the Sharing Payment as if it had been paid by the Parent or the relevant Obligor and shall distribute it
between the Relevant Finance Parties (other than the Recovering Relevant Finance Party) in accordance with Clause 33.5 (Partial Payments). 
  

	35.3	Recovering Relevant Finance Party’s Rights 

 On a distribution by the Facility Agent under Clause 35.2 (Redistribution of Payments), of a payment received by a Recovering Relevant Finance Party from an Obligor, as between the relevant
Obligor and the Recovering Relevant Finance Party, an amount of the sum recovered equal to the Sharing Payment will be treated as not having been paid by that Obligor. 
  

	35.4	Reversal of Redistribution 

If any part of the Sharing Payment received or recovered by a Recovering Relevant Finance Party becomes repayable and is repaid by that
Recovering Relevant Finance Party, then: 
  

	 	(a)	 each Relevant Finance Party which has received a share of the relevant Sharing Payment pursuant to Clause 35.2 (Redistribution of Payments)
shall, upon the request of the Facility Agent, pay to the Facility Agent for account of that Recovering Relevant Finance Party an amount equal to its share of the Sharing Payment (together with an amount as is necessary to reimburse that Recovering
Relevant Finance Party for its 

  
 182

	 	
share of any interest on the Sharing Payment which that Recovering Relevant Finance Party is required to pay); and 

 

	 	(b)	that Recovering Relevant Finance Party’s rights of subrogation in respect of any reimbursement shall be cancelled and the Parent or the relevant Obligor will be
liable to the reimbursing Relevant Finance Party for the amount so reimbursed. 

  

	35.5	Exceptions 

  

	 	(a)	This Clause 35 shall not apply to the extent that the Recovering Relevant Finance Party would not, after making any payment pursuant to this Clause, have a valid
and enforceable claim against the Parent or the relevant Obligor. 

  

	 	(b)	A Recovering Relevant Finance Party is not obliged to share with any other Relevant Finance Party under this Clause 35, any amount which the Recovering Relevant
Finance Party has received or recovered as a result of taking legal or arbitration proceedings, if: 

  

	 	(i)	it notified such other Relevant Finance Party of the legal or arbitration proceedings; and 

 

	 	(ii)	such other Relevant Finance Party had an opportunity to participate in those legal or arbitration proceedings but did not do so as soon as reasonably practicable having
received notice of it or did not take separate legal or arbitration proceedings. 

  

	35.6	Ancillary Facility Lenders 

  

	 	(a)	This Clause 35 shall not apply to any receipt or recovery by a Lender in its capacity as an Ancillary Facility Lender at any time prior to service of notice under
Clause 27.17 (Acceleration). 

  

	 	(b)	Following service of notice under Clause 27.17 (Acceleration), this Clause 35 shall apply to all receipts or recoveries by Ancillary Facility Lenders
except to the extent that the receipt or recovery represents a reduction from the Designated Gross Amount for an Ancillary Facility to its Designated Net Amount. 

 

	36.	CALCULATIONS AND ACCOUNTS 

  

	36.1	Day Count Convention 

Interest and commitment commission shall accrue from day to day and shall be calculated on the basis of a year of 365 days (in the case of
amounts denominated in Sterling) or 360 days (in the case of amounts denominated in any other currency) (as appropriate or, in any case where market practice differs, in accordance with market practice) and the actual number of days elapsed and any
Tax Deductions required to be made from any payment of interest shall be computed and paid accordingly. 
  

	36.2	Reductions 

 Any repayment
of any Advance denominated in an Optional Currency shall reduce the amount of such Advance by the amount of such Optional Currency repaid and shall reduce the Sterling Amount of such Advance proportionately. 

  
 183

	36.3	Reference Banks 

 Save as
otherwise provided in this Agreement, on any occasion a Reference Bank, Alternative Reference Bank or Lender fails to supply the Facility Agent with an interest rate quotation required of it under the foregoing provisions of this Agreement, the rate
for which such quotation was required shall be determined from those quotations which are supplied to the Facility Agent. 
  

	36.4	Maintain Accounts 

 Each
Lender shall maintain in accordance with its usual practice accounts evidencing the amounts from time to time lent by and owing to it under this Agreement. 
  

	36.5	Control Accounts 

 The
Facility Agent shall maintain on its books a control account or accounts in which shall be recorded: 
  

	 	(a)	the amount and the Sterling Amount of any Advance or Unpaid Sum and the face amount and the Sterling Amount of any Documentary Credit, and each Lender’s share in
it; 

  

	 	(b)	the Sterling Amount of the Ancillary Facility Commitment (if any) of each Lender; 

 

	 	(c)	the amount of all principal, interest and other sums due or to become due from each of the Obligors to any of the Lenders under the Relevant Finance Documents and each
Lender’s share in it; and 

  

	 	(d)	the amount of any sum received or recovered by the Facility Agent under this Agreement and each Lender’s share in it. 

 

	36.6	Prima Facie Evidence 

 In
any legal action or proceeding arising out of or in connection with this Agreement, the entries made in the accounts maintained pursuant to Clause 36.4 (Maintain Accounts) and Clause 36.5 (Control Accounts) shall, in the
absence of manifest error, be prima facie evidence of the existence and amounts of the specified obligations of the Obligors. 
  

	36.7	Certificate of Relevant Finance Party 

 A certificate of a Relevant Finance Party as to the amount for the time being required to indemnify it against any Tax Liability pursuant to Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) or any Increased Cost
pursuant to Clause 18.1 (Increased Costs) shall, in the absence of manifest error, be prima facie evidence of the existence and amounts of the specified obligations of the Borrowers. 

 

	36.8	Certificate of the Facility Agent 

 A certificate of the Facility Agent as to the amount at any time due from any Borrower under this Agreement (or the amount which, but for any of the obligations of any Borrower under this Agreement being
or becoming void, unenforceable or ineffective, at any time, would have been due from such Borrower under this Agreement) shall, in the absence of manifest error, be prima facie evidence for the purposes of Clause 29 (Guarantee and
Indemnity). 

  
 184

	36.9	Certificate of L/C Bank 

A certificate of an L/C Bank as to the amount paid out or at any time due in respect of a Documentary Credit shall, absent manifest error,
be prima facie evidence of the payment of such amounts or (as the case may be) of the amounts outstanding in any legal action or proceedings arising in connection therewith. 

 

	37.	ASSIGNMENTS AND TRANSFERS 

  

	37.1	The provisions of this Clause 37 shall be subject to the provisions of Clause 38 (Debt Purchase Transactions). 

 

	37.2	Successors and Assignees 

This Agreement shall be binding upon and enure to the benefit of each party to this Agreement and its or any subsequent successors,
permitted assignees and transferees. 
  

	37.3	Resignation of a Borrower 

  

	 	(a)	With the prior consent of an Instructing Group, the Company may request that a Borrower ceases to be a Borrower by delivering to the Facility Agent a Resignation
Letter. 

  

	 	(b)	The Facility Agent shall accept a Resignation Letter and notify the Company and the other Relevant Finance Parties of its acceptance if: 

 

	 	(i)	the Company has confirmed that no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Letter; 

 

	 	(ii)	the Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Relevant Finance Documents; and 

 

	 	(iii)	where the Borrower is also a Guarantor, its obligations in its capacity as Guarantor continue to be legal, valid, binding and enforceable and in full force and effect
(subject to the Reservations) and the amount guaranteed by it as a Guarantor is not decreased, subject to Clause 44.5 (Release of Guarantees and Security). 

 

	 	(c)	Upon notification by the Facility Agent to the Company of its acceptance of the resignation of a Borrower, that company shall cease to be a Borrower and shall have no
further rights or obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents as a Borrower. 

  

	 	(d)	The Facility Agent may, at the cost and expense of the Company, require a legal opinion from counsel confirmed the matters set out in paragraph (b)(iii) above and the
Facility Agent shall be under no obligation to accept a Resignation Letter until it has obtained such opinion in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to it. 

 

	37.4	Assignment or Transfers by Obligors 

 None of the rights, benefits and obligations of the Parent or an Obligor under this Agreement shall be capable of being assigned or transferred and the Parent and each Obligor undertakes not to seek to
assign or transfer any of its rights, benefits and obligations under this Agreement. 

  
 185

	37.5	Assignments or Transfers by Lenders 

  

	 	(a)	Any Lender may, at any time, assign all or any of its rights and benefits under the Relevant Finance Documents in accordance with Clause 37.6 (Assignments)
or transfer all or any of its rights, benefits and obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents to another bank or financial institution or to a trust, fund or other entity which is regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making,
purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets (a “New Lender”) in accordance with Clause 37.7 (Transfer Deed) provided that: 

 

	 	(i)	the prior consent of the Company is received in respect of any assignment or transfer, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld, provided that:

  

	 	(A)	such consent shall be deemed to have been given if not declined in writing within 10 Business Days of a written request by any Lender to the Company;

  

	 	(B)	no consent shall be required in the case of any assignment or transfer by a Lender to its Affiliate (or in the case of any Lender which constitutes a fund advised
and/or managed by a common entity or an Affiliate thereof, to any other fund managed by such common entity or Affiliate) which is a Qualifying UK Lender; and 

 

	 	(C)	no consent shall be required in the case of any assignment or transfer to any New Lender at any time after the occurrence of a Major Event of Default which is
continuing; and 

  

	 	(ii)	the New Lender makes one of the representations set out in paragraph 8 of the Transfer Deed and provides the Company with the information required under paragraph 9 of
the Transfer Deed. 

  

	 	(b)	No Lender shall be entitled to: 

  

	 	(i)	effect any assignment or transfer: 

  

	 	(A)	in respect of any portion of its Commitment and/or Outstandings under any individual Facility in an amount of less than £1,000,000, $1,000,000 or €1,000,000
(in the case of participations in Advances denominated in Sterling, Dollars or euro respectively) (or its equivalent as at the date of such assignment or transfer); 

 

	 	(B)	which would result in it or the proposed assignee or transferee holding an aggregate participation of more than zero but less than £5,000,000 (or its equivalent
as at the date of such assignment or transfer) in the Facilities, save that an assignment or transfer may be made to or by a trust, fund or other non-bank entity which customarily participates in the institutional market which would result in such
entity holding an aggregate participation of at least £1,000,000, $1,000,000 or €1,000,000 (in the case of participations in Advances denominated in Sterling, Dollars or euro respectively) in the Facilities; or 

 

	 	(C)	in relation to its participation in the Revolving Facility other than to the extent such transfers and assignments are on a pro rata basis as between the relevant
Lender’s Commitment under and participation in Outstandings under the Revolving Facility; 

  
 186

	 	(ii)	in relation to any sub-participation of its rights and obligations under the Facilities, relinquish some or all of its voting rights in respect of the Facilities to any
person in respect of any such sub-participation other than voting rights in respect of the matters referred to in paragraphs (b), (c), (d) or (e) of Clause 44.2 (Consents); or 

 

	 	(iii)	effect any assignment or transfer of any Facility to a person who is not a Qualifying UK Lender. 

 

	 	(c)	For the purposes of satisfying the minimum hold requirement set out in paragraph (b)(i) above, any participations held by funds advised and/or managed by a common
entity or an Affiliate thereof may be aggregated. 

  

	 	(d)	Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the consent of each L/C Bank shall be required (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) for any
assignment or transfer of any Lender’s rights and/or obligations under the Revolving Facility provided that in relation to any assignment or transfer required by the Company under Clause 10.4 (Right of Repayment and Cancellation in
Relation to a Single Lender) or Clause 44.9 (Replacement of Lenders), an L/C Bank may not withhold such consent unless, acting reasonably, the reason for so doing relates to the creditworthiness of the proposed New Lender.

  

	 	(e)	Notwithstanding any other provision of this Clause 37.5, no assignment or transfer shall be permitted to settle or otherwise become effective within the period of
five Business Days prior to (i) the end of any Interest Period or (ii) any Repayment Date. 

  

	 	(f)	Each New Lender, by executing the relevant Transfer Deed, confirms, for the avoidance of doubt, that the Facility Agent has authority to execute on its behalf any
amendment or waiver that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the transfer or assignment becomes effective in accordance with this Agreement and that
it is bound by that decision to the same extent as the transferring Lender would have been had it remained a Lender. 

  

	37.6	Assignments 

  

	 	(a)	If any Lender wishes to assign all or any of its rights and benefits under the Relevant Finance Documents, unless and until the relevant assignee has agreed with the
other Relevant Finance Parties that it shall be under the same obligations towards each of them as it would have been under if it had been an original party to the Relevant Finance Documents as a Lender, such assignment shall not become effective
and the other Relevant Finance Parties shall not be obliged to recognise such assignee as having the rights against each of them which it would have had if it had been such a party to this Agreement. 

 

	 	(b)	Without limiting any right or discretion of the Facility Agent under the Relevant Finance Documents, the Facility Agent may in its discretion stop processing
assignments or transfers under this Clause 37 when a notice of prepayment has been received by it under this Agreement, for a period of five Business Days prior to the date the prepayment is required or expected to be made. 

 

	37.7	Transfer Deed 

  

	 	(a)	 If any Lender wishes to transfer all or any of its rights, benefits and/or obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents, such transfer may be
effected by novation 

  
 187

	 	
through the delivery to the Facility Agent of a duly completed and duly executed Transfer Deed. 

  

	 	(b)	The Facility Agent shall only be obliged to execute a Transfer Deed delivered to it pursuant to paragraph (a) above, upon its satisfaction with the results of all
“know your client” or other applicable anti-money laundering checks relating to the identity of any person that it is required to carry out in relation to such New Lender. 

 

	 	(c)	Upon its execution of the Transfer Deed pursuant to paragraph (b) above on the later of the Transfer Date specified in such Transfer Deed and the fifth Business
Day after (or such earlier Business Day endorsed by the Facility Agent on such Transfer Deed falling on or after) the date of execution of such Transfer Deed by the Facility Agent: 

 

	 	(i)	to the extent that in such Transfer Deed the Lender party to it seeks to transfer its rights, benefits and obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents, the
Ultimate Parent, the Parent, each of the Obligors and such Lender shall be released from further obligations towards one another under the Relevant Finance Documents to that extent and their respective rights against one another shall be cancelled
to that extent (such rights and obligations being referred to in this Clause 37.7 as “discharged rights and obligations”); 

  

	 	(ii)	the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, each of the Obligors and the New Lender party to it shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one
another which differ from the discharged rights and obligations only insofar as the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, such Obligor and such New Lender have assumed and/or acquired the same in place of the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, such Obligor and
such Lender; 

  

	 	(iii)	the other Relevant Finance Parties and the New Lender shall acquire the same rights and benefits and assume the same obligations between themselves as they would have
acquired and assumed had such New Lender been an original party to the Relevant Finance Documents as a Lender with the rights, benefits and obligations acquired or assumed by it as a result of such transfer and to that extent the Facility Agent, the
Arranger, the Security Trustee, each L/C Bank and any relevant Ancillary Facility Lender and the Lender which has transferred its rights, benefits and obligations shall each be released from further obligations to each other under the Relevant
Finance Documents; and 

  

	 	(iv)	all payments due hereunder from the Parent or any Obligor shall be due and payable to such New Lender and not to the transferring Lender; and 

 

	 	(d)	such New Lender shall become a party to this Agreement as a Lender. 

  

	37.8	Limitation of Responsibility of Transferor 

  

	 	(a)	Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, a Lender which assigns or transfers its rights and/or obligations under any Relevant Finance Document (a
“Transferor”) makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility to a New Lender for: 

  

	 	(i)	the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or enforceability of the Relevant Finance Documents, the Security or any other documents; 

 

	 	(ii)	the financial condition of any Obligor; 

  
 188

	 	(iii)	the performance and observance by any Obligor or any other member of the Group of its obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents or any other document; or

  

	 	(iv)	the accuracy of any statements (whether written or oral) made in or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document or any other document, 

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded. 

 

	 	(b)	Each New Lender confirms to the Transferor and the other Relevant Finance Parties that it: 

 

	 	(i)	has made (and shall continue to make) its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities
in connection with its participation in this Agreement and has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by the Transferor or any other Relevant Finance Party in connection with any Relevant Finance Document or the Security; and

  

	 	(ii)	will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and its related entities whilst any amount is or may be outstanding under
the Relevant Finance Documents or any Commitment is in force. 

  

	 	(c)	Nothing in any Relevant Finance Document obliges a Transferor to: 

  

	 	(i)	accept a re-transfer or re-assignment from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this Clause 37; or

  

	 	(ii)	support any losses directly or indirectly incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non-performance by any Obligor of its obligations under the Relevant Finance
Documents or otherwise. 

  

	37.9  	Transfer Fee 

 On the date
upon which a transfer takes effect pursuant to Clause 37.7 (Transfer Deed) the New Lender in respect of such transfer shall pay to the Facility Agent for its own account a transfer fee of £2,000. 

 

	37.10  	Disclosure of Information 

  

	 	(a)	Each of the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee, the Bookrunners, the Arrangers, the Lenders, each L/C Bank and any Ancillary Facility Lender agrees to maintain the
confidentiality of all information received from the Ultimate Parent or any member of the Group relating to the Ultimate Parent or any member of the Group or its business other than any such information that: 

 

	 	(i)	is or becomes public knowledge other than as a direct result of any breach of this Clause 37.10; 

 

	 	(ii)	is available to the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee, the Bookrunners, the Arrangers, the Lenders, each L/C Bank or such Ancillary Facility Lender on a
non-confidential basis prior to receipt thereof from the relevant member of the Group; or 

  

	 	(iii)	 is lawfully obtained by any of the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee, the Bookrunners, the Arrangers, the Lenders, each L/C Bank and any Ancillary

  
 189

	 	
Facility Lender after that date of receipt other than from a source which is connected with the Group and which, as far as the relevant recipient thereof is aware, has not been obtained in
violation of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality. 

  

	 	(b)	Notwithstanding paragraph (a) above any Lender may disclose to any of its Affiliates, to any actual or potential assignee or New Lender, to any person who may
otherwise enter into contractual relations with such Lender in relation to this Agreement or any person to whom, and to the extent that, information is required to be disclosed by any applicable Law, such information about the Ultimate Parent, the
Parent, the Obligors or the Group as a whole as such Lender shall consider appropriate (including any Relevant Finance Document) provided that any such Affiliate, actual or potential assignee or New Lender or other person who may otherwise enter
into contractual relations in relation to this Agreement shall first have entered into a confidentiality undertaking on substantially the same terms as this Clause 37.10. 

 

	37.11  No 	Increased Obligations 

If: 
  

	 	(a)	a Lender assigns or transfers any of its rights or obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents or changes its Facility Office; and 

 

	 	(b)	as a result of circumstances existing at the date of the assignment, transfer or change of Facility Office, the Parent or an Obligor would be obliged to make a payment
to the assignee, New Lender or the Lender acting through its new Facility Office under Clause 17.1 (Tax Gross-Up), Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity) or Clause 18 (Increased Costs), 

then the assignee, New Lender or the Lender acting through its new Facility Office shall only be entitled to receive payment under those
Clauses to the same extent as the assignor, transferor or the Lender acting through its previous Facility Office would have been if the assignment, transfer or change had not occurred. 

 

	37.12  Copy 	of Transfer Deed or Increase Confirmation to Company 

 The Facility Agent shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has executed a Transfer Deed or an Increase Confirmation, send to the Company a copy of that Transfer Deed or Increase Confirmation.

  

	37.13  Security 	Over Lenders’ Rights 

In addition to the other rights provided to Lenders under this Clause 37 each Lender may without consulting with or obtaining consent from
any Obligor, at any time charge, assign or otherwise create Security in or over (whether by way of collateral or otherwise) all or any of its rights under any Relevant Finance Document to secure obligations of that Lender including, without
limitation: 
  

	 	(a)	any charge, assignment or other Security to secure obligations to a government authority, department or agency including HM Treasury as well as a federal reserve or
central bank; and 

  

	 	(b)	in the case of any Lender which is a fund, any charge, assignment or other Security granted to any holders (or trustee or representatives of holders) of obligations
owed, or securities issued, by that Lender as security for those obligations or securities, 

 except that no such
charge, assignment or Security shall: 

  
 190

	 	(i)	release a Lender from any of its obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents or substitute the beneficiary of the relevant charge, assignment or other Security for
the Lender as a party to any of the Relevant Finance Documents; or 

  

	 	(ii)	require any payments to be made by an Obligor or grant to any person any more extensive rights than those required to be made or granted to the relevant Lender under
the Relevant Finance Documents. 

  

	37.14  Pro 	Rata Interest Settlement 

If the Facility Agent has notified the Lenders that it is able to distribute interest payments on a “pro rata basis” to
Transferors and New Lenders then (in respect of any transfer pursuant to Clause 37.7 (Transfer Deed) or any assignment pursuant to Clause 37.6 (Assignments) the date of transfer or assignment of which, in each case, is after
the date of such notification and is not on the last day of an Interest Period): 
  

	 	(a)	any interest or fees in respect of the relevant participation which are expressed to accrue by reference to the lapse of time shall continue to accrue in favour of the
Transferor up to but excluding the date of transfer (“Accrued Amounts”) and shall become due and payable to the Transferor (without further interest accruing on them) on the last day of the current Interest Period (or, if the
Interest Period is longer than six months, on the next of the dates which falls at six monthly intervals after the first day of that Interest Period); and 

  

	 	(b)	the rights assigned or transferred by the Transferor will not include the right to the Accrued Amounts so that, for the avoidance of doubt: 

 

	 	(i)	when the Accrued Amounts become payable, those Accrued Amounts will be payable for the account of the Transferor; and 

 

	 	(ii)	the amount payable to the New Lender on that date will be the amount which would, but for the application of this Clause 37.14, have been payable to it on that
date, but after deduction of the Accrued Amounts. 

  

	37.15  Notification	

 The Facility Agent shall,
within 10 Business Days of receiving a notice relating to an assignment pursuant to Clause 37.6 (Assignments) or a notice from a Lender or the giving by the Facility Agent of its consent, in each case, relating to a change in such
Lender’s Facility Office, notify the Borrowers of any such assignment, transfer or change in Facility Office, as the case may be. 
  

	38.	DEBT PURCHASE TRANSACTIONS 

  

	 	(a)	Notwithstanding any other term of this Agreement or the other Relevant Finance Documents, any Obligor may purchase by way of a Debt Purchase Transaction, a
participation in any Advance and any related Commitment where: 

  

	 	(i)	such purchase is made for a consideration of less than par; and 

  

	 	(ii)	such purchase is made at a time when no Event of Default is continuing. 

 For the avoidance of doubt, no member of the Bank Group that is not an Obligor may purchase by way of a Debt Purchase transaction, or otherwise, any participation in any Advance or any related Commitment.

  
 191

	 	(b)	Notwithstanding any other term of this Agreement or the other Relevant Finance Documents, in relation to any Debt Purchase Transaction entered into by any Obligor
pursuant to this Clause 38: 

  

	 	(i)	on completion of the relevant Debt Purchase Transaction, the portions of the Advances to which it relates may (at the option of the Company taking account of the tax
impact on the Group) be extinguished and, if so extinguished, any related A Facility Repayment Instalments, A1 Facility Repayment Instalments or A2 Facility Repayment Instalments (as applicable) will be reduced pro-rata accordingly;

  

	 	(ii)	such Debt Purchase Transaction and the related extinguishment referred to in paragraph (i) above shall not constitute a prepayment of the Facilities;

  

	 	(iii)	the relevant Obligor shall be deemed to be an entity which fulfils the requirements of Clause 37.5 (Assignments or Transfers by Lenders) to be a New Lender
(as defined in such Clause); 

  

	 	(iv)	the relevant Obligor shall only be permitted to transfer an Advance to another Obligor; 

 

	 	(v)	no member of the Bank Group shall be deemed to be in breach of any provision of Clause 24 (Positive Undertakings) or Clause 25 (Negative
Undertakings) solely by reason of such Debt Purchase Transaction; 

  

	 	(vi)	Clause 35 (Sharing Among the Relevant Finance Parties) shall not be applicable to the consideration paid under such Debt Purchase Transaction;

  

	 	(vii)	any extinguishment of any part of the Outstandings shall not affect any amendment or waiver which prior to such extinguishment had been approved by or on behalf of the
requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement; 

  

	 	(viii)	any Financial Indebtedness subject to any Debt Purchase Transaction shall not be taken into account for purposes of the definitions of “Consolidated Total
Debt” and “Consolidated Senior Debt”; 

  

	 	(ix)	no profits or losses resulting from Debt Purchase Transactions shall be taken into account for the calculation of the Consolidated Operating Cashflow;

  

	 	(x)	any Obligor holding any Outstandings purchased pursuant to a Debt Purchase Transaction shall not be able to exercise any enforcement rights in relation thereto under
any of the Relevant Finance Documents; 

  

	 	(xi)	any Outstandings purchased pursuant to a Debt Purchase Transaction shall be subject to security in favour of the Lenders; and 

 

	 	(xii)	any Obligor holding any Outstandings purchased pursuant to a Debt Purchase Transaction shall not receive any proceeds of (A) any mandatory or voluntary prepayment
or (B) any enforcement under any Relevant Finance Document until all other Lenders under the applicable Facility have been repaid in full. 

  

	 	(c)	For so long as an Obligor (i) beneficially owns a Commitment or (ii) has entered into a sub-participation agreement relating to a Commitment or other
agreement or arrangement having a substantially similar economic effect and such agreement or arrangement has not been terminated: 

  
 192

	 	(i)	in determining whether the requisite level of consent has been obtained to approve any request for a consent, waiver, amendment or other vote under the Relevant Finance
Documents such Commitment shall be deemed to be zero; and 

  

	 	(ii)	for the purposes of Clause 44.2 (Consents), such Obligor or the person with whom it has entered into such sub-participation, other agreement or arrangement
shall be deemed not to be a Lender. 

  

	 	(d)	Each Lender shall, unless such Debt Purchase Transaction is an assignment or transfer, promptly notify the Facility Agent in writing if it knowingly enters into a Debt
Purchase Transaction with an Obligor (a “Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction”), such notification to be substantially in the form set out in Schedule 14 (Form of Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction Notice).

  

	 	(e)	Each Obligor that is a Lender agrees that: 

  

	 	(i)	in relation to any meeting or conference call to which all the Lenders are invited to attend or participate, it shall not attend or participate in the same if so
requested by the Facility Agent or, unless the Facility Agent otherwise agrees, be entitled to receive the agenda or any minutes of the same; and 

  

	 	(ii)	in its capacity as Lender, unless the Facility Agent otherwise agrees, it shall not be entitled to receive any report or other document prepared at the behest of, or on
the instructions of, the Facility Agent or one or more of the Lenders. 

  

	 	(f)	In the event that a member of the Group that is not a member of the Bank Group enters into a Debt Purchase Transaction, paragraphs (b)(i), (b)(ii), (b)(iii), b(v),
b(vi), (b)(vii), (b)(viii), (b)(ix), (b)(x), (b)(xii), (c), (d) and (e) shall apply as if such member of the Group were an Obligor. 

  

	39.	COSTS AND EXPENSES 

  

	39.1  	Transaction Costs 

 Each
Borrower shall, promptly on demand from the Facility Agent (unless the relevant cost or expense is being queried by a Borrower in good faith), reimburse the Facility Agent, the Security Trustee and each of the Arrangers for all reasonable
out-of-pocket costs and expenses (including reasonable legal fees and disbursements of legal counsel, any value added tax thereon and all travel and other reasonable out-of-pocket expenses) incurred by them in connection with the negotiation,
preparation, execution, perfection, printing and distribution of the Relevant Finance Documents and the completion of the transactions therein contemplated, subject in each case to any limits or caps agreed between the Arrangers and the Company from
time to time or otherwise set out in any Fee Letter or the B Facility Syndication Letter. 
  

	39.2  	Preservation and Enforcement Costs 

 Each Borrower shall, promptly on demand of the Facility Agent, reimburse each Relevant Finance Party for all third party costs and expenses (including legal fees and any value added tax thereon) incurred
in or in connection with the preservation and/or enforcement of any of the rights of such Relevant Finance Party under the Relevant Finance Documents provided that any such costs and expenses incurred in connection with the preservation of such
rights are reasonable. 

  
 193

	39.3  	Stamp Taxes 

 Each
Borrower shall pay all stamp, registration, documentary and other taxes (including any penalties, additions, fines, surcharges or interest relating thereto) to which any of the Relevant Finance Documents or any judgment given in connection therewith
is or at any time may be subject and shall with effect from the Original Execution Date and from time to time thereafter within 10 Business Days of demand from the Facility Agent, indemnify the Relevant Finance Parties against any liabilities,
costs, claims and expenses resulting from any failure to pay or any delay in paying those taxes. The Facility Agent shall be entitled (but not obliged) to pay those taxes (whether or not they are its primary responsibility) and to the extent that it
does so claim under this Clause 39.3. 
  

	39.4  	Amendments, Consents and Waivers 

 If an Obligor requests any amendment, consent or waiver in accordance with Clause 44 (Amendments), the relevant Obligor shall, promptly on demand reimburse the Facility Agent and the Security
Trustee, for all third party costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by the Facility Agent and the Security Agent (and in the case of the Security Agent, by any receiver or delegate) in responding to, evaluating, negotiating or
complying with that request or requirement. 
  

	39.5  	Lenders’ Indemnity 

If any Obligor fails to perform any of its obligations under this Clause 39, each Lender shall indemnify and hold harmless each of
the Facility Agent, the Arrangers and/or the Security Trustee from and against its Proportion (as determined at all times for these purposes in accordance with paragraph (c) of the definition of “Proportion”) of any loss incurred by
any of them as a result of such failure and the relevant Obligor shall forthwith reimburse each Lender for any payment made by it pursuant to this Clause 39.5. 
  

	39.6  	Value Added Tax 

  

	 	(a)	All amounts expressed to be payable under any Relevant Finance Document by any Obligor to a Relevant Finance Party shall be exclusive of any VAT. If VAT is chargeable
on any supply made by a Relevant Finance Party to any Obligor under any Relevant Finance Document (whether that supply is taxable pursuant to the exercise of an option or otherwise), the relevant Relevant Finance Party shall provide a VAT invoice to
the Obligor and that Obligor shall pay to that Relevant Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying that consideration) the VAT as further consideration. 

 

	 	(b)	No payment or other consideration to be made or furnished to any Obligor pursuant to or in connection with any Relevant Finance Document may be increased or added to by
reference to (or as a result of any increase in the rate of) any VAT which shall be or may become chargeable in respect of any taxable supply. 

  

	 	(c)	Where a Relevant Finance Document requires any party to reimburse a Relevant Finance Party for any costs or expenses, that party shall also pay any amount of those
costs or expenses incurred referable to VAT chargeable thereon. 

  

	 	(d)	 If VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Relevant Finance Party (the “Supplier”) to any other Relevant Finance Party
(the “Recipient”) under a Relevant Finance Document, and any party other than the Recipient (the “Subject Party”) is required by the terms of any Relevant Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration
for such supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse the Recipient in respect of that consideration), such party shall also pay 

  
 194

	 	
to the Supplier (in addition to and at the same time as paying such amount) an amount equal to the amount of such VAT. The Recipient will promptly pay to the Subject Party an amount equal to any
credit or repayment obtained by the Recipient from the relevant tax authority which the Recipient reasonably determines is in respect of such VAT. 

  

	40.	REMEDIES AND WAIVERS 

 No
failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, on the part of the Relevant Finance Parties or any of them, any right or remedy under this Agreement shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right or remedy
prevent any further or other exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right or remedy. The rights and remedies provided in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by Law. 

 

	41.	NOTICES AND DELIVERY OF INFORMATION 

  

	41.1  	Writing 

 Each
communication to be made under this Agreement shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated, shall be made by fax, telex or letter. 
  

	41.2  	Giving of Notice 

 Any
communication or document to be made or delivered by one person to another pursuant to this Agreement shall in the case of any person other than a Lender (unless that other person has by 10 Business Days written notice to the Facility Agent
specified another address) be made or delivered to that other person at the address identified with its signature below or, in the case of a Lender, at the address from time to time designated by it to the Facility Agent for the purpose of this
Agreement (or, in the case of a New Lender at the end of the Transfer Deed to which it is a party as New Lender) and shall be deemed to have been made or delivered when despatched (in the case of any communication made by fax) or (in the case of any
communication made by letter) when left at the address or (as the case may be) 5 Business Days after being deposited in the post postage prepaid in an envelope addressed to it at that address provided that any communication or document to be made or
delivered to the Facility Agent shall be effective only when received by the Facility Agent and then only if the same is expressly marked for the attention of the department or officer identified with the Facility Agent’s signature below (or
such other department or officer as the relevant Agent shall from time to time specify by not less than 10 Business Days prior written notice to the Company for this purpose). 

 

	41.3  Use of 	Websites/E-mail 

  

	 	(a)	An Obligor may (and upon request by the Facility Agent, shall) satisfy its obligations under this Agreement to deliver any information in relation to those Lenders (the
“Website Lenders”) who have not objected to the delivery of information electronically by posting this information onto an electronic website designated by the Company and the Facility Agent (the “Designated
Website”) or by e-mailing such information to the Facility Agent, if: 

  

	 	(i)	the Facility Agent expressly agree that they will accept communication and delivery of any documents required to be delivered pursuant to this Agreement by this method;

  
 195

	 	(ii)	in the case of posting to the Designated Website, the Company and the Facility Agent are aware of the address of, and any relevant password specifications for, the
Designated Website; and 

  

	 	(iii)	the information is in a format previously agreed between the Company and the Facility Agent. 

 

	 	(b)	If any Lender (a “Paper Form Lender”) objects to the delivery of information electronically then the Facility Agent shall notify the Company
accordingly and the Company shall supply the information to the Facility Agent (in sufficient copies for each Paper Form Lender) in paper form. 

  

	 	(c)	The Facility Agent shall supply each Website Lender with the address of, and any relevant password specifications for, the Designated Website following designation of
that website by the Company and the Facility Agent. 

  

	 	(d)	Any Website Lender may request, through the Facility Agent, one paper copy of any information required to be provided under this Agreement which is posted onto the
Designated Website. The Company shall comply with any such request within 10 Business Days. 

  

	 	(e)	Subject to the other provisions of this Clause 41.3, any Obligor may discharge its obligation to supply more than one copy of a document under this Agreement by
posting one copy of such document to the Designated Website or e-mailing one copy of such document to the Facility Agent. 

  

	 	(f)	For the purposes of paragraph (a) above, the Facility Agent hereby expressly agree that: 

 

	 	(i)	they will accept delivery of documents required to be delivered under Clause 22 (Financial Information) by the posting of such documents to the Designated
Website or by email delivery to the Facility Agent; and 

  

	 	(ii)	they have agreed to the format of the information required to be delivered under Clause 22 (Financial Information). 

 

	41.4  	Public Information 

  

	 	(a)	The Company hereby acknowledges that certain of the Lenders may be “public-side” Lenders (i.e., Lenders that do not wish to receive material non-public
information with respect to the Company, the Group and/or its business) (each, a “Public Lender”). 

  

	 	(b)	The Company hereby agrees that if and for so long as any member of the Group is the issuer of any outstanding debt or equity securities that are registered or issued
pursuant to a private offering or is actively contemplating issuing any such securities it will use commercially reasonable efforts to identify that portion of any materials and/or information provided by or on behalf of the Company hereunder
(collectively, “Company Materials”) that may be distributed to the Public Lenders and that: 

  

	 	(i)	all such Company Materials shall be clearly and conspicuously marked “PUBLIC” which, at a minimum, shall mean that the word “PUBLIC” shall appear
prominently on the first page thereof; 

  

	 	(ii)	 by marking Company Materials “PUBLIC”, the Company shall be deemed to have authorized the Facility Agent and the Lenders to treat such
Company Materials as not containing any material non-public information (although it may be sensitive and proprietary) with respect to the Company, the Group 

  
 196

	 	
and/or its business for purposes of United States federal and state securities laws; 

  

	 	(iii)	all Company Materials marked “PUBLIC” shall be made available on the Designated Website under the title “PUBLIC”; and 

 

	 	(iv)	the Facility Agent shall be entitled to post any Company Materials that are not marked “PUBLIC” on to the Designated Website without specifying in the title
of such document whether such information is public. 

  

	 	(c)	Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company shall be under no obligation to mark any Company Materials “PUBLIC”. Each of Facility Agent and the Lenders hereby
acknowledge that in respect of any obligation of the Obligors to deliver information to the Relevant Finance Parties under this Agreement, such obligation shall be deemed to have been satisfied notwithstanding the determination of any Public Lender
not to view such information by reason of it not having been marked with the title “PUBLIC”. The foregoing provisions of this Clause 41.4 shall be without prejudice to the provisions of Clause 30 (Role of the Facility Agent,
the Arrangers, the L/C Banks and Others) and Clause 37.10 (Disclosure of Information) hereof. 

  

	41.5  	Electronic Communication 

  

	 	(a)	Any communication to be made between the Facility Agent and any Lender under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents may be made by electronic mail or
other electronic means, if the relevant Agent and the relevant Lender: 

  

	 	(i)	agree that, unless and until notified to the contrary, this is to be an accepted form of communication; 

 

	 	(ii)	notify each other in writing of their electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means; and

  

	 	(iii)	notify each other of any change to their address or any other such information supplied by them. 

 

	 	(b)	Any electronic communication made between the Facility Agent and a Lender will be effective only when actually received in readable form and in the case of any
electronic communication made by a Lender to the Facility Agent only if it is addressed in such a manner as the Facility Agent shall specify for this purpose. 

 

	41.6	Certificates of Officers 

All certificates of officers of any company hereunder may be given on behalf of the relevant company and in no event shall personal
liability attach to such an officer. 
  

	41.7  	Patriot Act 

 Each Lender
subject to the USA Patriot Act (Title 111 of Pub. L. 107-56 (signed into law October 26, 2001)) (the “Patriot Act”) hereby notifies the Ultimate Parent and the Company that pursuant to the requirements of the Patriot Act, it is
required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, the Company and the other Obligors and other information that will allow such Lender to identify Parent, the Company and the other Obligors in
accordance with the Patriot Act. 

  
 197

	41.8  Communication when	Facility Agent is Impaired Agent 

 If the Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent the Relevant Finance Parties may, instead of communicating with each other through the Facility Agent, communicate with each other directly and (while the
Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent) all the provisions of the Relevant Finance Documents which require communications to be made or notices to be given to or by the Facility Agent shall be varied so that communications may be made and notices given
to or by the Relevant Finance Parties to this Agreement directly. This provision shall not operate after a replacement Facility Agent has been appointed. 
  

	42.	ENGLISH LANGUAGE 

 Each
communication and document made or delivered by one party to another pursuant to this Agreement shall be in the English language or accompanied by a translation of it into English certified (by an officer of the person making or delivering the same)
as being a true and accurate translation of it. 
  

	43.	PARTIAL INVALIDITY 

 If,
at any time, any provision of this Agreement is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any respect under the Law of any jurisdiction, such illegality, invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect: 

 

	 	(a)	the legality, validity or enforceability of the remaining provisions of this Agreement; or 

 

	 	(b)	the legality, validity or enforceability of such provision under the Law of any other jurisdiction. 

 

	44.	AMENDMENTS 

  

	44.1  	Amendments Generally 

Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, the Facility Agent, if it has the prior written consent of an Instructing Group, and the
Obligors affected thereby, may from time to time agree in writing to amend any Relevant Finance Document or to consent to or waive, prospectively or retrospectively, any of the requirements of any Relevant Finance Document and any amendments,
consents or waivers so agreed shall be binding on all the Relevant Finance Parties and the Obligors. For the avoidance of doubt, any amendments relating to this Agreement shall only be made in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and any
amendments relating to a Hedging Agreement shall only be made in accordance with the provisions of such Hedging Agreement, in each case notwithstanding any other provisions of the Relevant Finance Documents. 

 

	44.2  	Consents 

 An amendment,
consent or waiver relating to the following matters (including any technical consequential amendments relating to such amendment, consent or waiver) may be made with the prior written consent of each Lender affected thereby and without the consent
of any other Lender: 
  

	 	(a)	any increase in the principal amount of any Commitment of such Lender; 

  

	 	(b)	a reduction in the proportion of any amount received or recovered (whether by way of set-off, combination of accounts or otherwise) in respect of any amount due from
the Parent or any Obligor under this Agreement to which such Lender is entitled; 

  
 198

	 	(c)	a decrease in any Applicable Margin for, or the principal amount of, any Advance, any Documentary Credit or any interest payment, fees or other amounts due under this
Agreement to such Lender from the Parent or any Obligor or any other party to this Agreement; 

  

	 	(d)	any change in the currency of account (other than a change resulting from the United Kingdom becoming a Participating Member State); 

 

	 	(e)	unless otherwise specified the deferral of the date for payment of any principal, interest, fee or any other amount due under this Agreement to such Lender from the
Parent or any Obligor or any other party to this Agreement; 

  

	 	(f)	the deferral of any Termination Date or Final Maturity Date; 

  

	 	(g)	any reduction to the percentage set forth in the definition of Instructing Group; or 

 

	 	(h)	a change to this Clause 44.2 and Clause 44.4 (Guarantees and Security). 

 

	44.3	Technical Amendments 

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Clause 44, the Facility Agent may at any time without the consent or sanctions of the
Lenders, concur with the Company in making any modifications to any Relevant Finance Document, which in the opinion of the Facility Agent would be proper to make provided that the Facility Agent is of the opinion that such modification would not be
prejudicial to the position of any Lender and in the opinion of the Facility Agent such modification is of a formal, minor or technical nature or is to correct a manifest error. Any such modification shall be made on such terms as the Facility Agent
may determine, shall be binding upon the Lenders, and shall be notified by the Company to the Lenders as soon as practicable thereafter. 
  

	44.4	Guarantees and Security 

A waiver of issuance or the release of any Guarantor from any of its obligations under Clause 29 (Guarantee and Indemnity) or
a release of any Security under the Security Documents, in each case, other than in accordance with the terms of any Relevant Finance Document shall require the prior written consent of affected Lenders whose Available Commitments plus Outstandings
amount in aggregate to more than 90 per cent. of the Available Facilities plus aggregate Outstandings. 
  

	44.5	Release of Guarantees and Security 

  

	 	(a)	Subject to paragraph (b) below, at the time of completion of any disposal by the Parent or any Obligor of any shares, assets or revenues the Security Trustee shall
(and it is hereby authorised by the other Relevant Finance Parties to) at the request of and cost of the relevant Obligor, execute such documents as may be required to: 

 

	 	(i)	release those shares, assets or revenues from Security constituted by any relevant Security Document or certify that any floating charge constituted by any relevant
Security Documents over such assets, revenues or rights has not crystallised; and 

  

	 	(ii)	release any person which as a result of that disposal, ceases to be the Parent or any Obligor, from any guarantee, indemnity or Security Document to which it is a party
and its other obligations under any other Relevant Finance Document. 

  
 199

	 	(b)	The Security Trustee shall only be required under paragraph (a) above to grant the release of any Security or to deliver a certificate of non-crystallisation on
account of a disposal as described in that paragraph if 

  

	 	(i)	the disposal is permitted under Clause 25.6 (Disposals) or otherwise with the consent of an Instructing Group; and 

 

	 	(ii)	to the extent that the disposal is to be in exchange for replacement assets the Security Trustee has either received (or is satisfied, acting reasonably, that it will
receive immediately following the disposal) one or more duly executed Security Documents granting Security over those replacement assets or is satisfied, acting reasonably, that the replacement assets will be subject to Security pursuant to any
existing Security Documents. 

  

	 	(c)	If at any time the Obligors at the relevant time represent a percentage which is greater than that required to satisfy the 80% Security Test and the Company provides a
certificate to the Facility Agent certifying that upon the release of one or more specified Obligors from its obligations under this Agreement the 80% Security Test would continue to be satisfied, the Security Trustee shall (and it is hereby
authorised by the other Relevant Finance Parties to) at the request and cost of the Company, execute such documents as may be required to release such specified Obligors from any guarantees, indemnities and/or Security Documents to which it is a
party and to release it from its other obligations under any Relevant Finance Document. Any Obligor, whose assets are to be released by this paragraph (c) or any other provision of this Agreement or the Relevant Finance Documents and who
as a result will not have granted security over all or substantially all of its assets for the benefit of the Relevant Finance Parties, shall, for purposes of the determination of the 80% Security Test, not be treated as an Obligor for the
calculation in the preceding sentence and on a going forward basis. The release provisions of this paragraph (c) shall not permit any release of any guarantees or Security in favour of the Relevant Finance Parties, in each
case, of the Parent, the Company, New Intermediate Holdco and any Borrower (other than the Company) for as long as such entity is a Borrower. 

  

	 	(d)	The Security Trustee shall (and it is hereby authorised by the other Relevant Finance Parties to) at the cost of the relevant Obligor, execute such documents as may be
required or desirable to effect any release (i) permitted under Clause 10.2 (Releases) and Clause 10.3 (Release of Obligors), in each case, of the Security Trust Agreement, (ii) to which a prior written consent of the
relevant Lenders has been granted in accordance with Clause 44.4 (Guarantees and Security) and (iii) required to permit the granting of any Encumbrance permitted under paragraphs (d), (g), (h), (i), (k), (l), (m) and
(p)(i) of Clause 25.2 (Negative Pledge). 

  

	 	(e)	Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Company may require the Security Trustee to, and the Security Trustee shall (and it is hereby authorised by
the other Relevant Finance Parties to) at the cost of the relevant Obligor, execute such documents as may be required or desirable to effect the release of the Security granted over any asset of an Obligor pursuant to the Security Documents to which
it is a party to enable the relevant Obligor to grant in connection with that asset any encumbrance permitted under paragraphs (d), (g), (h), (i), (k), (l), (m) and (p)(i) of Clause 25.2 (Negative Pledge). If, immediately prior
to such release the relevant Obligor was treated as an Obligor for the purpose of the 80% Security Test, the relevant Obligor shall continue to be treated as an Obligor for those purposes notwithstanding any such release. 

  
 200

	44.6	Amendments Affecting the Facility Agent 

 Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Facility Agent shall not be obliged to agree to any amendment, consent or waiver if the same would: 

 

	 	(a)	amend or waive any provision of Clause 30 (Role of the Facility Agent, the Arrangers, the L/C Banks and Others), Clause 37.10 (Disclosure of
Information), Clause 39 (Costs and Expenses) or this Clause 44; or 

  

	 	(b)	otherwise amend or waive any of the Facility Agent’s rights under this Agreement or subject the Facility Agent to any additional obligations under this Agreement.

  

	44.7	Calculation of Consent 

Where a request for a waiver of, or an amendment to, any provision of any Relevant Finance Document has been sent by the Facility Agent to
the Lenders at the request of an Obligor, each Lender that does not respond to such request for waiver or amendment within 10 Business Days after receipt by it of such request (or within such other period as the Facility Agent and the Company shall
specify), shall be excluded from the calculation in determining whether the requisite level of consent to such waiver or amendment was granted. 
  

	44.8	Disenfranchisement of Defaulting Lenders 

  

	 	(a)	For so long as a Defaulting Lender has any Available Commitments, in determining whether the requisite level of consent has been obtained for a consent, waiver,
amendment or other vote under the Relevant Finance Documents, that Defaulting Lender’s Commitments will be reduced by the amount of its Available Commitments. 

 

	 	(b)	For the purposes of this Clause 44.8, the Facility Agent may assume that the following Lenders are Defaulting Lenders: 

 

	 	(i)	any Lender which has notified the Facility Agent that it has become a Defaulting Lender; and 

 

	 	(ii)	any Lender in relation to which it is aware that any of the events or circumstances referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of the definition of
“Defaulting Lender” has occurred, 

 unless it has received notice to the contrary from the Lender
concerned (together with any supporting evidence reasonably requested by the Facility Agent) or the Facility Agent is otherwise aware that the Lender has ceased to be a Defaulting Lender. 

 

	44.9	Replacement of Lenders 

  

	 	(a)	If at any time: 

  

	 	(i)	any Lender becomes a Non-Consenting Lender; or 

  

	 	(ii)	any Lender becomes a Non-Funding Lender, 

 then the Company may, on not less than 3 Business Days prior notice to the Facility Agent and that Lender (A), replace that Lender by requiring it to (and that Lender shall) transfer all of its rights and
obligations under this Agreement to a Lender or other person selected by the Company for a purchase price equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s share in the outstanding Loans and all accrued interest and fees and other
amounts payable to it under this Agreement or (B) prepay that Lender all but not part of its share in its outstanding Loans and all accrued 

  
 201

 
interest and fees and other amounts payable to it under this Agreement from retained Excess Cash Flow, permitted Subordinated Funding or New Equity received by the Group. Any notice delivered
under this paragraph (a) shall be accompanied by a Transfer Deed complying with Clause 37 (Assignments and Transfers), which Transfer Deed shall be immediately executed by the relevant Non-Consenting Lender or, as the case may be,
Non-Funding Lender and returned to the Company. If a Lender does not execute and/or return a Transfer Deed as required by this paragraph (a) within two Business Days of delivery by the Company, the Facility Agent shall execute (and is hereby
irrevocably authorised by the relevant Lender to do so) that Transfer Deed on behalf of such Lender. 
  

	 	(b)	The Company shall have no right to replace the Arranger, the Facility Agent or the Security Trustee and none of the foregoing nor shall any Lender have any obligation
to the Company to find a replacement Lender or other such entity. The Company may only exercise its replacement or prepayment rights in respect of any relevant Lender within 90 days of becoming entitled to do so on each occasion such Lender is a
Non-Consenting Lender or a Non-Funding Lender. 

  

	 	(c)	In no event shall the Lender being replaced be required to pay or surrender to such replacement Lender or other entity any of the fees received by such Lender being
replaced pursuant to this Agreement. 

  

	45.	THIRD PARTY RIGHTS 

  

	 	(a)	A person which is not a party to this Agreement (a “third party”) shall have no right to enforce any of its provisions except that:

  

	 	(i)	a third party shall have those rights it would have had if the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 had not come into effect; and 

 

	 	(ii)	each of Clause 17.3 (Tax Indemnity), Clause 18 (Increased Costs) and Clause 30.9 (Exclusion of Liability) shall be enforceable by
any third party referred to in such clause as if such third party were a party to this Agreement. 

  

	 	(b)	The parties to this Agreement may without the consent of any third party vary or rescind this Agreement. 

 

	46.	COUNTERPARTS 

 This
Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts and all of such counterparts taken together shall be deemed to constitute one and the same instrument. 
  

	47.	GOVERNING LAW 

 This
Agreement, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, English Law. 
  

	48.	JURISDICTION 

  

	48.1	Courts 

 Each of the
parties to this Agreement irrevocably agrees for the benefit of each of the Relevant Finance Parties that the courts of England shall have exclusive jurisdiction to hear and determine any suit, action or proceedings, and to settle any disputes,
which may arise out of or in connection with this Agreement or any non-contractual obligation arising out of or in connection with this Agreement (respectively “Proceedings” and “Disputes”) and, for such purposes,
irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such courts. 

  
 202

	48.2	Waiver 

 Each of the
Obligors irrevocably waives any objection which it might now or hereafter have to Proceedings being brought or Disputes settled in the courts of England and agrees not to claim that any such court is an inconvenient or inappropriate forum.

  

	48.3	Service of Process 

 Each
of the Obligors which is not incorporated in England agrees that the process by which any Proceedings are begun may be served on it by being delivered in connection with any Proceedings in England, to the Company at its registered office for the
time being and the Company, by its signature to this Agreement, accepts its appointment as such in respect of each such Obligor. If the appointment of the person mentioned in this Clause 48.3 ceases to be effective in respect of any of the Obligors
the relevant Obligor shall immediately appoint a further person in England to accept service of process on its behalf in England and, failing such appointment within 15 days, the Facility Agent shall be entitled to appoint such person by notice to
the relevant Obligor. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall affect the right to serve process in any other manner permitted by Law. 
  

	48.4	Proceedings in Other Jurisdictions 

 Nothing in Clause 48.1 (Courts) shall (and shall not be construed so as to) limit the right of the Relevant Finance Parties or any of them to take Proceedings against any of the Obligors in
any other court of competent jurisdiction nor shall the taking of Proceedings in any one or more jurisdictions preclude the taking of Proceedings in any other jurisdiction (whether concurrently or not) if and to the extent permitted by applicable
Law. 
  

	48.5	General Consent 

 Each of
the Obligors consents generally in respect of any Proceedings to the giving of any relief or the issue of any process in connection with such Proceedings including the making, enforcement or execution against any property whatsoever (irrespective of
its use or intended use) of any order or judgment which may be made or given in such Proceedings. 
  

	48.6	Waiver of Immunity 

 To
the extent that any Obligor may in any jurisdiction claim for itself or its assets or revenues immunity from suit, execution, attachment (whether in aid of execution, before judgment or otherwise) or other legal process and to the extent that in any
such jurisdiction there may be attributed to itself, its assets or revenues such immunity (whether or not claimed), such Obligor irrevocably agrees not to claim, and irrevocably waives, such immunity to the full extent permitted by the laws of such
jurisdiction. 
 This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement. 

  
 203

 SCHEDULE 1 
 PART 1 - LENDERS AND COMMITMENTS 
  

					
	 Lender
	  	Revolving Facility
Commitment (£)	  	A Facility Commitment (£)
	 Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 BNP Paribas London Branch
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 Bank of America, N.A.
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 Goldman Sachs Lending Partners LLC
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. London Branch
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 Lloyds TSB Bank plc
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 The Royal Bank of Scotland plc
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 UBS Limited
	  	25,000,000	  	100,000,000
			
	 Total Commitments
	  	250,000,000	  	1,000,000,000

  
 204

 SCHEDULE 1 
 PART 2 - LENDERS TAX STATUS 
  

			
	 Lender
	  	 Tax Status

	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	BNP Paribas London Branch	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	Bank of America, N.A.	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS	  	UK Treaty Lender
		
	Goldman Sachs Lending Partners LLC	  	UK Treaty Lender
		
	JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. London Branch	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	Lloyds TSB Bank plc	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	The Royal Bank of Scotland plc	  	UK Bank Lender
		
	UBS Limited	  	UK Bank Lender

  
 205

 SCHEDULE 2 
 PART 1 - THE ORIGINAL GUARANTORS 
  

							
	 	  	 NAME
	  	 Jurisdiction of
Incorporation
	  	 Company
number

(if applicable)

	 1.
	  	 Andover Cablevision Limited
	  	England	  	01932254
				
	 2.
	  	 Anglia Cable Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02433857
				
	 3.
	  	 Avon Cable Joint Venture
	  	England	  	
				
	 4.
	  	 BCMV Limited
	  	England	  	03074517
				
	 5.
	  	 Berkhamsted Properties & Building Contractors Limited
	  	England	  	00958564
				
	 6.
	  	 Birmingham Cable Corporation Limited
	  	England	  	02170379
				
	 7.
	  	 Birmingham Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02244565
				
	 8.
	  	 Cable Camden Limited
	  	England	  	01795642
				
	 9.
	  	 Cable Enfield Limited
	  	England	  	02466511
				
	 10.
	  	 Cable Hackney & Islington Limited
	  	England	  	01795641
				
	 11.
	  	 Cable Haringey Limited
	  	England	  	01808589
				
	 12.
	  	 Cable London Limited
	  	England	  	01794264
				
	 13.
	  	 Cable Television Limited
	  	England	  	00683065
				
	 14.
	  	 Cable Thames Valley Limited
	  	England	  	02254089
				
	 15.
	  	 Cabletel (UK) Limited
	  	England	  	02835551
				
	 16.
	  	 CableTel Cardiff Limited
	  	England	  	02740659
				
	 17.
	  	 CableTel Central Hertfordshire Limited
	  	England	  	02347168
				
	 18.
	  	 CableTel Hertfordshire Limited
	  	England	  	02381354
				
	 19.
	  	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	England	  	01785533
				
	 20.
	  	 CableTel Investments Limited
	  	England	  	03157216
				
	 21.
	  	 CableTel Newport
	  	England	  	02478879
				
	 22.
	  	 CableTel North Bedfordshire Limited
	  	England	  	02455397
				
	 23.
	  	 CableTel Surrey and Hampshire Limited
	  	England	  	02740651
				
	 24.
	  	 CableTel Telecom Supplies Limited
	  	England	  	02919285
				
	 25.
	  	 CableTel West Glamorgan Limited
	  	England	  	00623197

  
 206

							
	 26.
	  	 CableTel West Riding Limited
	  	England	  	02372564
				
	 27.
	  	 Cambridge Cable Services Limited
	  	England	  	03262220
				
	 28.
	  	 Cambridge Holding Company Limited
	  	England	  	02670603
				
	 29.
	  	 CCL Corporate Communication Services Limited
	  	England	  	02955679
				
	 30.
	  	 Central Cable Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	03008567
				
	 31.
	  	 Columbia Management Limited
	  	England	  	02361163
				
	 32.
	  	 ComTel Cable Services Limited
	  	England	  	02265315
				
	 33.
	  	 ComTel Coventry Limited
	  	England	  	00277802
				
	 34.
	  	 Continental Shelf 16 Limited
	  	England	  	03005499
				
	 35.
	  	 Credit-Track Debt Recovery Ltd
	  	England	  	02425789
				
	 36.
	  	 Crystal Palace Radio Limited
	  	England	  	01459745
				
	 37.
	  	 Diamond Cable Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02965241
				
	 38.
	  	 Digital Television Network Limited
	  	England	  	03288768
				
	 39.
	  	 DTELS Limited
	  	England	  	02834403
				
	 40.
	  	 East Coast Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02352468
				
	 41.
	  	 Ed Stone Limited
	  	England	  	04170969
				
	 42.
	  	 EMS Investments Limited
	  	England	  	03373057
				
	 43.
	  	 Enablis Limited
	  	England	  	03144815
				
	 44.
	  	 EuroBell (Holdings) Limited
	  	England	  	02904215
				
	 45.
	  	 EuroBell (IDA) Limited
	  	England	  	03373001
				
	 46.
	  	 EuroBell (No. 2) Limited
	  	England	  	03405634
				
	 47.
	  	 EuroBell (No. 3) Limited
	  	England	  	03006948
				
	 48.
	  	 EuroBell (No. 4) Limited
	  	England	  	02983110
				
	 49.
	  	 EuroBell (South West) Limited
	  	England	  	01796131
				
	 50.
	  	 EuroBell (Sussex) Limited
	  	England	  	02272340
				
	 51.
	  	 EuroBell (West Kent) Limited
	  	England	  	02886001
				
	 52.
	  	 EuroBell CPE Limited
	  	England	  	02742145
				
	 53.
	  	 EuroBell Internet Services Limited
	  	England	  	03172207
				
	 54.
	  	 EuroBell Limited
	  	England	  	02983427
				
	 55.
	  	 Filegale Limited
	  	England	  	02804553

  
 207

							
	 56.
	  	 Fleximedia Limited
	  	England	  	02654520
				
	 57.
	  	 Flextech Limited
	  	England	  	02688411
				
	 58.
	  	 Flextech (1992) Limited
	  	England	  	01190025
				
	 59.
	  	 Flextech (Kindernet Investment) Limited
	  	England	  	01260228
				
	 60.
	  	 Flextech (Travel Channel) Limited
	  	England	  	03427763
				
	 61.
	  	 Flextech Broadband Limited
	  	England	  	04125315
				
	 62.
	  	 Flextech Broadcasting Limited
	  	England	  	04125325
				
	 63.
	  	 Flextech Business News Limited
	  	England	  	02954531
				
	 64.
	  	 Flextech Childrens Channel Limited
	  	England	  	02678881
				
	 65.
	  	 Flextech Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02588902
				
	 66.
	  	 Flextech Digital Broadcasting Limited
	  	England	  	03298737
				
	 67.
	  	 Flextech Distribution Limited
	  	England	  	02678883
				
	 68.
	  	 Flextech Family Channel Limited
	  	England	  	02856303
				
	 69.
	  	 Flextech IVS Limited
	  	England	  	02678882
				
	 70.
	  	 Flextech Media Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	02678886
				
	 71.
	  	 Flextech Music Publishing Limited
	  	England	  	03673917
				
	 72.
	  	 Flextech Video Games Limited
	  	England	  	02670821
				
	 73.
	  	 Flextech-Flexinvest Limited
	  	England	  	01192945
				
	 74.
	  	 General Cable Group Limited
	  	England	  	02872852
				
	 75.
	  	 General Cable Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	02798236
				
	 76.
	  	 General Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02369824
				
	 77.
	  	 Heartland Cablevision (UK) Limited
	  	England	  	02415170
				
	 78.
	  	 Heartland Cablevision II (UK) Limited
	  	England	  	02443617
				
	 79.
	  	 Herts Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02390426
				
	 80.
	  	 Interactive Digital Sales Limited
	  	England	  	04257717
				
	 81.
	  	 Jewel Holdings
	  	England	  	03085518
				
	 82.
	  	 Lanbase European Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	02529290
				
	 83.
	  	 Lanbase Limited
	  	England	  	02617729
				
	 84.
	  	 Lichfield Cable Communications Limited
	  	England	  	03016595
				
	 85.
	  	 M&NW Network II Limited
	  	England	  	06765761

  
 208

							
	 86.
	  	 M&NW Network Limited
	  	England	  	06763496
				
	 87.
	  	 Maza Limited
	  	England	  	02785299
				
	 88.
	  	 Metro Hertfordshire Limited
	  	England	  	03092899
				
	 89.
	  	 Metro South Wales Limited
	  	England	  	03092897
				
	 90.
	  	 Middlesex Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02460325
				
	 91.
	  	 Northampton Cable Television Limited
	  	England	  	02475464
				
	 92.
	  	 NTL (Aylesbury and Chiltern) Limited
	  	England	  	02416084
				
	 93.
	  	 NTL (B) Limited
	  	England	  	02735732
				
	 94.
	  	 NTL (Broadland) Limited
	  	England	  	02443741
				
	 95.
	  	 NTL (City and Westminster) Limited
	  	England	  	02809080
				
	 96.
	  	 NTL (County Durham) Limited
	  	England	  	03128449
				
	 97.
	  	 NTL (CRUK)
	  	England	  	02329254
				
	 98.
	  	 NTL (CWC Holdings)
	  	England	  	03922682
				
	 99.
	  	 NTL (CWC) Corporation Limited
	  	England	  	02719477
				
	 100.
	  	 NTL (CWC) Limited
	  	England	  	03288998
				
	 101.
	  	 NTL (CWC) Management Limited
	  	England	  	02924200
				
	 102.
	  	 NTL (CWC) No. 2 Limited
	  	England	  	02441766
				
	 103.
	  	 NTL (CWC) No. 3 Limited
	  	England	  	02441768
				
	 104.
	  	 NTL (CWC) No. 4 Limited
	  	England	  	02351068
				
	 105.
	  	 NTL (CWC) Programming Limited
	  	England	  	03403986
				
	 106.
	  	 NTL (CWC) UK
	  	England	  	02463427
				
	 107.
	  	 NTL (Ealing) Limited
	  	England	  	01721894
				
	 108.
	  	 NTL (Fenland) Limited
	  	England	  	02459153
				
	 109.
	  	 NTL (Greenwich and Lewisham) Limited
	  	England	  	02254009
				
	 110.
	  	 NTL (Hampshire) Limited
	  	England	  	02351070
				
	 111.
	  	 NTL (Harrogate) Limited
	  	England	  	02404019
				
	 112.
	  	 NTL (Harrow) Limited
	  	England	  	02459179
				
	 113.
	  	 NTL (Kent) Limited
	  	England	  	02456153
				
	 114.
	  	 NTL (Lambeth and Southwark) Limited
	  	England	  	02277986
				
	 115.
	  	 NTL (Leeds) Limited
	  	England	  	02400103

  
 209

							
	 116.
	  	 NTL (Norwich) Limited
	  	England	  	02332233
				
	 117.
	  	 NTL (Peterborough) Limited
	  	England	  	02332232
				
	 118.
	  	 NTL (South East) Limited
	  	England	  	01870928
				
	 119.
	  	 NTL (South London) Limited
	  	England	  	00657093
				
	 120.
	  	 NTL (Southampton and Eastleigh) Limited
	  	England	  	01866504
				
	 121.
	  	 NTL (Sunderland) Limited
	  	England	  	02402393
				
	 122.
	  	 NTL (Thamesmead) Limited
	  	England	  	02461140
				
	 123.
	  	 NTL (V)
	  	England	  	02719474
				
	 124.
	  	 NTL (Wandsworth) Limited
	  	England	  	01866178
				
	 125.
	  	 NTL (Wearside) Limited
	  	England	  	02475099
				
	 126.
	  	 NTL (West London) Limited
	  	England	  	01735664
				
	 127.
	  	 NTL (Yorcan) Limited
	  	England	  	02371785
				
	 128.
	  	 NTL (York) Limited
	  	England	  	02406267
				
	 129.
	  	 NTL Acquisition Company Limited
	  	England	  	02270117
				
	 130.
	  	 NTL Bolton Cablevision Holding Company
	  	England	  	02422198
				
	 131.
	  	 NTL Business (Ireland) Limited
	  	England	  	03284482
				
	 132.
	  	 NTL Business Limited
	  	England	  	03076222
				
	 133.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Bolton
	  	England	  	01883383
				
	 134.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Bromley
	  	England	  	02422195
				
	 135.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Bury and Rochdale
	  	England	  	02446183
				
	 136.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Cheshire
	  	England	  	02379804
				
	 137.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Derby
	  	England	  	02387713
				
	 138.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms East Lancashire
	  	England	  	02114543
				
	 139.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Greater Manchester
	  	England	  	02407924
				
	 140.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Group Limited
	  	England	  	03024703
				
	 141.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Holdings No. 1 Limited
	  	England	  	03709869
				
	 142.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Holdings No. 2 Limited
	  	England	  	03709840
				
	 143.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Lancashire No. 1
	  	England	  	02453249
				
	 144.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Lancashire No. 2
	  	England	  	02453059
				
	 145.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Limited
	  	England	  	02664006

  
 210

							
	 146.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Macclesfield
	  	England	  	02459067
				
	 147.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Manchester Limited
	  	England	  	02511868
				
	 148.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Oldham and Tameside
	  	England	  	02446185
				
	 149.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Solent
	  	England	  	02422654
				
	 150.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Staffordshire
	  	England	  	02379800
				
	 151.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Stockport
	  	England	  	02443484
				
	 152.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Surrey
	  	England	  	02531586
				
	 153.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Sussex
	  	England	  	02266092
				
	 154.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Wessex
	  	England	  	02410378
				
	 155.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms West Surrey Limited
	  	England	  	02512757
				
	 156.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Wirral
	  	England	  	02531604
				
	 157.
	  	 NTL Cambridge Limited
	  	England	  	02154841
				
	 158.
	  	 NTL Chartwell Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	03290823
				
	 159.
	  	 NTL Communications Services Limited
	  	England	  	03403985
				
	 160.
	  	 NTL Darlington Limited
	  	England	  	02533674
				
	 161.
	  	 NTL Derby Cablevision Holding Company
	  	England	  	02422310
				
	 162.
	  	 NTL Equipment No. 1 Limited
	  	England	  	02794518
				
	 163.
	  	 NTL Equipment No. 2 Limited
	  	England	  	02071491
				
	 164.
	  	 NTL Finance Limited
	  	England	  	05537678
				
	 165.
	  	 NTL Glasgow Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	04170072
				
	 166.
	  	 NTL Holdings (Broadland) Limited
	  	England	  	02427172
				
	 167.
	  	 NTL Holdings (East London) Limited
	  	England	  	02032186
				
	 168.
	  	 NTL Holdings (Fenland) Limited
	  	England	  	02427199
				
	 169.
	  	 NTL Holdings (Leeds) Limited
	  	England	  	02766909
				
	 170.
	  	 NTL Holdings (Norwich) Limited
	  	England	  	02412962
				
	 171.
	  	 NTL Holdings (Peterborough) Limited
	  	England	  	02888397
				
	 172.
	  	 NTL Internet Limited
	  	England	  	02985161
				
	 173.
	  	 NTL Internet Services Limited
	  	England	  	04038930
				
	 174.
	  	 NTL Irish Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	05313953
				
	 175.
	  	 NTL Kirklees
	  	England	  	02495460

  
 211

							
	 176.
	  	 NTL Kirklees Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	04169826
				
	 177.
	  	 NTL Limited
	  	England	  	02586701
				
	 178.
	  	 NTL Manchester Cablevision Holding Company
	  	England	  	02455631
				
	 179.
	  	 NTL Microclock Services Limited
	  	England	  	02861856
				
	 180.
	  	 NTL Midlands Limited
	  	England	  	02357645
				
	 181.
	  	 NTL Milton Keynes Limited
	  	England	  	02410808
				
	 182.
	  	 NTL National Networks Limited
	  	England	  	05174655
				
	 183.
	  	 NTL Networks Limited
	  	England	  	03045209
				
	 184.
	  	 NTL Partcheer Company Limited
	  	England	  	02861817
				
	 185.
	  	 NTL Rectangle Limited
	  	England	  	04329656
				
	 186.
	  	 NTL Sideoffer Limited
	  	England	  	02927099
				
	 187.
	  	 NTL Solent Telephone and Cable TV Company Limited
	  	England	  	02511653
				
	 188.
	  	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	England	  	02387692
				
	 189.
	  	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	England	  	02857050
				
	 190.
	  	 NTL Streetunique Projects Limited
	  	England	  	02851203
				
	 191.
	  	 NTL Streetunit Projects Limited
	  	England	  	02851201
				
	 192.
	  	 NTL Streetusual Services Limited
	  	England	  	02851019
				
	 193.
	  	 NTL Streetvision Services Limited
	  	England	  	02851020
				
	 194.
	  	 NTL Streetvital Services Limited
	  	England	  	02851021
				
	 195.
	  	 NTL Streetwarm Services Limited
	  	England	  	02851011
				
	 196.
	  	 NTL Streetwide Services Limited
	  	England	  	02851013
				
	 197.
	  	 NTL Strikeagent Trading Limited
	  	England	  	02851014
				
	 198.
	  	 NTL Strikeamount Trading Limited
	  	England	  	02851015
				
	 199.
	  	 NTL Strikeapart Trading Limited
	  	England	  	02851018
				
	 200.
	  	 NTL Systems Limited
	  	England	  	03217975
				
	 201.
	  	 NTL Technical Support Company Limited
	  	England	  	02512756
				
	 202.
	  	 NTL Teesside Limited
	  	England	  	02532188
				
	 203.
	  	 NTL Telecom Services Limited
	  	England	  	02937788
				
	 204.
	  	 NTL UK Telephone and Cable TV Holding Company Limited
	  	England	  	02511877
				
	 205.
	  	 NTL Victoria II Limited
	  	England	  	05685189

  
 212

							
	 206.
	  	 NTL Victoria Limited
	  	England	  	05685196
				
	 207.
	  	 NTL Westminster Limited
	  	England	  	01735641
				
	 208.
	  	 NTL Winston Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	03290821
				
	 209.
	  	 NTL Wirral Telephone and Cable TV Company
	  	England	  	02511873
				
	 210.
	  	 Oxford Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02450228
				
	 211.
	  	 Screenshop Limited
	  	England	  	03529106
				
	 212.
	  	 Secure Backup Systems Limited
	  	England	  	03130333
				
	 213.
	  	 Sheffield Cable Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02465953
				
	 214.
	  	 Southern East Anglia Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02905929
				
	 215.
	  	 Southwestern Bell International Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	02378768
				
	 216.
	  	 Stafford Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02381842
				
	 217.
	  	 Swindon Cable Limited
	  	England	  	00318216
				
	 218.
	  	 Tamworth Cable Communications Limited
	  	England	  	03016602
				
	 219.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Central Lancashire) Limited
	  	England	  	01737862
				
	 220.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Cotswolds) Limited
	  	England	  	01743081
				
	 221.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Cotswolds) Venture
	  	England	  	
				
	 222.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Liverpool) Limited
	  	England	  	01615567
				
	 223.
	  	 Telewest Communications (London South) Joint Venture
	  	England	  	
				
	 224.
	  	 Telewest Communications (London South) Limited
	  	England	  	01697437
				
	 225.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Midlands and North West) Limited
	  	England	  	02795350
				
	 226.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Midlands) Limited
	  	England	  	01882074
				
	 227.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Nominees) Limited
	  	England	  	02318746
				
	 228.
	  	 Telewest Communications (North East) Limited
	  	England	  	02378214
				
	 229.
	  	 Telewest Communications (North East) Partnership
	  	England	  	
				
	 230.
	  	 Telewest Communications (North West) Limited
	  	England	  	02321124
				
	 231.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture
	  	England	  	
				
	 232.
	  	 Telewest Communications (South East) Limited
	  	England	  	02270764
				
	 233.
	  	 Telewest Communications (South East) Partnership
	  	England	  	
				
	 234.
	  	 Telewest Communications (South Thames Estuary) Limited
	  	England	  	02270763
				
	 235.
	  	 Telewest Communications (South West) Limited
	  	England	  	02271287

  
 213

							
	 236.
	  	 Telewest Communications (St. Helens & Knowsley) Limited
	  	England	  	02466599
				
	 237.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Tyneside) Limited
	  	England	  	02407676
				
	 238.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Wigan) Limited
	  	England	  	02451112
				
	 239.
	  	 Telewest Communications Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02883742
				
	 240.
	  	 Telewest Communications Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	02982404
				
	 241.
	  	 Telewest Communications Networks Limited
	  	England	  	03071086
				
	 242.
	  	 Telewest Limited
	  	England	  	03291383
				
	 243.
	  	 Telewest Parliamentary Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	02514316
				
	 244.
	  	 Telewest UK Limited
	  	England	  	04925679
				
	 245.
	  	 Telso Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02067186
				
	 246.
	  	 The Cable Corporation Limited
	  	England	  	02075227
				
	 247.
	  	 The Yorkshire Cable Group Limited
	  	England	  	02782818
				
	 248.
	  	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	England	  	02994027
				
	 249.
	  	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	England	  	02994061
				
	 250.
	  	 TVS Pension Fund Trustees Limited
	  	England	  	01539051
				
	 251.
	  	 TVS Television Limited
	  	England	  	00591652
				
	 252.
	  	 United Artists Investments Limited
	  	England	  	02761569
				
	 253.
	  	 Virgin Media Business Limited
	  	England	  	01785381
				
	 254.
	  	 Virgin Media Investments Limited
	  	England	  	07108297
				
	 255.
	  	 Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	03173552
				
	 256.
	  	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	England	  	02591237
				
	 257.
	  	 Virgin Media Payments Ltd
	  	England	  	06024812
				
	 258.
	  	 Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC
	  	England	  	07108352
				
	 259.
	  	 Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited
	  	England	  	07176280
				
	 260.
	  	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	England	  	02514287
				
	 261.
	  	 Virgin Mobile Group (UK) Limited
	  	England	  	05050748
				
	 262.
	  	 Virgin Mobile Holdings (UK) Limited
	  	England	  	03741555
				
	 263.
	  	 Virgin Mobile Telecoms Limited
	  	England	  	03707664
				
	 264.
	  	 Virgin Net Limited
	  	England	  	02833330
				
	 265.
	  	 Vision Networks Services UK Limited
	  	England	  	03135501

  
 214

							
	 266.
	  	 VMIH Sub Limited
	  	England	  	05316140
				
	 267.
	  	 Wessex Cable Limited
	  	England	  	02433185
				
	 268.
	  	 Windsor Television Limited
	  	England	  	01745542
				
	 269.
	  	 XL Debt Recovery Agency Limited
	  	England	  	03303903
				
	 270.
	  	 X-Tant Limited
	  	England	  	03580901
				
	 271.
	  	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	England	  	02490136
				
	 272.
	  	 CableTel Scotland Limited
	  	Scotland	  	SC119938
				
	 273.
	  	 NTL Glasgow
	  	Scotland	  	SC075177
				
	 274.
	  	 Prospectre Limited
	  	Scotland	  	SC145280
				
	 275.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Dundee & Perth) Limited
	  	Scotland	  	SC096816
				
	 276.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Motherwell) Limited
	  	Scotland	  	SC121617
				
	 277.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Scotland Holdings) Limited
	  	Scotland	  	SC150058
				
	 278.
	  	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Limited
	  	Scotland	  	SC080891
				
	 279.
	  	 Chartwell Investors L.P.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 280.
	  	 NNS U.K. Holdings 2, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 281.
	  	 NNS U.K. Holdings 1 LLC
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 282.
	  	 North CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 283.
	  	 North CableComms L.L.C.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 284.
	  	 North CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 285.
	  	 NTL (Triangle) LLC
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 286.
	  	 NTL Bromley Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 287.
	  	 NTL CableComms Group, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 288.
	  	 NTL Chartwell Holdings 2, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 289.
	  	 NTL Chartwell Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 290.
	  	 NTL North CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 291.
	  	 NTL North CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 292.
	  	 NTL Programming Subsidiary Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 293.
	  	 NTL Solent Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 294.
	  	 NTL South CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 295.
	  	 NTL South CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	

  
 215

							
	 296.
	  	 NTL Surrey Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 297.
	  	 NTL Sussex Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 298.
	  	 NTL UK CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 299.
	  	 NTL Wessex Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 300.
	  	 NTL Winston Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 301.
	  	 NTL Wirral Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 302.
	  	 South CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 303.
	  	 South CableComms L.L.C.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 304.
	  	 South CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 305.
	  	 Winston Investors L.L.C.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 306.
	  	 Avon Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 307.
	  	 Cotswolds Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 308.
	  	 Edinburgh Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 309.
	  	 Estuaries Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 310.
	  	 London South Cable Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 311.
	  	 TCI/US West Cable Communications Group
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 312.
	  	 Tyneside Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 313.
	  	 United Cable (London South) Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 314.
	  	 Birmingham Cable Finance Limited
	  	Jersey	  	60972
				
	 315.
	  	 Future Entertainment S.à r.l.
	  	Luxembourg	  	B 145.414

  
 216

 SCHEDULE 2 
 PART 2 - THE RESTRICTED GUARANTORS 
  

							
	 	  	 NAME
	  	 Jurisdiction of
Incorporation
	  	 Company
number

(if applicable)

	 1.
	  	 NTL Bolton Cablevision Holding Company
	  	England	  	02422198
				
	 2.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Bolton
	  	England	  	01883383
				
	 3.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Bromley
	  	England	  	02422195
				
	 4.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Bury and Rochdale
	  	England	  	02446183
				
	 5.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Cheshire
	  	England	  	02379804
				
	 6.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Derby
	  	England	  	02387713
				
	 7.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms East Lancashire
	  	England	  	02114543
				
	 8.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Greater Manchester
	  	England	  	02407924
				
	 9.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Group Limited
	  	England	  	03024703
				
	 10.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Holdings No. 1 Limited
	  	England	  	03709869
				
	 11.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Holdings No. 2 Limited
	  	England	  	03709840
				
	 12.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Macclesfield
	  	England	  	02459067
				
	 13.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Oldham and Tameside
	  	England	  	02446185
				
	 14.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Solent
	  	England	  	02422654
				
	 15.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Staffordshire
	  	England	  	02379800
				
	 16.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Stockport
	  	England	  	02443484
				
	 17.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Surrey
	  	England	  	02531586
				
	 18.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Sussex
	  	England	  	02266092
				
	 19.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Wessex
	  	England	  	02410378
				
	 20.
	  	 NTL Cablecomms Wirral
	  	England	  	02531604
				
	 21.
	  	 NTL Chartwell Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	03290823
				
	 22.
	  	 NTL Derby Cablevision Holding Company
	  	England	  	02422310
				
	 23.
	  	 NTL Glasgow Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	04170072
				
	 24.
	  	 NTL Kirklees
	  	England	  	02495460

  
 217

							
				
	 25.
	  	 NTL Kirklees Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	04169826
				
	 26.
	  	 NTL Manchester Cablevision Holding Company
	  	England	  	02455631
				
	 27.
	  	 NTL Winston Holdings Limited
	  	England	  	03290821
				
	 28.
	  	 NTL Wirral Telephone and Cable TV Company
	  	England	  	02511873
				
	 29.
	  	 NTL Glasgow
	  	Scotland	  	SC075177
				
	 30.
	  	 Chartwell Investors L.P.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 31.
	  	 NNS U.K. Holdings 2, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 32.
	  	 NNS U.K. Holdings 1 LLC
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 33.
	  	 North CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 34.
	  	 North CableComms L.L.C.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 35.
	  	 North CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 36.
	  	 NTL (Triangle) LLC
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 37.
	  	 NTL Bromley Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 38.
	  	 NTL CableComms Group, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 39.
	  	 NTL Chartwell Holdings 2, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 40.
	  	 NTL Chartwell Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 41.
	  	 NTL North CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 42.
	  	 NTL North CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 43.
	  	 NTL Programming Subsidiary Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 44.
	  	 NTL Solent Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 45.
	  	 NTL South CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 46.
	  	 NTL South CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 47.
	  	 NTL Surrey Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 48.
	  	 NTL Sussex Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 49.
	  	 NTL UK CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 50.
	  	 NTL Wessex Company
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 51.
	  	 NTL Winston Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 52.
	  	 NTL Wirral Company
	  	Delaware	  	

  
 218

							
				
	 53.
	  	 South CableComms Holdings, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 54.
	  	 South CableComms L.L.C.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 55.
	  	 South CableComms Management, Inc.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 56.
	  	 Winston Investors L.L.C.
	  	Delaware	  	
				
	 57.
	  	 Avon Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 58.
	  	 Cotswolds Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 59.
	  	 Edinburgh Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 60.
	  	 Estuaries Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 61.
	  	 London South Cable Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 62.
	  	 TCI/US West Cable Communications Group
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 63.
	  	 Tyneside Cable Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	
				
	 64.
	  	 United Cable (London South) Limited Partnership
	  	Colorado	  	

  
 219

 SCHEDULE 2 
 PART 3 - MEMBERS OF THE BANK GROUP 
 Andover Cablevision Limited 

Anglia Cable Communications Limited 
 Avon
Cable Investments Limited 
 Avon Cable Joint Venture 
 Barnsley Cable Communications Limited 
 BCMV Limited 

Berkhamsted Properties & Building Contractors Limited 
 Birmingham Cable Corporation Limited 
 Birmingham Cable Limited 

Blue Yonder Workwise Limited 
 Bluebottle Call
Limited 
 Bradford Cable Communications Limited 
 Bravo TV Limited 
 Cable Adnet Limited 
 Cable Camden Limited 
 Cable Communications (Telecom) Limited 

Cable Communications Limited 
 Cable Enfield
Limited 
 Cable Hackney & Islington Limited 
 Cable Haringey Limited 
 Cable Interactive Limited 

Cable Internet Limited 
 Cable London Limited

 Cable on Demand Limited 
 Cable
Television Limited 
 Cable Thames Valley Limited 
 CableTel (UK) Limited 

  
 220

 CableTel Cardiff Limited 
 CableTel Central Hertfordshire Limited 
 CableTel Hertfordshire Limited 

CableTel Herts and Beds Limited 
 CableTel
Investments Limited 
 CableTel Newport 
 CableTel North Bedfordshire Limited 
 CableTel Surrey and Hampshire Limited 

CableTel Telecom Supplies Limited 
 CableTel
West Glamorgan Limited 
 CableTel West Riding Limited 
 Cambridge Cable Services Limited 
 Cambridge Holding Company Limited 

CCL Corporate Communication Services Limited 

Central Cable Holdings Limited 
 Central Cable
Limited 
 Central Cable Sales Limited 

Challenge TV 
 Chariot Collection Services
Limited 
 Columbia Management Limited 

ComTel Cable Services Limited 
 ComTel Coventry
Limited 
 Continental Shelf 16 Limited 
 Credit-Track Debt Recovery Ltd 
 Crystal Palace Radio Limited 

De Facto 1159 Limited 
 Diamond Cable
Communications Limited 
 Digital Television Network Limited 
 Doncaster Cable Communications Limited 

  
 221

 DTELS Limited 
 East Coast Cable Limited 
 Ed Stone Limited 

EMS Investments Limited 
 Enablis Limited

 Eurobell (Holdings) Limited 

Eurobell (IDA) Limited 
 Eurobell (No. 2)
Limited 
 Eurobell (No. 3) Limited 

Eurobell (No. 4) Limited 
 Eurobell (South
West) Limited 
 Eurobell (Sussex ) Limited 
 Eurobell (West Kent) Limited 
 Eurobell CPE Limited 

Eurobell Internet Services Limited 
 Eurobell
Limited 
 European Business Network Limited 
 Fastrak Limited 
 Filegale Limited 
 Fleximedia Limited 
 Flextech (1992) Limited 

Flextech (Kindernet Investment) Limited 

Flextech (Travel Channel) Limited 
 Flextech
Broadband Holdings Limited 
 Flextech Broadband Limited 
 Flextech Broadcasting Limited 
 Flextech Business News Limited 

Flextech Childrens Channel Limited 
 Flextech
Communications Limited 

  
 222

 Flextech Digital Broadcasting Limited 
 Flextech Distribution Limited 
 Flextech Family Channel Limited 

Flextech Holdco Limited 
 Flextech Homeshopping
Limited 
 Flextech Interactive Limited 
 Flextech IVS Limited 
 Flextech Limited 
 Flextech Media Holdings Limited 
 Flextech Music Publishing Limited 

Flextech Ventures Limited 
 Flextech Video
Games Limited 
 Flextech-Flexinvest Limited 
 General Cable Group Limited 
 General Cable Holdings Limited 

General Cable Investments Limited 
 General
Cable Limited 
 General Cable Programming Limited 
 Halifax Cable Communications Limited 
 Heartland Cablevision (UK) Limited 

Heartland Cablevision II (UK) Limited 
 Herts
Cable Limited 
 Interactive Digital Sales Limited 
 Jewel Holdings 
 Lanbase European Holdings Limited 

Lanbase Limited 
 Lewis Reed Debt Recovery
Limited 
 Lichfield Cable Communications Limited 
 Living TV Limited 

  
 223

 M&NW Network II Limited 
 M&NW Network Limited 
 Matchco Directors Limited 

Matchco Secretaries Limited 
 Maza Limited

 Metro Hertfordshire Limited 
 Metro
South Wales Limited 
 Middlesex Cable Limited 
 Northampton Cable Television Limited 
 Northern Credit Limited 

ntl (Aylesbury and Chiltern) Limited 
 ntl
(B) Limited 
 ntl (Broadland) Limited 
 ntl (City and Westminster) Limited 
 ntl (County Durham) Limited 

ntl (CRUK) 
 ntl (CWC Holdings) 

ntl (CWC) Corporation Limited 
 ntl (CWC)
Limited 
 ntl (CWC) Management Limited 
 ntl (CWC) No. 2 Limited 
 ntl (CWC) No. 3 Limited 

ntl (CWC) No. 4 Limited 
 ntl (CWC)
Programming Limited 
 ntl (CWC) UK 

ntl (Ealing) Limited 
 ntl (Fenland) Limited

 ntl (Greenwich and Lewisham) Limited 
 ntl (Hampshire) Limited 

  
 224

 ntl (Harrogate) Limited 
 ntl (Harrow) Limited 
 ntl (Kent) Limited 

ntl (Lambeth and Southwark) Limited 
 ntl
(Leeds) Limited 
 ntl (Norwich) Limited 
 ntl (Peterborough) Limited 
 ntl (South East) Limited 

ntl (South London) Limited 
 ntl (Southampton
and Eastleigh) Limited 
 ntl (Sunderland) Limited 
 ntl (Thamesmead) Limited 
 ntl (V)
 ntl (Wandsworth) Limited 
 ntl (Wearside) Limited 

ntl (West London) Limited 
 ntl (YorCan)
Limited 
 ntl (York) Limited 
 ntl
Acquisition Company Limited 
 ntl Bolton Cablevision Holding Company 
 ntl Business (Ireland) Limited 
 ntl Business Limited 

ntl CableComms Bolton 
 ntl CableComms Bromley

 ntl CableComms Bury and Rochdale 

ntl CableComms Cheshire 
 ntl CableComms Derby

 ntl CableComms East Lancashire 

ntl CableComms Greater Manchester 

  
 225

 ntl CableComms Group Limited 
 ntl CableComms Holdings No. 1 Limited 
 ntl CableComms Holdings No. 2 Limited

 ntl CableComms Lancashire No. 1 

ntl CableComms Lancashire No. 2 
 ntl
CableComms Limited 
 ntl CableComms Macclesfield 
 ntl CableComms Manchester Limited 
 ntl CableComms Oldham and Tameside 

ntl CableComms Solent 
 ntl CableComms
Staffordshire 
 ntl CableComms Stockport 
 ntl CableComms Surrey 
 ntl CableComms Sussex 

ntl CableComms Wessex 
 ntl CableComms West
Surrey Limited 
 ntl CableComms Wirral 
 ntl Cambridge Limited 
 ntl Chartwell Holdings Limited 

ntl Communications Services Limited 
 ntl
Darlington Limited 
 ntl Derby Cablevision Holding Company 
 ntl Equipment No. 1 Limited 
 ntl Equipment No 2. Limited 

ntl Finance Limited 
 NTL Funding Limited

 ntl Glasgow Holdings Limited 
 ntl
Holdings (Broadland) Limited 
 ntl Holdings (East London) Limited 

  
 226

 ntl Holdings (Fenland) Limited 
 ntl Holdings (Leeds) Limited 
 ntl Holdings (Norwich) Limited 

ntl Holdings (Peterborough) Limited 
 ntl
Internet Limited 
 ntl Internet Services Limited 
 ntl Irish Holdings Limited 
 ntl Kirklees 

ntl Kirklees Holdings Limited 
 ntl Limited

 ntl Manchester Cablevision Holding Company 
 ntl Microclock Services Limited 
 ntl Midlands Limited 

ntl Milton Keynes Limited 
 ntl National
Networks Limited 
 ntl Networks Limited 
 ntl Partcheer Company Limited 
 ntl Rectangle Limited 

ntl Sideoffer Limited 
 ntl Solent Telephone
and Cable TV Company Limited 
 ntl South Central Limited 
 ntl South Wales Limited 
 ntl Streetunique Projects Limited 

ntl Streetunit Projects Limited 
 ntl
Streetusual Services Limited 
 ntl Streetvision Services Limited 
 ntl Streetvital Services Limited 
 ntl Streetwarm Services Limited 

ntl Streetwide Services Limited 

  
 227

 ntl Strikeagent Trading Limited 
 ntl Strikeamount Trading Limited 
 ntl Strikeapart Trading Limited 

ntl Systems Limited 
 ntl Technical Support
Company Limited 
 ntl Teesside Limited 
 ntl Telecom Services Limited 
 ntl UK Telephone and Cable TV Holding Company Limited 

ntl Victoria II Limited 
 ntl Victoria Limited

 ntl Westminster Limited 
 ntl
Winston Holdings Limited 
 ntl Wirral Telephone and Cable TV Company 
 Oxford Cable Limited 
 Pinnacle Debt Recovery Limited 

Rapid Travel Solutions Limited 
 Rotherham
Cable Communications Limited 
 Screenshop Limited 
 Secure Backup Systems Limited 
 Sheffield Cable Communications Limited 

Southern East Anglia Cable Limited 

Southwestern Bell International Holdings Limited 
 Stafford Communications Limited 
 Swindon Cable Limited 

Tamworth Cable Communications Limited 

Telewest Communications (Central Lancashire) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Cotswolds) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Cotswolds) Venture

 Telewest Communications (Fylde & Wyre) Limited 

  
 228

 Telewest Communications (Internet) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Liverpool) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (London South) Joint Venture

 Telewest Communications (London South) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Midlands and North West) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Midlands)
Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Nominees) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (North East) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (North East) Partnership

 Telewest Communications (North West) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Publications) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (South East) Limited

 Telewest Communications (South East) Partnership 
 Telewest Communications (South Thames Estuary) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (South West)
Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Southport) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (St Helens & Knowsley) Limited 
 Telewest Communications
(Taunton & Bridgwater) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Telford) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Tyneside) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Wigan) Limited 

Telewest Communications Cable Limited 

Telewest Communications Holdco Limited 

Telewest Communications Holdings Limited 

Telewest Communications Networks Limited 

Telewest Communications Services Limited 

Telewest Health Trustees Limited 
 Telewest
Limited 
 Telewest Parliamentary Holdings Limited 

  
 229

 Telewest Share Trust Limited 
 Telewest Trustees Limited 
 Telewest UK Limited 

Telewest Workwise Limited 
 Telso
Communications Limited 
 The Cable Corporation Equipment Limited 
 The Cable Corporation Limited 
 The Cable Equipment Store Limited 

The North London Channel Limited 
 The
Yorkshire Cable Group Limited 
 Theseus No.1 Limited 
 Theseus No.2 Limited 
 Trouble TV Limited 

TVS Pension Fund Trustees Limited 
 TVS
Television Limited 
 United Artists Investments Limited 
 Virgin Media Business Limited 
 Virgin Media Directors Limited 

Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited 

Virgin Media Investments Limited 
 Virgin Media
Limited 
 Virgin Media Payments Ltd 

Virgin Media Secretaries Limited 
 Virgin Media
Secured Finance PLC 
 Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited 
 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited 
 Virgin Media Television Limited 

Virgin Media Television Rights Limited 
 Virgin
Mobile Group (UK) Limited 

  
 230

 Virgin Mobile Holdings (UK) Limited 
 Virgin Mobile Telecoms Limited 
 Virgin Net Limited 

Vision Networks Services UK Limited 
 VMIH Sub
Limited 
 Wakefield Cable Communications Limited 
 Wessex Cable Limited 
 Windsor Television Limited 

Workplace Technologies Trustees Company Limited 

XL Debt Recovery Agency Limited 
 X-TANT
Limited 
 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited 
 Yorkshire Cable Finance Limited 
 Yorkshire Cable Limited 

Yorkshire Cable Properties Limited 
 Yorkshire
Cable Telecom Limited 
 CableTel Scotland Limited 
 Capital City Cablevision Limited 
 Dundee Cable and Satellite Limited 

Edinburgh Cablevision Limited 
 Hieronymous
Limited 
 ntl Glasgow 
 Perth Cable
Television Limited 
 Prospectre Limited 
 SANE Network Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Cumbernauld) Limited 

Telewest Communications (Dumbarton) Limited 

Telewest Communications (Dundee & Perth) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (East Lothian and Fife) Limited 

  
 231

 Telewest Communications (Falkirk) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Glenrothes) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Motherwell) Limited

 Telewest Communications (Scotland Holdings) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Limited 
 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture

 Chartwell Investors, L.P. 
 NNS
U.K. Holdings 1 LLC 
 NNS U.K. Holdings 2, Inc. 
 North CableComms Holdings, Inc. 
 North CableComms L.L.C. 

North CableComms Management, Inc. 
 NTL
(Triangle) LLC 
 NTL Bromley Company 

NTL CableComms Group, Inc. 
 NTL Chartwell
Holdings 2, Inc. 
 NTL Chartwell Holdings, Inc. 
 NTL North CableComms Holdings, Inc. 
 NTL North CableComms Management, Inc. 

NTL Programming Subsidiary Company 
 NTL Solent
Company 
 NTL South CableComms Holdings, Inc. 
 NTL South CableComms Management, Inc. 
 NTL Surrey Company 

NTL Sussex Company 
 NTL UK CableComms
Holdings, Inc. 
 NTL Wessex Company 

NTL Winston Holdings, Inc. 
 NTL Wirral Company

  
 232

 South CableComms Holdings, Inc. 
 South CableComms LLC 
 South CableComms Management, Inc. 

Telewest Global Finance LLC 
 Virgin Media
Dover LLC 
 Winston Investors LLC 

Avon Cable Limited Partnership 
 Cotswolds
Cable Limited Partnership 
 Edinburgh Cable Limited Partnership 
 Estuaries Cable Limited Partnership 
 London South Cable Partnership 

TCI/US West Cable Communications Group 

Tyneside Cable Limited Partnership 
 United
Cable (London South) Limited Partnership 
 Future Entertainment Sàrl 
 Birmingham Cable Finance Limited 
 Cable Finance Limited 

IVS Cable Holdings Limited 
 CableTel Northern
Ireland Limited 
 Imminus (Ireland) Limited 

  
 233

 SCHEDULE 3 
 PART 1 - CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO FIRST UTILISATION 
  

	1.	Corporate Documents 

 In
relation to the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, each Original Obligor and, if applicable, each general partner of any Obligor: 
  

	 	(a)	 in the case of a company, a copy of its up-to-date constitutional documents1 or, in the case of a partnership, a copy of its up-to-date partnership agreement; 

 

	 	(b)	a copy of a board resolution or a manager’s or partner’s resolution of such person approving the execution, delivery and performance of any applicable
Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party and the terms and conditions of such Relevant Finance Documents and authorising a person or persons identified by name or office to sign the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is party and any
documents to be delivered by such person pursuant to it; 

  

	 	(c)	a duly completed certificate of a duly authorised officer of such person in the form attached in Part 3 of Schedule 3 (Form of Officer’s Certificate); and

  

	 	(d)	a copy of resolutions signed by all the holders of the issued shares of the Original Obligors incorporated in England, Wales, Jersey and Scotland approving the terms
of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Relevant Finance Documents to which each such Obligor is a party. 

  

	2.	Relevant Finance Documents 

Original duly executed copies of this Agreement. 
 Copies of: 
  

	 	(a)	the Group Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(b)	the HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(c)	the Barclays Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(d)	the Security Trust Agreement; and 

  

	 	(e)	the Original Security Documents. 

  

	3.	Confirmation Deeds 

 An
original duly executed copy of a confirmation deed relating to the Security granted pursuant to the Security Agreement for the following jurisdictions: 
  

	 	(a)	England and Wales; 

  

	 	(b)	Luxembourg; and 

  

	 	(c)	New York. 

  

 

	1 	 Including for Birmingham Cable Finance Limited, a certified copy of the register of members. 

  
 234

	4.	Designation 

 Duly
executed copy of notices of the Company of: 
  

	 	(a)	designating this Agreement as a Designated Refinancing Facilities Agreement in accordance with the terms of the Group Intercreditor Agreement; 

 

	 	(b)	designating the Facilities as New Senior Liabilities in accordance with Clause 12 (New Senior Liabilities) of the Group Intercreditor Agreement;

  

	 	(c)	designating the Facilities as Designated Senior Liabilities in accordance with Clause 8.2 (Designated Senior Liabilities) of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement; and

  

	 	(d)	designating this Agreement as a Refinancing Facilities Agreement in accordance with the terms of the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and confirming that there is no other
such Refinancing Facilities Agreement in place. 

  

	5.	Guarantee Accession 

 For
each Original Guarantor that is not a signatory to this Agreement on the Original Execution Date, an original duly executed copy of an Accession Notice. 
  

	6.	Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited Accession 

 Original duly executed copies of: 
  

	 	(a)	a composite debenture; 

  

	 	(b)	deed of accession to the Group Intercreditor Agreement; and 

  

	 	(c)	deed of accession to the Security Trust Agreement. 

  

	7.	Original Security Documents 

 Original duly executed copies of the documents listed in Schedule 9B. 
  

	8.	Fees 

 Original duly
executed copies of the A Facility Fee Letter and the B Facility Fee Letter, in each case, in the agreed form and evidence that all fees and expenses (excluding legal fees) due and payable under this Agreement or in connection with this Agreement as
at the date of first Utilisation, the quantum of which have been notified to the Company in writing no less than five Business Days prior to the first Utilisation Date, have been paid or will be paid promptly upon receipt of the funds from the first
utilisation. 
  

	9.	Legal Opinions 

 An
opinion of: 
  

	 	(a)	Latham & Watkins (London) LLP, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of English law; 

 

	 	(b)	Fried, Frank, Harris, Shriver & Jacobson (London) LLP, legal advisers to the Obligors on matters of New York law; 

 

	 	(c)	Dundas & Wilson CS LLP, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of Scottish law; 

  
 235

	 	(d)	Mourant du Feu & Jeune, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of Jersey law; 

 

	 	(e)	Morrison & Foerster LLP, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of the laws of the State of Colorado, United States of
America; 

  

	 	(f)	Loyens & Loeff, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of Luxembourg law; and 

 

	 	(g)	LG@Vocats, legal advisers to the Ultimate Parent, the Parent, the Borrowers and the Original Guarantors on matters of Luxembourg law, 

in each case addressed to the Relevant Finance Parties. 
  

	10.	Funds Flow Statement 

 A
funds flow statement in the agreed form detailing the proposed movement of funds on the Utilisation Date. 
  

	11.	Group Structure Chart 

 A
copy of a chart showing in all material respects the structure of the Bank Group and the Holding Companies of the Parent evidencing all material ownership interests thereof as at the Original Execution Date (including the matters set forth in
paragraphs (b) and (c) of Clause 21.19 (Structure)). 
  

	12.	Miscellaneous 

 Copies of:

  

	 	(a)	the Steps Paper; and 

  

	 	(b)	the Tax Cooperation Agreement. 

  

	13.	“Know your client” 

 In respect of each of the Borrowers, copies of each of the documents listed below: 
  

	 	(a)	certificate of incorporation or the local equivalent (including any change of name certificate(s) since establishment); 

 

	 	(b)	memorandum and articles of association, by-laws or the local equivalent; 

  

	 	(c)	list of the directors; 

  

	 	(d)	extract from the share register (or local equivalent) containing a list of the shareholders; 

 

	 	(e)	for at least 2 of the directors: verification of their identity by delivery of a certified copy of their passport or national identity card; verification of their
residential address within the last 3 months by delivery of an original or certified copy of a utility bill (excluding mobile telephone bills), bank statement or other correspondence addressed to them at their residential address from a local
government authority, tax office or similar entity (2 pieces of evidence of residential address for each person being identified); 

  

	 	(f)	address of the relevant company; 

  
 236

	 	(g)	bank account(s) details (account name, name of bank, address) of the relevant company including a list of signatories to the bank account(s); 

 

	 	(h)	commercial register number (or the local equivalent); 

  

	 	(i)	most recent board resolution; and 

  

	 	(j)	financial statements, 

 together
with such other information as the Relevant Finance Parties may require (acting reasonably) for the purposes of complying with its “know your client” procedures and in compliance with applicable laws relating to anti-money laundering.

  

	14.	B Facility Commitments 

Evidence of the Borrowers having obtained B Facility Commitments (or other Substitute Financing) in an aggregate principal amount of not
less than £600 million. 
  

	15.	Repayment of Existing Senior Credit Facilities 

 Evidence that any obligations under the Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement will be repaid and cancelled in full on the first Utilisation Date. 

  
 237

 SCHEDULE 3 
 PART 2 - CONDITIONS SUBSEQUENT DOCUMENTS 
  

	1.	Authorisations and Clearances 

 A copy of each Necessary Authorisation as is, in the reasonable opinion of counsel to the Lenders, necessary to render the Relevant Finance Documents to which the Ultimate Parent, the Parent and each
Original Obligor is party legal, valid, binding and enforceable, to make the Relevant Finance Documents to which the Ultimate Parent, the Parent and each Original Obligor is party admissible in evidence in such Original Obligor’s jurisdiction
of incorporation and in England and to enable the Ultimate Parent, the Parent and such Original Obligor to perform its obligations thereunder, save in each case, for any registration or recording required for the perfection of the Security Documents
and subject to the Reservations (to the extent applicable). 
  

	2.	Existing Encumbrances and Indebtedness 

 Evidence satisfactory to the Facility Agent that all Existing Encumbrances set out in Section 1A of Part 1 of Schedule 10 (Existing Encumbrances) have been released or discharged within 10
Business Days. 

  
 238

 SCHEDULE 3 
 PART 3 - FORM OF OFFICER’S CERTIFICATE 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

 We refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) and made between, inter alia,
Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited as Original Borrowers,
BNP Paribas London Branch and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank, GE Corporate Finance
Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility
Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Certificate. 

I, [name], a [Director/General Partner/Partner/Officer] of [name of Obligor] of [address] (the
[“Company”/“Partnership”]) 
 CERTIFY without personal liability, that: 

 

	 	(a)	 [attached to this Certificate marked “A” are true, correct, complete and up-to-date copies of all documents which contain or establish
or relate to the [constitution of the Company]/[due formation of the Partnership]*] / [the [Company/Partnership] has not amended any of its constitutional documents in a manner which could be reasonably expected to be materially adverse to the
interests of the Lenders since the date such documents were last delivered to the Facility Agent]2; 

  

	 	(b)	attached to this Certificate marked [“A”/”B”] is a true, correct and complete copy of [resolutions duly passed] at [a meeting of the
Board of Directors] [a meeting of the managers] [a meeting of the partners] duly convened and held on [—] or the equivalent thereof passed as a written resolution of the [Company/Partnership]
approving the Relevant Finance Documents to which the [Company/Partnership] is a party and authorising their execution, signature, delivery and performance and such resolutions have not been amended, modified or revoked and are in full force and
effect; 

  

	 	(c)	the entry into and performance of the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is a party by the [Company/Partnership] will not breach any borrowing, guaranteeing or
other indebtedness limit to which the [Company/Partnership] is subject other than any such limit imposed by the Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement; and 

 

	 	(d)	the following signatures are the true signatures of the persons who have been authorised to sign any necessary documents on behalf of the [Company/Partnership] and to
give notices and communications (including Utilisation Requests), under or in connection with the Relevant Finance Documents on behalf of the [Company/Partnership]. 

 

					
	 Name
	  	Position	 	Signature
	 [—]
	  	[—]	 	[—]

  

	2 	 This option is not available on or prior to the first Utilisation. 

  
 239

			
	Signed:	 	 
		 	Director/Partner/Officer
		
	Date:	 	[—]

 I, [name], a [Director/Secretary/General Partner/Partner] of [name of Obligor] (the
[“Company”/“Partnership”]), certify that the persons whose names and signatures are set out above are duly appointed [—] of the [Company/Partnership]
and that the signatures of each of them above are their respective signatures. 
  

			
	Signed:	 	 
		 	[Director/Secretary] [Partner]
		
	Date:	 	[—]

 Notes: 
  

	*	Including for the avoidance of doubt any partnership agreement. 

  
 240

 SCHEDULE 4 
 PART 1 - FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST (ADVANCES) 
  

			
	 From:
	  	 [Name of Borrower] (the “Borrower”)

	 To:
	  	 Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch

		  	 as Facility Agent

	 Date:
	  	 [—]

 Dear Sirs 
 We
refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) and made between, inter alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin
Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited as Original Borrowers, BNP Paribas London Branch and Deutsche Bank AG,
London Branch as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank, GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan
PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Utilisation Request. 
 We, [—] and [—], being authorised signatories of the Borrower named below, give you notice that,
pursuant to the Facilities Agreement, we wish the Lenders to make an Advance on the following terms: 
  

	(a)	Facility to be used: [A/A1/A2/B/B1/Revolving Facility] 

  

	(b)	Sterling Amount: £[—] 

 

	(c)	Currency: [—] 

  

	(d)	Interest Period/Term: [—] month[s] 

 

	(e)	Proposed date of Advance: [—] (or if that day is not a Business Day, the next Business Day) 

[We hereby inform you that as of the date of this Utilisation Request, the following Event of Default has occurred and is continuing
or would result from the making of this Utilisation [insert details].]3 [We confirm that, at the date of this Utilisation Request, the Repeating Representations are true in all material respects and no Default is continuing or would result from the Advance to which this
Utilisation Request relates.]4 

The proceeds of this Utilisation should be credited to [insert account details]. 
 This Utilisation Request is made by the authorised signatories of the Borrower named below and is given without personal liability. 
 Yours faithfully, 
  

	3 	 Applicable for Rollover Advances only. Insert details of relevant Event of Default, if any. 

	4 	 Applicable for any Advance other than a Rollover Advance. 

  
 241

					
	  	 		 	  
	Authorised Signatory
for and on behalf of
[Name of Borrower] 	 		 	Authorised Signatory
for and on behalf of
[Name of Borrower]

  
 242

 SCHEDULE 4 
 PART 2 - FORM OF UTILISATION REQUEST (DOCUMENTARY CREDITS) 
 From: [Name of
Borrower] (the “Borrower”) 
  

			
	To:	  	 Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch

as Facility Agent

		
		  	 and

		
		  	 [—]

as a L/C Bank

		
	Date:	  	 [—]

 Dear Sirs 
 We
refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) and made between, inter alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin
Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited as Original Borrowers, BNP Paribas London Branch and Deutsche Bank AG,
London Branch as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank, GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan
PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Utilisation Request. 
 We, [—] and [—], being authorised signatories of the Borrower named below, give you notice that,
pursuant to the Facilities Agreement, we wish [name of L/C Bank] to issue a Documentary Credit on the following terms: 
  

	(a)	Name of Beneficiary: [—] 

 

	(b)	Address of Beneficiary: [—] 

 

	(c)	Purpose of/Liabilities to be assured by the Documentary Credit: [insert details] 

 

	(d)	Sterling Amount: £[—] 

 

	(e)	Currency: [—] 

  

	(f)	Expiry Date: [—] month[s] 

 

	(g)	Proposed date of issue of Documentary Credit: [—] (or if that day is not a Business Day, the next Business Day)

 [We hereby inform you that as of the date of this Utilisation Request, the following Event of Default has
occurred and is continuing or would result from the issuance of the Documentary Credit requested hereunder [insert details].]5 

 

	5 	 Applicable for Renewal Requests only. Insert details of the relevant Event of Default, if any. 

  
 243

 [We confirm that, at the date of this Utilisation Request, the Repeating Representations
are true in all material respects and no Default is continuing or would result from the issuance of the Documentary Credit to which this Utilisation Request relates.]6 
 Upon
issuance of the Documentary Credit requested hereunder, please send the Documentary Credit to the Beneficiary at the address shown above, with a copy to [insert details of relevant contact at the Borrower]. 

This Utilisation Request is made by the authorised signatories of the Borrower named below and is given without personal liability. 

Yours faithfully 
  

					
	  	 		 	  
	 Authorised Signatory
 for and
on behalf of
 [Name of Borrower]
	 		 	 Authorised Signatory
 for
and on behalf of
 [Name of Borrower]

  
  

	6 	 Applicable to all Utilisation Requests in respect of a Documentary Credit (other than a Renewal Request). 

  
 244

 SCHEDULE 5 
 PART 1 - FORM OF DEED OF TRANSFER AND ACCESSION 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

 This Deed is dated [—] and relates to: 
  

	 	(a)	the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) whereby
certain facilities were made available to the Borrowers under the guarantee of the Guarantors, by a group of banks and other financial institutions on whose behalf Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch acts as Facility Agent in connection therewith;

  

	 	(b)	the HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	 	(c)	the Group Intercreditor Agreement; and 

  

	 	(d)	the Security Trust Agreement. 

  

	1.	Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall, subject to any contrary indication, have the same meanings in this Deed. The terms “Lender”, “New
Lender”, “Lender’s Participation” and “Portion Transferred” are defined in the Schedule to this Deed. 

  

	2.	The Lender: 

  

	 	(a)	confirms that the details in the Schedule to this Deed are an accurate summary of the Lender’s Participation in the Facilities Agreement and the Interest Periods
or Terms (as the case may be) for existing Advances as at the date of this Deed; and 

  

	 	(b)	requests the New Lender to accept and procure the transfer by novation to the New Lender of the Portion Transferred by countersigning and delivering this Deed to the
Facility Agent at its address for the service of notices designated to the Facility Agent in accordance with the Facilities Agreement. 

  

	3.	The New Lender requests the Facility Agent to accept this Deed as being delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to and for the purposes of Clause 37.7
(Transfer Deed) of the Facilities Agreement so as to take effect in accordance with the terms of it on the Transfer Date or on such later date as may be determined in accordance with the terms of it. 

 

	4.	The New Lender confirms that it has received a copy of the Facilities Agreement together with such other information as it has required in connection with this
transaction and that it has not relied and will not rely on the Lender to check or enquire on its behalf into the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any such information and further agrees that it has not relied
and will not rely on the Lender to assess or keep under review on its behalf the financial condition, creditworthiness, condition, affairs, status or nature of any Obligor. 

 

	5.	The New Lender undertakes with the Lender and each of the other parties to the Facilities Agreement that it will perform in accordance with their terms all those
obligations which by the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents will be assumed by it after delivery of this Deed to the Facility Agent and satisfaction of the conditions (if any) subject to which this Deed is expressed to take effect.

  

	6.	 The Lender makes no representation or warranty and assumes no responsibility with respect to the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy or
enforceability of the Facilities Agreement, 

  
 245

	 	
any other Relevant Finance Document or other document relating to it and assumes no responsibility for the financial condition of any Obligor or for the performance and observance by any Obligor
of any of its obligations under the Facilities Agreement, any Relevant Finance Document or any other document relating to it and any and all such conditions and warranties, whether express or implied by Law or otherwise, are excluded.

  

	7.	The Lender gives notice that nothing in this Deed or in the Facilities Agreement (or any Relevant Finance Document or other document relating to it) shall oblige the
Lender (a) to accept a re transfer from the New Lender of the whole or any part of its rights, benefits and/or obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents transferred pursuant to this Deed or (b) to support any losses directly or
indirectly sustained or incurred by the New Lender for any reason whatsoever (including the failure by any Obligor or any other party to the Relevant Finance Documents (or any document relating to them) to perform its obligations under any such
document) and the New Lender acknowledges the absence of any such obligation as is referred to in (a) and (b) above. 

  

	8.	 [The New Lender represents to the Facility Agent and to each relevant Borrower that it is a UK Bank Lender.]7 

OR 
 [The New Lender represents to the Facility Agent and to each relevant Borrower that it is a UK Non-Bank Lender and falls within paragraph
[(a)/(b)]8 of the definition thereof.]9 

OR 
 [The New Lender represents to the Facility Agent and to each relevant Borrower that it is a UK Treaty Lender.]10 
  

	9.	Any New Lender that is a UK Bank Lender or a UK Non-Bank Lender shall deliver to the Facility Agent, on or before the date falling five Business Days before the date
upon which interest next falls due for payment after the date hereof, the following documents evidencing the tax status of the New Lender as indicated above: 

 

			
	 UK Bank Lender
	  	 (i)     certificate of incorporation; and

 
 (ii)    copy of
banking licence.

		
	 UK Non- Bank Lender
	  	 (i)     certificate of incorporation in the UK;
or
  

(ii)    other evidence that the relevant ss. 933-937 Income Tax Act 2007 conditions are
met.

 If a New Lender has previously provided the Company with the above documents (in connection with any
financing made available by such New Lender to the Company) such New Lender shall only be required to confirm in writing that it had previously provided such documents and that there have been no changes to the form of such documents relevant for
these purposes. 
  

	7 	 A Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

	8 	 UK Non-Bank Lender to delete as appropriate. 

	9 	 A Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

	10	 A Lender giving
this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

  
 246

 ACCESSION TO THE HYD INTERCREDITOR AGREEMENT 
 The New Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the HYD Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with effect on and from the date hereof, it will be
bound by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Finance Party as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 
 ACCESSION
TO THE GROUP INTERCREDITOR AGREEMENT 
 The New Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the Group
Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with effect on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the Group Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Lender as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity.

 ACCESSION TO THE SECURITY TRUST AGREEMENT 
 The New Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the Security Trust Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with effect on and from the date hereof, it will be
bound by the Security Trust Agreement as a Beneficiary as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. This Deed, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in
accordance with, English Law. 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF this Deed has been executed as a deed by the parties hereto and is delivered on the
date written above. 

  
 247

 THE SCHEDULE 

 

																	
	 1.
	  				 	 Lender:
	  		 				 			
						
	 2.
	  				 	 New Lender:
	  		 				 			
						
	 3.
	  				 	 Transfer Date:
	  		 				 			
						
	 4.
	  				 	 Lender’s Participation in Term Facilities
	  	Portion Transferred	 				 			
						
		  	 	(a)	  	 	 Lender’s Available A Facility Commitment*
	  	(a)	 				 			
						
		  	 	(b)	  	 	 Lender’s Available A1 Facility Commitment*
	  	(b)	 				 			
						
		  	 	(c)	  	 	 Lender’s Available A2 Facility Commitment*
	  	(c)	 				 			
						
		  	 	(d)	  	 	 Lender’s Available B Facility Commitment*
	  	(d)	 				 			
						
		  	 	(e)	  	 	 Lender’s Available B1 Facility Commitment*
	  	(e)	 				 			
						
	 5.
	  				 	 Lender’s Participation in

Term Facility Outstandings
	  		 	 	Interest Period	  	 	 
 	Portion
Transferred	  
  
						
		  				 	 A Facility Advances
	  		 	 	(a)	  	 	 	(a)	  
						
		  				 	 A1 Facility Advances
	  		 	 	(b)	  	 	 	(b)	  
						
		  				 	 A2 Facility Advances
	  		 	 	(c)	  	 	 	(c)	  
						
		  				 	 B Facility Advances
	  		 	 	(d)	  	 	 	(d)	  
						
		  				 	 B1 Facility Advances
	  		 	 	(e)	  	 	 	(e)	  
						
	 6.
	  	 	[(a)	] 	 	 Lender’s Revolving Facility Commitment
	  		 	 	Portion Transferred	  	 			
						
		  	 	[(b)	] 	 	 Lender’s Ancillary Facility Commitment
	  		 	 
 	Portion Transferred
100%]	  
  	 			

  

	*	Details of the Lender’s Available Commitment should not be completed after the applicable Termination Date. 

 

	*	Details of the Lender’s Available Commitment should not be completed after the applicable Termination Date. 

 

	*	Details of the Lender’s Available Commitment should not be completed after the applicable Termination Date. 

 

	*	Details of the Lender’s Available Commitment should not be completed after the applicable Termination Date. 

 

	*	Details of the Lender’s Available Commitment should not be completed after the applicable Termination Date. 

  
 248

															
						
	 7.
	  	 	[(a)	] 	 	 Lender’s Participation in Revolving Facility Outstandings
	  	Term	  	 	Portion Transferred	  	 	
						
		  	 	[(b)	] 	 	 Lender’s Participation in Ancillary Facility Outstandings
	  		  	 
 	Portion Transferred
100%]	  
  	 	
						
	 8.
	  				 	 [Documentary Credits Issued
	  	Term and Expiry Date	  	 
 	Portion
Transferred]	  
  	 	

  
 249

			
	The Lender	  	The Transferee
		
	 EXECUTED as a DEED by for and on
  

behalf of
[                                ]

 
 By:
  

By:
	  	 EXECUTED as a DEED by for and on
  

behalf of
[                                ]

 
 By:
  

By:

		
	The Facility Agent	  	
		
	 EXECUTED as a DEED by for and on
  

behalf of DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH
  

By:
	  	

 By: 
  

 
 ADMINISTRATIVE AND FACILITY OFFICE DETAILS

  

	1.	Facility Office Address (in relation to the Transferee’s tax status as set out in paragraph 8 above): 

Please provide administrative details of the Transferee, to the extent such details have not been provided to the Facility Agent by
way of a prior administrative form. 
  

	2.	Administrative Office Address: 

 Contact Name: 
 Account for Payments: 

Fax: 
 Telephone:

  
 250

 SCHEDULE 5 
 PART 2 - FORM OF B FACILITY ACCESSION DEED 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

 Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited (the “Company”) 
 This Deed is dated [—] and relates to: 
  

	(a)	the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) whereby
certain facilities were made available to the Borrowers under the guarantee of the Guarantors, by a group of banks and other financial institutions on whose behalf Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch acts as Facility Agent in connection therewith;

  

	(b)	the HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	(c)	the Group Intercreditor Agreement; and 

  

	(d)	the Security Trust Agreement. 

  

	1.	 Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall, subject to any contrary indication, have the same meanings in this Deed. The B Facility made available
under this Deed shall be designated as the
“[BX]11
 Facility”. [The/Each] “[BX] Facility Lender” and [the/each] “[BX] Facility
Borrower” is set out on the Schedule to this Deed. 

  

	2.	[Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender confirms that the details in the Schedule to this Deed are an accurate summary of [such/the] [BX] Facility Lender’s Commitment in
the [BX] Facility. 

  

	3.	[Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender requests the Facility Agent and the Company to accept this Deed as being delivered to the Facility Agent and the Company pursuant to and
for the purposes of Clause 2.1(b) (The Facilities) of the Facilities Agreement. 

  

	4.	[Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender confirms that it has received a copy of the Facilities Agreement together with such other information as it has required in connection
with this transaction and that it has not relied and will not rely on any other Relevant Finance Party to check or enquire on its behalf into the legality, validity, effectiveness, adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any such information and
further agrees that it has not relied and will not rely on any other Relevant Finance Party to assess or keep under review on its behalf the financial condition, creditworthiness, condition, affairs, status or nature of the Parent or any Obligor.

  

	5.	[Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender agrees to become party to and to be bound by the terms of the Facilities Agreement as a B Facility Lender. 

 

	6.	The Termination Date in respect of the [BX] Facility is [    ]. 

 

	7.	The [BX] Facility Margin is [    ] per annum. [The [BX] Facility Margin shall be subject to reduction and increase as follows: [Insert ratchet
provision].] 

  

	11 	 Insert designation of the relevant B Facility, if applicable, e.g., B1, B2 or B3. 

  
 251

	8.	The Maturity Date in respect of the [BX] Facility is [    ]. 

 

	9.	[Insert prepayment premium provision if applicable.] 

  

	10.	[The issue price of the [BX] Facility is [    ].] 

  

	11.	[Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender undertakes with the Company and each of the other Relevant Finance Parties that it will perform in accordance with their terms all those
obligations which by the terms of the Relevant Finance Documents will be assumed by it after delivery of this Deed to the Facility Agent and satisfaction of the conditions (if any) subject to which this Deed is expressed to take effect.

  

	12.	The Company undertakes to deliver to any [BX] Facility Lender that has not previously received it, a copy of the annual operating budget in respect of the financial
year ending 31 December 2010 that was delivered to the Lenders under the Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement. 

  

	13.	 [[Each of] [Insert name of relevant BX Facility Lender(s)] represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company that is a UK Bank Lender.]12 

AND/OR 
 [[Each of] [Insert name of relevant BX Facility Lender(s)]represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company that it is a UK Non-Bank Lender and falls within paragraph [(a)/(b)]13 of the definition thereof.]14 

AND/OR 
 [[Each of] [Insert name of relevant BX Facility Lender(s)]represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company that it is a UK Treaty Lender.]15 
  

	14.	Each [BX] Facility Lender that is a UK Bank or UK Non-Bank Lender shall deliver to the Facility Agent, on or before the date falling five Business Days before the date
upon which interest next falls due for payment after the date hereof, the following documents evidencing the tax status of such [BX] Facility Lender as indicated above: 

 

			
	 UK Bank Lender
	  	 (i)     certificate of incorporation; and

 
 (ii)    copy of
banking licence.

		
	 UK Non- Bank Lender
	  	 (i)     certificate of incorporation in the UK;
or
  

(ii)    other evidence that the relevant ss. 933-937 Income Tax Act 2007 are
met.

  

	12 	 A [BX] Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender and may lend to any Borrower incorporated in the United Kingdom.

  

	13 	 UK Non- Bank Lender to delete as appropriate. 

  

	14 	 A [BX] Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender and may lend to any Borrower incorporated in the United Kingdom.

  

	15 	 A [BX] Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender and may lend to any Borrower incorporated in the United Kingdom.

  
 252

 If a [BX] Facility Lender has previously provided the Company with the above documents (in
connection with any financing made available by such [BX] Facility Lender to the Company) such [BX] Facility Lender shall only be required to confirm in writing that it had previously provided such documents and that there have been no changes to
the form of such documents relevant for these purposes. 
 ACCESSION TO THE HYD INTERCREDITOR AGREEMENT 

[Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the HYD Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with the
terms thereof that with effect on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Finance Party and as a Senior Lender as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 

ACCESSION TO THE GROUP INTERCREDITOR AGREEMENT 
 [Each/The] [BX] Facility Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with effect on and from the date
hereof, it will be bound by the Group Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Finance Party and as a Senior Lender as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 
 This Deed, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, English Law. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF this Deed has been executed as a deed by the parties hereto and is delivered on the date written above. 

  
 253

 THE SCHEDULE 

 

			
	 Name of [BX] Facility Lender
	  	 [BX] Facility Lender’s
Commitment

	 [—]
	  	 [—]

  

	
	 Name of [BX] Facility Borrower

	 [—]

  
 254

					
	[Insert Appropriate Signature Block for Each BX Facility Lender]	 		  	
			
	 The Facility Agent
  

EXECUTED as a DEED for and on behalf of

 
 DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON
BRANCH
  
 By:
	 		  	By:
			
	 The Company
  

EXECUTED as a DEED for and on behalf of
  

VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT HOLDINGS LIMITED acting by:
  

Director     ____________________________

         [Insert name of director]

         ____________________________

         Witness

 

         Name:

         Address:

         Occupation:

 
	 		  	

  

Administrative Details of [BX] Facility Lender and its Facility
Office16 

Facility Office Address in relation to its tax status as set out in paragraph 14 above: 
 Administrative Office: 
 Contact Name: 
 Account for Payments: 
 Fax: 
 Telephone: 
  

	16 	 To be replicated for each [BX] Facility Lender 

  
 255

 SCHEDULE 5 
 PART 3 - FORM OF ACCESSION NOTICE 
 THIS ACCESSION NOTICE is entered into on [—] by [insert name of Holding Company] (“Holdco”)] / [[insert name of Subsidiary] (the “Subsidiary”)] and [Virgin Media Finance PLC (the
“Parent”)] [Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited (the “Company”)] by way of a deed in favour of the Facility Agent, the Mandated Lead Arrangers and the Lenders (each as defined in the Facilities Agreement
referred to below). 
 BACKGROUND 
  

	(A)	We refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities
Agreement”) and made between, inter alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and Virgin
Media SFA Finance Limited as Original Borrowers, BNP Paribas London Branch and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole
Corporate and Investment Bank, GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead
Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. 

 

	(B)	[The Subsidiary is required to accede to the Facilities Agreement as an Acceding Guarantor pursuant to Clause 3.1 (Conditions Precedent) and Clause 26.2
(Acceding Guarantors).] 

 OR 

[The Company has requested that the Subsidiary becomes an Acceding Borrower and an Acceding Guarantor pursuant to Clause 26.1
(Acceding Borrowers) of the Facilities Agreement.] 
 OR 

[The Company has requested that the Subsidiary become an Acceding Guarantor pursuant to Clause 26.2 (Acceding Guarantors) of
the Facilities Agreement.] 
 OR 
 [The Company has requested that Holdco becomes a party to this Agreement as the Ultimate Parent pursuant to Clause 26.3 (Acceding Holding Company) of the Facilities Agreement.] 

NOW THIS DEED WITNESS AS FOLLOWS: 
  

	1.	Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement have the same meanings in this Accession Notice. 

 

	2.	[The Subsidiary/Holdco] is a company [or specify any other type of entity] duly incorporated, established or organised under the laws of [insert relevant
jurisdiction]. 

  

	3.	[The Subsidiary/Holdco] confirms that it has received from the Company a true and up-to-date copy of the Facilities Agreement and the other Relevant Finance Documents.

  

	4.	 [The Subsidiary/Holdco] undertakes, upon its becoming a [party to the Facilities Agreement/Borrower/Guarantor], to perform all the obligations
expressed to be undertaken 

  
 256

	 	
under the Facilities Agreement, [the Group Intercreditor Agreement], [the HYD Intercreditor Agreement] and the other Relevant Finance Documents by a [Borrower] [Guarantor] [Holdco] and agrees
that it shall be bound by the Facilities Agreement, [the Group Intercreditor Agreement], [the HYD Intercreditor Agreement], [the Supplemental HYD Intercreditor Agreement]17 and the other Relevant Finance Documents in all respects as if it had been an original party to them as [a Borrower]
[a Guarantor] [the Ultimate Parent]18.

  

	5.	The Company: 

  

	 	(a)	repeats the Repeating Representations identified as being made by it under Clause 21 (Representations and Warranties) upon the date [the Subsidiary/Holdco]
accedes to the Facilities Agreement; and 

  

	 	(b)	confirms that no Default [(other than any Default which will be remedied by the accession of the [Acceding Borrower][Acceding Guarantor] and each other person acceding
as a [Borrower][Guarantor] on or about the date of this Accession Notice)] is continuing or will occur as a result of [the Subsidiary/Holdco] becoming an [Acceding Borrower/an Acceding Guarantor/ a party to this Agreement]. 

 

	6.	 [The Subsidiary makes, in relation to itself, the representations and warranties expressed to be made by a Guarantor in Clause 21 (Representations
and Warranties) of the Facilities Agreement.]19

 OR 
 [The Subsidiary makes, in relation to itself, the Repeating Representations expressed to be made by a Borrower in Clause 21 (Representations and Warranties) of the Facilities Agreement] 

OR 
 [The Subsidiary makes, in relation to itself, the Repeating Representations expressed to be made by a Guarantor in Clause 21 (Representations and Warranties) of the Facilities Agreement]20 

OR 
 [Holdco makes, in relation to itself, the Repeating Representations expressed to be made by the Ultimate Parent in Clause 21 (Representations and Warranties) of the Facilities Agreement]21 

 

	7.	 [The Subsidiary hereby represents that it is subject to or is potentially liable to US Federal Income Taxes or its members or shareholders are liable
or potentially liable to US Federal Income Taxes in respect of its net income or profit and upon its accession to the Facilities Agreement as an Acceding Guarantor, it will be a Restricted Guarantor.]22 

 

	8.	 [[The Subsidiary/Holdco] confirms that it has appointed [Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited] to be its process agent for the purposes of
accepting service of Proceedings on it.]23

  

	17 	 Delete if inapplicable. 

	18 	 Insert any legal limitations on guarantee, if applicable. 

	19 	 Original Guarantors only. 

	20 	 Acceding Guarantors only. 

	21 	 Acceding Holdco only. 

	22 	 Restricted Guarantors only. 

	23 	 Non-English entities only. 

  
 257

	9.	[The Subsidiary/Holdco]’s administrative details for the purposes of the Facilities Agreement are as follows: 

Address: 

Contact: 

Telephone No: 

Fax No: 
  

	10.	This Accession Notice, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with,
English Law. 

 This Accession Notice has been executed as a Deed by the Company and [the Parent/The Subsidiary /Holdco] and
signed by the Facility Agent on the date written at the beginning of this Accession Notice. 
  

					
	[THE SUBSIDIARY	 		 	
			
	 EXECUTED as a DEED by
 [Name of Subsidiary] acting by
	 		 	 
			
	Director	 	)	 	 
		 		 	[insert name of director]
			
		 	)	 	 
		 		 	 WITNESS
 Witness
name:
 Address:

Occupation:

			
	OR	 		 	
			
	[HOLDCO	 		 	
			
	 EXECUTED as a DEED

by [Insert name of Holdco] acting by
	 		 	
			
	Director	 	)	 	 
		 		 	[insert name of director]
			
		 	)	 	 
		 		 	 WITNESS
 Witness
name:
 Address:

Occupation:

  
 258

 THE COMPANY 
 EXECUTED as a DEED by  
 VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT HOLDINGS LIMITED

 acting by 
  

					
	Director	 	)	 	 
		 		 	[insert name of director]
			
	 	 	)	 	  
		 		 	WITNESS
		 		 	Witness name:
		 		 	Address:
		 		 	Occupation:

 THE FACILITY AGENT 
 DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH 
 By: 

By: 

  
 259

 SCHEDULE 5 
 PART 4 - ACCESSION DOCUMENTS 
  

	1.	Corporate Documents 

 In
relation to the proposed Acceding Group Company: 
  

	 	(a)	a copy of its up-to-date constitutional documents; 

  

	 	(b)	a board resolution or a manager’s resolution or a partner’s resolution of such person approving the execution and delivery of the relevant Accession Notice,
its accession to the Facilities Agreement as an Acceding Guarantor, Acceding Holding Company or Acceding Borrower, as applicable, and the performance of its obligations under the Relevant Finance Documents and authorising a person or persons
identified by name or office to sign such Accession Notice and any other documents to be delivered by it pursuant thereto; 

  

	 	(c)	to the extent legally necessary, a copy of a shareholders’ resolution of all the shareholders of such person approving the execution, delivery and performance of
the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is a party and the terms and conditions to it; and 

  

	 	(d)	a duly completed certificate of a duly authorised officer of such person substantially in the form of Part 3 of Schedule 3 (Form of Officer’s Certificate).

  

	2.	Legal Opinions 

 Such
legal opinions as the Facility Agent may reasonably require of such legal advisers as may be acceptable to the Facility Agent, as to: 
  

	 	(a)	the due incorporation, capacity and authorisation of the relevant Acceding Group Company; and 

 

	 	(b)	the relevant obligations to be assumed by the relevant Acceding Group Company under the Relevant Finance Documents to which it is a party being legal, valid, binding
and enforceable against it, 

 in each case, under the relevant laws of the jurisdiction of organisation or
establishment of such Acceding Group Company, as the case may be. 
  

	3.	Necessary Authorisations 

A copy of any Necessary Authorisation as is in, the reasonable opinion of counsel to the Lenders necessary to render the Relevant Finance
Documents to which the relevant Acceding Group Company, is or is to be party legal, valid, binding and enforceable, to make the Relevant Finance Documents to which the relevant Acceding Group Company is or is to be party admissible in evidence in
such Acceding Group Company’s jurisdiction of incorporation and (if different) in England and to enable such Acceding Group Company to perform its obligations thereunder, as a matter of law save, in the case of any Acceding Guarantor or
Acceding Borrower, for any registrations or recordings required for the perfection of the Security Documents and subject to the Reservations (to the extent applicable). 

  
 260

	4.	Security Documents 

 In
the case of an Acceding Guarantor or Acceding Borrower, at least 2 original copies of any Security Documents required by the Facility Agent, acting reasonably in accordance with the terms of this Agreement duly executed by the proposed Acceding
Guarantor or Acceding Borrower together with all documents required to be delivered pursuant to it provided the Acceding Guarantor or Acceding Borrower shall be under no obligation to procure the granting of Security over any shares, in receivables
owed by, or any other interest in any Bank Group Excluding Subsidiary or Project Company. 
  

	5.	Process Agent 

 Written
confirmation from any process agent referred to in the relevant Accession Notice that it accepts its appointment as process agent. 
  

	6.	Financial Statements 

 The
latest annual audited financial statements of the relevant Acceding Group Company, if any. 

  
 261

 SCHEDULE 6 
 PART 1 – FORM OF ADDITIONAL FACILITY ACCESSION DEED 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

 [Date] 
 Dear Sirs 
 Additional Facility Accession Deed 
 This Deed is dated
[—] and relates to: 
  

	(a)	the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) whereby
certain facilities were made available to the Borrowers under the guarantee of the Guarantors, by a group of banks and other financial institutions on whose behalf Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch acts as Facility Agent in connection therewith;

  

	(b)	the HYD Intercreditor Agreement; 

  

	(c)	the Group Intercreditor Agreement; and 

  

	(d)	the Security Trust Agreement. 

  

	1.	Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meaning in this Additional Facility Accession Deed. 

 

	2.	We refer to Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility) of the Facilities Agreement. 

 

	3.	[Unless otherwise indicated herein, the terms of this Additional Facility Accession Deed shall be consistent in all material respects with the terms of the Facilities
Agreement including, without limitation, with respect to interest period, conditions precedent, tax gross-up provisions and indemnity provisions, representations and warranties, utilisation mechanics, cancellation and prepayment (including the
treatment of this Additional Facility Accession Deed under the prepayment waterfall), fees, costs and expenses, transfers, voting, amendments and waivers, financial and non-financial covenants and events of default.] 

 

	4.	No Utilisation may be made of the Additional Facility made available pursuant to this Additional Facility Accession Deed, if, at the time of such Utilisation, an Event
of Default is continuing or would result from such Utilisation. 

  

	5.	This Additional Facility Accession Deed is made as a [term loan/revolving loan]. 

 

	6.	[Each of] [Name of Additional Facility Lender(s)] agrees to become party to and to be bound by the terms of the Facilities Agreement as an Additional Facility Lender in
accordance with Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility). 

  

	7.	The aggregate principal amount of the Additional Facility being made available under this Additional Facility Accession Deed is EUR/US$/Sterling
[    ]. 

  

	8.	The Additional Facility Availability Period is [    ]. 

  
 262

	9.	Interest on the Additional Facility will accrue and be payable as follows: [    ]. The Additional Facility Margin is [    ] per
annum. 

  

	10.	 The Final Maturity
Date24 in respect of the Additional Facility is
[    ]. 

  

	11.	Use of proceeds: [    ]. 

  

	12.	The Additional Facility shall be repaid as follows: [    ]. 

 

	13.	The Additional Facility Commencement Date is [    ]. 

  

	14.	The commitment fee in relation to this Additional Facility under Clause 16 (Commissions and Fees) is [    ] per cent. per annum.

  

	15.	[Add additional terms of the Additional Facility, as required, as set out in Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility)] 

 

	16.	The Company confirms that all requirements of paragraph (a) of Clause 2.6 (Additional Facility) are fulfilled as of the date of this Additional Facility
Accession Deed; 

  

	17.	[[Each/The] Additional Facility Lender and [each/the] Additional Facility Borrower confirms that the Additional Facility being made available pursuant to this
Additional Facility Accession Deed shares in the Security on a junior basis to the Facilities]. 

  

	18.	[Each/The] Additional Facility Lender confirms to each other Relevant Finance Party that: 

 

	 	(a)	it has made its own independent investigation and assessment of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and such Obligor’s related entities in
connection with its participation in the Additional Facility being made available pursuant to this Additional Facility Accession Deed and has not relied on any information provided to it by any other Relevant Finance Party in connection with any
Relevant Finance Document; and 

  

	 	(b)	it will continue to make its own independent appraisal of the creditworthiness of each Obligor and such Obligor’s related entities while any amount is or may be
outstanding under the Facilities Agreement or any Additional Facility Commitment is in force. 

  

	19.	The Facility Office and address for notices of [each/the] Additional Facility Lender for the purposes of Clause 41 (Notices and Delivery of Information) is:

 [            ] 

 

	20.	This Additional Facility Accession Deed, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in
accordance with, English Law. 

  

	21.	 [[Each of] [Insert name of relevant Additional Facility Lender(s)] represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company that is a UK Bank
Lender.]25 

 

	24 	 The Final Maturity Date shall be no earlier than 31 December 2015 and, in the event that there’s provision for any scheduled repayments prior
to this date, the average life to maturity shall not be shorter than the average life to maturity of any A Facility outstanding under the Facilities Agreement at the time of establishment of such Additional Facility. 

	25 	 An Additional Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

  
 263

 AND/OR 

[[Each of] [Insert name of relevant Additional Facility Lender(s)] represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company
that it is a UK Non-Bank Lender and falls within paragraph [(a)/(b)]26 of the definition thereof.]27 
 AND/OR 

[[Each of] [Insert name of relevant Additional Facility Lender(s)] represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company
that it is a UK Treaty Lender.]28 

AND/OR 
 [[Each of] [Insert name of relevant Additional Facility Lender(s)] represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company that it is a UK Treaty Lender.]29 

AND/OR 
 [[Each of] [Insert name of relevant Additional Facility Lender(s)] represents to the Facility Agent and to the Company that it is not a Qualifying UK Lender.] 

 

	22.	Each Additional Facility Lender that is a UK Bank Lender or a UK Non-Bank Lender shall deliver to the Facility Agent, on or before the date falling five Business Days
before the date upon which interest next falls due for payment after the date hereof, the following documents evidencing the tax status of such Additional Facility Lender as indicated above: 

 

			
		
	 UK   Bank Lender
	  	 (i)     certificate of incorporation; and

 
 (ii)    copy
of banking licence.

		
	 UK   Non- Bank Lender
	  	 (i)     certificate of incorporation in the UK; or

 
 (ii)    other
evidence that the relevant ss. 933-937 Income Tax Act 2007 conditions are met.

 If an Additional Facility Lender has previously provided the Company with the above documents (in
connection with any financing made available by such Additional Facility Lender to the Company) such Additional Facility Lender shall only be required to confirm in writing that it had previously provided such documents and that there have been no
changes to the form of such documents relevant for these purposes. 
 ACCESSION TO THE HYD INTERCREDITOR AGREEMENT 

[Each/The] Additional Facility Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the HYD Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with
the terms thereof that with effect on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Finance Party and as a Senior Lender as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 

 

	26 	 UK Non-Bank Lender to delete as appropriate. 

	27 	 An Additional Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

	28 	 An Additional Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

	29 	 An Additional Facility Lender giving this representation is a Qualifying UK Lender. 

  
 264

 ACCESSION TO THE GROUP INTERCREDITOR AGREEMENT 

[Each/The] Additional Facility Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with
the terms thereof that with effect on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the Group Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Finance Party and as a Senior Lender as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 

This Deed, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with,
English Law. 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF this Deed has been executed as a deed by the parties hereto and is delivered on the date written
above. 
 [INSERT APPROPRIATE SIGNATURE BLOCK FOR EACH ADDITIONAL FACILITY LENDER(S)] 

THE COMPANY 
 EXECUTED as a
DEED for and on behalf of 
 VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT HOLDINGS LIMITED acting by: 

 

			
		
	Director	 	 
		 	[Insert name of director]
		
		 	 
		 	Witness
		
		 	Name:
		 	Address:
		 	Occupation:

 [INSERT APPROPRIATE SIGNATURE BLOCK FOR EACH ADDITIONAL FACILITY BORROWER] 

THE FACILITY AGENT 
 EXECUTED
as a DEED for and on behalf of 
 DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH 

 

									
	By:	 		 		 	By:	 	

  
  

Administrative Details of Additional Facility Lender and its Facility Office30 
 Facility Office Address in relation to its tax status as set out in paragraph 21 above: 

Administrative Office: 
  

 

	30 	 To be replicated for each Additional Facility Lender 

  
 265

 Contact Name: 
 Account for Payments: 
 Fax: 
 Telephone: 

  
 266

 SCHEDULE 6 
 PART 2 - CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO ADDITIONAL FACILITY UTILISATION 
  

	1.	Corporate Documents 

 In
relation to each Borrower in respect of the Additional Facility: 
  

	 	(a)	a copy of its up-to-date constitutional documents or a certificate of an authorised officer of the Company confirming that such Borrower has not amended its
constitutional documents in a manner which could reasonably be expected to be materially adverse to the interests of the Lenders since the date the Obligor’s Certificate in relation to such Obligor was last delivered to the Facility Agent.

  

	 	(b)	a copy of a board resolution or a manager’s or partner’s resolution of such person approving the incurrence by such person of the indebtedness under the
Additional Facility; and 

  

	 	(c)	a duly completed certificate of a duly authorised officer of such person in the form attached in Part 3 of Schedule 6 (Form of Additional Facility Officer’s
Certificate) with such amendments as the Facility Agent may agree. 

  

	2.	Fees 

 Evidence that the
agreed fees payable by the Company in connection with the utilisation of the Additional Facility have been or will be paid. 
  

	3.	Designation 

 Duly
executed copy of notices of the Company of: 
  

	 	(a)	designating the Additional Facility as New Senior Liabilities in accordance with Clause 12 (New Senior Liabilities) of the Group Intercreditor Agreement; and

  

	 	(b)	designating the Additional Facility as Designated Senior Liabilities in accordance with Clause 8.2 (Designated Senior Liabilities) of the HYD Intercreditor
Agreement. 

  

	4.	Legal Opinions 

 An
opinion of: 
  

	 	(a)	Latham & Watkins (London) LLP, legal advisers to the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers on matters of English law; and 

 

	 	(b)	Fried, Frank, Harris, Shriver & Jacobson (London) LLP, legal advisers to Obligors on matters of New York law. 

  
 267

 SCHEDULE 6 
 PART 3 - FORM OF ADDITIONAL FACILITY OFFICER’S CERTIFICATE 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

 We refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) and made between, inter
alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited as Original
Borrowers, BNP Paribas London Branch and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank, GE Corporate
Finance Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as
Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Certificate. 

I, [name], a [Director/Partner/General Partner/Officer] of [name of Obligor] of [address] (the
[“Company”/”Partnership”]) 
 CERTIFY without personal liability, that: 

 

	(a)	[attached to this Certificate marked “A” are true, correct, complete and up-to-date copies of all documents which contain or establish or relate to the
constitution of the [Company/Partnership];] / [the [Company/Partnership] has not amended any of its constitutional documents in a manner which could be reasonably expected to be materially adverse to the interests of the Lenders since the date such
documents were last delivered to the Facility Agent]; 

  

	(b)	attached to this Certificate marked [“A”/“B”] is a true, correct and complete copy of [resolutions duly passed] at [a meeting of the
Board of Directors] [a meeting of the managers] [a meeting of the partners] duly convened and held on [—] or the equivalent thereof passed as a written resolution of the [Company/Partnership]
approving the Relevant Finance Documents to which the [Company/Partnership] is a party and authorising their execution, signature, delivery and performance and such resolutions have not been amended, modified or revoked and are in full force and
effect; and 

  

	(c)	the incurrence of the indebtedness under the Additional Facility by the [Company/Partnership] will not breach any borrowing, guaranteeing or other indebtedness limit to
which the [Company/Partnership] is subject. 

  
 268

 SCHEDULE 7 
 MANDATORY COST FORMULA 
  

	1.	The Mandatory Cost is an addition to the interest rate in relation to the cost of compliance with (a) the requirements of the Bank of England and/or the Financial
Services Authority (or, in either case, any other authority which replaces all or any of its functions) or (b) the requirements of the European Central Bank. 

 

	2.	On the first day of each Interest Period (or as soon as possible thereafter) the Facility Agent shall calculate, as a percentage rate, a rate (the “Additional
Cost Rate”) in accordance with the paragraphs set out below. The Mandatory Cost will be calculated by the Facility Agent by reference to the Facility Agent’s own rates and will be expressed as a percentage rate per annum.

  

	3.	The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in a Participating Member State will be the percentage determined by the Facility Agent as the
cost of complying with the minimum reserve requirements of the European Central Bank. 

  

	4.	The Additional Cost Rate for any Lender lending from a Facility Office in the United Kingdom will be calculated by the Facility Agent as follows:

  

	 	(a)	in relation to a domestic Sterling Advance: 

  

			
	AB + C(B – D) + E x 0.01	 	per cent. per annum
	100 – (A + C)          	 

  

	 	(b)	in relation to an Advance in any currency other than domestic Sterling: 

  

			
	E x 0.01	 	per cent. per annum
	300    	 

 Where: 
  

	 	(A)	is the percentage of Eligible Liabilities (assuming these to be in excess of any stated minimum) which that Lender is from time to time required to maintain as an
interest free cash ratio deposit with the Bank of England to comply with cash ratio requirements; 

  

	 	(B)	is the percentage rate of interest (excluding the Margin and the Mandatory Cost and if the Advance is subject to default interest under Clause 28 (Default
Interest) the additional rate specified in Clause 28 (Default Interest)) payable for the relevant Interest Period on the Advance; 

  

	 	(C)	is the percentage (if any) of Eligible Liabilities which that Lender is required from time to time to maintain as interest bearing Special Deposits with the Bank of
England; 

  

	 	(D)	is the percentage rate per annum payable by the Bank of England to the Facility Agent on interest bearing Special Deposits; and 

 

	 	(E)	 is the rate of charge payable by the Facility Agent to the Financial Services Authority pursuant to the Fees Regulations (but, for this purpose,
ignoring any minimum fee 

  
 269

	 	
required pursuant to the Fees Regulations) and expressed in pounds per £1,000,000 of the Fee Base of the Facility Agent. 

 

	5.	For the purposes of this Schedule 7: 

  

	 	(a)	“Eligible Liabilities” and “Special Deposits” have the meanings given to them from time to time under or pursuant to the Bank of
England Act 1998 or (as may be appropriate) by the Bank of England; 

  

	 	(b)	“Fees Regulations” means the Banking Supervision (Fees) Regulations 2001 or such other law or regulation as may be in force from time to time in
respect of the payment of fees for banking supervision; 

  

	 	(c)	“Fee Base” has the meaning given to it, and will be calculated in accordance with, the Fees Regulations; 

 

	 	(d)	“Fee Tariffs” means the fee tariffs specified in the Fees Regulations under the activity group A.1 Deposit acceptors (ignoring any minimum fee or zero
rated fee required pursuant to the Fees Regulations but taking into account any applicable discount rate); and 

  

	 	(e)	“Tariff Base” has the meaning given to it in, and will be calculated in accordance with, the Fees Regulations. 

 

	6.	In application of the above formulae, A, B, C and D will be included in the formulae as percentages (i.e. 5.00 per cent. will be included in the formulae as 5 and
not as 0.05). A negative result obtained by subtracting D from B shall be taken as zero. The resulting figures shall be rounded to four decimal places. 

  

	7.	If requested by the Facility Agent, each Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank shall, as soon as practicable after publication by the Financial Services
Authority, supply to the Facility Agent the rate of charge payable by that Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank to the Financial Services Authority pursuant to the Fees Rules in respect of the relevant financial year of the Financial
Services Authority (calculated for this purpose by that Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank as being the average of the Fee Tariffs applicable to that Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank for that financial year) and expressed in
pounds per £1,000,000 of the Tariff Base of that Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank. 

  

	8.	Each Lender shall supply any information required by the Facility Agent for the purpose of calculating its Additional Cost Rate. In particular, but without limitation,
each Lender shall supply the following information on or prior to the date on which it becomes a Lender: 

  

	 	(a)	the jurisdiction of its Facility Office; and 

  

	 	(b)	any other information that the Facility Agent may reasonably require for such purpose. 

 

	9.	Each Lender shall promptly notify the Facility Agent of any change to the information provided by it pursuant to this paragraph. 

 

	10.	 The percentages of each Lender for the purpose of A and C above and the rates of charge of each Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank for the
purpose of E above shall be determined by the Facility Agent based upon the information supplied to it pursuant to paragraphs 7 and 8 above and on the assumption that, unless a Lender notifies the Facility Agent to the contrary, each
Lender’s obligations in relation to cash ratio deposits and Special 

  
 270

	 	
Deposits are the same as those of a typical bank from its jurisdiction of incorporation with a Facility Office in the same jurisdiction as its Facility Office. 

 

	11.	The Facility Agent shall have no liability to any person if such determination results in an Additional Cost Rate which over or under compensates any Lender and shall
be entitled to assume that the information provided by any Lender or Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 7 and 8 above is true and correct in all respects. 

 

	12.	The Facility Agent shall distribute the additional amounts received as a result of the Mandatory Cost to the Lenders on the basis of the Additional Cost Rate for each
Lender based on the information provided by each Lender and each Reference Bank and Alternative Reference Bank pursuant to paragraphs 3, 7 and 8 above. 

 

	13.	Any determination by the Facility Agent pursuant to this Schedule 7 in relation to a formula, the Mandatory Cost, an Additional Cost Rate or any amount payable to a
Lender shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. 

  

	14.	The Facility Agent may from time to time, after consultation with the Company and the Lenders, determine and notify to all Parties any amendments which are required to
be made to this Schedule 7 in order to comply with any change in law, regulation or any requirements from time to time imposed by the Bank of England, the Financial Services Authority or the European Central Bank (or, in any case, any other
authority which replaces all or any of its functions) and any such determination shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive and binding on all Parties. 

  
 271

 SCHEDULE 8 
 FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch 

as Facility Agent 

[Date] 
 Dear Sirs

 Certificate in respect of the [insert details of relevant testing period] ended [insert relevant Quarter
Date] (the “Certification Date”) 
 We refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time
amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) and made between, inter alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin
Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited as Original Borrowers, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole Corporate and Investment Bank, GE
Corporate Finance Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meanings in this Compliance Certificate.

  

	1.	This Compliance Certificate is provided in accordance with paragraph (a) of Clause 22.5 (Compliance Certificates) of the Facilities Agreement.

  

	2.	 We, [—] and [—]31, being duly authorised signatories of the Company as at the date of
this Compliance Certificate, confirm that the financial covenants contained in Clause 23 (Financial Condition) of the Facilities Agreement have been complied with as at the Certification Date. This confirmation is based on the following
(applying the rules for calculation set out in Clause 23 (Financial Condition)): 

  

	 	(a)	The ratio of Consolidated Net Debt to Consolidated Operating Cashflow for the period ending on the Certification Date was
[—]. 

  

	 	(b)	[The ratio of Consolidated Operating Cashflow to Consolidated Total Net Cash Interest Payable for the period ending on the Certification Date was [—].] 

  

	3.	 In addition, we confirm that Bank Group Consolidated Revenues for the financial year ended [—] was
£[—].32 

  

	4.	The information contained in the Attached Working Paper has been prepared on the basis of the same information and methodology used to prepare the appropriate financial
information. 

  

	5.	 The 80% Security Test was satisfied as at the Certification Date.33 

  

	6.	We further confirm that to our knowledge no Default was continuing as at the Certification Date. 

 

	31 	 At least one of whom shall be a Financial Officer. 

	32 	 Applicable only for Compliance Certificate to be delivered with annual financial information of the Bank Group. 

	33 	 Applicable only for Compliance Certificate to be delivered with annual financial information of the Bank Group. 

  
 272

	7.	This Compliance Certificate is given by the authorised signatories of the Company named below and is given without personal liability. 

 

					
	Yours faithfully,	 		 	
			
	  	 		 	  
	Authorised Signatory	 		 	Authorised Signatory
	for and on behalf of	 		 	for and on behalf of
	VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT	 		 	VIRGIN MEDIA INVESTMENT
	HOLDINGS LIMITED	 		 	HOLDINGS LIMITED

  
 273

 SCHEDULE 9 
 ORIGINAL SECURITY DOCUMENTS 
 A. Existing Original Security Documents 

 
  

			
		
	No.	  	Name of Security Document
	
	 ENGLISH SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	1.	  	Composite Debenture dated 19 January 2010 and made between the companies listed in schedule 1 thereto, the partnerships listed in schedule 2 thereto and Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch.
		
	2.	  	Charge over Shares relating to the shares in the companies listed in schedule 2 thereto dated 19 January 2010 and made between the companies listed in schedule 1 thereto and
Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	3.	  	Blocked Account Charge dated 9 February 2010 and made between Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 SCOTTISH SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	4.	  	Standard Security dated 19 January 2010 and made between CableTel (UK) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	5.	  	Ranking Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between CableTel (UK) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	6.	  	Share Pledge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Virgin Media Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	7.	  	Share Pledge dated 19 January 2010 and made between NTL Glasgow and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	8.	  	Share Pledge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Telewest Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	9.	  	Share Pledge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Telewest Communications (Scotland Holdings) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	10.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Prospectre Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	11.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between NTL Glasgow and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	12.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between CableTel Scotland Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	13.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Telewest Communications (Scotland Holdings) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch.

  
 274

			
		
	14.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Telewest Communications (Scotland) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	15.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Telewest Communications (Motherwell) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	16.	  	Bond and Floating Charge dated 19 January 2010 and made between Telewest Communications (Dundee & Perth) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 JERSEY SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	17.	  	Security Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between Birmingham Cable Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 NEW YORK SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	18.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between NTL Victoria Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	19.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between the parties listed on the signature pages thereto and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	20.	  	Amended and Restated Security Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between the parties listed on the signature pages thereto and Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch.
	
	 COLORADO SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	21.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in Avon Cable Limited Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between TCI/US West Cable Communications Group,
Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	22.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in Cotswolds Cable Limited Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between TCI/US West Cable Communications
Group, Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	23.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in Edinburgh Cable Limited Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between TCI/US West Cable Communications
Group, Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	24.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in Estuaries Cable Limited Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between TCI/US West Cable Communications
Group, Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	25.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in Tyneside Cable Limited Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between TCI/US West Cable Communications
Group, Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.

  
 275

			
		
	26.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in United Cable (London South) Limited Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between TCI/US West Cable
Communications Group, Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	27.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in TCI/US West Cable Communications Group dated 19 January 2010 and made between Theseus No.1 Limited, Theseus
No.2 Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	28.	  	Amended and Restated Pledge and Security Agreement re: the interests in London South Cable Partnership dated 19 January 2010 and made between United Cable (London South) Limited
Partnership, Crystal Palace Radio Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 LUXEMBOURG SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	29.	  	Amendment and Restatement Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between Future Entertainment S.à r.l. and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch in relation to the Luxembourg
Accounts Pledge Agreement.
		
	30.	  	English law Assignment of Contracts dated 19 January 2010 and made between Future Entertainment S.à r.l. and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	31.	  	Share Pledge Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between Virgin Media Investments Limited, Future Entertainment S.à r.l. and Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch.

 B. Original Security Documents to be executed on or prior to first Utilisation 

 

			
		
	No.	  	Name of Security Document
	
	 ENGLISH SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	32.	  	Charge over the shares of Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited made between Virgin Media Finance PLC and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	33.	  	Assignment of Loans made between Virgin Media Finance PLC and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	34.	  	Composite Debenture made between Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	35.	  	Confirmation Deed made between the subsidiaries of Virgin Media Inc. listed on the signature pages thereto and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 SCOTTISH SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	36.	  	Confirmation Agreement made between the subsidiaries of Virgin Media Inc. listed on the signature pages thereto and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 NEW YORK SECURITY DOCUMENTS

  
 276

			
		
	37.	  	Reaffirmation Agreement made between the subsidiaries of Virgin Media Inc. listed on the signature pages thereto and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	38.	  	Reimbursement and Contribution Agreement made between Virgin Media Inc. and the other parties listed therein.
	
	 LUXEMBOURG SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	39.	  	Confirmation Agreement made between Future Entertainment S.à r.l. and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.

  
 277

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 1 - EXISTING ENCUMBRANCES 
 1A. Existing Encumbrances required to be discharged
within 10 Business Days after first Utilisation: 
  

			
	No.	  	Name of Security Document
	
	 ENGLISH SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	1.	  	Composite Debenture dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by each of the Obligors listed therein in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	2.	  	Charge over the shares of Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited (formerly known as NTL Investment Holdings Limited), dated 3 March 2006, as amended and restated on 31 July 2006
and 19 January 2010 and made between Virgin Media Finance PLC (formerly known as NTL Cable PLC) and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	3.	  	Assignment of Loans (C Facility) dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 31 July 2006 and 19 January 2010 and made between Virgin Media Finance PLC (formerly known as NTL Cable PLC) and
Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	4.	  	Assignment of Loans (Non-C Facility) dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 31 July 2006 and 19 January 2010 and made between Virgin Media Finance PLC (formerly known as NTL Cable PLC)
and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
		
	5.	  	Charge over shares dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by certain of the Obligors incorporated in the United States of America as Chargor in favour of
Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	6.	  	Blocked account charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010 and 9 February 2010, granted by Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited (formerly known as NTL Investment
Holdings Limited) as Chargor in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee. 
		
	7.	  	Composite Debenture dated 18 September 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, between Virgin Mobile Holdings (UK) Limited, Virgin Mobile Group (UK) Limited, Virgin Mobile Telecoms
Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	8.	  	Composite Debenture dated 23 January 2007, as amended on 19 January 2010, between Virgin Media Payments Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee.
		
	9.	  	Composite Debenture dated 19 December 2008, as amended on 19 January 2010, between M&NW Network Limited, M&NW Network II Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as
Security Trustee.
		
	10.	  	Composite Debenture dated 10 December 2009, as amended on 19 January 2010, between Flextech Limited, Fleximedia Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee.
		
	11.	  	Composite Debenture dated 23 December 2009, as amended on 19 January 2010, between Virgin Media Investments Limited, Virgin Media Secured Finance PLC and Deutsche
Bank

  
 278

			
		
		  	AG, London Branch as Security Trustee, as amended by a Deed of Amendment.
	
	 SCOTTISH SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	12.	  	Share pledge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Virgin Media Limited (formerly known as NTL Group Limited) in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as
Security Trustee.
		
	13.	  	Share pledge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by ntl Glasgow in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	14.	  	Share pledge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Telewest Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	15.	  	Share pledge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Telewest Communications (Scotland Holdings) Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as
Security Trustee.
		
	16.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Prospectre Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee.
		
	17.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by ntl Glasgow in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	18.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by CableTel Scotland Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee.
		
	19.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Telewest Communications (Scotland Holdings) Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	20.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Telewest Communications (Scotland) Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as
Security Trustee.
		
	21.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Telewest Communications (Motherwell) Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as
Security Trustee.
		
	22.	  	Bond and floating charge dated 3 March 2006, as amended on 19 January 2010, granted by Telewest Communications (Dundee & Perth) Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch as Security Trustee.
		
	23.	  	Standard Security dated 3 March 2006, granted by CableTel (UK) Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee in respect of land in
Renfrew.
		
	24.	  	Variation of Standard Security dated 19 January 2010 and made between CableTel (UK) Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch.
	
	 JERSEY SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	25.	  	Security agreement dated 3 March 2006, granted by Birmingham Cable Limited in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee.

  
 279

			
		
	26.	  	Supplemental Agreement dated 19 January 2010 and made between Birmingham Cable Limited and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch in relation to the 3 March 2006 Jersey Security
Agreement.
	
	 NEW YORK SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	27.	  	US pledge agreement dated 3 March 2006, as amended and restated on 19 January 2010, granted by Virgin Media Dover LLC in favour of Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security
Trustee.
	
	 LUXEMBOURG SECURITY DOCUMENTS

		
	28.	  	Share pledge agreement dated 23 December 2009 (effective 1 January 2010), as amended on 19 January 2010, between Virgin Media Investments Limited, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch
and Future Entertainment S.à r.l.
		
	29.	  	Assignment of Contracts in relation to customer contracts dated 9 June 2009, as amended on 19 January 2010, between Future Entertainment S.à r.l. and Deutsche Bank AG, London
Branch as Security Trustee.

 1B. Existing Encumbrances not required to be discharged. 

 

							
	 CHARGOR
	  	 DATE
	  	 BENEFICIARY
	  	 SUMMARY

				
	 Cable London Limited
	  	27 July 1990	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over Television House, Clarendon Road, Turnpike Lane
				
	 Cable London Limited
	  	22 October 1992	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over land at rear of 60/70 Clarendon Road, Haringey, London (known as Car Park No 2)
				
	 Cable London Limited
	  	03 January 1995	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charged granted over Car Park No 1 and No 2, 60/70 Clarendon Road, Haringey, London
				
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	23 May 1997	  	Dhamecha Foods Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	23 May 1997	  	Dhamecha Foods Limited	  	Rent Deposit Charge

  
 280

							
	 CHARGOR
	  	 DATE
	  	 BENEFICIARY
	  	 SUMMARY

				
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	06 August 1997	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 CableTel Surrey and Hampshire Limited
	  	28 July 1995	  	British Aerospace Pension Funds Trustees Limited	  	Deed of Rental Deposit
				
	 CableTel Surrey and Hampshire Limited
	  	06 August 1997	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 Ed Stone Limited
	  	12 December 2002	  	Abbey National Treasury Services PLC	  	Charge over cash deposit
				
	 Eurobell (Holdings) Limited
	  	01 November 1999	  	Lloyds TSB Bank plc	  	Deposit Agreement
				
	 Eurobell (South West) Limited
	  	29 May 1997	  	Lloyds Bank plc	  	Deposit Agreement
				
	 Eurobell (Sussex) Limited
	  	29 May 1997	  	Lloyds Bank plc	  	Deposit Agreement
				
	 Eurobell (West Kent) Limited
	  	29 May 1997	  	Lloyds Bank plc	  	Deposit Agreement
				
	 Lanbase European Holdings Limited
	  	14 June 1991	  	Airspace Investments Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 Lanbase Limited
	  	01 October 1991	  	Airspace Investments Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 NTL (Peterborough) Limited
	  	10 August 1990	  	Midas International Properties PLC	  	Counterpart Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 NTL (South East) Limited
	  	15 June 1994	  	The Prudential Assurance Company Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 NTL (South East) Limited
	  	22 March 1996	  	Natwest Specialist Finance Limited	  	Lessor South East Debenture
				
	 NTL (Southampton and Eastleigh) Limited
	  	30 July 1992	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Charge over credit balance
				
	 NTL Kirklees
	  	31 January 1997	  	National Bank Westminster plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 NTL Kirklees
	  	06 August 1997	  	National Bank Westminster plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 NTL Midlands Limited
	  	27 September 1994	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Legal Mortgage

  
 281

							
	 CHARGOR
	  	 DATE
	  	 BENEFICIARY
	  	 SUMMARY

				
	 NTL National Networks Limited
	  	30 August 2006	  	Royal Bank of London Trust Company (Jersey) Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 NTL National Networks Limited
	  	24 May 2006	  	Rosedale Property Holdings Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	09 August 1993	  	Higgs & Hill Properties Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	14 December 1993	  	Uberior Nominees (Gulliver D.P.U.T.) Limited	  	Deed of Deposit
				
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	11 June 1996	  	Elmrose Properties Limited	  	Charge pursuant to underlease
				
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	17 December 2001	  	Barclays Nominees (George Yard) Limited	  	Deed of Deposit
				
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	31 January 1997	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	04 June 1997	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	06 August 1997	  	National Westminster Bank plc	  	Charge over credit balances
				
	 NTL UK Telephone and Cable TV Holdings Company Limited
	  	18 June 1991	  	Cervino Co Limited	  	Tenancy Agreement
				
	 Sheffield Cable Communications Limited
	  	24 December 1996	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over 1 Chippingham Street, Sheffield
				
	 Sheffield Cable Communications Limited
	  	12 November 1999	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge of leasehold property known as 1.62 acres of land at Sheffield Technology Park
				
	 Telewest Communications (South East) Limited
	  	21 January 1994	  	Electricity Supply Nominees Limited	  	Mortgage of deposited moneys
				
	 Telewest Communications (South East) Limited
	  	26 June 1995	  	Electricity Supply Nominees Limited	  	Deed of Variation and Further Charge
				
	 Telewest Communications Networks Limited
	  	15 October 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Deed of charge over credit balances

  
 282

							
	 CHARGOR
	  	 DATE
	  	 BENEFICIARY
	  	 SUMMARY

	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 1 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 Theseus No. 2 Limited
	  	21 December 2004	  	Barclays Bank plc	  	Pledge and Security Agreement
				
	 The Yorkshire Cable Group Limited
	  	18 May 1999	  	Robert Fleming Leasing (Number 4) Limited	  	Collateral Account Security Assignment
				
	 The Yorkshire Cable Group Limited
	  	16 March 2001	  	Robert Fleming Leasing (Number 4) Limited	  	Collateral Account Security Assignment

  
 283

							
	 CHARGOR
	  	 DATE
	  	 BENEFICIARY
	  	 SUMMARY

	 TVS Television Limited
	  	12 August 1983	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Guarantee & Debenture
				
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	21 February 2002	  	Leeds City Council	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	05 June 2002	  	Express Property Investments Limited	  	Rent Deposit Deed
				
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	04 June 2009	  	Peel Media Limited	  	Deposit Deed
				
	 Virgin Mobile Telecoms Limited
	  	28 October 1999	  	The Royal Bank of Scotland plc	  	Charge of Deposit
				
	 Virgin Mobile Telecoms Limited
	  	29 February 2000	  	The Royal Bank of Scotland plc	  	Charge of Deposit
				
	 Windsor Television Limited
	  	09 July 1999	  	Langley Quay Investments Limited	  	Deed as to deposit of monies
				
	 X-Tant Limited
	  	01 July 1999	  	AC Skelton & Sons Limited	  	Rental Deposit Agreement
				
	 X-Tant Limited
	  	20 September 1999	  	Hanger Estates Limited	  	Rental Deposit Deed
				
	 X-Tant Limited
	  	21 September 2000	  	AC Skelton & Sons Limited	  	Rental Deposit Agreement
				
	 X-Tant Limited
	  	04 October 2000	  	Berry Trade Limited	  	Licence for Assignment
				
	 X-Tant Limited
	  	26 June 2002	  	Leeds City Council	  	Rent Deposit Agreement
				
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	16 June 1992	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over Units 8, 9, 10 and adjoining land, Mayfair Business Park, Stricker Lane, Bradford, West Yorkshire
				
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	24 December 1996	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over Units 4 and 5, Mayfair Business Park, Broad Lane, Bradford
				
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	24 December 1996	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over Units 8, 9, 10 and adjoining land, Mayfair Business Park, Stricker Lane, Bradford, West
Yorkshire

  
 284

							
	 CHARGOR
	  	 DATE
	  	 BENEFICIARY
	  	 SUMMARY

	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	24 December 1996	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charged granted over Units 6 and 7, Mayfair Business Park, Broad Lane, Bradford
				
	 Yorkshire Cable Properties Limited
	  	24 December 1996	  	Barclays Bank PLC	  	Legal Charge granted over Units 8, 9, 10 and adjoining land, Mayfair Business Park, Stricker Lane, Bradford, West Yorkshire

  
 285

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 2 - EXISTING LOANS 
  

							
	 Company name (Creditor)
	  	 Balance (Debtor)
	  	Balances
in
GBP as at 31
December
2009
(US GAAP)	 
	 Flextech (1992) Limited
	  	Actions Stations (Lakeside) Limited	  	 	5,879,915.00	  
	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	Cable Adnet Limited	  	 	3,755,436.16	  
	 Telewest Communications (London South) Limited
	  	Crystalvision Productions Limited	  	 	20,167.00	  
	 Flextech (1992) Limited
	  	Flextech Home Shopping Limited	  	 	8,952,702.00	  
	 Flextech Digital Broadcasting Limited
	  	Flextech Interactive Limited	  	 	2,930.00	  
	 General Cable Limited
	  	General Cable Programming Limited	  	 	160,000.50	  
	 Telewest Communications Networks Limited
	  	General Cable Programming Limited	  	 	23,422.77	  
	 Virgin Media Business Limited
	  	Imminus (Ireland) Limited	  	 	77,007.68	  
	 Eurobell (Holdings) Limited
	  	Matchco Limited	  	 	2,239,000.00	  
	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture
	  	Perth Cable Television Limited	  	 	79,237.00	  
	 Telewest Communications (North West) Limited
	  	Telewest Communications (Fylde & Wyre) Limited	  	 	23,234,484.84	  
	 Telewest Communications (North West) Limited
	  	Telewest Communications (Southport) Limited	  	 	9,315,198.72	  
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	Yorkshire Cable Telecom Limited	  	 	7,322.00	  
	 Flextech Broadband Limited
	  	Telewest Communications Holdco Limited	  	 	1,535,057.65	  
	 ntl Rectangle Limited
	  	Virgin Media Communications Ltd	  	 	1,000.00	  
	 ntl (CWC) Limited
	  	ntl (South Hertfordshire) Limited	  	 	30,489,638.06	  
	 Telewest Communications Networks Limited
	  	Virgin Media Inc	  	 	24,397,139.17	  
	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture
	  	Telewest Communications (Cumbernauld) Limited	  	 	32,275,218.78	  
	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture
	  	Telewest Communications (Dumbarton) Limited	  	 	41,283,087.67	  
	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture
	  	Telewest Communications (Falkirk) Limited	  	 	60,059,534.80	  
	 Telewest Communications (Scotland) Venture
	  	Telewest Communications (Glenrothes) Limited	  	 	38,726,689.91	  
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	Barnsley Cable Communications Limited	  	 	44,031,802.57	  
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	Doncaster Cable Communications Limited	  	 	76,752,713.70	  
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	Halifax Cable Communications Limited	  	 	34,786,117.03	  
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited
	  	Wakefield Cable Communications Limited	  	 	51,371,124.05	  
	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	NTL Funding Ltd	  	 	79,652,918.01	  
	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	Virgin Media Holdings Inc	  	 	43,141,567.30	  
	 United Artists Investments Limited
	  	Living TV Limited	  	 	8,271,047.00	  

  
 286

							
	 Flextech IVS Limited
	  	Living TV Limited	  	 	11,579,466.00	  
	 Flextech Communications Limited
	  	Trouble TV Limited	  	 	563,574.00	  
	 Flextech Communications Limited
	  	Trouble TV Limited	  	 	3,006,419.90	  
	 Flextech Limited
	  	Trouble TV Limited	  	 	150,574.00	  
	 Flextech Limited
	  	Bravo TV Limited	  	 	1,365,493.00	  
	 Flextech Broadband Limited
	  	Virgin Media Television Limited	  	 	40,000,000.85	  
		  		  	 	 	 
	 TOTAL
	  		  	 	677,187,007.12	  

  
 287

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 3 - EXISTING FINANCIAL INDEBTEDNESS 
  

	1.	Existing Senior Credit Facilities Agreement; 

  

	2.	Existing High Yield Notes; 

  

	3.	Existing Senior Secured Notes; and 

  

	4.	Convertible Senior Notes. 

  
 288

 MORTGAGES AND FINANCE LEASES 

 

					
	 	  	Closing balance in
GBP
(US GAAP)	 
	 Existing Financial Indebtedness:
	  			
	 Property mortgages
	  			
	 Yorkshire Cable Communications Limited with Barclays Bank PLC
	  	£	223,894	  
	 Cable London Limited with Barclays Bank PLC
	  	£	204,702	  
	 NTL Midlands Limited with NatWest Bank PLC
	  	£	763,145	  
	 Total
	  	£	1,191,741	  
	 Finance lease creditors (details set out in Part 7 of this schedule)
	  	£	166,578,308	  

  
 289

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 4 - EXISTING PERFORMANCE BONDS 
  

																	
	 Company Name
	  	 Surety
	  	Value - GBP	 	  	Start
Date	 	  	 Expiry

Date
	  	Cash
Cover	 
	 NTL Glasgow
	  	NatWest	  	£	214,750.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL Glasgow
	  	NatWest	  	£	146,671.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL Glasgow
	  	NatWest	  	£	113,000.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL Glasgow
	  	NatWest	  	£	124,424.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL Glasgow
	  	NatWest	  	£	146,778.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	165,000.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	151,054.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	160,710.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 CableTel Herts and Beds Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	183,922.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 CableTel Northern Ireland Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	239,963.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	179,737.00	  	  	 	07/04/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	136,500.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	183,500.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL South Wales Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	142,917.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 CableTel Surrey and Hampshire Ltd
	  	NatWest	  	£	190,000.00	  	  	 	25/03/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL (CWC) Corporation Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	100,000.00	  	  	 	30/10/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL (South London) Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	83,000.00	  	  	 	28/10/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL (South London) Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	62,000.00	  	  	 	28/10/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL (South London) Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	117,400.00	  	  	 	28/10/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL (South London) Limited
	  	NatWest	  	£	112,000.00	  	  	 	28/10/1998	  	  	Open Ended	  	 	Y	  

  
 290

																					
	 NTL (West London) Limited
	  	 	NatWest	  	  	£	49,333.00	  	  	 	28/10/1998	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 Birmingham Cable Limited
	  	 	RBS	  	  	£	75,000.00	  	  	 	11/12/2000	  	  	 	00/01/1900	  	  	 	N	  
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	100,000.00	  	  	 	20/03/1992	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	100,000.00	  	  	 	20/03/1992	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	1,000,000.00	  	  	 	20/10/1997	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	N	  
	 NTL South Central Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	3,525,000.00	  	  	 	28/01/1997	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	5,485,735.00	  	  	 	03/03/2010	  	  	 	03/03/2011	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	1,151,127.00	  	  	 	03/03/2010	  	  	 	03/03/2011	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	2,219,266.00	  	  	 	03/03/2010	  	  	 	03/03/2011	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	HSBC	  	  	£	5,500,000.00	  	  	 	31/05/2007	  	  	 	30/07/2010	  	  	 	N	  
	 Eurobell South West
	  	 	Lloyds Bank	  	  	£	127,000.00	  	  	 	00/01/1900	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 Eurobell Sussex
	  	 	Lloyds Bank	  	  	£	160,000.00	  	  	 	00/01/1900	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 Eurobell West Kent
	  	 	Lloyds Bank	  	  	£	118,000.00	  	  	 	00/01/1900	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	 	Barclays	  	  	£	35,000.00	  	  	 	05/07/2002	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	 	Barclays	  	  	£	6,000.00	  	  	 	13/11/2000	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	N	  
	 Telewest Communications Networks Ltd
	  	 	Barclays	  	  	£	700,000.00	  	  	 	29/09/2004	  	  	 	Open Ended	  	  	 	Y	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	Deutsche	  	  	£	950,000.00	  	  	 	30/06/2009	  	  	 	30/06/2010	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	Deutsche	  	  	£	943,026.00	  	  	 	24/10/2008	  	  	 	01/02/2011	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Limited
	  	 	Deutsche	  	  	£	4,084,500.00	  	  	 	31/03/2009	  	  	 	31/03/2010	  	  	 	N	  
	 Virgin Media Wholesale Limited
	  	 	Deutsche Bank	  	  	£	112,500.00	  	  	 	31/03/2009	  	  	 	31/03/2010	  	  	 	N	  
		  				  	£	29,394,813.00	  	  				  				  			

  
 291

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 5 - EXISTING UKTV GROUP LOAN STOCK 
  

	1.	The variable rate unsecured loan stock in a principal amount of £18,251,000 issued to Flextech Digital Broadcasting Limited by UK Channel Management Limited.

  

	2.	The £20 million Non-Cumulative and £9,011,000 million Cumulative, non-voting preference shares issued by UK Gold Holdings Limited.

  

	3.	The Redeemable Unsecured Loan Stock in a principal amount of £21,460,000 issued by UK Gold Holdings Limited. 

 

	4.	The variable rate unsecured loan stock in a principal amount of £36,823,000 issued by UKTV New Ventures Limited. 

 

	5.	The variable rate Secondary Credit Facility in a principal amount of £18,285,000 from UKTV Interactive Limited. 

  
 292

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 6 - EXISTING HEDGE COUNTERPARTIES 
 Bank of Ireland 

BNP Paribas 
 BNP Paribas Fortis 

Commerzbank 
 Crédit Agricole

 Credit Suisse 
 Deutsche Bank

 Goldman Sachs 
 HSBC Bank

 Lloyds Banking Group 
 Natixis
Banques Populaires 
 Rabobank 
 Royal
Bank of Scotland 
 Societe Generale 

WestLB 
 UBS 

  
 293

 SCHEDULE 10 
 PART 7 - EXISTING VENDOR FINANCING ARRANGEMENTS 
  

							
	LESSOR	  	Type of Vendor Financing	  	Closing Balance in GBP	 
	 	  	 	  	(US GAAP)	 
	 BT
	  	Network	  	£	36,522,091	  
	 Cisco Capital
	  	IT	  	£	55,625,405	  
	 EMC
	  	IT	  	£	1,086,075	  
	 HSBC Bank
	  	Switch	  	£	328,006	  
	 HSBC Bank
	  	Set Top Boxes	  	£	37,264,424	  
	 IBM Financial Services
	  	IT	  	£	4,298,719	  
	 ING
	  	Vehicles	  	£	2,598,672	  
	 Lloyds
	  	Vehicles	  	£	10,476,318	  
	 RBS
	  	Switch	  	£	18,378,597	  
	 Total
	  		  	£	166,578,308	  
		  		  	 	 	 

  
 294

 SCHEDULE 11 
 FORM OF L/C BANK ACCESSION CERTIFICATE 
 To:
[—] 
 cc: [Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited] 

From: [L/C Bank] 
 Date: 

Dear Sirs 
  

	1.	We refer to the facilities agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities
Agreement”) and made between, inter alia, Virgin Media Inc. as Ultimate Parent, Virgin Media Finance PLC as Parent, Virgin Media Investment Holdings Limited, Virgin Media Limited, Virgin Media Wholesale Limited, VMIH Sub Limited and
Virgin Media SFA Finance Limited as Original Borrowers, BNP Paribas London Branch and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Global Coordinators and Physical Bookrunners, BNP Paribas London Branch, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, Crédit Agricole
Corporate and Investment Bank, GE Corporate Finance Bank SAS, Goldman Sachs International, J.P. Morgan PLC, Lloyds TSB Corporate Markets, Merrill Lynch International, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and UBS Limited as Bookrunners and Mandated Lead
Arrangers, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee and the financial and other institutions named in it as Lenders. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement shall have the same meanings
in this L/C Bank Accession Certificate. 

  

	2.	This L/C Bank Accession Certificate is delivered pursuant to Clause 5.11 (Appointment and Change of L/C Bank) of the Facilities Agreement.

  

	3.	[Name of L/C Bank] undertakes, upon its becoming an L/C Bank, to perform all the obligations expressed to be undertaken under the Facilities Agreement and the
Relevant Finance Documents by an L/C Bank and agrees that it shall be bound by the Facilities Agreement and the other Relevant Finance Documents in all respects as if it had been an original party to it as an L/C Bank. 

 

	4.	[Name of L/C Bank]’s administrative details are as follows: 

 Address: 
 Fax No: 

Contact: 
 [and
the address of the office having the beneficial ownership of our participation in the Facilities Agreement (if different from the above) is: 
 Address: 
 Fax No: 

Contact:                  ] 

  
 295

	5.	This L/C Bank Accession Certificate, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in
accordance with, English Law. 

 For and on behalf of 
 [Name of L/C Bank] 

  
 296

 SCHEDULE 12 
 FORM OF DOCUMENTARY CREDIT 
 [L/C Bank’s Letterhead] 

 

	To:	[Beneficiary] 

 (the
“Beneficiary”) 
 Non-transferable Irrevocable Documentary Credit No. [—]

 At the request of [insert name of Borrower], [L/C Bank] (the “L/C Bank”) issues this irrevocable
non-transferable documentary credit (“Documentary Credit”) in your favour on the following terms and conditions: 
  

	1.	Definitions 

 In this
Documentary Credit: 
 “Business Day” means a day (other than a Saturday or a Sunday) on
which banks are open for general business in [London].34

 “Demand” means a demand for payment under this Documentary Credit in the form of the schedule to this
Documentary Credit. 
 “Expiry Date” means [—]. 

“Total L/C Amount” means [—]. 

 

	2.	L/C Bank’s Agreement 

  

	 	(a)	The Beneficiary may request a drawing or drawings under this Documentary Credit by giving to the L/C Bank a duly completed Demand. A Demand must be received by the L/C
Bank on or before [—] p.m. ([London] time) on the Expiry Date. 

  

	 	(b)	Subject to the terms of this Documentary Credit, the L/C Bank unconditionally and irrevocably undertakes to the Beneficiary that, within [10] Business Days of receipt
by it of a Demand, it will pay to the Beneficiary the amount demanded in that Demand. 

  

	 	(c)	The L/C Bank will not be obliged to make a payment under this Documentary Credit if as a result the aggregate of all payments made by it under this Documentary Credit
would exceed the Total L/C Amount. 

  

	3.	Expiry 

  

	 	(a)	The L/C Bank will be released from its obligations under this Documentary Credit on the date (if any) notified by the Beneficiary to the L/C Bank as the date upon which
the obligations of the L/C Bank under this Documentary Credit are released. 

  

	 	(b)	Unless previously released under paragraph (a) above, at [—] p.m. ([London] time) on the Expiry Date the
obligations of the L/C Bank under this Documentary Credit will cease with no further liability on the part of the L/C Bank except for any Demand validly presented under the Documentary Credit before that time that remains unpaid.

  

	34 	 This may need to be amended depending on the currency of payment under the Documentary Credit. 

  
 297

	 	(c)	When the L/C Bank is no longer under any further Obligations under this Documentary Credit, the Beneficiary must promptly return the original of this Documentary Credit
to the L/C Bank. 

  

	4.	Payments 

 All payments
under this Documentary Credit shall be made in [—] and for value on the due date to the account of the Beneficiary specified in the Demand. 

 

	5.	Delivery of Demand 

 Each
Demand shall be in writing, and, unless otherwise stated, may be made by letter, fax or telex and must be received in legible form by the L/C Bank at its address and by the particular department or officer (if any) as follows: 

[—] 
  

	6.	Assignment 

 The
Beneficiary’s rights under this Documentary Credit may not be assigned or transferred. 
  

	7.	UCP 

 Except to the extent
it is inconsistent with the express terms of this Documentary Credit, this Documentary Credit is subject to the Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits (1993 Revision), International Chamber of Commerce Publication No. 500.

  

	8.	Governing Law 

 This
Documentary Credit, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, English Law. 

 

	9.	Jurisdiction 

 The courts
of England have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes, including those that are non-contractual, arising out of or in connection with this Documentary Credit. 
  

	
	 Yours faithfully,
  

[L/C Bank]

	
	By:
	

  
 298

 FORM OF DEMAND 

 

	To:	[L/C Bank] 

 Dear Sirs, 

Non-transferable Irrevocable Documentary Credit No. [l] issued in favour of [name of beneficiary] (the “Documentary Credit”) 
 We refer to the Documentary Credit. Terms defined in the Documentary Credit have the same meaning when used in this Demand. 
  

	1.	We certify that the sum of [l] is due
[and has remained unpaid for at least [l] Business Days] [under [set out underlying contract or agreement]]. We
therefore demand payment of the sum of [l]. 

 

	2.	Payment should be made to the following account: 

 Name: 
 Account Number: 

Bank: 
  

	3.	The date of this Demand is not later than the Expiry Date. 

  

					
	Yours faithfully,	 		 	
			
	(Authorised Signatory)	 		 	(Authorised Signatory)
			
	For	 		 	
	[Beneficiary]	 		 	

  
 299

 SCHEDULE 13 
 FORM OF INCREASE CONFIRMATION 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Security Trustee, Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as L/C Bank and Virgin Media
Investment Holdings Limited as the Company, for and on behalf of each Obligor 

  

	From:	[the Increase Lender] (the “Increase Lender”) 

 Dated: 
 Senior Facilities Agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended,
varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) 
  

	1.	We refer to the Facilities Agreement, the Group Intercreditor Agreement, the HYD Intercreditor Agreement and the Security Trust Agreement (as each of those terms are
defined in the Facilities Agreement). This agreement (the “Agreement”) shall take effect as an Increase Confirmation for the purpose of the Facilities Agreement. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement have the same meaning in
this Agreement unless given a different meaning in this Agreement. 

  

	2.	We refer to Clause 2.2 (Increase) of the Facilities Agreement. 

  

	3.	The Increase Lender agrees to assume and will assume all of the obligations corresponding to the Commitment specified in the Schedule (the “Relevant
Commitment”) as if it was an Original Lender under the Facilities Agreement. 

  

	4.	The proposed date on which the increase in relation to the Increase Lender and the Relevant Commitment is to take effect (the “Increase Date”) is
[l]. 

  

	5.	On the Increase Date, the Increase Lender becomes party to the relevant Relevant Finance Documents. 

 

	6.	The Facility Office and address, fax number and attention details for notices to the Increase Lender for the purposes of Clause 41 (Notices and Delivery of
Information) are set out in the Schedule. 

  

	7.	The Increase Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Lenders’ obligations referred to in Clause 2.2 (Increase). 

 

	8.	The Increase Lender confirms, for the benefit of the Facility Agent and each Obligor, that it is: 

 

	 	(a)	[a UK Bank Lender.] 

  

	 	(b)	[a UK Non-Bank Lender and falls within paragraph [(a)] / [(b)] of the definition thereof.] 

 

	 	(c)	[a UK Treaty Lender.] 

  
 300

	9.	Any Increase Lender that is a UK Bank Lender or a UK Non-Bank Lender shall deliver to the Facility Agent, on or before the date falling five Business Days before the
date upon which interest next falls due for payment after the date hereof, the following documents evidencing the tax status of such Increase Lender as indicated above: 

 

			
	 UK Bank Lender
	  	 (i) certificate of incorporation; and
  

(ii) copy of banking licence.

		
	 UK Non- Bank Lender
	  	 (i) certificate of incorporation in the UK; or
  

(ii) other evidence that the relevant ss. 933-937 Income Tax Act conditions are met.

 If such Increase Lender has previously provided the Company with the above documents (in connection with
any financing made available by such Increase Lender to the Company) such Increase Lender shall only be required to confirm in writing that it had previously provided such documents and that there have been no changes to the form of such documents
relevant for these purposes. 
  

	10.	The Increase Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the HYD Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with
effect on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the HYD Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Lender and a Senior Finance Party as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 

 

	11.	The Increase Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the Group Intercreditor Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with
effect on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the Group Intercreditor Agreement as a Senior Lender and a Senior Finance Party as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 

 

	12.	The Increase Lender hereby agrees with each other person who is or becomes party to the Security Trust Agreement in accordance with the terms thereof that with effect
on and from the date hereof, it will be bound by the Security Trust Agreement as a Beneficiary as if it had been an original party thereto in such capacity. 

 

	13.	This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts and this has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of this
Agreement. 

  

	14.	This Agreement, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, English Law.

  

	15.	This Agreement has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement. 

  
 301

 THE SCHEDULE 
 Relevant Commitment/rights and obligations to be assumed by the Increase Lender 
 [insert relevant details] 
 [Facility office address, fax number and attention details
for notices and account details for payments] 
 [Increase Lender] 
 By: 
 This Agreement is accepted as an Increase Confirmation for the purposes of the Facilities
Agreement by the Facility Agent [and each L/C Bank]*, and the Increase Date is confirmed as [            ]. 
  

					
	Facility Agent	 		 	[L/C Bank
			
	By:	 		 	By:]*
			
	Security Trustee	 		 	
			
	By:	 		 	

 NOTE: 
  

	*	Only if increase in the Total Revolving Facility Commitments. 

  
 302

 SCHEDULE 14 
 FORM OF NOTIFIABLE DEBT PURCHASE TRANSACTION NOTICE 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

  

	From:	[The Lender] 

 Dated: 

Senior Facilities Agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the
“Facilities Agreement”) 
  

	1.	We refer to paragraph (d) of Clause 38 (Debt Purchase Transactions) of the Facilities Agreement. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement have the same
meaning in this notice unless given a different meaning in this notice. 

  

	2.	We have entered into a Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction. 

  

	3.	The Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction referred to in paragraph 2 above relates to the amount of our Commitment(s) as set out below. 

 

			
	Commitment	  	Amount of our Commitment to which Notifiable Debt Purchase Transaction relates
(Base Currency)
		
	 [A Facility Commitment
	  	[insert amount (of that Commitment) to which the relevant Debt Purchase Transaction applies]
		
	 [A1 Facility Commitment
	  	[insert amount (of that Commitment) to which the relevant Debt Purchase Transaction applies]
		
	 [A2 Facility Commitment
	  	[insert amount (of that Commitment) to which the relevant Debt Purchase Transaction applies]
		
	 [B Facility Commitment
	  	[insert amount (of that Commitment) to which the relevant Debt Purchase Transaction applies]
		
	 [B1 Facility Commitment
	  	[insert amount (of that Commitment) to which the relevant Debt Purchase Transaction applies]

 [Lender] 
 By:

  

	*	Delete/add as applicable 

  
 303

 SCHEDULE 15 
 FORM OF RESIGNATION LETTER 
  

	To:	Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch as Facility Agent 

  

	From:	[resigning Borrower] and the Company 

 Dated:

 Dear Sirs 
 Senior Facilities
Agreement dated 16 March 2010 (as from time to time amended, varied, novated or supplemented, the “Facilities Agreement”) 
  

	1.	We refer to the Facilities Agreement. This is a Resignation Letter. Terms defined in the Facilities Agreement have the same meaning in this Resignation Letter unless
given a different meaning in this Resignation Letter. 

  

	2.	Pursuant to Clause 37.3 (Resignation of a Borrower), we request that the resigning Borrower be released from its obligations as a [Borrower]/[Guarantor]
under the Facilities Agreement and the Relevant Finance Documents [(other than the Group Intercreditor Agreement)]. 

  

	3.	We confirm that: 

  

	 	(a)	no Event of Default is continuing or would result from the acceptance of this request; and 

 

	 	(b)	the resigning Borrower is under no actual or contingent obligations as a Borrower under any Relevant Finance Documents; and 

 

	 	(c)	[the resigning Borrower’s obligations in its capacity as Guarantor continue to be legal, valid, binding and enforceable and in full force and effect (subject to
the Reservations) and the amount guaranteed by it as a Guarantor is not decreased, subject to Clause 44.5 (Release of Guarantees and Security)]. 

 

	4.	This Resignation Letter, including all non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it, shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with,
English Law. 

  

									
	[The Company]	 		 	[resigning Borrower]
					
	By:	 		 		 	By:	 	

  
 304

 SCHEDULE 16 
 PRO FORMA BANK GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 Bank Group Estimated Consolidated Balance
Sheet 
 £ millions 
 Unaudited 
 Proforma 

 

									
	 	  	Ultimate Parent
as at
End of period (1)	  	Excluded
Group	  	Consolidation
Adjustment	  	Proforma
Bank Group
	 Assets
	  		  		  		  	
	 Current Assets
	  		  		  		  	
	 Cash and Cash equivalents
	  		  		  		  	
	 Restricted Cash
	  		  		  		  	
	 Accounts receivable - trade less allowance for doubtful accounts
	  		  		  		  	
	 Prepaid expense and Other current assets
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Total current assets
	  		  		  		  	
	 Fixed Assets, net
	  		  		  		  	
	 Reorganisation value in excess of amounts allocable to identifiable assets
	  		  		  		  	
	 Customer Lists, net
	  		  		  		  	
	 Intangible assets, net
	  		  		  		  	
	 Investments in and loans to affiliates, net
	  		  		  		  	
	 Other assets net of accumulated amortisation
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Total assets
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Liabilities and shareholders’ equity (deficit)
	  		  		  		  	
	 Current liabilities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Accounts payable
	  		  		  		  	
	 Accrued expenses
	  		  		  		  	
	 Interest payable
	  		  		  		  	
	 Deferred revenue
	  		  		  		  	
	 Current portion of long term debt
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Total current liabilities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Long term debt net of current portion
	  		  		  		  	
	 Other long term liabilities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Deferred income taxes
	  		  		  		  	
	 Commitments and contingent liabilities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Minority Interest
	  		  		  		  	
	 Shareholders’ equity (deficit)
	  		  		  		  	
	 Series preferred stock
	  		  		  		  	
	 Common Stock
	  		  		  		  	
	 Additional paid in capital
	  		  		  		  	
	 Treasury Stock
	  		  		  		  	
	 Unearned stock-based compensation
	  		  		  		  	
	 Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)
	  		  		  		  	
	 Accumulated (deficit)
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Total shareholders’ equity (deficit)
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity (deficit)
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
		  		  		  		  	

  

	(1)	From financial statements delivered under Clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statements) of this Agreement 

  
 305

 Bank Group Estimated Consolidated Statement Of Operations 

£ millions 
 Unaudited

 Proforma 
  

									
	 	  	Ultimate
Parent (1)	  	Excluded
Group	  	Consolidation
Adjustment	  	Proforma
Bank Group
	 Revenue
	  		  		  		  	
	 Costs and expenses
	  		  		  		  	
	 Operating costs (excluding depreciation)
	  		  		  		  	
	 Selling, general and administrative expenses
	  		  		  		  	
	 Other charges
	  		  		  		  	
	 Depreciation
	  		  		  		  	
	 Amortization
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
		  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Operating loss
	  		  		  		  	
	 Other income (expense)
	  		  		  		  	
	 Interest income and other, net
	  		  		  		  	
	 Interest expense
	  		  		  		  	
	 Loss on extinguishment of debt
	  		  		  		  	
	 Share of (losses) from equity investments
	  		  		  		  	
	 Other gains
	  		  		  		  	
	 Foreign currency transaction gains
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Loss before income taxes
	  		  		  		  	
	 Income tax (expense) benefit
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Net (loss)
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 

  

	(1)	From financial statements delivered under Clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statement) of this Agreement 

  
 306

 Bank Group Estimated Consolidated Statement Of Cashflows 

£ millions 
 Unaudited

 Proforma 
  

									
	 	  	Ultimate
Parent (1)	  	Excluded
Group	  	Consolidation
Adjustment	  	Proforma
Bank Group
	 [Operating activities
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Investing activities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Purchase of fixed assets and intangible assets
	  		  		  		  	
	 Principal repayments on loans to equity investments
	  		  		  		  	
	 Disposal of sit-up, net
	  		  		  		  	
	 Other
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Net cash (used in) investing activities
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Financing activities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Proceeds from employee stock option exercises
	  		  		  		  	
	 Purchase of stock
	  		  		  		  	
	 New borrowing net of financing fees
	  		  		  		  	
	 Principal repayments on long-term debt and Capital leases
	  		  		  		  	
	 Principal drawings (repayments) on loans to group companies
	  		  		  		  	
	 Dividends paid
	  		  		  		  	
	 Realized gain on derivatives
	  		  		  		  	
	 Intercompany funding
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Net cash provided by financing activities
	  		  		  		  	
	 Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents
	  		  		  		  	
	 Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
	  		  		  		  	
	 Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year/ quarter
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 
	 Cash and cash equivalents at 30 09 09 per balance sheet cash]
	  		  		  		  	
		  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 

  

	(1)	From financial statements delivered under Clause 22.1(a) (Financial Statement) of this Agreement 

  
 307

 SCHEDULE 17 
 PRO FORMA BUDGET INFORMATION 
 BUDGET 

UK Bank Group 
 (£ in millions)

																													
	 	  	 	 	  	[l]	 	 	[l]	 
	 INCOME STATEMENT 
	  	Note
Ref	 	  	Q1	 	 	Q2	 	 	Q3	 	 	Q4	 	 	[l]	 	 	Q1	 
	 Revenue
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  
	 COGS
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 Gross Margin
	  				  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  
	 Gross Margin %
	  				  	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 
	 SG&A
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  
	 Segment Profit
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  
	 Other Charges
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  
	 Depreciation and Amortisation
	  	 	c	  	  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 
	 EBIT
	  				  	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  	 	£	—  	  

  
 308

																													
	 	  	 	 	  	[l]	 	  	[l]	 
	 CASH FLOW STATEMENT
	  	 	 	  	Q1	 	  	Q2	 	  	Q3	 	  	Q4	 	  	[l]	 	  	Q1	 
	 Segment Profit
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Net Cash Interest
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Change in Working Capital
	  	 	c	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Other
	  				  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Net Operating Cash Flows
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Increase in Intangible Assets
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Increase in Fixed Assets
	  	 	c	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Net Investing Cash Flows
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Borrowings
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Repayments
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Asset Disposals
	  	 	c	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Permitted Payments to Parent
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Contributions from Parent
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Net Financing Cash Flows
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Total Cash Flows
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  

  
 309

																													
	 	  	 	 	  	[l]	 	  	[l]	 
	 BALANCE SHEET 
	  	 	 	  	Q1	 	  	Q2	 	  	Q3	 	  	Q4	 	  	[l]	 	  	Q1	 
	 Cash
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Accounts Receivable
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Prepaid & Other
	  	 	c	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Current Assets
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Fixed Assets, net
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Contributions to Parent
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
	 Other Assets
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Total Assets
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Accounts Payable
	  	 	c	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Accrued Expenses
	  	 	c	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Interest Payable
	  	 	b	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Current Liabilities
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Long Term Debt
	  	 	b	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Other
	  				  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  				  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Total Liabilities
	  				  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  

  
 310

																									
	 Equity
	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  
		  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 
	 Total Shareholders’ Equity
	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  
	 Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  	  	£	—  	  

 Notes 

The above statements provide limited information concerning certain line items of the UK Bank Group’s budget (as defined in the Senior Facilities
Agreement) according to the following notes: 
 a = Items will be specific to the Excluded Group only 

b = Items will be determined specifically without allocation 
 c = Items will be allocated between the Bank Group and Excluded Group based upon appropriate methodologies as determined by the Board of Directors 
 Accordingly the starting balance sheet and balance sheets for the budget periods may be incomplete 

  
 311401 (k) Plan

 Exhibit 4.1COV 
 VANGUARD FIDUCIARY TRUST COMPANY 
 DEFINED CONTRIBUTION VOLUME SUBMITTER
PLAN AND TRUST 

 Ex 4.2TOC 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
  

							
	ARTICLE I	  
	DEFINITIONS	  
	
	ARTICLE II	  
	ADMINISTRATION	  
			
	 2.1
	 	 POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER
	  	 	14	  
	 2.2
	 	 DESIGNATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY
	  	 	14	  
	 2.3
	 	 ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES
	  	 	14	  
	 2.4
	 	 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR
	  	 	14	  
	 2.5
	 	 RECORDS AND REPORTS
	  	 	15	  
	 2.6
	 	 APPOINTMENT OF ADVISERS
	  	 	15	  
	 2.7
	 	 INFORMATION FROM EMPLOYER
	  	 	15	  
	 2.8
	 	 PAYMENT OF EXPENSES
	  	 	16	  
	 2.9
	 	 MAJORITY ACTIONS
	  	 	16	  
	 2.10
	 	 CLAIMS PROCEDURE
	  	 	16	  
	 2.11
	 	 CLAIMS REVIEW PROCEDURE
	  	 	16	  
	
	ARTICLE III	  
	ELIGIBILITY	  
			
	 3.1
	 	 CONDITIONS OF ELIGIBILITY
	  	 	16	  
	 3.2
	 	 EFFECTIVE DATE OF PARTICIPATION
	  	 	16	  
	 3.3
	 	 DETERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY
	  	 	17	  
	 3.4
	 	 TERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY
	  	 	17	  
	 3.5
	 	 REHIRED EMPLOYEES AND BREAKS IN SERVICE
	  	 	17	  
	 3.6
	 	 ELECTION NOT TO PARTICIPATE
	  	 	18	  
	
	ARTICLE IV	  
	CONTRIBUTION AND ALLOCATION	  
			
	 4.1
	 	 FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION
	  	 	18	  
	 4.2
	 	 TIME OF PAYMENT OF EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION
	  	 	19	  
	 4.3
	 	 ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTION, FORFEITURES AND EARNINGS
	  	 	19	  
	 4.4
	 	 MAXIMUM ANNUAL ADDITIONS
	  	 	25	  
	 4.5
	 	 ADJUSTMENT FOR EXCESSIVE ANNUAL ADDITIONS
	  	 	27	  
	 4.6
	 	 ROLLOVERS
	  	 	28	  
	 4.7
	 	 PLAN-TO-PLAN TRANSFERS FROM QUALIFIED PLANS
	  	 	28	  
	 4.8
	 	 AFTER-TAX VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS
	  	 	29	  
	 4.9
	 	 QUALIFIED VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS
	  	 	30	  
	 4.10
	 	 PARTICIPANT DIRECTED INVESTMENTS
	  	 	30	  
	 4.11
	 	 INTEGRATION IN MORE THAN ONE PLAN
	  	 	31	  
	 4.12
	 	 QUALIFIED MILITARY SERVICE
	  	 	31	  

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company

  
 1 

							
	
	ARTICLE V	  
	VALUATIONS	  
			
	 5.1
	 	 VALUATION OF THE TRUST FUND
	  	 	31	  
	 5.2
	 	 METHOD OF VALUATION
	  	 	31	  
	
	ARTICLE VI	  
	DETERMINATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS	  
			
	 6.1
	 	 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON RETIREMENT
	  	 	32	  
	 6.2
	 	 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH
	  	 	32	  
	 6.3
	 	 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS IN EVENT OF DISABILITY
	  	 	33	  
	 6.4
	 	 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON TERMINATION
	  	 	33	  
	 6.5
	 	 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS
	  	 	34	  
	 6.6
	 	 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH
	  	 	38	  
	 6.7
	 	 TIME OF DISTRIBUTION
	  	 	39	  
	 6.8
	 	 REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS
	  	 	39	  
	 6.9
	 	 DISTRIBUTION FOR MINOR OR INCOMPETENT INDIVIDUAL
	  	 	43	  
	 6.10
	 	 LOCATION OF PARTICIPANT OR BENEFICIARY UNKNOWN
	  	 	43	  
	 6.11
	 	 IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTION
	  	 	44	  
	 6.12
	 	 ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP
	  	 	44	  
	 6.13
	 	 SPECIAL RULE FOR CERTAIN PROFIT SHARING PLANS
	  	 	44	  
	 6.14
	 	 QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDER DISTRIBUTION
	  	 	45	  
	 6.15
	 	 DIRECT ROLLOVERS
	  	 	45	  
	 6.16
	 	 TRANSFER OF ASSETS FROM A MONEY PURCHASE PLAN
	  	 	46	  
	 6.17
	 	 CORRECTIVE DISTRIBUTIONS
	  	 	46	  
	
	ARTICLE VII	  
	TRUSTEE AND CUSTODIAN	  
			
	 7.1
	 	 BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TRUSTEE
	  	 	46	  
	 7.2
	 	 INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF DISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE
	  	 	47	  
	 7.3
	 	 INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF NONDISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE
	  	 	49	  
	 7.4
	 	 POWERS AND DUTIES OF CUSTODIAN
	  	 	50	  
	 7.5
	 	 LIFE INSURANCE
	  	 	50	  
	 7.6
	 	 LOANS TO PARTICIPANTS
	  	 	51	  
	 7.7
	 	 ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES
	  	 	52	  
	 7.8
	 	 TRUSTEE’S COMPENSATION AND EXPENSES AND TAXES
	  	 	52	  
	 7.9
	 	 ANNUAL REPORT OF THE TRUSTEE
	  	 	52	  
	 7.10
	 	 AUDIT
	  	 	53	  
	 7.11
	 	 RESIGNATION, REMOVAL AND SUCCESSION OF TRUSTEE
	  	 	53	  
	 7.12
	 	 TRANSFER OF INTEREST
	  	 	53	  
	 7.13
	 	 TRUSTEE INDEMNIFICATION
	  	 	54	  
	 7.14
	 	 EMPLOYER SECURITIES AND REAL PROPERTY
	  	 	54	  

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company

  
 2 

							
	
	ARTICLE VIII	  
	AMENDMENT, TERMINATION AND MERGERS	  
			
	 8.1
	 	 AMENDMENT
	  	 	54	  
	 8.2
	 	 TERMINATION
	  	 	55	  
	 8.3
	 	 MERGER, CONSOLIDATION OR TRANSFER OF ASSETS
	  	 	55	  
	
	ARTICLE IX	  
	TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS	  
			
	 9.1
	 	 TOP-HEAVY PLAN REQUIREMENTS
	  	 	55	  
	 9.2
	 	 DETERMINATION OF TOP-HEAVY STATUS
	  	 	55	  
	
	ARTICLE X	  
	MISCELLANEOUS	  
			
	 10.1
	 	 EMPLOYER ADOPTIONS
	  	 	57	  
	 10.2
	 	 PARTICIPANT’S RIGHTS
	  	 	57	  
	 10.3
	 	 ALIENATION
	  	 	57	  
	 10.4
	 	 CONSTRUCTION OF PLAN
	  	 	57	  
	 10.5
	 	 GENDER AND NUMBER
	  	 	57	  
	 10.6
	 	 LEGAL ACTION
	  	 	58	  
	 10.7
	 	 PROHIBITION AGAINST DIVERSION OF FUNDS
	  	 	58	  
	 10.8
	 	 EMPLOYER’S AND TRUSTEE’S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE
	  	 	58	  
	 10.9
	 	 INSURER’S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE
	  	 	58	  
	 10.10
	 	 RECEIPT AND RELEASE FOR PAYMENTS
	  	 	58	  
	 10.11
	 	 ACTION BY THE EMPLOYER
	  	 	58	  
	 10.12
	 	 NAMED FIDUCIARIES AND ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY
	  	 	58	  
	 10.13
	 	 HEADINGS
	  	 	59	  
	 10.14
	 	 APPROVAL BY INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE
	  	 	59	  
	 10.15
	 	 UNIFORMITY
	  	 	59	  
	 10.16
	 	 PAYMENT OF BENEFITS
	  	 	59	  
	 10.17
	 	 ELECTRONIC MEDIA
	  	 	59	  
	 10.18
	 	 PLAN CORRECTION
	  	 	59	  
	 10.19
	 	 NONTRUSTEED PLANS
	  	 	59	  
	
	ARTICLE XI	  
	PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS	  
			
	 11.1
	 	 ELECTION TO BECOME A PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER
	  	 	60	  
	 11.2
	 	 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS
	  	 	60	  
	 11.3
	 	 DESIGNATION OF AGENT
	  	 	60	  
	 11.4
	 	 EMPLOYEE TRANSFERS
	  	 	60	  
	 11.5
	 	 PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION AND FORFEITURES
	  	 	60	  
	 11.6
	 	 AMENDMENT
	  	 	61	  
	 11.7
	 	 DISCONTINUANCE OF PARTICIPATION
	  	 	61	  
	 11.8
	 	 ADMINISTRATOR’S AUTHORITY
	  	 	61	  
	 11.9
	 	 PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTION FOR AFFILIATE
	  	 	61	  

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company

  
 3 

							
	
	ARTICLE XII	  
	CASH OR DEFERRED PROVISIONS	  
			
	 12.1
	 	 FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION
	  	 	61	  
	 12.2
	 	 PARTICIPANT’S SALARY REDUCTION ELECTION
	  	 	62	  
	 12.3
	 	 ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTION, FORFEITURES AND EARNINGS
	  	 	64	  
	 12.4
	 	 ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS
	  	 	65	  
	 12.5
	 	 ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS
	  	 	67	  
	 12.6
	 	 ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS
	  	 	70	  
	 12.7
	 	 ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS
	  	 	72	  
	 12.8
	 	 SAFE HARBOR PROVISIONS
	  	 	74	  
	 12.9
	 	 ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP
	  	 	76	  
	
	ARTICLE XIII	  
	SIMPLE 401(K) PROVISIONS	  
			
	 13.1
	 	 SIMPLE 401(k) PROVISIONS
	  	 	77	  
	 13.2
	 	 DEFINITIONS
	  	 	77	  
	 13.3
	 	 CONTRIBUTIONS
	  	 	77	  
	 13.4
	 	 ELECTION AND NOTICE REQUIREMENTS
	  	 	78	  
	 13.5
	 	 VESTING REQUIREMENTS
	  	 	78	  
	 13.6
	 	 TOP-HEAVY RULES
	  	 	78	  
	 13.7
	 	 NONDISCRIMINATION TESTS
	  	 	78	  
	
	ARTICLE XIV	  
	MULTIPLE EMPLOYER PROVISIONS	  
			
	 14.1
	 	 ELECTION AND OVERRIDING EFFECT
	  	 	78	  
	 14.2
	 	 DEFINITIONS
	  	 	79	  
	 14.3
	 	 PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER ELECTIONS
	  	 	79	  
	 14.4
	 	 HIGHLY COMPENSATED EMPLOYEE STATUS
	  	 	79	  
	 14.5
	 	 TESTING
	  	 	79	  
	 14.6
	 	 TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS
	  	 	80	  
	 14.7
	 	 COMPENSATION
	  	 	80	  
	 14.8
	 	 SERVICE
	  	 	80	  
	 14.9
	 	 REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS
	  	 	80	  
	 14.10
	 	 COOPERATION AND INDEMNIFICATION
	  	 	80	  
	 14.11
	 	 TRANSITION RULES
	  	 	81	  
	 14.12
	 	 INVOLUNTARY TERMINATION
	  	 	81	  
	 14.13
	 	 VOLUNTARY TERMINATION
	  	 	82	  

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company

  
 4 

 Ex 4.1 
 Volume Submitter Plan 
 ARTICLE I 

DEFINITIONS 
 As used in this Plan, the following words and phrases shall have the meanings set forth herein unless a different meaning is clearly required by the context: 

1.1 “Account” means any separate notational account established and maintained by the Administrator for each Participant under the Plan.
To the extent applicable, a Participant may have any (or all) of the following Accounts: 
 (a) “Combined Account”
means the account representing the Participant’s total interest under the Plan resulting from (a) the Employer’s contributions in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan or Money Purchase Plan, and (b) the Employer Nonelective
Contributions in the case of a 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan. Separate accountings shall be maintained with respect to that portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to Employer contributions made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2) and to
Employer contributions made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(3). 
 (b) “Elective Deferral Account” means the account
established hereunder to which Elective Deferrals (including a separate accounting for Catch-Up Contributions) are allocated. Amounts in the Participant’s Elective Deferral Account are nonforfeitable when made and are subject to the
distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(d). For calendar years beginning after December 31, 2005, the Elective Deferral Account may consist of the sub-Accounts listed below. Unless specifically stated otherwise, any reference to a
Participant’s Elective Deferral Account will refer to both of these sub-Accounts. 
 (1) “Pre-Tax Elective Deferral
Account” means the portion of the Elective Deferral Account attributable to Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals (i.e., Elective Deferrals that are not subject to Federal Income Tax at the time of their deferral to the Plan). 

(2) “Roth Elective Deferral Account” means the portion of the Elective Deferral Account attributable to Roth Elective Deferrals
(i.e., that are subject to Federal Income Tax at the time of their deferral). 
 (c) “Qualified Matching Contribution
Account” means the account established hereunder to which Qualified Matching Contributions are allocated. Amounts in the Qualified Matching Contribution Account are nonforfeitable when made and are subject to the distribution restrictions of
Section 12.2(d). 
 (d) “Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account” means the account established hereunder to
which Qualified Nonelective Contributions are allocated. Amounts in the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account are nonforfeitable when made and are subject to the distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(d). 

(e) “Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account” means the account established hereunder to which a Participant’s
tax-deductible qualified voluntary employee contributions made pursuant to Section 4.9 are allocated. 
 (f) “Rollover
Account” means the account established hereunder to which amounts transferred from another qualified plan or Individual Retirement Account in accordance with Section 4.6 are allocated. 

(g) “Transfer Account” means the account established hereunder to which amounts transferred to this Plan from a direct
plan-to-plan transfer in accordance with Section 4.7 are allocated. 
 (h) “Voluntary Contribution Account” means
the account established hereunder to which after-tax voluntary Employee contributions made pursuant to Section 4.8 are allocated. Amounts recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5 shall remain
subject to the limitations of Section 12.2. Therefore, a separate accounting shall be maintained with respect to that portion of the Voluntary Contribution Account attributable to after-tax voluntary Employee contributions made pursuant to
Section 4.8. 
 1.2 “ACP” means the “Actual Contribution Percentage” determined pursuant to
Section 12.6(d). 
 1.3 “Act” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to
time. 
 1.4 “ADP” means the “Actual Deferral Percentage” determined pursuant to Section 12.4(d). 

1.5 “Administrator” means the Employer unless another person or entity has been designated by the Employer pursuant to Section 2.2
to administer the Plan on behalf of the Employer. “Administrator” also includes any Qualified Termination Administrator (QTA) that has assumed the responsibilities of the Administrator in accordance with guidelines set forth by the
Department of Labor. 
 1.6 “Adoption Agreement” means the separate agreement which is executed by the Employer and sets forth
the elective provisions of this Plan and Trust as specified by the Employer. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 1 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 1.7 “Affiliated Employer” means any corporation which is a member of a controlled group
of corporations (as defined in Code Section 414(b)) which includes the Employer; any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) which is under common control (as defined in Code Section 414(c)) with the Employer; any organization
(whether or not incorporated) which is a member of an affiliated service group (as defined in Code Section 414(m)) which includes the Employer; and any other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to Regulations under Code
Section 414(o). 
 1.8 “Anniversary Date” means the last day of the Plan Year. 

1.9 “Annuity Starting Date” means, with respect to any Participant, the first day of the first period for which an amount is paid as an
annuity, or, in the case of a benefit not payable in the form of an annuity, the first day on which all events have occurred which entitles the Participant to such benefit. 
 1.10 “Beneficiary” means the person (or entity) to whom all or a portion of a deceased Participant’s interest in the Plan is payable, subject to the restrictions of Sections 6.2 and
6.6. 
 1.11 “Catch-Up Contribution” means, effective for taxable years beginning after December 31, 2001, an Elective
Deferral made to the Plan by a Catch-Up Eligible Participant that, during any taxable year of such Participant, exceeds one of the following: 
 (a) a statutory dollar limit on Elective Deferrals or “annual additions” as provided in Code Sections 401(a)(30), 402(h), 403(b), 408, 415(c), or 457(b)(2) (without regard to Code
Section 457(b)(3)), as applicable; 
 (b) any Plan limit on Elective Deferrals other than a limit described in
(a) above; or the limit imposed by the actual deferral percentage (ADP) test under Code Section 401(k)(3) which Excess Contributions would otherwise be distributed pursuant to Section 12.5(b) to a Highly Compensated Employee who is a
Catch-Up Eligible Participant. 
 Catch-Up Contributions for a Participant for a Participant’s taxable year may not exceed
the dollar limit on Catch-Up Contributions under Code Section 414(v) for the Participant’s taxable year. The dollar limit on Catch-Up Contributions under Code Section 414(v)(2)(B)(i) is $1,000 for taxable years beginning in 2002,
increasing by $1,000 for each year thereafter up to $5,000 for taxable years beginning in 2006 and later years. After 2006, the $5,000 limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code
Section 414(v)(2)(C). Any such adjustments shall be in multiples of $500. Notwithstanding the preceding, different dollar limits apply to Catch-Up Contributions under SIMPLE 401(k) plans. 

1.12 “Catch-Up Eligible Participant” means, for any Participant’s taxable year beginning after December 31, 2001, a
Participant who: 
 (a) is eligible to make Elective Deferrals to the Plan pursuant to Section 12.2; and 

(b) will attain age 50 or older by the end of such taxable year. 
 1.13 “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as it may be amended from time to time. 
 1.14 “Compensation” means, with respect to any Participant and except as otherwise provided below and in the Adoption Agreement, 

(a) one of the following as elected in the Adoption Agreement: 
 (1) Information required to be reported under Code Sections 6041, 6051 and 6052 (Wages, tips and other compensation as reported on Form W-2). Compensation means wages, within the meaning of Code
Section 3401(a), and all other payments of compensation to an Employee by the Employer (in the course of the Employer’s trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under Code Sections
6041(d), 6051(a)(3) and 6052. Compensation must be determined without regard to any rules under Code Section 3401(a) that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such
as the exception for agricultural labor in Code Section 3401(a)(2)). 
 (2) Code Section 3401(a) Wages. Compensation
means an Employee’s wages within the meaning of Code Section 3401(a) for the purposes of income tax withholding at the source but determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or
location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code Section 3401(a)(2)). 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 2 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (3) 415 safe harbor compensation. Compensation means wages, salaries, and fees for
professional services and other amounts received (without regard to whether or not an amount is paid in cash) for personal services actually rendered in the course of employment with the Employer maintaining the Plan to the extent that the amounts
are includible in gross income (including, but not limited to, commissions paid salespersons, compensation for services on the basis of a percentage of profits, commissions on insurance premiums, tips, bonuses, fringe benefits, and reimbursements,
or other expense allowances under a nonaccountable plan (as described in Regulation Section 1.62-2(c))), and excluding the following: 
 (i) Employer contributions to a plan of deferred compensation which are not includible in the Employee’s gross income for the taxable year in which contributed, or Employer contributions under a
simplified employee pension plan to the extent such contributions are excludable from the Employee’s gross income, or any distributions from a plan of deferred compensation; 

(ii) Amounts realized from the exercise of a nonqualified stock option, or when restricted stock (or property) held by the Employee
either becomes freely transferable or is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; 
 (iii) Amounts realized from
the sale, exchange or other disposition of stock acquired under a qualified stock option; and 
 (iv) Other amounts which
receive special tax benefits, or contributions made by the Employer (whether or not under a salary reduction agreement) towards the purchase of an annuity contract described in Code Section 403(b) (whether or not the contributions are actually
excludable from the gross income of the Employee). 
 (b) However, Compensation for any Self-Employed Individual shall be equal
to Earned Income. Furthermore, the contributions on behalf of any Owner-Employee shall be made only with respect to the Earned Income for such Owner-Employee which is derived from the trade or business with respect to which such Plan is established.

 (c) Compensation shall include only that Compensation which is actually paid to the Participant during the determination
period. Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, the determination period shall be the period elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement. If the Employer makes no election, the determination period shall be the Plan Year. 

(d) Notwithstanding the above, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, Compensation shall include all of the following types of elective
contributions and all of the following types of deferred compensation: 
 (1) Elective contributions that are made by the
Employer on behalf of a Participant that are not includible in gross income under Code Sections 125, 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B), 403(b), and 132(f)(4). If specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), amounts under Code
Section 125 shall be deemed to include any amounts not available to a Participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage because the Participant is unable to certify that he or she has other health coverage. An amount will be treated as an
amount under Code Section 125 pursuant to the preceding sentence only if the Employer does not request or collect information regarding the Participant’s other health coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan.

 (2) Compensation deferred under an eligible deferred compensation plan within the meaning of Code Section 457(b); and

 (3) Employee contributions (under governmental plans) described in Code Section 414(h)(2) that are picked up by the
employing unit and thus are treated as Employer contributions. 
 (e) If the Employer elects, in Appendix A to the Adoption
Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), to apply the post-severance compensation provisions of the proposed Code Section 415 Regulations, then Compensation will include payments made within 2 1/2 months after severance from employment (within
the meaning of Code Section 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(I)) if they are payments that, absent a severance from employment, would have been paid to the Employee while the Employee continued in employment with the Employer and are regular compensation for
services during the Employee’s regular working hours, compensation for services outside the Employee’s regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar compensation, and payments for
accrued bona fide sick, vacation or other leave, but only if the Employee would have been able to use the leave if employment had continued. Any payments not described above are not considered Compensation if paid after severance from employment,
even if they are paid within 2 1/2 months following severance from employment, except for payments to an individual who does not currently perform services for the Employer by reason of qualified military service (within the meaning of Code
Section 414(u)(1)) to the extent these payments do not exceed the amounts the individual would have received if the individual had continued to perform services for the Employer rather than entering qualified military service. 

(f) For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2002, Compensation in excess of $200,000 shall be disregarded for all purposes,
except that for purposes of salary deferral elections, the Administrator is not required to disregard Compensation in excess of $200,000. Such amount shall be adjusted by the Commissioner for increases in the cost-of-living in accordance with Code
Section 401(a)(17)(B). The cost-of-living adjustment in effect for a calendar year applies to any determination period beginning with or within such calendar year. If a determination period consists of fewer than twelve (12) months, the
$200,000 annual Compensation limit will be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the determination period, and the denominator of which is twelve (12). 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 3 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (g) If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude a class of Employees
from the Plan, then Compensation for any Employee who becomes eligible or ceases to be eligible to participate during a determination period shall only include Compensation while the Employee is an Eligible Employee. 

(h) If, in connection with the adoption of any amendment, the definition of Compensation has been modified, then, except as otherwise
provided herein, for Plan Years prior to the Plan Year which includes the adoption date of such amendment, Compensation means compensation determined pursuant to the terms of the Plan then in effect. 

1.15 “Contract” or “Policy” means any life insurance policy, retirement income policy, or annuity contract (group or
individual) issued by the Insurer. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms of any contract purchased hereunder, the Plan provisions shall control. 
 1.16 “Custodian” means a person or entity that has custody of all or any portion of the Plan assets. 
 1.17 “Designated Investment Alternative” means a specific investment identified by name by the Employer (or such other Fiduciary who has been given the authority to select investment
options) as an available investment under the Plan to which Plan assets may be invested by the Trustee (or Insurer) pursuant to the investment direction of a Participant. 
 1.18 “Directed Investment Option” means a Designated Investment Alternative and any other investment permitted by the Plan and the Participant Direction Procedures to which Plan assets
may be invested pursuant to the investment direction of a Participant. 
 1.19 “Directed Trustee” means a Trustee who, with
respect to the investment of Plan assets, is subject to the direction of the Plan Administrator, the Employer, a properly appointed Investment Manager, a named Fiduciary, or Plan Participant. To the extent the Trustee is a Directed Trustee, the
Trustee does not have any discretionary authority with respect to the investment of Plan assets. In addition, the Trustee is not responsible for the propriety of any directed investment made pursuant to this Section and shall not be required to
consult or advise the Employer regarding the investment quality of any directed investment held under the Plan. 
 1.20 “Discretionary
Trustee” means a Trustee who has the authority and discretion to invest, manage or control any portion of the Plan assets without direction from any person or entity. 
 1.21 “Early Retirement Date” means the date specified in the Adoption Agreement on which a Participant has satisfied the requirements specified in the Adoption Agreement (Early Retirement
Age). If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant shall become fully Vested upon satisfying such requirements if the Participant is still employed at the Early Retirement Age. 

A Participant who separates from service after satisfying any service requirement but before satisfying the age requirement for Early
Retirement Age and who thereafter reaches the age requirement contained herein shall be entitled to receive benefits under this Plan (other than any accelerated vesting and allocations of Employer contributions) as though the requirements for Early
Retirement Age had been satisfied. 
 1.22 “Earned Income” means the net earnings from self-employment in the trade or business
with respect to which the Plan is established, for which the personal services of the individual are a material income-producing factor. Net earnings will be determined without regard to items not included in gross income and the deductions
allocable to such items. Net earnings are reduced by contributions made by the Employer to a qualified plan to the extent deductible under Code Section 404. In addition, net earnings shall be determined with regard to the deduction allowed to
the taxpayer by Code Section 164(f). 
 If Compensation is defined to exclude any items of Compensation (other than
Elective Deferrals), then for purposes of determining the Compensation of a Self-Employed Individual, Earned Income shall be adjusted by multiplying Earned Income by the percentage of total Compensation that is included for the Eligible Participants
who are Nonhighly Compensated Employees. The percentage is determined by calculating the percentage of each Nonhighly Compensated Eligible Participant’s total Compensation prior to excluding any items selected in the Adjustments to Compensation
Section of the Adoption Agreement that is included in the definition of Compensation and averaging those percentages. 
 1.23 “Effective
Date” means the date this Plan, including any restatement or amendment of this Plan, is effective. Where the Plan is restated or amended, a reference to Effective Date is the effective date of the restatement or amendment, except where the
context indicates a reference to an earlier Effective Date. If this Plan is retroactively effective, the provisions of this Plan generally control. However, if the provisions of this Plan are different from the provisions of the Employer’s
prior plan document and, after the retroactive Effective Date of this Plan, the Employer operated in compliance with the provisions of the prior plan, the provisions of such prior plan are incorporated into this Plan for purposes of determining
whether the Employer operated the Plan in compliance with its terms, provided operation in compliance with the terms of the prior plan do not violate any qualification requirements under the Code, Regulations, or other IRS guidance. 

The Employer may designate special effective dates for individual provisions under the Plan where provided in the Adoption Agreement or
under Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections). If one or more qualified retirement plans have 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 4 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
been merged into this Plan, the provisions of the merging plan(s) will remain in full force and effect until the effective date of the plan merger(s). 

1.24 “Elective Deferrals” means the Employer’s contributions to the Plan that are made pursuant to a Participant’s deferral
election pursuant to Section 12.2, excluding any such amounts distributed as “excess annual additions” pursuant to Section 4.5. Elective Deferrals shall be subject to the requirements of Sections 12.2(c) and 12.2(d) and shall,
except as otherwise provided herein, be required to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of the Code Section 401(k) Regulations. For calendar years beginning after December 31, 2005, the term “Elective Deferrals” includes
Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals and Roth Elective Deferrals. 
 1.25 “Eligible Employee” means any Eligible Employee as elected in
the Adoption Agreement and as provided herein. .An individual shall not be an Eligible Employee if such individual is not reported on the payroll records of the Employer as a common law employee. In particular, it is expressly intended that
individuals not treated as common law employees by the Employer on its payroll records and out-sourced workers, are not Eligible Employees and are excluded from Plan participation even if a court or administrative agency determines that such
individuals are common law employees and not independent contractors. However, the two preceding sentences shall not apply to partners or other Self-Employed Individuals unless the Employer treats them as independent contractors. Furthermore,
Employees of an Affiliated Employer will not be treated as Eligible Employees prior to the date the Affiliated Employer adopts the Plan as a Participating Employer. 
 Employees who became Employees as the result of a “Code Section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction” will, unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, only be Eligible Employees after the
expiration of the transition period beginning on the date of the transaction and ending on the last day of the first Plan Year beginning after the date of the transaction. A Code Section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction is an asset or stock
acquisition, merger, or similar transaction involving a change in the Employer of the Employees of a trade or business that is subject to the special rules set forth in Code Section 410(b)(6)(C). However, regardless of any election made in the
Adoption Agreement, if a separate entity becomes an Affiliated Employer as the result of a Code Section 410(b)(6)(C) transaction, then Employees of such separate entity will not be treated as Eligible Employees prior to the date the entity
adopts the Plan as a Participating Employer. 
 If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude union employees,
then Employees whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and “employee representatives” under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining and if two percent (2%) or
less of the Employees covered pursuant to that agreement are professionals as defined in Regulation Section 1.410(b)-9, shall not be eligible to participate in this Plan to the extent of employment covered by such agreement. For this purpose,
the term “employee representatives” does not include any organization more than half of whose members are employees who are owners, officers, or executives of the Employer. 

If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude nonresident aliens, then Employees who are nonresident aliens (within the
meaning of Code Section 7701(b)(1)(B)) who received no earned income (within the meaning of Code Section 911(d)(2)) from the Employer which constitutes income from sources within the United States (within the meaning of Code
Section 861(a)(3)) shall not be eligible to participate in this Plan. In addition, this paragraph shall also apply to exclude from participation in the Plan an Employee who is a nonresident alien (within the meaning of Code
Section 7701(b)(1)(B)) but who receives earned income (within the meaning of Code Section 911(d)(2)) from the Employer that constitutes income from sources within the United States (within the meaning of Code Section 861(a)(3)), if
all of the Employee’s earned income from the Employer from sources within the United States is exempt from United States income tax under an applicable income tax convention. The preceding sentence will apply only if all Employees described in
the preceding sentence are excluded from the Plan. 
 If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude Part-Time/Temporary/Seasonal
Employees, then notwithstanding any such exclusion, if any such excluded Employee actually completes a Year of Service (or Period of Service if the Elapsed Time method is selected), then such Employee will enter the Plan on the next entry date
following completion of the Year of Service (or, if applicable, Period of Service), provided the Employee is employed by the Employer on that entry date. 
 1.26 “Employee” means any person who is employed by the Employer. The term “Employee” shall also include any person who is an employee of an Affiliated Employer and any Leased
Employee deemed to be an Employee as provided in Code Section 414(n) or (o). 
 1.27 “Employer” means the entity specified
in the Adoption Agreement, any successor which shall maintain this Plan and any predecessor which has maintained this Plan. In addition, unless the context means otherwise, the term “Employer” shall include any Participating Employer which
shall adopt this Plan. 
 1.28 “Excess Aggregate Contributions” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the excess of:

 (a) The aggregate “contribution percentage amounts” (as defined in Section 12.6) actually made on behalf of
Highly Compensated Participants for such Plan Year and taken into account in computing the numerator of the ACP, over 
 (b) The
maximum “contribution percentage amounts” permitted by the ACP test in Section 12.6 (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants in order of their “contribution
percentages” beginning with the highest of such percentages). 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 5 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 Such determination shall be made after first taking into account corrections of any
Excess Deferrals pursuant to Section 12.2 and then taking into account adjustments of any Excess Contributions pursuant to Section 12.5. 
 1.29 “Excess Compensation” means, with respect to a Plan that is integrated with Social Security (permitted disparity), a Participant’s Compensation which is in excess of the
integration level elected in the Adoption Agreement. However, if Compensation is based on less than a twelve (12) month determination period, Excess Compensation shall be determined by reducing the integration level by a fraction, the numerator
of which is the number of full months in the short period and the denominator of which is twelve (12). A determination period is not less than twelve (12) months solely because a Participant’s Compensation does not include Compensation
paid during a determination period while the Participant was not a Participant in this component of the Plan. 
 1.30 “Excess
Contributions” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the excess of: 
 (a) The aggregate amount of Employer
contributions actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants for such Plan Year and taken into account in computing the numerator of the ADP, over 
 (b) The maximum amount of such contributions permitted by the ADP test in Section 12.4 (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants in order
of the actual deferral ratios, beginning with the highest of such ratios). 
 In determining the amount of Excess Contributions
to be distributed and/or recharacterized with respect to an affected Highly Compensated Participant as determined herein, such amount shall be reduced by any Excess Deferrals previously distributed to such affected Highly Compensated Participant for
the Participant’s taxable year ending with or within such Plan Year. 
 1.31 “Excess Deferrals” means, with respect to any
taxable year of a Participant, either (1) those elective deferrals within the meaning of Code Sections 402(g) or 402A that are made during the Participant’s taxable year and exceed the dollar limitation under Code Section 402(g)
(including, if applicable, the dollar limitation on Catch-Up Contributions defined in Code Section 414(v)) for such year; or (2) are made during a calendar year and exceed the dollar limitation under Code Sections 402(g) and 402A
(including, if applicable, the dollar limitation on Catch-Up Contributions defined in Code Section 414(v)) for the Participant’s taxable year beginning in such calendar year, counting only Elective Deferrals made under this Plan and any
other plan, contract or arrangement maintained by the Employer. 
 1.32 “Fiduciary” means any person who (a) exercises any
discretionary authority or discretionary control respecting management of the Plan or exercises any authority or control respecting management or disposition of its assets, (b) renders investment advice for a fee or other compensation, direct
or indirect, with respect to any monies or other property of the Plan or has any authority or responsibility to do so, or (c) has any discretionary authority or discretionary responsibility in the administration of the Plan. 

1.33 “Fiscal Year” means the Employer’s accounting year. 
 1.34 “Forfeiture” means that portion of a Participant’s Account that is not Vested and is disposed of in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. Unless otherwise elected in the
Adoption Agreement, Forfeitures occur pursuant to (a) below. 
 (a) A Forfeiture will occur on the earlier of: 

(1) The last day of the Plan Year in which a Participant incurs five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, or 

(2) The distribution of the entire Vested portion of the Participant’s Account of a Participant who has severed employment with the
Employer. For purposes of this provision, if the Participant has a Vested benefit of zero, then such Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution of such Vested benefit as of the year in which the severance of employment occurs. For
this purpose, a Participant’s Vested benefit shall not include: (1) the Participant’s Qualified Voluntary Contribution Account, and (2) the Participant’s Rollover Account. 

(b) If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a Forfeiture will occur as of the last day of the Plan Year in which a Participant incurs five
(5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service. 
 Regardless of the preceding, if a Participant is eligible to share in the
allocation of Forfeitures in the year in which the Forfeiture would otherwise occur, then the Forfeiture will not occur until the end of the first Plan Year for which the Participant is not eligible to share in the allocation of Forfeitures.
Furthermore, the term “Forfeiture” shall also include amounts deemed to be Forfeitures pursuant to any other provision of this Plan. 

1.35 “Former Employee” means an individual who has severed employment with the Employer or an Affiliated Employer. 

1.36 “414(s) Compensation” means Compensation as defined in Section 1.14. However, the Employer may operationally elect to use any
other definition of compensation for 414(s) Compensation provided such definition satisfies the nondiscrimination requirements of Code Section 414(s) and the Regulations thereunder. The period for determining 414(s) Compensation must be either
the Plan Year or the calendar year ending with or within the Plan Year. An Employer may further limit the period taken into account to that part of the Plan 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 6 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Year or calendar year in which an Employee was a Participant in the component of the Plan being tested. The period used to determine 414(s) Compensation must be applied uniformly to all
Participants for the Plan Year. 
 1.37 “415 Compensation” means, with respect to any Participant, such Participant’s
(a) Wages, tips and other compensation on Form W-2, (b) Section 3401(a) wages or (c) 415 safe harbor compensation as elected in the Adoption Agreement for purposes of Compensation. 415 Compensation shall be based on the full
Limitation Year regardless of when participation in the Plan commences. Furthermore, regardless of any election made in the Adoption Agreement, 415 Compensation shall include any elective deferral (as defined in Code Section 402(g)(3)) and any
amount which is contributed or deferred by the Employer at the election of the Participant and which is not includible in the gross income of the Participant by reason of Code Sections 125, 457, and 132(f)(4). 

If elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), amounts under Code Section 125 shall be deemed to
include any amounts not available to a Participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage because the Participant is unable to certify that he or she has other health coverage. An amount will be treated as an amount under Code Section 125
pursuant to the preceding sentence only if the Employer does not request or collect information regarding the Participant’s other health coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan. 

For Limitation Years beginning in and after the year specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (but in no event earlier than the
Limitation Year beginning in 2005), payments made within 2 1/2 months after severance from employment (within the meaning of Code Section 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(I)) will be compensation within the meaning of Code Section 415(c)(3) if they are
payments that, absent a severance from employment, would have been paid to the Employee while the Employee continued in employment with the Employer and are regular compensation for services during the Employee’s regular working hours,
compensation for services outside the Employee’s regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar compensation, and payments for accrued bona fide sick, vacation or other leave, but only if
the Employee would have been able to use the leave if employment had continued. Any payments not described above are not considered compensation if paid after severance from employment, even if they are paid within 2 1/2 months following severance
from employment, except for payments to an individual who does not currently perform services for the Employer by reason of qualified military service (within the meaning of Code Section 414(u)(1)) to the extent these payments do not exceed the
amounts the individual would have received if the individual had continued to perform services for the Employer rather than entering qualified military service. 
 415 Compensation will be limited to the same dollar limitations set forth in Section 1.14 adjusted in such manner as permitted under Code Section 415(d). 

Except as otherwise provided herein, if, in connection with the adoption of any amendment, the definition of 415 Compensation has been
modified, then for Plan Years prior to the Plan Year which includes the adoption date of such amendment, 415 Compensation means compensation determined pursuant to the terms of the Plan then in effect. 

1.38 “Highly Compensated Employee” means an Employee described in Code Section 414(q) and the Regulations thereunder, and generally
means any Employee who: 
 (a) was a “five percent (5%) owner” as defined in Section 1.44(b) at any time
during the “determination year” or the “look-back year”; or 
 (b) for the “look-back year” had 415
Compensation from the Employer in excess of $80,000 and, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, was in the Top-Paid Group for the “look-back year.” The $80,000 amount is adjusted at the same time and in the same manner as under Code
Section 415(d). 
 The “determination year” means the Plan Year for which testing is being performed and the
“look-back year” means the immediately preceding twelve (12) month period. However, if the calendar year data election is made in the Adoption Agreement, for purposes of (b) above, the “look-back year” shall be the
calendar year beginning within the twelve (12) month period immediately preceding the “determination year.” 

The Top-Paid Group election may be made at any time up to the date the applicable test for which the term is being used must be performed
(including any statutory or regulatory provision for the correction of a failure of such test). 
 A Highly Compensated Former
Employee is based on the rules applicable to determining highly compensated employee status as in effect for that “determination year,” in accordance with Regulation Section 1.414(q)-1T, A-4 and IRS Notice 97-45 (or any superseding
guidance). 
 In determining who is a Highly Compensated Employee, Employees who are nonresident aliens and who received no
earned income (within the meaning of Code Section 911(d)) from the Employer constituting United States source income within the meaning of Code Section 861(a)(3) shall not be treated as Employees. If a nonresident alien Employee has U.S.
source income, that Employee is treated as satisfying this definition if all of such Employee’s U.S. source income from the Employer is exempt from U.S. income tax under an applicable income tax treaty. Additionally, all Affiliated Employers
shall be taken into account as a single employer and Leased Employees within the meaning of Code Sections 414(n)(2) and 414(o)(2) shall be considered Employees unless such Leased Employees are covered by a plan described in Code
Section 414(n)(5) and are not covered in any qualified plan maintained by the Employer. The exclusion of 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 7 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Leased Employees for this purpose shall be applied on a uniform and consistent basis for all of the Employer’s retirement plans. Highly Compensated Former Employees shall be treated as
Highly Compensated Employees without regard to whether they performed services during the “determination year.” 
 1.39
“Highly Compensated Participant” means any Highly Compensated Employee who is eligible to participate in the component of the Plan being tested. 
 1.40 “Hour of Service” means (1) each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly compensated or entitled to Compensation by the Employer for the performance of duties
during the applicable computation period (these hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period in which the duties are performed); (2) each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly compensated or entitled to
Compensation by the Employer (irrespective of whether the employment relationship has terminated) for reasons other than performance of duties (such as vacation, holidays, sickness, incapacity (including disability), jury duty, lay-off, military
duty or leave of absence) during the applicable computation period (these hours will be calculated and credited pursuant to Department of Labor regulation Section 2530.200b-2 which is incorporated herein by reference); (3) each hour for
which back pay is awarded or agreed to by the Employer without regard to mitigation of damages (these hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period or periods to which the award or agreement pertains rather than the computation
period in which the award, agreement or payment is made). The same Hours of Service shall not be credited both under (1) or (2), as the case may be, and under (3). 
 Notwithstanding (2) above, (i) no more than 501 Hours of Service are required to be credited to an Employee on account of any single continuous period during which the Employee performs no
duties (whether or not such period occurs in a single computation period); (ii) an hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly paid, or entitled to payment, on account of a period during which no duties are performed is not required to
be credited to the Employee if such payment is made or due under a plan maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable workers’ compensation, or unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws; and (iii) Hours of
Service are not required to be credited for a payment which solely reimburses an Employee for medical or medically related expenses incurred by the Employee. Furthermore, for purposes of (2) above, a payment shall be deemed to be made by or due
from the Employer regardless of whether such payment is made by or due from the Employer directly, or indirectly through, among others, a trust fund, or insurer, to which the Employer contributes or pays premiums and regardless of whether
contributions made or due to the trust fund, insurer, or other entity are for the benefit of particular Employees or are on behalf of a group of Employees in the aggregate. 
 Hours of Service will be credited for employment with all Affiliated Employers and for any individual considered to be a Leased Employee pursuant to Code Section 414(n) or 414(o) and the Regulations
thereunder. Furthermore, the provisions of Department of Labor regulations Section 2530.200b-2(b) and (c) are incorporated herein by reference. 
 Hours of Service will be determined on the basis of the following method as elected in the Adoption Agreement: 
 If the days worked method is elected, an Employee will be credited with ten (10) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service
during the day. 
 If the weeks worked method is elected an Employee will be credited with forty-five (45) Hours of
Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the week. 
 If the
semi-monthly payroll periods worked method is elected, an Employee will be credited with ninety-five (95) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the
semi-monthly payroll period. 
 If the months worked method is elected, an Employee will be credited with one hundred
ninety (190) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the month. 
 If the bi-weekly payroll periods worked method is elected, an Employee will be credited with ninety (90) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one
(1) Hour of Service during the bi-weekly payroll period. 
 If the actual hours method is elected, an Employee is
credited with the actual Hours of Service the Employee completes with the Employer or the number of Hours of Service for which the Employee is paid (or entitled to payment). 
 1.41 “Insurer” means any legal reserve insurance company which has issued or shall issue one or more Contracts or Policies under the Plan. 

1.42 “Investment Manager” means a Fiduciary as described in Act Section 3(38). 

1.43 “Joint and Survivor Annuity” means an immediate annuity for the life of a Participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the
Participant’s spouse which is not less than fifty percent (50%), nor more than one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of the annuity payable during the joint lives of the Participant and the Participant’s spouse which can be
purchased with the Participant’s Vested interest in the Plan reduced by any outstanding loan balances pursuant to Section 7.6. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 8 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 1.44 “Key Employee” means, effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31,
2001, an Employee as defined in Code Section 416(i) and the Regulations thereunder. Generally, any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased employee as well as each of the Employee’s or former Employee’s Beneficiaries) is
considered a Key Employee if the Employee or former Employee, at any time during the Plan Year that contains the “determination date,” has been included in one of the following categories: 

(a) an officer of the Employer (as that term is defined within the meaning of the Regulations under Code Section 416) having annual
415 Compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under Code Section 416(i)(1) for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2002); 
 (b) a “five percent (5%) owner” of the Employer. “Five percent (5%) owner” means any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code Section 318)
more than five percent (5%) of the value of the outstanding stock of the Employer or stock possessing more than five percent (5%) of the total combined voting power of all stock of the Employer or, in the case of an unincorporated
business, any person who owns more than five percent (5%) of the capital or profits interest in the Employer; and 
 (c) a
“one percent (1%) owner” of the Employer having annual 415 Compensation from the Employer of more than $150,000. “One percent (1%) owner” means any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code
Section 318) more than one percent (1%) of the value of the outstanding stock of the Employer or stock possessing more than one percent (1%) of the total combined voting power of all stock of the Employer or, in the case of an
unincorporated business, any person who owns more than one percent (1%) of the capital or profits interest in the Employer. 
 In determining percentage ownership hereunder, employers that would otherwise be aggregated under Code Sections 414(b), (c), (m) and (o) shall be treated as separate employers. In determining
whether an individual has 415 Compensation of more than $150,000, 415 Compensation from each employer required to be aggregated under Code Sections 414(b), (c), (m) and (o) shall be taken into account. 

1.45 “Late Retirement Date” means the date of, or the first day of the month or the Anniversary Date coinciding with or next following,
whichever corresponds to the election in the Adoption Agreement for the Normal Retirement Date, a Participant’s actual retirement after having reached the Normal Retirement Date. 
 1.46 “Leased Employee” means any person (other than an Employee of the recipient Employer) who, pursuant to an agreement between the recipient Employer and any other person or entity
(“leasing organization”), has performed services for the recipient (or for the recipient and related persons determined in accordance with Code Section 414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at least one year,
and such services are performed under primary direction or control by the recipient Employer. Contributions or benefits provided a Leased Employee by the leasing organization which are attributable to services performed for the recipient Employer
shall be treated as provided by the recipient Employer. Furthermore, Compensation for a Leased Employee shall only include Compensation from the leasing organization that is attributable to services performed for the recipient Employer. 

A Leased Employee shall not be considered an employee of the recipient Employer if: (a) such employee is covered by a money purchase
pension plan providing: (1) a non-integrated employer contribution rate of at least ten percent (10%) of compensation, as defined in Code Section 415(c)(3), (2) immediate participation, and (3) full and immediate vesting;
and (b) leased employees do not constitute more than twenty percent (20%) of the recipient Employer’s nonhighly compensated workforce. 
 1.47 “Limitation Year” means the determination period used to determine Compensation. However, the Employer may elect a different Limitation Year in the Adoption Agreement. All qualified
plans maintained by the Employer must use the same Limitation Year. Furthermore, unless there is a change to a new Limitation Year, the Limitation Year will be a twelve (12) consecutive month period. In the case of an initial Limitation Year,
the Limitation Year will be the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending on the last day of the period specified in the Adoption Agreement. If the Limitation Year is amended to a different twelve (12) consecutive month period, the new
“Limitation Year” must begin on a date within the “Limitation Year” in which the amendment is made. 
 1.48 “Net
Profit” means, with respect to any Fiscal Year, the Employer’s net income or profit for such Fiscal Year determined upon the basis of the Employer’s books of account in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles,
without any reduction for taxes based upon income, or for contributions made by the Employer to this Plan and any other qualified plan. 

1.49 “Nonelective Contribution” means the Employer’s contributions to the Plan other than Elective Deferrals, any Qualified
Nonelective Contributions and any Qualified Matching Contributions. Employer matching contributions which are not Qualified Matching Contributions shall be considered a Nonelective Contribution for purposes of the Plan. 

1.50 “Nonhighly Compensated Employee/Participant” means any Employee/Participant who is not a Highly Compensated Employee. However, if
pursuant to Sections 12.4 or 12.6 the prior year testing method is used to calculate the ADP or the ACP, a Nonhighly Compensated Employee/Participant shall be determined using the definition of Highly Compensated Employee in effect for the preceding
Plan Year. 
 1.51 “Non-Key Employee” means any Employee or former Employee (and such Employee’s or former Employee’s
Beneficiaries) who is not a Key Employee. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard
Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 9 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 1.52 “Normal Retirement Age” means the age elected in the Adoption Agreement at which
time a Participant’s Account shall be nonforfeitable (if the Participant is employed by the Employer on or after that date). However, solely for purposes of nondiscrimination testing under Code Section 401(a)(4), the Employer may deem the
social security retirement age (as defined in Code Section 415(b)(8)) as the Normal Retirement Age. 
 1.53 “Normal Retirement
Date” means the date elected in the Adoption Agreement. 
 1.54 “1-Year Break in Service” means, if the Hour of
Service method is elected in the Adoption Agreement, the applicable computation period during which an Employee or former Employee has not completed more than 500 Hours of Service. However, if the Employer selected, in the Service Crediting Method
Section of the Adoption Agreement, to define a Year of Service as less than 1,000 Hours of Service, then the 500 Hours of Service in this definition of 1-Year Break in Service shall be proportionately reduced. Further, solely for the purpose of
determining whether an Employee has incurred a 1-Year Break in Service, Hours of Service shall be recognized for “authorized leaves of absence” and “maternity and paternity leaves of absence.” For this purpose, Hours of Service
shall be credited for the computation period in which the absence from work begins, only if credit therefore is necessary to prevent the Employee from incurring a 1-Year Break in Service, or, in any other case, in the immediately following
computation period. The Hours of Service credited for a “maternity or paternity leave of absence” shall be those which would normally have been credited but for such absence, or, in any case in which the Administrator is unable to
determine such hours normally credited, eight (8) Hours of Service per day. The total Hours of Service required to be credited for a “maternity or paternity leave of absence” shall not exceed the number of Hours of Service needed to
prevent the Employee from incurring a 1-Year Break in Service. 
 “Authorized leave of absence” means an unpaid,
temporary cessation from active employment with the Employer pursuant to an established nondiscriminatory policy, whether occasioned by illness, military service, or any other reason. 

A “maternity or paternity leave of absence” means an absence from work for any period by reason of the Employee’s
pregnancy, birth of the Employee’s child, placement of a child with the Employee in connection with the adoption of such child, or any absence for the purpose of caring for such child for a period immediately following such birth or placement.

 If the Elapsed Time method is elected in the Service Crediting Section of the Adoption Agreement, then a “1-Year Break
in Service” means a twelve (12) consecutive month period beginning on the severance from service date or any anniversary thereof and ending on the next succeeding anniversary of such date; provided, however, that the Employee or former
Employee does not perform an Hour of Service for the Employer during such twelve (12) consecutive month period. 
 1.55
“Owner-Employee” means a sole proprietor who owns the entire interest in the Employer or a partner (or member in the case of a limited liability company treated as a partnership or sole proprietorship for federal income tax purposes)
who owns more than ten percent (10%) of either the capital interest or the profits interest in the Employer and who receives income for personal services from the Employer. 
 1.56 “Participant” means any Employee or Former Employee who has satisfied the requirements of Sections 3.1 and 3.2 and entered the Plan and is eligible to accrue benefits under the Plan.
In addition, the term “Participant” also includes any individual who was a Participant (as defined in the preceding sentence) and who must continue to be taken into account under a particular provision of the Plan (e.g., because the
Participant has an Account balance in the Plan). 
 1.57 “Participant Directed Account” means that portion of a
Participant’s interest in the Plan with respect to which the Participant has directed the investment in accordance with the Participant Direction Procedures. 
 1.58 “Participant Direction Procedures” means such instructions, guidelines or policies, the terms of which are incorporated herein, as shall be established pursuant to Section 4.10
and observed by the Administrator and applied and provided to Participants who have Participant Directed Accounts. 
 1.59
“Participating Employer” means an Employer who adopts the Plan pursuant to Sections 11.1 or 14.1. 
 1.60 “Period of
Service” means every twelve (12) month period commencing with an Employee’s first day of employment or reemployment with the Employer or an Affiliated Employer and ending on the first day of a Period of Severance. The first day of
employment or reemployment is the first day the Employee performs an Hour of Service. An Employee will also receive partial credit for any Period of Severance of less than twelve (12) consecutive months. Fractional periods of a year will be
expressed in terms of days. 
 Periods of Service with any Affiliated Employer shall be recognized. Furthermore, Periods of
Service with any predecessor employer that maintained this Plan shall be recognized. Periods of Service with any other predecessor employer shall be recognized as elected in the Adoption Agreement. 

In determining Periods of Service for purposes of vesting under the Plan, Periods of Service will be excluded as elected in the Adoption
Agreement and as specified in Section 3.5. 
  
 © 2008
Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 10 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 In the event the method of crediting service is amended from the Hour of Service method
to the Elapsed Time method, an Employee will receive credit for a Period of Service consisting of: 
 (a) A number of years equal
to the number of Years of Service credited to the Employee before the computation period during which the amendment occurs; and 

(b) The greater of (1) the Periods of Service that would be credited to the Employee under the Elapsed Time method for service during
the entire computation period in which the transfer occurs or (2) the service taken into account under the Hour of Service method as of the date of the amendment. 
 In addition, the Employee will receive credit for service subsequent to the amendment commencing on the day after the last day of the computation period in which the transfer occurs. 

1.61 “Period of Severance” means a continuous period of time during which an Employee is not employed by the Employer. Such period
begins on the date the Employee retires, quits or is discharged, or if earlier, the twelve (12) month anniversary of the date on which the Employee was otherwise first absent from service. 

In the case of an individual who is absent from work for “maternity or paternity” reasons, the twelve (12) consecutive
month period beginning on the first anniversary of the first day of such absence shall not constitute a one year Period of Severance. For purposes of this paragraph, an absence from work for “maternity or paternity” reasons means an
absence (a) by reason of the pregnancy of the individual, (b) by reason of the birth of a child of the individual, (c) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such
individual, or (d) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement. 
 1.62
“Plan” means this instrument (hereinafter referred to as Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan and Trust) and the Adoption Agreement as adopted by the Employer, including all amendments thereto and
any appendix which is specifically permitted pursuant to the terms of the Plan. 
 1.63 “Plan Year” means the Plan’s
accounting year as specified in the Adoption Agreement. Unless there is a Short Plan Year, the Plan Year will be a twelve-consecutive month period. 
 1.64 “Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity” means an immediate annuity for the life of a Participant’s spouse, the payments under which must be equal to the benefit which can be provided
with the percentage, as specified in the Adoption Agreement, of the Participant’s Vested interest in the Plan as of the date of death. If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, the percentage shall be equal to fifty percent (50%).
Furthermore, if less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Participant’s Vested interest in the Plan is used to provide the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity, a proportionate share of each of the Participant’s Accounts subject to the
Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity shall be used to provide the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. 
 1.65 “Pre-Tax Elective
Deferrals” means a Participant’s Elective Deferrals that are not includible in the Participant’s gross income at the time deferred. 
 1.66 “Qualified Matching Contribution” means any Employer matching contributions that are made pursuant to Sections 12.1(a)(2) (if elected in the Adoption Agreement), 12.5 and 12.7.

 1.67 “Qualified Nonelective Contribution” means the Employer’s contributions to the Plan that are made pursuant to
Sections 12.1(a)(4), 12.5 and 12.7. 
 1.68 “Regulation” means the Income Tax Regulations as promulgated by the Secretary of
the Treasury or a delegate of the Secretary of the Treasury, and as amended from time to time. 
 1.69 “Retirement Date” means
the date as of which a Participant retires for reasons other than Total and Permanent Disability, regardless of whether such retirement occurs on a Participant’s Normal Retirement Date, Early Retirement Date or Late Retirement Date (see
Section 6.1). 
 1.70 “Roth Elective Deferrals” means, for calendar years beginning after December 31, 2005, a
Participant’s Elective Deferrals that are includible in the Participant’s gross income at the time deferred and have been irrevocably designated as Roth Elective Deferrals by the Participant in his or her deferral election. Roth Elective
Deferrals shall be subject to the requirements of Sections 12.2(c) and 12.2(d) and shall, except as otherwise provided herein, be required to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of Regulation Section 1.401(k)-1(b)(2), the provisions of
which are incorporated herein by reference. A Participant’s Roth Elective Deferrals will be maintained in a separate account containing only the Participant’s Roth Elective Deferrals and gains and losses attributable to those Roth Elective
Deferrals. 
 1.71 “Salary Reduction Agreement” means an agreement between a Participant and the Employer, whereby the
Participant elects to reduce Compensation by a specific dollar amount or percentage and the Employer agrees to contribute such amount into the 401(k) Plan. A Salary Reduction Agreement may require that an election be stated in specific percentage
increments (not greater than one percent (1%)
  
 © 2008 Vanguard
Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 11 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
increments) or in specific dollar amount increments (not greater than dollar increments that could exceed one percent (1%) of Compensation). 

A Salary Reduction Agreement may not be effective prior to the later of: (a) the date the Employee becomes a Participant;
(b) the date the Participant agrees (including by automatic consent) to the Salary Reduction Agreement; or (c) the date the 401(k) plan is adopted by the Employer or applicable Participating Employer. A Salary Reduction Agreement is valid
even though it is executed by an Employee before he or she actually becomes a Participant, so long as the Salary Reduction Agreement is not effective before the date the Employee becomes a Participant. A Salary Reduction Agreement may only apply to
Compensation that becomes currently available to the Employee after the effective date of the Salary Reduction Agreement. 
 A
Salary Reduction Agreement (or other written procedures) must designate a uniform period during which an Employee may change or terminate his or her deferral election under the Salary Reduction Agreement. A Participant’s right to change or
terminate a Salary Reduction Agreement may not be available on a less frequent basis than once per Plan Year. 
 1.72 “Self-Employed
Individual” means an individual who has Earned Income for the taxable year from the trade or business for which the Plan is established, and, also, an individual who would have had Earned Income but for the fact that the trade or business
had no net profits for the taxable year. A Self-Employed Individual shall be treated as an Employee. 
 1.73
“Shareholder-Employee” means a Participant who owns (or is deemed to own pursuant to Code Section 318(a)(1)) more than five percent (5%) of the Employer’s outstanding capital stock during any year in which the Employer
elected to be taxed as a Small Business Corporation (S Corporation) under the applicable Code Sections relating to Small Business Corporations. 

1.74 “Short Plan Year” means, if specified in the Adoption Agreement or as the result of an amendment, a Plan Year of less than a twelve
(12) month period. If there is a Short Plan Year, the following rules shall apply in the administration of this Plan. In determining whether an Employee has completed a Year of Service (or Period of Service if the Elapsed Time method is used)
for benefit accrual purposes in the Short Plan Year, the number of the Hours of Service (or months of service if the Elapsed Time method is used) required shall be proportionately reduced based on the number of days (or months) in the Short Plan
Year. The determination of whether an Employee has completed a Year of Service (or Period of Service) for vesting and eligibility purposes shall be made in accordance with Department of Labor regulation Section 2530.203-2(c). In addition, if
this Plan is integrated with Social Security, then the integration level shall be proportionately reduced based on the number of months in the Short Plan Year. 
 1.75 “Taxable Wage Base” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the contribution and benefit base under Section 230 of the Social Security Act at the beginning of such Plan Year.

 1.76 “Terminated Participant” means a person who has been a Participant, but whose employment has been terminated with the
Employer or applicable Participating Employer other than by death, Total and Permanent Disability or retirement. 
 1.77 “Top-Heavy
Plan” means a plan described in Section 9.2(a). 
 1.78 “Top-Heavy Plan Year” means a Plan Year during which the
Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan. 
 1.79 “Top-Paid Group” shall be determined pursuant to Code Section 414(q) and the Regulations
thereunder and generally means the top twenty percent (20%) of Employees who performed services for the Employer during the applicable year, ranked according to the amount of 415 Compensation received from the Employer during such year. All
Affiliated Employers shall be taken into account as a single employer, and Leased Employees shall be treated as Employees if required pursuant to Code Section 414(n) or (o). Employees who are nonresident aliens who received no earned income
(within the meaning of Code Section 911(d)(2)) from the Employer constituting United States source income within the meaning of Code Section 861(a)(3) shall not be treated as Employees. Furthermore, for the purpose of determining the
number of Employees in any year, the following additional Employees may also be excluded, however, such Employees shall still be considered for the purpose of identifying the particular Employees in the Top-Paid Group: 

(a) Employees with less than six (6) months of service; 
 (b) Employees who normally work less than 17 1/2 hours per week; 
 (c) Employees
who normally work less than six (6) months during a year; and 
 (d) Employees who have not yet attained age twenty-one
(21). 
 In addition, if ninety percent (90%) or more of the Employees of the Employer are covered under agreements the
Secretary of Labor finds to be collective bargaining agreements between Employee representatives and the Employer, and the Plan covers only Employees who are not covered under such agreements, then Employees covered by such agreements shall be
excluded from both the total number of active Employees as well as from the identification of particular Employees in the Top-Paid Group. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 12 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 The foregoing exclusions set forth in this Section shall be applied on a uniform and
consistent basis for all purposes for which the Code Section 414(q) definition is applicable. Furthermore, in applying such exclusions, the Employer may substitute any lesser service, hours or age. 

1.80 “Total and Permanent Disability” means the inability to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically
determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or which has lasted or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months. The disability of a Participant shall be determined
by a licensed physician. However, if the condition constitutes total disability under the federal Social Security Acts, the Administrator may rely upon such determination that the Participant is Totally and Permanently Disabled for the purposes of
this Plan. The determination shall be applied uniformly to all Participants. 
 1.81 “Trustee” means any person or entity that
is named in the Adoption Agreement or has otherwise agreed to serve as Trustee, or any successors thereto. In addition, unless the context means, or the Plan provides, otherwise, the term “Trustee” shall mean the Insurer if the Plan is
fully insured. 
 1.82 “Trust Fund” means, if the Plan is funded with a trust, the assets of the Plan and Trust as the same
shall exist from time to time. 
 1.83 “Valuation Date” means the date or dates specified in the Adoption Agreement. Regardless
of any election to the contrary, the Valuation Date shall include the Anniversary Date and may include any other date or dates deemed necessary or appropriate by the Administrator for the valuation of Participants’ Accounts during the Plan
Year, which may include any day that the Trustee (or Insurer), any transfer agent appointed by the Trustee (or Insurer) or the Employer, or any stock exchange used by such agent, are open for business. 

1.84 “Vested” means the nonforfeitable portion of any account maintained on behalf of a Participant. 

1.85 “Year of Service” means the computation period of twelve (12) consecutive months, herein set forth, and during which an
Employee has completed at least 1,000 Hours of Service (unless a lower number of Hours of Service is specified in the Adoption Agreement). 
 For purposes of eligibility for participation, the initial computation period shall begin with the date on which the Employee first performs an Hour of Service (employment commencement date). Unless
otherwise elected in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement, the succeeding computation periods shall begin on the anniversary of the Employee’s employment commencement date. However, unless otherwise elected in the
Adoption Agreement, if one (1) Year of Service or less is required as a condition of eligibility, then the computation period after the initial computation period shall shift to the current Plan Year which includes the anniversary of the date
on which the Employee first performed an Hour of Service, and subsequent computation periods shall be the Plan Year. If there is a shift to the Plan Year, an Employee who is credited with the number of Hours of Service to be credited with a Year of
Service in both the initial eligibility computation period and the first Plan Year which commences prior to the first anniversary of the Employee’s initial eligibility computation period will be credited with two (2) Years of Service for
purposes of eligibility to participate. 
 If two (2) Years of Service are required as a condition of eligibility, a
Participant will only have completed two (2) Years of Service for eligibility purposes upon completing two (2) consecutive Years of Service without an intervening 1-Year Break in Service. 

For vesting purposes, and all other purposes not specifically addressed in this Section, the computation period shall be the period
elected in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement. If no election is made in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement, then the computation period shall be the Plan Year. 

In determining Years of Service for purposes of vesting under the Plan, Years of Service will be excluded as elected in the Adoption
Agreement and as specified in Section 3.5. 
 Years of Service and 1-Year Breaks in Service for eligibility purposes will
be measured on the same eligibility computation period. Years of Service and 1-Year Breaks in Service for vesting purposes will be measured on the same vesting computation period. 

Years of Service with any Affiliated Employer shall be recognized. Furthermore, Years of Service with any predecessor employer that
maintained this Plan shall be recognized. Years of Service with any other predecessor employer shall be recognized as elected in the Adoption Agreement. 
 In the event the method of crediting service is amended from the Elapsed Time method to the Hour of Service method, an Employee will receive credit for Years of Service equal to: 

(a) The number of Years of Service equal to the number of 1-year Periods of Service credited to the Employee as of the date of the
amendment; and 
 (b) In the computation period which includes the date of the amendment, a number of Hours of Service (using the
Hours of Service equivalency method elected in the Adoption Agreement) to any fractional part of a year credited to the Employee under this Section as of the date of the amendment. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 13 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 ARTICLE II 
 ADMINISTRATION 
 2.1 POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER 

(a) Appointment of Trustee (or Insurer) and Administrator. In addition to the general powers and responsibilities otherwise
provided for in this Plan, the Employer shall be empowered to appoint and remove the Trustee (or Insurer) and the Administrator from time to time as it deems necessary for the proper administration of the Plan to ensure that the Plan is being
operated for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries in accordance with the terms of the Plan, the Code, and the Act. The Employer may appoint counsel, specialists, advisers, agents (including any nonfiduciary agent) and
other persons as the Employer deems necessary or desirable in connection with the exercise of its fiduciary duties under this Plan. The Employer may compensate such agents or advisers from the assets of the Plan as fiduciary expenses (but not
including any business (settlor) expenses of the Employer), to the extent not paid by the Employer. 
 (b) Funding policy and
method. The Employer shall establish a “funding policy and method,” i.e., it shall determine whether the Plan has a short run need for liquidity (e.g., to pay benefits) or whether liquidity is a long run goal and investment growth (and
stability of same) is a more current need, or shall appoint a qualified person to do so. If the Trustee (or Insurer) has discretionary authority, the Employer or its delegate shall communicate such needs and goals to the Trustee (or Insurer), who
shall coordinate such Plan needs with its investment policy. The communication of such a “funding policy and method” shall not, however, constitute a directive to the Trustee (or Insurer) as to the investment of the Trust Funds. Such
“funding policy and method” shall be consistent with the objectives of this Plan and with the requirements of Title I of the Act. 
 (c) Appointment of Investment Manager. The Employer may appoint, at its option, an Investment Manager, investment adviser, or other agent to provide investment direction to the Trustee (or Insurer)
with respect to any or all of the Plan assets. Such appointment shall be given by the Employer in writing in a form acceptable to the Trustee(or Insurer) and shall specifically identify the Plan assets with respect to which the Investment Manager or
other agent shall have the authority to direct the investment. 
 (d) Review of fiduciary performance. The Employer shall
periodically review the performance of any Fiduciary or other person to whom duties have been delegated or allocated by it under the provisions of this Plan or pursuant to procedures established hereunder. This requirement may be satisfied by formal
periodic review by the Employer or by a qualified person specifically designated by the Employer, through day-to-day conduct and evaluation, or through other appropriate ways. 
 2.2 DESIGNATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY 
 The Employer may appoint one
or more Administrators. If the Employer does not appoint an Administrator, the Employer will be the Administrator. Any person, including, but not limited to, the Employees of the Employer, shall be eligible to serve as an Administrator. Any person
so appointed shall signify acceptance by filing written acceptance with the Employer. An Administrator may resign by delivering a written resignation to the Employer or be removed by the Employer by delivery of written notice of removal, to take
effect at a date specified therein, or upon delivery to the Administrator if no date is specified. Upon the resignation or removal of an Administrator, the Employer may designate in writing a successor to this position. 

2.3 ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES 
 If more than one person is appointed as Administrator, then the responsibilities of each Administrator may be specified by the Employer and accepted in writing by each Administrator. If no such delegation
is made by the Employer, then the Administrators may allocate the responsibilities among themselves, in which event the Administrators shall notify the Employer and the Trustee (or Insurer) in writing of such action and specify the responsibilities
of each Administrator. The Trustee (or Insurer) thereafter shall accept and rely upon any documents executed by the appropriate Administrator until such time as the Employer or the Administrators file with the Trustee (or Insurer) a written
revocation of such designation. 
 2.4 POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR 

The primary responsibility of the Administrator is to administer the Plan for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their
Beneficiaries, subject to the specific terms of the Plan. The Administrator shall administer the Plan in accordance with its terms and shall have the power and discretion to construe the terms of the Plan and determine all questions arising in
connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of the Plan. Benefits under this Plan will be paid only if the Administrator decides in its discretion that the applicant is entitled to them. Any such determination by the
Administrator shall be conclusive and binding upon all persons. The Administrator may establish procedures, correct any defect, supply any information, or reconcile any inconsistency in such manner and to such extent as shall be deemed necessary or
advisable to carry out the purpose of the Plan; provided, however, that any procedure, discretionary act, interpretation or construction shall be done in a nondiscriminatory manner based upon uniform principles consistently applied and shall be
consistent with the intent that the Plan continue to be deemed a qualified plan under the terms of Code Section 401(a), and shall comply with the terms of the Act and all regulations issued pursuant thereto. The Administrator shall have all
powers necessary or appropriate to accomplish its duties under this Plan. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 14 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 The Administrator shall be charged with the duties of the general administration of the
Plan and the powers necessary to carry out such duties as set forth under the terms of the Plan, including, but not limited to, the following: 
 (a) the discretion to determine all questions relating to the eligibility of an Employee to participate or remain a Participant hereunder and to receive benefits under the Plan; 

(b) the authority to review and settle all claims against the Plan, including claims where the settlement amount cannot be calculated or
is not calculated in accordance with the Plan’s benefit formula. This authority specifically permits the Administrator to settle disputed claims for benefits and any other disputed claims made against the Plan; 

(c) to compute, certify, and direct the Trustee (or Insurer) with respect to the amount and the kind of benefits to which any Participant
shall be entitled hereunder; 
 (d) to authorize and direct the Trustee (or Insurer) with respect to all discretionary or
otherwise directed disbursements from the Trust Fund; 
 (e) to maintain all necessary records for the administration of the
Plan; 
 (f) to interpret the provisions of the Plan and to make and publish such rules for regulation of the Plan that are
consistent with the terms hereof; 
 (g) to determine the size and type of any Contract to be purchased from any Insurer, and to
designate the Insurer from which such Contract shall be purchased; 
 (h) to compute and certify to the Employer and to the
Trustee (or Insurer) from time to time the sums of money necessary or desirable to be contributed to the Plan; 
 (i) to consult
with the Employer and the Trustee (or Insurer) regarding the short and long-term liquidity needs of the Plan in order that the Trustee (or Insurer) can exercise any investment discretion (if the Trustee (or Insurer) has such discretion), in a manner
designed to accomplish specific objectives; 
 (j) to prepare and implement a procedure for notifying Participants and
Beneficiaries of their rights to elect Joint and Survivor Annuities and Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuities if required by the Plan, Code and Regulations thereunder; 
 (k) to assist Participants regarding their rights, benefits, or elections available under the Plan; 
 (l) to act as the named Fiduciary responsible for communicating with Participants as needed to maintain Plan compliance with Act Section 404(c) (if the Employer intends to comply with Act
Section 404(c)) including, but not limited to, the receipt and transmission of Participants’ directions as to the investment of their accounts under the Plan and the formation of policies, rules, and procedures pursuant to which
Participants may give investment instructions with respect to the investment of their accounts; and 
 (m) to determine the
validity of, and take appropriate action with respect to, any qualified domestic relations order received by it. 
 2.5 RECORDS AND REPORTS

 The Administrator shall keep a record of all actions taken and shall keep all other books of account, records, and other
data that may be necessary for proper administration of the Plan and shall be responsible for supplying all information and reports to the Internal Revenue Service, Department of Labor, Participants, Beneficiaries and others as required by law.

 2.6 APPOINTMENT OF ADVISERS 
 The Administrator may appoint counsel, specialists, advisers, agents (including nonfiduciary agents) and other persons as the Administrator deems necessary or desirable in connection with the
administration of this Plan, including but not limited to agents and advisers to assist with the administration and management of the Plan, and thereby to provide, among such other duties as the Administrator may appoint, assistance with maintaining
Plan records and the providing of investment information to the Plan’s investment fiduciaries and, if applicable, to Plan Participants. 

2.7 INFORMATION FROM EMPLOYER 
 The Employer shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator on all pertinent facts as the Administrator may require in order to perform its functions hereunder and the Administrator shall
advise the Trustee (or Insurer) of such of the foregoing facts as may be pertinent to the Trustee’s (or Insurer’s) duties under the Plan. The Administrator may rely upon such information as is supplied by the Employer and shall have no
duty or responsibility to verify such information. 
  
 © 2008
Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 15 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 2.8 PAYMENT OF EXPENSES 
 All reasonable expenses of administration may be paid out of the Plan assets unless paid by the Employer. Such expenses shall include any expenses incident to the functioning of the Administrator, or any
person or persons retained or appointed by any named Fiduciary incident to the exercise of their duties under the Plan, including, but not limited to, fees of accountants, counsel, Investment Managers, agents (including nonfiduciary agents)
appointed for the purpose of assisting the Administrator or Trustee (or Insurer) in carrying out the instructions of Participants as to the directed investment of their accounts (if permitted) and other specialists and their agents, the costs of any
bonds required pursuant to Act Section 412, and other costs of administering the Plan. In addition, unless specifically prohibited under statute, regulation or other guidance of general applicability, the Administrator may charge to the Account
of an individual Participant a reasonable charge to offset the cost of making a distribution to the Participant, Beneficiary, or Alternate Payee. If liquid assets of the Plan are insufficient to cover the fees of the Trustee (or Insurer) or the Plan
Administrator, then Plan assets shall be liquidated to the extent necessary for such fees. In the event any part of the Plan assets becomes subject to tax, all taxes incurred will be paid from the Plan assets. Until paid, the expenses shall
constitute a liability of the Trust Fund. 
 2.9 MAJORITY ACTIONS 

Except where there has been an allocation and delegation of administrative authority pursuant to Section 2.3, if there is more than
one Administrator, then they shall act by a majority of their number, but may authorize one or more of them to sign all papers on their behalf. 

2.10 CLAIMS PROCEDURE 

Claims for benefits under the Plan may be filed in writing with the Administrator. Written notice of the disposition of a claim shall be
furnished to the claimant within ninety (90) days (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits) after the application is filed, or such period as is required by applicable law or Department of Labor regulation. In the event the claim is
denied, the reasons for the denial shall be specifically set forth in the notice in language calculated to be understood by the claimant, pertinent provisions of the Plan shall be cited, and, where appropriate, an explanation as to how the claimant
can perfect the claim will be provided. In addition, the claimant shall be furnished with an explanation of the Plan’s claims review procedure. 
 2.11 CLAIMS REVIEW PROCEDURE 
 Any Employee, former Employee, or Beneficiary
of either, who has been denied a benefit by a decision of the Administrator pursuant to Section 2.10 shall be entitled to request the Administrator to give further consideration to the claim by filing with the Administrator a written request
for a hearing. Such request, together with a written statement of the reasons why the claimant believes such claim should be allowed, shall be filed with the Administrator no later than sixty (60) days after receipt of the written notification
provided for in Section 2.10. The Administrator shall then conduct a hearing within the next sixty (60) days, at which the claimant may be represented by an attorney or any other representative of such claimant’s choosing and expense
and at which the claimant shall have an opportunity to submit written and oral evidence and arguments in support of the claim. At the hearing, the claimant or the claimant’s representative shall have an opportunity to review all documents in
the possession of the Administrator which are pertinent to the claim at issue and its disallowance. A final decision as to the allowance of the claim shall be made by the Administrator within sixty (60) days (45 days if the claim involves
disability benefits) of receipt of the appeal (unless there has been an extension of sixty (60) days (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits) due to special circumstances, provided the delay and the special circumstances occasioning
it are communicated to the claimant within the sixty (60) day period (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits)). Such communication shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant and shall include specific
reasons for the decision and specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based. Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent any of the time periods specified in this Section are amended by law or Department of
Labor regulation, then the time frames specified herein shall automatically be changed in accordance with such law or regulation. 
 If the Administrator, pursuant to the claims review procedure, makes a final written determination denying a Participant’s or Beneficiary’s benefit claim, then in order to preserve the claim,
the Participant or Beneficiary must file an action with respect to the denied claim not later than one hundred eighty (180) days following the date of the Administrator’s final determination. 

ARTICLE III 

ELIGIBILITY 
 3.1
CONDITIONS OF ELIGIBILITY 
 Any Eligible Employee shall be eligible to participate hereunder on the date such Employee has
satisfied the conditions of eligibility elected in the Adoption Agreement. 
 3.2 EFFECTIVE DATE OF PARTICIPATION 

(a) General rule. An Eligible Employee who has satisfied the conditions of eligibility pursuant to Section 3.1 shall become a
Participant effective as of the date elected in the Adoption Agreement. If said Employee is not employed on such date, but is reemployed before a 1-Year Break in Service has occurred, then such Employee shall become a Participant on the date of
reemployment or, if later, the date that the Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan had the Employee not terminated 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 16 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
employment. If such Employee incurs a 1-Year Break in Service, then eligibility will be determined under the Break in Service rules set forth in Section 3.5. 

(b) Recognition of predecessor service. Unless specifically provided otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, an Eligible Employee who
satisfies the Plan’s eligibility requirement conditions by reason of recognition of service with a predecessor employer will become a Participant as of the day the Plan credits service with a predecessor employer or, if later, the date the
Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan had the service with the predecessor employer been service with the Employer. 

(c) Noneligible to eligible class. If an Employee, who has satisfied the Plan’s eligibility requirements and would otherwise
have become a Participant, shall go from a classification of a noneligible Employee to an Eligible Employee, such Employee shall become a Participant on the date such Employee becomes an Eligible Employee or, if later, the date that the Employee
would have otherwise entered the Plan had the Employee always been an Eligible Employee. 
 (d) Eligible to noneligible
class. If an Employee, who has satisfied the Plan’s eligibility requirements and would otherwise become a Participant, shall go from a classification of an Eligible Employee to a noneligible class of Employees, such Employee shall become a
Participant in the Plan on the date such Employee again becomes an Eligible Employee, or, if later, the date that the Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan had the Employee always been an Eligible Employee. However, if such Employee incurs
a 1-Year Break in Service, eligibility will be determined under the Break in Service rules set forth in Section 3.5. 
 3.3
DETERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY 
 The Administrator shall determine the eligibility of each Employee for participation in the
Plan based upon information furnished by the Employer. Such determination shall be conclusive and binding upon all persons, as long as the same is made pursuant to the Plan and the Act. Such determination shall be subject to review pursuant to
Section 2.11. 
 3.4 TERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY 
 In the event a Participant shall go from a classification of an Eligible Employee to an ineligible Employee, such Participant shall continue to vest in the Plan for each Year of Service (or Period of
Service, if the Elapsed Time method is used) completed while an ineligible Employee, until such time as the Participant’s Account is forfeited or distributed pursuant to the terms of the Plan. Additionally, the Participant’s interest in
the Plan shall continue to share in the earnings of the Trust Fund in the same manner as Participants. 
 3.5 REHIRED EMPLOYEES AND BREAKS IN
SERVICE 
 (a) Rehired Participant/immediate re-entry. If any Former Employee who had been a Participant is reemployed
by the Employer, then the Employee shall become a Participant as of the reemployment date, unless the Employee is not an Eligible Employee or the Employee’s prior service is disregarded pursuant to Section 3.5(d) below. If such prior
service is disregarded, then the rehired Eligible Employee shall be treated as a new hire. 
 (b) Rehired Eligible Employee
who satisfied eligibility. If any Eligible Employee had satisfied the Plan’s eligibility requirements but, due to a severance of employment, did not become a Participant, then such Eligible Employee shall become a Participant as of the
later of (1) the entry date on which he or she would have entered the Plan had there been no severance of employment, or (2) the date of his or her re-employment. Notwithstanding the preceding, if the rehired Eligible Employee’s prior
service is disregarded pursuant to Section 3.5(d) below, then the rehired Eligible Employee shall be treated as a new hire. 

(c) Rehired Eligible Employee who had not satisfied eligibility. If any Eligible Employee who had not satisfied the Plan’s
eligibility requirements is rehired after severance from employment, then such Eligible Employee shall become a Participant in the Plan in accordance with the eligibility requirements set forth in the Adoption Agreement and the Plan. However, in
applying any shift in an eligibility computation period, the Eligible Employee is not treated as a new hire unless prior service is disregarded in accordance with Section 3.5(d) below. 

(d) Reemployed after 1-Year Break in Service (“rule of parity” provisions). If any Employee is reemployed after a 1-Year
Break in Service has occurred, Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the Elapsed Time method is being used) shall include Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the Elapsed Time method is being used) prior to the 1-Year Break in Service
subject to the rules set forth below. The Employer may elect in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections) to make the provisions of this paragraph inapplicable for purposes of eligibility and/or vesting. 

(1) In the case of a Participant who under the Plan does not have a nonforfeitable right to any interest in the Plan resulting from
Employer contributions, Years of Service (or Periods of Service) before a period of 1-Year Breaks in Service will not be taken into account if the number of consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service equals or exceeds the greater of (A) five
(5) or (B) the aggregate number of pre-break Years of Service (or Periods of Service). Such aggregate number of Years of Service (or Periods of Service) will not include any Years of Service (or Periods of Service) disregarded under the
preceding sentence by reason of prior 1-Year Breaks in Service; 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 17 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (2) A Participant who has not had Years of Service (or Periods of Service) before a
1-Year Break in Service disregarded pursuant to (1) above, shall participate in the Plan as of the date of reemployment, or if later, as of the date the Former Employee would otherwise enter the Plan pursuant to Sections 3.1 and 3.2 taking into
account all service not disregarded. 
 (e) Vesting after 5 1-Year Breaks in Service. After a Participant who has severed
employment with the Employer incurs five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, the Vested portion of such Participant’s Account attributable to pre-break service shall not be increased as a result of post-break service. In such case,
separate accounts will be maintained as follows: 
 (1) one account for nonforfeitable benefits attributable to pre-break
service; and 
 (2) one account representing the Participant’s Employer-derived account balance in the Plan attributable to
post-break service. 
 (f) Buyback provisions. If any Former Employee who had been a Participant is reemployed by the
Employer before five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, and such Participant had received a distribution of the entire Vested interest prior to reemployment, then the forfeited account shall be reinstated only if the Participant repays
the full amount which had been distributed (including amounts from Accounts that were fully Vested such as the Elective Deferral Account). Such repayment must be made before the earlier of five (5) years after the first date on which the
Participant is subsequently reemployed by the Employer or the close of the first period of five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service commencing after the distribution. If a distribution occurs for any reason other than a severance of
employment, the time for repayment may not end earlier than five (5) years after the date of distribution. In the event the Participant does repay the full amount distributed, the undistributed forfeited portion of the Participant’s
Account must be restored in full, unadjusted by any gains or losses occurring subsequent to the Valuation Date preceding the distribution. The source for such reinstatement may be Forfeitures occurring during the Plan Year. If such source is
insufficient, then the Employer will contribute an amount which is sufficient to restore the Participant’s Account, provided, however, that if a discretionary contribution is made for such year, such contribution will first be applied to
restore any such accounts and the remainder shall be allocated in accordance with the terms of the Plan. If a non-Vested Participant was deemed to have received a distribution and such Participant is reemployed by the Employer before five
(5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, then such Participant will be deemed to have repaid the deemed distribution as of the date of reemployment. 
 3.6 ELECTION NOT TO PARTICIPATE 
 An Employee may, subject to the approval
of the Employer, elect voluntarily not to participate in any component of the Plan when the Employee first becomes eligible. Such election must be made upon inception of the Plan or at any time prior to the time the Employee first becomes eligible
to participate under any plan maintained by the Employer. The election not to participate must be irrevocable and communicated to the Employer, in writing, within a reasonable period of time before the date the Employee would have otherwise entered
the Plan. 
 An Employee who elects not to participate under the Plan is treated as a nonbenefiting Employee for purposes of the
minimum coverage requirements under Code Section 410(b). Furthermore, an Employee who makes a one-time irrevocable election, as described in the preceding paragraph, to make no Elective Deferrals to the Plan is not an eligible Participant for
purposes of the Actual Deferral Percentage test set forth in Section 12.4 or the Actual Contribution Percentage test set forth in Section 12.6. 
 ARTICLE IV 
 CONTRIBUTION AND ALLOCATION 

4.1 FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION 
 (a) For a Money Purchase Plan:  
 (1) The Employer will make contributions
on the following basis. On behalf of each Participant eligible to share in allocations, for each year of such Participant’s participation in this Plan, the Employer will contribute the amount elected in the Adoption Agreement. All contributions
by the Employer will be made in cash. In the event a funding waiver is obtained, this Plan shall be deemed to be an individually designed plan. 
 (2) Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to an Employer which is not a tax-exempt entity, the Employer’s contribution for any Fiscal Year shall not exceed the maximum amount allowable as a
deduction to the Employer under the provisions of Code Section 404. However, to the extent necessary to provide the top-heavy minimum allocations, the Employer shall make a contribution even if it exceeds the amount that is deductible under
Code Section 404. 
 (b) For a Profit Sharing Plan:  

(1) For each Plan Year, the Employer may (or will in the case of a Prevailing Wage Contribution as set forth in the Formula for
Determining Employer Profit Sharing Contribution Section of the Adoption Agreement) contribute to the Plan such amount as elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement. In addition, the Employer may make a discretionary “gateway
contribution” pursuant to Section 4.3(b)(4). 
  
 ©
2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 18 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (2) Additionally, the Employer will contribute to the Plan the amount necessary, if any,
to provide the top-heavy minimum allocations even if it exceeds current or accumulated Net Profit or the amount that is deductible under Code Section 404. 
 (3) Subject to the consent of the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer may make its contribution to the Plan in the form of property, provided such contribution does not constitute a prohibited transaction
under the Code or the Act. The decision to make a contribution of property is subject to the general fiduciary rules under the Act. 
 (c) Frozen Plans. The Employer may designate that the Plan is a frozen Plan at the Contribution Types Section of the Adoption Agreement. As a frozen Plan, the Employer will not make any Employer
contributions with respect to Compensation earned after the date identified in the Adoption Agreement, and if the Plan is a 401(k) Plan, no Participant will be permitted to make Elective Deferrals to the Plan for any period following the effective
date identified in the Adoption Agreement. In addition, once a Plan is frozen, no Eligible Employees shall become Participants. 
 4.2 TIME
OF PAYMENT OF EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION 
 Unless otherwise provided by contract or law, the Employer may make its
contribution to the Plan for a particular Plan Year at such time as the Employer, in its sole discretion, determines. However, if pursuant to Section 12.8, the “ADP test safe harbor contribution” being made to the Plan is a matching
contribution that is made on a basis other than the Plan Year quarter, then the matching contributions with respect to any Elective Deferrals made during a Plan Year quarter must be contributed to the Plan by the last day of the immediately
following Plan Year quarter. If the Employer makes a contribution for a particular Plan Year after the close of that Plan Year, the Employer will designate to the Administrator the Plan Year for which the Employer is making its contribution.

 4.3 ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTION, FORFEITURES AND EARNINGS 
 (a) Separate accounting. The Administrator shall establish and maintain an account in the name of each Participant to which the Administrator shall credit as of each Anniversary Date, or other
Valuation Date, all amounts allocated to each such Participant as set forth herein. 
 (b) Allocation of contributions.
The Employer shall provide the Administrator with all information required by the Administrator to make a proper allocation of the Employer’s contribution, if any, for each Plan Year. Within a reasonable period of time after the date of receipt
by the Administrator of such information, the Administrator shall allocate any contributions as follows: 
 (1) Money Purchase
allocation. For a Money Purchase Plan (other than a Money Purchase Plan which is integrated by allocation): 
 (i) The
Employer’s contribution shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in the manner set forth in Section 4.1 herein and as specified in the Adoption Agreement. 

(ii) Notwithstanding the preceding provisions, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of the 

Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant is an Eligible Employee at any time during the year and the conditions set
forth in the Adoption Agreement are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the
Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service (or three (3) Months of Service if the Elapsed Time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is
employed on the last day of the Plan Year. Furthermore, regardless of any election in the Adoption Agreement to the contrary, for the Plan Year in which this Plan terminates, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocation of the
Employer’s contributions for the Plan Year if the Participant is employed at the end of the Plan Year and has completed a Year of Service (or Period of Service if the Elapsed Time method is elected). 

(2) Permitted disparity allocation. For an integrated Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan allocation or a Money
Purchase Plan which is integrated by allocation: 
 (i) Except as provided in Section 4.3(f) for top-heavy purposes and
subject to the “overall permitted disparity limits,” the Employer’s contribution shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in a dollar amount equal to 5.7% of the sum of each Participant’s Compensation plus Excess
Compensation. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, each Participant will be allocated a share of the contribution in the same proportion that each such Participant’s Compensation plus Excess Compensation for the
Plan Year bears to the total Compensation plus the total Excess Compensation of all Participants for that year. However, in the case of any Participant who has exceeded the “cumulative permitted disparity limit,” the allocation set forth
in this paragraph shall be based on such Participant’s Compensation rather than Compensation plus Excess Compensation. 
 Regardless of the preceding, 4.3% shall be substituted for 5.7% above if Excess Compensation is based on more than 20% and less than or equal to 80% of the Taxable Wage Base. If Excess Compensation is
based on less than 100% and more than 80% of the Taxable Wage Base, then 5.4% shall be substituted for 5.7% above. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 19 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (ii) The balance of the Employer’s contribution over the amount allocated above,
if any, shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in the same proportion that each such Participant’s Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for such year. 

(iii) Notwithstanding the preceding provisions, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of the 

Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant is an Eligible Employee at any time during the year and the conditions set
forth in the Adoption Agreement are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the
Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service (or three (3) Months of Service if the Elapsed Time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is
employed on the last day of the Plan Year. 
 (iv) The following “overall permitted disparity limits” (which consist
of the “annual overall permitted disparity limit” and the “cumulative permitted disparity limit”) apply to the allocations set forth above. 
 (A) “Annual overall permitted disparity limit.” Notwithstanding the preceding paragraphs, if in any Plan Year this Plan “benefits” any Participant who “benefits” under
another qualified plan or simplified employee pension, as defined in Code Section 408(k), maintained by the Employer that either provides for or imputes permitted disparity (integrates), then such plans will be considered to be one plan and
will be considered to comply with the permitted disparity rules if the extent of the permitted disparity of all such plans does not exceed 100%. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the extent of the permitted disparity of a plan is the ratio,
expressed as a percentage, which the actual benefits, benefit rate, offset rate, or employer contribution rate, whatever is applicable under the Plan, bears to the limitation under Code Section 401(l) applicable to such Plan. 

(B) “Cumulative permitted disparity limit.” With respect to a Participant who “benefits” or “has benefited”
under a defined benefit or target benefit plan of the Employer, the “cumulative permitted disparity limit” for the Participant is thirty-five (35) total cumulative permitted disparity years. Total cumulative permitted disparity years
means the number of years credited to the Participant for allocation or accrual purposes under the Plan, any other qualified plan or simplified employee pension plan (whether or not terminated) ever maintained by the Employer, while such plan either
provides for or imputes permitted disparity. For purposes of determining the Participant’s “cumulative permitted disparity limit,” all years ending in the same calendar year are treated as the same year. If the Participant has not
“benefited” under a defined benefit or target benefit plan which neither provides for nor imputes permitted disparity for any year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, then such Participant has no cumulative disparity limit.

 For purposes of this Section, “benefiting” means benefiting under the Plan for any Plan Year during
which a Participant received or is deemed to receive an allocation in accordance with Regulation Section 1.410(b)-3(a). 

(3) Other profit sharing allocations. For a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan with a non-integrated allocation
formula, a uniform points allocation formula, a Prevailing Wage Contribution allocation formula, an “age-weighted method” allocation formula, or a “grouping method” allocation formula as elected in the Formula for Determining
Employer Profit Sharing Contribution Section of the Adoption Agreement: 
 (i) The Employer’s contribution shall be
allocated to each Participant’s Account in accordance with the allocation method below that corresponds to the elections in the Adoption Agreement. The Employer shall provide the Administrator with all information required by the Administrator
to make a proper allocation of the Employer’s contribution for each Plan Year. Within a reasonable period of time after the date of receipt by the Administrator of such information, the allocation shall be made in accordance with the provisions
below. The “gateway contribution” for plans with a cross-tested allocation formula shall be made in accordance with the provisions of subsection (4) below. 
 (ii) If the Employer’s contribution is fixed, the Employer shall allocate the contribution in a set percentage to each Participant. If the Employer elects to contribute a uniform dollar amount for
each Participant, the pro rata allocation shall allocate that uniform dollar amount to each Participant. 
 (iii) If the
Employer’s contribution is discretionary and non-integrated, the contribution shall be allocated either in the same ratio as each Participant’s Compensation bears to the total of such Compensation of all Participants, in the same dollar
amount to all Participants (per capita), or in the same dollar amount per Hour of Service completed by each Participant. 
 (iv)
If the Employer’s Contribution is allocated under a uniform points allocation formula, the allocation for each Participant shall be determined based on the Participant’s total points for the Plan Year, as determined under the Adoption
Agreement. A Participant’s allocation of the Employer Contribution is determined by multiplying the Employer Contribution by a fraction, the numerator of which is the Participant’s total points for the Plan Year and the denominator of
which is the sum of the points for all Participants for the Plan Year. A Participant shall receive points for each year(s) of age and/or each Year(s) of Service. In addition, a Participant also may receive points based on his or her Compensation,

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 20 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (v) If the Employer’s contribution is a Prevailing Wage Contribution, it shall be
allocated to each Participant who performs services subject to the Service Contract Act, Davis-Bacon Act or similar Federal, State, or Municipal Prevailing Wage statutes. The Prevailing Wage Contribution shall be an amount equal to the balance of
the fringe benefit payment for health and welfare for each Participant (after deducting the cost of cash differential payments for the Participant) based on the hourly contribution rate for the Participant’s employment classification, as
designated on Schedule A as attached to the Adoption Agreement. Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the Prevailing Wage Contribution shall be fully Vested. Furthermore, the Prevailing Wage Contribution shall not be subject to any
age, service or employment condition requirements set forth in the Adoption Agreement and the Employer shall make such contribution to the Plan as frequently as is required under applicable law. 

(vi) If the Employer’s contribution is allocated according to a “grouping method,” the Employer may contribute to the Plan
on behalf of each of the classifications of Participants set forth in the Adoption Agreement such amount as shall be determined by the Employer. The Employer shall provide the Administrator, if other than the Employer, with written notification of
the amount of the contribution to be allocated to each classification on or before the due date of the Employer’s tax return for the year of allocation, through written instructions from the Employer to the Plan Administrator. The Employer may
elect to specify any number of classifications and a classification may consist of any number of Participants. The Employer may elect at Question 31.g.1. of the 401(k) Profit Sharing Adoption Agreement or 27.g.1.a. of the Profit Sharing Adoption
Agreement to put each Participant in his or her own classification. The Administrator shall allocate the contribution made on behalf of each group of Participants to the Participants within such group either in the same proportion that each such
Participant’s Compensation bears to the total Compensation of all Participants within such group or on an equal basis (per capita), as selected in the Adoption Agreement. 
 (vii) If the Employer’s contribution is allocated according to an “age-weighting method,” the Employer’s contribution for the Plan Year shall be allocated to each Participant’s
Account in the same proportion that each such Participant’s total points with respect to such year, bear to the total points awarded to all Participants with respect to such year. The conditional allocation provided for in the preceding
sentence shall become the final allocation for the year only if it is not a Top-Heavy Plan Year; or if the minimum allocation required for Top-Heavy Plan Years is provided to all Employees eligible to receive such minimum allocation. If any such
Employee does not receive the top-heavy minimum allocation, then in lieu of the conditional allocation, the Employer’s contribution shall instead be allocated first to the affected Employees in an amount equal to their conditional allocation
plus any additional amount necessary to provide the top-heavy minimum allocation. 
 The remainder of the
Employer’s contribution shall then be allocated as provided under the conditional allocation method, but for this purpose, those Employees who did not receive the top-heavy minimum allocation under the initial conditional allocation shall not
be considered. If under the secondary allocation provided in the preceding sentence, an Employee who received a top-heavy minimum contribution under the conditional allocation no longer receives the same, then the steps outlined in the preceding
paragraph and sentence shall be repeated until such time as all affected Employees have been allocated the top-heavy minimum contribution and the remaining contribution has been allocated, at which time, the allocations for the year shall be final.

 A Participant’s points with respect to any Plan Year shall be computed as follows: 

(A) Multiply the Participant’s Compensation for the Plan Year by 1%. 

(B) Multiply the product for each Participant as determined in (a) above by the product of: 

1. the factor in Table I in Exhibit A to the Adoption Agreement, such factor to be determined by reference to the Participant’s
Normal Retirement Age, and 
 2. the factor in Table II of Exhibit A to the Adoption Agreement, such factor to be determined by
reference to the number of years remaining from the Participant’s attained age as of the allocation date to his or her Normal Retirement Age. 
 The Schedule of Age-Weighted Allocation Factors is set forth in Exhibit A to the Adoption Agreement, (which is hereby incorporated by reference and made a part of the Plan) and shall be based on the
interest rate selected in the Adoption Agreement (if no selection is made, 8.5% interest shall be deemed to have been elected). 

3. The resulting number shall be the number of points allocated to the Participant. 

(viii) Notwithstanding the preceding provisions, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of the Employer’s
contribution for the year if the Participant is an Eligible Employee at any time during the year and the conditions set forth in the Adoption Agreement are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no
election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service (or three
(3)
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 21 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Months of Service if the Elapsed Time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year. 

(4) Gateway contribution. The Employer may make an additional discretionary Employer contribution (“gateway
contribution”) as set forth below (i.e., the minimum allocation gateway requirement described in Regulation Section 1.401(a)(4)-8(b)(1)(vi)). In applying the provisions of this subsection (4), the term “Employer contributions”
shall also include any Forfeitures that are allocated to a Participant, other than Forfeitures that are subject to Code Section 401(m) because they are allocated as a matching contribution. Furthermore, in applying the provisions of this
subsection (4) to a 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan, the term “Employer contributions” means any Employer Nonelective Contributions, safe harbor Nonelective and, except as otherwise provided in subsections (4)(ii) and (iv) below,
Qualified Nonelective Contributions, and such term excludes any matching contributions. 
 (i) Any “gateway
contribution” made pursuant to this subsection for a Plan Year will be allocated to each Nonhighly Compensated Participant who receives an allocation of other “Employer contributions,” for such Plan Year. The “gateway
contribution” will be allocated without regard to any allocation conditions otherwise applicable to “Employer contributions” under the Plan. However, Participants who the Administrator disaggregates pursuant to Regulation
Section 1.410(b)-7(c)(3) because they have not satisfied the greatest minimum age and service conditions permissible under Code Section 410(a) shall not be eligible to receive an allocation of any “gateway contribution” made
pursuant to this subsection unless such an allocation is necessary to satisfy Code Section 401(a)(4). 
 (ii) The
“gateway contribution” will be allocated pro rata on the basis of Compensation (as defined in (iii) or (iv) below, whichever is applicable) of each eligible Participant (as described in subsection (i) above) but in no event
will an allocation of the “gateway contribution” exceed the lesser of: (A) five percent (5%) of Compensation or (B) one-third (1/3) of the highest allocation rate for any Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan
Year. Any allocation under the prior sentence will be reduced by the amount of any other “Employer contributions,” excluding any Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are used to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage test set forth in
Section 12.4 or the Actual Contribution Percentage test set forth in Section 12.6, allocated for the same Plan Year to such Participant, provided that if an eligible Participant is receiving only a Qualified Nonelective Contribution and
such contribution amount equals or exceeds the “gateway contribution,” then the contribution satisfies the “gateway contribution” requirement as to that Participant. 

(iii) For allocation purposes under the 5% “gateway contribution” under (A) of subsection (ii) above, Compensation
means 415 Compensation except that it shall be determined for the Plan Year (rather than the Limitation Year) and shall exclude 415 Compensation paid while an Employee is not a Participant in the Plan. 

(iv) For purposes of the 1/3 “gateway contribution” alternative under (B) of subsection (ii) above, the Administrator
will (a) determine the allocation rate, and (b) allocate the “gateway contribution,” using a Participant’s Compensation, provided the definition of Compensation satisfies Regulation Section 1.414(s). In addition, the
allocation rate for any Participant is determined by dividing the total “Employer contribution” made on behalf of such Participant by the Participant’s Compensation (as defined in the preceding sentence). However, solely for purposes
of determining the allocation rate of any Nonhighly Compensated Participant, Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are used to satisfy the Actual Deferral Percentage test set forth in Section 12.4 or the Actual Contribution Percentage test
set forth in Section 12.6, shall not be taken into account. 
 (v) Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Employer may increase
the “gateway contribution” to satisfy the provisions of Regulation Section 1.401(a)(4)-9(b)(2)(v)(D) if the plan (for nondiscrimination testing purposes) consists of one or more defined contribution plans and one or more defined
benefit plans. 
 (c) Gains or losses. Except as otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement or as provided in
Section 4.10 with respect to Participant Directed Accounts, as of each Valuation Date, before allocation of any Employer contributions and Forfeitures, any earnings or losses (net appreciation or net depreciation) of the Trust Fund (exclusive
of assets segregated for distribution) shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Participant’s nonsegregated accounts bear to the total of all Participants’ nonsegregated accounts as of such date. 

(d) Contracts. Participants’ Accounts shall be debited for any insurance or annuity premiums paid, if any, and credited with
any dividends or interest received on Contracts. 
 (e) Forfeitures. On or before each Anniversary Date, any amounts which
became Forfeitures since the last Anniversary Date may be made available to reinstate previously forfeited account balances of Participants, if any, in accordance with Section 3.5(f), used to satisfy any contribution that may be required
pursuant to Section 6.10, or, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, used to pay any Plan expenses. The remaining Forfeitures, if any, shall be treated in accordance with the elections made in the Forfeiture Section of the Adoption Agreement. In
the event Forfeitures are used to reduce an Employer discretionary contribution and the Forfeitures exceed such contribution, then the remaining Forfeitures will be allocated as an additional discretionary contribution. If no election is made in the
Adoption Agreement, then any remaining Forfeitures will be used to reduce any Employer contributions under the Plan. However, if the Plan provides for an integrated allocation and no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then any remaining
Forfeitures will be added to the Employer’s contributions under the Plan. Furthermore, if the Plan provides for a “grouping method” allocation and 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 22 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Forfeitures are added to, or used to reduce, the Employer’s contribution that is to be allocated among the groups, then any remaining Forfeitures will be apportioned to each group in
proportion to the contribution made for each group, as made or determined by the Employer. Regardless of the preceding sentences, in the event the allocation of Forfeitures provided herein shall cause the “annual additions” (as defined in
Section 4.4) to any Participant’s Account to exceed the amount allowable by the Code, an adjustment shall be made in accordance with Section 4.5. Except, however, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of
Forfeitures for the year if the conditions set forth in the Adoption Agreement are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be
eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service (or three (3) Months of Service if the Elapsed Time method is chosen in the
Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year. 
 (f) Minimum allocations required
for Top-Heavy Plan Years. Notwithstanding the foregoing, for any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the sum of the Employer’s contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account of each Non-Key Employee or each Participant,
if elected in the Adoption Agreement, shall be equal to at least three percent (3%) of such Employee’s 415 Compensation for the Plan Year or the calendar year ending within the Plan Year (reduced by contributions and Forfeitures, if any,
allocated to each such Employee in any defined contribution plan included with this Plan in a “required aggregation group” (as defined in Section 9.2(f)). However, if (i) the sum of the Employer’s contributions and
Forfeitures allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account of each Key Employee for such Top-Heavy Plan Year is less than three percent (3%) of each Key Employee’s 415 Compensation and (ii) this Plan is not required to be
included in a “required aggregation group” (as defined in Section 9.2(f)) to enable a defined benefit plan to meet the requirements of Code Section 401(a)(4) or 410, the sum of the Employer’s contributions and Forfeitures
allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account of each Employee entitled to the top-heavy minimum contribution shall be equal to the largest percentage allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account of any Key Employee. The minimum
allocation required (to the extent required to be nonforfeitable under Code Section 416(b)) may not be forfeited under Code Section 411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D). 

However, for each Employee who is a Participant in a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan and a Money
Purchase Plan, the minimum three percent (3%) allocation specified above shall be provided in the Money Purchase Plan. 
 If this is an integrated Plan, then for any Top-Heavy Plan Year the Employer’s contribution shall be allocated as follows and shall still be required to satisfy the other provisions of this
subsection: 
 (1) An amount equal to three percent (3%) multiplied by each Participant’s Compensation for the Plan
Year shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, the amount shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in the same proportion that such Participant’s
total Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for such year. 
 (2) The balance of the
Employer’s contribution over the amount allocated under subparagraph (1) hereof shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in a dollar amount equal to three percent (3%) multiplied by a Participant’s Excess
Compensation. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, each Participant will be allocated a share of the contribution in the same proportion that such Participant’s Excess Compensation bears to the total Excess
Compensation of all Participants for that year. For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of any Participant who has exceeded the “cumulative permitted disparity limit” described in Section 4.3(b)(2), such Participant’s total
Compensation will be taken into account. 
 (3) The balance of the Employer’s contribution over the amount allocated under
subparagraph (2) hereof shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in a dollar amount equal to 2.7% multiplied by the sum of each Participant’s total Compensation plus Excess Compensation. If the Employer does not contribute
such amount for all Participants, each Participant will be allocated a share of the contribution in the same proportion that such Participant’s total Compensation plus Excess Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation plus
Excess Compensation of all Participants for that year. For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of any Participant who has exceeded the “cumulative permitted disparity limit” described in Section 4.3(b)(2), such Participant’s
total Compensation rather than Compensation plus Excess Compensation will be taken into account. 
 Regardless of
the preceding, 1.3% shall be substituted for 2.7% above if Excess Compensation is based on more than 20% and less than or equal to 80% of the Taxable Wage Base. If Excess Compensation is based on less than 100% and more than 80% of the Taxable Wage
Base, then 2.4% shall be substituted for 2.7% above. 
 (4) The balance of the Employer’s contributions over the amount
allocated above, if any, shall be allocated to each Participant’s Account in the same proportion that such Participant’s total Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for such year. 

For each Employee who is a Participant in this Plan and another defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer or an
Affiliated Employer, the minimum three percent (3%) allocation specified above shall be provided as specified in the Adoption Agreement. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 23 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (g) Top-Heavy contribution allocation. For purposes of the minimum allocations
set forth above, the percentage allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account of any Key Employee shall be equal to the ratio of the sum of the Employer’s contributions and Forfeitures allocated on behalf of such Key Employee divided by
the 415 Compensation for such Key Employee. 
 (h) Participants eligible for top-heavy allocation. Notwithstanding
anything in this Plan to the contrary, for any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the minimum allocations set forth in this Section shall only be allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account of all Non-Key Employees, and Key Employees if elected in the
Adoption Agreement, who are Participants and who are employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year, including Employees who have (1) failed to complete a Year of Service; (2) declined to make mandatory contributions (if
required) or, in the case of a cash or deferred arrangement, Elective Deferrals to the Plan; or (3) Compensation less than a stated amount. In addition, pursuant to Code Section 416(g)(4), Participants whose employment is governed by a
collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and employee representatives under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining shall not be eligible to receive the top-heavy minimum allocations. 

(i) Top-Heavy allocation if DB and DC plans maintained. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in any Plan Year in which
the Employer maintains both this Plan and a non-frozen defined benefit pension plan included in a “required aggregation group” (as defined in Section 9.2(f)) which is top-heavy, the Employer will not be required (unless otherwise
elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections)) to provide Employees with both the full separate minimum defined benefit plan benefit and the full separate defined contribution plan top-heavy minimum allocations. In such
case, the top-heavy minimum benefits will be provided as elected in the Adoption Agreement and, if applicable, as follows: 
 (1)
If the 5% defined contribution minimum is elected in the Adoption Agreement: 
 (i) The requirements of Section 9.1 will
apply except that each Employee who accrues a benefit in the Profit Sharing Plan or Money Purchase Plan and who is also a participant in the Defined Benefit Plan will receive a minimum allocation of five percent (5%) of such Participant’s
415 Compensation from the applicable defined contribution plan(s). 
 (ii) For each Employee who is a participant only in the
Defined Benefit Plan the Employer will provide a minimum non-integrated benefit equal to two percent (2%) of such participant’s highest five (5) consecutive year average 415 Compensation for each Year of Service while a participant in
the plan, in which the Plan is top-heavy, not to exceed ten (10). 
 (iii) For each Employee who is a Participant only in this
defined contribution plan, the Employer will provide a minimum allocation equal to three percent (3%) of such Participant’s 415 Compensation. 
 (2) If the 2% defined benefit minimum is elected in the Adoption Agreement, then for each Employee who is a participant only in the defined benefit plan, the Employer will provide a minimum non-integrated
benefit equal to two percent (2%) of such participant’s highest five (5) consecutive year average of 415 Compensation for each Year of Service while a participant in the plan, in which the plan is top-heavy, not to exceed ten (10).

 (j) Matching contributions used to satisfy top-heavy contribution. Unless otherwise specified in Appendix A to the
Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), effective with respect to Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, Employer matching contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements
of Code Section 416(c)(2) and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the Plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan.
Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the ACP test and other requirements of Code Section 401(m). 

(k) Contributions under other plans. The Employer may provide, in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections),
that with respect to any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2001, the minimum benefit requirement shall be met in another plan (including another plan that consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of
Code Section 401(k)(12) and matching contributions with respect to which the requirements of Code Section 401(m)(11) apply). The Employer must specify the name of the other plan, the minimum benefit that will be provided under such other
plan, and the employees who will receive the minimum benefit under such other plan. 
 (l) Delay in processing
transactions. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, all information necessary to properly reflect a given transaction may not be available until after the date specified herein for processing such transaction, in which case
the transaction will be reflected when such information is received and processed. Subject to express limits that may be imposed under the Code, the processing of any contribution, distribution or other transaction may be delayed for any legitimate
business reason (including, but not limited to, failure of systems or computer programs, failure of the means of the transmission of data, force majeure, the failure of a service provider to timely receive values or prices, and correction for errors
or omissions or the errors or omissions of any service provider). The processing date of a transaction will be binding for all purposes of the Plan. 
 (m) 410(b) ratio percentage fail-safe provisions. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the provisions of this subsection apply for any Plan Year if the Employer elected to
apply the 410(b) ratio percentage fail-safe provisions and the Plan fails to satisfy the “ratio percentage test” due to a last day of the Plan Year allocation condition or an Hours of Service (or months of 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 24 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
service) allocation condition. A plan satisfies the “ratio percentage test” if, on the last day of the Plan Year, the “benefiting ratio” of the Nonhighly Compensated Employees
who are “includible” is at least 70% of the “benefiting ratio” of the Highly Compensated Employees who are “includible.” The “benefiting ratio” of the Nonhighly Compensated Employees is the number of
“includible” Nonhighly Compensated Employees “benefiting” under the Plan divided by the number of “includible” Employees who are Nonhighly Compensated Employees. The “benefiting ratio” of the Highly
Compensated Employees is the number of Highly Compensated Employees “benefiting” under the Plan divided by the number of “includible” Highly Compensated Employees. “Includible” Employees are all Employees other than:
(1) those Employees excluded from participating in the Plan for the entire Plan Year by reason of the collective bargaining unit exclusion or the nonresident alien exclusion described in the Code or by reason of the age and service requirements
of Article III; and (2) any Employee who incurs a separation from service during the Plan Year and fails to complete at least 501 Hours of Service (or three (3) months of service if the Elapsed Time method is being used) during such Plan
Year. 
 For purposes of this subsection, an Employee is “benefiting” under the Plan on a particular
date if, under the Plan, the Employee is entitled to an Employer contribution or an allocation of Forfeitures for the Plan Year. 
 If this subsection applies and the Hours of Service method is used, then the Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions and expand the group of the “includible” Nonhighly Compensated
Employees who are Participants by including the minimum number of Participants eligible to share in the contribution, beginning first with the “includible” Employees employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year who have
completed the greatest number of Hours of Service in the Plan Year, then the “includible” Employees who have completed the greatest number of Hours of Service during the Plan Year, and continuing to suspend the allocation conditions for
each “includible” Employee who completed Hours of Service, from the greatest number of Hours of Service to the least, until the Plan satisfies the “ratio percentage test” for the Plan Year. If two or more “includible”
Employees have the same number of Hours of Service, then the Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions for all such “includible” Employees, irrespective of whether the Plan can satisfy the “ratio percentage test” by
accruing benefits for fewer than all such “includible” Employees. If the Plan for any Plan Year suspends the allocation conditions for an “includible” Employee, then that Employee will share in the allocation for that Plan Year
of the Employer contribution and Forfeitures, if any, without regard to whether the Employee has satisfied the other allocation conditions set forth in this Section. 

If this subsection applies and the Elapsed Time method is used, then the Administrator will suspend the allocation
conditions for the “includible” Nonhighly Compensated Employees who are Participants, beginning first with the “includible” Employees employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year, then the “includible”
Employees who have the latest separation from service during the Plan Year, and continuing to suspend the allocation conditions for each “includible” Employee who incurred an earlier separation from service, from the latest to the earliest
separation from service date, until the Plan satisfies the “ratio percentage test” for the Plan Year. If two or more “includible” Employees have a separation from service on the same day, then the Administrator will suspend the
allocation conditions for all such “includible” Employees, irrespective of whether the Plan can satisfy the “ratio percentage test” by accruing benefits for fewer than all such “includible” Employees. If the Plan for
any Plan Year suspends the allocation conditions for an “includible” Employee, then that Employee will share in the allocation for that Plan Year of the Employer contribution and Forfeitures, if any, without regard to whether the Employee
has satisfied the other allocation conditions set forth in this Section. 
 Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the
portion of the Plan which is not a Code Section 401(k) or 401(m) plan would fail to satisfy Code Section 410(b) if the coverage tests were applied by treating those Participants whose only allocation would otherwise be provided under the
top-heavy formula as if they were not currently benefiting under the Plan, then, for purposes of applying this subsection (m), such Participants shall be treated as not benefiting. 
 4.4 MAXIMUM ANNUAL ADDITIONS 
 (a) Calculation of “annual
additions.” 
 (1) If a Participant does not participate in, and has never participated in another qualified plan
maintained by the “employer,” or a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code Section 419(e)) maintained by the “employer,” or an individual medical benefit account (as defined in Code Section 415(l)(2)) maintained by the
“employer,” or a simplified employee pension (as defined in Code Section 408(k)) maintained by the “employer” which provides “annual additions,” the amount of “annual additions” which may be credited to
the Participant’s Accounts for any Limitation Year shall not exceed the lesser of the “maximum permissible amount” or any other limitation contained in this Plan. If the “employer” contribution that would otherwise be
contributed or allocated to the Participant’s Accounts would cause the “annual additions” for the Limitation Year to exceed the “maximum permissible amount,” the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the
“annual additions” for the Limitation Year will equal the “maximum permissible amount,” and any amount in excess of the “maximum permissible amount” which would have been allocated to such Participant may be allocated
to other Participants. 
 (2) Prior to determining the Participant’s actual 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, the
“employer” may determine the “maximum permissible amount” for a Participant on the basis of a reasonable estimation of the Participant’s 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, uniformly determined for all Participants
similarly situated. 
 (3) As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation Year the “maximum
permissible amount” for such Limitation Year shall be determined on the basis of the Participant’s actual 415 Compensation for such Limitation Year. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 25 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) “Annual additions” if a Participant is in more than one plan.

 (1) This subsection applies if, in addition to this Plan, a Participant is covered under another qualified defined
contribution plan maintained by the “employer” that is a “master or prototype plan,” a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code Section 419(e)) maintained by the “employer,” an individual medical benefit account
(as defined in Code Section 415(l)(2)) maintained by the “employer,” or a simplified employee pension (as defined in Code Section 408(k)) maintained by the “employer,” which provides “annual additions,” during
any Limitation Year. The “annual additions” which may be credited to a Participant’s accounts under this Plan for any such Limitation Year shall not exceed the “maximum permissible amount” reduced by the “annual
additions” credited to a Participant’s accounts under the other plans and welfare benefit funds, individual medical benefit accounts, and simplified employee pensions for the same Limitation Year. If the “annual additions” with
respect to the Participant under other defined contribution plans and welfare benefit funds maintained by the “employer” are less than the “maximum permissible amount” and the “employer” contribution that would
otherwise be contributed or allocated to the Participant’s accounts under this Plan would cause the “annual additions” for the Limitation Year to exceed this limitation, the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the
“annual additions” under all such plans and welfare benefit funds for the Limitation Year will equal the “maximum permissible amount,” and any amount in excess of the “maximum permissible amount” which would have been
allocated to such Participant may be allocated to other Participants. If the “annual additions” with respect to the Participant under such other defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual medical benefit accounts and
simplified employee pensions in the aggregate are equal to or greater than the “maximum permissible amount,” no amount will be contributed or allocated to the Participant’s account under this Plan for the Limitation Year. 

(2) Prior to determining the Participant’s actual 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, the “employer” may determine
the “maximum permissible amount” for a Participant on the basis of a reasonable estimation of the Participant’s 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, uniformly determined for all Participants similarly situated. 

(3) As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation Year, the “maximum permissible amount” for the
Limitation Year will be determined on the basis of the Participant’s actual 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year. 
 (4)
If, pursuant to Section 4.4(b)(2) or Section 4.5, a Participant’s “annual additions” under this Plan and such other plans would result in an “excess amount” for a Limitation Year, the “excess amount” will
be deemed to consist of the “annual additions” last allocated, except that “annual additions” attributable to a simplified employee pension will be deemed to have been allocated first, followed by “annual additions” to
a welfare benefit fund or individual medical benefit account, and then by “annual additions” to a plan subject to Code Section 412, regardless of the actual allocation date. 

(5) If an “excess amount” was allocated to a Participant on an allocation date of this Plan which coincides with an allocation
date of another plan, the “excess amount” attributed to this Plan will be the product of: 
 (i) the total
“excess amount” allocated as of such date, times 
 (ii) the ratio of (1) the “annual additions”
allocated to the Participant for the Limitation Year as of such date under this Plan to (2) the total “annual additions” allocated to the Participant for the Limitation Year as of such date under this and all the other qualified
defined contribution plans. 
 (6) Any “excess amount” attributed to this Plan will be disposed of in the manner
described in Section 4.5. 
 (c) Certain amounts are not “annual additions.” For purposes of applying the
limitations of Code Section 415, the transfer of funds from one qualified plan to another is not an “annual addition.” In addition, the following are not Employee contributions for the purposes of Section 4.4(d)(1)(b):
(1) rollover contributions (as defined in Code Sections 402(c), 403(a)(4), 403(b)(8), 408(d)(3) and 457(e)(16)); (2) repayments of loans made to a Participant from the Plan; (3) repayments of distributions received by an Employee
pursuant to Code Section 411(a)(7)(B) (cash-outs); (4) repayments of distributions received by an Employee pursuant to Code Section 411(a)(3)(D) (mandatory contributions); (5) Catch-Up Contributions; and (6) Employee
contributions to a simplified employee pension excludable from gross income under Code Section 408(k)(6). 
 (d)
Definitions. For purposes of this Section, the following terms shall be defined as follows: 
 (1) “Annual
additions” means the sum credited to a Participant’s accounts for any Limitation Year of (a) “employer” contributions, (b) Employee contributions (except as provided below), (c) Forfeitures, (d) amounts
allocated to an individual medical benefit account, as defined in Code Section 415(l)(2), which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the “employer,” (e) amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued which are
attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee (as defined in Code Section 419A(d)(3)) under a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code Section 419(e)) maintained by the
“employer” and (f) allocations under a simplified employee pension. Except, however, the Compensation percentage limitation referred to in paragraph (e)(7)(ii) shall not apply to: (1) any contribution for medical benefits (within
the meaning of Code Section 419A(f)(2)) after separation from service which is otherwise treated as an “annual addition,” or (2) any amount otherwise treated as an “annual addition” under Code Section 415(l)(1).

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 26 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 For this purpose, any “excess amount” applied under
Section 4.5 in the Limitation Year to reduce “employer” contributions shall be considered “annual additions” for such Limitation Year. 
 (2) “Defined contribution dollar limitation” means, effective with respect to Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 2001, $40,000 as adjusted under Code Section 415(d).

 (3) “Employer” means, for purposes of this Section and Section 4.5, the Employer that adopts this Plan and all
Affiliated Employers, except that for purposes of this Section, the determination of whether an entity is an Affiliated Employer shall be made by applying Code Section 415(h). 

(4) “Excess amount” means the excess of the Participant’s “annual additions” for the Limitation Year over the
“maximum permissible amount.” 
 (5) “Highest average compensation” means the average Compensation for the
three (3) consecutive Years of Service with the “employer” while a Participant in the Plan that produces the highest average. A Year of Service with the “employer” is the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending on
the last day of the Limitation Year. 
 (6) “Maximum permissible amount” means, except to the extent permitted under
this Plan and Code Section 414(v), effective with respect to Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 2001, the maximum “annual addition” that may be contributed or allocated to a Participant’s accounts under the Plan
for any Limitation Year, which shall not exceed the lesser of: 
 (i) the “defined contribution dollar limitation,” or

 (ii) one hundred percent (100%) of the Participant’s 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year. 

The 415 Compensation Limitation referred to in (ii) shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits after
separation from service (within the meaning of Code Sections 401(h) or 419A(f)(2)) which is otherwise treated as an “annual addition.” 
 If a short Limitation Year is created because of an amendment changing the Limitation Year to a different twelve (12) consecutive month period, the “maximum permissible amount” will not
exceed the “defined contribution dollar limitation” multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the short Limitation Year and the denominator of which is twelve (12). 

4.5 ADJUSTMENT FOR EXCESSIVE ANNUAL ADDITIONS 
 Allocation of “annual additions” (as defined in Section 4.4) to a Participant’s Combined Account for a Limitation Year generally will cease once the limits of Section 4.4 have
been reached for such Limitation Year. However, if as a result of the allocation of Forfeitures, a reasonable error in estimating a Participant’s annual 415 Compensation, a reasonable error in determining the amount of elective deferrals
(within the meaning of Code Section 402(g)(3)) that may be made with respect to any Participant under the limits of Section 4.4, or other facts and circumstances to which Regulation Section 1.415-6(b)(6) shall be applicable, the
“annual additions” under this Plan would cause the maximum provided in Section 4.4 to be exceeded, the “excess amount” will be disposed of in one of the following manners, as uniformly determined by the Plan Administrator
for all Participants similarly situated: 
 (a) Any after-tax voluntary Employee contributions (plus attributable gains), to the
extent they would reduce the “excess amount,” will be distributed to the Participant; 
 (b) If, after the application
of subparagraph (a), an “excess amount” still exists, any unmatched Elective Deferrals, and any gains attributable to such Elective Deferrals, to the extent they would reduce the “excess amount,” will be distributed to the
Participant; 
 (c) To the extent necessary, matched Elective Deferrals and “employer” matching contributions will be
proportionately reduced from the Participant’s Account. The Elective Deferrals, and any gains attributable to such Elective Deferrals, will be distributed to the Participant and the “employer” matching contributions, and any gains
attributable to such matching contributions, will be used to reduce the “employer’s” contributions in the next Limitation Year; 
 (d) If, after the application of subparagraphs (a), (b) and (c), an “excess amount” still exists, and the Participant is covered by the Plan at the end of the Limitation Year, the
“excess amount” in the Participant’s Account will be used to reduce “employer” contributions (including any allocation of Forfeitures) for such Participant in the next Limitation Year, and each succeeding Limitation Year if
necessary; 
 (e) If, after the application of subparagraphs (a), (b) and (c), an “excess amount” still exists,
and the Participant is not covered by the Plan at the end of a Limitation Year, the “excess amount” will be held unallocated in a suspense account. The suspense account will be applied to reduce future “employer” contributions
(including allocation of any Forfeitures) for all remaining Participants in the next Limitation Year, and each succeeding Limitation Year if necessary; and 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 27 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (f) If a suspense account is in existence at any time during a Limitation Year pursuant
to this Section, no investment gains and losses shall be allocated to such suspense account. If a suspense account is in existence at any time during a particular Limitation Year, all amounts in the suspense account must be allocated and reallocated
to Participants’ Accounts before any “employer” contributions or any Employee contributions may be made to the Plan for that Limitation Year. Except as provided in (a), (b) and (c) above, “excess amounts” may not
be distributed to Participants. 
 4.6 ROLLOVERS 
 (a) Acceptance of “rollovers” into the Plan. If elected in the Adoption Agreement and with the consent of the Administrator (such consent must be exercised in a nondiscriminatory manner
and applied uniformly to all Participants), the Plan may accept a “rollover,” provided the “rollover” will not jeopardize the tax-exempt status of the Plan or create adverse tax consequences for the Employer. The amounts rolled
over shall be separately accounted for in a “Participant’s Rollover Account.” Furthermore, any Roth Elective Deferrals that are accepted as “rollovers” in this Plan on or after January 1, 2006 shall be separately
accounted for. A Participant’s Rollover Account shall be fully Vested at all times and shall not be subject to forfeiture for any reason. For purposes of this Section, the term Participant shall include any Eligible Employee who is not yet a
Participant, if, pursuant to the Adoption Agreement, “rollovers” are permitted to be accepted from Eligible Employees. In addition, for purposes of this Section the term Participant shall also include former Employees if the Employer and
Administrator consent to accept “rollovers” of distributions made to former Employees from any plan of the Employer. 

(b) Treatment of “rollovers” under the Plan. Amounts in a Participant’s Rollover Account shall be held by the
Trustee (or Insurer) pursuant to the provisions of this Plan and may not be withdrawn by, or distributed to the Participant, in whole or in part, except as elected in the Adoption Agreement and subsection (c) below. The Trustee (or Insurer)
shall have no duty or responsibility to inquire as to the propriety of the amount, value or type of assets transferred, nor to conduct any due diligence with respect to such assets; provided, however, that such assets are otherwise eligible to be
held by the Trustee (or Insurer) under the terms of this Plan. 
 (c) Distribution of “rollovers.” At Normal
Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or Eligible Employee or such Participant’s or Eligible Employee’s Beneficiary shall be entitled to receive benefits, the Participant’s Rollover Account shall be used to provide
additional benefits to the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary. Any distribution of amounts held in a Participant’s Rollover Account shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Sections 6.5
and 6.6, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. Furthermore, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, such amounts shall be considered to be part of a
Participant’s benefit in determining whether an involuntary cash-out of benefits may be made without Participant consent. 

(d) “Rollovers” maintained in a separate account. The Administrator may direct that “rollovers” made after a
Valuation Date be segregated into a separate account for each Participant until such time as the allocations pursuant to this Plan have been made, at which time they may remain segregated, invested as part of the general Trust Fund or, if elected in
the Adoption Agreement, directed by the Participant. 
 (e) Limits on accepting “rollovers.” Prior to accepting
any “rollovers” to which this Section applies, the Administrator may require the Employee to establish (by providing opinion of counsel or otherwise) that the amounts to be rolled over to this Plan meet the requirements of this Section.
The Employer may instruct the Administrator, operationally and on a nondiscriminatory basis, to limit the source of rollover contributions that may be accepted by the Plan. 
 (f) Definitions. For purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply: 
 (1) A “rollover” means: (i) amounts transferred to this Plan directly from another “eligible retirement plan;” (ii) distributions received by an Employee from other
“eligible retirement plans” which are eligible for tax-free rollover to an “eligible retirement plan” and which are transferred by the Employee to this Plan within sixty (60) days following receipt thereof; and
(iii) any other amounts which are eligible to be rolled over to this Plan pursuant to the Code or any other federally enacted legislation. 
 (2) An “eligible retirement plan” means an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a), an individual retirement annuity described in Code Section 408(b) (other than
an endowment contract), a qualified trust (an employees’ trust described in Code Section 401(a) which is exempt from tax under Code Section 501(a)), an annuity plan described in Code Section 403(a), an eligible deferred
compensation plan described in Code Section 457(b) which is maintained by an eligible employer described in Code Section 457(e)(1)(A), and an annuity contract described in Code Section 403(b). 

4.7 PLAN-TO-PLAN TRANSFERS FROM QUALIFIED PLANS 
 (a) Transfers into this Plan. With the consent of the Administrator, amounts may be transferred (within the meaning of Code Section 414(l)) to this Plan from other tax qualified plans under
Code Section 401(a), provided the plan from which such funds are transferred permits the transfer to be made and the transfer will not jeopardize the tax-exempt status of the Plan or Trust or create adverse tax consequences for the Employer.
Prior to accepting any transfers to which this Section applies, the Administrator may require an opinion of counsel that the amounts to be transferred meet the requirements of this Section. The amounts transferred shall be set up in a separate
account herein referred to as a “Participant’s Transfer Account.” Furthermore, for Vesting purposes, the Participant’s Transfer Account shall be treated as a separate “Participant’s Account.” 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 28 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) Accounting of transfers. Amounts in a Participant’s Transfer Account
shall be held by the Trustee (or Insurer) pursuant to the provisions of this Plan and may not be withdrawn by, or distributed to the Participant, in whole or in part, except as elected in the Adoption Agreement and subsection (d) below,
provided the restrictions of subsection (c) below and Section 6.16 are satisfied. The Trustee (or Insurer) shall have no duty or responsibility to inquire as to the propriety of the amount, value or type of assets transferred, nor to
conduct any due diligence with respect to such assets; provided, however, that such assets are otherwise eligible to be held by the Trustee (or Insurer) under the terms of this Plan. 

(c) Restrictions on Elective Deferrals. Except as permitted by Regulations (including Regulation Section 1.411(d)-4), amounts
attributable to elective contributions (as defined in Regulation Section 1.401(k)-6), including amounts treated as elective contributions, which are transferred from another qualified plan in a plan-to-plan transfer (other than a direct
rollover) shall be subject to the distribution limitations provided for in the Code Section 401(k) Regulations. 
 (d)
Distribution of plan-to-plan transfer amounts. At Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary shall be entitled to receive benefits, the Participant’s Transfer Account shall be
used to provide additional benefits to the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary. Any distribution of amounts held in a Participant’s Transfer Account shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions
of Sections 6.5 and 6.6, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. Furthermore, such amounts shall be considered to be part of a Participant’s benefit
in determining whether an involuntary cash-out of benefits may be made without Participant consent. 
 (e) Segregation.
The Administrator may direct that Employee transfers made after a Valuation Date be segregated into a separate account for each Participant until such time as the allocations pursuant to this Plan have been made, at which time they may remain
segregated, invested as part of the general Trust Fund or, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, directed by the Participant. 

(f) Protected benefits. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, a transfer directly to this Plan from another qualified
plan (or a transaction having the effect of such a transfer) shall only be permitted if it will not result in the elimination or reduction of any “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefit” as described in Section 8.1(e). 

4.8 AFTER-TAX VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS 
 (a) Not permitted in Money Purchase or Profit Sharing Plan. Except as provided in subsection 4.8(b) below, this Plan will not accept after-tax voluntary Employee contributions. If this is an
amendment to a Plan that had previously allowed after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, then this Plan will not accept after-tax voluntary Employee contributions for Plan Years beginning after the Plan Year in which this Plan is adopted by the
Employer. 
 (b) After-tax voluntary Employee contributions allowed in 401(k) Plans. For 401(k) Plans, if elected in the
Adoption Agreement, each Participant who is eligible to make Elective Deferrals may, in accordance with nondiscriminatory procedures established by the Administrator, elect to make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions to this Plan. Such
contributions must generally be paid to the Trustee (or Insurer) within a reasonable period of time after being received by the Employer. An after-tax voluntary Employee contribution is any contribution (other than Roth Elective Deferrals) made to
the Plan by or on behalf of a Participant that is included in the Participant’s gross income in the year in which made and that is separately accounted for under the Plan. 
 (c) Full Vesting. The balance in each Participant’s Voluntary Contribution Account shall be fully Vested at all times and shall not be subject to Forfeiture for any reason. 

(d) Distribution at any time. A Participant may elect at any time to withdraw after-tax voluntary Employee contributions from such
Participant’s Voluntary Contribution Account and the actual earnings thereon in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code
Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. If the Administrator maintains sub-accounts with respect to after-tax voluntary Employee contributions (and earnings thereon) which were made on or before a specified date, a Participant
shall be permitted to designate which sub-account shall be the source for the withdrawal. Forfeitures of Employer contributions shall not occur solely as a result of an Employee’s withdrawal of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions.

 In the event a Participant has received a hardship distribution under the safe harbor hardship provisions of
the Code Section 401(k) Regulations from any plan maintained by the Employer, then the Participant shall be barred from making any after-tax voluntary Employee contributions for a period of twelve (12) months after receipt of the hardship
distribution. However, with respect to Plan Years beginning on or after December 31, 2002, the suspension period shall be six (6) months rather than twelve (12) months. 

(e) Used to provide benefits. At Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or the Participant’s
Beneficiary is entitled to receive benefits, the Participant’s Voluntary Contribution Account shall be used to provide additional benefits to the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 29 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (f) Prior mandatory contributions. To the extent a Participant has previously
made mandatory Employee contributions under prior provisions of this Plan, such contributions will be treated as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, except that the provisions of subsection (d) above permitting a distribution at any
time shall not apply to mandatory Employee contributions. 
 4.9 QUALIFIED VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS 

(a) Maintenance of existing QVEC accounts. If this is an amendment to a Plan that previously permitted deductible voluntary
Employee contributions, then each Participant who made “qualified voluntary Employee contributions” within the meaning of Code Section 219(e)(2) as it existed prior to the enactment of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, shall have such
contributions held in a separate Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account which shall be fully Vested at all times. Such contributions, however, shall not be permitted for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1986. 

(b) Distribution from QVEC account. A Participant may, upon written request delivered to the Administrator, make withdrawals from
such Participant’s Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account. Any distribution shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent
requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. 
 (c) Used to provide benefits. At
Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary is entitled to receive benefits, the Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account shall be used to provide additional benefits to the
Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary. 
 4.10 PARTICIPANT DIRECTED INVESTMENTS 

(a) Directed Investment Options allowed. If elected in the Adoption Agreement, all Participants may direct the Trustee (or Insurer)
as to the investment of all or a portion of their individual account balances as set forth in the Adoption Agreement and within limits set by the Employer. Participants may direct the Trustee (or Insurer), in writing (or in such other form which is
acceptable to the Trustee (or Insurer)), to invest their accounts in specific assets, specific funds or other investments permitted under the Plan and the Participant Direction Procedures. That portion of the account of any Participant that is
subject to investment direction of such Participant will be considered a Participant Directed Account. 
 (b) Establishment of
Participant Direction Procedures. The Administrator will establish Participant Direction Procedures, to be applied in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner, setting forth the permissible investment options under this Section, how often changes
between investments may be made, and any other limitations and provisions that the Administrator may impose on a Participant’s right to direct investments. 
 (c) Administrative discretion. The Administrator may, in its discretion, include or exclude by amendment or other action from the Participant Direction Procedures such instructions, guidelines or
policies as it deems necessary or appropriate to ensure proper administration of the Plan, and may interpret the same accordingly. 
 (d) Allocation of gains or losses. As of each Valuation Date, all Participant Directed Accounts shall be charged or credited with the net earnings, gains, losses and expenses as well as any
appreciation or depreciation in the market value using publicly listed fair market values when available or appropriate as follows: 
 (1) to the extent the assets in a Participant Directed Account are accounted for as pooled assets or investments, the allocation of earnings, gains and losses of each Participant’s Account shall be
based upon the total amount of funds so invested in a manner proportionate to the Participant’s share of such pooled investment; and 
 (2) to the extent the assets in a Participant Directed Account are accounted for as segregated assets, the allocation of earnings, gains on and losses from such assets shall be made on a separate and
distinct basis. 
 (e) Plan will follow investment directions. Investment directions will be processed as soon as
administratively practicable after proper investment directions are received from the Participant. No guarantee is made by the Plan, Employer, Administrator or Trustee (or Insurer) that investment directions will be processed on a daily basis, and
no guarantee is made in any respect regarding the processing time of an investment direction. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Employer, Administrator or Trustee (or Insurer) reserves the right to not value an investment option
on any given Valuation Date for any reason deemed appropriate by the Employer, Administrator or Trustee (or Insurer). Furthermore, the processing of any investment transaction may be delayed for any legitimate business reason (including, but not
limited to, failure of systems or computer programs, failure of the means of the transmission of data, the failure of a service provider to timely receive values or prices, and correction for errors or omissions or the errors or omissions of any
service provider) or force majeure. The processing date of a transaction will be binding for all purposes of the Plan and considered the applicable Valuation Date for an investment transaction. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 30 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (f) Section 404(c) provisions. If the Employer intends to operate any
portion of this Plan as an Act Section 404(c) plan, the Participant Direction Procedures should provide an explanation of the circumstances under which Participants and their Beneficiaries may give investment instructions, including but not
limited to, the following to the extent required under DOL regulations or guidance: 
 (1) the conveyance of instructions by the
Participants and their Beneficiaries to invest Participant Directed Accounts in a Directed Investment Option; 
 (2) the name,
address and phone number of the Fiduciary (and, if applicable, the person or persons designated by the Fiduciary to act on its behalf) responsible for providing information to the Participant or a Beneficiary upon request relating to the Directed
Investment Options; 
 (3) applicable restrictions on transfers to and from any Designated Investment Alternative; 

(4) any restrictions on the exercise of voting, tender and similar rights related to a Directed Investment Option by the Participants or
their Beneficiaries; 
 (5) a description of any transaction fees and expenses which affect the balances in Participant Directed
Accounts in connection with the purchase or sale of a Directed Investment Option; and 
 (6) general procedures for the
dissemination of investment and other information relating to the Designated Investment Alternatives as deemed necessary or appropriate, including but not limited to a description of the following: 

(i) the investment vehicles available under the Plan, including specific information regarding any Designated Investment Alternative;

 (ii) any designated Investment Managers; and 
 (iii) a description of the additional information that may be obtained upon request from the Fiduciary designated to provide such information. 

(g) Other documents required by Directed Investments. Any information regarding investments available under the Plan, to the extent
not required to be described in the Participant Direction Procedures, may be provided to Participants in one or more documents (or in any other form, including, but not limited to, electronic media) which are separate from the Participant Direction
Procedures and are not thereby incorporated by reference into this Plan. 
 4.11 INTEGRATION IN MORE THAN ONE PLAN 

If the Employer maintains qualified retirement plans that provide for permitted disparity (integration), the provisions of
Section 4.3(b)(2) will apply. 
 4.12 QUALIFIED MILITARY SERVICE 

Notwithstanding any provisions of this Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits and service credit with respect to qualified military
service will be provided in accordance with Code Section 414(u). Furthermore, loan repayments may be suspended under this Plan as permitted under Code Section 414(u)(4). 

ARTICLE V 

VALUATIONS 
 5.1
VALUATION OF THE TRUST FUND 
 The Administrator shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer), as of each Valuation Date, to
determine the net worth of the assets comprising the Trust Fund as it exists on the Valuation Date. In determining such net worth, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall value the assets comprising the Trust Fund at their fair market value as of the
Valuation Date and may deduct all expenses for which the Trustee (or Insurer) has not yet been paid by the Employer or the Trust Fund. The Trustee (or Insurer), when determining the net worth of the assets, may update the value of any shares held in
a Participant Directed Account by reference to the number of shares held on behalf of the Participant, priced at the market value as of the Valuation Date. 
 5.2 METHOD OF VALUATION 
 In determining the fair market value of securities
held in the Trust Fund which are listed on a registered stock exchange, the Administrator shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer) to value the same at the prices they were last traded on such exchange preceding the close of business on the Valuation
Date. If such securities were not traded on the Valuation Date, or if the exchange on which they are traded was not open for business on the Valuation Date, then the securities shall be valued at the prices at which they were last traded prior

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 31 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
to the Valuation Date. Any unlisted security held in the Trust Fund shall be valued at its bid price next preceding the close of business on the Valuation Date, which bid price shall be obtained
from a registered broker or an investment banker. In determining the fair market value of assets other than securities for which trading or bid prices can be obtained, the Trustee (or Insurer) may appraise such assets itself (assuming it has the
appropriate expertise), or in its discretion, employ one or more appraisers for that purpose and rely on the values established by such appraiser or appraisers. 
 ARTICLE VI 
 DETERMINATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS 

6.1 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON RETIREMENT 
 Every Participant may terminate employment with the Employer and retire for purposes hereof on the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date or Early Retirement Date. However, a Participant may postpone
the termination of employment with the Employer to a later date, in which event the participation of such Participant in the Plan, including the right to receive allocations pursuant to Section 4.3, shall continue until such Participant’s
Retirement Date. Upon a Participant’s Retirement Date, or if elected in the Adoption Agreement, the attainment of Normal Retirement Date without termination of employment with the Employer (subject to Section 12.2(d)), or as soon
thereafter as is practicable, the Administrator shall direct the distribution, at the election of the Participant, of the Participant’s entire Vested interest in the Plan in accordance with Section 6.5. 

6.2 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH 
 (a) 100% Vesting on death. Upon the death of a Participant before the Participant’s Retirement Date or other termination of employment, all amounts credited to such Participant’s Combined
Account shall, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, become fully Vested. The Administrator shall direct, in accordance with the provisions of Sections 6.6 and 6.7, the distribution of the deceased Participant’s Vested accounts to the
Participant’s Beneficiary. 
 (b) Distribution upon death. Upon the death of a Participant, the Administrator shall
direct, in accordance with the provisions of Sections 6.6 and 6.7, the distribution of any remaining Vested amounts credited to the accounts of such deceased Participant to such Participant’s Beneficiary. 

(c) Determination of death benefit by Administrator. The Administrator may require such proper proof of death and such evidence of
the right of any person to receive payment of the value of the account of a deceased Participant as the Administrator may deem desirable. The Administrator’s determination of death and of the right of any person to receive payment shall be
conclusive. 
 (d) Beneficiary designation. Unless otherwise elected in the manner prescribed in Section 6.6, the
Beneficiary of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity shall be the Participant’s surviving spouse. Except, however, the Participant may designate a Beneficiary other than the spouse for the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity if: 

(1) the Participant and the Participant’s spouse have validly waived the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity in the manner prescribed in
Section 6.6, and the spouse has waived the right to be the Participant’s Beneficiary, 
 (2) the Participant is legally
separated or has been abandoned (within the meaning of local law) and the Participant has a court order to such effect (and there is no “qualified domestic relations order” as defined in Code Section 414(p) which provides otherwise),

 (3) the Participant has no spouse, or 
 (4) the spouse cannot be located. 
 In such event, the designation
of a Beneficiary shall be made on a form satisfactory to the Administrator. A Participant may at any time revoke a designation of a Beneficiary or change a Beneficiary by filing written (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) notice of such
revocation or change with the Administrator. However, the Participant’s spouse must again consent in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) to any change in Beneficiary unless the original consent acknowledged that the spouse
had the right to limit consent only to a specific Beneficiary and that the spouse voluntarily elected to relinquish such right. 

(e) Beneficiary if no Beneficiary elected by Participant. A Participant may, at any time, designate a Beneficiary for death
benefits, if any, payable under the Plan that are in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity without the waiver or consent of the Participant’s spouse. In the event no valid designation of Beneficiary exists, or if the Beneficiary with
respect to a portion of a Participant’s death benefit is not alive at the time of the Participant’s death and no contingent Beneficiary has been designated, then such portion of the death benefit will be paid in the following order of
priority, unless the Employer specifies a different order of priority in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), to: 
 (1) The Participant’s surviving spouse; 
 (2) The Participant’s children,
including adopted children, per stirpes; 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard
Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 32 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (3) The Participant’s surviving parents, in equal shares; or 

(4) The Participant’s estate. 
 If the Beneficiary does not predecease the Participant, but dies prior to distribution of the death benefit, the death benefit will be paid to the Beneficiary’s “designated Beneficiary” (or
if there is no “designated Beneficiary,” to the Beneficiary’s estate). 
 (f) Divorce revokes spousal
Beneficiary designation. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, if a Participant has designated the spouse as a Beneficiary, then a divorce decree or a legal separation that relates to such spouse shall revoke the
Participant’s designation of the spouse as a Beneficiary unless the decree or a “qualified domestic relations order” (within the meaning of Code Section 414(p)) provides otherwise or a subsequent Beneficiary designation is made.

 (g) Insured death benefit. If the Plan provides an insured death benefit and a Participant dies before any insurance
coverage to which the Participant is entitled under the Plan is effected, the death benefit from such insurance coverage shall be limited to the premium which was or otherwise would have been used for such purpose. 

(h) Plan terms control. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms of any Contract issued hereunder,
the Plan provisions shall control. 
 6.3 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS IN EVENT OF DISABILITY 

In the event of a Participant’s Total and Permanent Disability prior to the Participant’s Retirement Date or other termination
of employment, all amounts credited to such Participant’s Combined Account shall, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, become fully Vested. In the event of a Participant’s Total and Permanent Disability, the Administrator, in accordance
with the provisions of Sections 6.5 and 6.7, shall direct the distribution to such Participant of the entire Vested interest in the Plan. 

6.4 DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON TERMINATION 
 (a) Payment on termination of employment. If a Participant’s employment with the Employer is terminated for any reason other than death, Total and Permanent Disability, or retirement, then
such Participant shall be entitled to such benefits as are provided herein. 
 Distribution of the funds due to a Terminated
Participant shall be made on the occurrence of an event which would result in the distribution had the Terminated Participant remained in the employ of the Employer (upon the Participant’s death, Total and Permanent Disability, Early or Normal
Retirement). However, at the election of the Participant, the Administrator shall direct that the entire Vested portion of the Terminated Participant’s Combined Account be payable to such Terminated Participant provided the conditions, if any,
set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied. Any distribution under this paragraph shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including but not limited to, all notice and consent
requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. 
 Regardless of whether distributions in kind
are permitted, in the event the amount of the Vested portion of the Terminated Participant’s Combined Account equals or exceeds the fair market value of any insurance Contracts, the Trustee (or Insurer), when so directed by the Administrator
and agreed to by the Terminated Participant, shall assign, transfer, and set over to such Terminated Participant all Contracts on such Terminated Participant’s life in such form or with such endorsements, so that the settlement options and
forms of payment are consistent with the provisions of Section 6.5. In the event that the Terminated Participant’s Vested portion does not at least equal the fair market value of the Contracts, if any, the Terminated Participant may pay
over to the Trustee (or Insurer) the sum needed to make the distribution equal to the value of the Contracts being assigned or transferred, or the Trustee (or Insurer), pursuant to the Participant’s election, may borrow the cash value of the
Contracts from the Insurer so that the value of the Contracts is equal to the Vested portion of the Terminated Participant’s Combined Account and then assign the Contracts to the Terminated Participant. 

 Notwithstanding the above, unless otherwise elected in the
Adoption Agreement, if the value of a Terminated Participant’s Vested benefit derived from Employer and Employee contributions does not exceed $5,000 (or such lower amount as elected in the Adoption Agreement), the Administrator shall direct
that the entire Vested benefit be paid to such Participant in a single lump-sum as soon as practical without regard to the consent of the Participant, provided the conditions, if any, set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied. A
Participant’s Vested benefit shall not include (1) Qualified Voluntary Employee Contributions within the meaning of Code Section 72(o)(5)(B) and (2) if selected in the Conditions for Distributions Upon Termination of Employment
Section of the Adoption Agreement, the Participant’s Rollover Account. Effective with respect to distributions made on or after March 28, 2005, or such later date as elected in the Adoption Agreement, if a mandatory distribution is made
pursuant to this paragraph and such distribution is greater than $1,000 and the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an “eligible retirement plan” specified by the Participant in a “direct
rollover” in accordance with Section 6.15 or to receive the distribution directly, then the Administrator shall transfer such amount to an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a) or an individual retirement
annuity described in Code Section 408(b) designated by the Administrator. However, if the Participant elects to receive or make a “direct rollover” of such amount, then the Administrator shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer) to cause
the entire Vested benefit to be paid to such Participant in a single lump sum, or make a “direct rollover” pursuant to Section 6.15, provided the conditions, if any, set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 33 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) Vesting schedule. The Vested portion of any Participant’s Account shall
be a percentage of such Participant’s Account determined on the basis of the Participant’s number of Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the Elapsed Time method is elected) according to the vesting schedule specified in the Adoption
Agreement. However, a Participant’s entire interest in the Plan shall be non-forfeitable upon the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age (if the Participant is employed by the Employer on or after such date). 

(c) EGTRRA matching vesting schedule. For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, if the Employer maintained a vesting
schedule for matching contributions that did not comply with Code Section 411(a)(2), then the matching contribution vesting schedule selected in the Adoption Agreement shall apply to Participants who complete an Hour of Service in a Plan Year
beginning after December 31, 2001, unless a provision was adopted to have the vesting schedule apply to all Participants. However, if specified in the Adoption Agreement, the matching contribution vesting schedule set forth in the Adoption
Agreement shall only apply to the portion of the Participant’s Account attributable to matching contributions made after December 31, 2001 and matching contributions made prior to the first day of the first Plan Year beginning after
December 31, 2001 will vest in accordance with the vesting schedule then in effect. 
 (d) Top-Heavy vesting schedule.
For any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the minimum top-heavy vesting schedule elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement will automatically apply to the Plan. The minimum top-heavy vesting schedule applies to all benefits within the meaning of Code
Section 411(a)(7) except those attributable to Employee contributions, including benefits accrued before the effective date of Code Section 416 and benefits accrued before the Plan became top-heavy. Further, no decrease in a
Participant’s Vested percentage shall occur in the event the Plan’s status as top-heavy changes for any Plan Year. However, this Section does not apply to the account balances of any Employee who does not have an Hour of Service after the
Plan has initially become top-heavy and the Vested percentage of such Employee’s Participant’s Account shall be determined without regard to this Section 6.4(d). 

If in any subsequent Plan Year the Plan ceases to be a Top-Heavy Plan, then unless a specific Plan amendment is made to
provide otherwise, the Administrator will continue to use the vesting schedule in effect while the Plan was a Top-Heavy Plan. 

(e) 100% Vesting on partial or full Plan termination. Upon the complete discontinuance of the Employer’s contributions to the
Plan (if this is a profit sharing plan) or upon any full or partial termination of the Plan, all amounts then credited to the account of any affected Participant shall become 100% Vested and shall not thereafter be subject to Forfeiture. 

(f) No reduction in Vested percentage due to change in vesting schedule. If this is an amended or restated Plan, then
notwithstanding the vesting schedule specified in the Adoption Agreement, the Vested percentage of a Participant’s Account shall not be less than the Vested percentage attained as of the later of the Effective Date or adoption date of this
amendment and restatement. The computation of a Participant’s nonforfeitable percentage of such Participant’s interest in the Plan shall not be reduced as the result of any direct or indirect amendment to this Article, or due to changes in
the Plan’s status as a Top-Heavy Plan. Furthermore, if the Plan’s vesting schedule is amended (including a change in the calculation of Years of Service or Periods or Service), then the amended schedule will only apply to those
Participants who complete an Hour of Service after the effective date of the amendment. 
 (g) Continuation of old schedule if
3 Years of Service. If the Plan’s vesting schedule is amended, or if the Plan is amended in any way that directly or indirectly affects the computation of the Participant’s nonforfeitable percentage or if the Plan is deemed amended by
an automatic change to a top-heavy vesting schedule, then each Participant with at least three (3) Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the Elapsed Time method is elected) as of the expiration date of the election period may elect to have
such Participant’s nonforfeitable percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such amendment or change. If a Participant fails to make such election, then such Participant shall be subject to the new vesting schedule. The
Participant’s election period shall commence on the adoption date of the amendment, or deemed adoption date, and shall end sixty (60) days after the latest of: 
 (1) the adoption date, or deemed adoption date, of the amendment, 
 (2) the
effective date of the amendment, or 
 (3) the date the Participant receives written notice of the amendment from the Employer or
Administrator. 
 (h) Excludable service for Vesting. In determining Years of Service or Periods of Service for purposes
of vesting under the Plan, Years of Service or Periods of Service shall be excluded as elected in the Adoption Agreement. 
 6.5 DISTRIBUTION
OF BENEFITS 
 (a) Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. 

(1) Unless otherwise elected as provided below, a Participant who is married on the Annuity Starting Date and who does not die before the
Annuity Starting Date shall receive the value of all Plan benefits in the form of a Joint and Survivor Annuity. The Joint and Survivor Annuity is an annuity that commences immediately and shall be equal in value to a single life annuity. Such joint
and survivor benefits following the Participant’s death shall continue to the “spouse” during the “spouse’s” lifetime at a rate equal to either fifty percent (50%), seventy-five percent (75%) (or, sixty-six and
two-thirds percent (66 2/3%) if the Insurer used to provide the annuity does not offer a joint and seventy-five percent (75%) annuity), or one hundred percent (100%) of the rate at 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 34 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
which such benefits were payable to the Participant. Unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, a joint and fifty percent (50%) survivor annuity shall be considered the designated
qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and the normal form of payment for the purposes of this Plan. However, the Participant may, without spousal consent, elect an alternative Joint and Survivor Annuity, which alternative shall be equal in value to
the designated qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. An unmarried Participant shall receive the value of such Participant’s benefit in the form of a life annuity. Such unmarried Participant, however, may elect to waive the life annuity. The
election must comply with the provisions of this Section as if it were an election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity by a married Participant, but without fulfilling the spousal consent requirement. The Participant may elect to have any
annuity provided for in this Section distributed upon the attainment of the “earliest retirement age” under the Plan. The “earliest retirement age” is the earliest date on which, under the Plan, the Participant could elect to
receive retirement benefits. 
 (2) Any election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity must be made by the Participant in
writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) during the election period and be consented to in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) by the Participant’s “spouse.” If the “spouse” is legally
incompetent to give consent, the “spouse’s” legal guardian, even if such guardian is the Participant, may give consent. Such election shall designate a Beneficiary (or a form of benefits) that may not be changed without spousal
consent (unless the consent of the “spouse” expressly permits designations by the Participant without the requirement of further consent by the “spouse”). Such “spouse’s” consent shall be irrevocable and must
acknowledge the effect of such election and be witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public. Such consent shall not be required if it is established to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the required consent cannot be obtained
because there is no “spouse,” the “spouse” cannot be located, or other circumstances that may be prescribed by Regulations. The election made by the Participant and consented to by such Participant’s “spouse” may
be revoked by the Participant in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) without the consent of the “spouse” at any time during the election period. A revocation of a prior election shall cause the Participant’s
benefits to be distributed as a Joint and Survivor Annuity. The number of revocations shall not be limited. Any new election must comply with the requirements of this paragraph. A former “spouse’s” waiver shall not be binding on a new
“spouse.” 
 (3) The election period to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity shall be the ninety (90) day period
ending on the Annuity Starting Date. 
 (4) For purposes of this Section and Section 6.6, “spouse” or
“surviving spouse” means the spouse or surviving spouse of the Participant, provided that a former spouse will be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse and a current spouse will not be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse to the
extent provided under a “qualified domestic relations order” as described in Code Section 414(p). 
 (5) With
regard to the election, except as otherwise provided herein, the Administrator shall provide to the Participant no less than thirty (30) days and no more than ninety (90) days before the Annuity Starting Date a written (or such other form
as permitted by the IRS) explanation of: 
 (i) the terms and conditions of the Joint and Survivor Annuity, 

(ii) the Participant’s right to make and the effect of an election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity, 

(iii) the right of the Participant’s “spouse” to consent to any election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity, and

 (iv) the right of the Participant to revoke such election, and the effect of such revocation. 

(6) Any distribution provided for in this Section may commence less than thirty (30) days after the notice required by Code
Section 417(a)(3) is given provided the following requirements are satisfied: 
 (i) the Administrator clearly informs the
Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of thirty (30) days after receiving the notice to consider whether to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity and to elect (with spousal consent) a form of distribution other than a Joint
and Survivor Annuity; 
 (ii) the Participant is permitted to revoke any affirmative distribution election at least until the
Annuity Starting Date or, if later, at any time prior to the expiration of the seven (7) day period that begins the day after the explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant; 

(iii) the Annuity Starting Date is after the time that the explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant.
However, the Annuity Starting Date may be before the date that any affirmative distribution election is made by the Participant and before the date that the distribution is permitted to commence under (iv) below; and 

(iv) distribution in accordance with the affirmative election does not commence before the expiration of the seven (7) day period
that begins the day after the explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 35 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) Alternative forms of distributions. In the event a married Participant duly
elects pursuant to paragraph (a)(2) above not to receive the benefit in the form of a Joint and Survivor Annuity, or if such Participant is not married, in the form of a life annuity, the Administrator, pursuant to the election of the Participant,
shall direct the distribution to a Participant or Beneficiary any amount to which the Participant or Beneficiary is entitled under the Plan in one or more of the following methods which are permitted pursuant to the Adoption Agreement. 

(1) One lump-sum payment in cash or in property, provided that if a distribution of property is permitted, it shall be limited to property
that is specifically allocated and identifiable with respect to such Participant. 
 (2) Partial withdrawals. 

(3) Payments over a period certain in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual cash installments. The period over which such payment is
to be made shall not extend beyond the earlier of the Participant’s life expectancy (or the joint life expectancy of the Participant and the Participant’s designated Beneficiary). 

(4) Purchase of or providing an annuity. However, such annuity may not be in any form that will provide for payments over a period
extending beyond either the life of the Participant (or the lives of the Participant and the Participant’s designated Beneficiary) or the life expectancy of the Participant (or the life expectancy of the Participant and the Participant’s
designated Beneficiary). 
 (c) Consent to distributions. Benefits may not be paid without the Participant’s and the
Participant’s “spouse’s” consent if the present value of the Participant’s Joint and Survivor Annuity derived from Employer and Employee contributions exceeds $5,000 and the benefit is “immediately distributable.”
However, spousal consent is not required if the distribution will be made in the form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and the benefit is “immediately distributable.” A benefit is “immediately distributable” if any part
of the benefit could be distributed to the Participant (or “surviving spouse”) before the Participant attains (or would have attained if not deceased) the later of the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age or age 62. 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the value of the Participant’s benefit derived from Employer and Employee
contributions does not exceed $5,000, then the Administrator will distribute such benefit in a lump-sum. No distribution may be made under the preceding sentence after the Annuity Starting Date unless the Participant and the Participant’s
“spouse” consent in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) to such distribution. Any consent required under this paragraph must be obtained not more than ninety (90) days before commencement of the distribution and
shall be made in a manner consistent with Section 6.5(a)(2). 
 For purposes of this subsection, the
Participant’s benefit derived from Employer and Employee contributions shall not include: (1) the Participant’s Qualified Voluntary Contribution Account, and (2) if selected in the Conditions for Distributions Upon Termination of
Employment Section of the Adoption Agreement, the Participant’s Rollover Account. 
 (d) Obtaining consent. The
following rules will apply with respect to the consent requirements set forth in subsection (c): 
 (1) No consent shall be valid
unless the Participant has received a general description of the material features and an explanation of the relative values of the optional forms of benefit available under the Plan that would satisfy the notice requirements of Code
Section 417; 
 (2) The Participant must be informed of the right to defer receipt of the distribution. If a Participant
fails to consent, it shall be deemed an election to defer the commencement of payment of any benefit. However, any election to defer the receipt of benefits shall not apply with respect to distributions that are required under Section 6.8;

 (3) Notice of the rights specified under this paragraph shall be provided no less than thirty (30) days and no more than
ninety (90) days before the Annuity Starting Date; 
 (4) Written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) consent of
the Participant to the distribution must not be made before the Participant receives the notice and must not be made more than ninety (90) days before the Annuity Starting Date; and 

(5) No consent shall be valid if a significant detriment is imposed under the Plan on any Participant who does not consent to the
distribution. 
 (e) Required minimum distributions (Code Section 401(a)(9)). Notwithstanding any provision in the
Plan to the contrary, the distribution of a Participant’s benefits, whether under the Plan or through the purchase of an annuity Contract, shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 6.8. 

(f) Annuity Contracts. All annuity Contracts under this Plan shall be non-transferable when distributed. Furthermore, the terms of
any annuity Contract purchased and distributed to a Participant or “spouse” shall comply with all of the requirements of this Plan. 
 (g) TEFRA 242(b)(2) election. The provisions of this Section shall not apply to distributions made in accordance with Plan Section 6.8(a)(5). 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 36 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (h) Distribution from partially Vested account. If a distribution is made to a
Participant who has not severed employment and who is not fully Vested in the Participant’s Account, and the Participant may increase the Vested percentage in such account, then at any relevant time the Participant’s Vested portion of the
account will be equal to an amount (“X”) determined by the formula: 
 X equals P (AB plus D) - D 

For purposes of applying the formula: P is the Vested percentage at the relevant time, AB is the account balance at the
relevant time, D is the amount of distribution, and the relevant time is the time at which, under the Plan, the Vested percentage in the account cannot increase. 

However, the Employer may elect, in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), to provide that a
separate account shall be established for the Participant’s interest in the Plan as of the time of the distribution, and at any relevant time the Participant’s Vested portion of the separate account will be equal to an amount determined as
follows: P (AB plus (R x D)) - (R x D) where R is the ratio of the account balance at the relevant time to the account balance after distribution and the other terms have the same meaning as in the preceding paragraph. 

(i) Transition rules.  
 (1) Any living Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984, who would otherwise not receive the benefits prescribed by the previous subsections of this Section must be given the opportunity
to elect to have such prior subsections apply if such participant is credited with at least one Hour of Service under this Plan or a predecessor plan in a plan year beginning on or after January 1, 1976, and such Participant had at least ten
(10) years of vesting service when he or she separated from service. 
 (2) Any living Participant not receiving benefits on
August 23, 1984, who was credited with at least one Hour of Service under this Plan or a predecessor plan on or after September 2, 1974, and who is not otherwise credited with any service in a plan year beginning on or after
January 1, 1976, must be given the opportunity to have his or her benefits paid in accordance with Subsection (4) below. 
 (3) The respective opportunities to elect (as described in Subsections (1) and (2) above) must be afforded to the appropriate Participants during the period commencing on August 23, 1984,
and ending on the date benefits would otherwise commence to said Participants. 
 (4) Any Participant who has elected pursuant to
Subsection (2) above and any Participant who does not elect under Subsection (1) or who meets the requirements of Subsection (1) except that such Participant does not have at least ten (10) years of vesting service when he or she
separates from service, shall have his or her benefits distributed in accordance with all of the following requirements if benefits would have been payable in the form of a life annuity: 

(a) If benefits in the form of a life annuity become payable to a married Participant who: 

(1) begins to receive payments under the plan on or after Normal Retirement Age; or 

(2) dies on or after Normal Retirement Age while still working for the Employer; or 

(3) begins to receive payments on or after the “qualified early retirement age”; or 

(4) separates from service on or after attaining Normal Retirement Age (or the “qualified early retirement age”) and after
satisfying the eligibility requirements for the payment of benefits under the Plan and thereafter dies before beginning to receive such benefits; 
 then such benefits will be received under this Plan in the form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, unless the 
 Participant has elected otherwise during the election period. The election period must begin at least six (6) months before the Participant attains “qualified early retirement age” and end
not more than ninety (90) days before the commencement of benefits. Any election hereunder will be in writing and may be changed by the Participant at any time. 
 (b) A Participant who is employed after attaining the “qualified early retirement age” will be given the opportunity to elect, during the election period, to have a survivor annuity payable on
death. If the Participant elects the survivor annuity, payments under such annuity must not be less than the payments which would have been made to the “spouse” under the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity if the Participant had retired
on the day before his or her death. Any election under this provision will be in writing and may be changed by the Participant at any time. The election period begins on the later of (1) the 90th day before the Participant attains the
“qualified early retirement age,” or (2) the date on which Participation begins, and ends on the date the Participant terminates employment. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 37 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (c) For purposes of this Subsection, the “qualified early retirement age”
means the latest of: (i) the earliest date, under the Plan, on which the Participant may elect to receive retirement benefits, (ii) the first day of the 120th month beginning before the Participant reaches Normal Retirement Age, or
(iii) the date the Participant begins participation. 
 6.6 DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH 

(a) Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity (QPSA). Unless otherwise elected as provided below, a Vested Participant who dies
before the Annuity Starting Date and who has a “surviving spouse” shall have the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity paid to the “surviving spouse.” The Participant’s “spouse” may direct that payment of the
Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity commence within a reasonable period after the Participant’s death. If the “spouse” does not so direct, payment of such benefit will commence at the time the Participant would have attained the later of
Normal Retirement Age or age 62. However, the “spouse” may elect a later commencement date. Any distribution to the Participant’s “spouse” shall be subject to the rules specified in Section 6.8. 

(b) Election to waive QPSA. Any election to waive the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity before the Participant’s death must be
made by the Participant in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) during the election period and shall require the “spouse’s” irrevocable consent in the same manner provided for in Section 6.5(a)(2). Further, the
“spouse’s” consent must acknowledge the specific nonspouse Beneficiary. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the nonspouse Beneficiary need not be acknowledged, provided the consent of the “spouse” acknowledges that the
“spouse” has the right to limit consent only to a specific Beneficiary and that the “spouse” voluntarily elects to relinquish such right. 
 (c) Time to waive QPSA. The election period to waive the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity shall begin on the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35 and end on the date of
the Participant’s death. An earlier waiver (with “spousal” consent) may be made provided a written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) explanation of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity is given to the Participant and such
waiver becomes invalid at the beginning of the Plan Year in which the Participant turns age 35. In the event a Participant separates from service prior to the beginning of the election period, the election period shall begin on the date of such
separation from service. 
 (d) QPSA notice. With regard to the election, the Administrator shall provide each Participant
within the applicable election period, with respect to such Participant (and consistent with Regulations), a written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) explanation of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity containing comparable information to
that required pursuant to Section 6.5(a)(5). For the purposes of this paragraph, the term “applicable period” means, with respect to a Participant, whichever of the following periods ends last: 

(1) The period beginning with the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 32 and ending with the close of the Plan
Year preceding the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35; 
 (2) A reasonable period after the individual becomes a
Participant; 
 (3) A reasonable period ending after the Plan no longer fully subsidizes the cost of the Pre-Retirement Survivor
Annuity with respect to the Participant; or 
 (4) A reasonable period ending after Code Section 401(a)(11) applies to the
Participant. 
 For purposes of applying this subsection, a reasonable period ending after the enumerated events
described in (2), (3) and (4) is the end of the two (2) year period beginning one (1) year prior to the date the applicable event occurs, and ending one (1) year after that date. In the case of a Participant who separates
from service before the Plan Year in which age 35 is attained, notice shall be provided within the two (2) year period beginning one (1) year prior to separation and ending one (1) year after separation. If such a Participant
thereafter returns to employment with the Employer, the “applicable period” for such Participant shall be redetermined. 
 (e) Pre-REA. The Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity provided for in this Section shall apply only to Participants who are credited with an Hour of Service on or after August 23, 1984.
Participants who are not credited with an Hour of Service on or after August 23, 1984, shall be provided with rights to the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity in accordance with Section 303(e)(2) of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984.

 (f) Consent. If the value of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity derived from Employer and Employee contributions does
not exceed, and has never exceeded at the time of any prior distribution, $5,000, the Administrator shall direct the distribution of such amount to the Participant’s “spouse” in a single lump-sum as soon as practicable. No
distribution may be made under the preceding sentence after the Annuity Starting Date unless the “spouse” consents in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS). If the value exceeds $5,000, an immediate distribution of the
entire amount may be made to the “surviving spouse,” provided such “surviving spouse” consents in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) to such distribution. Any consent required under this paragraph must be
obtained not more than ninety (90) days before commencement of the distribution and shall be made in a manner consistent with Section 6.5(a)(2). 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 38 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (g) Alternative forms of distribution. Death benefits may be paid to a
Participant’s Beneficiary in one of the following optional forms of benefits subject to the rules specified in Section 6.8 and the elections made in the Adoption Agreement. Such optional forms of distributions may be elected by the
Participant in the event there is an election to waive the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity, and for any death benefits in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. However, if no optional form of distribution was elected by the Participant
prior to death, then the Participant’s Beneficiary may elect the form of distribution. 
 (1) One lump-sum payment in cash
or in property that is allocated to the accounts of the Participant at the time of the distribution. 
 (2) Partial withdrawals.

 (3) Payment in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual cash installments over a period to be determined by the Participant
or the Participant’s Beneficiary. In order to provide such installment payments, the Administrator may (A) segregate the aggregate amount thereof in a separate, federally insured savings account, certificate of deposit in a bank or savings
and loan association, money market certificate or other liquid short-term security or (B) purchase a nontransferable annuity Contract for a term certain (with no life contingencies) providing for such payment. After periodic installments
commence, the Beneficiary shall have the right to reduce the period over which such periodic installments shall be made, and the cash amount of such periodic installments shall be adjusted accordingly. 

(4) In the form of an annuity over the life expectancy of the Beneficiary. 

(5) If death benefits in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity are to be paid to the “surviving spouse,” such benefits
may be paid pursuant to (1), (2) or (3) above, or used to purchase an annuity so as to increase the payments made pursuant to the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. 
 (h) Required minimum distributions (Code Section 401(a)(9)). Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, distributions upon the death of a Participant shall comply with the
requirements of Section 6.8. 
 (i) Payment to a child. For purposes of this Section, any amount paid to a child of
the Participant will be treated as if it had been paid to the “surviving spouse” if the amount becomes payable to the “surviving spouse” when the child reaches the age of majority. 

(j) Voluntary Contribution Account. In the event that less than one hundred percent (100%) of a Participant’s interest in
the Plan is distributed to such Participant’s “spouse,” the portion of the distribution attributable to the Participant’s Voluntary Contribution Account shall be in the same proportion that the Participant’s Voluntary
Contribution Account bears to the Participant’s total interest in the Plan. 
 (k) TEFRA 242(b)(2) election. The
provisions of this Section shall not apply to distributions made in accordance with Plan Section 6.8(a)(5). 
 6.7 TIME OF DISTRIBUTION

 Except as limited by Section 6.8, whenever a distribution is to be made, or a series of payments are to commence, the
distribution or series of payments may be made or begun as soon as practicable. However, unless a Participant elects in writing to defer the receipt of benefits (such election may not result in a death benefit that is more than incidental), the
payment of benefits shall begin not later than the sixtieth (60th) day after the close of the Plan Year in which the latest of the following events occurs: (a) the date on which the Participant attains the earlier of age 65 or the Normal
Retirement Age specified herein; (b) the tenth (10th) anniversary of the year in which the Participant commenced participation in the Plan; or (c) the date the Participant terminates service with the Employer. 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the failure of a Participant and, if applicable, the Participant’s spouse, to consent to a
distribution that is “immediately distributable” (within the meaning of Section 6.5(c)), shall be deemed to be an election to defer the commencement of payment of any benefit sufficient to satisfy this Section. 

6.8 REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS 
 (a) General rules 
 (1) Effective Date. Subject to the Joint and
Survivor Annuity requirements set forth in Plan Section 6.5, the requirements of this Section shall apply to any distribution of a Participant’s interest in the Plan and will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of this Plan.
Unless a later effective date is specified in the Adoption Agreement, the provisions of this Section will apply for purposes of determining required minimum distributions for calendar years beginning after December 31, 2001. 

(2) Coordination with minimum distribution requirements previously in effect. If the “effective date” of this amendment
is earlier than calendar years beginning with the 2003 calendar year, required minimum distributions for 2002 under this Section will be determined as follows. If the total amount of 2002 required minimum distributions under the Plan made to the
distributee 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company

  
 39 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
prior to the “effective date” of this Section equals or exceeds the required minimum distributions determined under this Section, then no additional distributions will be required to be
made for 2002 on or after such date to the distributee. If the total amount of 2002 required minimum distributions under the Plan made to the distributee prior to the “effective date” of this Section is less than the amount determined
under this amendment, then required minimum distributions for 2002 on and after such date will be determined so that the total amount of required minimum distributions for 2002 made to the distributee will be the amount determined under this
Section. 
 (3) Requirements of Treasury Regulations incorporated. All distributions required under this Section will be
determined and made in accordance with the Regulations under Code Section 401(a)(9) and the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirement of Code Section 401(a)(9)(G). 

(4) Limits on distribution periods. As of the first distribution calendar year, distributions to a Participant may only be made in
accordance with the selections made in the Form of Distributions Section of the Adoption Agreement. If such distributions are not made in a single-sum, then they may only be made over one of the following periods: (i) the life of the
Participant, (ii) the joint lives of the Participant and a “designated Beneficiary,” (iii) a period certain not extending beyond the life expectancy of the Participant, or (iv) a period certain not extending beyond the joint
life and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and a “designated Beneficiary.” 
 (5) TEFRA
Section 242(b)(2) elections. 
 (i) Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section, other than the spouse’s
right of consent afforded under the Plan, distributions may be made on behalf of any Participant, including a five percent (5%) owner, who has made a designation in accordance with Section 242(b)(2) of the Tax Equity and Fiscal
Responsibility Act (TEFRA) and in accordance with all of the following requirements (regardless of when such distribution commences): 
 (I) The distribution by the Plan is one which would not have disqualified such plan under Code Section 401(a)(9) as in effect prior to amendment by the Deficit Reduction Act of 1984. 

(II) The distribution is in accordance with a method of distribution designated by the Participant whose interest in the plan is being
distributed or, if the Participant is deceased, by a Beneficiary of such Participant. 
 (III) Such designation was in writing,
was signed by the Participant or the Beneficiary, and was made before January 1, 1984. 
 (IV) The Participant had accrued
a benefit under the Plan as of December 31, 1983. 
 (V) The method of distribution designated by the Participant or the
Beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution will commence, the period over which distributions will be made, and in the case of any distribution upon the Participant’s death, the Beneficiaries of the Participant listed in order of
priority. 
 (ii) A distribution upon death will not be covered by the transitional rule of this Subsection unless the
information in the designation contains the required information described above with respect to the distributions to be made upon the death of the Participant. 
 (iii) For any distribution which commences before January 1, 1984, but continues after December 31, 1983, the Participant, or the Beneficiary, to whom such distribution is being made, will be
presumed to have designated the method of distribution under which the distribution is being made if the method of distribution was specified in writing and the distribution satisfies the requirements in (i)(I) and (i)(V) of this Subsection.

 (iv) If a designation is revoked, any subsequent distribution must satisfy the requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9)
and the Regulations thereunder. If a designation is revoked subsequent to the date distributions are required to begin, the Plan must distribute by the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the revocation occurs the total
amount not yet distributed which would have been required to have been distributed to satisfy Code Section 401(a)(9) and the Regulations thereunder, but for the Section 242(b)(2) election. For calendar years beginning after
December 31, 1988, such distributions must meet the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirements. Any changes in the designation will be considered to be a revocation of the designation. However, the mere substitution or addition of
another Beneficiary (one not named in the designation) under the designation will not be considered to be a revocation of the designation, so long as such substitution or addition does not alter the period over which distributions are to be made
under the designation, directly or indirectly (for example, by altering the relevant measuring life). 
 (v) In the case in
which an amount is transferred or rolled over from one plan to another plan, the rules in Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-8, Q&A-14 and Q&A-15, shall apply. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 40 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) Time and manner of distribution 

(1) Required beginning date. The Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the
Participant no later than the Participant’s “required beginning date.” 
 (2) Death of Participant before
distributions begin. If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows as elected in the Distributions Upon Death Section of the
Adoption Agreement (or if no election is made, then the Beneficiary may elect which provision shall apply): 
 (i) If the
Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole “designated Beneficiary,” then, except as otherwise provided herein, distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately
following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70 1/2, if later. 
 (ii) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole “designated Beneficiary,” then, except as provided in Section 6.8(b)(3) below, distributions to the
“designated Beneficiary” will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died. 
 (iii) If there is no “designated Beneficiary” as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed
by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death. 
 (iv) If the
Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole “designated Beneficiary” and the surviving spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse begin, this Section 6.8(b)(2), other than
Section 6.8(b)(2)(i), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant. 
 For purposes of this
Section 6.8(b)(2) and Section 6.8(b)(3), unless Section 6.8(b)(2)(iv) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant’s “required beginning date.” If Section 6.8(b)(2)(iv) applies, distributions
are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 6.8(b)(2)(i). If distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the Participant before the
Participant’s “required beginning date” (or to the Participant’s surviving spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 6.8(b)(2)(i)), the date distributions are considered
to begin is the date distributions actually commence. 
 (3) Forms of distribution. Unless the Participant’s interest
is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the “required beginning date,” as of the first “distribution calendar year” distributions will be made in accordance
with Sections 6.8(c) and 6.8(d). If the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of Code
Section 401(a)(9) and the Regulations thereunder. 
 (c) Required minimum distributions during Participant’s
lifetime 
 (1) Amount of required minimum distribution for each “distribution calendar year.” During the
Participant’s lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each “distribution calendar year” is the lesser of the following, as elected in the Form of Distributions Section of the Adoption Agreement: 

(i) the quotient obtained by dividing the “Participant’s account balance” by the distribution period in the Uniform
Lifetime Table set forth in Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9, using the Participant’s age as of the Participant’s birthday in the “distribution calendar year”; or 

(ii) if the Participant’s sole “designated Beneficiary” for the “distribution calendar year” is the
Participant’s spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the “Participant’s account balance” by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9, using the Participant’s and
spouse’s attained ages as of the Participant’s and spouse’s birthdays in the “distribution calendar year.” 
 (2) Lifetime required minimum distributions continue through year of Participant’s death. Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 6.8(c) beginning with the
first “distribution calendar year” and up to and including the “distribution calendar year” that includes the Participant’s date of death. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 41 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (d) Required minimum distributions after Participant’s death 

(1) Death on or after date distributions begin. 
 (i) Participant survived by “designated Beneficiary.” If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a “designated Beneficiary,” the minimum
amount that will be distributed for each “distribution calendar year” after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the “Participant’s account balance” by the longer of the remaining
“life expectancy” of the Participant or the remaining “life expectancy” of the Participant’s “designated Beneficiary,” determined as follows: 

(A) The Participant’s remaining “life expectancy” is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death,
reduced by one for each subsequent year. 
 (B) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole
“designated Beneficiary,” the remaining “life expectancy” of the surviving spouse is calculated for each “distribution calendar year” after the year of the Participant’s death using the surviving spouse’s age
as of the spouse’s birthday in that year. For “distribution calendar years” after the year of the surviving spouse’s death, the remaining “life expectancy” of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the
surviving spouse as of the spouse’s birthday in the calendar year of the spouse’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year. 
 (C) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole “designated Beneficiary,” the “designated Beneficiary’s” remaining “life expectancy” is
calculated using the age of the Beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent year. 
 (ii) No “designated Beneficiary.” If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no “designated Beneficiary” as of September 30 of the year
after the year of the Participant’s death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each “distribution calendar year” after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the
“Participant’s account balance” by the Participant’s remaining “life expectancy” calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year. 

(2) Death before date distributions begin.  
 (i) Participant survived by “designated Beneficiary.” Except as provided in Section 6.8(b)(3), if the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a
“designated Beneficiary,” the minimum amount that will be distributed for each “distribution calendar year” after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the “Participant’s account
balance” by the remaining “life expectancy” of the Participant’s “designated Beneficiary,” determined as provided in Section 6.8(d)(1). 
 (ii) No “designated Beneficiary.” If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no “designated Beneficiary” as of September 30 of the year
following the year of the Participant’s death, distribution of the Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death. 

(iii) Death of surviving spouse before distributions to surviving spouse are required to begin. If the Participant dies before the
date distributions begin, the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole “designated Beneficiary,” and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under
Section 6.8(b)(2)(i), this Section 6.8(d)(2) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant. 
 (e)
Definitions. For purposes of this Section, the following definitions apply: 
 (1) “Designated Beneficiary”
means the individual who is designated as the Beneficiary under the Plan and is the “designated Beneficiary” under Code Section 401(a)(9) and Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-4. 

(2) “Distribution calendar year” means a calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning
before the Participant’s death, the first “distribution calendar year” is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant’s “required beginning date.” For distributions beginning
after the Participant’s death, the first “distribution calendar year” is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under Section 6.8(b). The required minimum distribution for the Participant’s first
“distribution calendar year” will be made on or before the Participant’s “required beginning date.” The required minimum distribution for other “distribution calendar years,” including the required minimum
distribution for the “distribution calendar year” in which the Participant’s “required beginning date” occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that “distribution calendar year.” 

(3) “Life expectancy” means the life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in Regulation
Section 1.401(a)(9)-9. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust
Company 

  
 42 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (4) “Participant’s account balance” means the Participant’s account
balance as of the last Valuation Date in the calendar year immediately preceding the “distribution calendar year” (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or Forfeitures allocated to the
account balance as of the dates in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date. For this purpose, the Administrator may exclude contributions that
are allocated to the account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date, but that are not actually made during the valuation calendar year. The account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts
rolled over or transferred to the Plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the “distribution calendar year” if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year. 

(5) “Required beginning date” means, except as otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted
Elections), with respect to any Participant, April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2 or the calendar year in which the Participant retires, except that benefit
distributions to a “5-percent owner” must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2. 
 (6) “5-percent owner” means a Participant who is a 5-percent owner as defined in Code Section 416 at any time during the Plan Year ending with or within the calendar year in which such
owner attains age 70 1/2. Once distributions have begun to a 5-percent owner under this Section they must continue to be distributed, even if the Participant ceases to be a 5-percent owner in a subsequent year. 

(f) Transition rules.  
 (1) For plans in existence before 2003. Required minimum distributions before 2003 were made pursuant to Section (e), if applicable, and Sections 6.8(f)(2) through (4) below. 

(2) 2000 and Before. Required minimum distributions for calendar years after 1984 and before 2001 were made in accordance with Code
Section 401(a)(9) and the proposed Regulations thereunder published in the Federal Register on July 27, 1987 (the “1987 Proposed Regulations”). 
 (3) 2001. Required minimum distributions for calendar year 2001 were made in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(9) and the 1987 Proposed Regulations, unless the Adoption Agreement provides
that required minimum distributions for 2001 were made pursuant to the proposed Regulations under Code Section 401(a)(9) published in the Federal Register on January 17, 2001 (the “2001 Proposed Regulations”). If distributions
were made in 2001 under the 1987 Proposed Regulations prior to the date in 2001 the Plan began operating under the 2001 Proposed Regulations, the special transition rule in Announcement 2001-82, 2001-2 C.B. 123, applied. 

(4) 2002. Required minimum distributions for calendar year 2002 were made in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(9) and the
1987 Proposed Regulations unless either (i) or (ii) below applies. 
 (i) The Adoption Agreement provides that
required minimum distributions for 2002 were made pursuant to the 2001 Proposed Regulations. 
 (ii) The Adoption Agreement
provides that required minimum distributions for 2002 were made pursuant to the Final and Temporary Regulations under Code Section 401(a)(9) published in the Federal Register on April 17, 2002, (the “2002 Final and Temporary
Regulations”) which are described in Sections (b) through (e) of this Section. If distributions were made in 2002 under either the 1987 Proposed Regulations or the 2001 Proposed Regulations prior to the date in 2002 the Plan began
operating under the 2002 Final and Temporary Regulations, the special transition rule in Section 1.2 of the model amendment in Revenue Procedure 2002-29, 2002-1 C.B. 1176, applied. 
 6.9 DISTRIBUTION FOR MINOR OR INCOMPETENT INDIVIDUAL 
 In the event a
distribution is to be made to a minor or incompetent individual, then the Administrator may direct that such distribution be paid to the court appointed legal guardian or any other person authorized under state law to receive such distribution, or
if none, then in the case of a minor individual, to a parent of such individual, or to the custodian for such individual under the Uniform Gift to Minors Act or Gift to Minors Act, if such is permitted by the laws of the state in which said
individual resides. Such a payment to the guardian, custodian or parent of a minor or incompetent individual shall fully discharge the Trustee (or Insurer), Employer, and Plan from further liability on account thereof. 

 6.10 LOCATION OF PARTICIPANT OR BENEFICIARY UNKNOWN 

In the event that all, or any portion, of the distribution payable to a Participant or Beneficiary hereunder shall, at the later of the
Participant’s attainment of age 62 or Normal Retirement Age, remain unpaid solely by reason of the inability of the Administrator, after sending a registered letter, return receipt requested, to the last known address, and after further
diligent effort, to ascertain the whereabouts of such Participant or Beneficiary, the amount so distributable shall be treated as a Forfeiture pursuant to the Plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, effective with respect to distributions made after
March 28, 2005, if the Plan provides for mandatory distributions and the amount to be distributed to a Participant or Beneficiary does not exceed $1,000, then the amount distributable may, in the sole discretion of 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 43 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
the Administrator, either be treated as a Forfeiture, or be paid directly to an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described
in Code Section 408(b) at the time it is determined that the whereabouts of the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary cannot be ascertained. In the event a Participant or Beneficiary is located subsequent to the Forfeiture, such
benefit shall be restored, first from Forfeitures, if any, and then from an additional Employer contribution if necessary. Upon Plan termination, the portion of the distributable amount that is an “eligible rollover distribution” as
defined in Plan Section 6.15(b)(1) may be paid directly to an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described in Code Section 408(b). However, regardless of the preceding, a
benefit that is lost by reason of escheat under applicable state law is not treated as a Forfeiture for purposes of this Section nor as an impermissible forfeiture under the Code. 
 6.11 IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTION 
 If elected in the Adoption Agreement, at such
time as the conditions set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied, then the Administrator, at the election of a Participant who has not severed employment with the Employer, shall direct the distribution of up to the entire Vested
amount then credited to the accounts as elected in the Adoption Agreement maintained on behalf of such Participant. For purposes of this Section, a Participant shall include an Employee who has an Account balance in the Plan. In the event that the
Administrator makes such a distribution, the Participant shall continue to be eligible to participate in the Plan on the same basis as any other Employee. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be made in a manner consistent with
Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. Furthermore, if an in-service distribution is permitted from more than one account type, the
Administrator may determine any ordering of a Participant’s in-service distribution from such accounts. 
 6.12 ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR
HARDSHIP 
 (a) Hardship events. For Profit Sharing Plans and 401(k) Plans (except to the extent Section 12.9
applies), if elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Administrator, at the election of the Participant, shall direct the distribution to any Participant in any one Plan Year up to the lesser of 100% of the Vested interest of the Accounts selected in
the Adoption Agreement, valued as of the last Valuation Date or the amount necessary to satisfy the immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant. For purposes of this Section, a Participant shall include an Employee who has an Account
balance in the Plan. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be deemed to be made as of the first day of the Plan Year or, if later, the Valuation Date immediately preceding the date of distribution, and the Account from which the
distribution is made shall be reduced accordingly. Withdrawal under this Section shall be authorized only if the distribution is for an immediate and heavy financial need. The Administrator will determine whether there is an immediate and heavy
financial need based on the facts and circumstances. An immediate and heavy financial need includes, but is not limited to, a distribution for one of the following: 
 (1) Expenses for (or necessary to obtain) medical care that would be deductible under Code Section 213(d) (determined without regard to whether the expenses exceed 7.5% of adjusted gross income);

 (2) Costs directly related to the purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence for the Participant;

 (3) Payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Participant’s deceased parent, spouse, children or dependents (as
defined in Code Section 152, and, for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2005, without regard to Code Section 152(d)(1)(B)); 
 (4) Payment of tuition, related educational fees, and room and board expenses, for up to the next twelve (12) months of post-secondary education for the Participant, the Participant’s spouse,
children, or dependents (as defined in Code Section 152, and, for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2005, without regard to Code Section 152(b)(1), (b)(2), and (d)(1)(B)); 

(5) Payments necessary to prevent the eviction of the Participant from the Participant’s principal residence or foreclosure on the
mortgage on that residence; or 
 (6) Expenses for the repair of damage to the Participant’s principal residence that would
qualify for the casualty deduction under Code Section 165 (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income). 
 (b) Other limits and conditions. If elected in the Adoption Agreement, no distribution shall be made pursuant to this Section from the Participant’s Account until such Account has become fully
Vested. Furthermore, if a hardship distribution is permitted from more than one Account, the Administrator may determine any ordering of a Participant’s hardship distribution from such Accounts. 

(c) Distribution rules apply. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and
satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. 
 6.13 SPECIAL RULE FOR CERTAIN PROFIT SHARING PLANS 
 (a) The provisions of
this Section apply to a Participant in a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan to the extent elected in the Adoption Agreement. However, this Section shall not apply with respect to amounts that are transferred directly or indirectly
(i.e., 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 44 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
other than by a rollover) to this Plan from a defined benefit plan, money purchase pension plan, target benefit plan, or stock bonus or profit sharing plan which is subject to the survivor
annuity requirements of Code Sections 401(a)(11) and 417. 
 (b) If an election is made to not offer life annuities as a form of
distribution, then a Participant shall be prohibited from electing benefits in the form of a life annuity and the Joint and Survivor Annuity provisions of Section 6.5 shall not apply. 

(c) If an election is made to offer life annuities as a form of distribution but not as the normal form of distribution, then the Joint
and Survivor Annuity provisions of Section 6.5 shall not apply if a Participant does not elect an annuity form of distribution. Furthermore, subsection (e) shall not apply if a Participant elects an annuity form of distribution.

 (d) Notwithstanding anything in Sections 6.2 and 6.6 to the contrary, upon the death of a Participant, the automatic form of
distribution will be a lump-sum rather than a Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. Furthermore, the Participant’s spouse will be the Beneficiary of the Participant’s entire Vested interest in the Plan unless an election is made to
waive the spouse as Beneficiary. The other provisions in Section 6.2 shall be applied by treating the death benefit in this subsection as though it is a Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. 

(e) Except to the extent otherwise provided in this Section, the provisions of Sections 6.2, 6.5 and 6.6 regarding spousal consent shall
be inoperative with respect to this Plan. 
 (f) If a distribution is one to which Code Sections 401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply,
such distribution may commence less than thirty (30) days after the notice required under Regulation Section 1.411(a)-11(c) is given, provided that: 
 (1) the Plan Administrator clearly informs the Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of at least thirty (30) days after the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to
elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and 
 (2) the Participant, after receiving the
notice, affirmatively elects a distribution. 
 6.14 QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDER DISTRIBUTION 

All rights and benefits, including elections, provided to a Participant in this Plan shall be subject to the rights afforded to any
“alternate payee” under a “qualified domestic relations order.” Furthermore, a distribution to an “alternate payee” shall be permitted if such distribution is authorized by a “qualified domestic relations
order,” even if the affected Participant has not reached the “earliest retirement age” under the Plan. For the purposes of this Section, “alternate payee,” “qualified domestic relations order” and “earliest
retirement age” shall have the meanings set forth under Code Section 414(p). 
 6.15 DIRECT ROLLOVERS 

(a) Right to direct rollover. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a
“distributee’s” election under this Section effective with respect to distributions made after December 31, 2001, a “distributee” may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Administrator, to have an
“eligible rollover distribution” paid directly to an “eligible retirement plan” specified by the “distributee” in a “direct rollover.” However, if less than the entire amount of the “eligible rollover
distribution” is being paid directly to an “eligible retirement plan,” then the Administrator may require that the amount paid directly to such plan be at least $500. Furthermore, the Administrator may apply this Section by treating a
Participant’s Roth Elective Deferral Account separately from the Participant’s other Accounts. 
 (b)
Definitions. For purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply: 
 (1) An “eligible rollover
distribution” means any distribution described in Code Section 402(c)(4) and generally includes any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the “distributee,” except that an “eligible rollover
distribution” does not include: any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the “distributee” or the joint lives (or
joint life expectancies) of the “distributee” and the “distributee’s” “designated Beneficiary,” or for a specified period of ten (10) years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required
under Code Section 401(a)(9); any hardship distribution; the portion of any other distribution(s) that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer
securities); and any other distribution reasonably expected to total less than $200 during a year. 

Notwithstanding the above, a portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an “eligible rollover distribution”
merely because the portion consists of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions which are not includible in gross income. However, such portion may be transferred only to an individual retirement account or annuity described in Code
Section 408(a) or (b), or to a qualified defined contribution plan described in Code Section 401(a) or 403(a) that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred, including separately accounting for the portion of such
distribution which is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution which is not so includible. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 45 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (2) An “eligible retirement plan” is an individual retirement account
described in Code Section 408(a), an individual retirement annuity described in Code Section 408(b), (other than an endowment contract), a qualified trust (an employees’ trust) described in Code Section 401(a) which is exempt
from tax under Code Section 501(a), an annuity plan described in Code Section 403(a), an eligible plan under Code Section 457(b) which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a
state or political subdivision and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan, and an annuity contract described in Code Section 403(b), that accepts the “distributee’s”
“eligible rollover distribution.” However, in the case of an “eligible rollover distribution” to the surviving spouse, an “eligible retirement plan” is an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity.
The definition of “eligible retirement plan” shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving spouse, or to a spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in Code
Section 414(p). If any portion of an “eligible rollover distribution” is attributable to payments or distributions from a designated Roth account, an “eligible retirement plan” with respect to such portion shall include only
another designated Roth account of the individual from whose account the payments or distributions were made, or a Roth IRA of such individual. 
 (3) A “distributee” includes an Employee or former Employee. In addition, the Employee’s or former Employee’s surviving spouse and the Employee’s or former Employee’s spouse
or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a “qualified domestic relations order,” as defined in Code Section 414(p), are “distributees” with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse. 

(4) A “direct rollover” is a payment by the Plan to the “eligible retirement plan” specified by the
“distributee.” 
 (c) Participant notice. A Participant entitled to an “eligible rollover
distribution” must receive a written explanation of the right to a “direct rollover,” the tax consequences of not making a “direct rollover,” and, if applicable, any available special income tax elections. The notice must be
provided within the same 30 – 90 day timeframe applicable to the Participant consent notice. The “direct rollover” notice must be provided to all Participants, unless the total amount the Participant will receive as a distribution
during the calendar year is expected to be less than $200. 
 6.16 TRANSFER OF ASSETS FROM A MONEY PURCHASE PLAN 

Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, to the extent that any optional form of benefit under this Plan permits a
distribution prior to the Employee’s retirement, death, disability, or severance from employment, and prior to Plan termination, the optional form of benefit is not available with respect to benefits attributable to assets (including the
post-transfer earnings thereon) and liabilities that are transferred, within the meaning of Code Section 414(l), to this Plan from a money purchase pension plan qualified under Code Section 401(a) (other than any portion of those assets
and liabilities attributable to after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or to a direct or indirect rollover contribution). 
 6.17
CORRECTIVE DISTRIBUTIONS 
 Nothing in this Article shall preclude the Administrator from making a distribution to a
Participant, to the extent such distribution is made to correct a qualification defect in accordance with the corrective procedures under the IRS’ Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System or any other voluntary compliance programs.

 ARTICLE VII 
 TRUSTEE AND CUSTODIAN 
 7.1 BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TRUSTEE 

(a) The provisions of this Article, other than Section 7.6, shall not apply to this Plan if a separate trust agreement is being used.
Furthermore, the provisions of this Article, other than Sections 7.5 and 7.6, shall not apply if the Plan is fully insured. 

(b) The Trustee is accountable to the Employer for the funds contributed to the Plan by the Employer, but the Trustee does not have any
duty to see that the contributions received comply with the provisions of the Plan. The Trustee is not obligated to collect any contributions from the Employer, nor is it under a duty to see that funds deposited with it are deposited in accordance
with the provisions of the Plan. 
 (c) The Trustee will credit and distribute the Trust Fund as directed by the Administrator.
The Trustee is not obligated to inquire as to whether any payee or distributee is entitled to any payment or whether the distribution is proper or within the terms of the Plan, or whether the manner of making any payment or distribution is proper.
The Trustee is accountable only to the Administrator for any payment or distribution made by it in good faith on the order or direction of the Administrator. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 46 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (d) In the event that the Trustee shall be directed by a Participant (pursuant to the
Participant Direction Procedures if the Plan permits Participant directed investments), the Employer, or an Investment Manager or other agent appointed by the Employer with respect to the investment of any or all Plan assets, the Trustee shall have
no liability with respect to the investment of such assets, but shall be responsible only to execute such investment instructions as so directed. 
 (1) The Trustee shall be entitled to rely fully on the written (or other form acceptable to the Administrator and the Trustee, including but not limited to, voice recorded) instructions of a Participant
(pursuant to the Participant Direction Procedures), the Employer, or any Fiduciary or nonfiduciary agent of the Employer, in the discharge of such duties, and shall not be liable for any loss or other liability resulting from such direction (or lack
of direction) of the investment of any part of the Plan assets. 
 (2) The Trustee may delegate the duty of executing such
instructions to any nonfiduciary agent, which may be an affiliate of the Trustee or any Plan representative. 
 (3) The Trustee
may refuse to comply with any direction from the Participant in the event the Trustee, in its sole and absolute discretion, deems such direction improper by virtue of applicable law. The Trustee shall not be responsible or liable for any loss or
expense that may result from the Trustee’s refusal or failure to comply with any direction from the Participant. 
 (4) Any
costs and expenses related to compliance with the Participant’s directions shall be borne by the Participant’s Directed Account, unless paid by the Employer. 
 (5) Notwithstanding anything herein above to the contrary, the Trustee shall not invest any portion of a Participant’s Directed Account in “collectibles” within the meaning of Code
Section 408(m). 
 (e) The Trustee will maintain records of receipts and disbursements and furnish to the Employer and/or
Administrator for each Plan Year a written annual report pursuant to Section 7.9. 
 (f) The Trustee may employ a bank or
trust company pursuant to the terms of its usual and customary bank agency agreement, under which the duties of such bank or trust company shall be of a custodial, clerical and record-keeping nature. 

(g) The Trustee may employ and pay from the Trust Fund reasonable compensation to agents, attorneys, accountants and other persons to
advise the Trustee as in its opinion may be necessary. The Trustee may delegate to any agent, attorney, accountant or other person selected by it any non-Trustee power or duty vested in it by the Plan, and the Trustee may act or refrain from acting
on the advice or opinion of any such person. 
 7.2 INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF DISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE 

(a) This Section applies if the Employer, in the Adoption Agreement or as otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee,
designates the Trustee to administer all or a portion of the trust as a Discretionary Trustee. If so designated, then the Trustee has the discretion and authority to invest, manage, and control those Plan assets except, however, with respect to
those assets which are subject to the investment direction of a Participant (if Participant directed investments are permitted), or an Investment Manager, the Administrator, or other agent appointed by the Employer. The exercise of any investment
discretion hereunder shall be consistent with the “funding policy and method” determined by the Employer. 
 (b) The
Trustee shall, except as otherwise provided in this Plan, invest and reinvest the Trust Fund to keep the Trust Fund invested without distinction between principal and income and in such securities or property, real or personal, wherever situated, as
the Trustee shall deem advisable, including, but not limited to, common or preferred stocks, open-end or closed-end mutual funds, bonds and other evidences of indebtedness or ownership, and real estate or any interest therein. The Trustee shall at
all times in making investments of the Trust Fund consider, among other factors, the short and long-term financial needs of the Plan on the basis of information furnished by the Employer. In making such investments, the Trustee shall not be
restricted to securities or other property of the character expressly authorized by the applicable law for trust investments; however, the Trustee shall give due regard to any limitations imposed by the Code or the Act so that at all times this Plan
may qualify as a qualified Plan and Trust. The Trustee shall discharge its duties with respect to the Plan solely in the interest of the Participants and Beneficiaries and with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then
prevailing that a prudent person acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims. 
 (c) The Trustee, in addition to all powers and authorities under common law, statutory authority, including the Act, and other provisions of this Plan, shall have the following powers and authorities to
be exercised in the Trustee’s sole discretion: 
 (1) To purchase, or subscribe for, any securities or other property and to
retain the same. In conjunction with the purchase of securities, margin accounts may be opened and maintained; 
 (2) To sell,
exchange, convey, transfer, grant options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by the Trustee, by private contract or at public auction. No person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to see to the
application of the purchase money or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other disposition, with or without advertisement; 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 47 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (3) To vote upon any stocks, bonds, or other securities; to give general or special
proxies or powers of attorney with or without power of substitution; to exercise any conversion privileges, subscription rights or other options, and to make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise participate in,
corporate reorganizations or other changes affecting corporate securities, and to delegate discretionary powers, and to pay any assessments or charges in connection therewith; and generally to exercise any of the powers of an owner with respect to
stocks, bonds, securities, or other property; 
 (4) To cause any securities or other property to be registered in the
Trustee’s own name, or in the name of a nominee or in a street name provided such securities or other property are held on behalf of the Plan by (i) a bank or trust company, (ii) a broker or dealer registered under the Securities
Exchange Act of 1934, or a nominee of such broker or dealer, or (iii) a clearing agency as defined in Section 3(a)(23) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; 
 (5) To invest in a common, collective, or pooled trust fund (the provisions of which are incorporated herein by reference) maintained by any Trustee (or any affiliate of such Trustee) hereunder pursuant
to Revenue Ruling 81-100, all or such part of the Trust Fund as the Trustee may deem advisable, and the part of the Trust Fund so transferred shall be subject to all the terms and provisions of the common, collective, or pooled trust fund which
contemplate the commingling for investment purposes of such trust assets with trust assets of other trusts. The name of the trust fund may be specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections). The Trustee may withdraw
from such common, collective, or pooled trust fund all or such part of the Trust Fund as the Trustee may deem advisable; 
 (6)
To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Plan in such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as the Trustee shall deem advisable; and for any sum so borrowed, to issue a promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the repayment thereof by
pledging all, or any part, of the Trust Fund; and no person lending money to the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the money lent or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any borrowing; 

(7) To accept and retain for such time as it may deem advisable any securities or other property received or acquired by it as Trustee
hereunder, whether or not such securities or other property would normally be purchased as investments hereunder; 
 (8) To make,
execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all documents of transfer and conveyance and any and all other instruments that may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the powers herein granted; 

(9) To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration (provided such arbitration does not apply to Participants or Beneficiaries) any
claims, debts, or damages due or owing to or from the Plan, to commence or defend suits or legal or administrative proceedings, and to represent the Plan in all suits and legal and administrative proceedings; 

(10) To employ suitable agents and counsel and to pay their reasonable expenses and compensation, and such agents or counsel may or may
not be an agent or counsel for the Employer; 
 (11) To apply for and procure from the Insurer as an investment of the Trust Fund
any annuity or other Contracts (on the life of any Participant, or in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), on the life of any person in whom a Participant has an insurable interest, or on the joint lives of a Participant and
any person in whom the Participant has an insurable interest) as the Administrator shall deem proper; to exercise, at any time or from time to time, whatever rights and privileges may be granted under such annuity, or other Contracts; to collect,
receive, and settle for the proceeds of all such annuity, or other Contracts as and when entitled to do so under the provisions thereof; 
 (12) To invest funds of the Trust in time deposits or savings accounts bearing a reasonable rate of interest or in cash or cash balances without liability for interest thereon, including the specific
authority to invest in any type of deposit of the Trustee (or of a financial institution related to the Trustee); 
 (13) To
invest in Treasury Bills and other forms of United States government obligations; 
 (14) To sell, purchase and acquire put or
call options if the options are traded on and purchased through a national securities exchange registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or, if the options are not traded on a national securities exchange, are guaranteed by a
member firm of the New York Stock Exchange regardless of whether such options are covered; 
 (15) To deposit monies in federally
insured savings accounts or certificates of deposit in banks or savings and loan associations including the specific authority to make deposit into any savings accounts or certificates of deposit of the Trustee (or a financial institution related to
the Trustee); 
 (16) To pool all or any of the Trust Fund, from time to time, with assets belonging to any other qualified
employee pension benefit trust created by the Employer or any Affiliated Employer, and to commingle such assets and make joint or common investments and carry joint accounts on behalf of this Plan and Trust and such other trust or trusts, allocating
undivided shares or interests in such investments or accounts or any pooled assets of the two or more trusts in accordance with their respective interests; and 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 48 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (17) To do all such acts and exercise all such rights and privileges, although not
specifically mentioned herein, as the Trustee may deem necessary to carry out the purposes of the Plan. 
 (d) The Trustee may
appoint, at its option, an Investment Manager, investment adviser, or other agent to provide direction to the Trustee with respect to the investment of any or all of the Plan assets. Such appointment shall be in writing and shall specifically
identify the Plan assets with respect to which the Investment Manager or other agent shall have the authority to direct the investment. 

7.3 INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF NONDISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE 
 (a) This Section applies if the Employer, in the Adoption Agreement or as otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee, designates the Trustee to administer all or a portion of the trust as a
nondiscretionary Trustee. If so designated, then the Trustee shall have no discretionary authority to invest, manage, or control those Plan assets, but must act solely as a Directed Trustee of those Plan assets. A nondiscretionary Trustee, as
Directed Trustee of the Plan funds it holds, is authorized and empowered, by way of limitation, with the powers, rights and duties set forth herein and in Section 7.14, each of which the nondiscretionary Trustee exercises solely as Directed
Trustee in accordance with the direction of the party which has the authority to manage and control the investment of the Plan assets. If no directions are provided to the Trustee, the Employer will provide necessary direction. Furthermore, the
Employer and the nondiscretionary Trustee may, in writing, limit the powers of the nondiscretionary Trustee to any combination of powers listed within this Section. The party which has the authority to manage and control the investment of the Plan
assets shall discharge its duties with respect to the Plan solely in the interest of the Participants and Beneficiaries and with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent person acting in a like
capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims. 
 (b)
The Trustee, in addition to all powers and authorities under common law, statutory authority, including the Act, and other provisions of this Plan, shall have the following powers and authorities: 

(1) To invest the assets, without distinction between principal and income, in securities or property, real or personal, wherever
situated, including, but not limited to, common or preferred stocks, open-end or closed-end mutual funds, bonds and other evidences of indebtedness or ownership, and real estate or any interest therein. In making such investments, the Trustee shall
not be restricted to securities or other property of the character expressly authorized by the applicable law for trust investments; however, the Trustee shall give due regard to any limitations imposed by the Code or the Act so that at all times
this Plan may qualify as a qualified Plan and Trust; 
 (2) To purchase, or subscribe for, any securities or other property and
to retain the same. In conjunction with the purchase of securities, margin accounts may be opened and maintained; 
 (3) To sell,
exchange, convey, transfer, grant options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by the Trustee, by private contract or at public auction. No person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to see to the
application of the purchase money or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other disposition, with or without advertisement; 
 (4) At the direction of the party which has the authority or discretion, to vote upon any stocks, bonds, or other securities; to give general or special proxies or powers of attorney with or without power
of substitution; to exercise any conversion privileges, subscription rights or other options, and to make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise participate in, corporate reorganizations or other changes affecting
corporate securities, and to delegate powers, and pay any assessments or charges in connection therewith; and generally to exercise any of the powers of an owner with respect to stocks, bonds, securities, or other property; 

(5) To cause any securities or other property to be registered in the Trustee’s own name, or in the name of a nominee or in a street
name provided such securities or other property are held on behalf of the Plan by (i) a bank or trust company, (ii) a broker or dealer registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or a nominee of such broker or dealer, or
(iii) a clearing agency as defined in Section 3(a)(23) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; 
 (6) To invest in a
common, collective, or pooled trust fund (the provisions of which are incorporated herein by reference) maintained by any Trustee (or any affiliate of such Trustee) hereunder pursuant to Revenue Ruling 81-100, all or such part of the Trust Fund as
the party which has the authority to manage and control the investment of the assets shall deem advisable, and the part of the Trust Fund so transferred shall be subject to all the terms and provisions of the common, collective, or pooled trust fund
which contemplate the commingling for investment purposes of such trust assets with trust assets of other trusts. The name of the trust fund may be specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections); 

(7) To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Plan in such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as the Trustee shall deem
advisable; and for any sum so borrowed, to issue a promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the repayment thereof by pledging all, or any part, of the Trust Fund; and no person lending money to the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application
of the money lent or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any borrowing; 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 49 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (8) To make, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all documents of transfer and
conveyance and any and all other instruments that may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the powers herein granted; 
 (9)
To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration (provided such arbitration does not apply to Participants or Beneficiaries) any claims, debts, or damages due or owing to or from the Plan, to commence or defend suits or legal or administrative
proceedings, and to represent the Plan in all suits and legal and administrative proceedings; 
 (10) To employ suitable agents
and counsel and to pay their reasonable expenses and compensation, and such agent or counsel may or may not be an agent or counsel for the Employer; 
 (11) To apply for and procure from the Insurer as an investment of the Trust Fund any annuity or other Contracts (on the life of any Participant, or in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a
401(k) Plan), on the life of any person in whom a Participant has an insurable interest, or on the joint lives of a Participant and any person in whom the Participant has an insurable interest) as the Administrator shall deem proper; to exercise, at
the direction of the person with the authority to do so, whatever rights and privileges may be granted under such annuity or other Contracts; to collect, receive, and settle for the proceeds of all such annuity or other Contracts as and when
entitled to do so under the provisions thereof; 
 (12) To invest funds of the Trust in time deposits or savings accounts bearing
a reasonable rate of interest or in cash or cash balances without liability for interest thereon, including the specific authority to invest in any type of deposit of the Trustee (or of a financial institution related to the Trustee); 

(13) To invest in Treasury Bills and other forms of United States government obligations; 

(14) To sell, purchase and acquire put or call options if the options are traded on and purchased through a national securities exchange
registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or, if the options are not traded on a national securities exchange, are guaranteed by a member firm of the New York Stock Exchange regardless of whether such options are covered;

 (15) To deposit monies in federally insured savings accounts or certificates of deposit in banks or savings and loan
associations including the specific authority to make deposit into any savings accounts or certificates of deposit of the Trustee (or a financial institution related to the Trustee); and 

(16) To pool all or any of the Trust Fund, from time to time, with assets belonging to any other qualified employee pension benefit trust
created by the Employer or any Affiliated Employer, and to commingle such assets and make joint or common investments and carry joint accounts on behalf of this Plan and such other trust or trusts, allocating undivided shares or interests in such
investments or accounts or any pooled assets of the two or more trusts in accordance with their respective interests. 
 7.4 POWERS AND
DUTIES OF CUSTODIAN 
 The Employer may appoint a custodian of the Plan assets. A custodian has the same powers, rights and
duties as a nondiscretionary Trustee. Any reference in the Plan to a Trustee also is a reference to a custodian unless the context of the Plan indicates otherwise. A limitation of the Trustee’s liability by Plan provision also acts as a
limitation of the Custodian’s liability. The Custodian will be protected from any liability with respect to actions taken pursuant to the direction of the Trustee, Plan Administrator, the Employer, an Investment Manager, a named Fiduciary or
other third party with authority to provide direction to the Custodian. The resignation or removal of the Custodian shall be made in accordance with Section 7.11 as though the Custodian were a Trustee. 

7.5 LIFE INSURANCE 
 (a)
Permitted insurance. The Trustee (or Insurer), in accordance with nondiscriminatory operational procedures of the Administrator, shall ratably apply for, own, and pay all premiums on Contracts on the lives of the Participants or, in the case
of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), on the life of a member of the Participant’s family or on the joint lives of a Participant and a member of the Participant’s family. Any initial or additional Contract purchased on behalf
of a Participant shall have a face amount of not less than $1,000, an amount set forth in the Administrator’s procedures, or the limitation of the Insurer, whichever is greater. If a life insurance Contract is to be purchased for a Participant,
then the aggregate premium for ordinary life insurance for each Participant must be less than 50% of the aggregate contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account. For purposes of this limitation, ordinary life
insurance Contracts are Contracts with both non-decreasing death benefits and non-increasing premiums. If term insurance or universal life insurance is purchased, then the aggregate premium must be 25% or less of the aggregate contributions and
Forfeitures allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account. If both term insurance and ordinary life insurance are purchased, then the premium for term insurance plus one-half of the premium for ordinary life insurance may not in the aggregate
exceed 25% of the aggregate Employer contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant’s Combined Account. Notwithstanding the preceding, the limitations imposed herein with respect to the purchase of life insurance shall not apply, in
the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), to the portion of the Participant’s Account that has accumulated for at least two (2) Plan Years or to the entire Participant’s Account if the Participant has been a
Participant in the Plan for at least five (5) years. In addition, amounts transferred to this Plan in accordance with Section 4.6(f)(1)(ii) or (iii) and a Participant’s Voluntary Contribution Account may be used to purchase
Contracts without limitation. Thus, amounts that are not subject to the limitations contained herein 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 50 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
may be used to purchase life insurance on any person in whom a Participant has an insurable interest or on the joint lives of a Participant and any person in whom the Participant has an insurable
interest, and without regard to the amount of premiums paid to purchase any life insurance hereunder. 
 (b) Contract
conversion at retirement. Subject to the survivor annuity requirements of Sections 6.5 and 6.6 (if applicable), the Trustee (or Insurer) must distribute the Contracts to the Participant or convert the entire value of the Contracts at or before
retirement into cash or provide for a periodic income so that no portion of such value may be used to continue life insurance protection beyond the date on which benefits commence. Furthermore, if a Contract is purchased on the joint lives of the
Participant and another person and such other person predeceases the Participant, then the Contract may not be maintained under this Plan. 
 (c) Limitations on purchase. Notwithstanding anything herein above to the contrary, amounts credited to a Participant’s Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account pursuant to
Section 4.9, shall not be applied to the purchase of life insurance Contracts. Furthermore, no life insurance Contracts shall be required to be obtained on an individual’s life if, for any reason (other than the nonpayment of premiums) the
Insurer will not issue a Contract on such individual’s life. 
 (d) Proceeds payable to plan. The Trustee (or
Insurer) will be the owner of any life insurance Contract purchased under the terms of this Plan. The Contract must provide that the proceeds will be payable to the Trustee (or Insurer); however, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall be required to pay
over all proceeds of the Contract to the Participant’s “designated Beneficiary” in accordance with the distribution provisions of Article VI. A Participant’s spouse will be the “designated Beneficiary” pursuant to
Section 6.2, unless a qualified election has been made in accordance with Sections 6.5 and 6.6 of the Plan, if applicable. Under no circumstances shall the Trust retain any part of the proceeds that are in excess of the cash surrender value
immediately prior to death. However, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall not pay the proceeds in a method that would violate the requirements of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, as stated in Article VI of the Plan, or Code Section 401(a)(9) and
the Regulations thereunder. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms of any insurance Contract purchased hereunder, the Plan provisions shall control. 

(e) No responsibility for Act of Insurer. The Employer, the Administrator and the Trustee shall not be responsible for the validity
of the provisions under a Contract issued hereunder or for the failure or refusal by the Insurer to provide benefits under such Contract. The Employer, Plan Administrator and the Trustee are also not responsible for any action or failure to act by
the Insurer or any other person which results in the delay of a payment under the Contract or which renders the Contract invalid or unenforceable in whole or in part. 
 7.6 LOANS TO PARTICIPANTS 
 (a) Permitted Loans. The Trustee (or the
Administrator if the Trustee is a nondiscretionary Trustee or if loans are treated as Participant directed investments) may, in the Trustee’s (or, if applicable, the Administrator’s) sole discretion, make loans to Participants or
Beneficiaries. If loans are permitted, then the following shall apply: (1) loans shall be made available to all Participants and Beneficiaries on a reasonably equivalent basis; (2) loans shall not be made available to Highly Compensated
Employees in an amount greater than the amount made available to other Participants; (3) loans shall bear a reasonable rate of interest; (4) loans shall be adequately secured; and (5) loans shall provide for periodic repayment over a
reasonable period of time. Furthermore, no Participant loan shall exceed the Participant’s Vested interest in the Plan. 

(b) Plan loans for Owner-Employees or Shareholder-Employees. Effective for Plan loans made after December 31, 2001, the Plan
provisions prohibiting loans to any Owner-Employee or Shareholder-Employee shall cease to apply. 
 (c) Prohibited assignment
or pledge. An assignment or pledge of any portion of a Participant’s interest in the Plan and a loan, pledge, or assignment with respect to any insurance Contract purchased under the Plan, shall be treated as a loan under this Section.

 (d) Spousal consent. If the Vested interest of a Participant is used to secure any loan made pursuant to this Section,
then the written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) consent of the Participant’s spouse shall be required in a manner consistent with Section 6.5(a), provided the spousal consent requirements of such Section apply to the Plan.
Such consent must be obtained within the 90-day period prior to the date the loan is made. A new consent shall be required if the Vested interest of a Participant is used for renegotiation, extension, renewal or other revision of the loan. However,
unless the loan program established pursuant to this Section provides otherwise, no spousal consent shall be required under this paragraph if the total interest subject to the security is not in excess of $5,000. If a valid spousal consent has been
obtained in accordance with this Subsection, then, notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, the portion of the Participant’s Vested Account Balance used as a security interest held by the Plan by reason of a loan outstanding to the
Participant shall be taken into account for purposes of determining the amount of the Account balance payable at the time of death or distribution, but only if the reduction is used as repayment of the loan. If less than 100% of the
Participant’s Vested Account balance (determined without regard to the preceding sentence) is payable to the surviving spouse, then the Account balance shall be adjusted by first reducing the Vested Account balance by the amount of the security
used as repayment of the loan, and then determining the benefit payable to the surviving spouse. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 51 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (e) Loan program. The Administrator shall be authorized to establish a
participant loan program to provide for loans under the Plan. The loan program shall be established in accordance with Department of Labor regulation Section 2550.408(b)-1(d)(2) providing for loans by the Plan to parties-in-interest under said
Plan, such as Participants or Beneficiaries. In order for the Administrator to implement such loan program, a separate written document forming a part of this Plan must be adopted, which document shall specifically include, but need not be limited
to, the following: 
 (1) the identity of the person or positions authorized to administer the Participant loan program;

 (2) a procedure for applying for loans; 
 (3) the basis on which loans will be approved or denied; 

(4) limitations, if any, on the types and amounts of loans offered; 

(5) the procedure under the program for determining a reasonable rate of interest; 

(6) the types of collateral which may secure a Participant loan; and 

(7) the events constituting default and the steps that will be taken to preserve Plan assets in the event such default. 

(f) Loan default. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if a Participant or Beneficiary defaults on a loan made
pursuant to this Section that is secured by the Participant’s interest in the Plan, then a Participant’s interest may be offset by the amount subject to the security to the extent there is a distributable event permitted by the Code or
Regulations. 
 (g) Loans subject to Plan terms. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, if this is an
amendment and restatement of an existing Plan, any loans made prior to the date this amendment and restatement is adopted shall be subject to the terms of the Plan in effect at the time such loan was made. 

7.7 ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES 
 If there is more than one Trustee, then the responsibilities of each Trustee may be specified by the Employer and accepted in writing by each Trustee. If no such delegation is made by the Employer, then
the Trustees may allocate the responsibilities among themselves, in which event the Trustees shall notify the Employer and the Administrator in writing of such action and specify the responsibilities of each Trustee. Except where there has been an
allocation and delegation of powers, if there shall be more than one Trustee, they shall act by a majority of their number, but may authorize one or more of them to sign papers on their behalf. 

7.8 TRUSTEE’S COMPENSATION AND EXPENSES AND TAXES 
 The Trustee shall be paid such reasonable compensation as set forth in the Trustee’s fee schedule (if the Trustee has such a schedule) or as agreed upon in writing by the Employer and the Trustee.
However, an individual serving as Trustee who already receives full-time compensation from the Employer shall not receive compensation from this Plan. In addition, the Trustee shall be reimbursed for any reasonable expenses, including reasonable
counsel fees incurred by it as Trustee. Such compensation and expenses shall be paid from the Trust Fund unless paid or advanced by the Employer. All taxes of any kind whatsoever that may be levied or assessed under existing or future laws upon, or
in respect of, the Trust Fund or the income thereof, shall be paid from the Trust Fund. 
 7.9 ANNUAL REPORT OF THE TRUSTEE 

(a) Annual report. Within a reasonable period of time after the later of the Anniversary Date or receipt of the Employer’s
contribution for each Plan Year, the Trustee, or its agent, shall furnish to the Employer and Administrator a written statement of account with respect to the Plan Year for which such contribution was made setting forth: 

(1) the net income, or loss, of the Trust Fund; 
 (2) the gains, or losses, realized by the Trust Fund upon sales or other disposition of the assets; 
 (3) the increase, or decrease, in the value of the Trust Fund; 
 (4) all
payments and distributions made from the Trust Fund; and 
 (5) such further information as the Trustee and/or Administrator
deems appropriate. 
 (b) Employer approval of report. The Employer, promptly upon its receipt of each such statement of
account, shall acknowledge receipt thereof in writing and advise the Trustee and/or Administrator of its approval or disapproval thereof. Failure by the Employer to disapprove any such statement of account within thirty (30) days after its
receipt thereof shall be deemed an approval thereof. The approval by the Employer of any statement of account shall be binding on the Employer and the Trustee as to all matters contained in 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 52 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
the statement to the same extent as if the account of the Trustee had been settled by judgment or decree in an action for a judicial settlement of its account in a court of competent jurisdiction
in which the Trustee, the Employer and all persons having or claiming an interest in the Plan were parties. However, nothing contained in this Section shall deprive the Trustee of its right to have its accounts judicially settled if the Trustee so
desires. 
 7.10 AUDIT 
 (a) Duty to engage accountant. If an audit of the Plan’s records shall be required by the Act and the regulations thereunder for any Plan Year, the Administrator shall engage on behalf of all
Participants an independent qualified public accountant for that purpose. Such accountant shall, after an audit of the books and records of the Plan in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards, within a reasonable period after the close
of the Plan Year, furnish to the Administrator and the Trustee a report of the audit setting forth the accountant’s opinion as to whether any statements, schedules or lists, that are required by Act Section 103 or the Secretary of Labor to
be filed with the Plan’s annual report, are presented fairly in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles applied consistently. 
 (b) Payment of fees. All auditing and accounting fees shall be an expense of and may, at the election of the Employer, be paid from the Trust Fund. 

(c) Information to be provided to Administrator. If some or all of the information necessary to enable the Administrator to comply
with Act Section 103 is maintained by a bank, insurance company, or similar institution, regulated, supervised, and subject to periodic examination by a state or federal agency, then it shall transmit and certify the accuracy of that
information to the Administrator as provided in Act Section 103(b) within one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of the Plan Year or such other date as may be prescribed under regulations of the Secretary of Labor. 

7.11 RESIGNATION, REMOVAL AND SUCCESSION OF TRUSTEE 
 (a) Trustee resignation. Unless otherwise agreed to by both the Trustee and the Employer, a Trustee may resign at any time by delivering to the Employer, at least thirty (30) days before its
effective date, a written notice of resignation. 
 (b) Trustee removal. Unless otherwise agreed to by both the Trustee
and the Employer, the Employer may remove a Trustee at any time by delivering to the Trustee, at least thirty (30) days before its effective date, a written notice of such Trustee’s removal. 

(c) Appointment of successor. Upon the death, resignation, incapacity, or removal of any Trustee, a successor may be appointed by
the Employer; and such successor, upon accepting such appointment in writing and delivering same to the Employer, shall, without further act, become vested with all the powers and responsibilities of the predecessor as if such successor had been
originally named as a Trustee herein. Until such a successor is appointed, any remaining Trustee or Trustees shall have full authority to act under the terms of the Plan. 
 (d) Appointment of successor prior to removal of predecessor. The Employer may designate one or more successors prior to the death, resignation, incapacity, or removal of a Trustee. In the event a
successor is so designated by the Employer and accepts such designation, the successor shall, without further act, become vested with all the powers and responsibilities of the predecessor as if such successor had been originally named as Trustee
herein immediately upon the death, resignation, incapacity, or removal of the predecessor. 
 (e) Trustee’s statement
upon cessation of being Trustee. Whenever any Trustee hereunder ceases to serve as such, the Trustee shall furnish to the Employer and Administrator a written statement of account with respect to the portion of the Plan Year during which the
individual or entity served as Trustee. This statement shall be either (i) included as part of the annual statement of account for the Plan Year required under Section 7.9 or (ii) set forth in a special statement. Any such special
statement of account should be rendered to the Employer no later than the due date of the annual statement of account for the Plan Year. The procedures set forth in Section 7.9 for the approval by the Employer of annual statements of account
shall apply to any special statement of account rendered hereunder and approval by the Employer of any such special statement in the manner provided in Section 7.9 shall have the same effect upon the statement as the Employer’s approval of
an annual statement of account. No successor to the Trustee shall have any duty or responsibility to investigate the acts or transactions of any predecessor who has rendered all statements of account required by Section 7.9 and this
subparagraph. 
 7.12 TRANSFER OF INTEREST 
 Notwithstanding any other provision contained in this Plan, the Trustee at the direction of the Administrator shall transfer the interest, if any, of a Participant to another trust forming part of a
pension, profit sharing, or stock bonus plan that meets the requirements of Code Section 401(a), provided that the trust to which such transfers are made permits the transfer to be made. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 53 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 7.13 TRUSTEE INDEMNIFICATION 

The Employer agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Trustee against any and all claims, losses, damages, expenses and liabilities the
Trustee may incur in the exercise and performance of the Trustee’s powers and duties hereunder, unless the same are determined to be due to gross negligence or willful misconduct. 
 7.14 EMPLOYER SECURITIES AND REAL PROPERTY 
 The Trustee shall be empowered
to acquire and hold “qualifying employer securities” and “qualifying employer real property,” as those terms are defined in the Act. However, no more than one hundred percent (100%), in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k)
Plan, or ten percent (10%), in the case of a Money Purchase Plan, of the fair market value of all the assets in the Trust Fund may be invested in “qualifying employer securities” and “qualifying employer real property.”

 Any such investment shall only be made upon written direction of the Employer who shall be solely responsible for the
propriety of such investment, except to the extent Participants direct the investment of their Accounts in such investment. Additional directives regarding the purchase, sale, or retention of such securities may be addressed in a funding policy,
statement of investment policy, or other separate procedures or documents governing the investment of Plan assets. In the event of any conflicts between the Plan document and a separate investment trust agreement, the Plan document shall prevail.

 Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Plan does not permit Participants to direct the investment of their Elective Deferral
Accounts, then the Trustee shall only be permitted to acquire or hold “qualifying employer securities” and “qualifying employer real property” to the extent permitted under Act Section 407. 

ARTICLE VIII 
 AMENDMENT, TERMINATION AND MERGERS 
 8.1 AMENDMENT 

(a) General rule on Employer amendment. The Employer shall have the right at any time to amend this Plan subject to the limitations
of this Section. However, any amendment that affects the rights, duties or responsibilities of the Trustee (or Insurer) or Administrator may only be made with the Trustee’s (or Insurer’s) or Administrator’s written consent. Any such
amendment shall become effective as provided therein upon its execution. The Trustee (or Insurer) shall not be required to execute any such amendment unless the amendment affects the duties of the Trustee (or Insurer) hereunder. 

(b) Permissible amendments. The Employer may (1) change the choice of options in the Adoption Agreement, (2) add any
appendix to the Adoption Agreement that is specifically permitted pursuant to the terms of the Plan (e.g., Appendix A (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections); (3) amend administrative trust or custodial provisions; (4) add
certain sample or model amendments published by the Internal Revenue Service or other required good-faith amendments which specifically provide that their adoption will not cause the Plan to be treated as an individually designed plan, (5) add
or change provisions permitted under the Plan and/or specify or change the effective date of a provision as permitted under the Plan and correct obvious and unambiguous typographical errors and/or cross-references that merely correct a reference but
that do not in any way change the original intended meaning of the provisions and (6) add a list of any “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits” which must be preserved shall not be considered an amendment to the Plan. An Employer that
amends the Plan for any other reason, including a waiver of the minimum funding requirement under Code Section 412(d), will no longer participate in this Volume Submitter Plan and this Plan will be considered to be an individually designed
plan. 
 (c) Sponsoring organization amendments. The Employer (and every Participating Employer) expressly delegates
authority to the sponsoring organization of this Volume Submitter Plan, the right to amend the Plan by submitting a copy of the amendment to each Employer (and Participating Employer) who has adopted this Volume Submitter Plan, after first having
received a ruling or favorable determination from the Internal Revenue Service that the Volume Submitter Plan as amended qualifies under Code Section 401(a) (unless a ruling or determination is not required by the IRS). For purposes of this
Section, the mass submitter shall be recognized as the agent of the sponsor. If the sponsor does not adopt any amendment made by the mass submitter, it will no longer be identical to, or a minor modifier of, the mass submitter plan. 

(d) Impermissible amendments. No amendment to the Plan shall be effective if it authorizes or permits any part of the Trust Fund
(other than such part as is required to pay taxes and administration expenses) to be used for or diverted to any purpose other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries or estates; or causes any reduction in the
amount credited to the account of any Participant; or causes or permits any portion of the Trust Fund to revert to or become property of the Employer. 
 (e) Anti-cutback restrictions. Except as permitted by Regulations (including Regulation Section 1.411(d)-4) or other IRS guidance, no Plan amendment or transaction having the effect of a Plan
amendment (such as a merger, plan transfer or similar transaction) shall be effective if it eliminates or reduces any “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefit” or adds or modifies conditions relating to “Section 411(d)(6) protected
benefits” which results in a further restriction on such benefits unless such “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits” are preserved with respect to benefits accrued as of the later of the adoption date or effective date of the
amendment. “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits” are benefits described in Code Section 411(d)(6)(A), early retirement benefits and retirement-type 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 54 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
subsidies, and optional forms of benefit. The preceding shall not apply to a Plan amendment that eliminates or restricts the ability of a Participant to receive payment of his or her Account
under a particular optional form of benefit if the amendment provides a single-sum distribution form that is otherwise identical to the optional form of benefit being eliminated or restricted. For this purpose, a single-sum distribution form is
otherwise identical only if the single-sum distribution form is identical in all respects to the eliminated or restricted optional form of benefit (or would be identical except that it provides greater rights to the Participant) except with respect
to the timing of payments after commencement. 
 8.2 TERMINATION 
 (a) Termination of Plan. The Employer shall have the right at any time to terminate the Plan by delivering to the Trustee (or Insurer) and Administrator written notice of such termination. Upon any
full or partial termination or upon the complete discontinuance of the Employer’s Contributions to the Plan (in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan), all amounts credited to the affected Participants’ Combined Accounts shall become 100%
Vested and shall not thereafter be subject to forfeiture. 
 (b) Distribution of assets. Upon the full termination of the
Plan, the Employer shall direct the distribution of the assets to 
 Participants in a manner that is consistent with and
satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, except that no Participant or spousal consent is required. Distributions to a Participant shall be made in cash (or in property if permitted in the Adoption Agreement) or through the purchase of
irrevocable nontransferable deferred commitments from the Insurer. Except as permitted by Regulations, the termination of the Plan shall not result in the reduction of “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits” as described in
Section 8.1(e). 
 (c) Abandoned plan. If the Employer, in accordance with DOL guidance, abandons the Plan, then the
Trustee (or Insurer) or other party permitted to take action as a qualified terminal administrator (QTA), may terminate the Plan in accordance with applicable DOL and IRS regulations and other guidance. 

8.3 MERGER, CONSOLIDATION OR TRANSFER OF ASSETS 
 This Plan may be merged or consolidated with, or its assets and/or liabilities may be transferred to any other plan only if the benefits which would be received by a Participant of this Plan, in the event
of a termination of the plan immediately after such transfer, merger or consolidation, are at least equal to the benefits the Participant would have received if the Plan had terminated immediately before the transfer, merger or consolidation and
such transfer, merger or consolidation does not otherwise result in the elimination or reduction of any “Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits” as described in Section 8.1(e). 

ARTICLE IX 

TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS 

9.1 TOP-HEAVY PLAN REQUIREMENTS 
 Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, for any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the Plan shall provide the special vesting requirements of Code Section 416(b) pursuant to Section 6.4 of the
Plan and the special minimum allocation requirements of Code Section 416(c) pursuant to Section 4.3(f) of the Plan. Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, the minimum allocation shall be an Employer Nonelective Contribution and, if no
vesting schedule has been selected in the Adoption Agreement or the selection is invalid, shall be subject to the 6 Year Graded vesting schedule described in the Adoption Agreement. 

Notwithstanding the above, the Top-Heavy Plan Year requirements of this Article and Code Section 416 shall not apply in any Plan
Year in which the Plan consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Code Section 401(k)(12) and matching contributions meet the requirements of Code Section 401(m)(11). 

9.2 DETERMINATION OF TOP-HEAVY STATUS 
 (a) Definition of Top-Heavy Plan. This Plan shall be a Top-Heavy Plan if any of the following conditions exists: 
 (1) if the “top-heavy ratio” for this Plan exceeds sixty percent (60%) and this Plan is not part of any “required aggregation group” or “permissive aggregation group”;

 (2) if this Plan is a part of a “required aggregation group” but not part of a “permissive aggregation
group” and the “top-heavy ratio” for the group of plans exceeds sixty percent (60%); or 
 (3) if this Plan is a
part of a “required aggregation group” and part of a “permissive aggregation group” and the “top-heavy ratio” for the “permissive aggregation group” exceeds sixty percent (60%). 

(b) Top-heavy ratio. “Top-heavy ratio” means, with respect to a “determination date”: 

(1) If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan (as defined in Code
Section 408(k))) and the Employer has not maintained any defined benefit plan which during the 5-year period 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 55 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
ending on the “determination date” has or has had accrued benefits, the top-heavy ratio for this Plan alone or for the “required aggregation group” or “permissive
aggregation group” as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the account balances of all Key Employees as of the “determination date” (including any part of any account balance distributed in the 1-year period
ending on the “determination date”) (5-year period ending on the “determination date” in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability and in determining whether the Plan
is top-heavy for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2002), and the denominator of which is the sum of all account balances (including any part of any account balance distributed in the 1-year period ending on the “determination
date”) (5-year period ending on the “determination date” in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability and in determining whether the Plan is top-heavy for Plan Years
beginning before January 1, 2002), both computed in accordance with Code Section 416 and the Regulations thereunder. 
 Both the numerator and denominator of the top-heavy ratio are increased to reflect any contribution not actually made as of the “determination date,” but which is required to be taken into
account on that date under Code Section 416 and the Regulations thereunder. 
 (2) If the Employer maintains one or more
defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan) and the Employer maintains or has maintained one or more defined benefit plans which during the 1-year period ending on the “determination date” has or has had any
accrued benefits, the top-heavy ratio for any “required aggregation group” or “permissive aggregation group” as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of account balances under the aggregated defined
contribution plan or plans for all Key Employees, determined in accordance with (1) above, and the “present value” of accrued benefits under the aggregated defined benefit plan or plans for all Key Employees as of the
“determination date,” and the denominator of which is the sum of the account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all participants, determined in accordance with (1) above, and the “present
value” of accrued benefits under the defined benefit plan or plans for all participants as of the “determination date,” all determined in accordance with Code Section 416 and the Regulations thereunder. The accrued benefits under
a defined benefit plan in both the numerator and denominator of the top-heavy ratio are increased for any distribution of an accrued benefit made in the 1-year period ending on the “determination date” (5-year period ending on the
“determination date” in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or disability and in determining whether the Plan is top-heavy for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2002).

 (3) For purposes of (1) and (2) above, the value of account balances and the “present value” of accrued
benefits will be determined as of the most recent Valuation Date that falls within or ends with the 12-month period ending on the “determination date,” except as provided in Code Section 416 and the Regulations thereunder for the
first and second plan years of a defined benefit plan. The account balances and accrued benefits of a participant (i) who is not a Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior year, or (ii) who has not been credited with at least one
Hour of Service with any Employer maintaining the plan at any time during the 1-year period (5-year period in determining whether the Plan is top-heavy for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2002) ending on the “determination
date” will be disregarded. The calculation of the top-heavy ratio, and the extent to which distributions, rollovers, and transfers are taken into account will be made in accordance with Code Section 416 and the Regulations thereunder.
Deductible Employee contributions will not be taken into account for purposes of computing the top-heavy ratio. When aggregating plans the value of account balances and accrued benefits will be calculated with reference to the “determination
dates” that fall within the same calendar year. 
 The accrued benefit of a participant other than a Key
Employee shall be determined under (i) the method, if any, that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans maintained by the Employer, or (ii) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more
rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of Code Section 411(b)(1)(C). 
 (c)
Determination date. “Determination date” means, for any Plan Year subsequent to the first Plan Year, the last day of the preceding Plan Year. For the first Plan Year of the Plan, “determination date” means the last day of
that Plan Year. 
 (d) Permissive aggregation group. “Permissive aggregation group” means the “required
aggregation group” of plans plus any other plan or plans of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer which, when considered as a group with the “required aggregation group,” would continue to satisfy the requirements of Code Sections
401(a)(4) and 410. 
 (e) Present value. “Present value” means the present value based only on the interest and
mortality rates specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement. 
 (f) Required aggregation group. “Required
aggregation group” means: (1) each qualified plan of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer in which at least one Key Employee participates or participated at any time during the Plan Year containing the “determination date” or
any of the four preceding Plan Years (regardless of whether the plan has terminated), and (2) any other qualified plan of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer which enables a plan described in (l) to meet the requirements of Code
Sections 401(a)(4) or 410. 
 (g) Valuation Date. “Valuation date” means the date elected by the Employer in the
Adoption Agreement as of which account balances or accrued benefits are valued for purposes of calculating the “top-heavy ratio.” 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 56 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 ARTICLE X 
 MISCELLANEOUS 
 10.1 EMPLOYER ADOPTIONS 

(a) Method of adoption. Any organization may become the Employer hereunder by executing the Adoption Agreement in a form
satisfactory to the Trustee (or Insurer), and it shall provide such additional information as the Trustee (or Insurer) may require. The consent of the Trustee (or Insurer) to act as such shall be signified by its execution of the Adoption Agreement
or a separate agreement (including, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, a separate trust agreement). 
 (b) Separate
affiliation. Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, the affiliation of the Employer and the participation of its Participants shall be separate and apart from that of any other employer and its participants hereunder. 

10.2 PARTICIPANT’S RIGHTS 
 This Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract between the Employer and any Participant or to be a consideration or an inducement for the employment of any Participant or Employee. Nothing
contained in this Plan shall be deemed to give any Participant or Employee the right to be retained in the service of the Employer or to interfere with the right of the Employer to discharge any Participant or Employee at any time regardless of the
effect which such discharge shall have upon the Employee as a Participant of this Plan. 
 10.3 ALIENATION 

(a) General rule. Subject to the exceptions provided below and as otherwise permitted by the Code and the Act, no benefit which
shall be payable to any person (including a Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary) shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, or charge, and any attempt to anticipate,
alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber, or charge the same shall be void; and no such benefit shall in any manner be liable for, or subject to, the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements, or torts of any such person, nor shall it be
subject to attachment or legal process for or against such person, and the same shall not be recognized except to such extent as may be required by law. 
 (b) Exception for loans. Subsection (a) shall not apply to the extent a Participant or Beneficiary is indebted to the Plan by reason of a loan made pursuant to Section 7.6. At the time a
distribution is to be made to or for a Participant’s or Beneficiary’s benefit, such portion of the amount to be distributed as shall equal such indebtedness shall be paid to the Plan, to apply against or discharge such indebtedness. Prior
to making a payment, however, the Participant or Beneficiary must be given notice by the Administrator that such indebtedness is to be so paid in whole or part from the Participant’s interest in the Plan. If the Participant or Beneficiary does
not agree that the indebtedness is a valid claim against the Participant’s interest in the Plan, the Participant or Beneficiary shall be entitled to a review of the validity of the claim in accordance with procedures provided in Sections 2.10
and 2.11. 
 (c) Exception for QDRO. Subsection (a) shall not apply to a “qualified domestic relations
order” defined in Code Section 414(p), and those other domestic relations orders permitted to be so treated by the Administrator under the provisions of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984. The Administrator shall establish a written
procedure to determine the qualified status of domestic relations orders and to administer distributions under such qualified orders. Further, to the extent provided under a “qualified domestic relations order,” a former spouse of a
Participant shall be treated as the spouse or surviving spouse for all purposes under the Plan. 
 (d) Exception for certain
debts to Plan. Notwithstanding any provision of this Section to the contrary, an offset to a Participant’s accrued benefit against an amount that the Participant is ordered or required to pay the Plan with respect to a judgment, order, or
decree issued, or a settlement entered into, on or after August 5, 1997, shall be permitted in accordance with Code Sections 401(a)(13)(C) and (D). 
 10.4 CONSTRUCTION OF PLAN 
 This Plan and Trust shall be construed and
enforced according to the Code, the Act and the laws of the state or commonwealth in which the Employer’s (or if there is a corporate Trustee, the Trustee’s, or if the Plan is fully insured, the Insurer’s) principal office is located
(unless otherwise designated in the Adoption Agreement), other than its laws respecting choice of law, to the extent not pre-empted by the Act. 

10.5 GENDER AND NUMBER 

Wherever any words are used herein in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, they shall be construed as though they were also used in
another gender in all cases where they would so apply, and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or plural form, they shall be construed as though they were also used in the other form in all cases where they would so apply. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 57 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 10.6 LEGAL ACTION 
 In the event any claim, suit, or proceeding is brought regarding the Trust and/or Plan established hereunder to which the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer or the Administrator may be a party, and such
claim, suit, or proceeding is resolved in favor of the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer or the Administrator, they shall be entitled to be reimbursed from the Trust Fund for any and all costs, attorney’s fees, and other expenses pertaining
thereto incurred by them for which they shall have become liable. 
 10.7 PROHIBITION AGAINST DIVERSION OF FUNDS 

(a) General rule. Except as provided below and otherwise specifically permitted by law, it shall be impossible by operation of the
Plan or of the Trust, by termination of either, by power of revocation or amendment, by the happening of any contingency, by collateral arrangement or by any other means, for any part of the corpus or income of any Trust Fund maintained pursuant to
the Plan or any funds contributed thereto to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than the exclusive benefit of Participants or their Beneficiaries. 
 (b) Mistake of fact. In the event the Employer shall make a contribution under a mistake of fact pursuant to Act 
 Section 403(c)(2)(A), the Employer may demand repayment of such contribution at any time within one (1) year following the time of payment and the Trustee (or Insurer) shall return such amount
to the Employer within the one (1) year period. Earnings of the Plan attributable to the contributions may not be returned to the Employer but any losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount so returned. 

(c) Contribution conditioned on deductibility. Except as specifically stated in the Plan, any contribution made by the Employer to
the Plan (if the Employer is not tax-exempt) is conditioned upon the deductibility of the contribution by the Employer under the Code and, to the extent any such deduction is disallowed, the Employer may, within one (1) year following a final
determination of the disallowance, whether by agreement with the Internal Revenue Service or by final decision of a court of competent jurisdiction, demand repayment of such disallowed contribution and the Trustee (or Insurer) shall return such
contribution within one (1) year following the disallowance. Earnings of the Plan attributable to the contribution may not be returned to the Employer, but any losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount so returned. 

10.8 EMPLOYER’S AND TRUSTEE’S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE 
 The Employer, Administrator and Trustee, and their successors, shall not be responsible for the validity of any Contract issued hereunder or for the failure on the part of the Insurer to make payments
provided by any such Contract, or for the action of any person which may delay payment or render a Contract null and void or unenforceable in whole or in part. 
 10.9 INSURER’S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE 
 Except as otherwise agreed upon in
writing between the Employer and the Insurer, an Insurer which issues any Contracts hereunder shall not have any responsibility for the validity of this Plan or for the tax or legal aspects of this Plan. The Insurer shall be protected and held
harmless in acting in accordance with any written direction of the Administrator or Trustee, and shall have no duty to see to the application of any funds paid to the Trustee, nor be required to question any actions directed by the Administrator or
Trustee. Regardless of any provision of this Plan, the Insurer shall not be required to take or permit any action or allow any benefit or privilege contrary to the terms of any Contract which it issues hereunder, or the rules of the Insurer.

 10.10 RECEIPT AND RELEASE FOR PAYMENTS 
 Any payment to any Participant, the Participant’s legal representative, Beneficiary, or to any guardian or committee appointed for such Participant or Beneficiary in accordance with the provisions of
this Plan, shall, to the extent thereof, be in full satisfaction of all claims hereunder against the Trustee (or Insurer) and the Employer. 

10.11 ACTION BY THE EMPLOYER 
 Whenever the Employer under the terms of the Plan is permitted or required to do or perform any act or matter or thing, it shall be done and performed by a person duly authorized by its legally
constituted authority. 
 10.12 NAMED FIDUCIARIES AND ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY 

The “named Fiduciaries” of this Plan are (1) the Employer, (2) the Administrator, (3) the Trustee (if the Trustee
has discretionary authority as elected in the Adoption Agreement or as otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee), and (4) any Investment Manager appointed hereunder. The named Fiduciaries shall have only those specific powers,
duties, responsibilities, and obligations as are specifically given them under the Plan including, but not limited to, any agreement allocating or delegating their responsibilities, the terms of which are incorporated herein by reference. In
general, the Employer shall have the sole responsibility for making the contributions provided for under the Plan; and shall have the sole authority to appoint and remove the Trustee and the Administrator; to formulate the Plan’s “funding
policy and method”; and to amend the elective provisions of the Adoption Agreement or terminate, in whole or in part, the Plan. The Administrator shall have the sole responsibility for the administration of the Plan, which responsibility is
specifically described 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust
Company 

  
 58 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
in the Plan. If the Trustee has discretionary authority, it shall have the sole responsibility of management of the assets held under the Trust, except those assets, the management of which has
been assigned to an Investment Manager or Administrator, who shall be solely responsible for the management of the assets assigned to it, all as specifically provided in the Plan. Each named Fiduciary warrants that any directions given, information
furnished, or action taken by it shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Plan, authorizing or providing for such direction, information or action. Furthermore, each named Fiduciary may rely upon any such direction, information or action of
another named Fiduciary as being proper under the Plan, and is not required under the Plan to inquire into the propriety of any such direction, information or action. It is intended under the Plan that each named Fiduciary shall be responsible for
the proper exercise of its own powers, duties, responsibilities and obligations under the Plan. No named Fiduciary shall guarantee the Trust Fund in any manner against investment loss or depreciation in asset value. Any person or group may serve in
more than one Fiduciary capacity. 
 10.13 HEADINGS 
 The headings and subheadings of this Plan have been inserted for convenience of reference and are to be ignored in any construction of the provisions hereof. 

10.14 APPROVAL BY INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE 
 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if, pursuant to an application for qualification is made by the time prescribed by law for filing the Employer’s return for the taxable year in which
the Plan or an amendment to the Plan is adopted, or such later date as the Secretary of Treasury may prescribe, the Commissioner of the Internal Revenue Service or the Commissioner’s delegate should determine that the Plan does not initially
qualify as a tax-exempt plan under Code Sections 401 and 501, and such determination is not contested, or if contested, is finally upheld, then if the Plan is a new plan, it shall be void ab initio and all amounts contributed to the Plan, by the
Employer, less expenses paid, shall be returned within one (1) year and the Plan shall terminate, and the Trustee (or Insurer) shall be discharged from all further obligations. If the disqualification relates to a Plan amendment, then the Plan
shall operate as if it had not been amended. If the Employer’s Plan fails to attain or retain qualification, such Plan will no longer participate in this volume submitter plan and will be considered an individually designed plan. 

10.15 UNIFORMITY 
 All
provisions of this Plan shall be interpreted and applied in a uniform, nondiscriminatory manner. 
 10.16 PAYMENT OF BENEFITS 

Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, benefits under this Plan shall be paid, subject to Sections 6.11, 6.12 and 12.9, only upon
death, Total and Permanent Disability, normal or early retirement, termination of employment, or termination of the Plan. 
 10.17 ELECTRONIC
MEDIA 
 The Plan Administrator may use telephonic or electronic media to satisfy any notice requirements required by this
Plan, to the extent permissible under regulations (or other generally applicable guidance). In addition, a Participant’s consent to immediate distribution may be provided through telephonic or electronic means, to the extent permissible under
regulations (or other generally applicable guidance). The Plan Administrator also may use telephonic or electronic media to conduct plan transactions such as enrolling Participants, making (and changing) salary reduction elections, electing (and
changing) investment allocations, applying for Plan loans, and other transactions, to the extent permissible under regulations (or other generally applicable guidance). 
 10.18 PLAN CORRECTION 
 The Administrator in conjunction with the Employer
may undertake such correction of Plan errors as the Administrator deems necessary, including correction to preserve tax qualification of the Plan under Code Section 401(a) or to correct a fiduciary breach under the Act. Without limiting the
Administrator’s authority under the prior sentence, the Administrator, as it determines to be reasonable and appropriate, may undertake correction of Plan document, operational, demographic and employer eligibility failures under a method
described in the Plan or under the IRS Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (“EPCRS”) or any successor program to EPCRS. The Administrator, as it determines to be reasonable and appropriate, also may undertake or assist the
appropriate fiduciary or plan official in undertaking correction of a fiduciary breach, including correction under the DOL Voluntary Fiduciary Correction Program (“VFC”) or any successor program to VFC. If the Plan is a 401(k) Plan, to
correct an operational error, the Plan Administrator may require the Trustee (or Insurer) to distribute from the Plan Elective Deferrals or Vested matching contributions, including earnings, where such amounts result from an operational error other
than a failure of Code Section 415, Code Section 402(g), or a failure of the ADP or ACP tests. 
 10.19 NONTRUSTEED PLANS

 If the Plan is funded solely with Contracts, then notwithstanding Sections 10.7 and 10.14, no Contract will be purchased
under the Plan unless such Contract or a separate definite written agreement between the Employer and the Insurer provides that: (1) no value under Contracts providing benefits under the Plan or credits determined by the Insurer (on account of
dividends, earnings, or other experience rating credits, or surrender or cancellation credits) with respect to such Contracts may be paid or returned to the Employer or diverted to or 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 59 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
used for other than the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries. However, any contribution made by the Employer because of a mistake of fact must be returned to the Employer
within one year of the contribution. 
 If this Plan is funded by individual Contracts that provide a Participant’s benefit
under the Plan, such individual Contracts shall constitute the Participant’s account balance. If this Plan is funded by group Contracts, under the group annuity or group insurance Contract, premiums or other consideration received by the
Insurer must be allocated to Participants’ accounts under the Plan. 
 ARTICLE XI 

PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS 

11.1 ELECTION TO BECOME A PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER 
 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, with the consent of the Employer and Trustee (or Insurer), any entity may adopt the Employer’s Plan and all of the provisions hereof, and participate
herein and be known as a Participating Employer, by a properly executed document evidencing said intent and will of such Participating Employer. 
 11.2 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS 
 (a) Provisions may not
vary. Each Participating Employer shall be required to select the same Adoption Agreement provisions as those selected by the Employer other than the Fiscal Year and such other items that must, by necessity, vary among employers. 

(b) Holding and investing assets. The Trustee (or Insurer) may, but shall not be required to, commingle, hold and invest as one
Trust Fund all contributions made by Participating Employers, as well as all increments thereof. However, the assets of the Plan shall, on an ongoing basis, be available to pay benefits to all Participants and Beneficiaries under the Plan without
regard to the Employer or Participating Employer who contributed such assets. 
 (c) Payment of expenses. Unless the
Employer otherwise directs, any expenses of the Plan which are to be paid by the Employer or borne by the Trust Fund shall be paid by each Participating Employer in the same proportion that the total amount standing to the credit of all Participants
employed by such Employer bears to the total standing to the credit of all Participants. 
 11.3 DESIGNATION OF AGENT 

Each Participating Employer shall be deemed to be a part of this Plan; provided, however, that with respect to all of its relations with
the Trustee (or Insurer) and Administrator for purposes of this Plan, each Participating Employer shall be deemed to have designated irrevocably the Employer as its agent. Unless the context of the Plan clearly indicates otherwise, the word
“Employer” shall be deemed to include each Participating Employer as related to its adoption of the Plan. 
 11.4 EMPLOYEE
TRANSFERS 
 In the event an Employee is transferred between Participating Employers, accumulated service and eligibility
shall be carried with the Employee involved. No such transfer shall effect a termination of employment hereunder, and the Participating Employer to which the Employee is transferred shall thereupon become obligated hereunder with respect to such
Employee in the same manner as was the Participating Employer from whom the Employee was transferred. 
 11.5 PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER’S
CONTRIBUTION AND FORFEITURES 
 If elected by a Participating Employer in its participation agreement, then to the extent
permitted under Code Section 411(d)(6), effective with respect to Plan Years beginning in and after the Plan Year in which the provisions of this Plan are adopted, any contribution and/or Forfeiture subject to allocation during each Plan Year
shall be determined and allocated separately by each Participating Employer, and shall be allocated only among the Participants eligible to share in the contribution and forfeiture allocation of the Employer or Participating Employer making the
contribution or by which the forfeiting Participant was employed. Alternatively (if so elected), any contribution or Forfeiture subject to allocation during each Plan Year shall be allocated among all Participants of all Participating Employers in
accordance with the provisions of this Plan. However, if a Participating Employer is not an Affiliated Employer then any contributions made by such Participating Employer will only be allocated among the Participants eligible to share in the
contribution and forfeiture allocation of the Participating Employer. 
 On the basis of the information furnished by the
Administrator, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall keep separate books and records concerning the affairs of each Participating Employer hereunder and as to the accounts and credits of the Employees of each Participating Employer. The Trustee (or
Insurer) may, but need not, register Contracts so as to evidence that a particular Participating Employer is the interested Employer hereunder, but in the event of an Employee transfer from one Participating Employer to another, the employing
Employer shall immediately notify the Trustee (or Insurer) thereof. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 60 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 11.6 AMENDMENT 
 Any Participating Employer that is an Affiliated Employer hereby authorizes the Employer to make amendments on its behalf, unless otherwise agreed among all affected parties. If a Participating Employer
is not an Affiliated Employer, then amendment of this Plan by the Employer at any time when there shall be a Participating Employer shall, unless otherwise agreed to by the affected parties, only be by the written action of each and every
Participating Employer and with the consent of the Trustee (or Insurer) where such consent is necessary in accordance with the terms of this Plan. 
 11.7 DISCONTINUANCE OF PARTICIPATION 
 Any Participating Employer shall be
permitted to discontinue or revoke its participation in the Plan at any time. At the time of any such discontinuance or revocation, satisfactory evidence thereof and of any applicable conditions imposed shall be delivered to the Trustee (or
Insurer). The Trustee (or Insurer) shall thereafter transfer, deliver and assign Contracts and other Trust Fund assets allocable to the Participants of such Participating Employer to such new trustee (or insurer) or custodian as shall have been
designated by such Participating Employer, in the event that it has established a separate qualified retirement plan for its employees provided, however, that no such transfer shall be made if the result is the elimination or reduction of any
“Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits” as described in Section 8.1(e). If a separate plan has not been established, at the time of such continuance or revocation for whatever reason, the assets and liabilities, Contracts and other
Trust Fund assets allocable to such Participating Employer’s participation in this Plan shall be spun off pursuant to Code Section 414(l) and such spun off assets shall constitute a retirement plan of the Participating Employer with such
Participating Employer becoming sponsor and the individual who has signed the participation agreement on behalf of the Participating Employer becoming Trustee for this purpose. Such individual shall agree to this appointment by virtue of signing the
participation agreement. If such individual is no longer an Employee of the Participating Employer, then the Participating Employer shall appoint a Trustee. If no successor is designated, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall retain such assets for the
Employees of said Participating Employer pursuant to the provisions of Article VII hereof. In no such event shall any part of the corpus or income of the Trust Fund as it relates to such Participating Employer be used for or diverted to purposes
other than for the exclusive benefit of the employees of such Participating Employer. 
 11.8 ADMINISTRATOR’S AUTHORITY 

The Administrator shall have authority to make any and all necessary rules or regulations, binding upon all Participating Employers and
all Participants, to effectuate the purpose of this Article. 
 11.9 PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTION FOR AFFILIATE 

If any Participating Employer is prevented in whole or in part from making a contribution which it would otherwise have made under the
Plan by reason of having no current or accumulated earnings or profits, or because such earnings or profits are less than the contribution which it would otherwise have made, then, pursuant to Code Section 404(a)(3)(B), so much of the
contribution which such Participating Employer was so prevented from making may be made, for the benefit of the participating employees of such Participating Employer, by other Participating Employers who are members of the same affiliated group
within the meaning of Code Section 1504 to the extent of their current or accumulated earnings or profits, except that such contribution by each such other Participating Employer shall be limited to the proportion of its total current and
accumulated earnings or profits remaining after adjustment for its contribution to the Plan made without regard to this paragraph which the total prevented contribution bears to the total current and accumulated earnings or profits of all the
Participating Employers remaining after adjustment for all contributions made to the Plan without regard to this paragraph. 
 A
Participating Employer on behalf of whose employees a contribution is made under this paragraph shall not be required to reimburse the contributing Participating Employers. 
 ARTICLE XII 
 CASH OR DEFERRED PROVISIONS 

Except as specifically provided elsewhere in this Plan, the provisions of this Article shall apply with respect to any 401(k) Profit
Sharing Plan regardless of any provisions in the Plan to the contrary. 
 12.1 FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER’S CONTRIBUTION

 (a) Permitted contributions. For each Plan Year, the Employer will (or may with respect to any discretionary
contributions) contribute to the Plan: 
 (1) The amount of the total salary reduction elections of all Participants made
pursuant to Section 12.2(a), which amount shall be deemed Elective Deferrals, plus 
 (2) If elected in the Adoption
Agreement, a matching contribution equal to the percentage, if any, specified in the Adoption Agreement of the Elective Deferrals of each Participant eligible to share in the allocations of the matching contribution, which amount shall be deemed an
Employer matching contribution or Qualified Matching Contribution as elected in the Adoption Agreement, plus 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 61 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (3) If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a discretionary amount determined each year by
the Employer, which amount if any, shall be deemed an Employer Nonelective Contribution, or a Prevailing Wage Contribution as set forth in the Adoption Agreement, which amount shall be an Employer Nonelective Contribution or an Elective Contribution
as elected in the Adoption Agreement, plus 
 (4) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution in a discretionary amount determined by
the Employer. 
 (b) Timing and form of contributions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Employer is not a tax-exempt
entity, then the Employer’s contributions for any Fiscal Year may generally not exceed the maximum amount allowable as a deduction to the Employer under the provisions of Code Section 404. However, to the extent necessary to provide the
top-heavy minimum allocations, the Employer shall make a contribution even if it exceeds current or accumulated Net Profit or the amount that is deductible under Code Section 404. All contributions by the Employer shall be made in cash or in
such property as is acceptable to the Trustee (or Insurer). 
 12.2 PARTICIPANT’S SALARY REDUCTION ELECTION 

(a) Deferral elections. Each Participant may elect to defer a portion of Compensation which would have been received in the Plan
Year, but for the salary reduction election, subject to the limitations of this Section and the Adoption Agreement. A salary reduction election (or modification of an earlier election) may not be made with respect to Compensation which is currently
available on or before the date the Participant executed such election, or if later, the later of the date the Employer adopts this cash or deferred arrangement or the date such arrangement first became effective. Any elections made pursuant to this
Section, including a modification or termination of an election, shall become effective as soon as is administratively feasible following the receipt of such election by the Administrator. Furthermore, if the Employer elects in the Adoption
Agreement to apply the automatic deferral provisions, then in the event a Participant fails to make a salary deferral election and does not affirmatively elect to receive cash, such Participant shall be deemed to have made a salary deferral election
in accordance with the provisions selected in the Adoption Agreement and such other procedures that the Administrator may establish and apply in a uniform and nondiscriminatory basis. 

Additionally, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, each Participant may elect to defer a different percentage or amount
of any cash bonus to be paid by the Employer during the Plan Year. A deferral election may not be made with respect to cash bonuses which are currently available on or before the date the Participant executes such election. 

If elected in the Adoption Agreement, effective as of the date specified in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant may make
a salary reduction election to have Roth Elective Deferrals contributed to the Plan. Roth Elective Deferrals are includible in the Participant’s gross income at the time deferred and must be irrevocably designated as Roth Elective Deferrals by
the Participant in the Salary Reduction Agreement (or if applicable, in the automatic deferral provisions of the Plan). 
 The amount by which Compensation and/or cash bonuses are reduced shall be that Participant’s Elective Deferrals and shall be treated as an Employer contribution and allocated to that
Participant’s Elective Deferral Account. If the Plan permits Roth Elective Deferral contributions, then a Participant’s Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals shall be allocated to the Participant’s Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account and a
Participant’s Roth Elective Deferrals shall be allocated to the Participant’s Roth Elective Deferral Account. Elective Deferrals contributed to the Plan as one type, either Roth Elective Deferrals or Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals, may not
later be reclassified as the other type. 
 For purposes of this Section, the annual dollar limitation of Code
Section 401(a)(17) ($200,000 as adjusted) shall not apply except that the Administrator may elect to apply such limit as part of the deferral election procedures established hereunder. 

Once made, a Participant’s election to reduce Compensation shall remain in effect until modified or terminated. The
Administrator shall establish procedures setting forth the conditions on modifications of an election. However, Participants must be permitted to modify elections at least once each Plan Year. Furthermore, terminations may be made at any time.

 (b) Catch-Up Contributions. If selected in the Adoption Agreement, effective for calendar years beginning after
December 31, 2001, all Employees who are eligible to make Elective Deferrals under this Plan and who have attained age 50 before the close of the taxable year shall be eligible to make Catch-Up Contributions in accordance with, and subject to
the dollar limitations of, Code Section 414(v)(2)(B)(i) for the taxable year. The dollar limit on Catch-Up Contributions under Code Section 414(v)(2)(B)(i) is $1,000 for taxable years beginning in 2002, increasing by $1,000 for each year
thereafter up to $5,000 for taxable years beginning in 2006 and later years. After 2006, the $5,000 limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code Section 414(v)(2)(C). Such Catch-Up
Contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of the provisions of the Plan implementing the required limitations of Code Sections 402(g) and 415. The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of the Plan
implementing the requirements of Code Sections 401(k)(3), 401(k)(11), 401(k)(12), 410(b), or 416, as applicable, by reason of the making of such Catch-Up Contributions (but Catch-Up Contributions made in prior years are counted in determining
whether the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan). If selected in the Adoption Agreement, Catch-Up Contributions shall not be treated as Elective Deferrals for purposes of applying any Employer matching contributions. Such option cannot be selected if the Plan
elects to follow the safe harbor provisions of Section 12.8. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 62 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (c) Full vesting. The balance in each Participant’s Elective Deferral
Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account shall be fully Vested at all times and, except as otherwise provided herein, shall not be subject to Forfeiture for any reason. 

(d) Distribution restrictions. Effective with respect to distributions and transactions made after December 31, 2001, amounts
held in a Participant’s Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account may only be distributable as provided in (4) below or as provided under the other provisions of this
Plan, but in no event prior to the earlier of the following events or any other events permitted by the Code or Regulations: 

(1) the Participant’s severance of employment (regardless of when the severance of employment occurred), Total and Permanent
Disability, or death; 
 (2) the Participant’s attainment of age 59 1/2; 

(3) the proven financial hardship of the Participant, subject to the limitations of Section 12.9; or 

(4) the termination of the Plan without the existence at the time of Plan termination of another defined contribution plan or the
establishment of a successor defined contribution plan by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer within the period ending twelve months after distribution of all assets from the Plan maintained by the Employer. For this purpose, a defined
contribution plan does not include an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in Code Section 4975(e)(7) or 409), a simplified employee pension plan (as defined in Code Section 408(k)), or a SIMPLE individual retirement account plan (as
defined in Code Section 408(p)). A distribution that is made because of this paragraph must be made in a lump-sum. 
 (e)
Code Section 402(g) dollar limit. A Participant’s Elective Deferrals made under this Plan and all other plans, contracts or arrangements of the Employer maintaining this Plan during any calendar year shall not exceed the dollar
limitation imposed by Code Section 402(g), as in effect at the beginning of such calendar year, except to the extent permitted under Section 12.2(b) and Code Section 414(v), if applicable. The dollar limitation contained in Code
Section 402(g) is $10,500 for taxable years beginning in 2000 and 2001 increasing to $11,000 for taxable years beginning in 2002 and increasing by $1,000 for each year thereafter up to $15,000 for taxable years beginning in 2006 and later
years. After 2006, the $15,000 limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code Section 402(g)(4). For this purpose, “elective deferrals” means, with respect to a calendar year, the sum
of all Employer contributions made on behalf of such Participant pursuant to an election to defer under any qualified cash or deferred arrangement as described in Code Section 401(k), any salary reduction simplified employee pension (as defined
in Code Section 408(k)(6)), any SIMPLE IRA plan described in Code Section 408(p), any eligible deferred compensation plan under Code Section 457, any plans described under Code Section 501(c)(18), and any Employer contributions
made on the behalf of a Participant for the purchase of an annuity contract under Code Section 403(b) pursuant to a salary reduction agreement. “Elective deferrals” shall not include any deferrals properly distributed as excess
“annual additions” pursuant to Section 4.5. 
 (f) Excess Deferrals. If a Participant has Excess Deferrals
for a taxable year, the Participant may, not later than March 1st following the close of such taxable year, notify the Administrator in writing of such excess and request that the Participant’s Elective Deferrals under this Plan be reduced
by an amount specified by the Participant. In such event, the Administrator shall direct the distribution of such excess amount (and any “income” allocable to such excess amount) to the Participant not later than the first April 15th
following the close of the Participant’s taxable year. Any distribution of less than the entire amount of Excess Deferrals and “income” shall be treated as a pro rata distribution of Excess Deferrals and “income.” The amount
distributed shall not exceed the Participant’s Elective Deferrals under the Plan for the taxable year. Any distribution on or before the last day of the Participant’s taxable year must satisfy each of the following conditions: 

(1) the Participant shall designate the distribution as Excess Deferrals; 

(2) the distribution must be made after the date on which the Plan received the Excess Deferrals; and 

(3) the Plan must designate the distribution as a distribution of Excess Deferrals. 

Regardless of the preceding, if a Participant has Excess Deferrals solely from elective deferrals made under this Plan or
any other plan maintained by the Employer, a Participant will be deemed to have notified the Administrator of such excess amount and the Administrator shall direct the distribution of such Excess Deferrals in a manner consistent with the provisions
of this subsection. 
 For the purpose of this subsection, “income” means the amount of income or loss
allocable to a Participant’s Excess Deferrals, which amount shall be allocated in the same manner as income or losses are allocated pursuant to Section 4.3(c). However, “income” for the period between the end of the taxable year
of the Participant and the date of the distribution (the “gap period”) is not required to be distributed for Excess Deferrals attributable to taxable years beginning prior to 2007. 

Notwithstanding the above, for any years in which a Participant makes both Roth Elective Deferrals and Pre-Tax Elective
Deferrals, the distribution of any Excess Deferrals for such year shall be made from the Participant’s Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account before the Participant’s Roth Elective Deferral Account, to the extent Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals were
made for the year, 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company

  
 63 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
unless the Participant elects otherwise. Matching contributions which relate to Excess Elective Deferrals (regardless of whether such Excess Elective Deferrals are Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals or
Roth Elective Deferrals) shall be treated as a Forfeiture. 
 Any distribution of Excess Deferrals made pursuant
to this subsection shall be made first from unmatched Elective Deferrals (regardless of whether they are attributable to Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals or Roth Elective Deferrals) and, thereafter, from Elective Deferrals which are matched. Matching
contributions which relate to Excess Deferrals that are distributed pursuant to this Section 12.2(f) shall be treated as a Forfeiture to the extent required pursuant to Code Section 401(a)(4) and the Regulations thereunder. 

(g) Coordination with ADP test. Notwithstanding the preceding, a Participant’s Excess Deferrals shall be reduced, but not
below zero, by any distribution and/or recharacterization of Excess Deferrals pursuant to Section 12.5(b) for the Plan Year beginning with or within the taxable year of the Participant. 

(h) Suspension due to hardship. Effective with respect to distributions made on or after December 31, 2001, in the event a

 Participant has received a hardship distribution pursuant to Regulation Section 1.401(k)-1(d)(3) from any other plan
maintained by the Employer or from the Participant’s Elective Deferral Account pursuant to Section 12.9, then such Participant shall not be permitted to elect to have Elective Deferrals contributed to the Plan for a period of six
(6) months following the receipt of the distribution. Furthermore, any provisions of the Plan providing for the reduction of the dollar limitation under Code Section 402(g) for the Participant’s taxable year following the taxable year
in which the hardship distribution was made shall no longer apply. 
 (i) Distributable based on other terms of Plan. At
Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant shall be entitled to receive benefits, the fair market value of the Participant’s Elective Deferral Account shall be used to provide benefits to the Participant or the
Participant’s Beneficiary. 
 (j) Adjustment due to anticipated failure of ADP test. If during a Plan Year, it is
projected that the aggregate amount of Elective Deferrals to be allocated to all Highly Compensated Participants under this Plan would cause the Plan to fail the tests set forth in Section 12.4, then the Administrator may automatically reduce
the deferral amount of affected Highly Compensated Participants, beginning with the Highly Compensated Participant who has the highest actual deferral ratio until it is anticipated the Plan will pass the tests or until the actual deferral ratio
equals the actual deferral ratio of the Highly Compensated Participant having the next highest actual deferral ratio. This process may continue until it is anticipated that the Plan will satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4.
Alternatively, the Employer may specify a maximum percentage of Compensation that may be deferred by Highly Compensated Participants. 
 (k) Procedures must be established. The Employer and the Administrator shall establish procedures necessary to implement the salary reduction elections provided for herein. Such procedures may
contain limits on salary deferral elections such as limiting elections to whole percentages of Compensation or to equal dollar amounts per pay period that an election is in effect. 
 12.3 ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTION, FORFEITURES AND EARNINGS 
 (a) Separate
accounting. The Administrator shall establish and maintain an account in the name of each Participant to which the Administrator shall credit as of each Anniversary Date, or other Valuation Date, all amounts allocated to each such Participant as
set forth herein. 
 (b) Contributions. The Employer shall provide the Administrator with all information required by the
Administrator to make a proper allocation of Employer contributions for each Plan Year. Within a reasonable period of time after the date of receipt by the Administrator of such information, the Administrator shall allocate contributions as follows:

 (1) With respect to Elective Deferrals made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(1), to each Participant’s Elective Deferral
Account in an amount equal to each such Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the year. 
 (2) With respect to the Employer
matching contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2), to each Participant’s Account, or Participant’s Qualified Matching Contribution Account, as elected in the Adoption Agreement, in accordance with Section 12.1(a)(2).

 Except, however, in order to be entitled to receive any Employer matching contribution, a Participant must
satisfy the conditions for sharing in the Employer matching contribution as set forth in the Adoption Agreement. 
 (3) With
respect to the Employer Nonelective Contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(3), to each Participant’s Account in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.3(b)(2) or (3) (including the “gateway contribution”
pursuant to Section 4.3(b)(4)), whichever is applicable. 
 (4) With respect to the Employer Qualified Nonelective
Contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(4), to each Participant’s Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account in the same ratio as each Participant’s Compensation bears to the total of such Compensation of all Participants.

  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 64 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (c) Deferrals not taken into account for Non-Key Employees. Notwithstanding
anything in the Plan to the contrary, in determining whether a Non-Key Employee has received the required minimum allocation pursuant to Section 4.3(f) such Non-Key Employee’s Elective Deferrals shall not be taken into account. In
addition, unless otherwise specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Other Permitted Elections), effective with respect to Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, Employer matching contributions shall be taken into account for
purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code Section 416(c)(2) and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the Plan provides that the minimum contribution
requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan. Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the ACP test and other requirements
of Code Section 401(m). 
 (d) Deferrals not conditioned on service during a year. Notwithstanding anything herein to
the contrary, Participants who terminated employment during the Plan Year shall share in the salary deferral contributions made by the Employer for the year of termination without regard to the Hours of Service credited. 

(e) Conditions for sharing in contributions/allocations. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary (other than Sections
4.3(f) and 12.3(f)), Participants shall only share in the allocations of the Employer matching contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2), the Employer Nonelective Contributions made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(3), the Employer
Qualified Nonelective Contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(4), and Forfeitures as provided in the Adoption Agreement. If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of
the Employer’s contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) Months of Service if the Elapsed Time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the
last day of the Plan Year. 
 (f) Code Section 410(b) fail-safe. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the
contrary, if the Employer elected to apply the 410(b) ratio percentage fail-safe provisions, then the provisions of subsection 4.3(m) shall apply. 
 Furthermore, if the Plan includes Employer matching contributions subject to ACP testing, then subsection 4.3(m) shall be applied separately to the Code Section 401(m) portion of the Plan.

 12.4 ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS 
 (a) ADP test. Except as otherwise provided herein, this subsection applies if the prior year testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement. The “Actual Deferral Percentage”
(hereinafter ADP) for a Plan Year for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees (hereinafter “HCEs”) for each Plan Year and the prior year’s ADP for Participants who were Nonhighly Compensated Employees (hereinafter
“NHCEs”) for the prior Plan Year must satisfy one of the following tests: 
 (1) The ADP for a Plan Year for
Participants who are “HCEs” for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year’s ADP for Participants who were “NHCEs” for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or 

(2) The ADP for a Plan Year for Participants who are “HCEs” for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year’s ADP for
Participants who were “NHCEs” for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ADP for Participants who are “HCEs” does not exceed the prior year’s ADP for Participants who were “NHCEs” in the prior
Plan Year by more than two (2) percentage points. 
 Notwithstanding the above, for purposes of applying the
foregoing tests with respect to the first Plan Year (as defined in Regulation Section 1.401(k)-2(c)(2)) in which the Plan permits any Participant to make Elective Deferrals, the ADP for the prior year’s “NHCEs” shall be deemed to
be three percent (3%) unless the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to use the current Plan Year’s ADP for these Participants. However, the provisions of this paragraph may not be used if the Plan is a successor plan or is
otherwise prohibited from using such provisions pursuant to Regulation Section 1.401(k)-2(c)(2). 
 (b) Current year
testing method. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the current year testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement, the ADP tests in (a)(1) and (a)(2) above shall be applied by comparing the current Plan Year’s ADP for Participants who
are “HCEs” with the current Plan Year’s ADP (rather than the prior Plan Year’s ADP) for Participants who are “NHCEs” for the current Plan Year. Once made, the Employer can elect prior year testing for a Plan Year only
if the Plan has used current year testing for each of the preceding 5 Plan Years (or if lesser, the number of Plan Years the Plan has been in existence) or if, as a result of a merger or acquisition described in Code Section 410(b)(6)(C)(i),
the Employer maintains both a plan using prior year testing and a plan using current year testing and the change is made within the transition period described in Code Section 410(b)(6)(C)(ii). 

(c) Determination of “HCEs” and “NHCEs.” A Participant is an “HCE” for a particular Plan Year if the
Participant meets the definition of an “HCE” in effect for that Plan Year. Similarly, a Participant is an “NHCE” for a particular Plan Year if the Participant does not meet the definition of an “HCE” in effect for that
Plan Year. 
 (d) Calculation of ADP. For the purposes of this Section and Section 12.5, ADP means, for a specific
group of Participants for a Plan Year, the average of the ratios (calculated separately for each Participant in such group) of (1) the amount of Employer contributions actually paid over to the Plan on behalf of such Participant for the Plan
Year to (2) the Participant’s 414(s) Compensation for such Plan Year. Employer contributions on behalf of any Participant shall include: (1) any Elective Deferrals made pursuant to the 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 65 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Participant’s deferral election (including Excess Deferrals of “HCEs”), but excluding (i) Excess Deferrals of “NHCEs” that arise solely from Elective Deferrals made
under the plan or plans of this Employer and (ii) Elective Deferrals that are taken into account in the ACP tests set forth in Section 12.6 (provided the ADP test is satisfied both with and without exclusion of these Elective Deferrals);
and (2) except as provided in subsections (f) and (g), at the election of the Employer, Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions to the extent such contributions are not used to satisfy the ACP test.

 The actual deferral ratio for each Participant and the ADP for each group shall be calculated to the nearest
one-hundredth of one percent. Furthermore, Elective Deferrals allocated to each Highly Compensated Participant’s Elective Deferral Account shall not be reduced by Excess Deferrals to the extent such excess amounts are made under this Plan or
any other plan maintained by the Employer. 
 (e) Participants taken into account. For purposes of this Section and
Section 12.5, a Highly Compensated Participant and a Nonhighly Compensated Participant shall include any Employee eligible to make salary deferrals pursuant to Section 12.2 for the Plan Year. Such Participants who fail to make Elective
Deferrals shall be treated for ADP purposes as Participants on whose behalf no Elective Deferrals are made. If a Participant has no 414(s) Compensation for the Plan Year, then such Participant is disregarded for purposes of calculating the ADP test.

 (f) Timing of allocations. For purposes of determining the ADP and the amount of Excess Contributions pursuant to
Section 12.5, only Elective Deferrals, Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions contributed to the Plan prior to the end of the twelve (12) month period immediately following the Plan Year to which the
contributions relate shall be considered. 
 (g) Targeted contributions. Notwithstanding the preceding, for Plan Years
beginning in 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), Qualified Nonelective Contributions cannot be taken into account in determining the ADP for a Plan Year for an “NHCE” to the
extent such contributions exceed the product of that “NHCE’s” 414(s) Compensation and the greater of five percent (5%) or two (2) times the Plan’s “representative contribution rate.” Any Qualified Nonelective
Contribution taken into account under an ACP test under Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2(a)(6) (including the determination of the representative contribution rate for purposes of Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2(a)(6)(v)(B)), is not permitted
to be taken into account for purposes of this paragraph (including the determination of the “representative contribution rate” under this Section). For purposes of this subsection: 

(1) The Plan’s “representative contribution rate” is the lowest applicable contribution rate of any eligible
“NHCE” among a group of eligible “NHCEs” that consists of half of all eligible “NHCEs” for the Plan Year (or, if greater, the lowest “applicable contribution rate” of any eligible “NHCE” in the group
of all eligible “NHCEs” for the Plan Year and who is employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year), and 

(2) The “applicable contribution rate” for an eligible “NHCE” is the sum of the Qualified Matching Contributions taken
into account under subsection (d) for the eligible “NHCE” for the Plan Year and the Qualified Nonelective Contributions made for the eligible “NHCE” for the Plan Year, divided by the eligible “NHCE’s” 414(s)
Compensation for the same period. 
 Notwithstanding the above, Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are made
in connection with an employer’s obligation to pay prevailing wages under the Davis-Bacon Act (46 Stat. 1494), Public Law 71-798, Service Contract Act of 1965 (79 Stat. 1965), Public Law 89-286, or similar legislation can be taken into account
for a Plan Year for an “NHCE” to the extent such contributions do not exceed 10 percent (10%) of that “NHCE’s” 414(s) Compensation. 

Qualified Matching Contributions may only be used to calculate the ADP to the extent that such Qualified Matching
Contributions are matching contributions that are not precluded from being taken into account under the ACP test for the Plan Year under the rules of Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2(a)(5)(ii). 

Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions cannot be taken into account to determine the ADP
to the extent such contributions are taken into account for purposes of satisfying any other ADP test, any ACP test, or the requirements of Regulation Section 1.401(k)-3, 1.401(m)-3 or 1.401(k)-4. Thus, for example, matching contributions that
are made pursuant to Regulation Section 1.401(k)-3(c) cannot be taken into account under the ADP test. Similarly, if a plan switches from the current year testing method to the prior year testing method pursuant to Regulation
Section 1.401(k)-2(c), Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are taken into account under the current year testing method for a year may not be taken into account under the prior year testing method for the next year. 

(h) Aggregation with other plans. In the event this Plan satisfies the requirements of Code Sections 401(a)(4), 401(k), or 410(b)
only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such sections of the Code only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section shall be applied by determining the ADP of Employees as if all
such plans were a single plan. If more than ten percent (10%) of the Employer’s “NHCEs” are involved in a plan coverage change as defined in Regulation Section 1.401(k)-2(c)(4), then any adjustments to the “NHCEs”
ADP for the prior year will be made in accordance with such Regulations, unless the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to use the current year testing method. Plans may be aggregated in order to satisfy Code Section 401(k) only if
they have the same Plan Year and use the same ADP testing method. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 66 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (i) ADP if multiple plans. The ADP for any Participant who is an “HCE”
for the Plan Year and who is eligible to have Elective Deferrals (and Qualified Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions, or both, if treated as Elective Deferrals for purposes of the ADP test) allocated to such
Participant’s accounts under two (2) or more arrangements described in Code Section 401(k), that are maintained by the Employer, shall be determined as if such Elective Deferrals (and, if applicable, such Qualified Nonelective
Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions, or both) were made under a single arrangement for purposes of determining such “HCE’s” actual deferral ratio. If an “HCE” participates in two or more arrangements described
in Code Section 401(k) of the Employer that have different plan years, all Elective Deferrals made during the Plan Year under all such arrangements shall be aggregated. For Plan Years beginning before 2006 (or if earlier, the Plan Year prior to
the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), if the plans have different Plan Years, then all such arrangements ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated as a single arrangement. Notwithstanding
the foregoing, certain plans shall be treated as separate if mandatorily disaggregated under Regulations under Code Section 401(k). 
 (j) Disaggregation and otherwise excludable employees. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the provisions of this Section and Section 12.5 may be applied separately (or
will be applied separately to the extent required by Regulations) to each “plan” within the meaning of Regulation Section 1.401(k)-6. Furthermore, the provisions of Code Section 401(k)(3)(F) may be used to exclude from
consideration all Nonhighly Compensated Employees who have not satisfied the minimum age and service requirements of Code Section 410(a)(1)(A). For purposes of applying this provision, the Administrator may use any effective date of
participation that is permitted under Code Section 410(b) provided such date is applied on a consistent and uniform basis to all Participants. 
 (k) “HCEs” as sole eligible employees. If, for the applicable year for determining the ADP of the “NHCEs” for a Plan Year, there are no eligible “NHCEs,” then the Plan
is deemed to satisfy the ADP test for the Plan Year. 
 (l) Repeal of multiple use test. The multiple use test described
in Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2 in effect prior to the enactment of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001 shall not apply for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001. 

12.5 ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS 
 (a) Authority to correct. In the event the Plan does not satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4, the Administrator shall adjust Excess Contributions or, if the current year testing
method is being used, the Employer shall make contributions pursuant to the options set forth below or any combination thereof. 

(b) Corrective distribution and/or recharacterization. On or before the close of the following Plan Year (or with respect to
recharacterization as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, on or before the fifteenth day of the third month following the end of each Plan Year), the Highly Compensated Participant allocated the largest amount of Elective Deferrals shall
have a portion of such Elective Deferrals (and “income” allocable to such amounts) distributed (and/or, at the Participant’s election, recharacterized as an after-tax voluntary Employee contribution pursuant to Section 4.8) until
the total amount of Excess Contributions has been distributed, or until the amount of the Participant’s Elective Deferrals equals the Elective Deferrals of the Highly Compensated Participant having the next largest amount of Elective Deferrals
allocated. This process shall continue until the total amount of Excess Contributions has been distributed. However, in the event the Plan permits Catch-Up Contributions, then any “HCE” who is eligible to make Catch-Up Contributions
pursuant to Section 12.2(b) shall have any amount that would have otherwise been distributed pursuant to this Section recharacterized as a Catch-Up Contribution (up to the maximum catch-up dollar limitation). Any distribution and/or
recharacterization of Excess Contributions shall be made in the following order: 
 (1) With respect to the distribution of
Excess Contributions, such distribution: 
 (i) shall be made first from unmatched Elective Deferrals used in the ADP and,
thereafter, simultaneously from such Elective Deferrals which are matched and matching contributions which relate to such Elective Deferrals (if the matching contributions are used in the ADP). Matching contributions which are not used in the ADP
but which relate to Elective Deferrals that are distributed pursuant to this Subsection shall be forfeited unless the related matching contributions are distributed as Excess Aggregate Contributions pursuant to Section 12.7; 

(ii) shall be made from the Participant’s Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account before the Participant’s Roth Elective Deferral
Account, to the extent Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals were made for the Plan Year, unless the Participant elects otherwise; 
 (iii)
shall be adjusted for “income”; and 
 (iv) shall be designated by the Employer as a distribution of Excess
Contributions (and “income”). 
 (2) With respect to the recharacterization of Excess Contributions as after-tax
voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to (a) above, such recharacterized amounts: 
 (i) shall be deemed to have
occurred on the date on which the last of those Highly Compensated Participants with Excess Contributions to be recharacterized is notified of the recharacterization and the tax consequences of such recharacterization; 

(ii) shall not exceed the amount of Elective Deferrals on behalf of any Highly Compensated Participant for any Plan Year; 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 67 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (iii) shall be treated as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions for purposes of
Code Section 401(a)(4) and Regulation Section 1.401(k)-1(b). However, for purposes of Sections 4.3(f) and 9.2 (top-heavy rules), recharacterized Excess Contributions continue to be treated as Employer contributions that are Elective
Deferrals. Excess Contributions (and “income” attributable to such amounts) recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions shall continue to be nonforfeitable and subject to the same distribution rules provided for in
Section 12.2(d); and 
 (iv) are not permitted if the amount recharacterized plus after-tax voluntary Employee
contributions actually made by such Highly Compensated Participant exceed the maximum amount of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions (determined prior to application of Section 12.6) that such Highly Compensated Participant is permitted
to make under the Plan in the absence of recharacterization. 
 (3) Any distribution and/or recharacterization of less than the
entire amount of Excess Contributions shall be treated as a pro rata distribution and/or recharacterization of Excess Contributions and “income.” 
 (4) For the purpose of this Section, “income” means the income or losses allocable to Excess Contributions, which amount shall be determined and allocated, at the discretion of the
Administrator, using any of the methods set forth below. The method must be used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year. However, effective for Plan Years beginning in 2006 (or if
earlier, the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), “income” for the period between the end of the Plan Year and the date of the distribution (the “gap period”) is required to be distributed.

 (i) Method of allocating “income.” The Administrator may use any reasonable method for computing the
“income” allocable to Excess Contributions, provided that the method does not violate Code Section 401(a)(4), is used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year, and is used
by the Plan for allocating “income” to Participant’s Accounts. A Plan will not fail to use a reasonable method for computing the “income” allocable to Excess Contributions merely because the “income” allocable to
Excess Contributions is determined on a date that is no more than seven (7) days before the distribution. 
 (ii)
Alternative method of allocating Plan Year income. The Administrator may allocate “income” to Excess Contributions for the Plan Year by multiplying the “income” for the Plan Year allocable to the Elective Deferrals and
other amounts taken into account under this Section (including contributions made for the Plan Year), by a fraction, the numerator of which is the Excess Contributions for the Employee for the Plan Year, and the denominator of which is the sum of
the: 
 (1) Account balance attributable to Elective Deferrals and other contributions taken into account under this Section as
of the beginning of the Plan Year, and 
 (2) Any additional amount of such contributions made for the Plan Year. 

(iii) Safe harbor method of allocating gap period income. The Administrator may use the safe harbor method in this paragraph to
determine “income” on Excess Contributions for the gap period. Under this safe harbor method, “income” on Excess Contributions for the gap period is equal to ten percent (10%) of the “income” allocable to Excess
Contributions for the Plan Year that would be determined under paragraph (ii) above, multiplied by the number of calendar months that have elapsed since the end of the Plan Year. For purposes of calculating the number of calendar months that
have elapsed under the safe harbor method, a corrective distribution that is made on or before the fifteenth day of a month is treated as made on the last day of the preceding month and a distribution made after the fifteenth day of a month is
treated as made on the last day of the month. 
 (iv) Alternative method for allocating Plan Year and gap period income.
The Administrator may determine the allocable gain or loss for the aggregate of the Plan Year and the gap period by applying the alternative method provided by paragraph (ii) above to this aggregate period. This is accomplished by substituting
the “income” for the Plan Year and the gap period for the “income” for the Plan Year and by substituting the contributions taken into account under this Section for the Plan Year and the gap period for the contributions taken
into account under this Section for the Plan Year in determining the fraction that is multiplied by that “income.” 

(5) Excess Contributions shall be treated as Employer contributions for purposes of Code Sections 404 and 415 even if distributed from the
Plan. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 68 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (c) Corrective contributions. Notwithstanding the above, if the current year
testing method is used, then within twelve (12) months after the end of the Plan Year, the Employer may make a special Qualified Nonelective Contribution or Qualified Matching Contribution in accordance with one of the following provisions
which contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account or Qualified Matching Contribution Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant eligible to share in the allocation in accordance with such provision. If
the prior year testing method is used, then a Qualified Nonelective Contribution and a Qualified Matching Contribution may not be made to correct the tests set forth in Section 12.4. The Employer shall provide the Administrator with written
notification of the amount of the contribution being made and to which provision it relates. 
 (1) A Qualified Nonelective
Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated
Participant’s 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year. 
 (2) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution
shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year. However, for purposes of
this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 

(3) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy
one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita). 
 (4) A
Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita).
However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 

(5) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy
one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until one of the tests set forth
in Section 12.4 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum “annual addition” pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ADP test pursuant
to Section 12.4(g) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied. 
 (6) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution
shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly
Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum “annual addition” pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ADP test pursuant to Section 12.4(g) (Targeted Contributions). This
process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be eligible to share
in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 
 (7) A Qualified Matching Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly
Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Matching Contribution Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same
proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants. 
 (8) A Qualified Matching Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution
shall be allocated to the Qualified Matching Contribution Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the total Elective
Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be
disregarded. 
 (d) Excise tax after 2 1/2 months. Any Excess Contributions (and “income”) which are distributed
after 2 1/2 months after the end of the Plan Year shall be subject to the ten percent (10%) Employer excise tax imposed by Code Section 4979. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 69 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 12.6 ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS 

(a) ACP test. Except as otherwise provided herein, this subsection applies if the prior year testing method is elected in the
Adoption Agreement. The “Actual Contribution Percentage” (hereinafter ACP) for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees (hereinafter “HCEs”) for each Plan Year and the prior year’s ACP for Participants who were
Nonhighly Compensated Employees (hereinafter “NHCEs”) for the prior Plan Year must satisfy one of the following tests: 

(1) The ACP for a Plan Year for Participants who are “HCEs” for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year’s ACP for
Participants who were “NHCEs” for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or 
 (2) The ACP for a Plan Year for
Participants who are “HCEs” for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year’s ACP for Participants who were “NHCEs” for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ACP for Participants who are “HCEs”
does not exceed the prior year’s ACP for Participants who were “NHCEs” in the prior Plan Year by more than two (2) percentage points. 
 Notwithstanding the above, for purposes of applying the foregoing tests with respect to the first Plan Year (as defined in Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2(c)(2)) in which the Plan permits any
Participant to make Employee contributions, provides for matching contributions, or both, the ACP for the prior year’s “NHCEs” shall be deemed to be three percent (3%) unless the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to
use the current Plan Year’s ACP for these Participants. However, the provisions of this paragraph may not be used if the Plan is a successor plan or is otherwise prohibited from using such provisions pursuant to Regulation
Section 1.401(m)-2(c)(2). 
 (b) Current year testing method. Notwithstanding the preceding, if the current year
testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement, the ACP tests in (a)(1) and (a)(2) above shall be applied by comparing the current Plan Year’s ACP for Participants who are “HCEs” with the current Plan Year’s ACP (rather than
the prior Plan Year’s ACP) for Participants who are “NHCEs” for the current Plan Year. Once made, the Employer can elect prior year testing for a Plan Year only if the Plan has used current year testing for each of the preceding 5
Plan Years (or if lesser, the number of Plan Years the Plan has been in existence) or if, as a result of a merger or acquisition described in Code Section 410(b)(6)(C)(i), the Employer maintains both a plan using prior year testing and a plan
using current year testing and the change is made within the transition period described in Code Section 410(b)(6)(C)(ii). 

(c) Determination of “HCEs” and “NHCEs.” A Participant is an “HCE” for a particular Plan Year if the
Participant meets the definition of an “HCE” in effect for that Plan Year. Similarly, a Participant is an “NHCE” for a particular Plan Year if the Participant does not meet the definition of an “HCE” in effect for that
Plan Year. 
 (d) Calculation of ACP. For the purposes of this Section and Section 12.7, ACP for a specific group of
Participants for a Plan Year means the average of the “contribution percentages” (calculated separately for each Participant in such group). For this purpose, “contribution percentage” means the ratio (expressed as a percentage)
of the Participant’s “contribution percentage amounts” to the Participant’s 414(s) Compensation. The actual contribution ratio for each Participant and the ACP for each group, shall be calculated to the nearest one-hundredth of
one percent of the Participant’s 414(s) Compensation. 
 (e) Amounts included in ACP. “Contribution percentage
amounts” means the sum of (i) after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, (ii) Employer “matching contributions” made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2) (including Qualified Matching Contributions to the extent such
Qualified Matching Contributions are not used to satisfy the tests set forth in Section 12.4), (iii) Excess Contributions recharacterized as nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5, and
(iv) Qualified Nonelective Contributions, to the extent the Qualified Nonelective Contributions are not used to satisfy the tests set forth in Section 12.4 and do not exceed the limitations of the targeted contribution limitation of
Section 12.4(g). However, “contribution percentage amounts” shall not include “matching contributions” that are forfeited either to correct Excess Aggregate Contributions or due to Code Section 401(a)(4) and the
Regulations thereunder because the contributions to which they relate are Excess Deferrals, Excess Contributions, or Excess Aggregate Contributions. In addition, “contribution percentage amounts” may include Elective Deferrals provided the
ADP test in Section 12.4 is met before the Elective Deferrals are used in the ACP test and continues to be met following the exclusion of those Elective Deferrals that are used to meet the ACP test. 

(f) Participants taken into account. For purposes of this Section and Section 12.7, a Highly Compensated Participant and a
Nonhighly Compensated Participant shall include any Employee eligible to have “matching contributions” made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2) (whether or not a deferral election was made or suspended pursuant to Section 12.2(g))
allocated to such Participant’s account for the Plan Year or to make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 4.7 (whether or not after-tax voluntary Employee contributions are made) allocated to the
Participant’s account for the Plan Year. 
 (g) Timing of allocations. For purposes of determining the ACP test,
Employee contributions are considered to have been made in the Plan Year in which contributed to the Plan. “Matching contributions” and Qualified Nonelective Contributions will be considered made for a Plan Year if made no later the end of
the twelve (12) month period beginning on the date after the close of the Plan Year. 
 (h) Definition of “matching
contribution” and “employee contribution.” For purposes of this Section and Section 12.7, “matching contribution” means an Employer contribution made to the Plan, or to a contract described in Code
Section 403(b), on behalf of a Participant on account of a nondeductible voluntary “employee contribution” made by such Participant, or on account of a 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 70 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Participant’s elective deferrals under a plan maintained by the Employer. “Employee contribution” means any contribution (other than Roth Elective Deferrals) made to the Plan by or
on behalf of a Participant that is included in the Participant’s gross income in the year in which made and that is maintained under separate account to which earnings and losses are allocated. 

(i) Targeted matching contributions. Notwithstanding the preceding, for Plan Years beginning in 2006 (or if earlier, the date the
final 401(m) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), a “matching contribution” with respect to an Elective Deferral for a year is not taken into account in determining the ACP for “NHCEs” to the extent it exceeds the
greatest of: 
 (1) five percent (5%) of the Participant’s 414(s) Compensation for the year; 

(2) the Employee’s Elective Deferrals for the year; or 
 (3) the product of two (2) times the Plan’s “representative matching rate” and the Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the year. 

For purposes of this subsection, the Plan’s “representative matching rate” is the lowest “matching
rate” for any eligible “NHCE” among a group of “NHCEs” that consists of half of all eligible “NHCEs” in the Plan for the Plan Year who make Elective Deferrals for the Plan Year (or, if greater, the lowest
“matching rate” for all eligible “NHCEs” in the Plan who are employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year and who make Elective Deferrals for the Plan Year). 

For purposes of this subsection, the “matching rate” for an Employee generally is the “matching
contributions” made for such Employee divided by the Employee’s Elective Deferrals for the year. If the “matching rate” is not the same for all levels of Elective Deferrals for an Employee, the Employee’s “matching
rate” is determined assuming that an Employee’s Elective Deferrals are equal to six percent (6%) of 414(s) Compensation. 
 If the Plan provides a match with respect to the sum of the Employee’s after-tax voluntary Employee contributions and Elective Deferrals, then for purposes of this subsection, that sum is substituted
for the amount of the Employee’s Elective Deferrals and Employees who make either after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or Elective Deferrals are taken into account in determining the Plan’s “representative matching rate.”
Similarly, if the Plan provides a match with respect to the Employee’s after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, but not Elective Deferrals, then for purposes of this subsection, the Employee’s after-tax voluntary Employee contributions
are substituted for the amount of the Employee’s Elective Deferrals and Employees who make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions are taken into account in determining the Plan’s “representative matching rate.” 

(j) Aggregation with other plans. In the event that this Plan satisfies the requirements of Code Sections 401(a)(4), 401(m), or
410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such sections of the Code only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section shall be applied by determining the ACP of Employees as
if all such plans were a single plan. If more than ten percent (10%) of the Employer’s “NHCEs” are involved in a plan coverage change as defined in Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2(c)(4), then any adjustments to the
“NHCE’s” ACP for the prior year will be made in accordance with such Regulations, unless the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to use the current year testing method. Plans may be aggregated in order to satisfy Code
Section 401(m) only if they have the same Plan Year and use the same ACP testing method. 
 (k) ACP if multiple plans.
For the purposes of this Section, if an HCE is a Participant under two (2) or more plans (other than an employee stock ownership plan as defined in Code Section 4975(e)(7)) which are maintained by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer
to which “matching contributions,” nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions, or both, are made, all such contributions on behalf of such HCE shall be aggregated for purposes of determining such HCP’s actual contribution ratio.
However, if the plans have different plan years, then for purposes of Plan Years beginning prior to 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(m) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), this paragraph shall be applied by treating all
plans ending with or within the same calendar year as a single plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, certain plans shall be treated as separate if mandatorily disaggregated under Regulations under Code Section 401(m). 

(l) Disaggregation and otherwise excludable employees. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the provisions of
this Section and Section 12.7 may be applied separately (or will be applied separately to the extent required by Regulations) to each “plan” within the meaning of Regulation Section 1.401(m)-5. Furthermore, the provisions of Code
Section 401(m)(5)(C) may be used to exclude from consideration all Nonhighly Compensated Employees who have not satisfied the minimum age and service requirements of Code Section 410(a)(1)(A). For purposes of applying this provision, the
Administrator may use any effective date of participation that is permitted under Code Section 410(a) provided such date is applied on a consistent and uniform basis to all Participants. 

(m) “HCEs” as sole eligible employees. If, for the applicable year for determining the ACP of the “NHCEs” for a
Plan Year, there are no eligible “NHCEs,” then the Plan is deemed to satisfy the ACP test for the Plan Year. 
 (n)
Repeal of multiple use test. The multiple use test described in Regulation Section 1.401(m)-2 in effect prior to the enactment of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001 shall not apply for Plan Years beginning
after December 31, 2001. 
  
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary
Trust Company 

  
 71 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 12.7 ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS 

(a) Authority to correct. In the event the Plan does not satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6, the Administrator
shall adjust Excess Aggregate Contributions or, if the current year testing method is used, the Employer shall make contributions pursuant to the options set forth below or any combination thereof. 

(b) Corrective distribution or Forfeiture. On or before the close of the following Plan Year, the Highly Compensated Participant
having the largest allocation of “contribution percentage amounts” shall have a portion of such “contribution percentage amounts” (and “income” allocable to such amounts) distributed or, if non-Vested, Forfeited
(including “income” allocable to such Forfeitures) until the total amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions has been distributed, or until the amount of the Participant’s “contribution percentage amounts” equals the
“contribution percentage amounts” of the Highly Compensated Participant having the next largest amount of “contribution percentage amounts.” This process shall continue until the total amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions has
been distributed or forfeited. Any distribution and/or Forfeiture of “contribution percentage amounts” shall be made in the following order: 
 (1) Employer matching contributions distributed and/or forfeited pursuant to Section 12.5(b)(1); 
 (2) After-tax voluntary Employee contributions including Excess Contributions recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5(b)(2); 

(3) Unmatched Elective Deferrals used in the ACP and, thereafter, simultaneously from such Elective Deferrals used in the ACP which are
matched and matching contributions which relate to such Elective Deferrals (if the matching contributions are used in the ACP). Matching contributions which are not used in the ACP but which relate to Elective Deferrals that are distributed pursuant
to this Subsection shall be forfeited unless the related matching contributions are distributed as Excess Aggregate Contributions pursuant to this Subsection; 
 (4) To the extent Elective Deferrals are distributed pursuant to the preceding paragraph, then the distribution shall be made from the Participant’s Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account before the
Participant’s Roth Elective Deferral Account, to the extent Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals were made for the Plan Year, unless the Participant elects otherwise; and 
 (5) Remaining Employer matching contributions. 
 (c) Source of corrective
distribution or Forfeiture. Any distribution or Forfeiture of less than the entire amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions (and “income”) shall be treated as a pro rata distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions and
“income.” Distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be designated by the Employer as a distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions (and “income”). Forfeitures of Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be treated in
accordance with Section 4.3. However, no such Forfeiture may be allocated to a Highly Compensated Participant whose contributions are reduced pursuant to this Section. 
 (d) Determination of income or loss. For the purpose of this Section, “income” means the income or losses allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions, which amount shall be determined and
allocated, at the discretion of the Administrator, using any of the methods set forth in Section 12.5(b)(4) with respect to the calculation of “income” for Excess Contributions (applied by substituting Excess Contributions with Excess
Aggregate Contributions and by substituting amounts taken into account under the ACP test for amounts taken into account under the ADP test). However, effective with respect to Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2006 (or if earlier,
the date the final 401(m) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), “income” for the period between the end of the Plan Year and the date of the distribution (the “gap period”) is required to be distributed.

 (e) Treatment of excess amounts. Excess Aggregate Contributions attributable to amounts other than nondeductible
voluntary Employee contributions, including forfeited matching contributions, shall be treated as Employer contributions for purposes of Code Sections 404 and 415 even if distributed from the Plan. 

(f) Ordering of tests. The determination of the amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions with respect to any Plan Year shall be
made after first determining the Excess Contributions, if any, to be treated as nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions due to recharacterization for the plan year of any other qualified cash or deferred arrangement (as defined in Code
Section 401(k)) maintained by the Employer that ends with or within the Plan Year or which are treated as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions due to recharacterization pursuant to Section 12.5. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 72 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (g) Corrective Contributions. Notwithstanding the above, if the current year
testing method is being used, then within twelve (12) months after the end of the Plan Year, the Employer may make a special Qualified Nonelective Contribution or Employer matching contribution in accordance with one of the following provisions
which contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account or with respect to Employer matching contributions, to the Participant’s Account of each Nonhighly Compensated eligible to share in the allocation in
accordance with such provision. If the prior year testing method is used, then a Qualified Nonelective Contribution or an Employer matching contribution may not be made to correct the tests set forth in Section 12.6. The Employer shall provide
the Administrator with written notification of the amount of the contribution being made and to which provision it relates. 

(1) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy
one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly
Compensated Participants for such year. 
 (2) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly
Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s 414(s) Compensation for the
year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be
eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 
 (3) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf
of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita). 

(4) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy
one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita). However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year,
shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 
 (5) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be
made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly
Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum “annual addition”
pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ACP test pursuant to Section 12.6(i) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied.

 (6) A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient
to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until one of the tests
set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum “annual addition” pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ACP
test pursuant to Section 12.6(i) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Employees who are not
employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 
 (7) A
“matching contribution” may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated on behalf of each Nonhighly
Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants. The Employer shall designate, at the
time the contribution is made, whether the contribution made pursuant to this provision shall be a Qualified Matching Contribution or an Employer Nonelective Contribution. 
 (8) A “matching contribution” may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution
shall be allocated on behalf of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated
Participants. The Employer shall designate, at the time the contribution is made, whether the contribution made pursuant to this provision shall be a Qualified Matching Contribution or an Employer Nonelective Contribution. However, for purposes of
this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded. 

(h) Excise tax. Any Excess Aggregate Contributions (and “income”) which are distributed after 2 1/2 months after the end
of the Plan Year shall be subject to the ten percent (10%) Employer excise tax imposed by Code Section 4979. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 73 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 12.8 SAFE HARBOR PROVISIONS 

(a) Election of Safe Harbor. The provisions of this Section will apply if the Employer has elected, in the Adoption Agreement, to
use the “ADP test safe harbor” or “ACP test safe harbor.” If the Employer has elected to use the “ADP test safe harbor” for a Plan Year, then the provisions relating to the ADP test described in Section 12.4 and in
Code Section 401(k)(3) do not apply for such Plan Year. In addition, if the Employer has also elected to use the “ACP test safe harbor” for a Plan Year, then the provisions relating to the ACP test described in Section 12.6 and
in Code Section 401(m)(2) do not apply for such Plan Year. Furthermore, to the extent any other provision of the Plan is inconsistent with the provisions of this Section, the provisions of this Section will govern. 

(b) Definitions. For purposes of this Section, the following definitions apply: 

(1) “ACP test safe harbor” means the method described in subsection (d) below for satisfying the ACP test of Code
Section 401(m)(2). 
 (2) “ACP test safe harbor matching contributions” means “matching contributions”
described in subsection (d)(1). 
 (3) “ADP test safe harbor” means the method described in subsection (c) for
satisfying the ADP test of Code Section 401(k)(3). 
 (4) “ADP test safe harbor contributions” means
“matching contributions” and nonelective contributions described in subsection (c)(1) below. 
 (5)
“Compensation” means Compensation as defined in Section 1.14, except, for purposes of this Section, no dollar limit, other than the limit imposed by Code Section 401(a)(17), applies to the Compensation of a Nonhighly Compensated
Employee. 
 (6) “Eligible Participant” means a Participant who is eligible to make Elective Deferrals under the Plan
for any part of the Plan Year (or who would be eligible to make Elective Deferrals but for a suspension due to a hardship distribution described in Section 12.9 or to statutory limitations, such as Code Sections 402(g) and 415) and who is not
excluded as an “eligible Participant” under the 401(k) safe harbor elections in the Adoption Agreement. 
 (7)
“Matching contributions” means contributions made by the Employer on account of an “eligible Participant’s” Elective Deferrals. 
 (c) Satisfying ADP safe harbor. The provisions of this subsection apply for purposes of satisfying the “ADP test safe harbor.” 

(1) The “ADP test safe harbor contribution” is the contribution, elected by the Employer in the 401(k) Safe Harbor Provisions
Section of the Adoption Agreement, to be used to satisfy the “ADP test safe harbor.” However, if no contribution is elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer will contribute to the Plan for the Plan Year a “basic matching
contribution” on behalf of each Eligible Employee. The “basic matching contribution” is equal to (i) one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of an “eligible Participant’s” Elective Deferrals that do not
exceed three percent (3%) of the Participant’s “Compensation” for the Plan Year, plus (ii) fifty percent (50%) of the amount of the Participant’s Elective Deferrals that exceed three percent (3%) of the
Participant’s “Compensation” but do not exceed five percent (5%) of the Participant’s “Compensation.” If the Employer elects to use a period other than the Plan Year for determining a “basic matching
contribution” or an “enhanced matching contribution,” then such matching contribution with respect to a payroll period must be deposited into the Plan by the last day of the Plan Year quarter following the Plan Year quarter for which
the applicable Elective Deferrals are made. 
 (2) Except as provided in subsection (e) below, for purposes of the Plan, a
“basic matching contribution” or an “enhanced matching contribution” will be treated as a Qualified Matching Contribution and a safe harbor Nonelective Contribution will be treated as a Qualified Nonelective Contribution.
Accordingly, the “ADP test safe harbor contributions” will be fully Vested and subject to the distribution restrictions set forth in Section 12.2(d) (i.e., may generally not be distributed on account of hardship nor earlier than
separation from service, death, disability, an event described in Code Section 401(k)(1), or, in case of a profit sharing plan, the attainment of age 59 1/2). In addition, such contributions must satisfy the “ADP test safe harbor”
without regard to permitted disparity under Code Section 401(l). 
 (3) Notwithstanding the requirement that the Employer
make the “ADP test safe harbor contribution” to this Plan, if the Employer so elects in the Adoption Agreement, the “ADP test safe harbor contribution” will be made to the defined contribution plan indicated in the Adoption
Agreement. However, such contributions will be made to this Plan unless (i) each Employee eligible under this Plan is also eligible under the other plan, and (ii) the other plan has the same Plan Year as this Plan. 

(4) Within a reasonable period before the beginning of the Plan Year (or, in the year an Eligible Employee becomes a Participant, within a
reasonable period before the employee becomes eligible), the Employer will provide each “eligible Participant” a comprehensive notice of the Participant’s rights and obligations under the Plan, written in a manner calculated to be
understood by the average Participant. The determination of whether a notice satisfies the timing requirement of this paragraph is based on all of the relevant facts and circumstances. However, the timing requirement of the notice is deemed to be
satisfied if at least thirty (30) days, but not more than ninety (90) days, before the beginning of the Plan Year, the Employer will provide each “eligible Participant” a comprehensive notice of the Participant’s rights and
obligations under the Plan, written in a manner 
  
 © 2008
Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 74 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
calculated to be understood by the average Participant. However, if an Employee becomes eligible after the 90th day before the beginning of the Plan Year and does not receive the notice for that
reason, the notice must be provided no more than ninety (90) days before the Employee becomes eligible but not later than the date the Employee becomes eligible. 
 (5) In addition to any other election periods provided under the Plan, each “eligible Participant” may make or modify a deferral election during the thirty (30) day period immediately
following receipt of the notice described in subsection (4) above. Furthermore, if the “ADP test safe harbor” is a “matching contribution” each Eligible Employee must be permitted to elect sufficient Elective Deferrals to
receive the maximum amount of “matching contributions” available to the Participant under the Plan. 
 (d)
Application of “ACP test safe harbor.” The provisions of this subsection apply if the Employer has elected to satisfy the “ACP test safe harbor.” 
 (1) In addition to the “ADP test safe harbor contributions,” the Employer will make any “matching contributions” in accordance with elections made in the Adoption Agreement. Such
additional “matching contributions” will be considered “ACP test safe harbor matching contributions.” 
 (2)
Notwithstanding any election in the Adoption Agreement to the contrary, an “eligible Participant’s” Elective Deferrals in excess of six percent (6%) of “Compensation” may not be taken into account in applying “ACP
test safe harbor matching contributions.” In addition, any portion of an “ACP test safe harbor matching contribution” attributable to a discretionary “matching contribution” may not exceed four percent (4%) of an
“eligible Participant’s” “Compensation.” 
 (e) Application of ACP test. The Plan is required to
satisfy the ACP test of Code Section 401(m)(2), using the current year testing method, if the Plan permits after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or if matching contributions that do not satisfy the “ACP test safe harbor” may be
made to the Plan. In such event, only “ADP test safe harbor contributions” or “ACP test safe harbor contributions” that exceed the amount needed to satisfy the “ADP test safe harbor” or “ACP test safe harbor”
(if the Employer has elected to use the “ACP test safe harbor”) may be treated as Qualified Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions in applying the ACP test. In addition, in applying the ACP test, elective
contributions may not be treated as matching contributions under Code Section 401(m)(3). Furthermore, in applying the ACP test, the Employer may elect to disregard with respect to all “eligible Participants” (1) all
“matching contributions” if the Plan satisfies the “ACP test safe harbor” and (2) “matching contributions” that do not exceed four percent (4%) of each Participant’s “Compensation” if the Plan
satisfies the “ADP test safe harbor” using matching contributions (the “basic matching contribution” or the “enhanced matching contribution”) and the “ACP test safe harbor” is not satisfied. 

(f) Modification of Top-heavy rules. The top-heavy requirements of Code Section 416 and the Plan shall not apply in any Plan
Year beginning after December 31, 2001, in which the Plan consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Code Section 401(k)(12) and matching contributions with respect to which the requirements of Code
Section 401(m)(11) are met. 
 (g) Plan Year requirement. Except as provided in Regulation 1.401(k)-3(e), the Plan
will fail to satisfy the requirements of Code Section 401(k)(12) and this Plan Section for a Plan Year unless such provisions remain in effect for an entire twelve (12) month Plan Year. 

(h) Discretionary Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution. If the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to either not use the
401(k) Safe Harbor provisions or to utilize the discretionary Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution, then the Employer may elect to utilize the “ADP test safe harbor” provisions for a Plan Year after the Plan Year has commenced in
accordance with the provisions of this subsection. In order to utilize this subsection, the Employer must provide a notice in accordance with Section 12.8(c)(4) above, except that the notice must provide that the Employer may provide the Safe
Harbor Nonelective Contribution and that a supplemental notice will be provided at least thirty (30) days prior to the last day of the Plan Year if the Employer decides to make the Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution. In order to implement the
401(k) Safe Harbor provisions of this Section for the Plan Year, the Employer must (1) amend the Adoption Agreement to provide for the Safe Harbor Nonelective Contribution and, (2) provide a supplemental notice to Participants indicating
its intention to provide such safe harbor Nonelective Contribution. The supplemental notice indicating the Employer’s intention to make the safe harbor Nonelective Contribution must be provided no later than thirty (30) days prior to the
last day of the Plan Year for the Plan to qualify as a Safe Harbor 401(k) Plan. 
 (i) Elimination of safe harbor. The
Employer may amend the Plan during a Plan Year to reduce or eliminate “ADP test safe harbor contributions” for such Plan Year subject to the following provisions. 
 (1) An amendment may be made during a Plan Year to eliminate an “ADP test safe harbor contribution” that is a “matching contribution” provided a supplemental notice is given to all
“eligible Participants” explaining the consequences and effective date of the amendment, and that such “eligible Participants” have a reasonable opportunity (including a reasonable period) to change their Elective Deferral
elections. The amendment reducing or eliminating the “matching contribution” must be effective no earlier than the later of: (A) thirty (30) days after “eligible Participants” are given the supplemental notice or
(B) the date the amendment is adopted. “Eligible Participants” must be given a reasonable opportunity (and reasonable period) prior to the reduction or elimination of the “matching contribution” to change their Elective
Deferral elections. If the Employer amends the Plan to reduce 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 75 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
or eliminate the “matching contribution,” then except as provided in Code Section 401(k) and the Regulations thereunder, the Plan is subject to the ADP test and ACP test for the
entire Plan Year. 
 (2) An amendment may be made during a Plan Year to eliminate a safe harbor Nonelective Contribution for such
Plan Year only in accordance with the provisions of Regulation Section 1.401(k)-3(f) (i.e., upon termination of the Plan). 
 12.9
ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP 
 (a) Hardship events. If elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Administrator, at
the election of a Participant, shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer) to distribute to the Participant in any one Plan Year up to the lesser of (1) 100% of the Accounts as selected in the Adoption Agreement valued as of the last Valuation Date
or (2) the amount necessary to satisfy the immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant. For purposes of this Section, a Participant shall include an Employee who has an Account balance in the Plan. Any distribution made pursuant to
this Section shall be deemed to be made as of the first day of the Plan Year or, if later, the Valuation Date immediately preceding the date of distribution, and the Account from which the distribution is made shall be reduced accordingly. Effective
with respect to Plan Years beginning in 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), withdrawal under this Section shall be authorized only if the distribution is for one of the following or any
other item permitted under Regulation Section 1.401(k)-1(d)(3)(iii)(B) or any other federally enacted legislation: 
 (1)
Expenses for (or necessary to obtain) medical care that would be deductible under Code Section 213(d) (determined without regard to whether the expenses exceed 7.5% of adjusted gross income); 

(2) Costs directly related to the purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence for the Participant; 

(3) Payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Participant’s deceased parent, spouse, children or dependents (as defined in Code
Section 152, and, for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2005, without regard to Code Section 152(d)(1)(B)); 
 (4) Payment of tuition, related educational fees, and room and board expenses, for up to the next twelve (12) months of post-secondary education for the Participant, the Participant’s spouse,
children, or dependents (as defined in Code Section 152, and, for taxable years beginning on or after January 1, 2005, without regard to Code Section 152(b)(1), (b)(2), and (d)(1)(B)); 

(5) Payments necessary to prevent the eviction of the Participant from the Participant’s principal residence or foreclosure on the
mortgage on that residence; or 
 (6) Expenses for the repair of damage to the Participant’s principal residence that would
qualify for the casualty deduction under Code Section 165 (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income). 
 (b) Other limits and conditions. No distribution shall be made pursuant to this Section unless the Administrator, based upon the Participant’s representation and such other facts as are known
to the Administrator, determines that all of the following conditions are satisfied: 
 (1) The distribution is not in excess of
the amount of the immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant (including any amounts necessary to pay any federal, state, or local taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from the distribution); 

(2) The Participant has obtained all distributions, other than hardship distributions, and all nontaxable loans currently available under
all plans maintained by the Employer (to the extent the loan would not increase the hardship); 
 (3) The Plan, and all other
plans maintained by the Employer, provide that the Participant’s Elective Deferrals and nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions will be suspended, effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, for at least six
(6) months after receipt of the hardship distribution (twelve months for Plan Years beginning prior to 2002); and 
 (4)
Effective for Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 2002, the Plan, and all other plans maintained by the Employer, provide that the Participant may not make Elective Deferrals for the Participant’s taxable year immediately following
the taxable year of the hardship distribution in excess of the applicable limit under Code Section 402(g) for such next taxable year less the amount of such Participant’s Elective Deferrals for the taxable year of the hardship
distribution. 
 (c) Limitation on Account withdrawals. Notwithstanding the above, distributions from the
Participant’s Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account pursuant to this Section shall be limited solely to the Participant’s Elective Deferrals and any income
attributable thereto credited to the Participant’s Elective Deferral Account as of December 31, 1988. 
 (d) Other
limits and conditions. If elected in the Adoption Agreement, no distribution shall be made pursuant to this Section from the Participant’s Account until such Account has become fully Vested. Furthermore, if a hardship distribution is
permitted from more than one Account, the Administrator may determine any ordering of a Participant’s hardship distribution from such Accounts. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 76 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (e) Distribution rules apply. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section
shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code Sections 411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. 

ARTICLE XIII 
 SIMPLE 401(K) PROVISIONS 
 13.1 SIMPLE 401(k) PROVISIONS 

(a) If elected in the Adoption Agreement, this Plan is intended to be a SIMPLE 401(k) plan which satisfies the requirements of Code
Sections 401(k)(11) and 401(m)(10). 
 (b) The provisions of this Article apply for a “year” only if the following
conditions are met: 
 (1) The Employer adopting this Plan is an “eligible employer.” An “eligible employer”
means, with respect to any “year,” an Employer that had no more than 100 Employees who received at least $5,000 of “compensation” from the Employer for the preceding “year.” In applying the preceding sentence, all
employees of an Affiliated Employer and leased employees required to be treated as Employees under Code Section 414(n) are taken into account. 
 An “eligible employer” that has elected to use the SIMPLE 401(k) provisions but fails to be an “eligible employer” for any subsequent “year,” is treated as an “eligible
employer” for the two (2) “years” following the last “year” the Employer was an “eligible employer.” If the failure is due to any acquisition, disposition, or similar transaction involving an “eligible
employer,” the preceding sentence applies only if the provisions of Code Section 410(b)(6)(C)(i) are satisfied. 
 (2)
No contributions are made, or benefits accrued for services during the “year,” on behalf of any “eligible employee” under any other plan, contract, pension, or trust described in Code Section 219(g)(5)(A) or (B), maintained
by the Employer. 
 (c) To the extent that any other provision of the Plan is inconsistent with the provisions of this Article,
the provisions of this Article govern. 
 13.2 DEFINITIONS 
 (a) “Compensation” means, for purposes of this Article, the sum of the wages, tips, and other compensation from the Employer subject to federal income tax withholding (as described in Code
Section 6051(a)(3)) and the Employee’s salary reduction contributions made under this or any other 401(k) plan, and, if applicable, elective deferrals under a Code Section 408(p) SIMPLE plan, a SARSEP, or a Code Section 403(b)
annuity contract and compensation deferred under a Code Section 457 plan, required to be reported by the Employer on Form W-2 (as described in Code Section 6051(a)(8)). For Self-Employed Individuals, “compensation” means net
earnings from self-employment determined under Code Section 1402(a) prior to subtracting any contributions made under this Plan on behalf of the individual. “Compensation” also includes amounts paid for domestic service (as described
in Code Section 3401(a)(3)). The provisions of the plan implementing the limit on Compensation under Code Section 401(a)(17) apply to the “compensation” under this Article. 

(b) “Eligible employee” means, for purposes of this Article, any Participant who is entitled to make elective deferrals
described in Code Section 402(g) under the terms of the Plan. 
 (c) “Year” means the calendar year. 

13.3 CONTRIBUTIONS 
 (a)
Salary Reduction contributions  
 (1) Each “eligible employee” may make a salary reduction election to have
“compensation” reduced for the “year” in any amount selected by the Employee subject to the limitation in subsection (c) below. The Employer will make a salary reduction contribution to the Plan, as an Elective Deferral, in
the amount by which the Employee’s “compensation” has been reduced. 
 (2) The total salary reduction contribution
for the “year” for any Employee cannot exceed the limitation on salary reduction contributions in effect for the year. The limitation on salary reduction contributions is $6,000 for 2000, $6,500 for 2001, $7,000 for 2002 and increasing by
$1,000 for each year thereafter up to $10,000 for 2005 and later years. After 2005, the $10,000 limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of living increases under Code Section 408(p)(2)(E). Any such adjustments will be
in multiples of $500. Beginning in 2002, the amount of an Employee’s salary reduction contributions permitted for a “year” is increased for Employees aged 50 or over by the end of the “year” by the amount of allowable
Catch-Up Contributions. Allowable Catch-Up Contributions are $500 for 2002, increasing by $500 for each Year thereafter up to $2,500 for 2006. After 2006, the $2,500 limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living
increases under Code Section 414(v)(2)(C). Any such adjustments will be in multiples of $500. Catch-Up Contributions are otherwise treated the same as other salary reduction contributions. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 77 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) Other contributions  

(1) Matching contributions. Unless (2) below is elected, each “year” the Employer will make a matching contribution to the
Plan on behalf of each Employee who makes a salary reduction election under Section 13.3(a). The amount of the matching contribution will be equal to the Employee’s salary reduction contribution up to a limit of three percent (3%) of
the Employee’s “compensation” for the full “year.” 
 (2) Nonelective Contributions. For any
“year,” instead of a matching contribution, the Employer may elect to contribute a nonelective contribution of two percent (2%) of “compensation” for the full “year” for each “eligible employee” who
received at least $5,000 of “compensation” from the Employer for the “year.” 
 (c) Limitation on Other
Contributions  
 No Employer or Employee contributions may be made to this Plan for the “year”
other than salary reduction contributions described in Section 13.3(a), matching or nonelective contributions described in Section 13.3(b) and rollover contributions described in Regulation Section 1.402(c)-2, Q&A-1(a).
Furthermore, the provisions of Section 4.4 which implement the limitations of Code Section 415 apply to contributions made pursuant to this Section (other than Catch-Up Contributions). 

13.4 ELECTION AND NOTICE REQUIREMENTS 
 (a) Election period  
 (1) In addition to any other election periods
provided under the Plan, each “eligible employee” may make or modify a salary reduction election during the 60-day period immediately preceding each January 1st. 
 (2) For the “year” an Employee becomes eligible to make salary reduction contributions under this Article, the 60-day election period requirement of subsection (a)(1) is deemed satisfied if the
Employee may make or modify a salary reduction election during a 60-day period that includes either the date the Employee becomes eligible or the day before. 
 (3) Each “eligible employee” may terminate a salary reduction election at any time during the “year.” 
 (b) Notice requirements  
 (1) The Employer will notify each “eligible
employee” prior to the 60-day election period described in Section 13.4(a) that a salary reduction election or a modification to a prior election may be made during that period. 

(2) The notification described in (1) above will indicate whether the Employer will provide a matching contribution described in
Section 13.3(b)(1) or a two percent (2%) nonelective contribution described in Section 13.3(b)(2). 
 13.5 VESTING
REQUIREMENTS 
 All benefits attributable to contributions made pursuant to this Article are nonforfeitable at all times, and
all previous contributions made under the Plan are nonforfeitable as of the beginning of the Plan Year that the 401(k) SIMPLE provisions apply. 

13.6 TOP-HEAVY RULES 

The Plan is not treated as a top-heavy plan under Code Section 416 for any “year” for which the provisions of this Article
are effective and satisfied. 
 13.7 NONDISCRIMINATION TESTS 
 The Plan is treated as meeting the requirements of Code Sections 401(k)(3)(A)(ii) and 401(m)(2) for any “year” for which the provisions of this Article are effective and satisfied. Accordingly,
Sections 12.4, 12.5, 12.6 and 12.7 shall not apply to the Plan for any “year” for which this Article applies. 

ARTICLE XIV 

MULTIPLE EMPLOYER PROVISIONS 
 14.1 ELECTION AND OVERRIDING EFFECT 
 If any Participating Employers are not
Affiliated Employers, then the provisions of this Article XIV shall apply to each Participating Employer as of the Effective Date specified in its participation agreement and supersede any contrary provisions in the basic Plan document or the
Adoption Agreement. If this Article XIV applies, then the Plan shall be a multiple employer plan as described in Code Section 413(c). Otherwise, this Article XIV shall have no force or effect. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 78 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 14.2 DEFINITIONS 
 The following definitions shall apply to this Article XIV and shall supersede any conflicting definitions in the Plan: 
 (a) Employee. “Employee” means any common law employee, Self-Employed Individual, Leased Employee or other person the Code treats as an employee of a Participating Employer for purposes
of the Participating Employer’s qualified plan. Either the Adoption Agreement or a participation agreement to the Adoption Agreement may designate any Employee, or class of Employees, as not eligible to participate in the Plan. 

(b) Lead Employer. “Lead Employer” means the signatory Employer to the Adoption Agreement Execution Page, and does not
include any Related Employer or Participating Employer. The Lead Employer shall be a Participating Employer if the Lead Employer executes a participation agreement to the Adoption Agreement. The Lead Employer has the same meaning as the Employer for
purposes of making Plan amendments and other purposes regardless of whether the Lead Employer is also a Participating Employer under this Article XIV. 
 (c) Participating Employer. “Participating Employer” means an Employer which, with the consent of the Lead Employer, executes a participation agreement to the Adoption Agreement. A
Participating Employer is an Employer for all purposes of the Plan. 
 (d) Professional Employer Organization (PEO).
“Professional Employer Organization (PEO)” means an organization described in Rev. Proc. 2002-21 and any successor legislation or regulation. The Employer in its participation agreement shall specify whether the Lead Employer is a PEO,
and the term PEO shall be synonymous with the Lead Employer. If the Lead Employer is a PEO, then: 
 (1) Client
Organization. Each Participating Employer (other than the PEO) is a “Client Organization” (CO) as that term is used in Rev. Proc. 2002-21. 
 (2) Worksite Employee. A “Worksite Employee” means a person on the PEO’s payroll who receives amounts from the PEO for providing services to a CO pursuant to a service agreement
between the PEO and the CO. For all purposes of this Plan, a Worksite Employee shall be deemed to be the Employee of the CO for whom the Worksite Employee performs services, and not of the PEO. 

Nothing in this Section shall be treated as modifying the definition of “Employer” as shown in Article I. For example, a
controlled group of corporations that is unrelated to the Lead Employer may adopt the Plan, but that group shall be treated as one Employer to the extent required by the Plan and applicable regulations. 

14.3 PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER ELECTIONS 
 In the participation agreement, the Lead Employer shall specify whether a PEO may modify any elections, which elections the Participating Employer can modify, and any restrictions on the modifications.
Any such modification shall apply only to the employees of that Participating Employer. The Participating Employer shall make any such modification by selecting the appropriate option on its participation agreement to the Lead Employer’s
Adoption Agreement. To the extent that the Adoption Agreement does not permit modification of an election, any attempt by a Participating Employer to modify the election shall have no effect on the Plan and the Participating Employer is bound by the
Plan terms as selected by the Lead Employer. If a Participating Employer does not make any permissible participation agreement election modifications, then with regard to any election, the Participating Employer is bound by the Adoption Agreement
terms as completed by the Lead Employer. 
 14.4 HIGHLY COMPENSATED EMPLOYEE STATUS 

Status as a Highly Compensated Employee under Section 1.38 shall be determined separately with respect to each Participating
Employer. 
 14.5 TESTING 
 (a) Separate Status. The Plan Administrator shall perform the tests listed below separately for each Participating Employer, with respect to the Employees of that Participating Employer. For this
purpose, the Employees of a Participating Employer, and their allocations and accounts, shall be treated as though they were in separate plan. Any correction action, such as additional contributions or corrective distributions, shall only affect the
Employees of the Participating Employer. The tests subject to this separate treatment are: 
 (1) The Actual Deferral Percentage
test in Section 12.4. 
 (2) The Actual Contribution Percentage test in Section 12.6. 

(3) Nondiscrimination testing as described in Code Section 401(a)(4) and the applicable Treasury regulations. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 79 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (4) Coverage testing as described in Code Section 410(b) and the applicable
Treasury regulations. 
 (b) Joint Status. The following tests shall be performed for the plan as whole, without regard to
employment by a particular Participating Employer: 
 (1) Applying the Annual Addition limitation in Section 4.4.

 (2) Applying the Code Section 402(g) limitation in Section 12.2. 

(3) Applying the limit on catch-up contributions in Section 12.2. 
 14.6 TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS 
 The Plan will apply the provisions of Article IX
separately to each Participating Employer. The Plan will be considered separate plans for each Participating Employer and its Employees for purposes of determining whether such a separate plan is top-heavy under Section 9.1 or is entitled to
the exemption described in Section 12.8(f). For purposes of applying this Article to a Participating Employer, the Participating Employer and any business which is related to that Participating Employer shall be the “Employer” for
purposes of Section 9.1, and the terms “Key Employee” and “Non-Key Employee” shall refer only to the Employees of that Participating Employer. If such a Participating Employer’s separate plan is top-heavy, then:

 (a) Highest Contribution Rate. The Plan Administrator shall determine the highest Key Employee contribution rate under
Section 4.3(g) by reference to the Key Employees and their allocations in the separate plan of that Participating Employer; 

(b) Top-Heavy Minimum Allocation. The Plan Administrator shall determine the amount of any required top-heavy minimum allocation
separately for that separate plan under Section 4.3(f); and 
 (c) Plan Which Will Satisfy. The Participating
Employer shall make any additional contributions Section 4.3(k) requires. 
 14.7 COMPENSATION 

(a) Separate Determination. For the following purposes, a Participant’s Compensation shall be determined separately for each
Participating Employer: 
 (1) Nondiscrimination and coverage. All of the separate tests listed in Section 14.5(a).

 (2) Top-Heavy. Application of the top-heavy rules in Article IX. 

(3) Allocations. Application of allocations under Article IV. 

(4) HCE determination. The determination of an Employee’s status as a Highly Compensated Employee. 

(b) Joint Status. For all Plan purposes other than those described in section 14.7(a), including but not limited to determining the
Annual Additions limits in Section 4.4, Compensation includes all Compensation paid by or for any Participating Employer. 
 14.8
SERVICE 
 An Employee’s service includes all Hours of Service and Years of Service with any and all Participating
Employers. An Employee who terminates employment with one Participating Employer and immediately commences employment with another Participating Employer has not separated from service or had a severance from employment. 

14.9 REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS 
 If a Participant is a more than 5% Owner (under Code Section 416(i) and Section 6.8(e)(6)) of any Participating Employer for which the Participant is an Employee in the Plan Year the Participant
attains age 70 1/2, then the Participant’s Required Beginning Date under Section 6.8(e)(5) shall be the April 1 following the close of the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2. 

14.10 COOPERATION AND INDEMNIFICATION 
 (a) Cooperation. Each Participating Employer agrees to timely provide all information the Plan Administrator deems necessary to insure the Plan is operated in accordance with the requirements of
the Code and the Act and will cooperate fully with the Lead Employer, the Plan, the Plan fiduciaries and other proper representatives in maintaining the qualified status of the Plan. Such cooperation will include payment of such amounts into the
Plan, to be allocated to employees of the Participating Employer, which are reasonably required to maintain the tax-qualified status of the Plan. 
  

© 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 80 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 (b) Indemnity. Each Participating Employer will indemnify and hold harmless the
Plan Administrator, the Lead Employer and its subsidiaries; officers, directors, shareholders, employees, and agents of the Lead Employer; the Plan; the Trustees, Fiduciaries, Participants and Beneficiaries of the Plan, as well as their respective
successors and assigns, against any cause of action, loss, liability, damage, cost, or expense of any nature whatsoever (including, but not limited to, attorney’s fees and costs, whether or not suit is brought, as well as IRS plan
disqualifications, other sanctions or compliance fees or DOL fiduciary breach sanctions and penalties) arising out of or relating to the Participating Employer’s noncompliance with any of the Plan’s terms or requirements; any intentional
or negligent act or omission the Participating Employer commits with regard to the Plan; and any omission or provision of incorrect information with regard to the Plan which causes the Plan to fail to satisfy the requirements of a tax-qualified
plan. 
 14.11 TRANSITION RULES 
 If the Lead Employer is a PEO, and the Article XIV effective date is after the later of the Plan’s Effective Date or Restated Effective Date, then the following transition rules shall apply to the
Transition Year: 
 (a) Transition Year. The “Transition Year” is the Plan Year which includes the Article XIV
effective date. 
 (b) Lookback Year. The “Lookback Year” is the Plan Year immediately prior to the Transition
Year. 
 (c) Employee Status. Unless the PEO designates otherwise in an addendum, for Plan Years ending prior to the
Transition Year the Worksite Employees shall be deemed to be Employees of the PEO, except as otherwise specified in this Article XIV. 
 (d) Distribution. The limitation of Article VI shall not prohibit making any distribution required by Rev. Proc. 2002-21. 
 (e) Top-heavy. The Determination Date under Section 9.2(c) for the Transition Year shall be the last day of the Transition Year. In the Adoption Agreement, the PEO shall specify whether
Employer Contributions for Worksite Employees for Plan Years prior to the Transition Year shall be treated as contributions by the PEO, or as contributions by the CO. If the contributions are treated as PEO contributions, then the Plan Administrator
shall disregard account balances relating to those contributions (i.e., Employer contribution account balances prior to the Transition Year and earnings thereon) in determining whether the separate plan of a Participating Employer is top-heavy under
Section 14.6. 
 (f) ADP/ACP Testing. The Plan Administrator will treat the Transition Year as the first Plan Year of
the Plan for purposes of ADP and ACP testing of a CO’s separate plan under Section 14.5. 
 (g) HCE
Determination. If the Worksite Employee performed services for the CO during the Lookback Year, then only for purposes of determining HCE status, the Worksite Employee shall be deemed to be an employee of the CO for the Transition Year and the
CO shall be deemed to have paid to the Worksite Employee any Compensation the PEO paid to the Worksite Employee during the Transition Year. 
 (h) Required Minimum Distributions. The following rules shall apply with regard to each Worksite Employees who, prior to January 1, 2004: (i) attained age 70 1/2, (ii) was still on
the payroll of the PEO, and (iii) had not commenced receiving required minimum distributions under Section 6.8. 
 (1)
Determination of 5% owner status. The Plan Administrator shall determine whether such a Worksite Employee is a more than 5% owner of under Section 6.8(e)(6) is based on whether the Worksite Employee is a more than 5% owner on the first
day of the Transition Year. Alternatively, by an addendum hereto, the PEO can specify that the determination shall be made with reference to the Plan Year ending in the calendar year the Worksite Employee attained age 70 1/2. 

(2) Required Beginning Date. The Required Beginning Date under Section 6.8(e)(5) of a more than 5% owner under paragraph
(1) shall be April 1, 2005. 
 14.12 INVOLUNTARY TERMINATION 

Unless the Lead Employer provides otherwise in an addendum hereto, the Lead Employer shall have the power to terminate the participation
of any Participating Employer (hereafter “Terminated Employer”) in this Plan. If and when the Lead Employer wishes to exercise this power, the following shall occur: 
 (a) Notice. The Lead Employer shall give the Terminated Employer a notice of the Lead Employer’s intent to terminate the Terminated Employer’s status as a Participating Employer of the
Plan. The Lead Employer will provide such notice not less than 30 days prior to the date of termination unless the Lead Employer determines that the interest of Plan Participants requires earlier termination. 

(b) Spin-off. The Lead Employer shall establish a new defined contribution plan, using the provisions of this Plan with any
modifications contained in the Terminated Employer’s participation agreement, as a guide to establish a new defined contribution plan (the “Spin-off Plan”). The Lead Employer will direct the Trustee to transfer (in accordance with the
rules of Code Section 414(l) and the provisions of Section 8.3) the Accounts of the Employees of the Terminated Employer to the Spin-off Plan. The Terminated 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 81 

 Volume Submitter Plan 
  

 
Employer shall be the Employer, Plan Administrator, and Sponsor of the Spin-off Plan. The Trustee of the Spin-off Plan shall be the person or entity designated by the Terminated Employer, or, in
the absence of any such designation, the chief executive officer of the Terminated Employer. If state law prohibits the Terminated Employer from serving as Trustee, the Trustee is the president of a corporate Terminated Employer, the managing
partner of a partnership Terminated Employer, the managing member of a limited liability company Terminated Employer, the sole proprietor of a proprietorship Terminated Employer, or in the case of any other entity type, such other person with title
and responsibilities similar to the foregoing. However, the Lead Employer shall have the option to designate an appropriate financial institution as Trustee instead if necessary to protect the interest of the Participants. The Lead Employer shall
have the authority to charge the Terminated Employer or the Accounts of the Employees of the Terminated Employer a reasonable fee to pay the expenses of establishing the Spin-off Plan. 

(c) Alternatives. The Terminated Employer, in lieu of creation of the Spin-off plan under (b) above, has the option to elect
one of two other alternatives to effect the termination of its status as a Participating Employer. To exercise this option, the Terminated Employer must inform the Lead Employer of its choice, and must supply any reasonably required documentation as
soon as practical. If the Lead Employer has not received notice of a Terminated Employer’s exercise of this option within five (5) days prior to termination, the Lead Employer can choose to disregard the exercise and proceed with the
Spin-off. The Terminated Employer’s alternatives are: 
 (1) Distribution. If the Terminated Employer elects this
option, the Plan Administrator shall distribute the account balances of the Employees of the Terminated Employer as soon as practical after termination. However, if such an Employee is also employed by another Participating Employer, the Plan
Administrator shall not distribute that Employee’s balance but shall continue to hold such account balance pursuant to the terms of the Plan. All account balances distributed under this paragraph shall be 100% vested. However, no such
distribution can violate the restrictions of Section 6.5 or Section 6.6. If this Plan includes Elective Deferrals or other restricted balances under Section 12.2, the termination of the Participating Employer’s sponsorship of
this Plan shall be deemed to be a termination of the Plan and the Plan Year as to the Employees received distributions under this paragraph; however, the Terminated Employer must deliver to the Lead Employer or Plan Administrator such documentation
or other assurances that the Plan Administrator shall reasonably require to affirm that the Terminated Employer has neither established nor will establish an alternative defined contribution plan in violation of Section 12.2. 

(2) Transfer. If the Terminated Employer selects this option, the Plan Administrator shall transfer (in accordance with the rules
of Code Section 414(l) and the provisions of Section 4.7) the accounts of the Employees of the Terminated Employee to a qualified plan the Terminated Employer maintains. To exercise this option, the Terminated Employer must deliver to the
Lead Employer or Plan Administrator in writing the name and other relevant information of the transferee plan and must provide such assurances that the Plan Administrator shall reasonable require to demonstrate that the transferee plan is a
qualified plan. 
 (d) Participants. The Employees of the Terminated Employer shall cease to be eligible to accrue
additional benefits under the Plan with respect to Compensation paid by the Terminated Employer, effective as of the date of termination. To the extent that these Employees have accrued but unpaid contributions as of the date of termination, the
Terminated Employer shall pay such amounts to the Plan or the Spin-off Plan no later than thirty (30) days after the date of termination, unless the Terminated Employer effectively selects the Transfer option under subsection (2) above.

 (e) Consent. By its signature on the participation agreement, the Terminated Employer specifically consents to the
provisions of this Article and agrees to perform its responsibilities with regard to the Spin-off Plan, if necessary. 
 14.13 VOLUNTARY
TERMINATION 
 A Participating Employer (hereafter “Withdrawing Employer”) may voluntarily withdraw from
participation in this Plan at time. If and when a Withdrawing Employer wishes to withdraw, the following shall occur: 
 (a)
Notice. The Withdrawing Employer shall inform the Lead Employer and the Plan Administrator of its intention to withdraw from the Plan. The Withdrawing Employer must give the notice not less than thirty (30) days prior to the effective
date of its withdrawal. 
 (b) Procedure. The Withdrawing Employer and the Lead Employer shall agree upon procedures for
the orderly withdrawal of the Withdrawing Employer from the plan. Such procedures may include any of the optional distribution, spin-off, or transfer options described in Section 14.12. 

(c) Costs. The Withdrawing Employer shall bear all reasonable costs associated with withdrawal and transfer under this section.

 (d) Participants. The Employees of the Withdrawing Employer shall cease to be eligible to accrue additional benefits
under the Plan as to Compensation paid by the Withdrawing Employer, effective as of the effective date of withdrawal. To the extent that such Employees have accrued but unpaid contributions as of the effective date of withdrawal, the Withdrawing
Employer shall contribute such amounts to the Plan or the Spin-off Plan promptly after the effective date of withdrawal, unless the Accounts are transferred to a qualified plan the Withdrawing Employer maintains. 

 
 © 2008 Vanguard Fiduciary Trust Company 

  
 82

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00192-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00192-of-00352.parquet"}]]